Man Enu

Wilcom ES
Version 9
User Manual
Copyright 1990-2004 by Wilcom International Pty Ltd. All rights reserved. No parts of this publication or the accompanying software may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to any third party without the express written permission of: Wilcom International Pty Ltd. (A.B.N. 62 062 621 943) 146-156 Wyndham Street, Alexandria (Sydney) New South Wales, 2015, Australia PO Box 581, Alexandria, 1435 Phone: +61 2 9578 5100 Fax: +61 2 9578 5108 Email: wilcom@wilcom.com.au Web: http://www.wilcom.com.au The Stitch Processor (SP) portion of this product is protected by the following patents: US Patent N 4,821,662 European Patent N 0221163 Japanese Patent N 2029491 Curve Line Fill Stitching in this product is protected by US Patent No. 6,587,745. TrueView and Point & Stitch are trademarks of Wilcom International Pty Ltd. Portions of the imaging technology of this product are copyrighted by AccuSoft Corporation. The EPS File Import/Export Convertor used in this product is copyrighted by Access Softek, Inc. All rights reserved. Wilcom International Pty Ltd. makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents of this publication and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantable quality or fitness for any particular purpose. Further, Wilcom International Pty Ltd. reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes in it from time to time without obligation of Wilcom International Pty Ltd. to notify any person or organization of such revisions or changes. The screen illustrations in this publication are intended to be representations, not exact duplicates of the screen layouts generated by the software. Subject to any warranties implied by law which are incapable of limitation or exclusion, the software is purchased as is without any warranty as to its performance, accuracy, freedom from error or to any results generated through its use and without any implied warranty of merchantability or of fitness for any particular purpose for which the software is being acquired. The purchaser relies on its own skill and judgement in selecting the software for its own use and assumes the entire risk as to the results and performance of the software. Wilcom International Pty Ltd. specifically does not warrant that the software will meet the purchasers requirements or operate without interruption or error.
P/N W2954
Rev 2
Feb 2004
Introduction
Welcome to Wilcom ES V9, the leading software application for embroidery industry design and manufacture. Wilcom ES is a suite of CAD/CAM tools providing a fast, flexible way to create, edit, organize and stitch out embroidery designs. It is designed to support the high productivity and efficiency requirements of professional digitizers. It also allows novices and less frequent users to become productive digitizers. Wilcom ES lets you edit designs at any stage, or adapt existing designs for use with different fabrics and machines.
First-time users
Wilcom ES provides a wide range of design capabilities, allowing you to create, edit, and output embroidery designs with ease. Before you begin working with the product, read Introduction to Embroidery Digitizing. This chapter presents an overview of the basic concepts of digitizing with Wilcom ES and provides important guidelines on how to use the software for best results. You should also familiarize yourself with Basic Procedures. This chapter explains how to start the application and how to use some of the essential tools and features that Wilcom ES provides. The chapters Viewing Designs and Selecting Design Objects contain essential information about the many ways of viewing designs in Wilcom ES as well as selecting and manipulating design objects.
Upgrade users
Wilcom ES V9 has many new and expanded features which make digitizing easier and more efficient. Read the chapter Introduction to Embroidery Digitizing to familiarize yourself quickly with the scope of these improvements.
V9
Wilcom ES Online Manual
Security devices
All product models and optional extra capabilities are controlled by a security device or dongle attached to your computer.
new USB Port Dongle
new Parallel Port Dongle
Security codes enable access to features within the software. You need to be able to identify your systems access codes, and enter new codes for upgrades. Upgrades are easily made by entering new access codes or replacing the dongle. See Entering security codes for details. See also the Installation Instructions. Warning The dongle is the most important and valuable part of your system and should be treated with care. Always store it in a safe place when it is not in use. If it is faulty, it may be exchanged. If it is physically damaged, it can be sent to Wilcom and a replacement purchased for the cost of the dongle alone. However, in case of loss or theft, you will need to purchase an entire Wilcom ES replacement system. For this reason, you should consider insuring your dongle.
Wilcom ES product models

The Wilcom ES V9 range includes five distinct product models described below. Each product model can be further enhanced by a number of cost options. See Product Differentiation Table for details.
ES21L Lettering
The sophisticated yet easy-to-use ES21L lettering system is designed for busy companies applying custom lettering to catalog designs. Choose from a large range of standard alphabets. Produce monograms or use the advanced Envelope option to shape letters in special ways. In Reshape mode you can modify individual letters to match any obscure font requirements.
V9
You can scale designs and even edit individual stitches, fine-tuning to a perfect finish.
ES21E Editing
ES21E has all the versatility of ES21L but also enables precision editing. You can modify embroidery designs as well as combine them. Elements can be reshaped and transformed interactively. Change between Satin, Zigzag and Tatami, as well as adjust stitch density over the whole or selected parts of a design. You can also resequence design elements and add or adjust underlays as required.
ES21D Digitizing
ES21D is a professional system which has all the editing and lettering features of ES21E plus powerful digitizing features. Create embroidery shapes with turning or parallel stitching. Enjoy advanced stitch types like Program Split or Motif Fill. Use scanned or imported artwork to digitize designs on-screen or using a digitizing tablet. Or take existing bitmap images and generate stitches in a few simple steps using the powerful Smart Design feature.
ES45 Creative Digitizing

ES45 is a popular production digitizing system. In addition to the digitizing, editing and lettering capabilities of ES21D, ES45 provides advanced digitizing features such as Florentine Effect, Trapunto, and 3D Warp. Create, mirror and scale motifs. Eliminate extra trims and digitizing time with Branching. Generate line stitching from photographs. Appliqu is made easy with Auto Appliqu. With ES45 you can even save your favorite styles.
ES 65 Advanced Digitizing
ES65 is the top of the range Wilcom ES CAD/CAM product. It has all the features of ES45 and more. There are specialized digitizing tools for circles, rings and stars, plus a wide range of artistic, decorative fill patterns that only come with this model. Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize shapes automatically without using manual input methods. Use Shaping Tools to separate or join overlapping object in many ways. Create your own alphabets. Create different embroidery types and effects such as Chenille as well as traditional cross stitch. ES65 comes with Design Workflow, Wilcoms professional embroidery management system. The system is designed to efficiently store, organize, protect, and better utilize your design collection. Based on Microsoft SQL database software and Windows 2000/NT network servers, it offers robust, reliable storage and data access security. With its new workflow support
V9
Design Workflow becomes an essential tool for the whole company from sales though design, sampling, and production, through to senior management. It also provides a solid basis for other enterprise Internet and Intranet applications.
Printed documentation
Wilcom ES provides you with a number of ways to access information about the software and how to use it. With your Wilcom ES installation CD you will have received the following printed documentation Installation Instructions, Release Notes, Keyboard Shortcuts, Command Reference, Digitizer Menu Chart, and User Manual.
Installation Instructions
The Installation Instructions explain how to set up Wilcom ES on your system.
Release Notes
The Release Notes provide you with information about system requirements for your Wilcom ES installation, details of new features and major and minor improvements to the software release, as well as known limitations and workarounds. A short-form Product Differentiation Table is also provided, listing all new and improved features by product model. For a complete table, refer to Product Differentiation Table.
Keyboard Shortcuts
The Keyboard Shortcuts table lists all keyboard shortcuts available in ES Designer. This guide can be kept near your computer as a convenient reference. A copy of the keyboard shortcuts is included in this manual. See Quick Reference Guide for details.
Command Reference
All commands in ES Designer can be accessed via the various menus, both dropdown and popup, toolbar icons, menu chart (for use with digitizing tablets), as well as access and shortcut keys. Many commands can be accessed by more than one method. The Command Reference lets you see at a glance which method best suits you.
Digitizer Menu Chart

The menu chart needs to be placed on your digitizer tablet if you are using a digitizer. It contains command icons which you select with the digitizer
V9
puck. A copy of the menu chart is included in this manual. See Menu Chart for details.
User Manual
The Wilcom ES User Manual is complete with hundreds of step-by-step instructions together with samples and screen images. These are intended to be used as a reference when using the application, not as a tutorial. It documents the following product components:
! ES Designer ! ES Design Explorer.

ES Machine Manager, and the ES Chenille, ES Schiffli, and ES Cross Stitch Options are documented in separate supplements. The first four chapters of the manual contain information relevant to all Wilcom ES product models. To identify sources of information relevant to your specific model and any options you may have selected, see Product Differentiation Table. Note The hard copy manual is current as of V9.0. For information about software releases subsequent to this, refer to the online manual and relevant release notes.
Online information
Online documentation is provided in two formats MS Online Help and Adobe Acrobat.
Using online help

Online Help can be accessed from the Help menu in Wilcom ES. Online help provides quick access to general information on ES Designer features and step-by-step instructions. Context Sensitive help is currently available for dialog boxes only. Simply press 1 to invoke relevant help.
To use online help

1 2 Select Help > Help Topics. The ES Designer Help window opens. Click Contents to display the main list of topics. Topics are grouped under high-level headings with book icons.
V9
Double-click a book to view the list of topics, then double-click a topic. Tip Alternatively, click Find and enter keywords to search on a specific subject.
Viewing the online manual

An electronic copy of this user manual is also provided on your installation CD. You can read this manual online, using Adobe Acrobat Reader. This application is supplied with your ES Designer software. Using the online manual you can quickly search for the information you need, using standard Adobe Acrobat Reader features. Note See the Installation Instructions for details of how to install Adobe Acrobat Reader from CD ROM.
To view the online manual
! Select Help > Online Manual.

Note If ES Designer is not running, you can open the online manual directly from Windows Explorer. To do this, navigate to the ESWin\Bin folder, and double-click DSGNEDIT.PDF.
Linking to the Wilcom website

You can access sales and support information about the products easily from within the software.
To link to the Wilcom website
! Select Help > Wilcom Web Page.

You are directly connected to the Wilcom homepage at http://www.wilcom.com.au/ Note You must have a correctly configured web browser on your system together with web access.
V9
Conventions used in the manual

Commands
In this manual, commands on a submenu are referred to by both the submenu and command name. For example the command Open on the submenu Embroidery Disk is referred to as Embroidery Disk > Open.
Dialog boxes
Dialog boxes are referred to as dialogs and are shown in the manual only if they provide important information on using Wilcom ES. The screen images provided may differ slightly to the layouts generated by the software.
Mouse conventions
Instruction Click Right-click Double-click Shift-click Click OK Symbol [ ] . V+[ [ or j Description Click the left mouse button. Click the right mouse button. Click the mouse button twice without moving the mouse. Hold down Shift and click a mouse button. Click OK with the mouse or press the Enter key on the keyboard to complete the action.
Keyboard conventions
Shortcut C+S C+V+H Description While holding down the Control key (Ctrl), press the lowercase letter S key. While holding down the Control key (Ctrl), press Shift and the H key.
For a complete list of keyboard shortcuts, see Quick Reference Guide.
V9
PART I
OBJECT-BASED EMBROIDERY
Designs created in ES Designer are composed of embroidery objects. They are called objects because they are discrete entities which can be manipulated independently of each other. Each object has certain defining characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. The most important property of an embroidery object is its stitch type.
Basic procedures
This section describes how to start ES Designer, how to open designs, start new ones and use the basic commands. It also explains how to turn on and off the grid and measure distances on-screen. You will also find out how to select machine formats for different output as well as how to save designs. The section also explains the procedure for entering security codes. See Basic Procedures for details.
Viewing designs
This section explains the design viewing modes available in ES Designer as well as the various design viewing settings. It also describes how to view designs by traveling through the stitching sequence. Design colorways are explained, as well as how to obtain and modify design information. See Viewing Designs for details.
V9
Selecting design objects

This section describes how to select objects using the selection tools and keyboard. It also shows how to select while traveling through designs or by using the Color-Object List. See Selecting Design Objects for details.
V9
Chapter 1
Introduction to Embroidery Digitizing
Embroidery digitizing consists of turning the basic shapes of a design into embroidery objects. Different tools are suited to different shapes. You can digitize them manually by marking reference points along an outline, or by using smart tools which transform shapes automatically into embroidery objects.
Planning designs
High quality embroidery starts with good design and forward planning.
Artwork
Artwork in both bitmap and vector formats can be inserted, pasted or scanned into ES Designer for use as digitizing backdrops. Unless you are an experienced digitizer, do not use complicated artwork. Possible sources include:
! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
books of embroidery patterns childrens story books printed table cloths or tea towels business cards, post cards and wrapping paper clipart libraries from your word processing or graphics programs internet or CD clipart libraries samples in the Wilcom ES Design folder original artwork e.g. childrens drawings.
Note Be sure to check the copyright of any images you have not created yourself. If unsure, contact the company and seek their permission.
V9
10
Design shapes and stitching sequence

Before digitizing, you need to analyze and plan design shapes and stitching sequence carefully. Design shapes need to be clearly defined to make them easy to embroider. The best shapes have relatively constant width, with smooth edges, no sharp turns and no small, protruding details. The digitizing sequence defines the stitching sequence, or order in which shapes are stitched out. Of course you can always change the sequence to improve the stitchout for example, to minimize color changes. Details should be stitched last.
1
details last
2 3 4
Completed design
Good design is enhanced by the use of the correct backing, tension and a good quality embroidery machine. Keep the following points in mind when digitizing your design and assessing the final output:
design looks good shapes, colors, balance
details are clearly defined
shapes are filled with correct fill and outline stitches
stitches are angled to match shapes
lettering is clear and easy to read
The stitched-out design should also have the following characteristics:
! The design stitches out efficiently on the machine. ! Stitches are neat, smooth and even. ! Shapes are stitched correctly no unwanted gaps.
V9
11
! The fabric has not puckered around the stitched areas. ! The design is free of loose ends.
Digitizer tablet
If you are using a digitizer tablet, you need to prepare an enlargement drawing from the artwork and place it on the digitizer tablet. After registering the drawing, you digitize it using the digitizer puck. See Using Digitizing Tablets for details.
Object-based embroidery
Designs created in ES Designer are composed of embroidery objects. They are called objects because they are discrete entities which can be manipulated independently of each other. Each object has certain defining characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. The most important property of an embroidery object is its stitch type.
Viewing designs
ES Designer provides many viewing modes to make it easier to work with your designs. Zoom in on an area to see more detail, view the design at actual size, or view a thumbnail of the whole design in a separate Overview window. Pan the design to move it across the design window instead of scrolling, and quickly change between one view and the last.
V9
Chapter 1
12
Show or hide various design elements with the available display settings. You can show or hide outlines, needle penetration points, connectors, stitch angles, machine function symbols and the stitches themselves. You can also view designs in TrueView. When working with embroidery designs, you need to understand the stitching sequence. Check this by traveling through the design stitch-by-stitch. You can also check it by slowly redrawing the design on-screen. You can also preview a design in different colors on different fabrics by selecting from among any number of pre-defined colorways.
Normal view
ES Designer gives you comprehensive information about your designs. Even before opening a design, you can check the software version number and other design TrueView information for EMB files directly from Windows Explorer. View stitching details in the Design Properties dialog. The production worksheet also provides essential production information, including a design preview, the size of the design, color sequence and any special instructions.
Selecting design objects

ES Designer provides various ways to select the objects in an embroidery design. Modify the design as a whole or select individual objects for more precise modification. The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects and colors in designs and access their properties. Use it to group and ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide objects as well.
Digitizing designs
In ES Designer, you build designs from basic shapes or embroidery objects. These are like ordinary drawing objects in that they have certain defining characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. They also have properties unique to embroidery such as stitch type and density.
Digitizing methods
The process of creating embroidery objects on-screen is called digitizing. Like the creation of designs in graphics applications, this involves the use of
V9
13
input or digitizing tools. These are similar to drawing tools except that the end result is an embroidery rather than drawing object.
large irregular shape (Complex Fill) line (Run) narrow column (Input C) column of varying width (Input A) turning stitches (Input B)
Different tools are suited to creating different shapes or design elements. There are specific tools for digitizing larger complex shapes, asymmetrical columns of turning stitches, columns of varying width, columns of fixed width, lines, and even individual stitches.
Fill and outline stitches

The most important property of all embroidery objects is the stitch type. The software uses object outlines and associated stitch type to generate stitches. Whenever you reshape, transform or scale an object, stitches are regenerated according to its stitch type and settings.
Run for lines Tatami for large shapes
Satin for narrow shapes
Stitch types divide broadly into two categories outline and fill. Satin fills are generally suited to columns and borders. Tatami stitch is used to fill larger shapes with solid fields of stitching. Run stitch, Backstitch, and Stemstitch are considered both digitizing methods and stitch types. Both Zigzag and E Stitch are used as outline stitches. Zigzag is frequently used for tacking down appliqus, while E Stitch is used as the cover stitch. Both can also be used for decorative effect.
V9
Chapter 1
14
Colorways and thread charts

When digitizing, you select thread colors for each object you create from the color palette. This contains a selection of thread colors tailored for each design or color scheme.
Colorway 1 Colorway 2
The particular colorway represents the actual thread colors in which a design will be stitched. In fact you can define multiple color schemes and switch between them. This has important implications for sales presentations as well as production. You can also print multiple colorways, design backgrounds, and icons of color blocks together with the production worksheet. For each colorway you define, you can select colors from commercial thread charts or define your own. Search for particular threads by various criteria. Automatic thread color matching helps you locate thread colors based on closest match across one or several thread charts. You can also match thread colors from imported graphics vector or bitmap.
1 2 3 4 5
Connecting embroidery objects

Connectors link objects in a design. They can be run stitches or jumps. You can use automatic settings to generate connectors, trims and tie-offs, or add them manually.
connector
trim
stitching starts
V9
15
Travel runs are typically used to connect segments within filled objects. Adjust travel run length to reduce stitch count. Apply Trapunto effect to force underlying travel runs to the edges of an object so that they cant be seen through open stitching.
Improving stitch quality

ES Designer provides many techniques for achieving smooth, even placement of stitches, and eliminating gaps in your designs. Strengthen and stabilize designs with automatic underlay.
with underlay
without underlay
Compensate for fabric stretch with pull compensation. Reduce stitch bunching with stitch shortening and fractional spacing. Adjust stitch density for more efficient production and remove small stitches automatically. Control corner stitching with Smart Corners and fine-tune handling of long stitches with Auto Split and Auto Jump. Set automatic start and end points.
with no effects
with Auto Split
with Auto Jump
These features are all object properties and can be applied, removed or modified at will. See Improving Stitch Quality for details.
Digitizing with artwork

There are two broad categories of artwork file, both of which can be imported into ES Designer for use as digitizing backdrops vector and
V9
Chapter 1
16
bitmap. To create good quality embroidery, you need to choose or create suitable artwork of either format.
Digitizing with vector drawings

ES Designer provides tools to draw shapes and outlines directly on screen. Alternatively, insert or paste vector drawings created in third-party drawing packages for use as digitizing backdrops. Scale and transform them in the same way as embroidery objects. You can also select colors for drawing object outlines and fills. When working with overlapping drawing or embroidery objects, merge, trim or split them using the Shaping tools.
Vector drawings have the advantage over bitmap images that they can be converted directly to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods. This allows you to concentrate on design shapes without having to think about stitch properties and sequence.
vector drawing converted to embroidery design
Digitizing with bitmap images

Artwork can be inserted, pasted or scanned into ES Designer and cropped for use as digitizing templates or backdrops. These help you to:
! ! ! !
digitize shapes manually digitize shapes automatically with Point & Stitch digitize complete images automatically with Smart Design digitize photographs with Photo Flash.
Scan artwork directly into ES Designer and edit it before use. Open images directly in MS Paint, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, or Paint Shop Pro. Images
V9
17
updated in this way are automatically re-imported into ES Designer. Alternatively, insert bitmap images saved on your hard disk into ES Designer. Show or hide them as you digitize.
Preparing images for automatic digitizing

ES Designer supports the automatic and semi-automatic digitizing of both bitmap images and vector drawings. The quality of the resulting designs greatly depends on the type and quality of the original artwork. In order to make bitmap images both outlined and non-outlined more suitable for automatic digitizing, ES Designer provides image processing capabilities and links to graphics packages.
bitmap image scaled and background removed ready for manual digitizing
areas recolored and outlines improved ready for automatic digitizing
Automatic digitizing
ES Designer provides a variety of complementary tools and techniques for automatically digitizing suitably prepared artwork.
all colors omitted except black background color omitted
! The Auto Trace feature lets you convert scanned artwork to drawing
objects. You can then convert these to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods.
! The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize

shapes in bitmap images automatically without using manual input methods.
V9
Chapter 1
18
! The Smart Design feature automatic digitizing is intended for people

working at all levels of the embroidery industry. Smart Design automatically converts bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery.
! Photo Flash lets you create embroidery designs directly from

photographs and other grayscale bitmap images. The effect resembles the output of a line printer.
gray scale image
digitized with Photo Flash
Modifying designs
After digitizing a design, you can modify it as a whole, edit individual objects or even individual stitches.
Combining and resequencing objects

ES Designer provides techniques for combining and resequencing objects. You can add to designs by duplicating and copying objects. Combine designs. Split objects into smaller ones and remove overlaps between objects. See Combining and Resequencing Objects for details. The stitching sequence naturally occurs in the order in which the design was digitized. The Color-Object List displays a sequential list of objects grouped by object and color. It provides an easy way to group, cut, copy and
V9
19
paste, and resequence selected objects and color blocks. See Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List and Resequencing embroidery objects for details. Group objects together to apply a change to them all at once. Better still, apply Branching to join like-objects to form a single branched object. Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, component objects grouped, and stitches regenerated. Apply an underlay to all. See Automatic branching for details.
Arranging and transforming objects

ES Designer also provides techniques for arranging and transforming objects. Change the position, size and orientation of objects by moving, scaling, rotating, skewing, and mirroring them. Group objects together to apply universal changes, or lock them to avoid unintentional modification. Modify objects directly on-screen or using the Object Properties dialog. Access commonly used functions via the Color-Object List. See Arranging and Transforming Objects for details.
Converting and reshaping objects

There are also techniques available for converting and reshaping objects. Convert among vector and embroidery objects of different types at all stages of the design. The reference points you mark when digitizing a shape become its control points. These vary slightly with the object type. Use them to edit or transform objects e.g. reshaping, scaling, letter spacing, changing entry and exit points. Modify stitch angles of selected objects. Add multiple stitch angles as required. See Converting and Reshaping Objects for details.
V9
Chapter 1
20
Editing stitches and machine functions

Techniques are available for specialist stitch and machine function editing. In essence, you edit individual stitches like any other object, moving the needlepoint position as required. ES Designer also lets you manually insert machine functions and modify them. This flexibility allows you to adapt designs to almost any machine requirement. A Stitch List is available to help you locate stitches and machine functions. See Editing Stitches and Machine Functions for details.
Advanced digitizing techniques

ES Designer provides specialized productivity features as well as special effects and digitizing techniques.
Object properties, styles and templates

Every object you create in ES Designer has a unique set of properties that are stored with it whenever you save the design. You can set the properties of a selected object to be the current property settings. You can also apply current property settings to existing objects. A style is a group of property settings stored under a unique name. You can save any combination of settings to a style. This makes it easy to apply these settings to selected embroidery and lettering objects. Templates are special files used to store styles and default property settings.
Style 1 Style 2
V9
21
Specialized digitizing techniques

ES Designer provides specialized digitizing features to save time as you digitize, and for special effects and machine functions. There are input tools for digitizing circles, stars, rings and appliqu objects, as well as methods for creating repeated or backtracked duplicates, adding borders or filling holes. If your machine type supports boring or sequining, you can use ES Designer to digitize these effects as well.
Appliqu
Automatically create all the stitching you need for appliqu using Auto Appliqu. Simply extract appliqu shapes from a design to a separate file. See Digitizing for appliqu for details. Tip Cross stitch is sometimes combined with appliqu for special effects. Cross stitch is a popular technique for filling large areas with low stitch counts. It can also be used for outlines and borders. It is suitable for homeware, tablecloths, childrens clothes and folk designs. See ES Cross Stitch Supplement for details.
Textured fills
ES Designer provides special tools to create textured effects from needle penetrations. Apply offset fractions and partition lines to Tatami fills to create split-line patterns.
Tatami Offset
Partition Lines
Random Factor
Alternatively, apply Program Split or Flexi Split to create decorative fills from pre-defined patterns of needle penetrations. Select from the library or
V9
Chapter 1
22
create your own. With User Defined Split, create your own split lines when you want to add detail to filled objects.
Program Split
Flexi Split
User Defined Split
Artistic stitch effects

ES Designer provides many artistic effects and stitch types to create textured and contoured fill stitching. Use Jagged Edge to create rough edges, shading effects, or imitate fur and other fluffy textures. Accordion Spacing varies stitch spacing between dense and open fill, producing shading and color effects which are difficult to achieve manually. The Color Blending effect creates interesting perspective, shading and color effects by blending two colored layers.
Jagged Edge with Tatami backstitch
Accordion Spacing with circles
Tatami with Color Blending
Create chiaroscuro effects with Contour. Choose between Standard and Spiral. For another type of curved effect, use Florentine Effect to curve
V9
23
needle penetrations along a digitized line. Liquid Effect allows you to enter twin curves.
Contour spiral
Open fill with Trapunto
Single curve with Florentine Effect
Tip Apply Trapunto effect to force underlying travel runs to the edges of an object so that they cant be seen through open stitching. See Creating open stitching with Trapunto for details.
Motif runs and fills

Motifs are pre-defined design elements, such as hearts, leaves or border patterns. They generally consist of one or more simple objects, and are stored in a special motif set. Use Motif Run and Motif Fill to create ornamental runs and textured fills. Create your own motifs or use the ones provided with the software. Motifs can be scaled, rotated and mirrored in the same way as other objects. Using 3D Warp with motif fills, you can also create interesting three dimensional effects. See Motif Runs and Fills for details.
Embroidery lettering
Create top-quality lettering quickly and simply. ES Designer provides a large range of scalable closest-join alphabet styles and multi-color and fancy stitching alphabets to choose from.
Creating embroidery lettering

Add lettering directly to designs using current settings or with the dialog box. Apply formatting just like a word processor, including italics, bolding,
V9
Chapter 1
24
and right/left justification. Adjust formatting directly on-screen or with the dialog. Or use the fast-access Lettering Box to quickly change values for the whole text or for individual letters. With object-based operation, you can type and manipulate your text directly on-screen, changing the size or spacings to fit.
Adjusting lettering layout

ES Designer gives you both interactive and precise numeric control over many settings affecting lettering objects. Adjust both individual letters and lettering objects as a whole. Apply horizontal, vertical, and curved baselines. Modify baseline type, length, radius and angle, as well as position. You can even define the rotation angle of letters relative to the baseline or the design itself.
Adjusting lettering stitch settings

When it comes to stitching, you can fine-tune the density, add pull compensation and underlay, or change to center-out stitching. Like all embroidery objects, each lettering object has its own stitch properties. Adjust settings at any stage. ES Designer also gives you precise control over
V9
25
the stitch angles of individual letters. You can also specify the join method and stitching sequence you prefer.
Special lettering features

Add special characters and symbols to your lettering. Create interesting distortions using lettering envelopes.
Bridge
Pennant
Perspective
Diamond
Add attractive borders such as rectangles, ovals, and shields.
Use the Team Names feature to create designs with multiple names. For example, use the same logo with different names for sports teams or
V9
Chapter 1
26
corporate uniforms without having to create multiple copies of the same design.
Custom alphabets
Turn any TrueType font installed on your system into an embroidery alphabet.
You can even create your own custom alphabets. Alternatively, modify an existing alphabet for special applications.
Merge letters from two or more alphabets with the stand-alone alphabet merging utility. See Custom Alphabets for details.
Design processing & encoding

Design processing and encoding involve all the important, back-end operations of embroidery design and manufacture. This is where you actually output your designs to machine, disk, printer, cutter, and so on. For this, you will need an understanding of embroidery file types as well as different machine formats. Depending on your setup, you will also need an
V9
27
understanding of traditional storage media including embroidery disks and paper tapes.
Processing design files

By default ES Designer saves to its native file format, EMB. This format contains all information necessary both for stitching a design and for later modification. When opening designs created or saved in other formats, ES Designer converts the design internally to EMB format. You can then modify it using the full range of ES Designer features. Depending on the file type, you may need to provide additional information to assist ES Designer in the conversion process. ES Designer also supports the processing of Melco CND outline files, including color merging and reassignment of colors.
Changing machine formats

Different embroidery machines speak different languages. They have their own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can stitch a design, it must be in a format which can be understood by the embroidery machine. When you select a machine format, ES Designer translates the digitized design into machine functions that can be understood by that machine. If required, you can customize machine formats to meet specific machine requirements.
Outputting designs
You can output embroidery designs in a variety of ways saving to embroidery disk, punching to paper tape, sending appliqu shapes to a cutter, or sending directly to machine for stitching. From the same design file, you can also output a production worksheet for the embroidery machine operator. Designers frequently want to distribute their designs so that they can be seen in real colors, in TrueView or otherwise. In ES Designer you can save both design images and production worksheets to disk or email them direct.
Embroidery disks and paper tapes

Embroidery disks are specially formatted floppy disks used to transfer designs from computer to embroidery machine. You can format embroidery disks and save designs to them from within ES Designer. The format you use will depend on the selected embroidery machine. You can also open designs from embroidery disk directly into ES Designer. Paper tape is the traditional medium for storing designs in stitch data format. You can read paper tape designs of various formats into ES Designer. Once a design is read, you can output it without change, modify
V9
Chapter 1
28
it and output it in its original format, or save it as an EMB file. You can also punch designs to paper tape from ES Designer.
Design management
ES Design Explorer provides an efficient way for viewing and managing embroidery designs. With this design management tool, you can browse design files stored on your computer hard disk, CD-ROM, or floppy disk, as well as cut, copy, paste and delete them. It recognizes all design file formats used by ES Designer. Designs in ES Design Explorer folders can be sorted in various ways. This is useful when you want to select designs for stitching out, printing, archiving, and so on. Once a design is selected in an ES Design Explorer folder, you can send it direct to an embroidery machine or punching machine. You can also batch-convert your EMB and other design files to and from other file formats directly from ES Design Explorer. Create design catalogs containing thumbnail images and/or summary information. These can be sent to a printer, published on your website or intranet, and exported in formats suitable for spreadsheet and database programs, and for integration with third-party e-commerce solutions. Archive design files in folders with the built-in WinZip utility. This can be useful for sending or receiving multiple files via email. You can even view design files within zipped archives. Note ES Design Explorer helps you manage designs in folders. It is not a multi-user database for company-wide design management. Wilcom Design Workflow is a central design storage and management application. Any design format that can be read by ES Designer can be stored in Design Workflow. Design Workflow uses Microsoft SQL technology and is a true multi-user tool, allowing far greater control of designs throughout your company. For this type of requirement, refer to the Design Workflow User Manual.
V9
29
Chapter 2
Basic Procedures
Wilcom ES software is an MS Windows-based product incorporating many of the conventions with which most PC users are already familiar. To start using ES Designer, you need to understand something about the organization of the graphical user interface (GUI) as well as a few basic procedures such as opening and saving designs. Other basic procedures include displaying the grid, accessing design information, and selecting machine formats.
Security codes enable access to features within the software. You need to be able to identify your systems access codes, and enter new codes for upgrades. This section describes how to start ES Designer, how to open designs, start new ones and use the basic commands. It also explains how to turn on and off the grid and measure distances on-screen. You will also find out how to select machine formats for different output as well as how to save designs. The section also explains the procedure for entering security codes.
Starting ES Designer
Double-click to start ES Designer.
Open ES Designer using the desktop icon or the Windows Start menu.
V9
30
To start ES Designer
! Double-click the ES Designer shortcut icon on the Windows desktop.

Alternatively, select Programs > Wilcom ES > ES Designer from the Start menu.
Title and Menu bars Standard toolbar Stitch Types toolbar Show Vertical toolbar Pointer toolbar Input Method toolbar Travel toolbar Drawing toolbar Design window
Color palette Colorways list Status bar Prompt line Stitch count or active stitch XY co-ordinates, length, angle Stitch type, values Current color Zoom factor
ES Designer opens with a new, blank design (Design1).
! Customize the design window by showing or hiding the grid, changing

the grid dimensions, and showing and hiding toolbars. See Displaying the grid and Showing or hiding toolbars for details.
Using commands
Once you start ES Designer, you use commands or tools, and dialogs to complete your tasks. You select commands in ES Designer in the same way as other Windows applications from menus, toolbars, or popup menus.
V9
31
Keyboard shortcuts are also available for the most frequently used commands. See Quick Reference Guide for details.
Showing or hiding toolbars

Use Show Pointer Toolbar (Show Vertical toolbar) to display the Pointer toolbar. Use Show Input Toolbar (Show Vertical toolbar) to display the Input toolbar. Use Show Travel Toolbar (Show Vertical toolbar) to display the Travel toolbar. Use Show Drawing Toolbar (Show Vertical toolbar) to display the Drawing toolbar. Toolbars provide quick and easy access to ES Designer commands. You can choose to show or hide them for convenience. Tip To increase your working area, hide unwanted toolbars and use the menu and keyboard commands instead. See also Quick Reference Guide.
To show or hide toolbars

1 Select View > Toolbars. The Toolbars dialog opens.
2 3
Select the toolbars you want to display. Click OK.
V9
Chapter 2
Basic Procedures
32
Tip Use the buttons on the Show Vertical toolbar to display the Pointer, Input, Travel, and Drawing toolbars on the side of the design window. Tip ES Designer toolbars are dockable. To move a toolbar to a more convenient location, click-and-drag it. To dock it in its normal position, double-click the toolbar title.
Selecting commands from toolbars

Toolbars provide quick and easy access to ES Designer commands. Click a toolbar button to activate a command or, where applicable, right-click to set its properties.
To select commands from toolbars
! Rest the pointer over a tool icon to see its name in a tooltip. ! Click the icon to activate the command. ! Right-click to adjust settings or activate the secondary command. ! If the tool has both left and right-click commands, the name is split
with a slash (/). For example, the Polygon Select/Line Select tool lets you select objects within a polygon when you click it, or objects along a line when you right-click.
! For many commands, right-clicking lets you set the properties for
the main (left-click) command. For example, Satin/Values selects Satin as the stitch type when you click, or opens the Object Properties dialog for setting Satin stitch values when you right-click. Note Not all tools have a right-click function.
Using popup menus

Right-clicking a selected object opens a popup menu containing frequently used commands.
To use popup menus

1 Right-click a selected object.
V9
33
The popup menu opens.
Select a command from the menu. Tip A frequently used command is Properties. This opens the Object Properties dialog for selected objects.
Undoing and redoing commands

Use Undo (Standard toolbar) to undo a command. Use Redo (Standard toolbar) to reapply a command which has been undone. You can undo the effects of most commands. If you change your mind, you can redo them again. ES Designer remembers the last few commands you used.
To undo and redo commands
! To undo a command, click the Undo icon.

When ES Designer cannot remember more commands, Undo is dimmed.
! Click Redo to re-apply an undone command.
V9
Chapter 2
Basic Procedures
34
Opening designs
Use Open (Standard toolbar) to open an existing design. ES Designer opens a comprehensive range of both outline and stitch files. You can also open designs from proprietary embroidery disks, or read them from paper tape. See also Embroidery design formats and Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes. Warning You cannot open EMB files created with a later version of the software to the one you are running.
To open a design
1 Click the Open icon. The Open dialog opens.
preview panel
design data
preview on/off
2 3 4
Select a folder from the Look In list. If the design is not in EMB format, select a file type from the Files of Type list. Select a design or designs.
! To select a range of items, hold down Shift then select the first and
last in the range.
! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select.

5 Select the Preview checkbox to preview the design (for supported file formats) together with design data. This includes stitch and color numbers, design height and width, and software version number (V6.0 onwards).
V9
35
Tip For more information about a selected file, right-click and select Properties from the popup menu. See Viewing design information in Windows Explorer for details. 6 7 For file types other than EMB or ESD, click Options and change the recognition options. See Processing Design Files for details. Click Open.
Creating new designs

When you start ES Designer, a new file Design1 is automatically created, ready for you to start digitizing. By default, Design1 is based on the NORMAL template. Templates contain pre-set styles, default settings or objects, to make digitizing quicker and easier. When you create a file based on a template, the templates values are copied to the new design. You can create additional designs based on the NORMAL template, or select a different template. New designs are given a name, and numbered sequentially (e.g. Design1, Design2, and so on). See also Working with design templates.
Creating new designs with the NORMAL template

Use New (Standard toolbar) to start a new design with the NORMAL template. Whenever you click the New icon, a black design opens in the design window using the default NORMAL template.
To create a new design with the NORMAL template
! Click the New icon.

A blank design opens in the design window. Tip Whenever you create a new design, save it with a new name. See Saving designs for details.
Creating new designs with selected templates

Use New (File menu) to start a new design with a selected template.
V9
Chapter 2
Basic Procedures
36
You can select a custom template to base your new design on. See also Working with design templates.
To create a new design with a selected template

1 Select File > New. The New dialog opens.
Note If there is no template other than the default, the New dialog may not appear. 2 3 Select a template from the list. Click OK. Tip Whenever you create a new design, save it with a new name. See Saving designs for details.
Generating stitches
Use Generate Stitches (Generate toolbar) to generate stitches for new or selected objects. With ES Designer designs, stitches are automatically generated from design outlines and properties. You can either generate stitches as you digitize, or wait until you have defined the outlines. With Generate Stitches on (the default), stitches are calculated for new objects whenever you press Enter. They are also updated whenever you scale, transform or move the object. If speed is an issue, you can digitize objects with Generate Stitches off. You can also select objects and remove all generated stitches. With Generate Stitches off, only object outlines appear.
To generate stitches
! To generate stitches for new or selected objects, click the Generate

Stitches icon or press G.
V9
37
If any objects are selected, stitches are generated for them automatically. If no objects are currently selected, stitches are generated for new objects as soon as you press Enter.
! To remove stitches, or digitize without generating stitches, deselect

Generate Stitches. Tip Make sure Show Outlines is selected or the objects will not be visible in the design window.
Displaying the grid

Click Show Grid (Standard toolbar) to show or hide the grid. Right-click to change the Grid settings. Use grid lines to help accurately align or size embroidery objects. You can show or hide the grid at any time. Default grid spacing is 10mm x 10mm.
To display the grid
! Click the Show Grid icon.

When the tool is selected, the grid displays.
! Click Grid again to turn off the grid display. ! Select Setup > Options > Grid tab > Show Grid.
When Show Grid is selected, the grid displays.
! Select Setup > Options > Grid tab > Show Grid again to turn off the
grid display. Tip You can change the grid spacing, select a reference point and turn Snap to Grid on or off in the Options dialog. See Setting grid options for details. Tip You can also change the color of the grid lines. See Changing display colors for details.
Measuring distances on-screen

Use Measure (View menu) to measure distances on-screen.
V9
Chapter 2
Basic Procedures
38
Measure the distance between two points on screen using the Measure command. You can show these measurements in a tooltip. Measurements are shown in millimeters or inches, depending on the option selected in the Windows Control Panel. See your Windows documentation for more information. Tip For more accurate results, zoom in before you measure. The measurement is always the actual size, and is not affected by the zoom factor.
To measure a distance on-screen

1 2 3 Select View > Measure or press M. Click the start point. Move the pointer to the end point and hold the mouse still. The following information displays in the Status bar:
! Position coordinates of the end point (X=, Y=) ! Length of the measured line (L=) ! Angle of the line relative to the horizontal (A=).
Tip If turned on, the measurements will also appear in tooltips. Use the tooltip with the crosshair cursor on for a more accurate measurement. See Setting other options for details.
measurements appear as tooltip
Press Esc to finish.
V9
39
Selecting machine formats

Select the Select Machine Format (Machine menu) to select a machine format. Before you start digitizing, decide which machine format to use. A designs machine format can be changed at any time for stitching to another machine type, or sending to a paper tape punch or embroidery disk.
To select a machine format

1 Select Machine > Select Machine Format. The Select Machine Format dialog opens.
Select a machine format
Select a machine format from the list. Note You can customize or add formats to suit the embroidery machine you will use to stitch the design. See Creating custom machine formats or Modifying standard machine formats for details.
Click OK.
Saving designs
Use Save (Standard toolbar) to save the current design. Right-click to open the Save As dialog. ES Designer lets you save designs in EMB as well as other outline and stitch file formats. You can also save designs to proprietary embroidery disks, or punch them to paper tape. See also Embroidery design formats and Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes.
V9
Chapter 2
Basic Procedures
40
Saving a design records its file name, location and format, and updates it with any changes you make. When you save an existing design under a new name, to a different location or format, you create a copy of the original design. Tip Save your design early and often. Do not wait until you finish working. You can also set ES Designer to save automatically while you work. See Setting automatic save and backup options for details.
To save a design
1 Click the Save icon. If this is the first time you have saved the design, the Save As dialog opens. Tip To save changes to an existing file but preserve the original, use Save As.
folder containing design
design name
format list
2 3 4
Select the folder where you want to save the design from the Save In list. Enter a name for the design in the File name field. Select a file format from the Save as type list. See Supported embroidery file formats for details. Warning If a design feature is not available in the file type you select, it will be converted e.g. Flexi Split stitching may be changed to plain Tatami.
Click Save.
V9
41
Tip Files saved in EMB format are automatically compressed when saved and decompressed when re-opened. This reduces the storage space required, and makes it possible to save large files to floppy disk, or send them as email attachments. Once you have saved a design, every time you click Save on the toolbar the file will be updated.
Entering security codes

Use Security (Special menu) to enter security codes. The options in ES Designer are controlled by a Dongle attached to either a parallel port or a USB port of your computer, and security access codes entered in the software. Each security device has a unique serial number and identity code. New options can be added and products upgraded by changing the security device options. To do this you need to enter new security access codes. These are sent by fax or email. You can enter codes manually, or import them from a text file. See also Device connection problems.
Identifying your security device

When referring to your system in correspondence or by telephone, you need to quote the serial number and identity code. This information is found in the Security Device dialog. Tip If you need to send your security device information to Wilcom Support or your reseller, send a screengrab of the Security Device dialog to save you writing down the information and ensure that accurate details are sent. It also reassures Wilcom that the correct information has been supplied.
To identify your security device

1 Select Special > Security.
V9
Chapter 2
Basic Procedures
42
The Security Device dialog opens.
Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5
The Serial Number and Identity Code of your security device display at the top of the dialog. The options supplied with your current system are listed in the Enabled Options list. 2 3 4 5 6 Press Alt and Print Screen at the same time. Start MS Paint. Select Edit > Paste. A dump of the dialog box is pasted into MS Paint. Select File > Save and save the image as a BMP file. E-mail this file to Wilcom as necessary.
Entering access codes manually

You can enter security access codes manually to upgrade to new options or software releases. Tip You can also enter access codes by importing them from a text file. See Importing access codes for details.
To enter access codes manually

1 Select Special > Security.
V9
43
The Security Device dialog opens.
Click Set Options to open the Set Security Device Options dialog.
Enter the access codes in the fields using Tab or Enter to move between them. Note Do not type spaces as these are entered for you automatically.
Click OK. A message displays indicating that the access codes were successfully entered. If there is more than one pair of access codes, enter them now, one pair at a time.
Compare the Identity Code displayed in the Security Device dialog with the one supplied with the access codes. The two codes must be identical. If they are not, do not enter any more codes. Warning If you continue to enter access codes when the Identity Code does not match, your ES Designer system may cease to function. If in any doubt, contact your reseller before proceeding.
6 7 8
Click OK. Restart ES Designer. When you have confirmed that all access codes have been entered correctly, discard the access codes.
V9
Chapter 2
Basic Procedures
44
Warning Access codes should not be entered more than once. ES Designer will not normally allow you to enter incorrect codes after a successful update. If in any doubt, contact your reseller as your system can become inoperable if codes are entered more than once.
Importing access codes

You can import security access codes from a text file. This saves time when a large number of access codes are required for example for an upgrade to multiple new options. Text files are usually supplied by email.
To import access codes

1 Copy the access codes text file into your ES Designer design folder. For easy recognition and identification, the file name is the same as the serial number of your security device which is printed on the label. 2 Select Special > Security. The Security Device dialog opens.
Click to import codes
3 4
Check that the Serial Number and Identity Code match those on the email containing the new access codes text file. Click Import Codes. The Open dialog opens, defaulting to the design folder where you saved the file.
5 6 7
Select the text file containing the new access codes and click Open. The codes are automatically updated. Restart ES Designer. When you have confirmed that all access codes have been entered correctly, discard the access codes text file.
V9
45
Warning Access codes should not be entered more than once. ES Designer will not normally allow you to enter incorrect codes after a successful update. If in any doubt, contact your reseller as your system can become inoperable if codes are entered more than once.
V9
Chapter 2
Basic Procedures
46
Chapter 3
Viewing Designs
ES Designer provides many viewing modes to make it easier to work with your designs. Zoom in on an area to see more detail, view the design at actual size, or view a thumbnail of the whole design in a separate Overview window. Pan the design to move it across the design window instead of scrolling, and quickly change between one view and the last. Show or hide various design elements with the available display settings. You can show or hide outlines, needle penetration points, connectors, stitch angles, machine function symbols and the stitches themselves. You can also view designs in TrueView.
When working with embroidery designs, you need to understand the stitching sequence. Check this by traveling through the design stitch-by-stitch. You can also check it by slowly redrawing the design on-screen. You can also preview a design in different colors on different fabrics by selecting from among any number of pre-defined colorways. ES Designer gives you comprehensive information about your designs. Even before opening a design, you can check the software version number and other design information for EMB files directly from Windows Explorer. View stitching details in the Design Properties dialog. The production worksheet also provides essential production information, including a design preview, the size of the design, color sequence and any special instructions. This section explains the design viewing modes available in ES Designer as well as the various design viewing settings. It also describes how to view designs by traveling through the stitching sequence. Design colorways are explained, as well as how to obtain and modify design information.
V9
47
Design viewing modes

ES Designer provides many viewing modes to make it easier to work with your design. Zoom in on an area to see more detail, view the design at actual size, or view a thumbnail of the whole design in a separate Overview window. Pan across the design instead of scrolling, and quickly change between one view and the last.
Zooming in and out

Select Zoom In 2X (View menu) to display a design at twice its current size. Select Zoom Out 2X (View menu) to display a design at half its current size. Select Zoom 1:1 (View menu) to display a design at actual size. Select Zoom Factor (View menu) to display a design at a particular scale. Select Zoom Box (View menu) to zoom in on a section of a design. Magnify your view of the design by zooming in on individual stitches or details, or zoom out to display more of the design in the window. Note To make sure your design is being displayed at the correct size, you might need to calibrate your monitor. See Calibrating the monitor for details.
To zoom in and out
! To display a design at twice its current size, select View > Zoom In 2X.
Alternatively, press Z on the keyboard.
! To display a design at half its current size, select View > Zoom Out 2X.
Alternatively, press Shift + Z on the keyboard.
! To display a design at actual size, select View > Zoom 1:1.

Alternatively, press 1 on the keyboard.
! To display stitches at a particular scale, select View > Zoom Factor.

Alternatively, press F on the keyboard. In the Zoom Factor dialog, enter a scale as a percentage of the actual size, and click OK.
Enter scale as percentage of actual size
V9
Chapter 3
Viewing Designs
48
! To zoom in on a section of a design, select View > Zoom Box and drag
a bounding box around the zoom area. Note The current zoom factor is shown at the lower right corner of the screen.
Viewing the whole design

Click Show Whole Design (Standard toolbar) to display the whole design in the design window. ES Designer provides a number of techniques for quickly displaying the whole design in the design window.
To view the whole design
! To view the whole design: ! Select View > Show All > Design ! Click the Show Whole Design icon, or ! Press 0. ! To display selected objects in the window, select View > Show All >
Selected Objects. See also Design viewing settings.
Panning across designs

Select Pan (View menu) to view parts of the design that are not currently visible. In addition to the scroll bars, panning provides a quick way to view parts of a design which are not currently visible in the design window. Panning is typically used after zooming in on an area. See also Zooming in and out. Tip Use Auto Scroll to scroll the design automatically while you are digitizing. This can be more convenient than using panning or the scroll bars. See Setting Auto Scroll options for details.
To pan across a design

1 Select View > Pan. A box representing the size of the window attaches to the mouse pointer.
V9
49
Move the box over the part of the design you want to view.
pan box placed over area to view
Click when the box is in the correct position. ES Designer centers the design window around the point you clicked.
design window moves to new position
Viewing designs in the overview window

Use Overview window (Standard toolbar) to view a thumbnail of the design. Use the Overview window to view a thumbnail of the design. The window is updated whenever you make a change, and can be used to zoom in or pan across the design window. Note To change the view settings for the Overview window, click it to make it the active window. See Design viewing settings for details.
To view a design in the Overview window
! Click the Overview window icon.
V9
Chapter 3
Viewing Designs
50
The Overview window opens.
! To zoom in or out, click the Zoom button at the bottom of the Overview
window and drag a bounding box across an area.
! To pan across the design, move the cursor inside the highlight box it
changes to a four-way arrow cursor and drag the box.
Restoring the previous view and redrawing designs

Select Previous View (View menu) to switch to the last view you selected. Select Redraw (View menu) to redraw the design. You can switch quickly between the current view and the last view you selected. After certain operations, such as editing thread colors, you may also need to redraw the screen for a clearer display. Note To view the stitching sequence, use Slow Redraw. See Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly for details.
To restore the previous view and redraw a design
! To return to the previous view, select View > Previous View. ! To redraw the screen, select View > Redraw or press r.
Design viewing settings

You can show or hide design elements with a variety of display settings. Show or hide object outlines, needle penetration points, connectors, stitch
V9
51
angles, machine function symbols and the stitches themselves. You can also show or hide selected colors. Tip You can change Overview window view settings separately to the design window. For example, you can view the design in TrueView in the Overview window and in normal view in the design window. See also Viewing designs in the overview window.
Viewing stitches and outlines

Click Show Stitches (Standard toolbar) to show or hide stitches. Click Show Outlines (Standard toolbar) to show or hide object outlines. You can show or hide stitches and object outlines as you work. Hide stitches to see outlines more clearly when reshaping. Show outlines if Generate Stitches is turned off. See also Generating stitches. Note Show Outlines will not work with stitch files that have been read without stitch recognition. See Opening stitch files in ES Designer for details.
To view stitches and outlines
! Click the Show Outlines icon to turn outlines on or off. ! Click the Show Stitches icon (or press S) to turn stitches on or off.
stitches ON
outlines ON
stitches and outlines ON
Tip Right-clicking these tools opens the Options > View Design tab. See Viewing selected parts of a design for details.
V9
Chapter 3
Viewing Designs
52
Viewing designs in TrueView

Use TrueView (Standard toolbar) to change between normal view and TrueView. TrueView offers a graphical representation of what the final embroidery will look like. Tip Change TrueView settings for different effects. See Setting TrueView options for details.
To view designs in TrueView
! Click the TrueView icon to switch between TrueView and normal

view.
Normal view (stitches and outlines)
TrueView ON
Tip Use TrueView together with a background fabric to see how your design will look when stitched out. See Changing background colors and fabrics for details.
Viewing needle points, connectors and functions

Click Show Needle Points (Standard toolbar) to show or hide the needle points in a design. Click Show Connectors (Standard toolbar) to show or hide the connectors. Click Show Functions (Standard toolbar) to show or hide the function symbols. You can show or hide design elements such as needle points, connectors and machine function symbols in your design. For example:
! View needle points to select stitches for editing
V9
53
! View functions to check color changes or trims ! View connectors to help position entry and exit points.
See also Connecting Embroidery Objects and Editing Stitches and Machine Functions. Note You can display or hide design elements in any combination. None displays while viewing in TrueView.
To view needle points, connectors and functions
! To show or hide needle points, click the Show Needle Points icon.
Needle Points ON
Functions ON
Connectors ON
! To show or hide connectors, click the Show Connectors icon.

See also Types of connectors.
! To show or hide machine functions, click the Show Functions icon.

See also Machine function types. Tip Right-clicking these tools opens the Options > View Design tab. See Viewing selected parts of a design and Setting design element view options for details.
Viewing selected parts of a design

Select Options (Special menu) to display all embroidery objects in a design, or hide all but the selected objects. You can set your system to display all embroidery objects in a design, or hide all but the selected objects. You can also turn off all embroidery objects in order to see backdrop images more clearly.
V9
Chapter 3
Viewing Designs
54
Note Display settings apply to both the design window and production worksheet. See also Design viewing modes and Previewing production worksheets. Tip The Color-Object List provides another way to view design objects. See Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List for details.
To view selected parts of a design

1 2 Select Special > Options. The Options dialog opens. Select the View Design tab.
Select way to view (and print) design
In the Visibility panel, select a display option.
! No Change: the display remains the same as before. ! Show Whole Design: all embroidery objects in the design are
visible. See also Viewing the whole design.
! Show Selected Objects: only objects that are currently selected

are visible. This option is only available when objects are selected.
V9
55
! Show Unselected Objects: the reverse of the above option. This

option is only available when objects are selected.
! Hide Whole Design: all embroidery objects in the design are

hidden. Note From this dialog you can also select the design elements you want to display e.g. stitches, outlines, etc. You can also change TrueView settings for different effects. See Setting design element view options and Setting TrueView options for details. 4 Click OK.
Viewing design objects by color

Select View By Color (View menu) to view design elements by color. To help you isolate individual design elements for checking or manipulation, the View By Color function lets you view objects by color. This is particularly useful when you are reseqencing objects by color. See also Resequencing objects by color. Tip The Color-Object List provides another way to view design objects. See Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List for details.
To view design objects by color

1 2 Create or open a design. Select View > View By Color.
V9
Chapter 3
Viewing Designs
56
The Select By Color dialog opens.
Select the colors you want to view.
! To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you select. ! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select.
Click OK. The design appears with only those colors you selected in view. Note The View By Color command will not work with grouped objects.
Viewing the stitching sequence

When working with embroidery designs, you need to understand the stitching sequence. You can check a designs stitching sequence by traveling through it by stitches, segments, functions or objects. You can also check the sequence by slowly redrawing the design on-screen. ES Designer simulates stitching out by changing stitches from black to their allocated thread color as they are stitched.
V9
57
Note The stitching sequence can only be viewed in stitch view. It cannot be used with TrueView.
Tip You can change the display color of unsewn stitches. See Changing display colors for details.
Traveling by stitches
Click Travel 1 Stitch (Travel toolbar) to travel 1 stitch at a time. Click Travel 10 Stitches (Travel toolbar) to travel backwards 10 stitches at a time. Right-click Travel 10 Stitches to travel forwards 10 stitches at a time. Click Travel 100 Stitches (Travel toolbar) to travel backwards 100 stitches at a time. Right-click Travel 100 Stitches to travel forwards 10 stitches at a time. Click Travel 1000 Stitches (Travel toolbar) to travel backwards 1000 stitches at a time. Right-click Travel 10 Stitches to travel forwards 1000 stitches at a time. Use the stitch travel tools or keyboard shortcuts to travel through the design one or more stitches at a time.
needle position marker
The current needle position is indicated by a large white cross or needle position marker. Initially, this is located at the end of the design. When you travel through stitches, the needle position marker moves accordingly. The current stitch number appears in the Status Line.
V9
Chapter 3
Viewing Designs
58
To travel by stitches
! Click the travel tool you require to travel backwards through the
stitching sequence by 1, 10, 100, or 1000 stitches.
! Right-click the required tool to travel forwards through the stitching

sequence.
Travel backwards one stitch
! Alternatively, use the arrow keys, with no objects selected, to travel

backwards and forwards through the stitching sequence. See Quick Reference Guide for details. Tip Slow Redraw lets you view the stitching and color sequence of a design in slow motion. See Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly for details.
Traveling by segment
Click Travel by Segment (Travel toolbar) to travel to previous and next segments. Use the Travel by Segment tool or keyboard shortcut to travel through the design by object segment. See also Quick Reference Guide.
To travel by segment
! To travel to the previous segment, click the Travel by Segment icon. ! To travel to the next segment, right-click the Travel by Segment icon.
V9
59
Traveling to the start or end of a design

Click Start/End Design (Travel toolbar) to travel to the start or end of a design. Use the Start/End Design tool or keyboard shortcut to travel quickly to the start or end of the stitching sequence. See also Quick Reference Guide.
To travel to the start or end of a design
! To travel to the start of the design, click the Start/End Design icon. ! To travel to the end of the design, right-click the Start/End Design icon. Traveling by object
Use Travel by Object (Travel toolbar) to travel to the previous or next object. Use the Travel by Object tool or keyboard shortcut to travel through the design by object. This is useful if you need to locate a specific object to delete it from the stitching sequence, or in order to insert another object. Use it in conjunction with the stitch travel tools if you want to nest an object. See also Nesting objects.
Tip You can select a range of objects by traveling by object with Selects On activated. See Selecting objects with Selects On for details.
To travel by object
! To travel to the previous object, click the Travel by Object icon. ! To travel to the next object, right-click the Travel by Object icon.
V9
Chapter 3
Viewing Designs
60
Tip You can also use keyboard shortcuts to travel through the design by object. See also Quick Reference Guide.
Traveling by color
Use Travel by Color (Travel toolbar) to travel to the previous or next color change function. Use the Travel by Color tool or keyboard shortcut to travel through the design by color. This is useful if you need to locate a specific color change in order to insert an object or delete it from the stitching sequence. See also Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List and Quick Reference Guide. Note When you travel by color, the system looks for the next or previous color change function. Both automatically and manually inserted color change functions are recognized.
To travel by color
! To travel to the previous color, click the Travel by Color icon. ! To travel to the next color, right-click the Travel by Color icon. Traveling by machine function
Use Travel by Function (Travel toolbar) to travel to the previous or next machine function. Use the Travel by Function tool to travel through the design by machine function. This is useful, for example, if you are looking for an extra trim that should not be there. Note, however, that the needle point will stop at every jump, trim, and color change. See also Quick Reference Guide.
V9
61
Note Both manually and automatically inserted functions are recognized. See also Changing Machine Formats.
To travel by machine function
! To travel to the next machine function, right-click the Travel by

Function icon.
! To travel to the previous machine function, click the Travel by Function

icon.
Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly

Use Slow Redraw (View menu) to view the stitching and color sequence of a design in slow motion. Slow Redraw lets you view the stitching and color sequence of a design in slow motion. Redrawing can be started from any stitch in the design. Hide previously stitched parts of the design as required. With larger designs, you can choose to scroll automatically so that the area being stitched remains on-screen.
half-stitched design
Note Slow Redraw cannot be used with TrueView.
V9
Chapter 3
Viewing Designs
62
To redraw the stitching sequence slowly

1 Select View > Slow Redraw. The Slow Redraw dialog opens.
Adjust display options
Go Pause Stop
Back to Start
2 3
Use the slider bar to adjust the redraw speed. Select the options as required:
! Hide Before: Hide all sections of the design prior to the current
cursor position.
Only areas being redrawn are displayed, the rest are hidden
Travel to middle of design, then start Slow Redraw
! Auto Scroll: With larger designs, scroll automatically so that the

area being stitched remains on-screen. 4 Click Go. The design is redrawn on-screen according to the stitching sequence and selected speed. 5 Click Pause, Stop or Back to Start as required.
! Pause pauses the redraw, letting you resume where you left off. ! Stop stops the redraw and returns to the beginning of the design. ! Back to Start redraws from the beginning of the design.
Note You can adjust the display color of unsewn stitches. See Changing display colors for details.
V9
63
Viewing colorways
Use Colorways (Colorways toolbar) to select a new color scheme for your design. A colorway is a color scheme or palette of thread colors. It may also include a background color or fabric sample. In ES Designer, you can define multiple colorways for the one design. This allows you to preview or stitch out the same design in different colors to different fabrics. In ES Designer, you can also print multiple colorways, icons of color blocks, and design backgrounds with the production worksheet. See Using multiple colorways for details. Tip When you start a new design, Colorway 1 appears as the default color palette. You can change it by selecting from among any number of pre-defined colorways saved to the current template.
To view a colorway
1 2 3 Open a design. Select a colorway from the Colorways toolbar. Select View > Redraw to refresh your screen.
colorway 1
colorway 2
Viewing design information

You can obtain design information in a variety of ways and formats before opening the EMB file via Windows Explorer, from the Design Properties dialog, as well as from the production worksheet.
V9
Chapter 3
Viewing Designs
64
Viewing design information in Windows Explorer

Before opening EMB files, you can check the software version number and other design information through Windows Explorer. The Properties dialog displays a design preview together with design information such as stitch count, number of stops and color changes, as well as machine format. You can also view general file information, such as file size and modification dates. Note This same dialog can be accessed from within the Open dialog in ES Designer. See also Opening designs.
To view design information in Windows Explorer

1 2 In Windows Explorer, select a file. Right-click the file and select Properties from the popup menu. The Properties dialog opens and displays the EMB tab.
V9
65
Check the design information, or click the other tabs for general file information.
Tip The Summary tab provides some of the same information entered in the Design Properties > Summary tab in ES Designer. See Viewing design information in ES Designer for details. 4 Click OK.
Viewing design information in ES Designer

Use Design Properties (File menu) to view stitching details about a design. You can check the software version number and other design information through the Design Properties dialog. Stitching details are also provided. Most of the fields cannot be modified directly except for stitch counts, summary information, Colorways, and Elements. Note An element, in software terms, is a color block consisting of sequential, same-color objects. You can assign names to elements which then appear on the production worksheet. The operator generally uses these to make sure colors are correct during production. See Assigning element names for details.
To view design information in ES Designer

1 Select File > Design Properties.
V9
Chapter 3
Viewing Designs
66
The Design Properties > Information tab opens.
This tab contains information about the design height, width, stitch count and colors. The data is extracted from the design and, except for stitch count, cannot be modified. Note This tab also provides important information about the file source Native Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or Imported Stitches. See Embroidery design formats for details. 2 Click Length Calculation to revise stitch counts according to target fabric thickness. See Estimating total thread usage for details. 3 Select the Stop Sequence tab to view the color sequence and stitch counts for each design element.
V9
67
The data in this tab is extracted from the design and, except for Element, cannot be modified. See also Assigning element names. Note There is a stitch count for each element in the design. You can show this as a stitch count for each element or a cumulative stitch count. See Setting other options for details. 4 Select the Summary tab to view or enter summary information about the design.
Click a field and enter any text which will help you identify the design at a later date. Note Information from this tab is included on the production worksheet as well as the Summary tab of the Windows Properties dialog. See Viewing design information in Windows Explorer and Previewing production worksheets for details.
Click OK.
Estimating total thread usage

Use Design Properties (File menu) to view total stitch usage. In order to get more precise thread usage estimates, you can adjust the fabric thickness setting to suit the target fabric.
To estimate total thread usage

1 2 Select File > Design Properties. The Design Properties > Information tab opens. Click Length Calculation.
V9
Chapter 3
Viewing Designs
68
The Length Calculation dialog opens.
Enter target fabric thickness in mm Enter bobbin thread length as a %
3 4
Enter the thickness of the target fabric in millimeters. Adjust the bobbin thread length according to the mixture of thread types in the design. This factor provides a simple mechanism for a more accurate bobbin thread length estimate. The default value (100%) is suitable for a design with a mixture of stitch types. If the design is all Run stitches or all Tatami, more bobbin thread will be used and the factor can be increased say to 125%. If the design is all Satin stitch, the factor can be reduced to say 65%.
Click OK. The Total Thread and Total Bobbin values are adjusted to take into account fabric thickness on total thread requirement. Tip Click Save to save the revised settings to the current template.
Assigning element names

Use Design Properties (File menu) to assign names to blocks of sequential, same color objects. You can assign names to blocks of sequential, same-color objects, known as elements. Element names appear on the production worksheet.
To assign element names

1 Select File > Design Properties. The Design Properties > Information tab opens.
V9
69
Select the Stop Sequence tab.
Enter element names for each color block
In the Element fields, enter names for each color block as required. To do so, click the field, type the name, and press Enter. Note This information may be included on the production worksheet. See Customizing production worksheet information for details.
Click OK.
Previewing production worksheets

Click Print Preview (Standard toolbar) to preview the production worksheet on-screen. The production worksheet is the link between the designer and the embroidery machine operator. It contains a design preview and essential production information, including the size of the design, color sequence and any special instructions. See also Printing or plotting production worksheets.
To preview a production worksheet

1 Click the Print Preview icon.
V9
Chapter 3
Viewing Designs
70
The production worksheet displays in a preview window.

Click to display one or two pages Click Print to print the production worksheet Click Close to return to Design Window
production information Design appears at actual size
Adjust the view as required:
! To change the orientation of the paper, click Landscape or Portrait. ! To change the information that displays, and set printing/plotting
preferences, click Options. See also Setting production worksheet print options.
! To print the design, click Print. ! To close the production worksheet preview, click Close.
Tip Zoom in to read the production information or view the design preview more closely. Large designs may be displayed over a number of pages.
V9
71
Chapter 4
Selecting Design Objects
ES Designer provides various ways to select the objects in an embroidery design. Modify the design as a whole or select individual objects for more precise modification. The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects and colors in designs and access their properties. Use it to group and ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide objects as well.
Note In ES Designer drawing objects and embroidery objects are in fact inter-convertible since they share many of the same characteristics. See also Digitizing with Vector Drawings. This section describes how to select objects using the selection tools and keyboard. It also shows how to select while traveling through designs or by using the Color-Object List.
Selecting and deselecting objects

You can select all objects in a design, cancel all selections, or remove individual objects from a selected group.
Selecting all objects in a design

Select all objects to apply changes to a whole design. See also Quick Reference Guide.
V9
72
To select all objects in a design
! Select Edit > Select All or press Ctrl + A.

Sizing handles appear around the entire design.
no objects selected
all objects selected
! To deselect, select Edit > Deselect All, press X or Esc. Deselecting objects
You can cancel all selections in the design, or remove individual objects from a group of selected objects.
To deselect objects
! Cancel a selection using any of the following methods. ! ! ! ! !

Press Esc. Click the Cancel icon. Select another object. Click an empty area of the background. Select Edit > Deselect All.
! Remove an object from a selection by holding down Ctrl and clicking the
object to deselect.
Selecting objects with Select Object

The Select Object tool provides various means for selecting objects including point and click, and bounding box selection. You can also use the tool in conjunction with Shift and Ctrl keys to select groups of objects. See also Quick Reference Guide.
V9
73
Selecting objects by point and click

Click Select Object (Pointer toolbar) and click the object to select. The simplest way to select objects is by pointing and clicking with the mouse with the Select Object tool activated. With Shift and Ctrl keys, you can select multiple objects.
To select objects by point and click

1 2 Click the Select Object icon. Click the object you want to select. When you click an object, selection handles appear around it. You can move the cursor anywhere within these extents to click-and-drag the object.
OR Click first object Ctrl + Hold down Ctrl and click another object Shift + Hold down Shift and click last object
To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you click. Tip It helps to know the design stitching sequence for this method. See Traveling by object for details.
To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you click. Tip To select an object which is behind another object, you can zoom in and click the outline. Alternatively, position the pointer over the object, hold down the 2 key, and click until the object is selected. Each click selects the next overlapping object.
Selecting objects with a bounding box

Click Select Object (Pointer toolbar) and drag a bounding box around the object to select.
V9
Chapter 4
74
With the Select Object tool activated, you can select objects by dragging a bounding box around them.
To select objects with a bounding box

1 2 Click the Select Object icon. Drag a bounding box around the objects you want to select. Objects are selected when you release the mouse button.
Drag a bounding box around the objects
Objects are selected
Note Unless they have already been grouped, only objects completely within the bounding box will be selected when you release the mouse button. See also Grouping and ungrouping objects.
Selecting objects on the fly

You can select a range of objects by traveling by object with Selects On activated, or using the Select Object tool in conjunction with Shift, Ctrl and Tab keys.
Selecting objects with Selects On

Click Selects On (Standard toolbar) to select a range of objects as you travel through the design. The Selects On tool adds objects to the selection as you travel through the stitching sequence.
To select objects with Selects On

1 Click the Selects On icon.
V9
75
Click the Select Object icon. Note If the Select Object tool is not selected, Selects On has no effect.
Travel through the design. See Traveling by object for details. As you travel, objects are added to the selection.
Selecting objects while traveling through a design

Click Select Object (Pointer toolbar) together with the Ctrl key to select objects as you travel through a design. You can select objects as you travel through the design using the Ctrl key. Traveling is usually associated with checking the stitching sequence.
To select objects while traveling through a design

1 2 Click the Select Object icon. Travel through the design, stopping just before the object to select. See Traveling by object for details.
Stop before the first object
Hold down Ctrl, and travel over the object to select it. Note If an object is already selected, it is deselected when you travel through it.
Hold down Ctrl and travel by object
! To select more objects, continue traveling with Ctrl held down.
V9
Chapter 4
76
! To leave an object out of the selection, release Ctrl before you travel
through it. Tip You can select the object you are currently traveling through by pressing Shift + O or right-clicking the Select Object tool.
Selecting next or previous object

Click Select Object (Pointer toolbar) and press Tab or Shift + Tab to select next or previous objects. If an object is already selected, you can select the object before or after it in the stitching sequence using Tab or Shift + Tab with the Select Object tool activated. With no object selected, you can select the first or last object in the design sequence.
To select next or previous object

1 2 3 Click the Select Object icon. Select an object as required. Do one of the following:
! Press Tab to select the next object in the stitching sequence. ! Press Shift + Tab to select the previous object in the stitching
sequence. Tip Hold down Ctrl and press Tab or Shift + Tab to add the next or previous objects to the selection.
Selecting objects with Polygon Select/Line Select

Sometimes the Select Object tool does not provide fine enough control. The Polygon Select /Line Select tool lets you select individual objects by drawing an outline around them or a line through them. Tip To select an object which is behind another object, you can zoom in and click the outline. Alternatively, position the pointer over the object, hold down the 2 key, and click until the object is selected. Each click selects the next overlapping object.
V9
77
Selecting objects with Polygon Select

Click Polygon Select /Line Select (Pointer toolbar) to select objects with a bounding box. With the Polygon Select /Line Select tool you can select a specific object by drawing a bounding box around it.
To select objects with Polygon Select

1 2 Click the Polygon Select /Line Select icon. Mark reference points around the object/s you want to select.
Mark reference points around object/s to select
The objects you want to select must be completely within the outline. 3 Press Enter to select.
Selecting objects with Line Select

Click Polygon Select/Line Select (Pointer toolbar) to draw a line through the object to select. With the Polygon Select /Line Select tool you can select a specific object by drawing a line through it.
To select objects with Line Select

1 2 Right-click the Polygon Select/Line Select icon. Mark two reference points on either side of the object/s to select.
Mark two reference points
V9
Chapter 4
78
The line must completely intersect two sides of the object. 3 Press Enter to select.
Selecting related objects

You can select all objects of the same color or stitch type with a single command. Use this feature to apply a change across all objects of the same type.
Selecting objects by color

You can select all objects of the same color with a single command. Use this feature to apply a change across all objects of the same color. See also Viewing design objects by color.
To select objects by color

1 Select Edit > Select By > Color. The Select By Color dialog opens.
Select a thread color from the list.
! To select a range of colors, hold down Shift as you click. ! To select multiple colors, hold down Ctrl as you click.
3 Click OK. Objects using the selected thread colors are selected in the design.
V9
79
Note Manual color changes are ignored. Any objects with manual color changes are selected according to their original color.
Selecting objects by stitch type

You can select all objects of the same stitch type with a single command. Use this feature to apply a change across all objects of the same stitch type.
To select objects by stitch type

1 Select Edit > Select By > Stitch type. The Select By Stitch Type dialog opens.
Select stitch type
Select a stitch type from the list.
! To select a range of stitches, hold down Shift as you click. ! To select multiple stitches, hold down Ctrl as you click.
3 Click OK. Objects using the selected stitch types are selected in the design.
Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List

Use Color-Object List (Standard toolbar) to select and view objects in a design.
V9
Chapter 4
80
The Color-Object List provides a sequential list of objects as digitized, grouped by color block. It offers an easy way to select objects and selectively view them. It is synchronized with the design window, dynamically updating whenever you manipulate objects. It is normally docked on the right of the design window but can be dragged to any position you require. Note You can use the Color-Object List to group and lock objects. Use it also to cut, copy and paste, resequence, as well as branch objects. See also Grouping and locking with the Color-Object List, Copying and pasting objects, Resequencing colors and objects with the Color-Object List, and Branching objects with the Color-Object List.
To select and view objects with the Color-Object List

1 Click the Color-Object List icon. The Color-Object List opens. It can be docked to the left or right side of the design window, or dragged to any position.
total color block count image file node drawing object node color block node object number object icons total object count total stitch count
object type stitch type
stitch count
more than one object type
more than one stitch type
The Color-Object List shows a separate icon for each color block and each object in the design, in order of stitching sequence. Each objects stitch count is also shown, together with the input method and stitch type used in its creation.
V9
81
Click a node icon to open or close a color block and see its component objects.
Click to open/close all color block nodes
Click to open/close individual color block node
blue border appears around selected objects
Click an icon to select a color block and/or individual objects. When a color block node is selected, all of its objects are selected as well. A blue border appears around selected objects.
! To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you click. ! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you click. ! To select all items, right-click All then select Select All from the
popup menu.
Right-click All and select Select All
! To deselect objects, click anywhere outside the color node and object
icon. 4 Hide selected color blocks and objects via the popup menu commands.
! Right-click a color block or object icon and apply Hide from the
popup menu.
! To show all items, right-click All then select Unhide All from the
popup menu.
Select Unhide All
V9
Chapter 4
82
! To view selected items only, select Hide Others from the popup
menu.
Click Locate to quickly view selected items
Select Hide Others to view only selected items
Alternatively, select the items you want to view in isolation, and hold down Locate. Note The Locate button will hide all unselected objects, but it will not pan to the located object. Nor will it update the Overview window.
V9
83
PART II
DIGITIZING DESIGNS
In ES Designer, you build designs from basic shapes or embroidery objects. These are like ordinary drawing objects in that they have certain defining characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. They also have properties unique to embroidery such as stitch type and density.
Digitizing methods
This section describes how to digitize shapes manually with the available digitizing tools. It also explains how to adjust input settings to obtain the best results. See Digitizing Methods for details.
Fill and outline stitches

This section explains how to apply fill and outline stitch types to your embroidery objects, as well as how change stitch settings to obtain the best results. See Fill and Outline Stitches for details.
Colorways and thread charts

This section describes how to select colors from the color palette as well as how to change colorways. It also explains how to define, modify and delete colorways. There is also an explanation of how to define your own thread colors and charts. See Colorways and Thread Charts for details.
V9
84
Connecting embroidery objects

This section describes how to add connectors, tie-offs and trims to your designs. It also describes adjusting settings for automatic connectors, including the stitch length for travel runs. There is also a topic on hiding travel runs using the Trapunto effect. See Connecting Embroidery Objects for details.
Improving stitch quality

This section describes how to strengthen and stabilize designs with automatic underlays, as well as how to compensate for fabric stretch. Reducing stitch bunching with stitch shortening and fractional spacing is covered, together with adjusting stitch density and removing small stitches automatically. Techniques for controlling corner stitching and long stitches with Auto Split and Auto Jump are described. You will also find details of setting automatic start and end points. See Improving Stitch Quality for details.
V9
85
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
In ES Designer, you build designs from basic shapes or embroidery objects. These are like ordinary drawing objects in that they have certain defining characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. They also have properties unique to embroidery such as stitch type and density. Note The most important property for an embroidery object is in fact its stitch type. Different stitch types are suited to different shapes. See also Fill and Outline Stitches. The process of creating embroidery objects on-screen is called digitizing. Like the creation of designs in graphics applications, this involves the use of input or digitizing tools. These are similar to drawing tools except that the end result is an embroidery rather than drawing object. Different tools are suited to creating different shapes or design elements. There are specific tools for digitizing larger complex shapes, asymmetrical columns of turning stitches, columns of varying width, columns of fixed width, lines, and even individual stitches. Tip Drawing objects themselves can be converted directly to embroidery objects using the Point & Stitch tools. See Digitizing shapes automatically with Point & Stitch for details. This section describes how to digitize shapes manually with the available digitizing tools. It also explains how to adjust input settings to obtain the best results.
V9
86
Digitizing tools
Different digitizing methods or tools are suited to creating different shapes or design elements. Digitizing methods divide broadly into two categories outline and fill. Note When you create an embroidery object, you can accept the default settings for the particular tool, or apply new ones. Default settings are stored in the design template. You can also define current properties to influence all the objects you create in the current design. See Object Properties, Styles and Templates for details.
Selecting digitizing methods

Use Manual (Input toolbar) to enter individual manual stitches. Use Triple Manual (Input toolbar) to enter triple manual stitches. Use Run (Input toolbar) to place a row of single run stitches along a digitized line. Use Triple Run (Input toolbar) to place a triple row of run stitches along a digitized line. Use Backstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of backstitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings. Use Stemstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of stemstitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings. Use Input A (Input toolbar) to create columns of varying width and stitch angle. Use Input B (Input toolbar) to create asymmetrical columns of turning stitches, where opposite sides are different shapes. Use Input C (Input toolbar) to digitize columns or borders of fixed width. Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with a single stitch angle. Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch angles. Digitizing methods divide broadly into two categories outline and fill. Run and Manual digitizing methods are used to digitize outlines or individual stitches. Inputs A, B & C are used to create filled columnar shapes with
V9
87
differing characteristics. Complex Fill and Fusion Fill, the most commonly used digitizing tools, can be used to create almost any filled shape. You can adjust the settings of most of the digitizing methods by right-clicking the tools and selecting options in the dialog. Note Run stitch, Backstitch, and Stemstitch are considered as both digitizing methods and stitch types. Other digitizing methods may use different fill stitch types depending on the particular application. See also Fill and Outline Stitches.
Reference points and control points

Once you have selected a digitizing method, you digitize shapes in the same way by marking reference points along an outline. In general, you mark a reference point where:
! an outline has corner points ! an outline changes curvature ! an outline changes from straight line to curve.
You always use the left mouse button to mark a corner point, and the right mouse button to mark a curve point.
2 3 2 3 1 object is closed automatically
1 object is closed automatically
The reference points you mark when digitizing a shape become its control points. These appear on object outlines and are used to edit or transform the objects. Such actions may include reshaping, scaling, letter spacing, changing entry and exit points. You can modify stitch angles of selected
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
88
objects, including setting multiple stitch angles. Control points vary slightly with the object type. See Modifying Designs for details.
entry point Key to control points = entry point = exit point stitch angle line corner point exit point = corner point = curve point = stitch angle points
Most control points can be added, deleted, moved or changed to corner or curve points. Some control points have a specific function and cannot be deleted, for example, the entry point.
Switching between fill and outline digitizing methods

You can quickly switch from a fill stitch digitizing method to Run or Manual digitizing methods using keyboard shortcuts. Tip After digitizing, you can convert between Run, Triple Run and Input C objects, as well as between Complex Fill and Input A & B objects. See Converting between object types for details.
To switch between fill and outline digitizing methods
! Press Enter to switch between a fill stitch digitizing method and Manual
digitizing method.
! Press Spacebar to switch between a fill stitch digitizing method and Run
digitizing method.
Digitizing individual stitches

Use Manual (Input toolbar) to enter individual manual stitches. Use Triple Manual (Input toolbar) to enter triple manual stitches. Digitize individual stitches with the Manual digitizing method. You can enter single manual stitches, or enter three stitch layers at a time with the Triple
V9
89
Manual tool. Manual stitches digitized together form a single embroidery object. They are not well suited to scaling and transforming actions as the stitches have no associated properties. This means they will either be stretched or pinched during scaling operations. Use them sparingly, for example to add a few stitches to a finished design. See Editing Stitches and Machine Functions for details. Note As each stitch is individually defined, the only object properties required by manual objects are general and connector properties.
To digitize individual stitches

1 2 3 Click the Manual or Triple Manual icon. Click to mark the start of the stitch and again to mark its end. The end-point becomes the beginning of the next stitch. Continue marking stitch points until the manual stitch object is complete.
2 4 1 Use the left mouse button 3 5 6 7 9 8 10 11
Tip Stitches that are too long will automatically become jump stitches, but you can also create jumps manually by right-clicking as you digitize. See also Using jumps as connectors.
Click for manual stitches
Right-click for jumps
Digitizing lines
Use the Run and Triple Run tools to digitize lines of single or triple run stitching. Run places a single row of run stitches along a digitized line. Triple
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
90
Run repeats each stitch two (or more) times for a thicker line. These tools are typically used to add borders and pickout runs to designs.
length 1 Run 3 Triple Run 1 2
2 6 4 5
For a thicker line, use Backstitch or Stemstitch. Backstitch is an older-style, adaptable stitch which can be used for delicate outlines. This stitch follows intricate curves well. Stemstitch is thicker and can be used to mimic hand-sewn embroidery. It is used for stems and vines with other decorative stitches, or as an outline for Satin or Motif fills.
Backstitch
Stemstitch
Stemstitch with Motif Fill
Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Run, Triple Run, Backstitch, Stemstitch and Input C objects. See Converting between Run, Triple Run, Motif Run and Input C objects for details.
Creating stitch runs

Use Run (Input toolbar) to place a row of single run stitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings. Use Triple Run (Input toolbar) to place a triple row of run stitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings. Use Backstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of backstitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings. Use Stemstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of stemstitches along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings.
V9
91
Digitize lines of single or triple run stitching with the Run and Triple Run tools. Digitize lines of backstitch or stemstitch stitching with the Backstitch and Stemstitch tools. Create objects using left and right mouse clicks to mark reference points to form an outline. Use left-clicks to enter corner points and right-clicks to enter curve points.
To create stitch runs

1 Click an input tool:
! ! ! !
2
Run for run stitch Triple Run for triple run stitch Backstitch for backstitch Stemstitch for stemstitch
Digitize the shape of the line by marking reference points.
! Click to enter corner points. ! Right-click to enter curve points.

1 14 13 2 4 6 3 5 7 8 9 Right-click for curve points 11 10 Click for corner points
12
! To constrain the line to 15 increments, hold down Ctrl as you

digitize. This is useful for digitizing straight lines.
! For a perfect circular arc, mark three points with a right-click.
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
92
! Where curves connect either to a straight line or another curve

click to mark the connection point.
2 curve point 1 curve point 3 curve point 180 Connect corners and curves with a corner point 90 60 45 30 0 Hold down Ctrl to constrain the line to 15 increments
270
Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last reference point. Press Esc to undo all new reference points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode. 3 Press Enter to finish digitizing the line.
Setting run stitch length

Right-click Run (Input toolbar) to set run stitch length. Right-click Triple Run (Input toolbar) to set run stitch length. For both Run and Triple Run stitches, set the stitch length to suit the digitized shape. Where the object has tight curves, select a shorter stitch length. To reduce the stitch count for flatter curves, increase the stitch length. Note These values only apply to objects created with the Run or Triple Run digitizing methods. They do not affect travel runs, or underlay stitching. You can change the stitch length, chord gap and number of stitch repetitions (Triple Run only) in the Outline Stitch tab of the Object Properties dialog. Preset Run and Triple Run values by changing the current
V9
93
properties before you digitize. See Modifying current property settings for details.
Run Length 2.5 mm
Run Length 1.6 mm
Variable Run on Length 2.5 mm
To set run stitch length

1 Right-click the Run or Triple Run icon. The Object Properties > Outline Stitch tab opens.
Select a stitch type Enter stitch length
2 3
Select a stitch type from the Stitch Type list. Enter a stitch length in the Run Length box.
Run length
Run length
not enough stitches to follow tight curve
stitches follow the curve more closely
If a line has tight, sharp curves, reduce the length, for example to 1.8 mm, so that the stitches follow the line. Alternatively, activate Variable Run Length. See Setting variable run stitch lengths for details. Tip Mimic hand-made embroidery by setting the Triple Run length to 4.0mm. 4 Click OK.
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
94
Setting variable run stitch lengths

Right-click Run (Input toolbar) to set variable stitch length. Right-click Triple Run (Input toolbar) to set variable stitch length. ES Designer can automatically shorten stitches in order to follow tight curves with the Variable Run Length option.
To set variable stitch lengths

1 Right-click the Run or Triple Run icon. The Object Properties > Outline Stitch tab opens.
Select checkbox Enter chord gap
Enter minimum stitch length
2 3 4
Select the Variable Run Length checkbox. In the Minimum Stitch Length field, enter the minimum stitch length to allow. In the Chord Gap field, enter the maximum distance to allow between the digitized outline and the stitches. When this value is exceeded the stitch length is reduced to follow the outline more closely.
chord gap run length
Fixed Run Length
Variable Run Length: 2 mm
Variable Run Length: 0.07 mm (default)
V9
95
Note Stitches will not be reduced to less than the specified minimum length, even if the chord gap value is exceeded. 5 Click OK.
Setting Triple Run stitch count

Right-click Triple Run (Input toolbar) to set triple run stitch count. By default, Triple Run repeats each stitch twice. You can change the number of repetitions used for Triple Run by changing the value in the Object Properties dialog.
To set Triple Run stitch count

1 Right-click the Triple Run icon. The Object Properties > Outline Stitch tab opens.
Select no. of repetitions
2 3 4
Select Triple Run from the Stitch Type list. Enter the number of repetitions in the Run Count field. Click OK.
Adjusting Backstitch settings

Right-click Backstitch (Input toolbar) to set stitch length and overlap values.
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
96
Adjust Backstitch settings to get the exact results you want. You can specify the exact stitch length, chord gap, thickness and overlap values as well as the number of strokes.
To set Backstitch settings

1 Right-click the Backstitch icon. The Object Properties > Outline Stitch tab opens.
Enter run length Enter minimum length Enter chord gap Enter stitch thickness Enter overlap percentage Select no. of strokes
Enter minimum and maximum run lengths in the Run Length and Min Length fields.
Run Length: 1.5 mm
Run Length: 3.0 mm
Run Length: 4.5 mm
Adjust the Chord Gap setting as required. See Setting variable run stitch lengths for details.
V9
97
Adjust stitch thickness in the Stitch Thickness field. Needle penetrations are spaced more widely for thicker stitches.
Stitch Thickness: 0.15 mm
Adjust the backstitch overlap percentage in the Overlap field.
Overlap: 30%
Overlap: 50%
Overlap: 70%
Select the new number of strokes 3 or 5.
Strokes: 3
Strokes: 5
Click OK.
Adjusting Stemstitch settings

Right-click Stemstitch (Input toolbar) to set stemstitch length and overlap values.
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
98
Adjust Stemstitch settings to get the exact results you want. You can specify the exact stitch and line thickness, spacing and overlap values as well as the number of strokes.
To adjust Stemstitch settings

1 Right-click the Stemstitch icon. The Object Properties > Outline Stitch tab opens.
Enter line thickness Enter spacing Enter angle Enter type Enter stitch thickness
Adjust the line thickness in the Line Thickness field.
Line Thickness: 1.0mm
Line Thickness: 1.5mm
V9
99
Adjust stitch spacing in the Spacing field.
Spacing: 1.2mm
Spacing: 0.8mm
Enter a stitch angle in the Angle field.
Angle: 90
Angle: 45
Select either Single or Triple.
Type: Triple
Type: Single
6 7
For Triple only, adjust stitch thickness in the Stitch Thickness field. Needle penetrations are spaced more widely for thicker stitches. Click OK.
Digitizing columns of fixed width

Use Input C (Input toolbar) to digitize columns or borders of fixed width. Right-click to adjust Input C settings for new or selected objects.
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
100
Use Input C to digitize columns of fixed width. It is typically used for digitizing borders and outlines of larger shapes. You can digitize columns to create thick lines or borders. Input C is typically used with Satin stitch.
straight column turning column
Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Run, Triple Run and Input C objects. See Converting between Run, Triple Run, Motif Run and Input C objects for details.
Creating columns and borders

Use Input C (Input toolbar) to digitize columns or borders of fixed width. Digitize columns and borders of fixed width with the Input C tool. Create objects using left and right mouse clicks to mark reference points to form an outline. Use left-clicks to enter corner points and right-clicks to enter curve points. Then specify the column width. You can leave the shape open, or create a border by joining the first and last reference points.
Input C digitize columns of perpendicular stitches to create thick lines or borders
To create columns and borders

1 2 3 Select the stitch type you want to use e.g. Satin. See Selecting stitch types for details. Click the Input C icon. Digitize the shape of the column by marking reference points.
! Click to enter corner points.
V9
101
! Right-click to enter curve points.

4 2 3 1 5 7 6
Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last reference point. Press Esc to undo all new reference points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode. 4 When you have finished digitizing the line, either:
! Press Enter to keep the last stitch and place the exit point at the last
point marked, or
! Press Spacebar to omit the last stitch and place the exit point on the
opposite side of the column. Tip To make a border, close the shape by entering the last reference point exactly on top of the first. If the points are not exactly on top of each other, the stitches will not turn smoothly around the corner. 5 Specify the column width.
! To use the current width (as set in the Input C tab), press Enter. ! To specify the width, mark two additional reference points. The
distance between these points is the width of the column. (You can mark the column width anywhere on the screen.)
8 9
Digitize column width anywhere in design window
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
102
Tip You can offset stitches from the center line as you digitize by right-clicking the reference points (rather than left-clicking) exactly where you want the offset to be in relation to the center line.
Setting offsets
Right-click Input C (Input toolbar) to set offsets. By default, stitches are positioned around the center of a digitized line. You can, however, offset them to one side or the other. Do this as you digitize by marking the column width with the right mouse button in the offset position you require. Alternatively, enter an exact offset value in the Object Properties dialog. See also Creating columns and borders.
To set offsets
1 Right-click the Input C icon. The Object Properties > Input C tab opens.
Select Offset Set offsets in either Side 1 or Side 2 fields
In the Input Side panel, select Offset.
V9
103
Set an offset in either Side 1 or Side 2 field, either as an exact measurement (in mm) or a percentage.
Input C offset: 25%
Input C offset: 75%
Note You only need to enter the value for one side as ES Designer automatically calculates the other, based on the Column Width value. 4 Click OK. Tip You can offset stitches from the center line as you digitize by right-clicking the reference points (rather than left-clicking) exactly where you want to the offset to be in relation to the center line. See Creating columns and borders for details.
Setting column width

Right-click Input C (Input toolbar) to set column width. You can set the exact width of Input C columns in the Object Properties dialog. The value you set becomes the current width for new Input C objects.
To set the column width

Enter required column width
2 3
Enter a width in the Column Width field. Click OK.
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
104
Note You can also change the width of Input C objects by selecting the Reshape tool, and moving the width control points. See Reshaping objects using control points for details.
Setting corner fractions

Right-click Input C (Input toolbar) to set corner fractions. You can control the way stitches turn at the corners of Input C objects by changing the distance over which they turn. This distance is set by the corner fraction. The larger the fraction, the greater the distance. Tip Round Sharp Corners is also available for Input C objects to give you the option of sharp or round points. See Rounding sharp corners for details.
To set corner fractions

Enter new corner fraction
Enter a new corner fraction in the Corner Fraction field.

corner fraction 0.8 corner fraction 0.5 corner fraction 0.25
! Increasing the fraction spreads the turn over more stitches. ! Decreasing the fraction reduces the number of stitches that turn.
3 Click OK.
V9
105
Digitizing columns of varying width

Use Input A (Input toolbar) to create columns of varying width and stitch angle. Right-click to adjust Input A settings for new or selected objects. Use the Input A tool to digitize columns of varying width and stitch angle. Digitized pairs of reference points define the outline, while lines connecting the pairs define the stitch angles. Tip The Continuous Input feature provides Input A create columns of varying you with a simple and efficient way of width use evenly spaced angles for a smooth turning fill digitizing a single Input A object comprised of separately stitched sections. See Creating smooth joins for details. Note ES Designer lets you convert between Complex Fill and Input A or B objects. See Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill for details.
To digitize columns of varying width

1 2 3 Select the stitch type you want to use e.g. Satin. See Selecting stitch types for details. Click the Input A icon. Digitize the column by marking reference points on alternate sides of the column.

Mark a pair of points wherever the outline changes, and wherever you want the stitch angle to change.
Stitches change their angle gradually through the entire shape Stitches remain parallel between parallel stitch angles
Note The control points in a pair do not have to be the same type. For example, one can be a corner point, the other a curve.
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
106
Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last reference point. Press Esc to undo all new reference points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode. 4 When you have finished digitizing the line, either:
reference point you digitized, or
opposite side of the column.
start Press ENTER OR start finish Press SPACEBAR
finish
Tip If you are joining two columns, omit the last stitch on the first column so that the exit point is close to the entry point of the next column.
Digitizing asymmetrical columns of turning stitches

Use Input B (Input toolbar) to create columns of turning stitches, where opposite sides are different shapes. Right-click to adjust Input B settings for new or selected objects. Use the Input B tool to digitize shapes where one side is different to the other, especially where one side requires more reference points than the other. Stitches turn evenly throughout the entire shape. You can use any fill stitch type except Motif Fill.
Input B create irregular shapes with turning stitches
V9
107
Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Complex Fill and Input A or B objects. See Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill for details.
To digitize asymmetrical columns of turning stitches

1 2 3 Select the stitch type you want to use e.g. Satin. See Selecting stitch types for details. Click the Input B icon. Digitize the first side of the shape (i.e. top or left) by marking reference points.

2 3 1 4 5 6
Press Enter. An elastic line attaches to the pointer, ready for you to digitize the second side of the shape. Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last reference point. Press Esc to undo all new reference points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode.
Digitize the second (i.e. bottom or right) side of the object.

Press Enter or Spacebar stitches turn evenly
10
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
108
Tip You can control the stitch angle by cutting the pointy ends of a shape and marking the first and last reference points further apart.
90
turn fill
parallel fill
slope fill
When you have finished digitizing the shape, either:
reference point you digitized, or
opposite side of the column.
Digitizing complex shapes

Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with fixed stitch angles. Right-click to adjust Complex Fill settings for new or selected objects. Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitches. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects. Use the Complex Fill tool to digitize large, irregular shapes with fixed stitch angles. Use the Fusion Fill tool to digitize complex shapes with turning stitches. Many shapes can be digitized with these tools. By digitizing further boundaries within shapes, you can create filled objects with holes.
Tip Use the Shaping tools to join, trim or split selected drawing or embroidery objects to make different shapes. See Shaping drawing and embroidery objects for details.
V9
109
Boundaries in complex objects should not overlap or intersect each other. A boundary should not overlap itself and should not have a second boundary inside (hole within a hole). These shapes below, for example, cannot be successfully digitized with Fusion Fill or Complex Fill.
boundaries overlap
boundary overlaps itself
hole within a hole
Where they occur, overlapping boundaries in Fusion Fill or Complex Fill shapes are ignored and stitches are generated in the largest area defined by the boundaries.
Creating complex shapes with fixed stitch angles

Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes. Digitize complex shapes with the Complex Fill tool. Create objects using left and right clicks to mark reference points to form the boundary outlines.
Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Fusion Fill or Complex Fill and Input A or B objects. See Adding stitch angles to Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects for details.
To create complex shapes with fixed stitch angles

1 2 3 Select the stitch type you want to use e.g. Tatami. See Selecting stitch types for details. Click the Complex Fill icon. Digitize the boundary of the shape, by marking reference points around the outline of the shape.
! Click to enter corner points.
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
110
! Right-click to enter curve points.

Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last reference point. Press Esc to undo all new reference points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode. 4 Close the shape.
! To close the shape with the same type of reference point as the last
you digitized i.e. corner or curve simply press Enter.
! To close the shape using a different type of reference point, mark the
last on top of the first and press Enter.
4 3 2 1 8 5 6 7 10 11 9 3 2 1
ht ig tr a i n e s l
8 5 6 7
9 10 11
e 12 rv cu object is closed automatically
12
13
last point is marked on top of first with left button
Digitize any additional boundaries in the same way. Note Boundaries must not overlap.
6 7
Press Enter. Mark the entry and exit position by clicking outside the object boundary. Tip To minimize segments and gaps in your embroidery, place the entry and exit points opposite each other on the outside boundary. Then define the stitch angle so it is perpendicular to the line between the entry and exit points.
Define the stitch angle by digitizing two points.

13
14 12 1 14 stitch angle direction 1 13 stitch angle direction
15
Press Enter.
V9
111
Note Complex Fill objects may be stitched out in several smaller segments, joined by travel runs. All segments and boundaries in a Complex Fill object are part of the same object.
Creating complex shapes with turning stitches

Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitches. Eliminate the need to digitize multiple objects with Fusion Fill. This tool allows you to create a single complex object with multiple stitch angles and even holes. It is best used with designs containing complicated, turning columns such as trees, animals, or large filled areas.
Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Fusion Fill or Complex Fill and Input A or B objects. See Adding stitch angles to Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects for details.
To create complex shapes with turning stitches

1 2 3 Select the stitch type you want to use e.g. Tatami. See Selecting stitch types for details. Click the Fusion Fill icon. Digitize the boundary of the shape, by marking reference points around the outline of the shape.
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
112
Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last reference point. Press Esc to undo all new reference points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode. 4 Close the shape:
! To close the shape with the same type of reference point as the last
you digitized i.e. corner or curve simply press Enter.
! To close the shape using a different type of reference point, mark the
last on top of the first and press Enter.
4 3 2 1 8 5 6 7 10 11 9 3 2 1
ht ig tr a i n e s l
8 5 6 7
9 10 11
e 12 rv cu object is closed automatically
12
13
last point is marked on top of first with left button
Digitize any additional boundaries in the same way. Note Boundaries must not overlap.
6 7
Press Enter. Mark the entry and exit position by clicking outside the object boundary. Tip To minimize segments and gaps in your embroidery, place the entry and exit points opposite each other on the outside boundary. Then define one of the stitch angles so it is perpendicular to the line between the entry and exit points.
Define the stitch angles by digitizing two points for each angle.
13
14 12 1 14 stitch angle direction 1 13 stitch angle direction
15
Press Enter.
V9
113
Note All segments and boundaries in an Fusion Fill object are part of the same object. However, Fusion Fill objects may be stitched out in several smaller segments, joined by travel runs. See also Adding underlay by segment.
Adding boundaries
Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to add boundaries to selected Complex Fill objects. Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to add boundaries to selected Fusion Fill objects. ES Designer lets you add boundaries to Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects.
Tip You can also create new objects from existing boundaries using the Filled Holes feature. Alternatively, you can use other objects to cut holes. See Filling holes in objects and Removing underlying stitching for details.
To add boundaries
1 2 3 Select the object to modify. Click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon. Reference points display around the object outline. Digitize additional boundaries making sure they do not overlap. Press Enter each time. Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last reference point. Press Esc to undo all new reference points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode.
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
114
When you have digitized all additional boundaries, press Enter again.
If necessary, enter a new entry point, exit point and stitch angle for the object. To use the current settings, press Enter to bypass each option. Press Enter. Note To remove unwanted boundaries, select the object and select the Reshape Object tool. Delete each control point on the unwanted boundary, and press Enter.
Adjusting stitch angles using object properties

Right-click Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to adjust the stitch angle of Complex Fill objects. Right-click Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to adjust the nominal stitch angle of Fusion Fill objects. You can change the stitch angle of Complex Fill objects using object properties. By definition, Fusion Fill objects contain multiple stitch angles. However, they also have a property called the nominal angle. This has two functions. First, if a Fusion Fill object fails to stitch correctly for instance, if the stitch angles are irreconcilable it will revert to parallel stitching in the direction of the nominal angle. Second, the nominal angle
V9
115
affects certain underlay styles. See also Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays.
Tip You can adjust the stitch angle of Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects interactively using the Stitch Angles tools. See Adjusting stitch angles for details.
To adjust stitch angles using object properties

1 2 Select an object. Right-click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon. The Object Properties dialog opens to the relevant tab.
Enter required stitch angle
In the Angle or Nominal Angle field, enter the required stitch angle.
Angle: 90
Angle: 0
Click OK.
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
116
Adjusting segment overlaps

Right-click Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to adjust number of overlapping rows in Complex Fill segments. Right-click Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to adjust number of overlapping rows in Fusion Fill segments. Where segments within an object meet, the push-pull effect on the fabric during stitching may cause gaps to appear. These gaps can be prevented by adding overlapping rows. An overlap of 1 row means no real overlap. An overlap of 2 rows means that the first segment is extended by the addition of one extra row of stitches. And so on. With Fusion Fill objects you can also adjust the stitch angle where segments join. Normally, when you create an overlap, it is formed by continuing the two sides of a segment in the direction of their endpoints. This becomes a problem if either side is parallel, or almost parallel, to the cover stitches the overlap may become disproportionately wide. For this reason, you can adjust the tapering angle.
To adjust segment overlaps

1 Right-click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon. The Object Properties opens to the relevant tab.
Enter required number of rows
Adjust the number of overlapping rows where segments join.
overlapping rows
V9
117
For Fusion Fill objects, you can also adjust the stitch angle where segments join. In the Overlap Taper Angle field, enter the required angle.
Enter overlap taper angle
Click OK.
overlap taper angle set to minimum
overlap taper angle increased to minimize overlapping area
Adjusting travel margins

Right-click Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to adjust the distance of travel stitches from the boundary of Fusion Fill objects. When dealing with complex shapes with multiple segments, you may want to keep travel runs away from the boundary of the filled shape for various reasons. If, for instance, you are using Jagged Edge effect, the travel might become visible through the shortened stitches. For this reason, you can specify a margin for the travel stitches. As you increase the travel margin, the travels are positioned more towards the center. Where the filled area becomes very narrow, however, travel stitches do not necessarily remain at the specified distance from the boundary.
V9
Chapter 5
Digitizing Methods
118
To adjust travel margins

1 Select an object.
travel run too close to edge
Right-click the Fusion Fill icon. The Object Properties > Fusion Fill tab opens.
Adjust travel margin distance
Adjust the travel margin distance in the Distance field. The greater the distance, the more the travels are positioned towards the center of the shape.
travel run closer to center of shape
Click OK.
V9
119
Chapter 6
Fill and Outline Stitches
All embroidery objects in ES Designer contain a defining set of settings or values. The values stored with an object become its properties. All objects have certain properties in common such as size and position. There are other, more specific properties of objects which depend on the object type.
The most important property of all embroidery objects is the stitch type. The software uses object outlines and associated stitch type to generate stitches. Whenever you reshape, transform or scale an object, stitches are regenerated according to its stitch type and settings. Stitch types divide broadly into two categories outline and fill. Satin fills are generally suited to columns and borders. Tatami stitch is used to fill larger shapes with solid fields of stitching. Run stitch, Backstitch, and Stemstitch are considered both digitizing methods and stitch types. Both Zigzag and E Stitch are used as outline stitches. Zigzag is frequently used for tacking down appliqus, while E Stitch is used as the cover stitch. Both can also be used for decorative effect. See also Digitizing Methods. This section explains how to apply fill and outline stitch types to your embroidery objects, as well as how change stitch settings to obtain the best results.
V9
120
Selecting stitch types

Use Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) for narrow columns and shapes. Use Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) for large, irregular shapes. Use Zigzag (Stitch Types toolbar) for long, narrow columns of slanted, side-by-side stitches in a zigzag pattern. Use E Stitch (Stitch Types toolbar) for a comb effect with long, narrow columns. Different stitch types are suited to different objects. When you digitize an object, it uses the current stitch type for the selected input method. However, you can change an objects stitch type at any stage. You can also preset the stitch type by selecting it as current before digitizing. See Modifying current property settings for details. Tip You can change between fill stitch types quickly using the buttons on the Stitch Types toolbar, or using the keyboard to switch between fill and outline stitching. See Selecting commands from toolbars and Switching between fill and outline digitizing methods for details.
To select a stitch type

1 2 Select the object (or objects) whose stitch type you want to change. Select a stitch type icon. The new stitch type is applied to the object. Note You cannot select Run, Triple Run, Backstitch or Stemstitch stitch types from the Stitch Types toolbar. To use these stitch types you need to change input methods. See Digitizing lines for details.
Creating fills with Satin stitch

Use Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Satin stitch to new or selected narrow columns and shapes. Right-click to adjust Satin settings. Satin stitch is well-suited to stitching narrow columns and shapes, where the length of each stitch forms the width of the column. Satin stitches are almost parallel, with every second stitch slightly slanted. Because there are
V9
121
generally no needle penetrations breaking up the fill, Satin stitch creates a glossy, high-quality effect.
If a column is too wide, stitches may be loose and not cover the fabric properly. Conversely, in very narrow columns, the stitch density can be too high, and the needle penetrations can damage the fabric. Adjust stitch density by setting a fixed spacing value, or let Auto Spacing calculate the spacing for you. Auto Spacing automatically adjusts the stitch spacing wherever the column changes width. The Auto Split and Auto Jump features help you to control long Satin stitches. See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split and Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump for details.
Adjusting Satin stitch spacing

Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Satin spacing. Stitch spacing is the distance in millimeters between two needle penetrations on the same side of a column. Where a column is narrow, stitches are tight, thus requiring fewer stitches to cover the fabric. Where a column is very narrow, stitches need to be less dense because too many needle penetrations can damage the fabric. See also Adjusting stitch density.
Satin spacing Satin spacing
Change the stitch density in Satin fills by adjusting the stitch spacing setting in the Object Properties dialog. The larger the spacing between stitches, the lower the density. The smaller the spacing, the higher the density.
V9
Chapter 6
122
Tip If you are using a digitizing tablet, you can quickly switch between preset styles with different spacing settings. Each button on the puck accesses the next preset style. For example, clicking button 1 accesses <PRESET_SATIN_1>.
To adjust Satin stitch spacing

1 Right-click the Satin icon. The Object Properties > Fill Stitch tab opens.
Select Satin Adjust stitch spacing
Clear Auto Spacing
Clear the Auto Spacing checkbox. Note If Auto Spacing is selected, the fixed stitch spacing setting is not used. See Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch for details.
In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the spacing.
! To increase stitch density, enter a smaller value. ! To reduce the density for more open stitching, enter a larger value.
Stitch Spacing 1.0 mm
Stitch Spacing 1.8 mm
If you want to control long Satin stitch, select the Auto Split checkbox and specify the Auto Split Length and Auto Split Minimum Stitch values.
V9
123
See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split and Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump for details. 5 Click OK.
Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch

Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Auto Spacing settings. Auto Spacing adjusts stitch spacing for Satin stitches according to column width. For varying width objects, Auto Spacing changes spacing to the best density for the width. See also Adjusting stitch density.
Auto Spacing ON
Auto Spacing OFF
To apply Auto Spacing to Satin stitch

Select Auto Spacing Adjust spacing values
2 3
Select the Auto Spacing checkbox. Adjust standard Auto Spacing in the Adjust field. The spacing is given as a percentage of the preset values:
! To decrease stitch density, increase the percentage e.g. to 110%

-115%.
V9
Chapter 6
124
! To increase stitch density, decrease the percentage e.g. to 90% 85%.
>100% (e.g. 115%) fewer stitches
100% no adjustment
<100% (e.g. 85%) more stitches
Tip 75% generally produces very high quality embroidery. An increased stitch count means the design will take longer and be more expensive to stitch. 4 Click OK. Note For even more precise results, you can adjust Auto Spacing settings. See Adjusting run Auto Spacing settings for details.
Adjusting run Auto Spacing settings

Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Auto Spacing settings. Adjust Auto Spacing settings to get the exact results you want. You can specify how rapidly spacing changes, and by how much, by changing the stitch length and spacing settings. You can also specify spacing offsets to automatically adjust spacing for different thread types. Note Adjust Auto Spacing settings is not for the faint hearted, so take a note of the default settings before you start. You will usually want to save any modified settings to a template. See Working with design templates for details.
spacing 2 spacing 1 length 1 Fixed spacing Auto spacing length 2
V9
125
Warning If you want to restore the default settings and have not kept a record of them, use the Revert utility to revert to factory settings.
To adjust Auto Spacing settings

Click Values
Click Values in the Auto Spacing panel.
Adjust stitch length values Enter spacing offsets for each thread type
Adjust spacing values
Adjust stitch settings in the Stitch panel:
Default Spacing values
Custom Spacing values
! Length: These values define the increments by which spacing is

adjusted. The smaller the distance between each length, the more rapidly stitching changes from open to dense. Each length value must be greater than the previous one.
V9
Chapter 6
126
! Spacing: These values define the spacing corresponding to each

stitch length. 4 Adjust spacing offsets for different thread types. The offset set the compensatory amount by which stitch settings will be adjusted for different thread types.
! Thread type A is average thread, and will generally use the default
value, 0.01 mm.
! Thread Type B is thicker than average and requires a larger offset

value e.g. 0.03 mm in order to slightly increase stitch spacing (decrease density).
! Thread type C is thinner than average and requires a negative

value e.g. -0.03 mm to decrease stitch spacing (increase density).
! Thread Type D is very thin and requires an even smaller negative

value e.g. -0.06 mm. Note You assign the thread type in the Add Thread dialog. Stitch spacing of the assigned thread type is automatically adjusted according to the values set here. See Adding your own colors to thread charts for details. 5 Click OK. Tip If you change your mind, click Reset to revert to the factory default settings.
Adjusting the Satin stitch count

Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust the Satin stitch count. Triple Satin is often used for folk designs to mimic handmade embroidery that uses thicker thread. If you require thicker stitches, set the Satin stitch to repeat itself multiple times. You set the number of repetitions of each stitch in the Satin Count field. Every odd (forward) stitch of a Triple Satin column can be stitched up to 15 times.
V9
127
To adjust the Satin stitch count

Enter number of repetitions
Enter the number of repetitions in the Satin Count field. Warning Using a value higher than 10 may cause thread breaks, depending on the design, fabric, or thread tension.
Click OK. Tip When you increase the Satin stitch count, you should also increase the stitch spacing to avoid bunching of stitches and thread breaks. See Adjusting Satin stitch spacing for details.
Creating fills with Tatami stitch

Click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Tatami stitch to new or selected large, irregular shapes. Right-click to adjust Tatami settings. Tatami stitch consists of rows of run stitches and is suitable for filling large, irregular shapes. Stitches are laid in rows going back and forth across the shape. Stitch offsets in each row are used to eliminate horizontal split lines.
You can control stitch density in Tatami objects by adjusting the backstitch type, stitch length, and row spacing. With Tatami fills you can specify how
V9
Chapter 6
128
each row is offset in order to control the patterns formed by needle penetrations. See Creating textures with Tatami offsets for details.
Adjusting Tatami stitch spacing

Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami spacing. Tatami stitch density is determined by the distance between each row of stitches. The spacing setting is the distance between two forward rows. See also Adjusting stitch density.
row spacing
offset fraction
stitch length
row direction
Tip Sometimes you may want to increase row spacing to create open stitching. This is often useful for backgrounds. However, this also means that travel runs, spacing variations and overlapping rows between segments are visible and can spoil the effect. The Trapunto effect automatically moves underlying travel runs to the edges of an object so that they cant be seen. See Creating open stitching with Trapunto for details.
To adjust Tatami stitch spacing

1 Right-click the Tatami icon. The Object Properties > Fill Stitch tab opens.
Adjust stitch spacing
In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the new spacing value.
V9
129
This value is the distance between each forward row of stitching.
! To increase the density, enter a smaller value. ! To decrease the density, enter a larger value.
Stitch Spacing: 1.0 mm
Click OK.
Adjusting Tatami stitch length

Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami stitch length. Specify the optimum and minimum stitch lengths to be generated for Tatami objects. The stitch length varies slightly in Tatami fills to ensure that small stitches are not generated at the edges of the shape.
To adjust Tatami stitch length

Enter max. and min. stitch lengths
V9
Chapter 6
130
In the Stitch Length field, enter the stitch length you require.
Length: 4.5 mm Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm
Length: 2 mm Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm
In the Min Stitch Length field, enter the length of the shortest stitch to be generated.
Click OK.
Selecting a Tatami backstitch

Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to select a Tatami backstitch. Click to apply Standard backstitch. Click to apply Borderline backstitch. Click to apply Diagonal backstitch.
V9
131
Tatami backstitch is the term used for every second row of stitches in a Tatami fill. There are three types available Standard, Borderline, and Diagonal.
Standard backstitch
Borderline backstitch
Diagonal backstitch
Standard backstitch
The rows are approximately parallel, with every backstitch row slightly shorter than the forward row. Because the rows are different lengths, there are fewer small stitches at the edge of the shape, reducing possible damage to the fabric. Standard backstitch is suitable for high density fills.
Borderline backstitch
The rows are approximately parallel. With lower density fills, borderline backstitch creates a smooth, well-defined edge. Borderline backstitch is also called Trapunto style. See Creating open stitching with Trapunto for details. Note Borderline backstitches may not follow the outline of the shape if the stitch spacing is less than the minimum stitch length. Where the stitch rows are perpendicular to the boundary, connecting stitches are adjusted to be longer than the minimum stitch.
.
minimum stitch stitch spacing connecting stitches are adjusted connecting stitches follow the boundary
Diagonal backstitch
The backward rows are diagonal, directly connecting the forward rows. Diagonal backstitch is suitable for turning shapes, and gives good results with Jagged Edge. See Creating jagged edges for details.
V9
Chapter 6
132
To select a Tatami backstitch

Select backstitch type
2 3
Select a backstitch type in the Backstitch panel. Click OK.
Creating outlines with Zigzag stitch

Click Zigzag (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Zigzag stitch to new or selected objects. Right-click to adjust Zigzag settings. Zigzag stitch is similar to Satin in that the needle penetrates each side of the column. But while Satin gives a straight line followed by a diagonal, Zigzag produces two diagonal lines, thereby producing a more open stitch. Zigzag is frequently used for tacking down appliqus, while E Stitch is used as the cover stitch. It can also be used for decorative effect or where fewer stitches are required.
Tip Zigzag and Double Zigzag stitch are frequently used as underlays. See Adjusting Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings for details.
To create outlines with Zigzag stitch

1 Right-click the Zigzag icon.
V9
133
The Object Properties > Outline Stitch tab opens.
Enter spacing value
Enter a spacing value in the Stitch Spacing field. This value is the distance in millimeters between two needle penetrations on the same side of the column.
stitch spacing: 2.0 mm
Click OK.
Creating outlines with E Stitch

Click E Stitch (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply E Stitch stitch to new or selected objects. Right-click to adjust E Stitch settings. E Stitch, sometimes referred to as blanket stitch, produces long, narrow columns with a comb effect. It is often used to stitch borders around appliqus. The needle penetrates both sides of the column, and then penetrates the second side again, laying the thread along the side. E stitches are usually more open than Satin or Zigzag stitches.
To create outlines with E Stitch

1 Right-click the E Stitch icon.
V9
Chapter 6
134
The Object Properties > Outline Stitch tab opens.
Enter spacing value Enter no. of run stitches
In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the spacing value. This value is the distance in millimeters between each perpendicular stitch.
In the Number of Runs field, enter the number of run stitches between each E Stitch.
3 runs
1 run
E Stitch spacing
E Stitch spacing
Click OK.
V9
135
Chapter 7
Colorways and Thread Charts
When digitizing, you select thread colors for each object you create from the color palette. This contains a selection of thread colors tailored for each design or color scheme. The particular colorway represents the actual thread colors in which a design will be stitched. In fact you can define multiple color schemes and switch between them. This has important implications for sales presentations as well as production. You can also print multiple colorways, design backgrounds, and icons of color blocks together with the production worksheet.
For each colorway you define, you can select colors from commercial thread charts or define your own. Search for particular threads by various criteria. Automatic thread color helps you locate thread colors based on closest match across one or several thread charts. You can also match thread colors from imported graphics vector or bitmap. This section describes how to select colors from the color palette as well as how to change colorways. It also explains how to define, modify and delete colorways. There is also an explanation of how to define your own thread colors and charts.
Changing thread colors

New objects are digitized using the selected color in the color palette. You can change the color before or after digitizing. If the color you want is not available in the color palette, you may need to add it to the colorway. See Modifying colorways for details.
V9
136
Tip If the color palette itself does not appear, you need to select it from the Toolbars dialog. See Showing or hiding toolbars for details. Note Color change machine functions are automatically inserted when you assign a color.
Selecting a new current color

When you digitize a new object, it automatically takes the color selected in the color palette. This is the current color.
To select a new current color
! Deselect all objects, and then select a color from the color palette.
current color
This color becomes current for all new objects.
Recoloring selected objects

Change the color of one or more selected objects in your design at any time.
To recolor a selected object

1 2 Select the object (or objects) you want to recolor. Select a color from the color palette.
object selected color changed
The objects appear in the new color. The current color does not change.
V9
137
Recoloring consecutive objects

Select Set Color (Machine menu) to change the color of consecutive objects. You can change the color of consecutive objects of the same color at the same time. Consecutive objects follow each other in the stitching sequence.
To recolor consecutive objects

1 Select the first object in the sequence to recolor.
blue
blue
green
Select Machine > Set Color. The Set Color dialog opens.
Select to change color of consecutive objects Select color
Select the All consecutive objects of the same color option. Note If you selected more than one object, this option is not available.
Select a color from the list. Only colors in the colorway are available.
V9
Chapter 7
138
Click OK.
red red green
Using multiple colorways

In ES Designer you can define multiple color schemes, or colorways, for the one design. The Colorways feature lets you preview a design in different colors on different fabrics. In effect, it lets you define multiple color schemes and switch between them. See Viewing colorways for details. Note Included as part of the colorway definition are the following properties background color or fabric, unique number, as well as display colors for borer symbols, unsewn stitches, selected objects, object outlines and the grid. Colorways are saved automatically when saving in EMB format. You can save all your colorways as an EMT template file for use in future designs. They cannot, however, be saved with stitch files.
Consecutive objects of the same color

When creating a design, you may want to define two objects of the same color in the one colorway, but assign different colors to those objects in another colorway.
Colorway 1 Colorway 2
same color, different color slots
You can do this if you define the first object as thread color X, and the next object as thread color Y. Both are assigned the same thread color in the
V9
139
current colorway. This then allows thread color Y to be assigned a different thread color in another colorway.
Different stitch densities

As dark-colored threads cover light-colored fabrics better than vice versa, different densities may be required when you change from one colorway to another. For example, a black design on a white shirt may have been digitized with slightly open Tatami to save on stitches. If the colorway is changed to white on black, the Tatami density may need adjusting. See Adjusting stitch density for details. Note Colorways are not intended to compensate for the different densities. Rather, different styles should be used, or separate designs one for dark threads on light fabric, and one for light threads on dark fabric.
Selecting colorways
When you start a new design, Colorway 1 appears as the default color palette. You can change it by selecting from among any number of pre-defined colorways for the template you are using. In the same way, you can preview an existing design in different colors on different fabrics by selecting from among any number of pre-defined colorways for that design.
To select a colorway
1 Open a design.
Select a colorway
Select a colorway from the Colorways toolbar.
colorway 1
colorway 2
V9
Chapter 7
140
Modifying colorways
Right-click the palette to modify a colorway. You can modify a colorway by adding or changing colors. New colors can be selected from any of the available thread charts. Any modifications to thread colors only affect the selected colorway. All others remain unchanged. The modified colorway can be saved with the design you are working with and/or the current template. Note The default settings are stored as Colorway 1. If you change the background in Colorway 1 and save your template, it will always display like this at start up. All defined colorways are saved in the template.
To modify a colorway
1 Right-click the color palette. The Design Properties > Colorways tab opens.
Enter total colors required
Select color to change
Select thread chart
Enter the total number of colors you want to use in the Threads in Palette field. Tip Colorways are limited to 128 colors each. 36 will fit comfortably at 800 x 600 resolution.
3 4
Select a thread chart from the list. Select the color you want to change in the colorways table.
V9
141
Alternatively, select an empty color slot which currently has no color assigned to it.
Select color to assign
Click Assign
5 6 7 8
Select a color to assign. Click Assign. Repeat until all the colors you intend to use in the design have been assigned. Click OK. The new thread colors appear in the selected colorway.
Creating colorways
Right-click the palette to create a colorway. You can define an unlimited number of colorways for each design.
To create a colorway
Click New to define a new colorway
V9
Chapter 7
142
Click New and enter a New Colorway name.

Enter a New Colorway name Select colorway to base it on
Tip By default, the Based on Colorway field contains Colorway 1 which may or may not consist of default colors. If you want to base your new colorway on the default settings, leave this field blank. 3 Click OK. The new colorway appears in the Design Properties > Colorways tab.
new colorway
Click to toggle display of thread details Click to toggle display of thread chart
Tip You can choose different display modes in the Colorways tab.
! When the top arrow button points right, multiple colorways are
listed. Click the arrow to show thread details of the selected colorway.
! When the bottom arrow button points down, the thread charts list
appears. Click the arrow to hide it.
Renaming colorways
Right-click the palette to rename a colorway. You can rename a colorway at any time either in the current design and/or current template.
V9
143
Note When the colorway is saved for the first time it is assigned a unique number. When you rename the colorway, this number remains unchanged. You can reorder a design in Design Workflow using this number as well as the design number.
To rename a colorway
Click Rename to rename a selected colorway
Select the colorway you want to rename and click Rename. The Rename Colorway dialog opens.
Enter a new colorway name
Enter the new name for the colorway and click OK.
Changing the default colorway

Save your preferred colorway as the default for new designs.
To change the default colorway

1 Select File > Save As. The Save As dialog opens.
V9
Chapter 7
144
In the Save As Type list, select Templates (EMT).
Select Normal.EMT
Select Templates (EMT)
Save the file as Normal.EMT, replacing the default settings. The current colorway becomes the default for all new designs.
Deleting colorways
Right-click the palette to delete a colorway. You can delete a colorway at any time either from the current design and/or current template.
To delete a colorway
Click Delete to delete a selected colorway
2 3
Select the colorway you want to delete and click Delete. You are prompted to confirm the deletion. Click Yes.
V9
145
Matching thread colors

In ES Designer you can search for particular threads manually by various criteria. Automatic thread color matching allows you to find and change a thread color based on closest match in one or several thread charts. You can also match thread colors from imported graphics vector (either a single or grouped) or bitmap.
Searching for thread types

Right-click the palette to search for a thread. You can search for a thread by code, brand, description or thickness in the Colorways dialog.
To search for a thread type

Enter search string Select thread chart Select thread criterion
2 3
Select the thread chart/s to be included in the search from the thread charts list. From the In Column list, select the thread criterion to search on Code, Brand, Description or Thickness. Code is the identification number of a thread color in a brand. In the Find field, enter the first few characters of the required code, brand, or description, or enter the thickness code. The system searches for the closest match across all selected charts and displays them in the thread color list below.
Matching threads from different charts

Right-click the palette to match a thread from a different chart.
V9
Chapter 7
146
You can find and change a thread color based on closest match in one or several thread charts.
To match threads from different charts

Select color to match
Click Match
Select thread chart/s
2 3 4
Select the color to match. Select the thread chart/s to be included in the search from the thread charts list. Click Match. The system searches for the closest match across all selected charts and displays them in the thread color list below.
Select color to assign
Click Assign
Note Each search negates the previous results.
V9
147
Matching image colors to threads

Right-click the palette to match image colors to threads. You can manually or automatically match thread colors to a design or colorway from an inserted bitmap image or vector drawing using the Match Drawing Color dialog.
To match image colors to threads

1 2 Right-click the image. Select Match Drawing Color from the popup menu. All colors used in the image appear in the Match Drawing Color dialog.
Select color to match
Click Match Select thread chart
Matched colors listed
Select the thread chart/s to include in the search from the Thread Charts list. Note To automatically match the image colors to available threads, simply click OK. The system automatically assigns thread colors from the selected chart/s to the current colorway.
4 5
To make your own color selections, first select the color to match. Click Match. The system searches for the closest match across all selected charts and displays them in the thread color list below.
Select a thread and assign to the color palette by double-clicking or clicking Assign.
V9
Chapter 7
148
Repeat until all the colors you intend to use in the design have been matched. Note Each search negates the previous results.
Click OK. The system assigns selected thread colors to the current colorway. If the number of available thread colors is less than the number of colors in the image, the system will increase the number of slots in the color palette accordingly. Note The maximum number of new thread colors which can be added to the color palette from a bitmap is 128.
Changing backgrounds and display settings

Background colors and fabrics are treated as design properties rather than design window settings. This is because the background is an integral part of the colorway. In addition, display colors for borer holes, unsewn and selected stitches, object outlines and grid are part of the colorway definition.
Changing background colors and fabrics

Right-click the palette to change background color and fabrics. ES Designer lets you change the background color of the design window to match the color of your fabric. Or you can select a background fabric for more realistic previews and presentations. The background is saved with the colorway. Note Default settings are stored in the template as Colorway 1. If you change the background in Colorway 1 and save your template, it will always display like this at start up. See Changing the default colorway for details.
To change the background color or fabric

1 Right-click the color palette.
V9
149
The Design Properties > Colorways tab opens.
Double-click to change background color
Double-click the BKG slot, the first one in the colorway. The Display dialog opens for the selected colorway.
Select background color or fabric
Edit color Select fabric pattern
Center or tile fabric pattern in design window
Select the design window background type.
! Color: uses the selected color. ! Fabric: uses an image of a fabric.

4 Select a color or fabric to use.
! To select a background color, click Edit. Select a color from the Color
dialog and click OK.
! To select a fabric, click Browse. Select a fabric type from the Open
dialog and click OK. You can center or tile the fabric bitmap in the design window. If the bitmap is large enough to fill the entire window, select Center. Otherwise, select Tile. Tip Textured backgrounds can also be imported into ES Designer. Almost any artwork can be used photographs, magazine pictures, clipart drawings, and even fabric samples. See also Scanning artwork into ES Designer. 5 Click OK.
V9
Chapter 7
150
The background is saved with the colorway.
background 1
background 2
Changing display colors

Right-click the palette to change display colors. In addition to background color or fabric, display colors for borer holes, unsewn and selected stitches, object outlines and grid are part of the colorway definition. You may want to change them if the usual display color is not visible against the colorway background.
To change display colors

Double-click to change display colors
Double-click the BKG slot, the first one in the colorway. The Display dialog opens for the selected colorway.
Select item Edit color
V9
151
Select an item from the Selection list.
! ! ! ! !
4
Borer: borer points. Unsewn: unsewn stitches when traveling through design. Selected: selected objects or stitches. Object Outline: object outlines. Grid: grid lines.
Click Edit. The Color dialog opens.
Select or mix new display color
Select or mix the new display color and click OK.
blue outline
black outline
Creating your own thread charts

Thread charts are lists of pre-defined thread colors. They may be based on commercially available thread charts, or charts you define yourself.
Creating new thread charts

Right-click the palette to create new thread charts.
V9
Chapter 7
152
When you create a thread chart, you are creating a store of colors to use in your designs.
To create a new thread chart

Click to modify thread chart
Click Modify Charts. The Modify Thread Chart dialog opens.
Click New
Click New. The New Thread Chart dialog opens.
Enter name for chart
Enter a name for the chart and click OK.
V9
153
You return to the Modify Thread Chart dialog. The new chart is created, ready for you to add thread colors.
Click to add your own
Click to copy from other chart
5 6 7
Click Add to add your own colors. See Adding your own colors to thread charts for details. Click Copy From to add colors from an existing chart. See Copying colors between charts for details. Click Close to finish. The new chart is created and ready for use.
Copying colors between charts

You can copy colors between different thread charts to create your own charts from existing colors.
To copy colors between charts

1 Open the Modify Thread Chart dialog. See Creating new thread charts for details.
Select thread chart
Click to copy from other chart
V9
Chapter 7
154
2 3
Select a chart from the Thread Chart > Name list. Click Copy From. The Copy From dialog opens.
Select thread chart
Select color to copy
4 5
From the Name list, select the thread chart containing the color you want to copy. Select the color you want to copy, then click OK. The color is copied to the thread chart, and appears at the bottom of the list.
Adding your own colors to thread charts

You can add colors to thread charts using colors from other charts or colors you mix yourself.
To add your own colors to a thread chart

1 2 Open the Modify Thread Chart dialog. See Creating new thread charts for details. Click Add to add your own colors.
V9
155
The Add Thread dialog opens.
Enter code, brand, and description details Select thread thickness
Click to select or mix color
3 4
Enter code, brand, and description details for the new thread color. Code is the identification number of a thread color in a brand. Select the appropriate thread thickness.
! ! ! !
Thickness A: normal embroidery thread (thickness 120/2, or 40). Thickness B: thicker than normal. Thickness C: finer than normal. Thickness D: very fine.
Note This setting determines the Auto Spacing setting used with the thread. See also Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch. 5 6 Mix the thread display color. See Mixing your own thread colors for details. Click OK. The new color appears in the Threads list.
Mixing your own thread colors

You can change the color that displays for a particular thread, or create new thread colors using the Color dialog.
To mix your own thread colors

1 In the Add Thread or Edit Thread dialog, click Mix.
! See Adding your own colors to thread charts for details. ! See Modifying thread details for details.
V9
Chapter 7
156
The Color dialog opens.
2 3 4
From the Basic colors table, select a color that closely matches the color you require. Click-and-drag the cross hairs on the color spectrum to get the exact color you require. Drag the slider on the right of the color spectrum to adjust color brightness. The HLS and RGB values appear in the bottom right-hand corner of the Color dialog. Enter these values directly to define exact colors.
5 6
When you have mixed the required color, click Add to Custom Colors. Click OK. The new color appears in the Color preview box.
Modifying thread charts

Update existing thread charts by modifying thread details or removing threads. You can also rename or delete thread charts.
Modifying thread details

Change the code, description, brand, thickness or display color for an existing thread.
To modify thread details

1 Open the Modify Thread Chart dialog.
V9
157
See Creating new thread charts for details.
Select thread chart
Select color to modify
2 3 4
From the Name list, select the chart to modify. In the Threads list, select the thread to modify. Click Edit. The Edit Thread dialog opens.
Edit code, brand, and description details Select thread thickness
Click to select or mix color
5 6
Edit thread details as required. See Adding your own colors to thread charts for details. Click OK.
Removing threads from charts

Right-click the palette to remove threads from charts. Remove obsolete thread colors from a thread chart using the Modify Thread Chart dialog.
V9
Chapter 7
158
To remove threads from charts

Select thread chart
Select color to remove
Click to remove selected color from chart Click to remove ALL colors from chart
2 3 4 5
From the Name list, select the chart to modify. From the Threads list, select the thread (or threads) to remove. Click Remove. You are prompted to confirm the removal. Click Yes. Tip To delete all the threads from a thread chart, click Clear All.
Renaming thread charts

Right-click the palette to rename thread charts. Rename thread charts from the Modify Thread Chart dialog. Tip Select names that will help you remember the charts you need, or that sort frequently used charts to the top of the list.
To rename thread charts

1 Open the Modify Thread Chart dialog.
V9
159
See Creating new thread charts for details.

Select thread chart Click to rename selected chart
2 3
From the Name list, select the chart to modify. Click Rename. The Rename Thread Chart dialog opens.
Edit thread chart name
Enter the new name for the thread chart, then click OK.
Deleting thread charts

Right-click the palette to delete thread charts. Delete obsolete thread charts from the Modify Thread Chart dialog. Note Be careful when deleting thread charts. If you delete the wrong chart you will need to reinstall Wilcom ES to restore it.
To delete thread charts

Select thread chart
Click to delete selected chart
2 3 4
From the Name list, select the chart to delete. Click Delete. You are prompted to confirm the deletion. Click Yes.
V9
Chapter 7
160
Chapter 8
Connecting Embroidery Objects
Connectors link objects in a design. They can be run stitches or jumps. You can use automatic settings to generate connectors, trims and tie-offs, or add them manually. Travel runs are typically used to connect segments within filled objects. Adjust travel run length to reduce stitch count. Warning For Schiffli work, you are advised to add connectors manually rather than rely on the automatic settings. Automatic connectors are turned off in the Schiffli template. See Adding connectors manually for details. This section describes how to add connectors, tie-offs and trims to your designs. It also describes adjusting settings for automatic connectors, including the stitch length for travel runs. There is also a topic on hiding travel runs using the Trapunto effect. Note You can set separate connector settings for Auto Start and End. See Setting automatic start and end points for details.
Types of connectors
The type of connector you use depends on whether you want it to be visible in the final design. The default connector setting in ES Designer is for jumps.
Jumps
Jumps move the frame from one part of the design to another without needle penetrations. You can use automatic jumps as connectors between embroidery objects. The connecting thread generally needs to be tied-off and trimmed. The default connector jump length is the same as that set for Auto Jump.
V9
161
Tip You can also digitize jumps manually using the Penetrations function or with Manual stitch. See Adding jumps with penetrations off and Digitizing individual stitches for details.
Runs
Because runs are not trimmed, they may be visible in the final embroidery. For this reason, they are less commonly used as connectors than jumps. If objects are adjacent and connectors will be hidden, they can be used. Note Run connectors are not the same as travel runs which join segments within Complex Fill objects. In other words, they do not apply to segments within an object. See also Adjusting travel run stitch length.
Tie-ins
Tie-in stitches are inserted at the start of objects to prevent stitches from unraveling. They are inserted inside the shape on the second stitch. You generally use them when the previous connector is trimmed.
Tie-offs
With jumps, the stitch needs to be tied off so the thread can be trimmed without the stitches unraveling. You can adjust connector settings to automatically add tie-offs, or add them yourself. You can also include trim functions so machines with trimmers cut the thread automatically.
Trims
If you are using a machine with an automatic trimmer, the trim function causes the thread to be cut after a tie-off. In the software, trims are represented by a triangle with a small circle at the point where stitching starts again. The trimmed connector appears as a dotted line. You can adjust connector settings to automatically add trims, or add them yourself.
connector
trim
stitching starts
V9
Chapter 8
162
Using automatic connectors

ES Designer lets you generate automatic connectors in your design based on settings in the Object Properties > Connectors tab. You can change the connector settings for the whole design or selected objects. Tip If you prefer to add tie-offs and trims as you digitize, you can turn off automatic connectors altogether. For Schiffli work, you are advised to add connectors manually rather than rely on the automatic settings. Automatic connectors are turned off in the Schiffli template. See Adding connectors manually for details. Note The Branching feature lets you digitize like-objects e.g. the fingers of a hand without having to think about the most efficient stitching sequence and joins. See Automatic branching for details.
Using jumps as connectors

Use Properties (Generate toolbar) to set jumps as connectors. You can use automatic jumps as connectors between embroidery objects. Jumps move the frame from one part of the design to another without needle penetrations. You generally need to tie-off and trim the connecting thread.
Jump connectors
connectors not visible in TrueView
You can also digitize jumps manually using the Penetrations function. See Adding jumps with penetrations off for details.
To use jumps as connectors

1 Click the Properties icon. The Object Properties dialog opens.
V9
163
Select the Object Properties > Connectors tab.

Enter trim values
Select connector type Select Jump and enter distance Enter tie-in values
Enter tie-off values
Select a connector type.
! Connector After Object: selects for connectors between discrete

objects.
! Connector Inside Object: selects for connectors between letters

within lettering objects, and motifs within motif runs. It also applies to the disconnected parts of branched objects. Note This option does not apply to segments within an object. See also Adjusting travel run stitch length. 4 5 6 7 8 Select Jump and enter a distance for each frame movement. In the Tie In Before Object panel, enter the tie-in values. See Adjusting automatic tie-in settings for details. In the Trim After Object panel, enter the trim values. See Adjusting automatic trim settings for details. In the Tie Off After Object panel, enter the tie-off values. See Adjusting automatic tie-off settings for details. Click OK.
Using runs as connectors

Use Properties (Generate toolbar) to set runs as connectors. You can use runs of single stitches to connect objects in a design. Because runs cannot be trimmed, they are visible on the final embroidery, unless
V9
Chapter 8
164
another object is digitized to cover them. For this reason, runs are less commonly used as connectors than jumps.
Run connectors
Jump connectors
To use runs as connectors

1 2 Click the Properties icon. The Object Properties dialog opens. Select the Object Properties > Connectors tab.
Select connector type Select Run and enter length
Enter tie-in values
Select a connector type.
! Connector After Object: selects for connectors between objects. ! Connector Inside Object: selects for connectors between letters
and motifs. Note This option does not apply to segments within an object. See also Adjusting travel run stitch length. 4 Select Run and enter a length for the connecting run stitches. The Trim After Object and Tie Off After Object panels are disabled as they do not apply to travel runs. 5 In the Tie In Before Object panel, enter the tie-in values. See Adjusting automatic tie-in settings for details.
V9
165
Click OK.
Adjusting automatic tie-in settings

Tie-in stitches are inserted at the start of objects to prevent stitches from unraveling. They are inserted inside the shape on the second stitch. You generally use them when the previous connector is trimmed.
Tie-in with two stitches
To adjust tie-in settings

Enter tie-in values
In the Tie In Before Object panel, select a tie-in option.
! Off: no tie-ins are inserted. ! Always tie in: tie-ins are inserted before the object. ! Tie In If: tie-ins are created if certain conditions are met. When you
select this option, the condition checkboxes become available. 4 If you selected Tie In If, set the conditions.
! After Trim/Color Change: tie-ins are inserted after trims and color
changes.
! Previous Connector Longer Than: tie-ins are inserted when the

previous connector exceeds the length you specify. 5 Click Values.
V9
Chapter 8
166
The Tie In Values dialog opens.
Set the tie-in values.
! Stitch length: determines length of tie-in stitches. ! Number of stitches: determines number of tie-in stitches to
generate. 7 Click OK.
Adjusting automatic tie-off settings

With jumps, the stitch needs to be tied off so the thread can be trimmed without the stitches unraveling. You can select between two automatic tie-off methods:
! The first inserts tie-off stitches along the last stitch. This is suitable for
large shapes filled with Tatami.
! The second inserts the tie-off stitches between the last two stitches. This
prevents stitches from bulging at the edge of shapes. This is suitable for Satin stitch columns and Lettering objects.
method 1 with two stitches
method 2 with one stitch
method 2 with two stitches
Note For narrow shapes or columns: e.g. small lettering: use only one tie-off stitch. You may also decrease the stitch length.
To adjust tie-off settings

1 Click the Properties icon. The Object Properties dialog opens.
V9
167
Select the Object Properties > Connectors tab.
Enter tie-off values
In the Tie Off After Object panel, select a tie-off option.
! Off: no tie-offs are inserted. By selecting this option, you can add
tie-off functions manually. See Adding tie-offs for details.
! Always Tie Off: tie-offs are inserted after the object. ! Tie Off If: tie-offs are created if certain conditions are met. When
you select this option, the condition checkboxes become available. 4 If you selected Tie Off If, set the conditions.
! Before Trim/Color Change: tie-offs are inserted before trims and

color changes.
! Next Connector Longer Than: tie-offs are inserted if the next

connector exceeds the length you specify. 5 Click Values. The Tie Off Values dialog opens.
Set the tie-off values.
! Stitch length: determines length of tie-off stitches. ! Number of stitches: determines number of tie-off stitches to
generate. 7 Click OK.
Adjusting automatic trim settings

You can choose to turn off automatic trimming, to always trim connecting stitches, or to trim only when the connecting stitch is longer than a specified value.
V9
Chapter 8
168
To adjust automatic trim settings

Enter trim values
In the Trim After Object panel, select a trim option.
! Off: no trims are inserted.

This feature is useful if trimming causes your machine to slow down, or the needle to lose the thread. You can either add trim functions yourself, or trim the final embroidery by hand.
! Always Trim: trims are inserted after the object. ! Trim If Next Connector Is Longer Than: trims are inserted if the
next connector exceeds the length you specify. Tip Usually, connectors shorter than 3 mm are not visible on the final embroidery. You may sometimes require a smaller value e.g. if the thread color contrasts with the background color. 4 Click OK.
Adding connectors manually

You can add tie-offs and trims in a design yourself, using the Tie Off, Trim and Empty Stitch tools. This method is less efficient than using automatic connectors and it is not recommended, but gives you more control over the final design. Some machine formats are unable to read functions that appear on a normal stitch. For these machines, you need to add trim, tie-off and other machine functions to an Empty Stitch or Empty Jump. You may also need to add one or more empty stitches or empty jumps to either side of a function for the machine to read it correctly. Note If you want to add all the tie-offs and trims yourself, turn off automatic features in the Connectors tab of the Object Properties dialog. See Using automatic connectors for details.
V9
169
Adding tie-offs
Click Tie Off (Pointer toolbar) to insert a tie-off. You can add tie-offs in your design using the Tie Off tool. This provides a semi-automated technique for adding tie-offs as an alternative to digitizing them with manual stitches. Tie-offs are usually added before a trim at the end of an object. Tip You can also insert machine functions manually using the Insert Machine Function dialog. See Inserting machine functions manually for details.
To add a tie-off
1 2 Travel to the object you want to tie-off. See Traveling by object for details. Click the Tie-off icon. A Tie-off function is inserted.
Tie-off function start Tie-off function end
Tie-off function inserted, needle backtracks and returns
The default number of tie-off stitches is two. This means the needle backtracks twice and returns at the insertion point. Adjust this value in the Object Properties > Connectors tab. See Adjusting automatic tie-off settings for details. Note Generally you will follow a tie-off with a trim. See Adding trims for details.
V9
Chapter 8
170
Adding trims
Click Trim (Pointer toolbar) to insert a trim. You can add trims in your design, using the Trim tool. When you add a trim in this way, the trim function is added to the current stitch. Some machines require empty stitches or empty jumps on either side of the trim. If this is the case for the machine you want to stitch to, you will need to insert them. Tip Make sure that all stitches you trim have been tied in and tied off, otherwise the stitches will not be secured.
To add a trim
1 2 Travel to the needle position where you want to trim the thread. See Traveling by stitches for details. Click the Trim icon. A trim function is inserted at the current needle position.
trim symbol
Tip You can also insert machine functions manually using the Insert Machine Function dialog. See Inserting machine functions manually for details.
Adding empty stitches and empty jumps

Click Empty Stitch/Empty Jump (Pointer toolbar) to insert an empty stitch. Right-click to insert an empty jump. Empty stitch is a tight (zero length) lockstitch, used together with, or as an alternative to, tie-in and tie-off stitches. Use empty stitches instead of tie-ins or tie-offs for objects filled with light density stitching where standard
V9
171
tie-ins and tie-offs may be visible. Also, use empty stitches or empty jumps when required by the selected machine format. Tip You can also insert machine functions manually using the Insert Machine Function dialog. See Inserting machine functions manually for details.
To add empty stitches and empty jumps

1 2 3 Travel to the needle position where you want to trim the thread. See Traveling by stitches for details. Click the Empty Stitch/Empty Jump icon to insert an empty stitch. Right-click Empty Stitch/Empty Jump to insert an empty jump.
Adding jumps with penetrations off

Deselect Penetrations (Generate toolbar) to create jumps with needles or borers out. You can create jump connectors manually in a design by digitizing with penetrations off. The Penetrations tool (formerly known as Needles In) prevents the needle from penetrating the fabric, forcing the machine to move across the design in a series of jumps. You can use Penetrations with any input method.
To add a jump with penetrations off

1 2 3 Select an input method. Deselect Penetrations. Digitize the connector (or row of jumps) in the usual way.
Needle out, Jump stitches
Satin
Jumps
Tatami
The jumps are saved together as an embroidery object.
V9
Chapter 8
172
Adjusting travel run stitch length

Use Properties (Generate toolbar) to set the travel run stitch length. Travel runs are typically used to connect segments within filled objects. They are usually covered by fill stitches when an object is stitched out. You can adjust the travel run length to reduce the stitch count.
To adjust travel run stitch length

1 2 Click the Properties icon. The Object Properties dialog opens. Select the Object Properties > Embroidery tab.
Enter travel run length
Enter a value in the Travel Run Length field as required.
Travel Run length: 1mm
Travel Run length: 3mm
Tip Increase stitch length to reduce the stitch count. Travel Run automatically varies the stitch length on tight curves. 4 Click OK.
V9
173
Chapter 9
Improving Stitch Quality
ES Designer provides many techniques for achieving smooth, even placement of stitches, and eliminating gaps in your designs.
Strengthen and stabilize designs with automatic underlay. Compensate for fabric stretch with pull compensation. Reduce stitch bunching with stitch shortening and fractional spacing. Adjust stitch density for more efficient production and remove small stitches automatically. Control corner stitching with Smart Corners and fine-tune handling of long stitches with Auto Split and Auto Jump. Set automatic start and end points. These features are all object properties and can be applied, removed or modified at will. This section describes how to improve stitch quality with automatic underlay and pull compensation. It also covers stitch shortening and fractional spacing together with adjusting stitch density and automatic removal of small stitches. Auto Split and Auto Jump are described as well as setting automatic start and end points.
Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays

Underlay stitching helps stabilize fabric and reduces distortion due to the pull effect. It also provides loft, raising cover stitches and preventing them from sinking into soft fabrics. Larger areas and stretchy fabrics such as knits and pique generally need more underlay than smaller areas and firm fabrics such as drill or leather. Without underlay applied, embroidery lies flat on the
V9
174
fabric and often the underlying fabric can show through. New digitizers might be tempted to increase stitch density but it is much more effective to apply an underlay. Auto Underlay generates underlay stitching for objects based on the settings specified in the Effects dialog. Underlay settings are stored with each object in the same way as other object properties. Thus they are regenerated whenever the object is scaled or transformed.
Applying automatic underlays

Use Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to strengthen and stabilize embroidery designs with automatic underlays. Right-click to adjust underlay settings. You can generate automatic underlay stitching from scratch or apply it to existing objects. The type of underlay you choose is determined by the purpose it is to serve. Any combination of underlay types can be applied in order to achieve the desired purpose.
with underlay
without underlay
To apply automatic underlays
! Click the Auto Underlay icon with or without objects selected.

With no objects selected, underlay stitches are automatically generated for all new objects. For both new or selected objects, automatically generated underlay stitches are based on current properties.
! Click again to turn off the effect. Selecting underlays

Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to select an underlay type. ES Designer provides a selection of underlay types to choose from. Use a single layer of underlay, or for more support, combine two underlay types.
V9
175
The Auto Underlay feature lets you see both underlay settings at the same time.
Center Run and Edge Run underlays used together
To select underlays
1 Right-click the Auto Underlay icon. The Effects > Auto Underlay tab opens.
Select first underlay first underlay stitch spacing and length first underlay stitch type
first underlay margins second underlay stitch type
Select second underlay second underlay stitch spacing and length
second underlay margins
2 3 4 5 6
Select the first Underlay checkbox. From the First field, select the first underlay type. Select the second Underlay checkbox as required. From the Second field, select the second underlay type. Click OK.
Adjusting Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings

Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings.
V9
Chapter 9
176
Center Run places a row of stitches along the center of a column. It is used to stabilize narrow columns (e.g. 2-3 mm wide). Edge Run places stitches around the edge of an object. Use Edge Run together with the Zigzag or Tatami underlays when digitizing large shapes.
Center Run underlay
Edge Run underlay
Note You cannot use Center Run with Complex Fill objects. Adjust the stitch length for Center Run and Edge Run underlays to ensure the underlay stitches follow the shape of curves and are not visible in the final embroidery. Set a specific run stitch length, or use a variable stitch length calculated by ES Designer. If you use a variable length, enter a chord gap value to control how closely the stitches follow the digitized lines. The chord gap is the distance between the digitized curve and the underlay stitch. See also Setting variable run stitch lengths. Note Stitch settings for Center and Edge Run underlays are stored separately from, and do not affect, cover stitch settings for Run and Triple Run objects.
To adjust Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings

Select first underlay Enter fixed or variable stitch length Select second underlay Enter fixed or variable stitch length Select Center Run or Edge Run for second underlay Select Center Run or Edge Run for first underlay
V9
177
2 3
Select the first and second (if required) Underlay checkbox and select Center Run or Edge Run as the First or Second underlay type. In the Stitch Values panels, enter the required values for each underlay type:
! Length: Sets the maximum length of each stitch. ! Vary Run Length: If enabled, specify minimum stitch length and
Chord Gap values as required. See Setting variable run stitch lengths for details.
Edge Run and Center Run underlay with 2.5 mm stitch length
Edge Run and Center Run underlay with a variable run length
Click OK.
Adjusting Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay settings

Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay settings. Use Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay stitching to support wide columns. You can combine Zigzag or Double Zigzag with Center Run or Edge Run underlays. These underlays are best used under Satin cover stitching.
Zigzag underlay
Double Zigzag underlay
You can set spacing and stitch length properties for Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay. Note Zigzag underlay stitch settings are stored separately from, and do not affect, zigzag cover stitch settings.
To adjust Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay settings

1 Right-click the Auto Underlay icon.
V9
Chapter 9
178
The Effects > Auto Underlay tab opens.

Select first underlay Enter Zigzag stitch values Select Zigzag or Double Zigzag
2 3
Select the first and second (if required) Underlay checkbox and select Zigzag or Double Zigzag as the First or Second underlay type. In the Stitch Values panels, enter the required values for each underlay type:
! Spacing: Sets the required distance between two needle

penetrations on the same side of the column.
! Length: Sets the maximum length of each stitch.
Spacing: 3.0 mm
Spacing: 4.0 mm
Click OK.
Adjusting Tatami underlay settings

Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami underlay settings. Tatami underlay is used to stabilize large, filled shapes. It resembles an extremely open Tatami fill stitch, where rows of stitches are placed across the object to create the underlay. Tatami underlay is often used together
V9
179
with Edge Run, especially for Complex Fill objects under Tatami cover stitching.
Tatami stitch with Edge Run and Tatami underlay direction of underlay direction of cover stitching
Change stitch spacing and length settings for Tatami underlay in the same way as for Tatami fill stitches. Select the backstitch type you require and, for Complex Fill objects, set the angle of the underlay stitches. Note Tatami underlay stitch settings are stored separately from, and do not affect, Tatami cover stitch settings.
To adjust Tatami underlay settings

Select first underlay Enter Tatami stitch values Select Tatami
2 3
Select the first and second (if required) Underlay checkbox and select Tatami as the First or Second underlay type. In the Stitch Values panels, enter the required values for each underlay type:
! Spacing: Sets the distance between each row of stitching.
V9
Chapter 9
180
! Length: Sets the maximum length of each stitch.

Spacing: 3mm
Spacing: 2mm
For Complex Fill objects, you can also set the stitch angle for Tatami underlays.
! Angle 1: the stitch angle for the underlay, when Tatami is selected
as the First underlay type.
! Angle 2: the stitch angle for the underlay, when Tatami is selected
as the Second underlay type.
Angle: 45
Angle: 135
Note You can only set the stitch angle for Complex Fill objects. 5 6 Select a backstitch. See Selecting a Tatami backstitch for details. Click OK.
Setting underlay margins

Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust underlay margins. The underlay margin is the distance between an object outline and the edge of the underlay. Increase this margin to prevent underlay stitches from extending outside the cover stitches.
underlay margin
V9
181
For Complex Fill objects, you can enter a single margin value which is used for all edges in the shape. For objects created with the Input A, Input B, Input C or Lettering tools, you can set three different margins one for the sides of the column and one for each end. Note Margin values do not apply for Center Run underlays.
To set underlay margins

1 2 Right-click the Auto Underlay icon. The Effects > Auto Underlay tab opens. Select the first and second (if required) Underlay checkbox, and select the underlays you require from the First and Second dropdown lists.
Select Underlay Select stitch type
Set required margins
In the Margins panel, set the required margins.
! For Input A, Input B, Input C and Lettering objects, enter margins in

the 1:, 2: and 3: fields, using the diagram as a guide.
! For Complex Fill objects, enter a margin in the 1: field only. Values
in the other fields will be ignored.
Mgn 1: 0.8 mm, Mgn 2: 0.2 mm, Mgn 3: 0.4 mm
All margins: 0.1 mm
V9
Chapter 9
182
Tip If you are joining two columns, use a negative value at the joining end. The underlay will extend outside the cover stitching, allowing for smooth joining of the columns.
two columns joined
Click OK.
Adding underlay by segment

Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to add underlay by segment. Normally underlay is applied to all segments before the cover stitches are sewn. With Fusion Fill objects, however, underlay can be applied by segment. This means that underlay and cover stitch are stitched segment by segment.
To add underlay by segment

1 Right-click the Auto Underlay icon.
V9
183
The Effects > Auto Underlay tab opens.

Select By Segment
Or select By Segment
2 3
Select first and second underlays as required. Select By Segment for either first or second underlay. Note If you select By Segment for the first underlay, it is selected by default for the second as well.
Click OK.
Compensating for fabric stretch

Embroidery stitches pull the fabric inwards where the needle penetrates. This can cause the fabric to pucker, and gaps to appear in the embroidery. Experienced digitizers can manually compensate for pull by overlapping objects as they digitize. Automatic pull compensation, however, counters the pull effect by overstitching outlines of filled shapes on the sides where the needle penetrates. See also Adjusting stitch density.
digitized outline calculated outline
pull compensation
Adjust the amount of overstitching you need by varying the pull compensation setting in the Effects dialog. This is handy if you want to stitch a design on fabrics with varying degrees of stretch.
V9
Chapter 9
184
Tip Applying underlay stitching, and using appropriate backing and topping when stitching out can also reduce the push-pull effect.
Applying automatic pull compensation

Use Pull Compensation (Stitch Types toolbar) to automatically compensate for fabric stretch. Right-click to adjust pull compensation settings. Apply automatic pull compensation to objects in your design, either before or after you digitize.
Pull Compensation OFF
Pull Compensation ON
To apply automatic pull compensation
! Click the Pull Compensation icon with or without objects selected.

With no objects selected, pull compensation is applied to all new objects. For both new or selected objects, pull compensation is based on current properties.
! Click again to turn off the effect. Adjusting pull compensation settings
Right-click Pull Compensation (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust pull compensation settings. The amount of overstitching you require for pull compensation depends on the fabric you want to stitch out on. Use the following table as a guideline. Fabric drills, cotton T-shirt Pull compensation (mm) 0.20 0.35
V9
185
Fabric fleece, jumper lettering
Pull compensation (mm) 0.40 0.2 - 0.3
To adjust pull compensation settings

1 Right-click the Pull Compensation icon. The Effects > Others tab opens.
Select Pull Compensation Enter overstitch allowance
2 3
Select the Pull Compensation checkbox. Enter the amount (in millimeters) by which you want to overstitch.
Pull Compensation: 0.3 mm
Pull Compensation: 0.6 mm
Click OK.
Adjusting column width

Right-click Pull Compensation (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust column width setting. The Column Width setting adjusts the width of columnar shapes, allowing you to change the column width at every point by a constant amount in the direction of stitching. The purpose is to fatten or thin a column, for example, in order to create bold lettering. See also Making bold lettering.
V9
Chapter 9
186
Reduce column width if you need to allow the underlay to extend outside the object boundary.
To adjust column width

1 Right-click the Pull Compensation icon. The Effects > Others tab opens.
Select Column Width Enter column width adjustment
2 3
Select the Column Width checkbox. Enter the amount (mm) by which you want to adjust column widths.
column width: -1
no adjustment
column width: +1
Click OK.
Reversing stitch direction

Use Reverse Curve (Image menu) to reverse stitch direction in drawing or closed embroidery objects. Stitching direction can affect embroidery quality because of the push-pull effect. This is especially visible with Input C objects. Reverse Curve lets you control the push-pull effect by reversing the stitch direction. This in turn affects the stitching direction of Jagged Edge, Contour Stitch and E Stitch
V9
187
objects. It can also affect Contour stitching, Tatami offsets, Flexi Split pattern orientation, and Motif Run orientation. Note Only closed drawing and embroidery objects such as Input C can be reversed. The effect on drawing objects will not be visible, convert them to embroidery objects first.
To reverse stitch direction

1 2 Select a closed embroidery object. Select Image > Reverse Curve. The stitch direction is reversed.
Input C object with Jagged Edge
Reverse Curve applied
Reducing stitch bunching with stitch shortening

Standard stitch spacing is calculated at the outside edge of a shape. With sharp curves, spacing which provides adequate coverage on the outside edge may cause bunching along the inside edge. This may cause thread breakage when stitching out. The longer the stitches, the worse the problem.
shortened stitches
Stitch shortening reduces the length of some stitches in sharp turns so that the needle penetrations are distributed evenly, creating smoother stitching.
V9
Chapter 9
188
Tip Fractional spacing provides another way of reducing stitch bunching. See Reducing stitch bunching with fractional spacing for details.
Applying stitch shortening

Use Shortening (Stitch Types toolbar) to reduce stitch bunching in tight curves by shortening some stitches on the inside edge. Right-click to adjust stitch shortening settings. Apply stitch shortening to sharp corners to decrease stitch density on the inside edge.
To apply stitch shortening
! Click the Shortening icon with or without objects selected.

With no objects selected, stitch shortening is applied to all new objects. For both new or selected objects, stitch shortening is based on current properties.
! Click again to turn off the effect. Adjusting stitch shortening settings
Right-click Shortening (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust stitch shortening settings. Default shortening settings are set to suit most designs. However, advanced users can adjust the way ES Designer shortens stitches by setting precise shortening settings. Note Only change these settings if you understand how stitch shortening is calculated.
V9
189
To adjust stitch shortening settings

1 Right-click the Shortening icon. The Effects > Shortening tab opens.
Enter max. allowable no. of consecutive short stitches Define length of short stitches relative to original stitch length
Enter minimum spacing allowance
Randomize shortening pattern
In the If Spacing < field, enter the minimum spacing permitted between stitches (as % of nominal spacing) before automatic shortening takes effect.
If spacing < 90%
If spacing < 40%
In the Max No Of Short Stitches field, enter the maximum number of consecutive short stitches to allow, up to a limit of five.
Max no. of short stitches: 1
Max no. of short stitches: 5
V9
Chapter 9
190
A higher number allows smoother distribution of the needle penetrations in tight curves, and reduces stitch bunching. 4 In the Shorten Stitch Length to (%) panel, define the individual lengths of consecutive short stitches, as a percentage of the original.
Max no. of short stitches: 1 Shorten stitch length to: 80%
Max no. of short stitches: 1 Shorten stitch length to: 50%
Note A value of 80% means that the stitch is shortened to 80% of the original length, not by 80%. The smaller the percentage, the shorter the stitch. If you allow three short stitches, you need only fill in the first three rows. If you allow five short stitches, fill in all five rows.
Max no. of short stitches: 5 Shorten stitch length to: 50% Row 1: 90 Row 2: 70 60 Row 3: 55 85 55 Row 4: 55 85 75 55 Row 5: 55 70 45 70 55
Max no. of short stitches: 5 Shorten stitch length to: 50% Row 1: 80 Row 2: 85 70 Row 3: 70 90 70 Row 4: 70 90 80 70 Row 5: 70 85 65 85 70
If only one short stitch is generated between normal stitches, the value in Row 1 will apply. If two consecutive short stitches are generated, the values in Row 2 will apply to 1st and 2nd stitch respectively. And so on up the scale. Tip For best results use a jagged pattern between consecutive stitches.
V9
191
Select the Randomize checkbox to randomize the shortening pattern values. This will eliminate unwanted lines appearing in regular curves.
Randomize ON
Randomize OFF
Click OK.
Reducing stitch bunching with fractional spacing

Standard stitch spacing is calculated at the outside edge of a shape. With sharp curves, spacing which provides adequate coverage on the outside edge may cause bunching along the inside edge. This may cause thread breakage when stitching out. The longer the stitches, the worse the problem.
offset fraction: 0.00 0.33 0.66 1.00 outside edge
With Fractional Spacing, ES Designer calculates spacing settings from a specified point called the offset fraction. This lies between the outside and inside edges of the shape. You can change the offset fraction to adjust stitch spacing at inside and outside edges. Tip Stitch shortening provides another way of reducing stitch bunching. See Reducing stitch bunching with stitch shortening for details.
V9
Chapter 9
192
Applying fractional spacing

Use Fractional Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to reduce stitch bunching in tight curves by adjusting the point at which stitch spacing is calculated. Right-click to adjust fractional spacing settings. Apply fractional spacing to curved shapes to even out the stitch density along the outside and inside edges. Fractional spacing is particularly useful for columns of Satin stitches with sharp turns.
Fractional Spacing OFF
Fractional Spacing ON
Tip For best results, combine stitch shortening and fractional spacing effects.
To apply fractional spacing
! Click the Fractional Spacing icon with or without objects selected.

With no objects selected, fractional spacing is applied to all new objects. For both new or selected objects, fractional spacing is based on current properties. See Adjusting fractional spacing settings for details.
! Click again to turn off the effect. Adjusting fractional spacing settings
Right-click Fractional Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust fractional spacing settings. Fractional stitch spacing calculates the spacing at some point between the outside and inside edges of the shape. This point is called the offset fraction. The offset fraction is entered as a fraction of the column width, where the outside edge is 0.00, and the inside edge is 1.00.
To adjust fractional spacing settings

1 Right-click the Fractional Spacing icon.
V9
193
The Effects > Others tab opens.

Select Fractional Spacing
Enter offset fraction as fraction of column width
2 3
Select the Fractional Spacing checkbox. In the Offset Fraction field, enter the offset fraction value as a fraction of the column width, where the outside edge is 0.00, and the inside edge is 1.00.
59 stitches
49 stitches
43 stitches
offset fraction 0.00
Tip An offset fraction of 0.33 generates fewer stitches than standard spacing, reducing bunching along the inside edge. An offset fraction of 0.66 eliminates bunching on the inside edge, but may produce insufficient stitches to cover the fabric. 4 Click OK.
Adjusting stitch density

You may want to change stitch density in order to stitch on a different fabric or with a different thread. Alternatively, you may want to make production cheaper by reducing the overall stitch count. The Process feature lets you change the density of all stitch types (except Manual) across the whole or selected parts of a design. It also lets you adjust the density of selected stitch types. You can even use the feature to scale a design. See also
V9
Chapter 9
194
Adjusting run Auto Spacing settings and Removing small stitches automatically.
100%: 5195 stitches
20%: 987 stitches
Adjusting overall stitch density

Use Process (Generate toolbar) to adjust stitch density of and/or scale the whole or selected parts of a design. The Process tool lets you adjust the overall stitch density across the whole or selected parts of a design in order to achieve a target number of stitches. You can adjust density as a percentage to avoid calculating the absolute stitch spacing and length values for each stitch type. Tip If a design was originally created in ES Designer, or was converted into objects, the changes you make through the Process dialog will change the properties of the selected objects. You can check any changes via the Object Properties dialog.
To adjust overall stitch density

1 2 Select the design or objects you want to process. Click the Process icon.
V9
195
The Process dialog opens.

Enter target stitch count
Adjust Pull Compensation
In the Stitch Values panel, enter the number of Target Stitches either as a percentage or absolute value. This value sets how much the density of each stitch type needs to change to achieve the target stitch count. The spacing and length settings for each stitch type automatically adjust according to the new overall density setting.
In the Pull Compensation field, enter the amount by which to overstitch (or understitch) in order to compensate for fabric pull. If the design was originally created in ES Designer, or has been converted to EMB format, enter a pull compensation value which will be applied to all objects in the design. See also Compensating for fabric stretch.
In the Dimensions panel, adjust the Width and Height values to scale the selected objects as required.
Adjust Width and Height values to scale selected objects
Enter the new sizes as an absolute value or as a percentage of the current size. The default 100% for stitch spacing and length adjusts automatically to reflect the new density. See Scaling objects using object properties for details. 6 Click OK.
V9
Chapter 9
196
Stitches for Tatami, Satin, Run, and Program Split objects are regenerated using the new settings.
100%: 5195 stitches
20%: 987 stitches
Note Like the Object Properties dialog, the Process dialog lets you specify design dimensions precisely.
Adjusting stitch density of certain stitch types

Use Process (Generate toolbar) to change the density of selected stitch types in a design. The Process tool lets you adjust the density of one or more stitch types across the whole or selected parts of a design. You do not have to select objects individually, and you can change density as a percentage. Even if the selection includes objects created with different stitch types, you can change the density of only one type. For example, you can select the whole design, then change the density of all Satin objects. The changes are reflected in the properties of the individual objects.
To adjust the density of certain stitch types

1 2 Select the design or objects you want to process. Click the Process icon.
V9
197
The Process dialog opens.
Select Auto Spacing
Adjust stitch densities
In the Stitch Values panel, adjust the density for each stitch type as required. You can select the new spacing or length as a percentage of the original from 10% to 1000% or as an absolute value (in millimeters). Note If you do not want to change the density of a certain stitch type, leave it as 100%.
Select the checkbox if you want to use Auto Spacing for Satin stitching. If the checkbox is cleared, Auto Spacing will be removed from all Satin elements of the design which will change to fixed spacing. If the checkbox is dimmed, the original Auto Spacing values are retained. See also Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch.
In the Pull Compensation field, enter the amount by which to overstitch (or understitch) in order to compensate for fabric pull.
V9
Chapter 9
198
If the design was originally created in ES Designer, or has been converted to EMB format, enter a pull compensation value which will be applied to all objects in the design. See also Compensating for fabric stretch.
Program Split
Tatami stitches
Tatami stitch spacing reduced (density increased)
Program Split stitch spacing reduced (density increased)
Click OK. Note Like the Object Properties dialog, the Process dialog lets you specify design dimensions precisely.
Removing small stitches automatically

Very small stitches can damage the fabric and cause thread or needle breakage. Before you stitch out a design, you can remove unwanted small stitches automatically. See also Filtering stitches by stitch length. Tip For small stitches to be removed automatically whenever you output the design, select the Run Small Stitch Filter on Output checkbox in the Options dialog. See Setting other options for details.
To remove small stitches automatically

1 Select Stitch > Small Stitches. The Small Stitches dialog opens.
Enter minimum stitch length to keep
V9
199
2 3
Enter the minimum stitch length you want to keep. Click OK. All stitches shorter than the specified length will be removed from the design. Tip If the new value is smaller than the previous value, regenerate stitches for the object before you stitch out. Check the Status bar for the new stitch count.
Controlling corner stitching

Sharp points in a shape may cause a bunching of stitches and needle penetrations which can create a hard spot in the embroidery and may damage the fabric or needle. Smart Corners helps you control sharp corners in Input A and Input C objects. There are two types Mitre Corners and Cap Corners. Specify the corner angle at which either will be automatically invoked. Mitre Corners create a sharp line at the intersection of the two columns. Use them primarily for corner angles of 75 to 90. Cap Corners are suitable for very sharp corners as they generate fewer stitches.
Smart Corners OFF
Mitre Corners
Cap Corners
Applying Smart Corners

Use Smart Corners (Stitch Types toolbar) to control the stitching out of sharp corners in Input A and Input C objects. Right-click to adjust settings. Apply Smart Corners to reduce the number of stitches and the risk of bunched, distorted embroidery, in sharp corners.
To apply Smart Corners
! Click the Smart Corners icon with or without objects selected.
V9
Chapter 9
200
With no objects selected, Smart Corners are automatically generated for all new objects. For both new or selected objects, Smart Corners are based on current properties. See Adjusting Smart Corners settings for details.
Smart Corners OFF
Mitre Corner
Cap Corner
Note You can also apply Smart Corners in Input C objects in conjunction with sharp corner rounding. See Rounding sharp corners for details.
! Click again to turn off the effect. Adjusting Smart Corners settings
Right-click Smart Corners (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Smart Corners settings. You can set the angles at which Mitre Corners and Cap Corners will be applied, and specify the overlap and stitch length allowances. Note You can use Mitre Corner and Cap Corner options together. For example, you may wish a corner with an angle less than 75 to be mitred, but sharp corners of less than 45 to be capped.
To adjust Smart Corners settings

1 Right-click the Smart Corners icon.
V9
201
The Effects > Smart Corners tab opens.

Select Smart Corners Adjust Mitre Corner settings
Adjust Cap Corner settings
2 3
Select the Smart Corners Stitching checkbox. In the Mitre Corner panel, select the checkbox, and enter the following values:
! Mitre below Angle: the angle below which to apply Mitre Corner.
Any corners less than this angle are mitred.
mitre below angle: 75 mitre below angle: 45
For example, set ES Designer to automatically mitre corners with an angle of less than 75, but stitch wider angles using normal fill stitch values.
! Mitre Overlap: the distance by which the stitches are allowed to

overlap in the center of the corner.
mitre overlap: 0.5 mm mitre overlap: 1.5 mm
In the Cap Corner panel, select the checkbox, and enter the following values:
V9
Chapter 9
202
! Cap below Angle: the angle below which to apply capped corners.
Any corners less than this angle are capped.
cap below angle: 45 cap below angle: 75
If Mitre Corners are also selected, then the cap angle is usually smaller than the mitre angle.
! Capping overlap: the number of overlapping rows to allow where

the sections of the cap join.
capping overlap: 1 capping overlap: 3
! Max Capping stitch length: the maximum length of cap stitches.

Cap Corners with stitches exceeding this length will become Mitre Corners. This prevents long and short stitches appearing next to each other. 5 Click OK.
Rounding sharp corners

Right-click Input C (Input toolbar) to set sharp corner rounding. ES Designer applies rounding to sharp corners by default. Round Sharp Corners is available for Input C objects to give you the option of sharp or round corner points. The option is only available in conjunction with the Smart Corners effect, and is typically used with the Cap Corner option. See also Applying Smart Corners.
V9
203
To round sharp corners

Select Round Sharp Corners
Select the Round Sharp Corners checkbox. This checkbox is only enabled when Smart Corners is turned on in the Effects dialog. See Controlling corner stitching for details.
Click OK.
sharp corner
rounded corners
Splitting long stitches with Auto Split

Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Auto Split to new or selected Satin objects. If a Satin shape is wide, some stitches may exceed the maximum stitch the particular embroidery machine can produce. When Auto Split is applied, ES Designer breaks any long Satin stitches into shorter ones. It also distributes needle penetrations in a random pattern so that they do not form a line in the middle of the shape.
Auto Split OFF
Auto Split ON
V9
Chapter 9
204
While Auto Split is used primarily to prevent long stitches in wide columns, it can also be used as an alternative to Tatami fill. Auto Split looks more Satin-like and works well with turning stitches, creating soft lines and a little more depth. By contrast, Tatami is flat and can show unwanted patterns with tight curves. Note If you want to preserve the Satin effect for example, if only a few stitches are too long you can use Auto Jump instead. Auto Split must be turned off for Auto Jump to take effect. See Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump for details. If you do not apply either Auto Split or Auto Jump, the stitches are split into smaller stitches of equal length. The line formed by the needle penetrations will be visible in the final embroidery.
To split long stitches with Auto Split

Select Auto Split Adjust max. and min. stitch lengths
2 3
Select the Auto Split checkbox. In the Length field, enter the maximum Satin stitch length to allow before Auto Split is applied. Stitches that exceed this value will be split into smaller stitches. This value can be smaller than the maximum stitch generally used in the design.
Tip Use a length of 7.00 mm to preserve the Satin effect.
V9
205
In the Minimum Stitch field, enter the shortest stitch that can be generated when using Auto Split.
Length: 4 mm Minimum Stitch: 5 mm
Click OK. Tip As an alternative to Auto Split, try a textured Tatami fill or Program Split. Or, use User Defined Split to manage split lines in Satin fills. See Textured Fills for details.
with Tatami
with Program Split
with User Defined Split
Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump

Embroidery machines have a maximum possible stitch length which is determined by the frame movement limitations of the machine itself. If a stitch exceeds this, it is broken into smaller stitches. This can affect the appearance of the embroidery, especially Satin fills. By applying Auto Jump,
V9
Chapter 9
206
you can preserve long stitches in an object by turning them into a series of jumps.
Auto Jump OFF
Auto Jump ON
Note Auto Jump is applied by default to connectors. See also Using jumps as connectors. Auto Jump can be used, for example, with manually digitized underlays. It can also be used to create quilted effects, for example, by applying it to Satin areas that are over-stitched with Run stitch or Motif Fill.
To create a narrow column with more loft than normal Satin, apply Auto Jump, in conjunction with a suitable underlay, with the maximum stitch length set to a small value, e.g. 6 mm. If the cover stitches are short, splitting them with a jump makes them looser and thus more effectively raised off the fabric. See also Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays. Note The maximum frame movement is defined in the software by the machine format values. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details.
Applying Auto Jump

Use Auto Jump (Stitch Types toolbar) to preserve long stitches in new and selected objects. Right-click to adjust settings.
V9
207
Apply Auto Jump to objects with stitches that exceed the maximum stitch length.
NO jump stitches additional needle penetrations jump stitches not trimmed
Note Many machines trim by jumps. Thus, to prevent the trimmers being activated, usually only one or two jumps between needle penetrations may be used. See also Setting trim functions.
To apply Auto Jump
! Click the Auto Jump icon with or without objects selected.

With no objects selected, Auto Jump is applied to all new objects. For both new or selected objects, Auto Jump is based on current properties.
! Click again to turn off the effect. Adjusting Auto Jump settings
Right-click Auto Jump (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings. You can adjust Auto Jump settings to vary the length at which stitches are converted to jumps, the length of the jumps themselves, and the method of calculating stitch length.
To adjust Auto Jump settings

1 Right-click the Auto Jump icon.
V9
Chapter 9
208
The Effects > Auto Jump tab opens.

Select Auto Jump Enter maximum stitch and jump length values Select calculation method
2 3
Select the Auto Jump checkbox. In the Maximum Stitch field, enter the maximum stitch length to allow. Stitches exceeding this value will have Auto Jump applied. Note This value must be smaller than or equal to the maximum stitch length possible for the selected machine format. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details.
In the Jump Length field, enter the length of each jump. Smaller jumps increase the time required to stitch out, but move the frame more smoothly across the design.
In the Length Calculation panel, click the required method of calculating stitch length.
! Along Radius: measures the distance between two consecutive

needle penetrations.
! Along Axis: measures either the horizontal or vertical movement

required for the stitch.
measured along radius maximum stitch maximum stitch Y measured along axis
X maximum stitch
The option you select depends on the way your machine measures stitch length. See your embroidery machines documentation for details. 6 Click OK.
V9
209
Setting automatic start and end points

Before stitching, some embroidery machines require you to position the starting needle exactly above the first needle penetration point. Use Auto Start and End to connect the first and last stitches in the design. This makes it easy to position the needle before stitching, and reduces the chance of the needle hitting the side of the frame.
To set automatic start and end points

1 Select Stitch > Auto Start and End. The Auto Start and End dialog opens.
Select Use Auto Start and End Select a centering method
Select preset end point
Click to enter separate start and end points Specify how to match connecting stitches Specify the connector type
2 3 4
Select the Use Auto Start and End checkbox to connect the first and last stitches in the design. Select the Maintain Automatically checkbox to maintain the design center after modifying the design. Select a centering method.
! Auto Start and End: by default, connecting stitches are created

from the start and end points to the center of the design. Select one of the nine preset end points.
! Return to Start Point: creates a connecting stitch from the end

point to the start point.
V9
Chapter 9
210
! Digitize Auto Start/End Point: creates connecting stitches from

the start and end points to a point you define. If you select this, you are prompted to select the point after you click OK. Click the Separately checkbox to enter separate start and end points. 5 Select to match connecting stitches on the Horizontal plane, Vertical plane or both in the Match On panel.
Match on vertical
Match on horizontal
Match on both
Select the type and length of the connecting stitches in the Connectors panel. See Connecting Embroidery Objects for details. Click OK. Connecting stitches will be inserted as required before the first and after the last stitch of the design.
V9
211
PART III
DIGITIZING WITH ARTWORK

There are two broad categories of artwork file, both of which can be imported into ES Designer for use as digitizing backdrops vector and bitmap. To create good quality embroidery, you need to choose or create suitable artwork of either format. See Digitizing with Vector Drawings for details.
Digitizing with vector drawings

This section describes how to create drawing objects using the drawing tools as well as how to import them from third-party applications. It also explains how to merge, trim and split overlapping drawing or embroidery objects using the Shaping tools. See Digitizing with Vector Drawings for details.
Digitizing with bitmap images

This section describes how to choose suitable artwork for digitizing purposes as well as how to scan it into ES Designer and edit it before use. It also describes how to insert and save bitmap images into ES Designer, as well as how to show and hide them as you digitize. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details.
V9
212
Preparing images for automatic digitizing

This section describes how to prepare images for automatic digitizing. It explains how to crop images for digitizing as well as how to prepare both outlined and non-outlined images. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details.
Automatic digitizing
This section describes how to automatically convert bitmap images to embroidery objects and complete designs, as well as how to create embroidery from grayscale images. See Automatic Digitizing for details.
V9
213
Chapter 10
Digitizing with Vector Drawings
ES Designer provides tools to draw shapes and outlines directly on screen. Alternatively, insert or paste vector drawings created in third-party drawing packages for use as digitizing backdrops. Scale and transform them in the same way as embroidery objects. You can also select colors for drawing object outlines and fills. When working with overlapping drawing or embroidery objects, merge, trim or split them using the Shaping tools.
Tip Vector drawings have the advantage over bitmap images that they can be converted directly to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods. This allows you to concentrate on design shapes without having to think about stitch properties and sequence. See also Converting between object types. This section describes how to create drawing objects using the drawing tools as well as how to import them from third-party applications. It also explains how to merge, trim and split overlapping drawing or embroidery objects using the Shaping tools.
Creating drawings in ES Designer

ES Designer drawing tools let you draft shapes and outlines on screen. Drawing objects can then be converted to embroidery objects with the
V9
214
application of manual input methods and stitch types. See Converting vector drawings to embroidery objects for details. Tip ES Designer lets you select colors for drawing object outlines and fills. These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See Coloring drawing objects for details.
Drawing straight lines

Use Line (Drawing toolbar) to create straight line drawing objects. Draw straight lines in your design using the Line drawing tool. Note You can convert line drawing objects to embroidery objects using an outline input method e.g. Run, Triple Run, or Motif Run or Input C. See Converting vector drawings to embroidery objects for details.
To draw straight lines

1 2 3 Click the Line icon. Click the start point of the line. Click the end point. Tip To constrain the line vertically, horizontally or in 15 angles, press Ctrl as you mark the end point.
Drawing open shapes

Use Polyline (Drawing toolbar) to create open-ended drawing objects. Draw lines of any shape using the Polyline drawing tool. Enter reference points to create the shape you want.
V9
215
Note You can convert polyline drawing objects to embroidery objects using Input C or an outline input method e.g. Run, Triple Run, or Motif Run. See Converting vector drawings to embroidery objects for details.
To draw open shapes

1 2 Click the Polyline icon. Mark reference points to draw the shape of the line.
! Click to enter a corner point. ! Right-click to enter a curve point.

curve point
corner point
Press Enter. Tip ES Designer lets you select colors for drawing object outlines and fills. These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See Coloring drawing objects for details.
Drawing polygons
Use Polygon (Drawing toolbar) to create closed drawing objects. Draw closed shapes using the Polygon drawing tool. Enter reference points to create the shape you want. Note You can convert polygon drawing objects to embroidery objects using Input C, Complex Fill, or an outline input method e.g. Run, Triple Run, or Motif Run. See Converting vector drawings to embroidery objects for details.
To draw polygons
1 2 Click the Polygon icon. Digitize the shape by marking reference points on screen.
! Click to enter a corner point.
V9
Chapter 10
216
! Right-click to enter a curve point.
curve point corner point
Tip To constrain the line between two points to 15 increments, press Ctrl as you mark the second point. 3 Press Enter to close the shape. Tip ES Designer lets you select colors for drawing object outlines and fills. These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See Coloring drawing objects for details.
Drawing rectangles and squares

Use Rectangle (Drawing toolbar) to create rectangular or square drawing objects. Draw rectangles and squares using the Rectangle drawing tool. Note You can convert rectangle drawing objects to embroidery objects using Input C, Complex Fill, or an outline input method e.g. Run, Triple Run, or Motif Run. See Converting vector drawings to embroidery objects for details.
To draw rectangles and squares

1 2 Click the Rectangle icon. Click to mark the corner of the rectangle. An outline attaches to the mouse pointer.
V9
217
Move the pointer until the outline is the size and shape you require, then click again.
Click to enter corner point Drag pointer, click again
Note To draw a square, hold down Ctrl as you move the pointer.
Drawing circles and ellipses

Use Ellipse (Drawing toolbar) to create circular or elliptical drawing objects. Draw circles and ellipses using the Ellipse drawing tool.
Note You can convert ellipse drawing objects to embroidery objects using Input C, Complex Fill, or an outline input method e.g. Run, Triple Run, or Motif Run. See Converting vector drawings to embroidery objects for details.
To draw circles and ellipses

1 2 3 Click the Ellipse icon. Click to mark the center of the circle or ellipse. The outline of a circle attaches to the mouse pointer. Move the pointer until the outline is the diameter you require, then click again.
! To draw a perfect circle, press Enter.
V9
Chapter 10
218
! To draw an ellipse, move the pointer again, then mark a second

radius point when the outline is the required size. Press Enter.
Click to enter center point Press Enter for circle OR Mark a point for ellipse
Drag pointer
Tip ES Designer lets you select colors for drawing object outlines and fills. These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See Coloring drawing objects for details.
Importing and exporting vector drawings

You can insert or paste vector drawings created in third-party drawing packages for use as digitizing backdrops. You can then convert these to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods or with the Point & Stitch tools. See also Converting vector drawings to embroidery objects and Digitizing shapes automatically with Point & Stitch. Note The Auto Trace feature lets you convert scanned artwork to drawing objects. See Converting bitmaps to outlines with Auto Trace for details.
Inserting vector drawings

Use Insert Drawing File (Image menu) to insert a vector drawing for use as a backdrop. Drawings from third-party applications can be inserted into ES Designer in a variety of native and interchange vector formats. You can choose to remove overlapping objects in vector drawings by flattening them. This eliminates overlapping areas of stitching when drawing objects are converted to embroidery objects. You can also import vector drawings (not DXF) as bitmaps. See also Supported drawing and image formats. Tip You can also paste drawings directly into ES Designer through the Windows clipboard. See Pasting vector drawings for details.
V9
219
To insert a vector drawing

1 2 Create a new file in ES Designer or open the design file into which you want to insert the drawing. Select Image > Insert Drawing File. The Open dialog opens.
Select to remove overlapping objects Select to insert as bitmap rather than vector
3 4 5
From the Look In list, select the folder where you keep your drawing files. From the Files of Type list, select a suitable vector drawing format and select the file you want to insert. If you are working with DXF files:
! Click Options.
The DXF File Options dialog opens.
! Select Inches or Millimeters from the Units of Measurement list

and click OK. If this information is not specified, the drawing may not display at the correct size.
V9
Chapter 10
220
Select the As Bitmap checkbox to insert the vector drawing as a bitmap image.
imported as vector drawing individual objects can be selected
imported as bitmap image individual objects cannot be selected
Note DXF files cannot be imported as bitmaps. 7 Select the Flatten checkbox to remove any overlapping areas from the vector drawing.
hidden areas removed hidden areas preserved
drawing objects flattened
drawing objects not flattened
Note If a vector drawing is imported as a bitmap, it is flattened automatically. 8 9 Select the Preview checkbox to see a preview of the vector drawing. Click Open to insert the drawing into the design window. Note To work with individual vector objects in the drawing, you need to ungroup them first. See Grouping and ungrouping objects for details.
Exporting vector drawings

You can export vector drawings and embroidery designs from ES Designer in various vector formats for use in third party programs. This can be useful, for example, for screen printing. See Supported drawing and image formats for details.
V9
221
To export a vector drawing

1 2 Select the vector drawing or embroidery design. Select File > Export As. The Export As dialog opens.
3 4 5
Select a folder in the Save In field. Select a format from the File Type dropdown list. Enter a new file name and click Save.
Pasting vector drawings

Use Paste Drawing > As Vector (Edit menu) to paste a vector drawing for use as a digitizing backdrop. You can insert a vector drawing into ES Designer by copying it from another embroidery design or graphics application, and pasting it into your design.
To paste vector drawings

1 2 3 4 Select the vector drawing or embroidery design you want to copy and paste. Copy it to the Windows clipboard. Create a new file in ES Designer or open the design file into which you want to insert the drawing. Select Edit > Paste Drawing > As Vector.
V9
Chapter 10
222
The drawing is pasted into the design.
Note You cannot flatten vectors using Paste.
Manipulating vector drawings

Vector drawings may consist of grouped drawing objects. You can ungroup these to work with them individually. ES Designer lets you remove unnecessary control points by applying smoothing to individual ungrouped objects. You can select colors for outlines as well as fills. The Make Complex Shape feature lets you combine any number of drawing curves into a single complex shape i.e. a shape with holes in it. You can also show or hide vector drawings in the design. Tip You can scale and transform vector drawings in the same way as embroidery objects. Unlike bitmap images, any changes you make to drawing objects are updated and saved with the design file. See also Arranging and Transforming Objects.
Smoothing vector drawing curves

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) in combination with Image > Smooth Drawing Curves to remove unnecessary control points from vector drawing objects. When you insert a vector drawing into a design, control points the same as for embroidery objects are added to the outline. On shapes where the angle changes constantly, the software may insert hundreds of control
V9
223
points, making reshaping difficult. To remove unnecessary control points, ungroup the drawing, and apply smoothing to the vector drawing objects.
Precision: 0.1mm
without smoothing
Precision: 0.5mm
To smooth vector drawing curves

1 Select the drawing object (or objects) to smooth. Note You can only smooth drawing objects that have been ungrouped and selected. However, you can select multiple objects. 2 3 Click the Reshape Object icon. Control points display around the vector drawing object. Select Image > Smooth Drawing Curves. The Smooth Drawing Curves dialog opens.
Enter smoothing precision value
In the Precision field, enter the smoothing precision value. This value controls how closely the smoothed outline follows the original. The larger the precision value, the fewer the control points.
Click OK.
Coloring drawing objects

Use Options (Special menu) to select Show True Colors. Use Properties (Generate toolbar) to select colors for drawing outlines and fills.
V9
Chapter 10
224
Vector drawings may be composed of black outlines only. ES Designer lets you select colors for outlines as well as fills. These can be different to the embroidery objects you may create from them. Coloring makes drawing objects easier to interpret. For example, a solid fill color might suggest Satin or Tatami, while a fill pattern may be interpreted as Motif Fill or Program Split. Tip Colored drawing outlines are also important for appliqu cutting. If appliqu objects are digitized in ES Designer, they can be ungrouped, duplicated, and sent to the laser or other type of cutter. Some can cut several layers of fabric at the same time. The cutting depth is controlled by object colors. These can be set within ES Designer without having to export the shapes to a graphics package. See also Cutting appliqu shapes.
To color drawing objects

1 2 Select Special > Options. Select the View Drawing tab.
Select Show True Colors
3 4 5
Select the Show True Colors checkbox. Click OK. Select a drawing object and right-click.
vector drawing with black outline
Click the Properties icon. The Object Properties dialog opens.
V9
225
Select the Drawing Object tab.
Select outline style Select outline width Select outline color
Select an outline from the Line panel:
! Select an outline style from the Style list. ! Select an outline width from the Width field. ! Click Color and select an outline color from the Color dialog.
Select fill color Select fill style Alternatively, select pattern fill
Select a fill from the Fill panel:
! Select a solid color by selecting the Solid option. ! Click the button and select a fill color from the Color dialog. ! Select a pattern from the Style dropdown list.
Alternatively, select a pattern (BMP format) from the Pattern button. 10 Click OK.
outline style and color changed
fill style and color changed
Note To view the changes in the production worksheet, select File > Print Preview. Then click Options and select the Drawings checkbox.
V9
Chapter 10
226
Combining drawing curves into complex shapes

The Make Complex Shape feature lets you combine any number of drawing curves into a single complex shape i.e. a shape with holes in it. This can then be converted directly to an embroidery object. See also Shaping drawing and embroidery objects.
Tip You can apply either Complex Fill, Input C, an outline input method Run, Triple Run, or Motif Run or the Tatami Fill tool to complex shapes, preserving any holes within them. See also Digitizing shapes with Tatami Fill.
To combine drawing curves in complex shapes

1 2 Insert a vector drawing or create one using the drawing tools. Select the objects you want to combine.
Tip Ungroup any imported drawing object in order to select the required component objects. 3 Select Image > Make Complex Shape or press Shift + H.
V9
227
The selected objects become a single Complex Shape drawing object.
You can use the Offset Object feature to digitize the complex shape. See Creating outlines and filling holes for details.
complex shape object created and colored
Input C applied
Run applied
Motif Run applied
Tip You can select any number of curves. Different selections create different complex shapes.
V9
Chapter 10
228
Tip By copying the original drawing objects, you can also create borders and filled holes. See also Creating outlines and filling holes.
Creating overlapped complex shapes

If drawing objects are overlapping, Make Complex Shape selects the largest area and clips off the remaining shape. Depending on the shapes you use, you can create combined or clipped shapes. See also Shaping drawing and embroidery objects.
To create overlapped complex shapes

1 Insert a vector drawing or create one using the drawing tools.
Decide how you want to combine the shapes.
! If you want to combine the overlapping shapes, draw a box around

them and select all objects.
V9
229
! If you want to clip the overlapping shapes, simply select them.
Select Image > Make Complex Shape. The selected objects become a single drawing object. Make Complex Shape selects the largest area and clips off the remaining shape. See also Trimming drawing and embroidery objects.
Viewing and hiding vector drawings

Right-click Show Drawing (Standard toolbar) to set the option to hide vector drawings. You can show or hide vector drawings, together with any bitmap images in the design. Hiding them does not delete them. Note You cannot hide grouped vector drawings.
To view or hide vector drawings
! Click the Show Drawing icon.

When selected, backdrop drawings are visible. Note If a design includes both bitmap images and vector drawings, both will display. See also Viewing and hiding bitmap images.
! To hide the drawing, click Show Drawing again.
V9
Chapter 10
230
! To hide a backdrop image while showing a drawing, right-click the Show

Drawing icon.
Deselect View Images
! Deselect the View Images checkbox and click OK.
vector drawing together with bitmap image
Shaping drawing and embroidery objects

When working with overlapping drawing or embroidery objects, you can merge, trim or split them using the Shaping tools. All shaped embroidery objects convert Complex Fill, drawing objects remain as drawing objects, while combinations convert to Complex Fill.
V9
231
Shaping tools summary table

Source Apply Tool Result Description
Weld
Selected objects are combined into a single object. The resulting object takes the properties stitch color and type, etc of the topmost object.
Flatten
Only areas unique to each selected object are retained. All overlapping areas are removed.
Intersect
Only areas common to all selected objects are retained. All non-overlapping areas are removed.
Exclude
Areas where pairs of selected objects overlap are removed, starting from the topmost object.
V9
Chapter 10
232
Source
Apply Tool
Result
Description The topmost object is retained, but all of the areas overlapping with other selected objects are removed. The bottommost object is retained, but all of the areas overlapping with other selected objects are removed.
Front-Back
Back-Front
Divide
The objects are split wherever overlaps occur and all hidden areas are removed.
Combine
Areas where pairs of selected objects overlap are removed, starting from the topmost object. All resulting objects share the properties stitch color and type, etc of the topmost object.
Tip The Make Complex Shape feature lets you combine any number of drawing curves into a single complex shape. This can then be converted to an embroidery object. See Combining drawing curves into complex shapes for details.
Merging drawing and embroidery objects

Use Weld (Shaping toolbar) to merge overlapping objects into a single flattened object. Use Combine (Shaping toolbar) to merge the properties of overlapping objects and trim overlapping areas.
V9
233
Merge selected objects using the Weld or Combine tools.
Combine
Weld
To merge drawing and embroidery objects
! Select the drawing or embroidery objects to shape. ! Click Weld to merge overlapping objects into a single flattened object.
Weld applied (petals only)
Tip Make symmetrical shapes by digitizing one half, duplicating and reflecting, then welding the duplicate shapes.
Weld applied
V9
Chapter 10
234
! Click Combine to convert embroidery objects into multiple objects

sharing the properties stitch color and type, etc of the topmost selected object.
Combine applied (petals only)
If drawing tools are used as the input method, Combine converts them to a single complex shape.
Combine applied (petals only)
If overlapping areas comprise an even number, all are removed when Combine is applied. If the overlapping areas comprise an odd number, the topmost area remains. Compare this with the behavior of the Exclude tool. See Trimming drawing and embroidery objects for details. Tip Cut objects in half by drawing a line through them and applying Divide. Apply Combine to create closed objects or Weld to fuse two objects.
Weld + Run applied to resulting objects
Divide applied
Weld + Run + Combine applied to resulting objects
V9
235
Trimming drawing and embroidery objects

Use Intersect (Shaping toolbar) to trim overlapping areas so that only those intersected by all selected objects remain. Use Exclude (Shaping toolbar) to trim overlapping objects and preserve their individual properties. Use Front-Back (Shaping toolbar) to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped areas of the topmost object remain. Use Back-Front (Shaping toolbar) to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped areas of the bottommost object remain. Trim selected objects using the Intersect, Exclude, Front-Back or Back-Front tools.
Intersect used
Exclude used
Front-Back used
Back-Front used
Note Use the Remove Overlaps feature to maintain shapes but remove the underlying layer of stitching. See Removing underlying stitching for details.
To trim drawing and embroidery objects
! Select the drawing or embroidery objects to shape. ! Click Intersect to trim overlapping areas so that only those intersected
by all selected objects remain.
Intersect applied
V9
Chapter 10
236
! Click Exclude to trim overlapping objects and preserve their individual

properties. The result is similar to Combine except that object properties are not merged.
Exclude applied (petals only)
If overlapping areas comprise an even number, all are removed when Exclude is applied. If the overlapping areas comprise an odd number, the bottommost area remains. Compare this with the behavior of the Combine tool. See Merging drawing and embroidery objects for details. Tip Use Exclude to cut holes in Complex Fill objects.
! Use Front-Back to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped

areas of the topmost object remain.
Front-Back applied
Tip Use Image > Make Complex Shape or press Shift + H to trim overlapping shapes in unfilled drawing objects.
! Use Back-Front to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped

areas of the bottommost object remain.
Back-Front applied
V9
237
Splitting drawing and embroidery objects

Use Flatten (Shaping toolbar) to trim all overlaps while retaining the original objects. Use Divide (Shaping toolbar) to split selected objects into separate adjoining objects wherever they intersect with other selected objects. Split selected objects using the Flatten or Divide tools. These tools preserve the outlines of the original shapes.
Flatten
Divide
To split drawing and embroidery objects
! Select the drawing or embroidery objects to shape. ! Click Flatten to trim all overlaps while retaining the original objects.
Flatten applied
V9
Chapter 10
238
! Click Divide to split selected objects into separate adjoining objects. All
overlapped areas become discrete objects.
Divide applied (petals only)
V9
239
Chapter 11
Digitizing with Bitmap Images
Artwork can be inserted, pasted or scanned into ES Designer for use as digitizing templates or backdrops.
Backdrops can help you to:
! Digitize shapes manually.

You trace shapes and lines over the artwork using the appropriate input methods. Using a bitmap image in this way is like using an enlargement drawing and digitizer tablet, except that everything is done on-screen. See Digitizing Methods for details.
! Digitize shapes automatically with Point & Stitch.

The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize shapes in bitmap images and vector drawings automatically without using manual input methods. See Digitizing shapes automatically with Point & Stitch for details.
! Digitize complete images automatically with Smart Design.

Smart Design automatically converts bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery. See Automatic Digitizing for details.
! Digitize photographs with Photo Flash.

Photo Flash lets you create embroidery designs directly from photographs and other grayscale bitmap images. See Creating embroidery designs from photographs for details.
V9
240
From within ES Designer you can open images in MS Paint, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, or Paint Shop Pro. Images updated in this way are automatically re-imported into ES Designer. Tip Textured backgrounds can also be imported to show what a design will look like on real fabric. Almost any artwork can be used photographs, magazine pictures, clipart drawings, and even fabric samples. See also Changing background colors and fabrics. This section describes how to choose suitable artwork for digitizing purposes as well as how to scan it into ES Designer and edit it before use. It also describes how to insert and save bitmap images into ES Designer, as well as how to show and hide them as you digitize.
Choosing suitable artwork

For both manual and automatic digitizing purposes, clean images, sometimes referred to as cartoons, work best. Such images have a limited number of solid colors which in turn have well-defined outlines. Ideally, they are:
! well defined, where each shape is made up of pixels of the same color ! clearly blocked, where each shape is a stitchable size, at least 1 sq mm ! saved at a color depth of at least 256 colors (8 bit), or preferably millions
of colors (16 bit). (Images are automatically reduced to 256 colors or less when loaded into ES Designer.)
clean image with well-defined outlines
clean image with well-defined color blocks
complex image, needs editing to remove background and improve outlines
ES Designer automatic digitizing techniques Smart Design and Point & Stitch produce best results with images of the type found in clipart libraries or created from scratch in a graphics package. Automatic digitizing can work with images from other sources but they require some preparation. This is because most commonly available images are not made
V9
241
up of solid colors. Scanners introduce noise, while graphics packages perform dithering and anti-aliasing to improve image print quality. Automatic digitizing works least effectively with photographic images which may contain many dithered colors and complex forms. With photographs, however, you can pick out shapes that you want to embroider, leaving out unnecessary detail. Alternatively, Photo Flash is available to create embroidery designs from scanned grayscale photographs.
Scanned images
Images scanned from hardcopy drawings or existing embroidery typically contain a lot of introduced noise. While they can be used as input to automatic digitizing, once again, best results are achieved with relatively clean images consisting of solid color blocks. Typically, logos and simple drawings scanned from business cards, letterheads, books, magazines, cards all fall into this category. Noisy images typically need to be prepared by reducing the color count and sharpening the outlines. See Image preparation techniques for details.
image containing a lot of scanner noise
Dithered images
Dithering is a software technique which combines existing colors in a checkerboard arrangement of pixels. It is typically used to simulate colors that are missing from an image palette.
dithered color blocks
V9
Chapter 11
242
Like noisy images, dithered images need to be color-reduced before use. Be aware, however, that while the software is able to process dithered colors within a defined outline, it does not work so well with non-outlined images. See Image preparation techniques for details.
Anti-aliased images
Anti-aliasing is a software technique similar to dithering which is used to soften hard outlines where color blocks intersect. It produces smoother outlines by blurring the pixels where colors join. Where anti-aliasing is deliberately used to blur outlines, these need to be sharpened before use with automatic digitizing. See Image preparation techniques for details.
anti-aliased outlines
Scanning artwork into ES Designer

If you have existing artwork, you can scan it with a TWAIN-compatible scanner using the ES Designer scanning function. It is important to scan your artwork properly if you intend to use one of the automatic digitizing techniques; the scanned image quality will affect the quality of the final embroidered design.
Preparing artwork for scanning

With embroidery design, less is more. You do not need every detail in an image to create a design. You use the structure of the image rather than the fine details of texture and color. To simplify artwork, you can cover it with tracing paper and draw only the essential shapes and lines which will be filled with stitches. When scanning, take away the original artwork and put white paper behind the tracing paper. Shiny surfaces, such as glossy photographs, may not scan well. Cover them with tracing paper. If the artwork has very light colors, highlight outlines with a fine black felt-tip pen.
Scanning resolution
Most scanners require you to enter scanning resolution information. Resolution determines the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to create a drawing. Generally speaking, the smaller the source image and/or more
V9
243
detail it contains, the higher the resolution needs to be. Use the following table as a guide. Type of artwork Business cards, letter heads Hand sketches Photos and images Commercial art, line drawing Scanning resolution 150 - 300 dpi 150 - 300 dpi 150 - 300 dpi 72 - 150 dpi
Color mode
Most scanners also require you to enter color mode information. First decide whether your image is line art (black and white drawing), sketch, color picture, or black and white or color photograph, then choose an appropriate mode. Black and white mode produces the smallest files. Color photograph and grayscale modes generate 256 color images and produce similar sized files. RGB, True Color or millions of colors modes generate 16.7 million colors and produce the biggest files. Use the table below to decide which mode is suitable for use with your image. Source image Line art Example Description Two colors usually black and white Recommended color mode * Black/white drawing Line art No. of colors in scanned image 2 2
Drawing/sketch
Sketch or drawing with shades of gray Shades of gray
Grayscale Line art
256 2
Black & white photograph
Black/white photo Grayscale
256 256
* Different scanning software uses different terms for the same mode.
V9
Chapter 11
244
Source image Color photograph
Example
Description Many colors
Recommended color mode * Color RGB Color photo
No. of colors in scanned image 16 million 256
Color picture
Two colors or more
Color RGB Millions of colors Color drawing
16 million 16 million 2 - 256
* Different scanning software uses different terms for the same mode.
Scanning tips ! Do not scan line art images in grayscale mode; grayscale scanning
produces fuzzy edges.
! Scan color images in RGB mode (millions of colors) rather than 256 color
mode. You may not notice any difference on screen. In fact the 256 color image may look better than the RGB image. However, ES Designer converts all images to 256 colors or less upon loading. It uses the extra information to produce a better image than if it was originally scanned at 256 colors.
scanned in 256 color mode
scanned in RGB color mode (millions of colors)
! Do not scan color images in CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black)
mode as this is only used for images that will be printed; the colors may be different from RGB colors.
! If the image needs to be rotated, do so while scanning. Rotating

afterwards may distort the image.
V9
245
Sharpening
Some scanning software lets you apply what is called sharpening as you scan. Sharpening compensates for the slight blurring in a scanned image by looking for any differences between colors in the image. Sharpening accentuates these differences which makes the image edges more defined. It does not increase the image details; it just makes them more obvious. In general, use sharpening with images that have well-defined outlines. Do not use it with non-outlined images.
scanned with sharpening
scanned without sharpening
Scanning bitmap images

Use Scan (File menu) to scan an image into ES Designer. You can scan images directly into ES Designer for use as digitizing backdrops. You can also scan in your own textured background to see what a design will look like on real fabric. Fabrics can be scanned to provide full, centered, backgrounds to your design, or as small samples which can be tiled to fill the screen. See also Changing background colors and fabrics. The scanning feature in ES Designer allows you to use most TWAIN-compatible scanners. You can use any scanning software provided that it can save the image in one of the compatible formats.
To scan bitmap images

1 2 3 4 5 Set up your scanner. See Setting up scanners for details. Prepare the artwork for scanning. See Preparing artwork for scanning for details. Create a new file or open a design you want to insert the drawing into. Select File > Scan. Your scanning program will open. Choose a scanning mode and resolution. See Scanning resolution and Color mode for details.
V9
Chapter 11
246
Tip If you are scanning a fabric background, set the scan to 256 colors, 100% and 72 dpi (dots per inch). These settings will give a small file which will display well on your screen without taking up too much disk space or memory. 6 7 8 9 Preview the image in the scanning program. Select the area to be scanned and scan the image. Save the scanned image in a compatible format image file to the Design folder. Scan the artwork. Note Scanned drawings are bitmaps can be saved separately from the design file. See Saving bitmap images as separate files for details.
Editing images before use

ES Designer allows you to crop bitmap images prior to use. From within ES Designer you can also open images directly in third-party graphics packages. Images updated in this way are automatically re-imported into ES Designer.
Cropping images for digitizing

Use Crop Image (Image menu) to crop a rectangular image. Use Crop Image with Polygon (Image menu) to crop a free form image. Before using bitmap images for design purposes, crop them to remove unnecessary detail and save processing time.
To crop images for digitizing

1 Select Image > Insert Drawing File to load an image.
V9
247
Select the image.
Select a cropping tool.
! Select Image > Crop Image to crop the image in rectangular form.
Click-and-drag a cropping rectangle around the part of the image you require.
! Select Image > Crop Image With Polygon to crop the image in
free form. Mark points to create a cropping shape around the part of the image you require and press Enter.
crop image
crop image with polygon
Tip Use the prompt line to guide you.
V9
Chapter 11
248
ES Designer crops the area inside the cropping rectangle or polygon selection. This process may take some time.
image cropped along marked points
image cropped in rectangular form
Editing images in third-party applications

Use Edit Image Using (Image menu) to edit images in a graphics package. Sometimes you need to edit images directly in a third-party graphics package. You would normally do this in order to eliminate backgrounds, flood-fill solid areas with color, add or reinforce outlines, or close gaps. From within ES Designer you can open images directly in MS Paint, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, or Paint Shop Pro. Images updated in this way are automatically re-imported into ES Designer. There are many graphics packages which can help you improve your scanned images. At one end of the spectrum there is the simple MS Paint program. This comes free with Windows but can handle few formats or color conversions. At the other end, there are professional tools such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Such programs can do almost anything but may be too expensive for occasional use. A compromise is Paint Shop Pro which has many of the features of the high-end tools but at a much lower cost.
To edit images in a third-party application

V9
249
Select the image.
background may be cleaned and eyes added
3 4
Select Image > Edit Image Using and select a graphics package. The image opens in the graphics package. Edit the image and save.
background cleaned
eyes added
Note If you return to ES Designer before closing the image in the graphics package, it appears in ES Designer overlaid with stripes.
file still open in the graphics package
Return to the graphics package and select either File > Close or File > Exit & Return <Filename>. In ES Designer, the stripes will disappear.
V9
Chapter 11
250
Inserting and saving bitmap images

Bitmap images can be inserted, pasted or scanned into ES Designer for use as digitizing backdrops. For both manual and automatic digitizing purposes, clean images, sometimes referred to as cartoons, work best. Scanners introduce noise, while graphics packages perform dithering and anti-aliasing to improve image print quality. See also Image preparation techniques.
partially digitized bitmap
original bitmap
Inserting bitmap images

Use Insert Drawing File (Image menu) to insert an image for use as a backdrop. You can insert bitmap images of various formats for use as digitizing backdrops. See Supported drawing and image formats for details. Note You can also insert vector drawing files. See Inserting vector drawings for details.
To insert bitmap images

1 Select Image > Insert Drawing File.
V9
251
The Open dialog opens.

Select folder
Select required format
2 3 4
Select a folder from the Look In list. Select a file type from the Files of Type list (e.g. BMP). Select the file you want to insert. Tip Select the Preview checkbox to preview the selected file.
Click Open.
Pasting bitmap images

Use Paste Drawing As Bitmap (Edit menu) to insert an image for use as a backdrop. You can insert a bitmap image into ES Designer by copying it from another embroidery design or graphics application, and pasting it directly into your design.
To paste bitmap images

1 2 3 4 Select the drawing you want to copy and paste. Copy it to the Windows clipboard. Create a new file in ES Designer or open the design file into which you want to insert the drawing. Select Edit > Paste Drawing > As Bitmap. The drawing is pasted into the design.
V9
Chapter 11
252
Saving bitmap images as separate files

Use Save Bitmap As (File menu) to save an image as a separate file. When you save a design containing a backdrop, a reference to the image file is saved together with information on its position in the design. When you re-open the design, the image file is re-inserted. If you scale or transform a backdrop, you need to save it as a separate file or the changes will be lost. Note Drawings that are scanned from within ES Designer must be saved this way or will be lost when the design is closed.
To save bitmap images as separate files

1 2 3 4 Select the backdrop. Select File > Save Bitmap As. In the Save In field, select a folder, then select a format from the File Type dropdown list. Enter a new file name and click Save. When you save the design, the reference is updated to use the new drawing file.
Manipulating bitmap images

Once you have inserted an image into ES Designer, you can set general properties such as size and position. You can also scale and transform bitmap images in ES Designer although it may be best to do this during scanning. Scaling after scanning can distort the image. See also Arranging and Transforming Objects. Tip If you scale or transform a backdrop, you need to save it as a separate file or the changes will be lost. See Saving bitmap images as separate files for details.
Smoothing bitmap images

When you scale or transform backdrops, the quality is sometimes reduced e.g. thin straight lines become jagged or distorted. By smoothing an image before and after scaling and transforming, you can preserve its quality, making it easy to digitize.
V9
253
To smooth a bitmap image

1 2 Double-click the image. The Object Properties dialog opens. Select the Image tab.
Select required smoothing option
Select the required smoothing option, depending on whether the majority of lines in the image are light or dark.
! Smoothing (dark lines): dark lines on the image are smoothed. ! Smoothing (light lines): light lines on the image are smoothed. ! No Smoothing: turned off.
4 5 If required, set the scaling or transforming options in the General tab. You can scale and transform objects both here and on-screen. Click OK.
no smoothing
light lines smoothed
dark lines smoothed
Note Scaling and transforming takes longer than usual when smoothing is applied.
Viewing and hiding bitmap images

Use Show Drawing (Standard toolbar) to show and hide backdrops. Right-click to set image display options.
V9
Chapter 11
254
You can show or hide a bitmap backdrop temporarily while you digitize. Depending on the view options set up in the Options dialog, the drawing displays in full color, or dimmed.
To view or hide bitmap images
! Click the Show Drawing icon.

When selected, backdrop images are visible. Note If a design includes both bitmap images and vector drawings, both will display. See also Viewing and hiding vector drawings.
! To hide the image, click Show Drawing again. ! To hide a drawing while showing a backdrop image, right-click the Show
Drawing icon.
Clear View Drawing Vectors
! Clear the View Images checkbox and click OK.
vector drawing together with bitmap image
Dimming backdrops
Right-click Show Drawing (Standard toolbar) and check Dimmed to dim backdrops. You can dim backdrops on your screen to make it easier to view stitches when they are the same color as the bitmap. Note Dimming only applies to bitmap images you cannot dim vector drawings.
V9
255
To dim backdrops
1 Right-click the Show Drawing icon. The Options > View Drawing tab opens.
Select View Images Select Dimmed
2 3 4
Select the View Images checkbox. Select the Dimmed checkbox. Click OK.
original bitmap image
dimmed bitmap image
Note To return to full color, deselect the Dimmed checkbox.
V9
Chapter 11
256
Chapter 12
Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing
ES Designer supports the automatic and semi-automatic digitizing of both bitmap images and vector drawings. The quality of the resulting designs greatly depends on the type and quality of the original artwork. In order to make bitmap images more suitable for automatic digitizing, ES Designer provides image processing capabilities and links to graphics packages.
This section describes how to prepare images for automatic digitizing. It explains how to crop images for digitizing as well as how to prepare both outlined and non-outlined images.
Image preparation techniques

Before applying automatic digitizing, you frequently need to improve or clean up artwork. To work effectively, both Smart Design and Point & Stitch require solid color images as input. You can improve artwork both with bitmap editing tools in graphics packages and/or the image processing tools provided in ES Designer. In fact, the software will not let you apply Smart Design until the image has been suitably processed.
V9
257
Outlined vs non-outlined images

Before preparing your image you need to know what type you are using. For the purposes of automatic digitizing, there are two categories outlined and non-outlined. Outlined images ideally have a solid black outline around each colored area. Non-outlined images ideally consist of solid areas of color. Outlined and non-outlined images require different methods of preparation.
image with outlines
image without outlines
Image clean up
In practice, cleaning up scanned images may involve any one or a combination of the following techniques:
! ! ! ! ! !
reducing the number of colors adding or emphasizing outlines removing noise, dithering or anti-aliasing eliminating unnecessary detail cropping sections eliminating backgrounds.
See also Choosing suitable artwork.
Color reduction
Sometimes an image looks clean but extra colors have been introduced during scanning or in a graphics package. Color reduction means reducing the actual number of image colors in order to eliminate unnecessary detail and reduce each block to a single color. Color reduction also cleans the image, removing noise and anti-aliasing if present. This in turn helps minimize the number of trims and color changes required in the resulting embroidery design. Reduce colors in a non-outlined image using the Reduce Colors tool and in an outlined image using the Sharpen Edges tool.
V9
Chapter 12
258
Color reduction should only be applied if the loss of detail does not affect the image shapes. Before color reduction, the colored areas in the image below include many colors. After reduction, each area is reduced to a single color. The detail is preserved.
image before color reduction
image after color reduction
If you are scanning images, make sure you scan them correctly for best results. See Scanning artwork into ES Designer for details.
image scanned in RGB color mode, then colors reduced to 6
image scanned in 256 color mode, then colors reduced to 6
Be aware that the Reduce Colors tool is good at removing noise and anti-aliasing but not so good at processing dithering in non-outlined images. By contrast, the Sharpen Edges tool is excellent at processing dithered
V9
259
colors as it averages all pixels within a defined outline. See also Choosing suitable artwork.
Reduce Colors tool used with non-outlined image dithered color blocks not completely cleaned, edges fuzzy
Sharpen Outline tool used with outlined image dithered color blocks cleaned, edges sharp
Outline sharpening
Outline sharpening means more clearly defining the outlines bordering distinct color blocks or shapes in the artwork. These may have been indistinct in the original or made so by the scanning process. Outline sharpening is important for automatic digitizing because it makes it easier for the software to identify the distinct areas which become embroidery objects in the resulting design. Note Outline sharpening only works on images with black or dark outlines.
image before outline sharpening image after outline sharpening
Some images have solid outlines but they may be indistinct or incomplete. These need to be rectified with the ES Designer image preparation tools or a graphics package. See Editing images in third-party applications for details.
V9
Chapter 12
260
Noise filtering
Noise filtering means restoring the solid color blocks of the original artwork in scanned images. This is achieved by merging different shades into one solid color. Noise filtering is important for automatic digitizing because it makes it easier for the software to identify solid color blocks which become embroidery objects in the resulting design. It also cleans up blurred or mottled areas of color.
image before noise filtering, mottled color
image after noise filtering, single colors
Image preparation tools

Use the artwork preparation tools to prepare images for automatic digitizing. Your choice of tool depends on the artwork. There are three tools: Tool Edit Image Purpose Link to a graphics package e.g. Paint Shop Pro for editing an image outside ES Designer. Prepare any non-outlined image. Capabilities Lets you crop, sharpen, re-color, add outlines, remove noise from an image.
Reduce Colors
Lets you reduce colors to a specified number. It automatically: reduces each block to a single color removes anti-aliasing, noise and dithering removes colors smaller than specified area. Lets you adjust lightness or darkness of outlines. It automatically: blends each outlined block into a single color removes anti-aliasing, noise and dithering sharpens outlines.
Sharpen Edges
Prepare outlined images.
V9
261
Note Even if your artwork looks ready to stitch when inserted into the software, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. The software will not let you apply automatic digitizing techniques without preliminary image-processing.
Using image preparation tools

It is important to use the correct preparation tools for your artwork. The example below shows an image with indistinct outlines. If the Sharpen Edges tool is used, outlines can be made darker and more distinct, improving stitching. By contrast, using the Reduce Colors tool before stitching produces a poorly stitched design.
Reduce Colors used outlines not sharpened, poor stitching image with indistinct outlines
Sharpen Edges used improved stitching
image with solid outlines
V9
Chapter 12
262
Before using the Sharpen Edges tool, make sure that the image contains solid outlines. If there are gaps, separate color areas will be blended into one.
Sharpen Edges used image partially outlined, some areas not closed image colors blended
If you need to add outlines, close gaps, or reinforce an outline, you may need to draw it in by hand before scanning. Or you might add it in a graphics package after scanning. See Editing images in third-party applications for details.
Sharpen Edges used image outline completed in graphics package outlines sharpened
Tip Try darkening the outlines using the Outline Appearance slider. See Preparing outlined images for details.
Image preparation summary

Action Scan artwork Scan line drawing Touching up in graphics package Outlined image Scan in RGB mode Use sharpening Scan in two color mode Crop Add or edit outlines Edit colors Remove noise Non-outlined image Scan in RGB mode No sharpening Crop Edit image shapes Edit colors Remove noise Photograph Scan in RGB mode Crop Convert to grayscale Remove background Lighten or darken Adjust contrast
V9
263
Action Use Sharpen Edges tool in ES Designer Use Reduce Colors tool in ES Designer Digitize
Outlined image Sharpen outlines and remove noise Manual Point & Stitch Smart Design
Non-outlined image Reduce colors and remove noise Manual Point & Stitch Smart Design
Photograph Photo Flash
Preparing non-outlined images

Use Reduce Colors (Drawing toolbar) to reduce the number of colors and remove image noise in non-outlined images. Use the Reduce Colors tool to prepare non-outlined images for automatic digitizing. The tool automatically reduces color blocks in bitmap images to a single color, removing anti-aliasing and noise. You can let the software reduce the color count automatically or specify a precise number. The latter is useful if you want to match design colors to an exact number of thread colors. Tip Depending on the quality of the scanned image, you may need to touch it up manually before processing in ES Designer. You would normally do this in order to eliminate backgrounds, or flood-fill solid areas with color. See Editing images in third-party applications for details.
To prepare non-outlined images

V9
Chapter 12
264
Select the image.
image scanned in RGB color mode converted to 256 colors upon loading
Click the Reduce Colors icon. The Reduce Colors dialog opens.
Zoom in and out of image preview
Set color reduction options Set noise filtering options Save Image after processing
The image appears in the preview panel. The Color Count field shows the number of image colors. 4 5 Click Zoom In to view the image more closely. Set the color reduction options you require:
V9
265
! Select the By Number option to enter the number you require. ES

Designer suggests a number and shows how the image will look. You can accept this number or change it.
! Select the Automatic Selection option if you want the software to

reduce the color count automatically. The slider increases or decreases the effect moving the slider towards 100% gives you more colors, moving the other way gives you fewer.
reduced to 13 colors
reduced to 6 colors
reduced to 3 colors
Check how many colors are in the image. This is indicated by Color Count. If there appear to be too many, the image probably contains noise.
Set the noise filtering options you require.
! Minimum color area: This defines the smallest area recognized in

the conversion. The default is 0.5 by 0.5 square mm (about eight pixels). Increase this value if your image has a lot of out-of-color pixels. The minimum color area should not exceed 1/16 of the total area.
V9
Chapter 12
266
! Minimum line length: This defines the smallest line length

recognized as an object. The default is 2 mm. The minimum line length should not exceed 25% of the smallest dimension.
Min. color area: 0.5 sq mm Min. line length: 2 mm
Min. Color area: 1 sq mm Min. line length: 5 mm
Min. color area: 5 sq mm Min. line length: 9 mm
8 9
Click Save Bitmap As to save changes. Click OK to apply the changes.
Preparing outlined images

Use Sharpen Edges (Drawing toolbar) to sharpen outlines and reduce noise in outlined images. Use the Sharpen Edges tool to prepare outlined images for automatic digitizing. The tool automatically sharpens outlines and reduces noise. Areas enclosed by a black outline are reduced to a single color. Outline sharpening makes it easier for the software to recognize distinct areas in the artwork. These areas then become the embroidery objects of the finished design. Use it particularly if the outlines are blurry, fuzzy or indistinct. Tip Depending on the quality of the scanned image, you may need to touch it up manually before processing in ES Designer. You would normally do this in order to eliminate backgrounds, flood-fill solid areas with color, add or reinforce outlines, or close gaps. See Editing images in third-party applications for details.
To prepare outlined images

V9
267
Select the image.
zoomed area
Click the Sharpen Edges icon. The Sharpen Edges dialog opens.
Zoom in and out of image preview
Set outline appearance
Click to see colored areas
Save image after processing
The image appears in the preview panel. The Color Count field shows the number of image colors. 4 5 Click Zoom In to view the image more closely. Set the outline contrast tolerance by dragging the slider control.
V9
Chapter 12
268
This produces a black and white preview of the detected outlines.
Set outline appearance
Set the Noise reduction options you require.
! Minimum color area: This defines the smallest area recognized in

the conversion. The default is 0.5 by 0.5 square mm (about eight pixels). Increase this value if your image has a lot of out-of-color pixels. The minimum color area should not exceed 1/16 of the total area.
! Minimum line length: This defines the smallest line length

recognized as an object. The default is 2 mm. The minimum line length should not exceed 25% of the smallest dimension. Tip Move the slider to the right until there is too much black, then move it slowly back to the left. Stop when the image shows all the outlines you need. 7 Click Show Color Areas to see the updated image.
outlines not sharpened
slider control moved to left
slider control moved to right
V9
269
8 9
Click Save Bitmap As to save changes. Click OK to apply the changes.
outlines sharpened and noise reduced
V9
Chapter 12
270
Chapter 13
Automatic Digitizing
ES Designer provides a variety of complementary tools and techniques for automatically digitizing suitably prepared artwork.
! The Auto Trace feature lets you convert scanned artwork to drawing
objects. You can then convert these to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods.
! The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize

shapes in bitmap images automatically without using manual input methods.
! The Smart Design feature automatic digitizing is intended for people

working at all levels of the embroidery industry. Smart Design automatically converts bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery.
! Photo Flash lets you create embroidery designs directly from

photographs and other grayscale bitmap images. The effect resembles the output of a line printer. This section describes how to automatically convert bitmap images to embroidery objects and complete designs, as well as how to create embroidery from grayscale images.
V9
271
Converting bitmaps to outlines with Auto Trace

0
Use Auto Trace (Drawing toolbar) to convert artwork to vector objects for conversion to embroidery objects. Use Auto Trace to create vector outlines from bitmap images. Auto Trace traces areas of the same color in bitmaps to create drawing objects. It can find holes in shapes both inside and outside boundaries are detected. See also Converting vector drawings to embroidery objects. Note Even if your artwork looks ready to stitch when inserted into the software, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details.
To convert a bitmap to outlines with Auto Trace

1 Scan or insert a bitmap image. See Scanning artwork into ES Designer or Inserting bitmap images for details. 2 3 Select the image and process it. See Image preparation techniques for details. Click the Auto Trace icon. ES Designer will prompt you to click an image to select a single-colored area. 4 5 6 Click the shape you want to digitize. Press Enter. The drawing object is created and selected. Select an input method then follow the prompts to enter start, end and angle.
Click object
Press Enter
Select input method
V9
Chapter 13
272
At this point you can convert the created drawing object directly into an embroidery object. See also Converting vector drawings to embroidery objects.
Digitizing shapes automatically with Point & Stitch

The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize shapes in bitmap images automatically without using manual input methods. These tools are useful for quickly creating embroidery objects from scanned images that do not require particular artistic effects or embroidery-specific knowledge. This in turn frees you to spend more time on the artistic or inherently complicated areas of your designs.
bitmap image
embroidery design digitized with Point & Stitch tools
Note If you use a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. The software will not let you apply automatic digitizing techniques without preliminary image-processing. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details.
Matching palette colors to an image

Use Match to Palette (Point & Stitch toolbar) to find the nearest match between the selected image color and the color palette. Use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest match between a selected image color block and a palette color. If Match to Palette is not selected, the color block is digitized in the current palette color. Note If your artwork contains colors which are very different to those in the colorway, you can use the Match Drawing Color function to first add those colors. See Matching image colors to threads for details.
V9
273
To match palette colors to an image

1 Select the artwork:
! Scan or insert a bitmap image. See Scanning artwork into ES

Designer or Inserting bitmap images for details.
! Insert or create a vector drawing. See Inserting vector drawings or

Creating drawings in ES Designer for details. Note If you use a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details. 2 3 4 Click the Match to Palette icon. Select a Point & Stitch digitizing method. Click the shape you want to digitize. The object is digitized in the nearest palette color.
original image
matched to palette
digitized in current color
Note If Match to Palette is not selected, the object is digitized in the current palette color.
Digitizing shapes with Turning Satin

Use Turning Satin (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize narrow column shapes. Use Turning Satin to digitize narrow column shapes in your artwork with Satin stitch.
V9
Chapter 13
274
To digitize a shape with Turning Satin



Creating drawings in ES Designer for details. Note If you are using a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details. 2 Select a thread color from the color toolbar. Alternatively, use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest matching thread color. See Matching palette colors to an image for details. 3 4 Click the Turning Satin icon. ES Designer will prompt you to click an image or drawing object. Click the shape you want to digitize. The shape is filled with Satin stitches.
Click to digitize
Click to digitize
Note Stitches are generated according to current Satin stitch settings. Jumps may occur if the stitch length exceeds the default setting.
Digitizing shapes with Tatami Fill

Use Tatami Fill (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize large areas, preserving any holes. Use Tatami Fill to digitize large areas in your artwork with Tatami stitch, preserving any holes within them. If you are using a vector drawing, it must include a fill color.
V9
275
To digitize shapes with Tatami Fill



Creating drawings in ES Designer for details. Note If you are using a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details. 2 Select a thread color from the color toolbar. Alternatively, use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest matching thread color. See Matching palette colors to an image for details. 3 4 Click the Tatami Fill icon. ES Designer will prompt you to click an image or drawing object. Click the shape you want to digitize. The shape is filled with Tatami stitches.
Click to digitize
Note Stitches are generated according to current Tatami stitch settings.
Digitizing shapes with Tatami Fill without Holes

Use Tatami Fill without Holes (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize large areas, ignoring any holes. Use Tatami Fill without Holes to digitize large areas in your artwork with Tatami stitch, ignoring any holes within the shape.
V9
Chapter 13
276
To digitize shapes with Tatami Fill without Holes



Creating drawings in ES Designer for details. Note If you are using a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details. 2 Select a thread color from the color toolbar. Alternatively, use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest matching thread color. See Matching palette colors to an image for details. 3 4 Click the Tatami Fill without Holes icon. ES Designer will prompt you to click an image or drawing object. Click the shape you want to digitize. Any holes in the shape are ignored.
Click to digitize large area hole is ignored
Digitizing shapes with Pickout Run

Use Pickout Run (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize centerlines. Use Pickout Run to digitize centerlines in your artwork with run stitches.
To digitize shapes with Pickout Run

V9
277


Creating drawings in ES Designer for details. Note If you are using a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details. 2 Select a thread color from the color toolbar. Alternatively, use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest matching thread color. See Matching palette colors to an image for details. 3 4 Click the Pickout Run icon. ES Designer will prompt you to click an image or drawing object. Click the centerline you want to digitize. The centerline is traced with Run stitches.
Click to digitize
Note Stitches are generated according to current Run stitch settings.
Digitizing shapes with Outline Run

Use Outline Run (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize boundaries of shapes. Use Outline Run to digitize boundaries of shapes with run stitching. Current properties are applied. You can change the stitch type to Run, Triple Run, Satin, Input C or Motif Run for lighter or heavier outlines.
To digitize shapes with Outline Run



Creating drawings in ES Designer for details.
V9
Chapter 13
278
Note If you are using a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details. 2 Select a thread color from the color toolbar. Alternatively, use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest matching thread color. See Matching palette colors to an image for details. 3 4 Click the Outline Run icon. ES Designer will prompt you to click an image or drawing object. Click the outline you want to digitize. The outline is traced with run stitches.
Click to digitize outlines
Note Stitches are generated according to current Run stitch settings.
Automatic digitizing with Smart Design

Smart Design automatically converts bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery. With Smart Design, novice embroiderers can create simple designs quickly and easily. Similarly, experienced embroiderers can improve productivity when working with simple designs. Sales people can estimate stitches quickly and accurately for price quotations. An extension of Point & Stitch technology, Smart Design recognizes shapes in bitmap images and makes decisions about the most suitable input methods and stitch types to use. It also determines the stitching sequence based on closest join. Artwork is effectively batch processed to create the many embroidery objects that make up a design. Smart Design gives you some control over how an image is interpreted during conversion. You can choose to omit selected colors as well as select colors for stitching in front or behind. There are options to add drawing colors to the color palette, or match them to the existing palette. You can
V9
279
choose to ignore lines or shapes under a specified width. Once created, you can always edit the final result using the available digitizing techniques. See also Digitizing Methods. Note Even if your artwork looks ready to stitch when inserted into the software, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. The software will not let you apply automatic digitizing techniques without preliminary image-processing. See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details.
Creating embroidery designs with Smart Design

Use Smart Design (Drawing toolbar) to create embroidery designs directly from imported images. In essence, creating an embroidery design with Smart Design is simply a matter of selecting the image you want to convert, and clicking the Smart Design tool. There are, however, many settings you can adjust to optimize the conversion process for a particular image. Note Only one image may be selected at a time. The command is disabled if the selection contains anything other than an image. The display mode of the image for example, dimmed will not affect the embroidery object colors.
To create embroidery designs with Smart Design

1 Scan or load an image. See Scanning artwork into ES Designer for details.
Select the image and process it.
V9
Chapter 13
280
See Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details. 3 Select the image and click the Smart Design icon. The Smart Design dialog opens. The image colors are distributed among the Omit, Fill, and Details fields depending on how the software interprets the source image.
Select color conversion method
Click-and-drag colors between fields
Note Image information is given in the top panel, including width and height values as well as the number of image colors. 4 Click-and-drag any colors you want to omit from automatic stitch processing into the Omit field.
white background color omitted all colors omitted except black
Click-and-drag any colors or leave any colors you want to be treated as filled areas in the Fill field.
fill color pink only, the rest omitted fill colors pink and yellow, the rest omitted
V9
281
Note You can adjust stitching styles and other settings for fill colors. See Adjusting fill color settings for details. 6 Click-and-drag any colors you want to be treated as details i.e. any outlines, borders or small areas you want to stitch out last into the Details field.
detail color black only
detail color green only
Note You can adjust stitching styles for detail colors. See Adjusting detail colors settings for details. 7 Select a Thread Colors conversion method for image processing.
! By default, image colors are matched to the nearest thread colors in

the current colorway.
! Select the Add Colors to Palette option to add drawing colors to

the palette.
drawing colors added to palette
drawing colors matched to nearest thread colors
Click OK. Smart Design converts the artwork to embroidery objects and generates stitches. Note Click Save to save the dialog settings to the template.
V9
Chapter 13
282
Adjusting detail colors settings

Smart Design lets you adjust object recognition settings for the colors of anything in the design you identify as a detail. A detail may be an outline, a border, a pickout run, or a small area of the design you want to be stitched out last. Tip If an image color is both a fill and a detail, you can either recolor the fill color in a graphics package, or omit the color for later editing.
To adjust detail colors settings

1 2 Select a processed image and click the Smart Design icon. The Smart Design dialog opens. Select color Stitching Options for the image. See Creating embroidery designs with Smart Design for details.
set stitching style for details
Select a stitching style for details colors from the dropdown list.
! Double Run: most suited for use with thin lines. ! Input C: suited for use with thicker lines. ! Satin: most suited for use with thicker lines or small shapes of
varying width. 4 Click OK. Smart Design converts the artwork to embroidery objects and generates stitches.
Details: black outlines with Double Run
Details: black outlines with Satin
V9
283
Adjusting fill color settings

Smart Design lets you adjust object recognition settings for fill colors, giving you control over stitch types, stitch angles, and sequencing settings.
To adjust fill color settings

1 2 Select a processed image and click the Smart Design icon. The Smart Design dialog opens. Select color Stitching Options for the image. See Creating embroidery designs with Smart Design for details.
Adjust fill color settings
Click Values. The Automatic Stitching Values dialog opens.
Adjust max. widths for each object type
Select style to apply to each object type
Adjust settings for recognition of Complex Fill objects
Adjust settings for automatic object sequencing
Select the Detect lines in objects checkbox if you want areas defined within maximum width to be interpreted as lines either Run or Satin Input C.
V9
Chapter 13
284
The sample below, for example, shows narrow linear shapes being interpreted as Satin Input C rather than Tatami Complex Fill objects.
original image
yellow and green selected as Detail colors with the Satin option larger areas may produce unacceptably long stitches Detect Lines not selected, default values used most objects stitched in Tatami
Detect Lines selected, Satin used fills stitched in Tatami, lines in Satin
Adjust the maximum width for each object type. These rows determine the way in which graphic elements of specified thicknesses are to be interpreted. Note A value entered in the Maximum Width field becomes the Minimum Width value for the next graphic element.
Select a style or stitch type to apply to each object i.e. Run stitch, Satin, Tatami, etc.
Satin styles selected with Auto Split
Tatami styles selected
V9
285
Adjust settings for the recognition of Complex Fill objects in the Object Options panel.
stitch angle 90
stitch angle 0
Adjust settings for automatic object sequencing in the Object Sequence panel. See Adjusting object sequencing settings for details. Click OK. Smart Design converts the artwork to embroidery objects and generates stitches.
Adjusting object sequencing settings

Smart Design lets you adjust settings for the automatic object sequencing of recognized embroidery objects.
To adjust object sequencing settings

1 From the Smart Design dialog, access the Automatic Stitching Values dialog. See Adjusting fill color settings for details.
Adjust settings for automatic object sequencing
Enter the length of the maximum travel run connector in the Maximum travel path length field. You may enter a large value to avoid trims that may cause production problems.
V9
Chapter 13
286
Enter the minimum width of foreground objects to overlap background objects in the Stitch under objects below width field.
original image
below width: 1.5 mm
below width: 4.0 mm
Enter the minimum stitch length you want to keep in the Filter small objects below width field. See Removing small stitches automatically for details. Click OK. Smart Design converts the artwork to embroidery objects and generates stitches.
Creating embroidery designs from photographs

Use Photo Flash (Insert menu) to create embroidery designs directly from photographs. Use Photo Flash to create embroidery from photographs or other images, color or grayscale. Grayscale images are made up of different shades of gray pixels. Color images are automatically converted to grayscale when you apply Photo Flash.
V9
287
Photo Flash designs consist of rows of Satin stitches of varying spacing settings. The effect resembles the output of a line printer. Adjust the angle of the rows and/or the stitches themselves. Tip For best results, use images with well-defined subjects or constantly varying shades.
To create embroidery designs from photographs

1 2 Insert the bitmap image in your design and scale it to the required size. See Inserting bitmap images for details. With the bitmap still selected, select Insert > Photo Flash. The Object Properties > Photo Flash tab opens.
Select spacing between rows
Enter angle for rows of stitching
Select a background option
In the Resolution panel, select a resolution option Coarse, Medium, or Fine.
fine resolution
medium resolution
coarse resolution
Note The coarser the resolution the more spacing between rows.
V9
Chapter 13
288
In the Row panel, enter a new angle as required.
Row Angle: 0o
Row Angle: 90o
In the Background panel, select a background option:
! Light: applies the maximum row width value to the lightest part of
the image.
! Dark: applies the maximum row width to the darkest part of the
image.
Light background
Dark background
Tip The option you select usually depends on whether the fabric is light or dark. The Dark option produces a negative of the image.
V9
289
Select the Fill Stitch tab and adjust the stitch spacing and skew angle as required.
Adjust stitch values
The Skew Angle determines the angle of the stitches. See Adjusting Satin stitch spacing for details.
Skew Angle: 0o
Skew Angle: 45o
7 8
Click OK. You are prompted to select the part of the image you want to convert. Click and drag a cropping rectangle around the part of the image you require. ES Designer generates stitches for the area within the cropping rectangle. This process may take some time. Tip Use TrueView for a more accurate representation of the stitching.
V9
Chapter 13
290
PART IV
MODIFYING DESIGNS
After digitzing a design, you can modify it as a whole, edit individual objects or even individual stitches.
Combining and resequencing objects

This section describes how to combine objects and designs by copying and pasting, duplicating, and inserting techniques. It also describes how to resequence objects by cut and paste, by color, with the Color-Object List, and by number. Using Branching to sequence objects is also explained. See Combining objects and designs for details.
Arranging and transforming objects

This section describes how to position objects, how to lock and group, align and space objects, as well as how to scale, rotate, skew, and mirror objects. See Arranging and Transforming Objects for details.
Converting and reshaping objects

This section describes how to reshape objects with control points, reshape circle, star and ring objects. It also describes how to convert object types, adjust stitch angles, change entry and exit points, as well as keep or omit the last stitch. See Converting and Reshaping Objects for details.
V9
291
Editing stitches and machine functions

This section deals with selecting and editing stitches, and converting selected stitches to objects. It also includes instructions for inserting, checking, editing and clearing manually-inserted functions. It also describes how to edit stitches and functions using the Stitch List. See Editing Stitches and Machine Functions for details.
V9
292
Chapter 14
Combining and Resequencing Objects
ES Designer provides techniques for combining and resequencing objects. You can add to designs by duplicating and copying objects. Combine designs. Split objects into smaller ones and remove overlaps between objects. The stitching sequence naturally occurs in the order in which the design was digitized. The Color-Object List displays a sequential list of objects grouped by object and color. It provides an easy way to group, cut, copy and paste, and resequence selected objects and color blocks. Group objects together to apply a change to them all at once. Better still, apply Branching to join like-objects to form a single branched object. Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, component objects grouped, and stitches regenerated. Apply an underlay to all. This section describes how to combine objects and designs by copying and pasting, duplicating, and inserting techniques. It also describes how to resequence objects by cut and paste, by color, with the Color-Object List, and by number. Using Branching to sequence objects is also explained.
Combining objects and designs

You can copy or cut a design or design objects to the Windows clipboard for temporary storage. These can then be pasted any number of times to the same or another design until replaced on the clipboard. You can also cut, copy and paste lettering objects within and between designs.
V9
293
Copying and pasting objects

Click Copy (Standard toolbar) to copy selected objects to the clipboard. Click Paste (Standard toolbar) to paste copied objects in the design. You can copy objects to create multiple, identical objects, or to insert objects from other designs. Tip ES Designer lets you click-and-drag objects between designs. To copy, hold down the Ctrl key as you click-and-drag the object. To temporarily deactivate Auto Scroll, hold down the Shift key.
petals copied and pasted
Note Cut and Paste changes the stitching sequence in the design. See Resequencing objects with cut and paste for details.
To copy and paste objects

1 2 3 Select the object (or objects) to copy. Click the Copy icon. The selected object is copied to the clipboard. Travel to the position in the stitching sequence at which you want to paste the object. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details. Alternatively, use the Color-Object List to locate the required position in the stitching sequence. See Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List for details. Tip You can paste between other objects in the sequence, or nest the copied object within an object. See Nesting objects for details. 4 Click the Paste icon.
V9
Chapter 14
294
The object is pasted in the design, according to the current paste options. The object remains on the clipboard and can be pasted repeatedly until the next Copy or Cut command. Warning Make sure that there is only one copy of an object at any one position. If an object is pasted twice into the same position, it will be stitched twice. Tip Change the current paste options as required. See Setting paste position options for details.
Duplicating objects
Select Duplicate (Edit menu) to duplicate selected objects. Objects can be duplicated rather than copied. When an object is duplicated, it is not copied to the clipboard. This leaves the clipboard free for you to cut or copy other objects.
Tip The Mirror-Merge tools allow you to duplicate and transform selected embroidery objects, and merge them into a single object. See Duplicating and mirroring objects for details.
To duplicate objects
1 2 Select the object (or objects) to duplicate. Travel to the position in the stitching sequence at which you want to place the object. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details. You can place the duplicate between other objects in the sequence, or nest it within an object. See Nesting objects for details. 3 Select Edit > Duplicate.
V9
295
The duplicate object is placed directly on top of the original, in the specified position in the stitching sequence. 4 Move the duplicate object to the required position.
Deleting objects
Select Delete (Edit menu) to delete selected objects. Various methods are available for deleting objects.
To delete objects
! Select the object (or objects) to delete, and do one of the following: ! Press Delete. ! Select Edit > Delete. ! Right-click and select Delete from the popup menu. Nesting objects
ES Designer lets you nest one object inside another at an exact point of the stitching sequence. This feature is particularly useful with motifs and other designs where long connectors may be generated. It also helps reduce the overall numbers of objects, minimizing trims and tie-offs.
V9
Chapter 14
296
To nest objects
1 Travel through the first object until the needle position marker is positioned where you want to insert the second object. See Traveling by stitches for details.
Travel to insertion point and paste object
Insert the second object. To do this, either digitize the object, or copy and paste, or cut and paste it. The second object is nested in the stitching sequence of the first object. All required functions are automatically inserted for the second object. Tip To view the connectors that are generated for the nested object, click the Show Connectors icon.
Combining designs
ES Designer lets you insert one design into another. The two (or more) designs can then be saved as a combined design. When you insert a design in another, the two color palettes are combined. Colors with the same RGB values are automatically identified as having the same thread color. If you want to preserve these as separate colors, you need to change one or other before merging. See Modifying colorways for details.
To combine designs
1 2 Open the first design. Travel to the position in the stitching sequence where you want to insert the design. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details.
V9
297
You can insert a design between objects in the sequence, or nest the design within an object. See Nesting objects for details. 3 Select Insert > Embroidery File.
! To select a design from any available DOS drive, select DOS Disk. ! To select a design from an embroidery disk, select Embroidery
Disk. The Open dialog opens. 4 From the Look In dropdown list, select the folder where the design you want to insert is stored, and select the required format from the Files of type dropdown list. Select the design file to insert, and click Open. The design is inserted at the current needle position. 6 Move the second design into the required position. See Positioning objects for details. Tip To ensure that all the objects in the inserted design stay together, group the design while working with it. See Grouping and ungrouping objects for details. 7 Save the combined design under the original or different name. The designs you have inserted are now combined into one design.
Splitting objects
Use Split Object (Edit menu) to split selected objects. ES Designer lets you split embroidery objects into smaller objects. This is useful, for example, when you want to split Manual objects up in order to convert sections to outline objects with Stitch Processor. Use the Split Object command to split embroidery objects created with the Input A, Input B, and Input C tools together with Satin, Tatami, or Program Split as the stitch type. Run objects may also be split but Complex Fill objects cannot. See also Shaping drawing and embroidery objects.
V9
Chapter 14
298
To split objects
1 2 Select an object to split. Travel to the stitch where you want it to be split. You can travel to a stitch inside a Satin, Tatami, Run or Manual object. See Traveling by stitches for details. Note You cannot split an object at the first stitch. 3 Select Edit > Split Object. The object is split into two objects at the needle position marker.
split object deleted
split object
Tip You can convert any split Manual objects to outline objects with Stitch Processor. See Recognizing object/outlines after editing for details.
Resequencing embroidery objects

The embroidery objects in a design form a stitching sequence. Initially, objects are stitched in the order in which they were created. You can change the position of a selected object by cutting it, then pasting it somewhere else in the sequence, or by using the Resequence command. You can also resequence objects by color or using the Color-Object List.
Resequencing objects with cut and paste

Click Cut (Standard toolbar) to cut a selected object or objects and place them on the clipboard. Click Paste (Standard toolbar) to paste copied objects in the design.
V9
299
You can resequence objects by cutting an object from the design and pasting it back at a different point in the sequence. This does not change the physical location of the object. See also Nesting objects.
To resequence objects with cut and paste

1 2 Select the object (or objects) to resequence. Click the Cut icon. The selected object is removed from the design and moved to the clipboard.
completed design center stitched first
object cut to clipboard
Travel to the position in the stitching sequence where you want to paste the object. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details. You can paste between other objects in the sequence, or nest the cut object within another object. See Nesting objects for details. If you do not move the current needle position marker, the object is pasted at the end of the sequence.
Click the Paste icon.
cursor inserted at end of design
object pasted
The object is pasted back in the design according to the current paste options. See also Setting paste position options. Note The object remains on the clipboard and can be pasted repeatedly until the next Copy or Cut command.
V9
Chapter 14
300
Resequencing selected objects

Select Resequence By Selects (Edit menu) to resequence selected objects. You can resequence objects by selecting them in the required stitching order.
To resequence selected objects

1 2 Select the first object in the range you want to resequence. Holding down Ctrl, select the subsequent objects to resequence. Note Select each object in the order you want it to stitch out in. 3 With the objects still selected, select Edit > Resequence > By Selects. The objects are resequenced in the order they were selected.
Resequencing objects by color

Select Resequence By Color (Edit menu) to resequence objects by color. The Resequence By Color feature lets you resequence all objects by color. This reduces the number of color changes in a design. Note This technique resequences all color blocks of the same color in the stitching sequence. If, for any reason, you want to maintain separate color blocks, you should use the Color-Object List. See Resequencing colors and objects with the Color-Object List for details.
To resequence objects by color

1 2 Select the objects to resequence. Select Edit > Resequence > By Color.
V9
301
The Sequence By Color dialog opens listing the colors used in the selected objects.
3 4
Select a color and click Move Up or Move Down to change its position in the sequence. Click OK.
Resequencing colors and objects with the Color-Object List

Use Color-Object List (Standard toolbar) to resequence objects. The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects in designs and access their properties. You can resequence color blocks and objects easily by changing their position in the Color-Object List. Tip You can also use it to group and ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide objects. Use it also to cut, copy and paste, as well as branch objects. See also Grouping and locking with the Color-Object List, Copying and pasting objects, and Branching objects with the Color-Object List.
To resequence objects with the Color-Object List

1 Click the Color-Object List icon.
V9
Chapter 14
302
The Color-Object List opens.

Click-and-drag object to new position
Select the color block or object to resequence.
! To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you click. ! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you click.
3 Click-and-drag selected objects to reposition them. Note You cannot move an object between colors in a manual color change. However, you can move an object between consecutive members of a grouped object.
Drop object into new position
Tip You may need to select all press Ctrl + A then regenerate stitches press G to update the display.
V9
303
Resequencing objects by number

Use Color-Object List (Standard toolbar) to resequence objects by number. You can resequence objects numerically in the Color-Object List. Use it to move an object to a position between consecutive members of a color block. See also Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List.
To resequence objects by number

1 2 3 4 Click the Color-Object List icon. The Color-Object List opens. Select the object to resequence. Right-click the object to resequence in the list. Select Resequence By Number from the popup menu.
Enter number of target object
In the Object # field, enter the number of the object before which you want to position your selected object. Note If you prefer to position the selected object after a selected number e.g. to make it the last object in the list select the After Position option.
Click OK. The selected object will be placed in the new position and all other objects resequenced accordingly.
Automatic branching
Click Branching (Standard toolbar) to automatically branch selected embroidery objects. The Branching feature lets you digitize like objects e.g. the fingers of a hand, sections of a custom letter without having to think about the most efficient stitching sequence and joins. Branching is designed for use with shapes made up of objects that overlap e.g. complicated letters, Asian
V9
Chapter 14
304
characters, etc. Apply Branching to join selected objects to form a single branched object. Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, component objects grouped, and stitches regenerated. All component objects are grouped and selectable as one. You can apply a single underlay to all.
Properties of branched objects

Branching works with any combination of the following object types Input A, Input B, Input C, Run, and Complex Fill. Objects with Motif Run and Motif Fill cannot be used. The stitch type becomes that of the first object. If, for example, you first select a Tatami object followed by two Satin objects, the resulting object is filled with Tatami stitches. The stitch effects are also those of the first object. Note When dissimilar objects are selected and branched, any which cannot be branched are omitted.
Connections between branched objects

The component objects of a branched object are connected by the Closest Join method used with custom alphabets. All objects are resequenced both externally (in relation to each other) and internally (by automatic segmentation). See also Digitizing custom characters. Note Branching does not split segmented objects into separate objects. The stitching order of overlapped segments is preserved. In effect, all objects are bound together into a single grouped object. See also Grouping and locking objects.
Editing branched objects

Branched objects remain editable. They can be reshaped. There is only one entry and one exit point, but all component objects have individual reshape points. The object properties of a branched object can be accessed via the Object Properties dialog. Stitch types can also be re-assigned via the toolbar.
Applying branching
Click Branching (Standard toolbar) to automatically branch selected embroidery objects.
V9
305
Apply Branching to selected objects. These become a single branched object.
To apply branching
1 Select the objects. Note The function is only available if more than one object of any suitable type is selected. Objects can be a combination of the following Input A, Input B, Input C, Run, and Complex Fill.
long connectors between separate objects
Click the Branching icon. ES Designer will prompt you to digitize entry and exit points.
V9
Chapter 14
306
Digitize entry and exit points, or press Enter twice to accept the defaults.
objects resequenced, connectors minimized
Stitches are regenerated. Component objects are grouped and take the stitch type and color of the first object selected. 4 Travel through the branched object to check stitching. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details.
Branching objects with the Color-Object List

Use Color-Object List (Standard toolbar) to branch objects in a design. The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects in designs and access their properties. You can use it to branch like objects in a design. Tip Use the Color-Object List also to cut, copy and paste, group and ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide objects, as well as resequence objects. See also Grouping and locking with the Color-Object List, Copying and pasting objects, and Resequencing colors and objects with the Color-Object List.
V9
307
To apply branching with the Color-Object List

1 Click the Color-Object List icon.
long connectors between separate objects
2 3
Select objects in the Color-Object List. Right-click and select Branching from the popup menu.
Note The function is only available if more than one object of any suitable type is selected. 4 Digitize entry and exit points, or press Enter twice to accept the defaults.
V9
Chapter 14
308
Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, component objects grouped, and stitches regenerated.
branching symbol identifies it as a branched object
Note The component objects take the stitch type and color of the first object selected.
Applying automatic underlay to branched objects

Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to select an underlay type to apply to branched objects. Because Branching combines objects to form a single branched object, you can apply an underlay (single or double) to all.
To apply automatic underlay to branched objects

1 2 Select the branched object. Right-click the Auto Underlay icon. The Effects > Auto Underlay tab opens.
Select Underlay Select underlay type
3 4
Select the Underlay checkbox and select an underlay type. Click OK. Underlay stitches are automatically generated for the branched object.
V9
309
Note If component objects are touching or overlapping, the underlay is first stitched out for the whole branched object followed by the cover stitch.
cover stitched after underlay
whole underlay stitched first
Applying two-layer run stitching with branching

With run stitching, digitizers frequently aim to have exactly two layers of stitching on every segment while minimizing jumps and trims. This technique effectively eliminates the need to have extra travel or jump stitches to get from one part of the outline to another. It does so by using the stitches themselves as travel stitches wherever possible, providing a higher quality result in the process.
To apply two-layer run stitching with branching

1 Select the objects.
one layer of run outline stitches
Click Branching and digitize entry and exit points in the normal way. See Applying branching for details.
V9
Chapter 14
310
Stitches are regenerated. Component objects are grouped and connectors minimized no jumps, no extra travels.
combination of one and two layers of run stitches created
Travel through the branched object to check stitching. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details. Tip When the exit and start point are the same, there are two layers of outline stitching. If they are different, the path between the start and exit will have three layers. It is your choice whether to have the extra travel layer or a trim connection to the next object instead.
V9
311
Chapter 15
Arranging and Transforming Objects
You can change the position, size and orientation of objects in a design by moving, scaling and transforming them. Group objects together to apply universal changes, or lock them to avoid unintentional modification. Modify objects directly on-screen or using the Object Properties dialog. Access commonly used functions via the Color-Object List.
Warning The scalability and stitching quality of a design ultimately depend on its original source Native Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or Imported Stitches. Only EMB designs contain the complete set of design information required for 100% perfect scaling and transformation. See also Embroidery design formats. This section describes how to position objects, how to lock and group, align and space objects, as well as how to scale, rotate, skew, and mirror objects.
Positioning, aligning and distributing objects

Position objects in your design using the mouse to drag them to a new position, nudging them with the arrow keys or by specifying the X:Y coordinates in the Object Properties dialog. ES Designer lets you align objects to position them relative to each other, or distribute them evenly in your design.
V9
312
Positioning objects
The simplest way to move an object in your design is to click-and-drag it to a new position. Use the arrow keys to nudge objects into position. Note If no objects are selected, using the arrow keys moves the current needle position.
To position objects
! Select the object/s to move and click-and-drag it to a new position.
Use cross-hair cursor to center object
! For more accurate positioning, use the arrow keys to nudge the object
into the required position.
! For even more accurate positioning, double-click the object to open the
Object Properties dialog, and enter the X:Y coordinates in the General tab.
Enter new coordinates
The object is centered above the coordinates you set. Tip Zoom in to make small adjustments. The distance the object moves depends on the current zoom factor. The greater the zoom factor, the smaller the distance moved.
Aligning objects
Select Align (Arrange menu) to align selected objects in a design.
V9
313
You can align selected objects in a design. ES Designer lets you align to the left, right, top, bottom or center of a specified object.
To align objects
1 2 3 Select the objects you want to align. Select the object you want to align with. Select Arrange > Align, then select an alignment option.
Align center
3 2
Align left
Align bottom
Note Objects are aligned with the last object selected.
Distributing objects
Select Space Evenly (Arrange menu) to space objects evenly across or down. You can set spacing to be consistent between selected objects. ES Designer lets you set vertical or horizontal spacing.
To distribute objects
1 2 Select the objects you want to space. Select the objects with the spacing you require.
V9
Chapter 15
314
Select Arrange > Space Evenly, then select Across or Down.
! Spacing evenly across affects the horizontal spacing of selected

objects.
! Spacing evenly down affects the vertical spacing of selected objects.

Note The new spacing is based on the last two objects selected.
Grouping and locking objects

ES Designer lets you group objects together for group modifications. Ungroup whenever you need to work with the component objects. You can also lock objects to prevent them from being moved or modified by accident. The Color-Object List provides an easy way to group/ungroup, lock/unlock, and show/hide selected objects.
Grouping and ungrouping objects

Click Group (Standard toolbar) to group selected objects. Click Ungroup to ungroup selected objects. You can group selected objects, or an entire design, to keep them together for moving, scaling and transforming actions. With grouped objects you can also apply global changes, saving time and ensuring consistency. When you have finished making changes to a group, you can ungroup and work with the component objects. Note You need to ungroup before you can set properties for any individual object in the group.
V9
315
To group or ungroup objects
! Select the objects and click the Group icon.
Select, move, resize, or transform grouped objects as a single object
Selected objects are combined into a group. This can be selected, moved, resized and transformed as a single object.
! To ungroup, select the grouped object and click the Ungroup icon.
ungrouped objects are selected
Tip To select with a bounding outline, simply drag the outline over one component object and the whole group will be selected. See also Selecting objects with a bounding box.
Locking and unlocking objects

Select Lock (Arrange menu) to lock selected objects. Select Unlock (Arrange menu) to unlock selected objects. Lock objects to prevent them from being moved or modified by accident. For example, locking backdrop images or drawings holds them in place as you digitize, transform or reshape the embroidery objects near them. Locked objects can be unlocked for modification at any time.
To lock or unlock objects
! Select the object/s to lock and select Arrange > Lock.
V9
Chapter 15
316
The selection handles disappear, indicating that the object can no longer be selected or modified.
! To unlock objects select Arrange > Unlock.

All locked objects in the design are unlocked.
Grouping and locking with the Color-Object List

Use Color-Object List (Standard toolbar) to group and/or lock objects. The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects in designs and access their properties. You can use it to group and ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide objects. Tip Use the Color-Object List also to cut, copy and paste, resequence, as well as branch objects. See also Copying and pasting objects, Resequencing colors and objects with the Color-Object List, and Branching objects with the Color-Object List.
To group or lock with the Color-Object List

1 Click the Color-Object List icon. The Color-Object List opens.
V9
317
Click a node to open or close a color block and see its component objects.
Click to open or close node Group/Lock objects
Group and/or lock selected color blocks and objects via the popup menu.
! Right-click a color block or object icon, and select a command from

the popup menu.
! To unlock all items, right-click All then select the required command
from the popup menu.
Unlock all locked objects
Scaling objects
You can scale objects by dragging selection handles, specifying the exact dimensions in the Object Properties dialog, or by setting the distance between reference points on the design. As an object is scaled, the stitch count changes to preserve the current stitch spacing. Note Only EMB designs contain the complete set of design information required for 100% perfect scaling and transformation.
V9
Chapter 15
318
Scaling objects using click-and-drag

You can change the height and width of an object, or scale it proportionally using selection handles. Scale objects individually, or select multiple objects and scale them together.
To scale objects using click-and-drag

1 2 Select the object/s to scale. Eight selection handles appear around the object. Click-and-drag a selection handle to resize the object.
! To scale height and width proportionally, use a corner handle.
Scale proportionally
Drag
Scale freely in both directions
Ctrl + drag
Tip By default, objects scale proportionally. To scale freely in vertical and horizontal planes, hold down Ctrl as you drag.
! To change the height, use the handles at the center-top or

center-bottom.
Drag
scale vertically Drag
V9
319
! To change the width, use the handles at the center-sides.
Drag scale horizontally scale horizontally
! To resize proportionally around a central anchor point, hold down

Shift as you drag.
Scale horizontally in both directions
Shift + drag
Scale proportionally about center
Shift + drag
Scaling objects using object properties

You can scale selected objects or a whole design using their properties. This allows stitches to be regenerated and the original stitch density preserved. You can adjust stitch density at the same time. See also Adjusting stitch density. Warning If you scale a stitch design by more than 5%, changes to stitch density will affect the design quality. See also Embroidery design formats.
To scale objects using object properties

1 2 3 Select the object/s to scale. Double-click the object to open the Object Properties dialog, and select the General tab. In the Dimensions panel, scale the object as required. Either:
! Enter exact height and width values.
V9
Chapter 15
320
! Enter the new height and width as a percentage of the current

dimensions.
Enter dimensions as absolute values or as a percentage
Click OK.
original objects vase scaled Width: 120% Height: 140%
shadow scaled Width: 140% Height: 120%
Note After scaling, the new object size is reset to 100%.
Scaling objects using reference points

Select Transform (Edit menu) to scale an object or design using reference points. You can scale an object or design by marking reference points and specifying the required length of the line between them. For example, to resize a design to a specific width, select all objects, then mark the reference points across the width of the design.
To scale objects using reference points

1 2 Select the object/s to scale. Select Edit > Transform.
V9
321
The Transform dialog opens.
Select Size checkbox
Specify size
3 4
Select the Size checkbox, and enter the required distance between the reference points. Click OK. You are prompted to enter the start and end points of the reference line. You will have already decided which two points in the object or design will form the reference line.
Click to mark the reference points
Click to mark the reference points on the design. The object is scaled so that the distance between the points is the value you entered in the dialog. Tip Alternatively, press Enter twice to use the width of the selected object as the default reference line.
Making objects the same size

Select Make Same Size (Edit menu) to scale an object or design to the same size as a reference object. You can scale objects to be the same size as a reference object in your design. Resize the height or width separately or proportionally.
To make objects the same size

1 2 Select the object/s to resize. Select the object that is the size you require.
V9
Chapter 15
322
Select Arrange > Make Same Size, then select Height, Width or Both.
Make same size width 1 2 Make same size height
Make Same Size Both
Note Objects are resized according to the last object selected.
Rotating objects
You can rotate objects directly on-screen or by setting the rotation angle in the Object Properties dialog.
Rotating objects using click-and-drag

When you select an object, selection handles display at its extremities. If you click the object again, the handles change to rotation handles.
To rotate objects using click-and-drag

1 2 Select the object/s to rotate. Click the object a second time.
V9
323
Rotation handles appear at the corners and an anchor point at the center.
rotation handle anchor point
skew handle
first click displays selection handles
second click displays rotation handles
Note If you click too quickly, the Object Properties dialog opens. 3 Drag the anchor point to any position required.
Drag a corner to rotate about the anchor point
anchor point repositioned
Drag a corner to rotate about the anchor point
Click a rotation handle, and drag it clockwise or anti-clockwise. An outline displays as you rotate.
Rotating objects using object properties

You can rotate selected objects by entering an exact angle in the Object Properties dialog.
To rotate objects using object properties

1 2 Select the object/s to rotate. Double-click the object to open the Object Properties dialog, and select the General tab.
V9
Chapter 15
324
In the Rotate By field, enter the rotation angle you require.
Enter rotation angle
Click OK.
Rotating objects by reference line

Select Transform Special (Edit menu) to rotate an object using reference points. The Transform Special tool lets you rotate selected objects with the aid of reference points alone. It can be used both with embroidery and drawing objects. Tip This technique is particularly useful to duplicate and rotate objects around an anchor point e.g. the petals of a flower.
To rotate objects by reference line

1 2 3 Select the object/s to rotate. Select Edit > Transform Special. Follow the prompts:
! Click the first reference point. This will become the anchor point for
the rotation.
! Click a second reference point. An outline attaches to the pointer.
Move the pointer
! Click the anchor point. The pointer then aligns itself with the second
reference point.
V9
325
! Click a guide point for the required rotation position. Use the
coordinates on the Status bar for exact alignment.
Rotating objects by reference line and angle

Select Transform (Edit menu) to scale an object or design using reference points and specified angle. The Transform tool provides another method for transforming selected objects using a combination of reference points and numeric values. This provides a very accurate technique for rotating selected objects. It can be used with embroidery objects, vector graphics or bitmap images. The technique is particularly useful when you want to align objects precisely with a common reference line.
To rotate objects by reference line and angle

1 2 Select the object/s to rotate. Decide which two points in the object or design will form the reference line. This should be a significant line e.g. one which must be perfectly horizontal or vertical in the final design. Select Edit > Transform. The Transform dialog opens.
Select Angle
Enter absolute rotation angle in degrees
Select the Angle checkbox, and enter the rotation angle of the reference line.
V9
Chapter 15
326
For example, to rotate the image so that it aligns with the horizontal axis, enter a value of 0.
Select rotation angle e.g. 0
Digitize reference line align with base of object
reference line set to angle specified in dialog
5 6
Click OK. Click to mark the start and end points of the reference line. Tip Press Ctrl to constrain the angle of the axis to 15 increments. Press Enter twice to use a horizontal reference line by default.
Skewing objects
You can skew objects directly on-screen or by setting the skew angle in the Object Properties dialog.
Skewing objects using click-and-drag

You can skew objects along the horizontal plane by clicking skew handles and dragging to the required angle.
To skew objects using click-and-drag

1 2 Select the object/s to skew. Click the object a second time. Rotation and skew handles appear around the object. Skew handles are diamond-shaped and appear at the center-top and bottom of the object. 3 Drag the skew handles left or right.
V9
327
The object skews along the horizontal plane.
Drag skew handle left or right
Skewing objects using object properties

You can skew selected objects by entering an exact angle in the Object Properties dialog.
To skew objects using object properties

1 2 3 Select the object/s to skew. Double-click the object to open the Object Properties dialog, and select the General tab. In the Skew By field, enter the skew angle you require.
Enter skew angle
Click OK.
Duplicating and mirroring objects

You can mirror objects horizontally or vertically using the Object Properties dialog. You can also mirror around a defined axis using a reference line. The Mirror-Merge tool allows you to duplicate and transform selected embroidery objects, as well as merge them into a single object.
Mirroring objects using object properties

You can mirror selected objects horizontally or vertically using the Object Properties dialog.
V9
Chapter 15
328
To mirror objects using object properties

1 2 3 Select the object/s to mirror. Double-click the object to open the Object Properties dialog, and select the General tab. In the Mirror panel, select the In X or In Y checkbox.
! In X mirrors the object in the horizontal plane. ! In Y mirrors the object vertically.
Flip horizontally Flip vertically
Tip Select both checkboxes to mirror in both axes.

mirrored in X starting object
mirrored in X & Y
mirrored in Y
Click OK.
Mirroring objects about a specified axis

Select Transform (Edit menu) to mirror objects about a specified axis. You can mirror objects around a defined axis using a reference line. Using this method you mark the start and end points of the line around which the object mirrors.
V9
329
To mirror objects about a specified axis

1 2 Select the object/s to mirror. Select Edit > Transform. The Transform dialog opens.
Select Mirror
3 4
Select the Mirror checkbox. Click OK.

starting object
mirrored
Click to mark the reference points of the mirror axis. After the second click, the selected object is mirrored in the reference line. Tip If you just want to mirror your selection around a horizontal axis, press Enter twice. The mirror axis defaults to zero.
Duplicating designs with Mirror-Merge

Use Array (Mirror-Merge toolbar) to duplicate objects or designs. Use the Mirror-Merge Array tool to create multiple copies of designs, such as badges, spaced in rows and columns for faster stitchouts. Mirror-Merge
V9
Chapter 15
330
automatically sequences each color block to eliminate unnecessary machine color changes.
To duplicate designs with mirror-merge

1 2 Select the object or design. Click the Array icon. The pointer attaches to a reference line. As you move it around, the duplicate outlines move accordingly. Tip Press Shift to disable Auto-Scroll while using Mirror-Merge. 3 Set the number of columns and rows you require.
Set no. of columns
Set no. of rows
Move the reference line to position the duplicates.
V9
331
For more precise positioning, adjust spacing settings.
Set precise column spacing
Set precise row spacing
Tip Tab from field to field to enter values. Press Enter to confirm. 6 Click to mark the anchor point or press Enter to confirm. The design is duplicated and distributed around the reference lines. Note If the duplicates overlap the original, you are prompted to merge objects.
Mirroring designs with Mirror-Merge

Use Reflect (Mirror-Merge toolbar) to duplicate and mirror objects or designs. Use the Mirror-Merge Reflect tool to duplicate and mirror designs simultaneously. You can use it to quickly create borders. You can also use it merge duplicates into a perfectly symmetrical object such as a face or heart.
To mirror designs with Mirror-Merge

1 2 Select the object or design. Click the Reflect icon. The pointer attaches to the center point. As you move it around, the duplicate outlines move accordingly.
V9
Chapter 15
332
Tip Press Shift to disable Auto-Scroll while using Mirror-Merge. 3 Set the number of columns and rows you require.
Set no. of columns
Set no. of rows
Move the reference line to position the duplicates.
For more precise positioning, adjust spacing settings.
Set precise column spacing
Set precise row spacing
Tip Tab from field to field to enter values. Press Enter to confirm. 6 Click to mark the anchor point or press Enter to confirm. The design is duplicated and distributed around the center point.
V9
333
Note If the duplicates overlap the original, you are prompted to merge objects. Use this feature to merge duplicates into a perfectly symmetrical object such as a face or heart.
object reflected
reflected objects merged
Creating wreaths with Mirror-Merge

Use Wreath (Mirror-Merge toolbar) to duplicate objects around a center point. Use Kaleidoscope (Mirror-Merge toolbar) to duplicate and mirror objects around a center point. Use the Mirror-Merge Wreath tool to duplicate objects around a center point. The Kaleidoscope tool works like Wreath but mirrors objects as well. Because objects are mirrored, Kaleidoscope works best with an even number.
six-point wreath
eight-point kaleidoscope
five-point wreath
To create wreaths with Mirror-Merge

1 2 Select the object or design. Click the Wreath or Kaleidoscope icon. The pointer attaches to the center point. As you move it around, the duplicate outlines move accordingly.
V9
Chapter 15
334
Enter the number of Wreath points.
Enter no. of wreath points
Note Enter an even number for a kaleidoscope effect. 4 Move the reference line to position the duplicates.
five-point wreath
six-point kaleidoscope
Tip Hold down Ctrl to constrain the reference line to 45o increments. 5 For more precise positioning, adjust the Distance and Angle settings. Distance and angle are measured from the center of the original to the center of the wreath or kaleidoscope.
Set precise distance
Set precise angle
Tip Tab from field to field to enter values. Press Enter to confirm. 6 Click to mark the anchor point or press Enter to confirm.
V9
335
The design is duplicated and distributed around the center point.
five-point wreath
six-point kaleidoscope
Note If the duplicates overlap the original, you are prompted to merge objects.
V9
Chapter 15
336
Chapter 16
Converting and Reshaping Objects
ES Designer also lets you convert among vector and embroidery objects of different types at all stages of the design. For example, you can convert vector drawings directly to embroidery objects. Similarly, you can convert embroidery designs or objects to vector drawings. These can then be converted to any kind of embroidery object. You can also convert between embroidery object types.
The reference points you mark when digitizing a shape become its control points. These vary slightly with the object type. Use them to edit or transform objects e.g. reshaping, scaling, letter spacing, changing entry and exit points. Modify stitch angles of selected objects. Add multiple stitch angles as required.
entry point Key to control points = entry point = exit point stitch angle line corner point exit point = corner point = curve point = stitch angle points
Most control points can be added, deleted, moved or changed to corner or curve points. Some control points have a specific function and cannot be deleted, for example, the entry point.
V9
337
Tip Before modifying any design, a good practice is to save a copy under a new name and keep the original in case you want to discard your changes and start again. This section describes how to reshape objects with control points, reshape circle, star and ring objects. It also describes how to convert object types, adjust stitch angles, change entry and exit points, as well as keep or omit the last stitch.
Converting between object types

ES Designer lets you convert vector drawings directly to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods. Similarly, you can convert embroidery designs or objects to vector drawings. These can then be converted to any kind of embroidery object. You can also convert between Run, Triple Run and Input C objects. This is useful when scaling designs e.g. for creating thicker or thinner columns and borders, or converting between Complex Fill and Input A or Input B objects. Tip You can also create embroidery objects with turning stitches by applying stitch angles directly to drawing objects. See Adjusting stitch angles for details. Tip You can also convert from Complex Fill to Input A or B using the Stitch Angles tool. See Adding stitch angles to Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects for details.
Converting vector drawings to embroidery objects

Use Convert > Complex Fill (popup menu) to convert drawing objects to Complex Fill objects. Use Convert > Input C (popup menu) to convert drawing objects to Input C objects. Use Convert > Auto Appliqu (popup menu) to convert drawing objects to Appliqu objects. Use Convert > Run (popup menu) to convert drawing objects to Run objects. Use Convert > Triple Run (popup menu) to convert drawing objects to Triple Run objects.
V9
Chapter 16
338
Use Convert > Motif Run (popup menu) to convert drawing objects to Motif Run objects. You can convert drawing objects to embroidery objects using Complex Fill, Input C, or an outline input method. The resulting object takes the current stitch type, color and object properties set for that input method. Drawing objects can be converted to appliqu. You can even send them directly to a laser cutter. See also Cutting appliqu shapes. Tip The Point & Stitch tools can also be used with vector drawings created either in a graphics package or with the ES Designer drawing tools. See Digitizing shapes automatically with Point & Stitch for details.
vector drawing converted to Input C
converted to Complex Fill
converted to Run
Tip You can also create embroidery objects with turning stitches by applying stitch angles directly to drawing objects. See Adjusting stitch angles for details.
To convert drawing objects to embroidery objects

1 2 Select a thread color from the color palette. Select the drawing object to convert. Note If you select Complex Fill as the input method, you can select several drawing objects to create an object with multiple boundaries. 3 Select an input method from the Input Method toolbar. Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > from the popup menu. Tip Before you apply an input method, select the correct properties. For Complex Fill and Input C, select a stitch type and set the desired effects, otherwise the last selected stitch types and properties are used.
V9
339
! For open shapes and outlines, select Run, Triple Run, Motif Run or
Input C. You can apply these input methods to closed shapes as well if you want to stitch their outlines.
! For closed, filled shapes, use Complex Fill.

Tip You can also create objects with turning stitches by adding stitch angles directly to drawing objects. See Adding stitch angles to Input A and B objects for details. 4 Depending on the selected input method, ES Designer may prompt you to provide additional information.
! For Complex Fill objects, mark stitch entry and exit points, and
define the stitch angle.
! For Input C objects, mark two reference points to define the width
of the column.
! For Auto Appliqu objects, mark stitch entry and exit points, and
other details as prompted. See Creating appliqu objects for details. Tip Press Enter to accept defaults at each step. You can edit the results at any stage. 5 Press Enter. Stitches are generated according to the current properties of the selected input method. For fill input methods, the current properties include the stitch type as well.
Converting embroidery objects to drawing objects

Use Convert > Drawing (popup menu) to convert embroidery objects to drawing objects. You can convert embroidery designs or objects to vector drawings at any time. These can in turn be re-converted to any kind of embroidery object. See also Pasting vector drawings.
To convert an embroidery object to a drawing object

1 2 Select an embroidery object or design. Right-click it and select Convert > Drawing from the popup list. The selected embroidery objects are converted to drawing objects.
V9
Chapter 16
340
Convert selected drawing objects to embroidery objects as required.
run object
drawing object
appliqu object
Converting between Run, Triple Run, Motif Run and Input C objects
Use Run (Input toolbar or popup menu) to digitize and then convert to Triple Run or Input C. Use Triple Run (Input toolbar or popup menu) to digitize and then convert to Run or Input C. Use Motif Run (Input toolbar or popup menu) to digitize and then convert to Run or Input C. Use Input C (Input toolbar or popup menu) to digitize and then convert to Run or Triple Run. You can quickly inter-convert objects digitized with Run, Triple Run, Motif Run or Input C. This is useful for creating thicker or thinner columns and borders when scaling.
Tip You can convert drawing to embroidery objects (and vice versa) in the same way. See also Converting vector drawings to embroidery objects.
V9
341
To convert between Run, Triple Run, Motif Run and Input C objects
1 Select a Run object.
Run object
Click the Triple Run, Motif Run or Input C icons. Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > Triple Run, Motif Run or Input C from the dropdown list.
Follow the instruction in the prompt bar:
! Motif Run is converted automatically. ! Enter the entry point for Triple Run or press Enter to accept the
default.
! Enter width point1 and width point2 for Input C or press Enter to
accept the current default width. 4 Press Enter. The object is converted.
Enter width point1 and point2
Press Enter to convert to Input C object
Note You can convert between any of these object types in the same way.
Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill

Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar or popup menu) to convert objects from Input A or B to Fusion Fill. Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar or popup menu) to convert objects from Input A or B to Complex Fill. You can easily convert objects from Input A or Input B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill. This is useful for editing. For example, as curved fill effects can only be used with Complex Fill objects, you can add them to Input A or B
V9
Chapter 16
342
shapes by first converting to Complex Fill. Also when scaling designs, an Input A or B shape may become too big for Turning Satin. By converting to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill, you can apply fixed or turning Tatami or some other fill stitch type. If the original object has overlapping areas, these are removed.
converted to Complex Fill
motif fill applied
curve effect applied
Tip You can also convert from Complex Fill to Input A or B using the Stitch Angles tool. You can convert drawing to embroidery objects (and vice versa) in the same way. See Adding stitch angles to Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects for details. and See also Converting vector drawings to embroidery objects.
To convert Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill

1 2 Select the Input A or Input B object. Click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon. Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > Complex Fill or Fusion Fill from the popup menu. Follow the instruction in the prompt bar. 3 Enter angle points 1 and 2.
Enter angle points
V9
343
Note If the Input A or B object stitch type is not applicable to Complex Fill e.g. contour stitch Tatami will be substituted. If the underlay type is not applicable e.g. Center Run Zigzag will be used. 4 Adjust control points and add effects as required. Tip You can change an Auto Appliqu or drawing object to a Complex Fill object in the same way. You can also convert Complex Fill to Fusion Fill if required.
Converting Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu

Use Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar or popup menu) to convert objects from Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu. You can convert objects from Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu with the Auto Appliqu tool. By adding entry, exit points and frame-out position, the object is converted to an appliqu object. See also Cutting appliqu shapes.
To convert Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu

1 Select the Complex Fill object.
Complex Fill object
Click the Auto Appliqu icon. Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > Auto Appliqu from the dropdown menu. Follow the instruction in the prompt bar.
Click the outline to set the stitch entry and exit points or press Enter to accept the defaults.
V9
Chapter 16
344
If prompted to do so, mark the frame-out position.
! To use the current frame-out values, press Enter. See also Adjusting
the default frame-out position.
! To specify a frame-out position, click a point on the design.
Entry and Exit points
Frame-out position
Note You can convert a drawing object to an Auto Appliqu object in the same way.
Reshaping objects using control points

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected objects by means of control points. Change object shapes with the Reshape Object tool. Use it to add, delete, or move control points on the object outline. For some objects, you can also change corner points to curves. Note The Reshape Object tool lets you modify shapes without affecting the stitch angles.
To reshape objects using control points

1 2 3 Select the object to reshape. Select the Reshape Object icon. Control points appear around it. Add extra control points as required:
! Left-click to add a corner point.
V9
345
! Right-click to add a curve point.

Right-click
Left-click
Select control points as required:
! Click to select a single control point.
! Holding down Ctrl, click to select multiple control points. ! Click-and-drag a bounding box around a group of control points to
select.
V9
Chapter 16
346
Adjust the position of selected control points by dragging them along the outline as required.
Press Delete to delete unwanted control points.
If the object only has two control points (or two pairs of control points as in the case of Input A objects), deleting one deletes the whole object. 7 Press Spacebar to toggle between selected corner and curve control points.
V9
347
Tip If you make a mistake, press ESC to remove the changes, press ESC again to exit Reshape mode.
Note You cannot change or delete the end points of Input A and Input B columns, or any control point in objects created with the Circle/Star or Ring tools. See also Reshaping circle, star and ring objects. 8 Press Enter to apply the changes.
entry point curve control point curve control point
stitch angle line stitch angle control point stitch angle control point
corner control point
exit point
Note You can also adjust stitch angles as required, as well as change entry and exit points. See Adjusting stitch angles and Fine-tuning entry/exit points and last stitches for details.
V9
Chapter 16
348
Reshaping circle, star and ring objects

For objects created with the Circle/Star or Ring tools, you reshape using the existing control points only. You cannot add, change or delete control points in these objects.
Reshaping circle/star objects

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape circle and star objects. You can change Circle/Star objects from circles to ovals using the Reshape Object tool. Circle/Star objects have two reshape control points (used to change the radius and orientation of the object), a center point (used to reposition it), and an entry point.
entry point
90 center point control point stitch angle
Tip To scale a circle without changing it to an oval, select it with the Select Object tool, and use the selection handles to scale it.
To reshape circle/star objects

1 2 Select the Circle/Star object. Click the Reshape Object icon. Tip To move a circle, click the control point in the circles center, and drag it to a new position.
V9
349
Click a control point on the circumference of the circle, and drag it to reshape the outline.
! To reshape without changing the orientation, use the control point at

the top of the object.
! To reshape and spin the object around its center point, use the
control point at the side. 4 Press Enter.
Reshaping ring objects

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape ring objects. You can reshape the inner and outer boundaries of Ring objects with the Reshape Object tool. Reshaping rings is similar to reshaping Circle/Star objects except that you reshape each boundary individually. Each boundary has two reshape control points for changing radius and orientation, as well as a center point for moving the boundary. The object has a single entry point.
entry point center point may not be visible
control point
To reshape ring objects

1 2 Select the Ring object. Click the Reshape Object icon.
V9
Chapter 16
350
Click a control point on the circumference of the boundary you want to reshape, and drag it to change the outline.
! To reshape without changing the orientation, use the control point at

the top of the boundary.
! To reshape and spin the boundary around its center, use the control
point at the side. 4 To offset the boundaries, select the center point of a boundary and drag it to a new position. Note The center points are generally on top of each other to begin with, and may not be visible. 5 Press Enter.
Drag center point
Adjusting stitch angles

Stitch angle adjustments depend on the type of object you are working with. With Complex Fill objects you can set a single stitch angle for the entire object. You can add multiple stitch angles to objects with the Stitch Angles tool. You can also adjust stitch angles with the Reshape Object tool. Note You cannot change the stitch angle of Star, Ring and Input C objects as the stitches automatically turn to follow the shape. You can, however, change the stitch angle of Circle objects by moving the entry point. See Reshaping circle, star and ring objects for details.
Adjusting Complex Fill stitch angles on-screen

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to adjust stitch angles of selected Complex Fill objects on-screen.
V9
351
You can adjust the stitch angle of Complex Fill objects interactively using the Reshape Object tool. Tip You can change the stitch angle of Complex Fill objects using object properties. See Adjusting stitch angles using object properties for details.
To adjust Complex Fill stitch angles on-screen

1 2 Select a Complex Fill object. Click the Reshape Object icon. Control points appear together with a stitch angle line.
3 4
Click-and-drag the line as required. Press Enter.
Adding stitch angles to Input A and B objects

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to add stitch angles to selected Input A and B objects. Modify and add stitch angles of Input A and Input B objects with the Reshape Object tool. Input A objects thereby convert to Input B. You can also create embroidery objects with turning stitches by applying stitch angles directly to drawing objects. See also Converting between object types.
V9
Chapter 16
352
Note You can also use the Reshape Object tool to add individual control points on either side of Input A and B objects, modifying the shape without affecting the stitch angles. See Reshaping objects using control points for details.
To add stitch angles to an Input A or B object

1 Select an object.
Input A object
Input B object
Click the Reshape Object icon. You are prompted to select and move one or several control points to reshape. Tip Clicking the Stitch Angles icon automatically activates the Reshape Object tool.
Holding down the Ctrl key, click the outline wherever you want to place a stitch angle line.
Hold down Ctrl key and click the outline to add stitch angle line
4 5
Select and adjust the end points as required. Press Enter.
V9
353
The stitch angles change accordingly.
Tip You need to convert Input B objects to Input A in order to apply Smart Corners. To do this, you need to edit the control points to create control point pairs. See Reshaping objects using control points for details.
Adding stitch angles to Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects

Use Stitch Angles (Pointer toolbar or popup menu) to add stitch angles to selected Complex Fill objects. Modify the stitch angles of Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects with the Stitch Angles tool. You can also create objects with turning stitches by adding stitch angles directly to drawing objects. Adding stitch angles to Complex Fill or drawing objects converts them to Fusion Fill. See also Converting between object types.
Complex Fill object one stitch angle
Complex Fill converted to Fusion Fill
V9
Chapter 16
354
To add stitch angles to a Complex Fill or Fusion Fill object

1 Select an object.
Complex Fill object one stitch angle
Click the Stitch Angles icon. Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > Stitch Angles from the dropdown menu. You are prompted to enter stitch angles.
Digitize stitch angles so that they intersect two sides of the object. Make sure that they do not intersect each other.
Enter stitch angles Complex Fill converted to Fusion Fill
4 5
Enter angle points 1 and 2 as many times as required to create a turning fill effect. Press Enter. The object is re-generated with the new angles.
Fine-tuning entry/exit points and last stitches

ES Designer lets you change the stitch entry and exit points of individual objects. You can also keep or omit the last stitch in a column of stitches.
Changing entry and exit points

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to adjust the entry and exit points of selected objects.
V9
355
You can change the stitch entry and exit points of individual objects. Do this to place the exit point next to adjoining objects for smaller connecting stitches, or to reduce the number of travel runs.
entry point exit point entry point
exit point
entry point
exit point
Note In Circle objects, the stitch angle is perpendicular to the line connecting the entry point to the circle center. Thus, changing the stitch entry point in a Circle object changes its stitch angle.
To change entry and exit points

1 2 Select the object to change. Click the Reshape Object icon. Control points appear, including entry and exit points. Note In Circle/Star or Ring objects, only the entry point appears. 3 Select the entry or exit point as required, and drag it to a different position on the object outline.
Press Enter.
Keeping or omitting the last stitch

Click Keep Last Stitch (Pointer toolbar) to keep the last stitch in a column. Right-click to omit the last stitch in a column.
V9
Chapter 16
356
If you are digitizing adjoining columns, you can keep or omit the last stitch in the first column to achieve a smoother join or shorter connecting stitches.
columns smoothly joined
columns with unwanted space
Note This feature only applies when the exit point is at the end of the column i.e. the default exit point. Moving the exit point using the Reshape Object tool overrides the Keep Last Stitch/Omit Last Stitch command.
To keep or omit the last stitch
! To keep the last stitch, select the object and click the Keep Last
Stitch/Omit Last Stitch icon.
! To omit the last stitch, select the object and right-click the Keep Last
Stitch/Omit Last Stitch icon.
last stitches kept columns smoothly joined
last stitches omitted
Tip Alternatively press Spacebar to omit the last stitch or Enter keep it.
Press Spacebar last stitch omitted
Press Enter last stitch kept
V9
357
Chapter 17
Editing Stitches and Machine Functions
ES Designer automatically generates stitches from design outlines and properties. This means you can scale, transform, and reshape native designs without affecting stitch density or quality. However, ES Designer also lets you edit individual stitches. You simply select them like any other object and move the needlepoint position as required. You may need to do this, for example, when working with stitch files which do not contain design outline data. See Embroidery design formats for details. Like stitches, most machine functions are inserted automatically whenever you select commands or specify object properties. They are stored with the embroidery object and updated whenever the object is modified. However, ES Designer also lets you manually insert machine functions and modify them. This flexibility allows you to adapt designs to almost any machine requirement. Warning Stitches or machine functions which are manually inserted into non-manual objects e.g. Input A, Complex Fill, etc need to be maintained manually. If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, stitch edits are lost. Machine functions may be moved to another point in the stitch sequence. For this reason, only insert functions manually if they cannot be added automatically. This section deals with selecting and editing stitches, and converting selected stitches to objects. It also includes instructions for inserting, checking, editing and clearing manually-inserted functions. It also describes how to edit stitches and functions using the Stitch List.
V9
358
Selecting and deselecting stitches

The Stitch Edit tool lets you select single stitches, several stitches, or a range of stitches by selecting their needle points, or dragging a bounding box around them. You can select all stitches in a design, cancel all selections, or remove individual stitches from a selected group. Selected stitches are highlighted in a different color. You can also select individual stitches in your design using the Stitch List.
Selecting stitches by needle point

Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for editing. You can select individual stitches in Stitch Edit mode by selecting their needle points. Tip Zoom in and display the needle points for easier selection.
To select stitches by needle point

1 2 Click the Stitch Edit icon. Click a needle point. The needle point changes color and the needle position marker moves to the selected stitch. All stitches after the needle position marker in the stitching sequence appear in black.
selected stitch Hold down Shift to select a range of stitches
! To select a range of stitches, hold down Shift as you select. ! To select multiple stitches, hold down Ctrl as you select.
V9
359
Selecting stitches with a bounding box

Click Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select stitches with a bounding box. With the Stitch Edit tool activated, you can select stitches by dragging a bounding box around them.
To select stitches with a bounding box

1 2 Click the Stitch Edit icon. Drag a bounding box around the stitches you want to select. Stitches are selected when you release the mouse button.
bounding box stitches selected
Selecting stitches with the Stitch List

Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to select individual stitches. You can select individual stitches in your design using the Stitch List. See also Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List.
To select stitches with the Stitch List

1 Click the Stitch List icon.
V9
Chapter 17
360
The Stitch List opens. It shows stitch position coordinates and function information e.g. whether the stitch is a jump. It also shows the length of every stitch in the design.
Click a stitch in the Stitch List to select it. Stitches selected in the Stitch List are also selected in the design, and vice versa.
! To select a range of stitches, hold down Shift as you select. ! To select multiple stitches, hold down Ctrl as you select.
selected stitches
Tip Right-click inside the Stitch List to access the popup menu options. Note You can select to display the Stitch List in black and white, or open the Stitch Edit dialog. See Editing stitch coordinates with Stitch List for details.
V9
361
Selecting a range of stitches

Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for editing. Click Selects On (Standard toolbar) to select a range of stitches. You can select a range of stitches with Selects On activated. The Selects On tool adds stitches to the selection.
To select a range of stitches with Selects On

1 2 Click the Stitch Edit icon. With the Selects On tool off, travel through the design, stopping just before the first stitch to select.
Stop before the first stitch
3 4
Click the Selects On icon. Click the last stitch in the range. The stitches between the needle marker and this stitch are selected.
Click the last stitch in the range
Note If the Stitch Edit tool is not selected, Selects On has no effect.
Selecting stitches while traveling through a design

Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for editing. Click Selects On (Standard toolbar) to select a range of stitches as you travel through the design. You can select a range of stitches by traveling by stitch with Selects On activated. The Selects On tool adds stitches to the selection as you travel through the stitching sequence.
V9
Chapter 17
362
To select stitches while traveling through a design

1 With the Selects On tool off, travel to the required stitch or select an individual stitch.
Travel to the first stitch.
2 3
Click the Stitch Edit icon. Click the Selects On icon to turn it on. Note If the Stitch Edit tool is not selected, Selects On has no effect.
Travel through the design. See Traveling by stitches for details. As you travel, stitches are added to the selection.
Travel 10 Stitches tool used
Note If a stitch is already selected, it is deselected when you travel through it.
Deselecting stitches
You can deselect individual stitches from a group of selected stitches or cancel all selections in the design.
To deselect stitches
! Deselect individual stitches using the following method. ! Travel backwards by one stitch.
Note The Stitch Edit and Selects On must be selected.
! Deselect all stitches using any of the following methods. ! Press Esc. ! Click the Cancel icon. ! Deselect Selects On, then select another stitch.
V9
363
! Select Edit > Deselect All.
Editing stitches
You can insert stitches in an object to fill gaps. You can move or delete individual or clusters of selected stitches. Warning If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, all stitch editing functions are lost. Where possible, edit the object properties rather than individual stitches.
Inserting stitches
Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to insert stitches in an object. You can insert stitches in an object to fill gaps. Inserted stitches are considered part of the object (rather than independent objects). They will, however, be lost if the objects stitches are regenerated. Where possible, edit the object properties rather than individual stitches. For example, to increase stitch density, reduce spacing rather than insert stitches. Note Inserting stitches is different from creating stitches using the Manual input method. Using the Manual tool you create a separate object, with its own properties and connectors. See Digitizing individual stitches for details.
To insert stitches
1 2 3 Click the Stitch Edit icon. Zoom into the area you want to edit. Select a needlepoint.
The stitch changes color and the needle position marker moves to the selected stitch.
V9
Chapter 17
364
Move the mouse pointer where you want to insert the new stitch, and right-click.
Right-click
Move the mouse to where you want to insert the next stitch, and right-click.
Right-click
Continue right-clicking as required.
Moving stitches
Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for moving. You can move individual or groups of selected stitches. Warning If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, all stitch editing functions are lost. Where possible, reshape the object rather than move individual stitches. See Converting and Reshaping Objects for details.
To move stitches
1 2 Click the Stitch Edit icon. Select stitches and drag them to a new position.
V9
365
The stitch shadow outline shows the new position.
shadow outline selected stitches Drag stitch to new position
Press Enter.
Deleting stitches
Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for deletion. You can delete individual or groups of selected stitches. Warning If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, all stitch editing functions are lost. Where possible, edit the object properties rather than individual stitches. See Adjusting Satin stitch spacing, Adjusting Tatami stitch spacing and Adjusting stitch density for details.
To delete stitches
1 2 3 Click the Stitch Edit icon. Select a stitch or stitches. Press Delete.
Select stitches
Press Delete
V9
Chapter 17
366
Converting selected stitches to objects

Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) together with Recognize Object/Outline to turn selected stitches into an embroidery object. New or revised object outlines can be recognized after stitch edits have been made. This capability is particularly useful with stitch files which have been opened without Object/Outline recognition. You may do this to preserve the original stitching in most of the design, while modifying a single section of it. You may also want to turn edited stitches into an embroidery object in order to preserve the edits. See also Recognizing object/outlines after editing.
To convert selected stitches to objects

1 Click the Stitch Edit icon and select the individual stitches you want to process. See Selecting and deselecting stitches for details.
stitches selected
Select Edit > Recognize Object/Outline. The selected stitches are converted to objects.
objects and outlines created
Editing machine functions

Most machine functions are inserted automatically whenever you select commands or specify object properties. They are stored with the embroidery object and updated whenever the object is modified. However, ES Designer lets you insert machine functions manually. Depending on your
V9
367
machine, different machine functions are available. The most common types are described below. See your machine manual for further details. Warning When you insert stitches or machine functions manually, you must maintain them manually. If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, all stitch editing and machine functions are lost. For this reason, only insert manual functions if they cannot be added automatically.
Machine function types

ES Designer lets you manually insert color changes, thread trims, jumps, machine stops, needles in and out, and boring functions, depending on the selected machine format.
Color Change functions

Color Change functions tell the machine to use the next thread color in the design. They are automatically inserted when you select a new color from the color palette. See Changing thread colors for details. You only need to insert manual color change functions if you cannot recolor using the standard methods, for example, when using multiple colors within a single object. See Editing machine functions for details.
Trim functions
Trim functions instruct machines with trimmers to cut connecting threads before moving to the next object. You insert trims automatically by setting connector values or using the Trim tool. See Adjusting automatic trim settings and Adding trims for details. If you need additional trims, you can insert the functions manually. See Editing machine functions for details. Note If a machine does not have a trimmer, the Trim function is ignored. Depending on the machine format, the Trim function may be a code or a sequence of jumps. See Setting trim functions for details.
Stop functions
If you want the embroidery machine to stop for any special reason during stitching, you need to manually insert a Stop function in the stitching sequence. See Editing machine functions for details.
V9
Chapter 17
368
Tip Because a Stop function may be inserted for various reasons, you should record the purpose of the stop on the production worksheet to assist the machine operator.
Jump functions
Jump functions cause frame movements without needle penetrations and are used to move smoothly from one part of a design to another. There are various methods for automatically entering Jump functions.
! Apply Auto Jump to preserve long stitches. See Preserving long stitches
with Auto Jump for details.
! Digitize individual jumps by right-clicking the Manual icon. See

Digitizing individual stitches for details.
! Select jumps as connectors. See Using jumps as connectors for details. ! Create jump connectors manually by digitizing with Penetrations
deselected. See Adding jumps with penetrations off for details. If you need additional jumps, you can insert the functions manually. See Editing machine functions for details.
Begin/End Jump functions

The Begin/End Jump functions (formerly known as Needle Out/In) instruct the machine whether or not to use needle penetrations. You insert these functions automatically using the Penetrations tool (formerly known as Needles In). See Adding jumps with penetrations off for details. If you need additional Begin/End Jump functions, you can insert them manually. See Editing machine functions for details. Note Remember to insert a End Jump function to instruct the machine to resume normal stitching.
Borer In/Out functions

Borer In/Out functions are available for embroidery machines equipped with a borer. They instruct the machine when to use the boring knife or tool instead of a needle. You insert these functions automatically using the Borers tool (formerly known as Borers In). See Digitizing boring holes for details. If you need additional Borer In or Out functions, you can insert them manually. See Editing machine functions for details.
V9
369
Sequin On/Off functions

Sequin On and Sequin Off functions are available for embroidery machines that are equipped with a sequin dispenser. The Sequin On function generally instructs the machine to physically lower the sequin dispenser into position for sequins to be placed (fed and cut). These functions are automatically inserted when using the Sequin Mode tool. See Digitizing with sequins for details. If you need additional Sequin On or Sequin Off functions, you can insert them manually. See Editing machine functions for details. Some machines, notably Schiffli, use only explicit Drop Sequin functions. These instruct the machine to drop a sequin on the fabric for stitching. Schiffli machines, for example, do not require Sequin On/Off functions. See the ES Schiffli User Manual Supplement for details.
Inserting machine functions manually

Use Insert Function (Machine menu) to insert machine functions manually in your design. You can insert machine functions manually by means of the Insert Function dialog. Depending on your machines requirements, you will either add the function to the current stitch, or insert it on an empty stitch or empty jump. For some machines you will also need to add empty stitches or empty jumps on either side of some functions. See your machine manual for details. Note The available functions and their options depend on the selected machine format. See also Selecting machine formats.
To insert machine functions manually

1 2 Travel to the position in the design where you want to insert the machine function. See Traveling by stitches for details. Select Machine > Insert Function.
V9
Chapter 17
370
The Insert Function dialog opens.
Select from among functions listed for selected machine format
Tip It is faster to digitize individual jumps Jump(M) by right-clicking with the Manual input method selected. If you want the whole object to consist of jumps, deselect the Penetrations icon. 3 From the Available Functions list, select the function you want to insert. With some functions you can choose whether to insert on the current stitch or on an empty stitch. 4 If available, choose the insertion method:
! Insert on Empty Stitch: inserts the selected function on an empty

stitch.
! Add to Current stitch: inserts the selected function on the current

stitch. Depending on your machine, you may need to insert additional empty stitches or empty jumps before or after the selected function. For example, before a particular Stop function, you may want to insert a number of empty jumps. See your machine manual for details. 5 To insert additional empty stitches or empty jumps, select one or other in the Component field.
! Select Insert Before if you want the empty stitch/jump to precede the
selected function.
! Select Insert After if you want the empty stitch/jump to follow the
selected function.
V9
371
To insert multiple empty stitches or jumps, click Add.
Additional empty jumps inserted before and after the selected function
The selected function, together with any additional empty stitches or jumps, appears in the Sequence panel. 6 Click OK. The selected function, together with any additional empty stitches or jumps, is added at the current needle position.
Additional empty jumps inserted before and after the selected function
Tip The Stitch List provides an alternative means for inserting machine functions manually. See Editing stitch coordinates with Stitch List for details.
Adding empty stitches/empty jumps to machine functions

Use Edit Function (Machine menu) to add empty stitches/empty jumps to machine functions. You can edit the encoding of machine functions by changing the number or sequence of empty stitches or empty jumps that appear around them. Some machines require a specific number of empty stitches or empty jumps in combination with a function in order to interpret it correctly. You may need
V9
Chapter 17
372
to edit functions if they were inserted incorrectly or the machine format has changed. Note You generally only need to edit manually inserted machine functions. Functions added by ES Designer are automatically updated if the machine format changes.
To add empty stitches/empty jumps to machine functions

1 Travel to the function you want to edit. See Traveling by machine function for details. When you reach the function, its name appears in the Prompt line. 2 Select Machine > Edit Function. The Edit Function dialog opens.
Insert empty stitch/jump before or after the machine function
Select empty stitch or empty jump
The Sequence panel shows the current format of the selected function. 3 To insert additional empty stitches or empty jumps, select one or other in the Component field.
! Select Insert Before if you want the empty stitch/jump to precede the
selected function.
! Select Insert After if you want the empty stitch/jump to follow the
selected function. 4 5 6 To insert multiple empty stitches or jumps, click Add. To delete an empty stitch or empty jump from the sequence, select it, then click Remove. Click OK. Tip The Stitch List provides an alternative means for editing machine functions manually. See Editing machine functions with Stitch List for details.
V9
373
Clearing machine functions

Use Clear Function (Machine menu) to clear a manually inserted machine function from your design. Manually inserted machine functions are not automatically removed or updated when an object is modified. If a function is no longer required, it must be manually cleared from the design. Both automatic and manually-inserted functions can be removed. Tip Check the Prompt line for the functions name to ensure you clear the correct one.
To clear machine functions

1 Travel to the function you want to remove. See Traveling by machine function for details. When you reach the function, its name appears in the Prompt line. 2 Select Machine > Clear Function. The function is removed. Tip The Stitch List provides an alternative means for editing machine functions manually. See Editing machine functions with Stitch List for details.
Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List

You can use the Stitch List to help locate and select stitches for editing. The Stitch List displays stitch number, stitch coordinates, stitch length, stitch function, stitch color. When you select a stitch in the list, it is simultaneously selected in your design.
Editing stitch coordinates with Stitch List

Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to edit coordinates of individual stitches. Use the Stitch List to edit the coordinates, and therefore position, of individual stitches.
V9
Chapter 17
374
Note Changes to stitch coordinates are stitch edits and will be lost if the objects stitches are regenerated.
To edit stitch coordinates with Stitch List

1 2 Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for details. Double-click the stitch you want to edit. The Move Stitch dialog opens.
Enter new coordinates
Enter the new coordinates in the X and Y fields. Note The specified coordinates will change the location of the stitch end point.
Click OK. The stitch is regenerated in the new position and the Stitch List information is updated.
Inserting machine functions with Stitch List

Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to insert machine functions directly into the stitching sequence. You can use the Stitch List to access the Insert Function dialog. This provides a convenient means for inserting machine functions manually into the stitching sequence. Warning When you insert machine functions manually, you must maintain them manually. For this reason, only insert manual functions if they cannot be added automatically.
V9
375
To insert machine functions with Stitch List

1 2 3 4 Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for details. Locate the position in the stitching sequence where you want to insert the machine function. Right-click the stitch in the Stitch List and select Insert Function from the popup menu. From the Available Functions list, select the function you want to insert. See Inserting machine functions manually for details. 5 Click OK. The name of the inserted function appears in the Prompt line.
Editing machine functions with Stitch List

Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to edit machine function encoding and to clear machine functions. You can use the Stitch List to access the Edit Function dialog. This provides a convenient means for editing existing machine functions. The Stitch List also lets you clear machine functions from the stitching sequence. Note You generally only need to edit manually inserted machine functions. Functions added by ES Designer are automatically updated if the machine format changes.
To edit machine functions with Stitch List

1 2 3 Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for details. Locate the function you want to edit. Right-click any stitch in the Stitch List and select Edit Function from the popup menu. The Edit Function dialog opens. 4 5 Edit the function as required. See Editing machine functions for details. To remove the function altogether from the stitching sequence, select Clear Function from the popup menu.
V9
Chapter 17
376
Filtering stitches by function

Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to display stitches associated with specific functions. You can apply a filter to the Stitch List so that only stitches associated with specific functions appear in the list.
To filter stitches by function

1 2 Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for details. Right-click any stitch in the Stitch List and select Show Functions from the popup menu. The Functions dialog opens.
Select functions to show
Select the functions you want to show. Tip Click Select All to show all function types. To select multiple function types, hold down Ctrl as you select. To select a range, click the first type in the range, then hold down Shift and click the last type in the range.
Click OK. Only the selected functions are displayed in the list.
Only selected functions are displayed
V9
377
Tip To display the text in the associated stitch color, select MultiColored Text from the popup menu. To display the text in black, select Black Text. 5 To show all stitches again, right-click in the Stitch List and select Show All from the popup menu.
Filtering stitches by stitch length

Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to display only stitches of a certain length. You can apply a filter to the Stitch List so that only stitches of a certain length appear in the list. The main use of this feature is to find stitches which cause production problems, such as short stitches (e.g. < 1.0 mm). See also Removing small stitches automatically.
To filter stitches by stitch length

1 2 Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for details. Right-click any stitch in the Stitch List and select Show Stitches from the popup menu. The Show Stitches dialog opens.
Select stitch range to show
Select the range of stitch lengths you want to show.
! Radial corresponds to the actual stitch length. ! Axial X,Y corresponds to the horizontal and vertical frame
movements. See Adjusting Auto Jump settings for details. 4 Click OK.
V9
Chapter 17
378
Only the selected stitches are displayed in the list.
Tip To display the text in the associated stitch color, select MultiColored Text from the popup menu. To display the text in black, select Black Text. 5 To show all stitches again, right-click in the Stitch List and select Show All from the popup menu.
V9
379
PART V
ADVANCED DIGITIZING
ES Designer provides specialized productivity features as well as special effects and digitizing techniques.
Object properties, styles and templates

This section explains how to change the property settings in your design, as well as how to apply, create and maintain styles and templates in ES Designer. See Object Properties, Styles and Templates for details.
Specialized digitizing techniques

This section describes how to reinforce outlines. It also describes how to digitize circles, stars and rings. Creating smooth joins, as well as borders and filled holes are covered. You can also find instructions for specialist digitizing with appliqu, sequins and boring. See Specialized Digitizing Techniques for details.
Textured fills
This section describes how to apply textures to fills, and how to adjust their settings to get the results you want. Details of Tatami offsets and partition lines are explained, as well as how to create textures with Program Split and Flexi Split. Adding details with User Defined Split is also covered. See Textured Fills for details.
V9
380
Artistic stitch effects

This section describes how to create artistic effects with Jagged Edge, Accordion Spacing, and Color Blending, and how to adjust their settings to get the results you want. Creating contoured stitch effects with the Contour feature is also covered, as well as how to create curved fills with Florentine Effect and Liquid Effect. See Artistic Stitch Effects for details.
Motif runs and fills

This section describes how to insert motifs into your design, and how to rotate, mirror and scale them. It explains how to manage motifs, including how to create your own motifs and motif sets. It also describes how to create both motif runs and motif fills, as well as how to apply 3D effects to motif fills. See Motif Runs and Fills for details.
V9
381
Chapter 18
Object Properties, Styles and Templates
Every object you create in ES Designer has a unique set of properties that are stored with it whenever you save the design. These properties define general characteristics such as size and position, as well as embroidery-specific characteristics such as stitch type and density. The stitch properties determine how stitches will be regenerated when you reshape, transform or scale the object.
Default property settings

Default or starting property settings are the ones stored with the design template. These are automatically applied to any newly created objects in the design.
Current property settings

Current property settings override the template defaults. Unless you deliberately change them, these take the default values. You generally change them to save time when digitizing. For example, you may preset Tatami stitch spacing to use a specific density for all new Tatami objects you create.
V9
382
Note When you close the design, the current settings are not automatically saved. You can save them as the new default settings of the current template or to another template altogether.
Object properties
Each object has its own unique set of properties stored with it. You can set the properties of a selected object to be the current property settings. You can also apply current property settings to existing objects.
Styles
A style is a group of property settings stored under a unique name. You can save any combination of settings to a style. This makes it easy to apply these settings to selected embroidery and lettering objects. When you apply a style to an object, the style settings replace its current properties. Any properties not specified in the style, retain their current settings.
Templates
Templates are special files used to store styles and default property settings. Use templates when digitizing frequently-used design types to save time re-adjusting the current property settings. This section explains how to change the property settings in your design, as well as how to apply, create and maintain styles and templates in ES Designer.
Working with object properties

When you create an embroidery object, you can simply accept the default settings or apply new ones. Default property settings are stored with the design template. You can also define current settings to influence all the objects you create in the current design. You can change an objects properties at any time without affecting those of any other object. Alternatively, you can make any changes to the selected object current for all new objects. Alternatively again, you can change all the current property settings in the Object Properties dialog with no objects selected at all. You can then apply current settings to any existing objects. You can also save any modified settings to the current template as the new default property settings.
V9
383
Tip You can save any combination of settings to custom styles. See Working with styles for details.
Changing properties of existing objects

You can change an objects properties at any time without affecting those of any other object not currently selected. Nor do such changes affect the current or default settings. Some properties can be modified on-screen for example, you can change the size properties by scaling the object with the selection handles. Other properties, such as stitch spacing or length, can only be modified via the Object Properties dialog. If you select more than one object, the Object Properties dialog will only display tabs relevant to all selected objects. For example, if you select a Complex Fill object and an Input C object, neither of these tabs will display as the settings do not apply to both. If selected objects have different values for the same setting e.g. stitch length the field will be blank. If you enter a new value, it will apply to both objects.
To change properties of existing objects

1 2 3 4 Select the object (or objects) whose properties you want to change. Double-click to open the Object Properties dialog. Select the tab you want and change the settings as required. Click OK. Tip Some properties, such as Auto Underlay, are applied by means of toolbar buttons. When the button is selected, that tools settings are current.
Making selected object properties current

Click Make Properties Current (Styles toolbar) to make the properties of a selected object current for the design. You can make the properties of an existing object current for all newly created objects.
V9
Chapter 18
384
Note Only the settings applicable to the selected object change. Other settings retain their current values. For example, if you make the properties of a selected Input C object current, settings specific to Complex Fill will not change.
To make selected object properties current

1 2 Select the object on which you want to base the current properties. Click the Make Properties Current icon. The properties of the selected object become the current ones. You can now create new objects with these settings or apply them to existing objects. Tip To check that the now current settings are as you intended, open the Object Properties dialog.
Modifying current property settings

Use Properties (Generate toolbar) to set properties for the current design. Whenever you change the current property settings, these will automatically apply to any new objects you create. If you know which settings you require before digitizing, you can preset them. Note Some object properties, such as Auto Underlay, are made current by means of toolbar buttons. When the button is selected, that tools settings are current.
To modify current property settings

1 With no objects selected, click the Properties icon.
V9
385
The Object Properties dialog opens.

Select tab Modify settings as required
Tabs display at the top of the Object Properties dialog. These provide access to all possible object property settings. 2 3 Click a tab to view the current settings and change as required. Click OK.
Applying current settings to existing objects

Use Apply Current Properties (Styles toolbar) to apply current settings to selected objects. When you change the current property settings, these apply to all new objects you create but not automatically to any existing objects. However, you can apply them to selected objects as required.
To apply current settings to existing objects

1 2 Select the object (or objects) whose properties you want to change. Click the Apply Current Properties icon. The current values are immediately updated.
V9
Chapter 18
386
Changing default property settings

Use Properties (Generate toolbar) to change default property settings for the current template. You can change default property settings at any time by saving the current settings in the Object Properties dialog to the current template. If the settings you are saving are based on a selected object, only these values are updated in the template. Note All changes affect any new designs created using this template. If you only want the changes to apply to the design you are working in, change the current not the default properties. See Modifying current property settings for details.
To change default property settings

1 With or without any objects selected, click the Properties icon. The Object Properties dialog opens.
Change settings as required
Click Save
2 3
Select the tab you want and change the settings as required. Click Save. The object properties are saved to the current template. These will apply to any new objects in any design based on this template.
V9
387
Tip You may wish to save your modified property settings to a custom template for certain specialist purposes. See Working with design templates for details.
Working with styles

A style is a group of property settings stored under a unique name. You can save any combination of settings to your styles. This makes it easy to apply them to selected embroidery and lettering objects. When you apply a style to an object, the style settings replace its current properties. Any properties not specified in the style, retain their current settings. Styles are stored with the design template. The NORMAL template provides a selection of preset styles for you to use. You can modify these as required and save them back to the NORMAL template or to your own custom templates. Each template may contain specific styles for different types of embroidery. See also Working with design templates.
Styles toolbar
Use the Styles toolbar to quickly apply styles in your design. This toolbar lets you:
! apply current settings to selected objects ! change current settings, and ! apply styles to selected objects.
The styles you select as favorites are each assigned a tool icon on the toolbar.
Applying styles
Click Apply Style (Styles toolbar) to apply a style from the template to new or selected objects. Use the Styles toolbar to apply favorite styles to new or selected objects.
V9
Chapter 18
388
When you select a style, the settings overwrite the current property settings. You can apply a style to current property settings before you digitize, or to a selected object. See also Working with object properties. Tip If you are using a digitizing tablet, you can quickly switch between preset styles. Each button on the puck accesses the next preset style with different spacing settings. For example, clicking Button 1 accesses <PRESET_SATIN_1>.
To apply styles
1 Click the Apply Style icon. The Use Object Style dialog opens.
Select a style
Select a style from the dropdown list, then click OK.
! If an object is selected, the style settings are applied to it alone. ! If no object is selected, the style settings become the current
property settings, and apply to any new objects you create. Any settings that are not specified in the style will remain unchanged.
Style 1, E stitch spacing 0.75mm
Tip To apply a favorite style, click the Favorite Style icon assigned to it. See also Assigning favorite styles.
Defining new styles

Select Define Style (Stitch menu) to make the properties of a selected object current for the design.
V9
389
Define new styles for a template, either from scratch, or based on an existing style or object. You can create styles in the Object Properties box by specifying settings in any or all of the tabs. New styles are saved to the current template. Note The stitch type, settings and effects you specify for the new style do not automatically change the current property settings. See also Applying current settings to existing objects.
To define new styles

1 2 To base the new style on an existing object, select it now. To base it on the current settings, make sure no objects are selected. Select Stitch > Define Style. The Organize Styles dialog opens.
Click New
Click New. The New Object Style dialog opens.
4 5
Enter a name in the Style Name field. To base the new style on an existing style, select it from the Based on Style dropdown list. Tip If you want the new style to be added to the Style toolbar, select the Add to Favorites checkbox.
Click OK. The Object Properties dialog opens. If you selected a style or object to base the new style on, its settings will display.
V9
Chapter 18
390
Enter the required values for the new style in the Object Properties tabs. Note You do not have to enter values in all fields, only those you specifically wish to store.
Click OK and then Close. The new style is saved to the current template.
Assigning favorite styles

Select Define Style (Stitch menu) to assign a favorite style. You can assign up to ten favorite styles to tool icons on the Styles toolbar. To apply the style, you then simply select the tool.
To assign favorite styles

1 Select Stitch > Define Style. The Organize Styles dialog opens.
Click Favorites
Click Favorites. The Organize Favorites dialog opens.
Click Add
Click Add.
V9
391
The Add To Favorites dialog opens.
Select a style
4 5 6 7
Select a style from the list. Click OK. Change the order in which the favorites will appear on the Styles toolbar using Move Up and Move Down. Click OK and then Close. The styles are assigned in the order they appear in the Organize Favorites box. The tool tip for each button shows the style name.
Merging styles
Select Define Style (Stitch menu) to merge style settings. You can merge settings from one style to another. When you merge, the settings from the second style overwrite the first.
To merge styles
Select a style
Click Merge
2 3
Select a style to merge to. Click Merge.
V9
Chapter 18
392
The Merge With Style dialog opens.
Select a style
4 5
Select a style to merge from and click OK. The styles are merged. Click Close. The first selected style is updated and saved to the current template.
Modifying styles
Select Define Style (Stitch menu) to modify a style. You can modify all styles, including the preset styles in the NORMAL template. Tip At some stage, you may want to revert to the original style settings in the NORMAL template. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.
To modify a style
Select a style Click Edit
2 3 4 5
Select a style to modify. Click Edit. The Object Properties dialog opens. Change the settings in the tabs as required. Click OK. A warning message asks you to confirm that you want to overwrite the existing style settings.
V9
393
Click OK. Note Changes apply only to future uses of the style. Existing objects based on the style are not affected.
Renaming styles
You can rename a style without affecting its settings. Tip At some stage, you may want to revert to the original style settings in the NORMAL template. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.
To rename or remove a style

Select a style
Click Rename
2 3
Select a style to rename. Click Rename. The Rename Object Style dialog opens.
Enter new style name
4 5
Enter a new style name. Click OK.
Deleting styles
You can remove any unwanted styles from a template.
V9
Chapter 18
394
Tip At some stage, you may want to revert to the original style settings in the NORMAL template. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.
To delete styles
Select a style
Click Remove
2 3 4
Select a style to delete. Click Remove. A warning message asks you to confirm the deletion. Click OK. The style is deleted from the current template and removed from the list of style names. Note To remove all styles from a template click Remove All.
Working with design templates

Templates are special files used to store styles and default settings. Use templates when digitizing frequently-used design types so that you do not have to set the current property settings every time. For example, a template may include standard objects and sample lettering. It may simply have preferred stitch settings, lettering font and size, and colors set as current settings. Or it may have special density, pull compensation or underlay settings to suit different fabrics.
The NORMAL template

The NORMAL template is the default template supplied with ES Designer. It contains current property settings as well as a selection of preset styles.
V9
395
These styles include variations on the current property settings. For example, <PRESET_SATIN_1> and <PRESET_SATIN_2> contains different stitch spacing settings for Satin stitches. You can view and modify the settings for these styles at any time. See Modifying styles for details. Note If necessary, you can revert to the original NORMAL template after modifying it. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.
Creating design templates

You create templates from designs containing the required objects and property settings. Simply save the design, or elements of it, as a template. Templates look the same as design files, but use the file extension EMT. Note You cannot overwrite templates by accident. Each time you create a new design from a template, ES Designer opens a duplicate. When you save the design the first time, the Save As dialog opens so you can save the template under a new name.
To create a design template

1 2 3 Start a new design or open an existing one. Adjust the property settings, styles, and effects as required. Add the objects and lettering you want to appear in the template. Tip You can enter lettering baselines on their own but it helps to include sample text. You can overtype the sample text when using the template. 4 Select File > Save As. The Save As dialog opens.
Enter template name
Select Design Templates (EMT)
V9
Chapter 18
396
Select Design Templates (EMT) from Save as type dropdown list. ES Designer automatically opens the ESWin\Template folder. Design templates must be saved here or they will not appear in the template list when you start a new design.
6 7
Enter a name for the template in the File name field. Click Save.
Using design templates

When you start a new design from the File menu, a list of the available templates appears in the New dialog. See Creating new designs with selected templates for details. Note The template list only appears when you start a design from the File menu. If you select the New tool, the NORMAL template is applied by default.
Modifying design templates

You can modify templates in the same way as a normal design. Note Changes apply only to future uses of the template. Existing designs based on the template are not affected.
To modify design templates

1 2 Select File > Open. The Open dialog opens. Navigate to the ESWin\Template folder, then select Templates (EMT) from the Files of type dropdown list. The available template files display. 3 4 5 6 7 Select the template you want to modify and click Open. Modify property settings, styles and other settings as required. Select File > Save As. The Save As dialog opens. Change the location to the ESWin\Template folder. From the Save as type dropdown list, select Templates (EMT), and click Save.
V9
397
Tip To create a new template based on the modified one, type a new file name and click Save. 8 Click Yes to confirm. The modified template is ready for use.
Saving current properties to a template

You can easily save current property settings to the current template. See also Working with object properties.
To save current properties to a template

1 Access the Object Properties dialog.
! To use the current property settings, deselect all objects, then click
the Properties icon.
! To use the properties for a particular object, select the object, then
double-click it. 2 3 Change property settings as required. Click Save. A confirmation message appears. Note Only the current property settings not the objects or other settings in the design are saved to the template. 4 5 Click OK to update the template. Click OK to return to the design window. The new settings are saved in the template from which the design was created and are available for use. Tip To save more than one set of property settings in a template, save them as a styles. These will then be available when working in the selected template. See Defining new styles for details.
Reverting to the NORMAL template

If you modify the NORMAL template supplied with ES Designer, you can revert to the original version. A factory copy is always maintained so that the NORMAL template can be restored.
V9
Chapter 18
398
To revert to the NORMAL template

1 2 Close ES Designer. Click the Windows Start button and select Programs > Wilcom ES> Revert. The Revert to Factory Template dialog opens.
Click OK
Select Templates
Select the Templates checkbox and click OK. The original settings for the NORMAL template are restored.
Deleting design templates

Delete templates in the same way as you would any other Windows file, using Windows Explorer. Templates are located in the ESWin\Template folder.
V9
399
Chapter 19
Specialized Digitizing Techniques
ES Designer provides specialized digitizing features to save time as you digitize, and for special effects and machine functions. There are input tools for digitizing circles, stars, rings and appliqu objects, as well as methods for creating repeated or backtracked duplicates, adding borders or filling holes. If your machine type supports boring or sequining, you can use ES Designer to digitize these effects as well. This section describes how to reinforce outlines. It also describes how to digitize circles, stars and rings. Creating smooth joins, as well as borders and filled holes are covered. You can also find instructions for specialist digitizing with appliqu, sequins and boring.
Reinforcing outlines
Use Backtrack / Repeat (Pointer toolbar) to reinforce an outline, stitching it in the same or opposite direction. Use Backtrack and Repeat to reinforce outlines while specifying the direction of the stitching. Backtrack stitches in reverse direction to the original. It is typically used to make run stitch outlines thicker without
V9
400
creating unwanted connecting stitches. Repeat duplicates the original stitch direction and is typically used with closed shapes.
Use Backtrack for open shapes
Use Repeat for closed shapes
Note If you use Repeat for open shapes, a connecting stitch is inserted from the end to the start of the object which will require trimming.
To reinforce outlines
1 2 Select the object (or objects) to reinforce an outline. Click the Backtrack/Repeat icon to backtrack, right-click to repeat. The object is duplicated and placed on top of the original. It is the same color as the original and is positioned after it in the stitching sequence. 3 Check that the object has been duplicated by using one of the following methods:
! Check the stitch count in the Status Line. ! Use Slow Redraw. See Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly for
details.
! Travel through the stitches. See Viewing the stitching sequence for
details.
Digitizing circles, stars and rings

ES Designer provides special time-saving input tools for digitizing circles, stars, rings. Use the Ring and Circle tools to digitize circles or rings and the Star tool for smaller scale star effects. You can use any fill stitch type with
V9
401
circles and ovals although Contour stitch only looks effective with long, narrow ovals.
circle with Program Split
star
ring with Contour
Digitizing circles and ovals

Use Circle/Star (Input toolbar) to digitize filled circles and ovals. Digitize filled circles and ovals with a few clicks. You can use any fill stitch type with circles and ovals although Contour stitch looks most effective with long, narrow ovals.
circle with Program Split
oval with Contour
Tip To achieve a spiral contour fill effect for a circle, digitize the circle using a different input method e.g. Ring leaving a small hole in the middle.
To digitize circles and ovals

1 2 Click the Circle/Star icon. Digitize the circle or oval.
! Click to mark the center of the circle or oval. A circle outline attaches
to the pointer.
! Move the pointer until the outline is the required size, then click to
mark the radius reference point. This point also marks the entry point. The stitch angle will be perpendicular to the line connecting the center point and the radius reference point.
V9
Chapter 19
402
! To create a circle, press Enter. ! To create an oval, click again to mark a second radius point, and
press Enter.
reference point 2
90
1 center
reference point 3
Digitizing stars
Use Circle/Star (Input toolbar) to digitize star shapes filled with Zigzag stitching. You can digitize circles and ovals which use turning Zigzag stitches to create a Star or French dot.
Note Stars are only stitched using Zigzag. You cannot select a different stitch type for this effect.
To digitize stars
1 2 Right-click the Circle/Star icon. Digitize the reference points for the star.
! Click to mark the center of the star. A circle outline attaches to the
pointer.
! Move the pointer until the outline is the required size, then click to
mark the radius reference point. This point also marks the entry point for the star.
V9
403
! To create a circular star, press Enter.

2 reference point
1 center
! To create an oval star, click again to mark the second radius point,
then press Enter.
Digitizing rings
Use Ring (Input toolbar) to digitize circle and oval-shaped rings. Create rings by digitizing circles and ovals within each other. Use different combinations of inner and outer boundary shapes to create different effects.
circle in oval
oval in circle
oval in oval
You can digitize rings with a variety of fill stitch types. Contour stitch is well suited to rings, as it runs stitches around the ring in a spiral pattern.
ring with Satin
ring with Contour
ring with Tatami
Tip Digitize the inner circle first to ensure that the stitches push outwards.
V9
Chapter 19
404
To digitize rings
1 2 Click the Ring icon. Digitize the inner boundary of the ring.
! Click once to mark the center of the inner boundary. A circle outline
attaches to the pointer.
! Move the pointer until the outline is the required size, and click to
mark the radius reference point. This point is also the entry point for the inner boundary.
! Press Enter to create a circle, or click again to mark a second radius

point for an oval. The outline of the second boundary now attaches to the pointer. 3 Digitize the outer boundary of the ring in the same way as the first, then press Enter.
reference 4 point reference 2 point 1 center 3 reference point
Creating smooth joins

Use Input A (Input toolbar) together with Continuous Input to create single objects comprising separately stitched sections. The Continuous Input feature provides a simple and efficient way of digitizing a single Input A object comprised of separately stitched sections. You can also create two smoothly joined objects with different cover stitch parameters in each. Note Continuous Input applies only to Input A. The objects so created can be deleted or edited using standard reshape tools.
To create smooth joins

1 Select Special > Options and click the General tab.
V9
405
The Options > General tab opens.
Select a continuous input style
Select a continuous input style.
! Normal: use this for non-continuous input. ! Continuous Replace: use this to continue digitizing the same object
after each Enter keypress. Any properties you change during digitizing will affect the entire object, not just the section you are working on.
first section created
second section smooth joined to first two sections become a single object
! Continuous Add: use this to join objects of different size where

different stitch types are used e.g. a narrow section of Satin stitch joining to a larger section of Tatami.
second section smooth joined to first two sections become separate objects first section created
3 4
Click OK. Digitize the Input A object. See Digitizing columns of varying width for details. When you press Enter, the digitized object fills with stitches. The input tool is still active.
If you are using Continuous Add mode, you can select another stitch type at this point. Tip To stop the screen scrolling while moving the mouse, hold down Shift and click the stitch type button you require.
Recommence digitizing where you left off and press Enter when you have finished.
V9
Chapter 19
406
The new section fills with stitches and joins to the previous one. If you are using Continuous Add mode, the new section actually comprises a new object. This means that, while the two sections (objects) are smoothly joined, they can have quite different property settings. 7 To start a new object without joining to the previous object, click the Input A icon again.
Creating outlines and filling holes

ES Designer provides tools for quickly creating outlines and filled areas based on existing boundaries. The Offset Object feature creates new outlines from the outlines of selected objects. The Filled Holes feature creates filled objects from the outlines of selected Complex Fill objects.
Creating outlines with offset objects

Use Offset Object (Insert menu) to create accurate outlines for Complex Fill, Input A and Input B objects. Use the Offset Object command to create new outlines from selected objects. Any closed object can be used, including drawing objects, runs, or any of the input types. The generated outline is an independent object that can be reshaped or modified as required. Use offset objects to highlight design details e.g. small Satin objects or create seamless borders. You can center generated objects over the original outline or offset them. Various outline types are available Run, Triple Run, Motif Run or Input C.
Motif Run outline
Run outline
To create outlines with offset objects

1 2 Select the object for which you want to create a border. Select Insert > Offset Object.
V9
407
The Offset Object dialog opens.
Enter required offset Select input method for the outline
In the Offset field, enter the required offset in millimeters.
Complex Fill object
Negative Offset
Zero Offset
Positive Offset
! To center the generated object over the original outline, accept the
default value of 0.00.
! To position the generated object outside the original object, enter a

positive offset (e.g. 1.00).
! To position the generated object inside the original object, enter a

negative offset (e.g. -1.00). Note For Complex Fill objects, offset objects are created around all boundaries. If necessary, select any unwanted objects, and press Delete. 4 From the Object Type list, select an input method for the outline.
Drawing Object
Run
Input C
Motif Run
Complex Fill
Tip If you are using Input C, set the column width in the Object Properties dialog before you start as the default setting is generally too wide. 5 Click OK.
V9
Chapter 19
408
Note If you select Complex Fill as the outline object type, you get a complete offset shape, not just the outline.
Filling holes in objects

Use Filled Holes (Insert menu) to create new objects from object outlines. Create new objects from boundaries in Complex Fill or Fusion Fill objects using the Filled Holes feature. This lets you fill holes formed by existing boundaries, without having to re-digitize the shape. When you fill a hole, a new object is created using the current fill stitch type. You can choose to fill the hole exactly or offset it.
positive offset - gap between objects
negative offset overlapping objects
To fill holes in objects

1 2 Select an object. Select Insert > Filled Holes. The Holes dialog opens.
Enter required offset
V9
409
In the Offset field, enter the offset value.
Offset: 0.00
Offset: 1.00
Offset: -0.50
! To cover holes exactly, accept the default value of 0.00. ! To leave a gap between the filled holes and the original object, enter
a positive offset (e.g. 1.00).
! To overlap the filled holes and the original object, enter a negative
offset (e.g. -1.00). Overlapping the objects prevents gaps appearing between them. 4 Click OK. All holes in the object are converted to Complex Fill objects and are filled with the current fill stitch type and color. You can modify the outlines and object properties of the filled holes in the normal way. Note If you do not want to fill all the holes, select the unwanted new objects, and press Delete.
Removing underlying stitching

Use Remove Overlaps (Arrange menu) to remove overlapping stitches. Use the Remove Overlaps command to remove the underlying layer of stitching in overlapping objects. This helps to reduce the stitch count and
V9
Chapter 19
410
prevent a build-up of stitches where they are not needed. See also Shaping drawing and embroidery objects.
To remove underlying stitching

1 Select one or more cutters.
Select cutters
Select Arrange > Remove Overlaps.
V9
411
The Remove Overlaps dialog opens.
Set cutter values
Enter amount of overlap Enter size of smallest permissible object
In the Cutters panel, enter the minimum object width and the maximum stitch spacing allowed. These settings are useful if, for example, you choose an entire design as a cutter and wish to exclude objects, such as borders or details, less than a certain width. The Maximum Stitch Spacing setting allows you to exclude background stitches of a certain density.
Select Accordion Allowed to include Accordion Spacing objects. By default, the software treats Accordion Spacing objects as backgrounds and excludes them from the cutting operation. This option allows you to include them.
Enter the amount of overlap required in the Cutting Overlaps field.
Cutting Overlap: 0.5 mm
In the Minimum Fragments field, enter the size of the smallest object that will be produced after cutting.
V9
Chapter 19
412
This eliminates the generation of small objects and unnecessary color changes. 7 Click OK. The stitching overlap is removed.
Tip You can use an entire design as a cutter excluding objects, such as borders or details, less than a certain width.
Digitizing for appliqu

Automatically create all the stitching you need for appliqu using the Auto Appliqu input method. When you digitize an object with Auto Appliqu, the guide run, tacking and cover stitches are automatically generated using the current Auto Appliqu settings. You can also extract appliqu shapes from a design to output to a cutter or to a separate file. See Cutting appliqu shapes for details. Tip Apply Smart Corners to appliqu objects if required. See Controlling corner stitching for details. Tip Print a copy of appliqu patterns to use in cutting out fabric pieces. Each appliqu pattern piece is numbered according to the stitching sequence. See Printing appliqu patterns for details.
Creating appliqu objects

Use Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to digitize appliqu objects.
V9
413
Use Auto Appliqu to produce the stitching you require for appliqu objects. Appliqu objects are digitized in the same way as Complex Fill objects and may have multiple boundaries. Tip You can also convert Complex Fill and drawing objects to appliqu by selecting them, then clicking the Auto Appliqu icon.
To create appliqu objects

1 2 Click the Auto Appliqu icon. Digitize the boundary of the appliqu, by marking reference points around the outline of the shape.
! Click to create a corner point. ! Right-click to create a curve point.
Tip Follow the prompts in the Status Line to help you digitize. If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last reference point, then continue digitizing. 3 4 5 Press Enter to close the shape. Click the outline to set the stitch entry and exit points or press Enter to accept the defaults. If prompted to do so, mark the frame-out position.
! To use the current frame out values, press Enter. See also Adjusting
the default frame-out position.
V9
Chapter 19
414
! To specify a frame out position, click a point on the design.

frame out position
Note If you select None as the Frame Out option in the Object Properties > Auto Appliqu dialog for both guide and tack stitching, you will not be prompted to enter a frame out position. See Adjusting guide run settings or Adjusting tacking settings for details. 6 Press Enter. Up to four layers of stitching guide run, cutting line, tack and cover are generated for the appliqu object, depending on the current Auto Appliqu values. Tip When you stitch out an appliqu object, the machine stops between layers. Before you start, lay the fabric over the design and start the machine. When the guideline has been stitched, trim the excess appliqu material and start the machine again for the tack and cover stitch.
Adjusting guide run settings

Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to adjust Auto Appliqu guide run settings. A guide run is a layer of run stitches around the outline of an appliqu object. It is the first appliqu layer stitched and is used to position the appliqu fabric on the background material. You can adjust the guide run stitch length, offset and frame-out setting.
To adjust guide run settings

1 Right-click the Auto Appliqu icon.
V9
415
The Object Properties > Auto Appliqu tab opens.

Set values for guideline stitching
Enter Stitch length and Offset values as required in the Guide Run panel. A negative offset value moves the guide run within the outline, a positive value moves it outside.
Offset: 1
Offset: -1
Offset: 0
Select a Frame Out option to insert a Stop or Color Change function after the guide run. Note If you select None for both guide and tack stitching, you will not be prompted to enter a frame-out position.
Click OK.
Adjusting the default frame-out position

Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to adjust Auto Appliqu frame out settings. When you stitch out appliqu objects, you can set a frame-out position. This shifts the hoop out from under the needle, making it easier to place and trim the appliqu shapes. The frame-out settings determine the distance and direction of the hoop movement.
To adjust the default frame-out position

1 Right-click the Auto Appliqu icon.
V9
Chapter 19
416
The Object Properties > Auto Appliqu tab opens.
Set frame out coordinates
In the Frame Out panel, set the frame-out coordinates.
! X: enter a horizontal distance for the hoop to move. ! Y: enter a vertical distance for the hoop to move.
3 Click OK.
Adjusting tacking settings

Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to adjust Auto Appliqu tacking settings. Tacking is used to fix appliqu shapes to a background fabric before cover stitching is applied. You can change the stitch type and settings used to generate tacking, or choose to omit this layer altogether.
To adjust tacking settings

1 Right-click the Auto Appliqu icon. The Object Properties > Auto Appliqu tab opens.
Select tack stitch type
In the Tack panel, select a tack stitch type.
V9
417
If you do not require a tacking layer, select None.
tacking: E Stitch
tacking: Zigzag
Select the tack stitch settings. Depending on the selected stitch type, you can set different stitch properties:
! Stitch Length: enter a stitch length (Run stitch only). ! Offset: a negative offset value moves the tack stitching within the
outline, a positive value moves it outside (Run stitch only).
! Spacing: enter a stitch spacing value (E Stitch and Zigzag). ! Count: enter the number of stitch repetitions (Zigzag only). ! No. of Runs: enter the number of runs between stitches (E Stitch
only).
! Width: enter a column width (Zigzag and E Stitch). ! Inside/Outside: enter an offset value either an exact measurement
or a percentage. If you enter a measurement, the total of the Inside and Outside fields is the width of the column. If you enter a percentage, the total equals 100%.
inside: 25% outside: 75%
Select a Frame Out option to insert a Stop or Color Change function after the tack stitching. Note If you select None for both guide and tack stitching, you will not be prompted to enter a frame-out position.
Click OK.
V9
Chapter 19
418
Adjusting cover stitch settings

Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to adjust Auto Appliqu cover stitch settings. The cover stitch is the Satin border around the appliqu shape. You can change the width of the cover stitch, and offset it to the inside or outside of the digitized outline. An extra line of stitching can be added if you need to trim the appliqu fabric in position. If the fabric has been pre-cut, this cutting line is not needed.
To adjust cover stitch settings

1 Right-click the Auto Appliqu icon. The Object Properties > Auto Appliqu tab opens.
Enter cover stitch values
In the Cover panel, adjust the cover stitch settings.
! Width: enter the width of the Satin column. ! Inside/Outside: enter the amount to offset to the inside and
outside of the boundary as either an exact measurement or a percentage. If you enter a measurement, the total of the Inside and Outside fields is the width of the column. If you enter a percentage, the total equals 100%.
Select an appliqu Style.
! Pre-Cut: no cutting line.
V9
419
! Trim in Place: creates a cutting line.

Select Style
Tip A cutting line is only generated if Trim in Place is selected. Place the fabric patch after the placement line has been stitched, then trim after the cutting line has been stitched. 4 Click OK. Tip Ungroup the auto-appliqu object, then Select All and generate the stitches. You now have a guide stitch, cutting line, tack down and cover stitch that are separate objects. This allows you to edit them separately or resequence by color. This technique is useful when you have multiple auto-appliqu objects in the same design.
Creating partial cover appliqu objects

Use Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to digitize appliqu objects. Select Partial Appliqu (Stitch menu) to create appliqu objects with partial cover stitching. You can create appliqu objects with partial cover stitching to create an overlapping effect without doubling-up borders. Tip Print a copy of appliqu patterns to use in cutting out fabric pieces. Each appliqu pattern piece is numbered according to the stitching sequence. See Printing appliqu patterns for details.
To create partial cover appliqu objects

1 Digitize appliqu shapes in the same way you digitize with Auto Appliqu.
V9
Chapter 19
420
Note If the appliqu has holes, digitize the shape in the same way as Complex Fill with Holes so that the software can recognise the holes.
Select the appliqu shapes in the group and select Stitch > Partial Appliqu.
partial cover
unstitched part of boundary
Note The cover stitches are generated in a clockwise direction between the start and end points, leaving the rest of the boundary unstitched.
Digitizing sequins and boring holes

Some embroidery machines are equipped with a sequin dispenser that drops sequins onto the garment as it stitches. Some are also equipped with a boring knife or needle to cut holes in the fabric, producing an effect similar to lace. Often the two techniques are used together. ES Designer provides support for both.
Digitizing with sequins

Use Penetrations on (Generate toolbar) together with Sequin Mode to digitize sequined designs.
V9
421
Use Sequin Mode (Generate toolbar) together with Manual input to digitize sequined designs. Use Manual (Input toolbar) together with Sequin Mode to digitize sequined designs. You can digitize sequined designs for compatible machines using Sequin Mode together with the Manual input method. You need to plan the stitching sequence carefully in order to minimize unnecessary stitches. Sequin Mode inserts Sequin On/Off functions at the beginning and end of the object as required by the machine. It also enables right-clicking with Manual input. To add a sequin in the stitching sequence, you right-click to drop it on the design, then secure it with Manual stitches. See also Sequin On/Off functions. Note Sequin Mode is currently only supported in Schiffli, Tajima, and ZSK embroidery machine formats. Before you can use Sequin Mode, you must select a machine format that supports it. See Selecting machine formats for details.
To digitize with sequins

1 2 3 Ensure Penetrations is on. Click the Sequin Mode and Manual icons. Right-click to add a sequin to the design. A circle representing the sequin appears. Note Sequins are not visible in TrueView. 4 Digitize manual stitches around the sequin to secure it. Three stitches in the shape of a Y are generally used. The needle points of each stitch must be placed precisely to ensure that sequins are not pierced by the needle when stitching. Tip Zoom in for more accurate digitizing. 5 Press Enter.
V9
Chapter 19
422
Digitizing boring holes

Use Penetrations on (Generate toolbar) together with Borers to digitize boring holes. Use Run (Input toolbar) to digitize an outline around the shape you want to bore. Use Borers (Generate toolbar) to activate the boring function. Use Manual (Input toolbar) to digitize boring holes. Use Input A (Input toolbar) to digitize border stitching around the holes. If your embroidery machine is equipped with a boring knife or needle, you can use Borers (formerly known as Borers In) to cut holes in the fabric, producing an effect similar to lace. With Borers selected, each needle penetration point becomes a borer hole, regardless of the selected stitch type. Borer holes are generally stabilized with Zigzag to prevent fraying and movement, and bordered with Satin stitches. Tip Boring is a difficult digitizing skill to master. You may need to experiment with your machine and stitch width and spacing settings to achieve the effect you require. With Tajima and Barudan machines Borers inserts a Stop function which allows the machine to change to the needle position that uses the boring attachment. The machine must be correctly programmed to use the correct needle position. Note The default setting for Multihead borers is for a knife attachment, where the cutting position is offset 12 mm from the main needle line. This offset is only expressed when you save your design to a stitch format like DST. If you are using a boring needle, you need to change the offset value to 0. See Setting borer functions for details.
V9
423
To digitize boring holes

1 2 Ensure Penetrations is on. Click the Run icon and digitize an outline around the shape you want to bore.
Digitize outline with Run stitch
This helps prevent the fabric from tearing. 3 Click the Borers icon. A machine function is inserted to indicate the change from stitching to boring. 4 Click the Manual icon and digitize individual stitches where you want a boring knife to cut. See Digitizing individual stitches for details. Each stitch you digitize becomes a boring hole. The borer penetration points appear as diamonds, connected by dotted lines. These do not appear in TrueView.
Digitize boring holes with Manual or Run stitch
Alternatively use Run to digitize lines for boring holes. See Digitizing lines for details.
! For a round hole, digitize two intersecting lines. ! For an oval hole, digitize one line.
V9
Chapter 19
424
Tip Reduce the Run stitch length e.g. 1.0-1.5 mm to place the borer penetrations closer together, thereby ensuring the fabric will be cut right through. See Setting run stitch length for details. 5 Click Borers again to deselect it. This returns you to normal stitching. You now need to stabilize the fabric and create borders by stitching around them with Zigzag and Satin cover stitches. 6 Digitize around the hole with Input A together with Zigzag stitch. Place the inside edge close to the center of the hole so it wraps the fabric. See Digitizing columns of fixed width for details.
Digitize around hole with Input A and Zigzag
Digitize borders with Input A and Satin
Digitize border stitching with Input A together with Satin stitch. Place the inside edge of the object close to the center of the hole. If you have used Zigzag stitches for reinforcement, ensure they are covered. Warning You should not use Satin with a Zigzag underlay because a run stitch is also generated (to return to the entry point). This can cause thread breakage.
V9
425
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
ES Designer provides special tools to create textured effects from needle penetrations. Apply offset fractions and partition lines to Tatami fills to create split-line patterns. Alternatively, apply Program Split or Flexi Split to create decorative fills from pre-defined patterns of needle penetrations. Select from the library or create your own. With User Defined Split, create your own split lines when you want to add detail to filled objects. This section describes how to apply textures to fills, and how to adjust their settings to get the results you want. Details of Tatami offsets and partition lines are explained, as well as how to create textures with Program Split and Flexi Split. Adding details with User Defined Split is also covered.
Creating textures with Tatami offsets

Use Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply to new or selected objects. Right-click to adjust settings. With Tatami fills you can specify how each row is offset in order to create patterns formed by needle penetrations. You do this by adjusting either offset fractions or partition lines. With only two offsets available, the number of patterns is limited, but even with small offsets, visible lines are produced. Partition lines, with up to eight offsets, can create more patterns.
V9
426
Using a random factor you can eliminate patterns formed by regular needle penetrations and distribute stitches randomly inside the shape.
Tatami Offset
Partition Lines
Random Factor
Tip Auto Split can be used to create special textures in Satin stitches as an alternative to Tatami fill. See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split for details.
Setting Tatami offset fractions

Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami offset fractions. The Tatami offset default settings are designed to create a needle penetration pattern or texture in the stitched embroidery that is uniformly flat and smooth. The texture is like a woven Tatami mat without obvious split lines. By manipulating offset fractions, you can create textured fills where the stitch penetrations are more clearly visible.
default offset values
textured fill
stitch penetrations visible
To control the patterns created by needle penetrations you set offset fractions for both forward and backward rows.
A=0.25, B=0.25 offset fraction B offset fraction A
forward backward offset fraction B offset fraction A
V9
427
Tip By adjusting the offsets, you can also improve the quality of turning Tatami where the pattern may be disturbed by non-parallel stitches. Changing the offsets can reduce this interference.
To set Tatami offset fractions

Select Offset Fraction Enter offset fraction values
2 3
Select the Offset Fraction option. In the A: and B: fields, enter the offset fraction values you require. Different combinations of offset settings create different effects.
A=0.00, B=0.00
A=0.50, B=0.50
A=0.25, B=0.25
A=0.50, B=0.25
A=0.30, B=0.60
A=0.40, B=0.00
! Even stitching: set both fields to 0.25. ! Strong horizontal lines: set both fields to 0.00 or 1.00. The
distance between each line of needle penetrations is the stitch length.
! Light horizontal lines: set both fields to 0.5. Lines are produced at
half stitch-length intervals.
V9
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
428
! Diagonal lines: set both fields to any value other than 0.00, 0.50
and 1.00. Diagonal lines are less noticeable than horizontal or vertical lines. Vary both values to change the angle of the lines and the distance between them.
! Other: set one field to 0.00, and experiment with the other values
to place the needle penetrations on the forward and backward rows close to each other, but with different effects. 4 Click OK.
Applying Tatami partition lines

Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami partition lines. The Partition Line feature provides an alternative method for offsetting needle penetrations in Tatami fills. Two parameters can be set Sequence and Angle.
Setting the sequence

Partition Line allows you to specify up to eight Tatami offsets. Each stitch length is split into knots numbered anywhere from 0 up to 7. For example, a typical partition sequence number might be 20143. This translates to the following pattern.
stitch length knot 2 row 1 row 2 row 3 row 4 row 5 knot 0 knot 1 knot 4 knot 3 knot 0
V9
429
In this partition sequence (20143), there are five rows of stitches indicated by the five digits. The stitch length is also divided into five knots numbered 0 to 4. (In any pattern, both the number of rows and the number of knots are determined by the number of digits in the sequence number.) The first digit in the sequence, 2, is the knot number at which the needle penetration will occur in the first row. The second digit, 0, is the knot assigned to the second row. And so on. Thus, each row in a partition sequence is assigned a digit which represents a particular knot. Note Because Partition Line allows you to specify only up to eight Tatami offsets (0 to 7), the software ignores digits 8 and 9 and nothing appears in the entry field.
Setting the angle

If you imagine lines drawn through the rows and partition knots, they form a grid, as seen above. You can skew the grid formed by the partition knots to further vary the needle penetrations. For example, the partition sequence 20143 at a 45 angle produces the following stitch pattern:
row 1 row 2 row 3 row 4 row 5
To apply partition lines

Select Partition Line Enter partition sequence and grid angle
2 3
Select the Partition Line option. In the Sequence field, enter the partition sequence number.
V9
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
430
In any pattern, both the number of rows and the number of knots are determined by the number of digits in the sequence number. See Setting the sequence for details.
Sequence: 11
Sequence: 012
Sequence: 01
In the Angle field, enter the grid angle you require.

Sequence: 11 Angle: 135
Sequence: 11 Angle: 45
Click OK.
Applying random factors

Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply random factors and eliminate split line patterns. Using a random factor you can eliminate the split line patterns formed by regular needle penetrations and distribute the stitches randomly inside the shape. This can create interesting mottled effects.
Random factor: 50%
Random factor: 0%
To apply random factors

1 Right-click the Tatami icon.
V9
431
The Object Properties > Fill Stitch tab opens.
Enter a random factor
In the Random Factor field, specify a random factor between 0% and 100%.
random factor: 10% random factor: 50% offset fraction A: 0.25, B: 0.25 offset fraction A: 0.25, B: 0.25
random factor: 100% offset fraction A: 0.25, B: 0.25
Tip A value of around 50% gives good results. 3 Click OK.
Creating textures with Program Split

Use Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to create decorative fill stitches where needle penetrations form a tiled pattern. Right-click to adjust settings. Program Split is a decorative fill stitch in which the needle penetrations form a tiled pattern. Select a pre-defined pattern or create your own.
Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Program Split Samples.
V9
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
432
Applying Program Split

Click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply the effect to new or selected objects. You can apply Program Split to Input A, Input B, Input C, Complex Fill and Circle/Ring objects. The current Program Split values are set in the Fill Stitch tab of the Object Properties dialog. You can adjust these either before or after applying the effect.
To apply Program Split
! Click the Program Split icon.

Program Split stitching is applied to new or selected objects, based on the current Program Split settings.
Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to see the effect of Program Split.
Selecting Program Split patterns

Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to select Program Split patterns. You can select different patterns to use in a Program Split from the Object Properties dialog. Select the pattern either before or after digitizing the object.
V9
433
Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Program Split Samples.
To select Program Split patterns

1 Right-click the Program Split icon. The Object Properties > Fill Stitch tab opens.
Select pattern
2 3
From the Pattern dropdown list, select the required pattern. A preview of the pattern appears. Click OK.
Scaling Program Split patterns

Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to scale Program Split patterns. Set the exact size of Program Split patterns in the Object Properties dialog.
To scale Program Split patterns

Enter pattern width Enter pattern height
In the Size X field, enter the required width of each fill pattern.
V9
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
434
In the Size Y field, enter the required height of each fill pattern.
default values
Size X and Size Y decreased
Size X increased
Click OK.
Selecting Combination Split options

Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to access Combination Split options. Select different combinations of Satin and Tatami stitches in a Program Split to create various effects with the same pattern. There are three Combination Split options Satin in Satin, Satin in Tatami and Tatami in Tatami.
Satin in Satin
Satin in Tatami
Tatami in Tatami
To select Combination Split options

Select a Combination Split
In the Combination Split panel, click the icon you require.
! Satin in Satin: The needle penetrates the fabric only where the
patterns intersect the stitch rows. This is the standard Program Split stitch type, which produces the smallest number of stitches.
V9
435
! Satin in Tatami: The foreground of the pattern uses Satin

stitching, while the background is filled with Tatami. Use this option to avoid long stitches when the patterns are small but the column and row spacings are wide.
! Tatami in Tatami: Both foreground and background use Tatami.

Select this option for large objects and patterns to avoid long stitches.
Satin in Satin
Satin in Tatami
Tatami in Tatami
Click OK.
Adjusting column and row spacing settings

Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to access column and row spacing settings. Set the exact row and column spacing in Program Split objects. Column and row spacing settings determine the distance between grid lines. Patterns are placed at intersection points the center of each pattern coincides with an intersection.
default spacing values
column spacing increased
row spacing decreased
The initial settings define a simple grid, where the spacing equals the dimensions of the pattern. The row offset is set to 0.00 mm so columns and rows are perpendicular. Note Spacing is measured from the start of each pattern. Thus, to define a new spacing setting, add the distance you require between patterns to the original setting. Reducing it will cause the patterns to overlap.
V9
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
436
To adjust column and row spacing settings

Set column spacing and offset values Set row spacing and offset values
In the Column panel, set the spacing and offset settings for columns in the pattern grid.
! Spacing: the distance between each vertical column of patterns. ! Offset: the distance by which to offset patterns in each column.
3 In the Rows panel, set the spacing and offset settings for rows in the same way as for columns.
column spacing increased
row spacing decreased
Click OK.
Adjusting Program Split stitch settings

Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust stitch settings. Specify the stitch length, minimum stitch length and spacing settings for Program Split objects, in the same way as for other fill stitch types.
To adjust Program Split stitch settings

1 Right-click the Program Split icon.
V9
437
Adjust stitch settings
In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the required spacing value. For Tatami this is the distance between two forward rows of stitches, for Satin, the distance between each forward stitch.
3 4
In the Stitch Length field, enter the stitch length. This is the maximum stitch length to be generated in the fill. In the Min Stitch Length field, enter the length of the shortest stitch to be generated.
stitch spacing increased
stitch spacing decreased
Click OK.
Adjusting Program Split offset settings

Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust row and column offset settings. You can apply offset settings to rows, columns or Tatami stitches in Program Split objects.
V9
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
438
Offsetting columns and rows

The column and row offsets determine the angle of the grid lines. If both offsets are set to 0, the grid lines are perfectly vertical and horizontal.
column offset negative positive + positive +
0 0
row offset negative
Offsetting stitches
You can control needle penetration splits by offsetting each forward row of stitching.
zero offset
column positive offset
row positive offset
Tip Only enter stitch offset settings for Program Split using the combinations Satin in Tatami or Tatami in Tatami.
To adjust Program Split offset settings

Enter column offset Enter row offset Enter stitch offset
V9
439
Enter an offset for each column of the pattern in the Column > Offset field.
column offset: 0
column offset: 1
column offset: 4
Enter an offset for each row of the pattern in the Row > Offset field.
row offset: 0
row offset: 1
row offset: 4
Enter an offset for stitches in Satin in Tatami or Tatami in Tatami combinations in the Stitch Values > Offset field. This offset controls where the needle penetrations line up for each row of stitching.
offset: 0.00
offset: 0.25
offset: 0.50
Click OK.
Applying Program Split random factors

Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust random factor setting. You can eliminate unwanted patterns and distribute stitches evenly within a shape using a random factor. Apply random factors to Program Split that use combinations of Satin in Tatami or Tatami in Tatami.
V9
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
440
Note The random factor does not affect the deliberate needle penetrations that form the pattern.
To apply Program Split random factors

Enter random factor
In the Random field, enter the required random factor. Specify a random factor between 0% and 100%. Tip Values of around 50% give good results.
random factor: 0
random factor: 25%
random factor: 90%
Click OK.
Laying out Program Split patterns on-screen

Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust layout options. You lay out Program Splits on-screen in a similar way to Motif Fills by using guide patterns to scale, space, transform and offset the entire pattern fill. There are three blue guide patterns. Other sample patterns appear in yellow. Each guide pattern lets you change different elements of the layout.
V9
441
When you change a guide pattern, all patterns in the fill change accordingly. See also Laying out motif fills on-screen.
Use top guide pattern to change row spacing, row offset, and to scale patterns Use middle guide pattern to move, rotate, skew, and scale patterns Use side guide pattern to change column spacing, and to scale patterns
Tip Generally you define the layout of the fill before digitizing the object. If it is important to align the patterns with the object boundary, digitize the object using the current settings, and change the layout afterwards.
To lay out Program Split patterns on-screen

Select pattern pattern preview
Click Layout
2 3
Select a pattern from the Pattern list. Click Layout. Sample and guide patterns appear in the design window. When you change a guide pattern, all patterns in the fill change accordingly. Tip Zoom in to select the correct guide pattern.
Adjust the guide patterns to achieve the effect you require.
! Move patterns by selecting the middle guide pattern and dragging it

to a new position.
V9
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
442
! Scale patterns by selecting a guide pattern and resizing it using the

selection handles.
Drag the pattern
Scale horizontally
Scale vertically
! Rotate patterns by clicking the middle guide twice to display the

rotation handles. Click a corner handle and drag to rotate.
! Skew patterns by clicking the middle guide twice, then dragging the
skew handles.
rotate anchor skew
! Change column spacing by selecting the side guide and dragging

it left or right.
Change column spacing
V9
443
! Change row spacing by selecting the top guide and dragging it up

or down.
! Change row offset by selecting the top guide and dragging it left
or right. Changing the offset distorts the rows.
Change row spacing
Change offset
Press Enter to finish. The size and layout settings you select become the current Program Split settings. Tip To revert to the original factory settings, run the Revert utility. See Reverting to factory settings for details. Alternatively, enter the values manually in the Object Properties > Fill Stitch > Program Split tab and click Save. See Program Split Samples for details.
Digitize the object outline as you normally would. Note Digitize the stitch angle carefully when creating objects filled with Program Split. The needle penetrations are placed where the lines of the pattern intersect the stitch rows. If the rows are parallel with the lines of the pattern, they will rarely intersect, and the pattern may not be visible. A 45 stitch angle is suitable for most patterns.
Making Program Split patterns

Make your own patterns to use in Program Split fills. Create patterns from the outlines of embroidery objects or from drawing objects. Note Patterns you create can also be used for Flexi Split effects.
V9
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
444
To make Program Split patterns

1 Select the object (or objects) you want to use for the pattern.
Select Special > Make Program Split. The Make Program Split dialog opens.
Enter pattern name
3 4
Enter a name in the Make Program Split dialog. Click OK. The new pattern is automatically selected in the Pattern list.
Editing Program Split patterns

Editing a pattern changes the actual pattern, not just the object layout. See also Laying out Program Split patterns on-screen.
To edit Program Split patterns

Select pattern
pattern preview
Click Edit
V9
445
Select a pattern and click Edit.
Edit pattern
The pattern appears in the design window. Tip Use View > Show All > Selected Objects to zoom in on the pattern. 3 Scale, transform or reshape the pattern as required.
! See Arranging and Transforming Objects for details. ! See Converting and Reshaping Objects for details.
4 Select Special > Make Program Split. The Make program Split dialog opens.
Enter pattern name
Enter a name for the pattern in the Make Program Split dialog.
! To create a pattern based on the old one, enter a new name. ! To overwrite the original pattern, enter the name of the original.
6 Click OK. The pattern is automatically selected in the Pattern list.
V9
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
446
Creating textures with Flexi Split

Flexi Split is a decorative effect where one or more lines of a Program Split pattern are used in the object fill. The pattern follows the stitch angle and may be scaled to fit the width of the object. There are four different Flexi Split effects. Use the existing patterns for Flexi Split or create your own. See also Making Program Split patterns.
Applying Flexi Split

Use Flexi Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply a decorative effect to new or selected objects. Right-click to adjust settings. You can apply Flexi Split to Input A, Input B or Input C objects that use Satin, Tatami, Zigzag, or Program Split fill stitches. It is most effective with objects with turning stitches or constantly changing column width. The current Flexi Split values are set in the Effects dialog. You can adjust these either before or after applying the effect. Note Flexi Split is not compatible with Complex Fill objects.
To apply Flexi Split
! Click the Flexi Split icon.

The effect is applied to new or selected objects, based on the current Flexi Split settings.
Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to see the effect of Flexi Split.
V9
447
Selecting Flexi Split patterns and options

Right-click Flexi Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to select patterns and options. You select Flexi Split patterns and options from the Flexi Split tab of the Effects dialog.
To select Flexi Split patterns and options

1 Right-click the Flexi Split icon. The Effects > Flexi Split tab opens.
Select Flexi Split Select pattern pattern preview
Click Flexi Split icon
2 3 4
Select the Flexi Split checkbox. Select a pattern from the Pattern list. In the Options panel, click a Flexi Split icon.
5 6
Adjust Flexi Split size and spacing settings as required. See Adjusting Flexi Split settings for details. Click OK.
V9
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
448
Adjusting Flexi Split settings

Right-click Flexi Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings. You can adjust Flexi Split settings to vary size, shape indent, spacing and pattern offsets.
To adjust Flexi Split settings

1 Right-click the Flexi Split icon. The Effects > Flexi Split tab opens.
Select Flexi Split pattern preview Enter dimensions of largest pattern Enter distance between first pattern and first stitch line Enter spacing and offsets Click Flexi Split icon
2 3 4 5
Select the Flexi Split checkbox. In the Size X and Size Y fields, enter the dimensions of the largest pattern in the effect. In the Shape Indent field, enter the distance between the first pattern and the first stitch line. In the Column panel, enter spacing and offset settings as required:
! Spacing: the distance between each column of patterns in the

effect.
V9
449
! Offset: the distance by which each pattern repeat is offset.
default column values
column spacing decreased
column offset value changed
Note If you selected an option that uses more than one row of patterns, the fields in the Row panel are available. 6 In the Row panel, enter spacing and offset settings as required.
default column and row values
column and row spacing decreased
row offset value changed
Click OK.
Adding details with User Defined Split

User Defined Split lets you add detail to filled objects by digitizing lines of needle penetrations called split lines. Split lines are stored as object properties. They are preserved when stitches are regenerated even if you apply a different stitch type. Note Split lines are not part of the object outline and cannot be reshaped with the rest of the object.
Creating new objects with User Defined Split

Use User Defined Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to create your own split line effects. Right-click to adjust settings.
V9
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
450
Select User Defined Split before digitizing to add split lines to new objects. As you digitize, you are prompted to enter the split lines. You digitize them in the same way as Run objects. You can define multiple splits if required.
Tip Satin is the most suitable stitch type for User Defined Split as there are no initial needle penetrations inside the shape.
To create new objects with User Defined Split

1 2 3 4 Select a fill input method and stitch type. Click the User Defined Split icon. Digitize the object boundaries, entry and exit points and stitch angle as you normally would, following the prompts in the Prompt Line. Digitize a split line over the object when prompted, then press Enter. Repeat this step for additional split lines.
Digitize object outline
Digitize split line
Generate stitches
Tip For best results, digitize split lines approximately perpendicular to the stitch angle. 5 Press Enter.
Applying User Defined Split to selected objects

Use User Defined Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply the effect to selected objects. Right-click to adjust settings.
V9
451
Add split lines to an existing object by digitizing the required line over it, then converting it to a split line. Digitize the split line using an input method e.g. Run or a vector drawing tool.
To apply User Defined Split to selected objects

1 Select an input method or drawing tool to digitize the split line. Tip Use any input method including fill input methods as only the outlines are used to create the split lines. 2 Digitize a split line on top of the filled object, using left and right-clicks to enter reference points, and press Enter.
To create more than one split line, repeat this step. Tip To use existing objects to create split lines, simply move the object on top of the filled object you are creating lines for. 3 4 5 6 7 Select the split line object (or objects). Select Special > Make Lines For > User Defined Split. Press Delete to remove the split line object (or objects). Select the filled object on which you digitized split lines. Click the User Defined Split icon.
Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to see the effect of User Defined Split.
V9
Chapter 20
Textured Fills
452
Splitting alternate lines

Right-click User Defined Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply split lines. The User Defined Split feature sometimes creates a split line which is too hard for certain applications such as Schiffli design work. The new Split Alternate Stitch Lines setting softens the split line.
To split alternate lines

1 Select a User Defined Split object.
user defined split
2 3
Right-click the User Defined Split icon. The Effects > Others tab opens. Select the Split Alternate Stitch Lines checkbox.
Select Split Alternate
Click OK. Split lines are softened.

split lines applied
V9
453
Chapter 21
Artistic Stitch Effects
ES Designer provides many artistic effects and stitch types to create textured and contoured fill stitching. Use Jagged Edge to create rough edges, shading effects, or imitate fur and other fluffy textures. Apply Trapunto effect to move underlying travel runs to the edges of an object so that they cant be seen through open stitching. Accordion Spacing varies stitch spacing between dense and open fill, producing shading and color effects which are difficult to achieve manually. The Color Blending effect creates interesting perspective, shading and color effects by blending two colored layers. The colors are merged smoothly from one to another using a mixture of dense and open fill. Create interesting chiaroscuro effects with Contour. Choose between Standard and Spiral. For another type of curved effect, use Florentine Effect to curve needle penetrations along a digitized line. Liquid Effect allows you to enter twin curves. This section describes how to create artistic effects with Jagged Edge, Accordion Spacing, and Color Blending, and how to adjust their settings to get the results you want. Creating contoured stitch effects with the Contour feature is also covered, as well as how to create curved fills with Florentine Effect and Liquid Effect. Tip ES Designer also provides special tools to create patterns from needle penetrations. These include Program Split, User Defined Split and Flexi Split. See Textured Fills for details.
V9
454
Creating jagged edges

Use Jagged Edge to create rough edges, shading effects, or imitate fur and other fluffy textures.
Note Jagged Edge does not work with Contour stitch.
Applying Jagged Edge

Click Jagged Edge (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply the effect to new or selected objects. Apply Jagged Edge to create a rough edge along one or more sides of an object. Jagged Edge is applied using the current Jagged Edge settings in the Effects dialog. Change these settings before or after applying the effect. See Adjusting Jagged Edge settings for details.
To apply Jagged Edge
! Click the Jagged Edge icon.

The effect is applied to new or selected objects, based on the current Jagged Edge settings.
side 1 jagged
side 2 jagged
both sides jagged
Tip For objects filled with Tatami, use Diagonal backstitch for the best results. See Selecting a Tatami backstitch for details.
V9
455
Adjusting Jagged Edge settings

Right-click Jagged Edge (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Jagged Edge settings. Adjust the Jagged Edge settings to change the side of the object to which the effect is applied and the range within which the stitches should fall.
range
To adjust Jagged Edge settings

1 Right-click the Jagged Edge icon. The Effects > Jagged Edge tab opens.
Select Jagged
Select values
2 3
Select the Jagged checkbox. From the Jagged Side list, select the side of the object to apply the effect to.
Side 2
Side 1
V9
Chapter 21
456
In the Roughness field, enter a value between 1 and 10 to indicate the required degree of jaggedness. The larger the value, the more variation in the stitch length.
Roughness: 1 more variation in stitch length
Roughness: 10 less variation in stitch length
In the Range field, enter the margin in which you want the stitches to fall.
Range: 4
Range: 1.5
Click OK.
Creating open stitching with Trapunto

Use Trapunto (Stitch Types toolbar) to force underlying travel runs to the edges of a selected object. Right-click to adjust Trapunto settings. Sometimes you may want to increase row spacing to create open stitching. This is often useful for backgrounds. However, this also means that travel
V9
457
runs, spacing variations and overlapping rows between segments are visible and can spoil the effect.
Complex Fill / Tatami object without Trapunto effect
Complex Fill / Tatami object with Trapunto effect
The Trapunto effect automatically moves underlying travel runs to the edges of an object so that they cant be seen. It also applies consistent row spacing, and prevents segments from overlapping, regardless of the Overlapping Rows setting. Note The Trapunto feature is only available with Complex Fill objects using Tatami stitching.
To create open stitching with Trapunto

1 With or without a Complex Fill object selected, right-click the Tatami icon. The Object Properties > Fill Stitch tab opens.
Enter stitch spacing
In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the required stitch spacing.
V9
Chapter 21
458
The larger the value, the more open the spacing.
Spacing: 5 mm
Spacing: 3 mm
3 4
Click OK. With the Complex Fill object selected, click the Trapunto icon. Travel runs and overlapping rows are removed and consistent row spacing applied. Note Trapunto effect overrides whatever Tatami Backstitch settings currently apply. See also Selecting a Tatami backstitch.
Creating accordion spacing effects

Use Accordion Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to vary the stitch spacing between dense and open fill. Right-click to adjust Accordion Spacing settings. Accordion Spacing varies the stitch spacing between dense and open fill, producing shading and color effects which are difficult to achieve manually. Eight different Accordion Spacing effects are available.
When you use Accordion Spacing, the current spacing settings including Auto Spacing and Fractional Spacing are ignored. However, other stitch effects will still apply.
V9
459
Tip Apply Trapunto effect to force underlying travel runs to the edges of an object so that they cant be seen through open stitching. See Creating open stitching with Trapunto for details.
Applying Accordion Spacing

Click Accordion Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply the effect to new or selected objects. Use Accordion Spacing to create perspective effects and shading.
maximum spacing
minimum spacing
You can apply it using the current settings in the Effects dialog. These can be adjusted and the type of Accordion Spacing changed either before or after you apply it. Tip You cannot use Accordion Spacing with Contour stitch or Motif Fill. However, you can also use Accordion Spacing over standard Tatami to create interesting shading effects.
To apply Accordion Spacing
! Click the Accordion Spacing icon.

The effect is applied to new or selected objects, based on the current Accordion Spacing settings.
Adjusting Accordion Spacing settings

Right-click Accordion Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust the settings. Use the Effects dialog to select the Accordion Spacing type and set the minimum and maximum spacings.
V9
Chapter 21
460
Tip Because of the open stitch, Accordion Spacing is best used without Auto Underlay.
To adjust Accordion Spacing settings

1 Right-click the Accordion Spacing icon. The Effects > Accordion tab opens.
Select Accordion Spacing
Select spacing effect
Select spacing values
2 3
Select the Accordion Spacingcheckbox. In the Profile panel, click an Accordion Spacing icon.
In the Values panel, enter new spacing values as required.
! Maximum Spacing: the largest spacing value to allow.
V9
461
! Minimum Spacing: the smallest spacing value to allow.
max spacing: 3.5 mm
max spacing: 6 mm
min spacing: 1 mm
min spacing: 3 mm
Tip Apply Trapunto effect to force underlying travel runs to the edges of an object so that they cant be seen through open stitching. See Creating open stitching with Trapunto for details. 5 Click OK.
Creating color blending effects

From sunsets to wood grains, the Color Blending effect creates interesting perspective, shading and color effects by blending colored layers. Two colors are merged smoothly from one to another using a mixture of dense and open fill. The effect is created by duplicating the object, then applying Accordion Spacing and Trapunto to both layers which are then grouped. There are four Color Blending effects linear stitch spacing, exponential spacing, convex or concave spacing, and wavy spacing.
Color Blending can be applied to ungrouped objects filled with Satin, Tatami, Zigzag, E Stitch, or Program Split stitch, or objects outlined with Satin or E Stitch.
Applying Color Blending

Click Color Blending (Generate toolbar) to apply the effect to selected objects.
V9
Chapter 21
462
Use the Color Blending effect to create color blends, perspective effects and shading. Select which type of Color Blending to use, and set the spacing settings in the Color Blending dialog.
maximum spacing minimum spacing
Note Color Blending cannot be applied to grouped objects. Ungroup, select the object, then apply Color Blending.
To apply Color Blending

1 2 Select the object. Click the Color Blending icon. The Effects > Color Blending tab opens.
Select first Spacing effect Select first color Select first spacing Select second Spacing effect Select second color Select second spacing
In the Top Layer panel:
! Click a Profile icon for the first layer. ! Select the color of the first layer. ! Enter the first color new spacing values as required.
4 Repeat this step with the Bottom Layer panel.
V9
463
Click OK.
Top and Bottom Layer Linear Profile
Top and Bottom Layer Exponential Profile
Top and Bottom Layer Convex Profile
Top and Bottom Layer Wave Profile
Tip To prevent underlay stitching from showing through, deselect Auto Underlay. Trapunto effect is applied by default. See also Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays and Creating open stitching with Trapunto.
Adjusting Color Blending settings

Objects with Color Blending can be resized, rotated and skewed without losing the color blending effect. However, reshaping the object is not recommended. Editing a Color Blending object is limited. The two objects must first be ungrouped and the separate objects edited according to Accordion Spacing settings such as color, profile, and spacing. See Creating accordion spacing effects for details.
To adjust Color Blending settings

1 2 3 4 Select the blended object and ungroup it. Select one of the objects. Change the color as required. Double-click it to open the Object Properties dialog.
V9
Chapter 21
464
Select the Effects > Accordion Spacing tab.
Select Profile
Adjust spacing settings
6 7 8
Select a profile and adjust spacing settings as required. Click OK. Repeat the process for the second object and re-group the objects.
Creating contoured stitch effects

Use Contour (Stitch Types toolbar) to create curved fills where stitches follow the contours of the shape. Right-click to adjust Contour settings. Contour is a curved fill stitch type stitches follow the contours of a shape, creating a curved, light and shade effect. It only works on columnar shapes. There are two types Standard and Spiral both of which can be applied to Input A, Input B, Input C or Ring objects. Standard Contour can also be applied to Circle objects.
Standard Contour
Standard Contour creates rows of stitches across the shape, perpendicular to the digitized stitch angle. The number of stitch lines is constant, so the stitching is denser where the shape is narrower, and more open where the shape is wider.
Standard Contour
V9
465
Spiral Contour
Spiral Contour creates a single, continuous line of stitching that spirals around to fill the shape. Typically, it is used for rings and borders, but it is also suitable for other closed shapes.
Spiral Contour
circle with Spiral Contour created from a ring
Spiral Contour can only be used with closed shapes with two outlines such as rings. If a shape is not properly closed, it will be filled with Standard Contour instead. You cannot use Spiral Contour with Circle objects. Tip To fill a solid shape with Spiral Contour, create a closed object with a very small hole at the center. For example, to create a circle filled with Spiral Contour, digitize a thick ring with a very small inner boundary.
Applying Contour stitch to fills

Click Contour (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Contour stitch to new or selected objects. You apply Contour to filled objects in the same way as other stitch types by selecting it from the toolbar either before or after digitizing.
To apply Contour stitch to fills
! Click the Contour icon.

Contour stitch is applied to selected objects based on the settings in the Object Properties dialog. See Adjusting Contour stitch settings for details.
V9
Chapter 21
466
Tip When you digitize shapes with pointed ends e.g. leaves, diamonds, stars cut the ends to prevent the stitches from bunching.
2 1 6 7 8 2 1 5 6 3 Input B 7 3 Input B 9 4 8 4
5 10
stitch bunching at sharp ends
Selecting Contour stitch types

Right-click Contour (Stitch Types toolbar) to select Contour stitch types. Apply Standard or Spiral Contour to new or existing objects in a design.
To select Contour stitch types

1 Right-click the Contour icon. The Object Properties > Fill Stitch tab opens.
Select contour effect
Select backstitch type
In the Type panel, click a contour effect icon.
! Standard: lays rows of stitches back and forth along the shape.
V9
467
! Spiral: fills the shape with a continuous spiral of stitches.

Standard
Spiral
In the Backstitch panel, click a backstitch type icon.
! Standard: creates backstitch rows that are slightly shorter than the
forward rows, reducing small stitches. Suitable for high density fills.
! Borderline: creates parallel backstitch rows to give a smooth,

well-defined edge. Suitable for lower density fills.
Standard
Borderline
Note If the spacing is small, Borderline backstitch will not be applied. This is to prevent damage to the fabric from the large number of small stitches that are generated. 4 5 If required, adjust the Contour stitch settings. See Adjusting Contour stitch settings for details. Click OK.
Adjusting Contour stitch settings

Right-click Contour (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Contour stitch settings. Set the stitch settings for Contour fills to adjust the stitch length, spacing and offset fraction.
To adjust Contour stitch settings

1 Right-click the Contour icon.
V9
Chapter 21
468
Adjust max spacing Adjust offset value Adjust variable stitch lengths
Adjust stitch length
In the Stitch Length field, enter an approximate stitch length. Each stitch is adjusted to distribute the stitches evenly throughout the shape. See Adjusting Tatami stitch length for details.
stitch length 3.6 mm
stitch length 1.5 mm
In the Spacing field, enter the maximum spacing value. This value is used at the widest part of the shape. As the shape narrows, the spacing decreases. See Adjusting Tatami stitch spacing for details.
In the Offset Fraction field, enter the required offset value.
V9
469
The offset fraction controls the pattern of needle penetrations to achieve even distribution of stitches and prevent needle penetrations from forming unwanted lines.
default offset: 0.25 mm, stitches evenly distributed
too big offset: 1 mm, unwanted lines
In the Variable Length panel, set the variable stitch length values, if required. See Setting variable run stitch lengths for details.
Variable Length selected, stitch values varies
Variable Length not selected, stitch values fixed
Click OK.
Creating curved fills with Florentine Effect

Florentine Effect can be applied to Complex Fill objects to create a flowing stitch effect along a digitized line. The stitches follow the digitized line but maintain uniform density and needle penetration patterns. The digitizing method varies, depending whether you are applying the effect to new or existing objects. See also Creating curved fills with Liquid Effect. Note For all other object types, use Standard Contour to achieve curved stitching.
V9
Chapter 21
470
Creating new objects with Florentine Effect

Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to create an embroidery object. Use Florentine Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to create curved stitching in new objects. To apply the effect to new Complex Fill objects, select Florentine Effect before starting.
Tip For best results, use smaller stitch lengths e.g. 4.00 mm or less.
To create a new object with Florentine Effect

1 2 3 4 Click the Complex Fill icon and select Tatami stitch. Click the Florentine Effect icon. Digitize the boundaries, and entry and exit points of the Complex Fill object following the prompts. Digitize the guideline you want the stitches to follow.
V9
471
The guideline must intersect both sides of the object, have at least three points, and must not overlap itself. Curves generally give better results than sharp corners.
Press Enter. Tip Use the Reshape Object tool to change the shape of the curve. See Applying Florentine Effect to existing objects for details.
Applying Florentine Effect to existing objects

Use Florentine Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply curve stitching to existing objects. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to adjust control points of the guideline. Apply Florentine Effect to existing Complex Fill objects in a design with the Effects dialog. Then use the Reshape Object icon to adjust the curve line.
To apply Florentine Effect to existing objects

1 Select an object. Note The Florentine Effect icon is only available with Complex Fill objects using a suitable stitch type. 2 3 Click the Florentine Effect icon. With the object still selected, click the Reshape Object icon.
V9
Chapter 21
472
A default guideline with three corner control points appears.
4 5
Reshape the guideline by moving, adding, changing or deleting reference points. Press Enter. ES Designer regenerates the stitches along the new curve. Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to view the results.
Applying Florentine Effect to multiple objects

Use Florentine Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply curve stitching to multiple objects. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to adjust control points of the guideline. You can apply Florentine Effect to multiple objects in a design by copying the properties of the first object and applying them to other objects.
To apply Florentine Effect to existing objects

1 Select an object.
V9
473
Note The Florentine Effect icon is only available with Complex Fill objects using a suitable stitch type. 2 3 4 Click the Florentine Effect icon. With the object still selected, click the Reshape Object icon. A default guideline with three corner control points appears. Reshape the guideline so that it overlaps the objects you want to include.
Press Enter. ES Designer regenerates the stitches of the first selected object along the curve.
6 7
Create a style based on the first object. See Defining new styles for details. Apply the style to each of the other objects. See Applying styles for details.
Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to view the results.
V9
Chapter 21
474
Adjusting Florentine Effect settings

Right-click Florentine Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings. In a Florentine Effect fill, stitch lengths vary to adjust the needle point pattern to the curve of the digitized line. You can specify how ES Designer calculates the stitch length by choosing between Nominal and Maximum. Nominal calculates stitch length so that the average matches the setting in the Fill Stitch tab. Roughly the same number of fill stitches are generated as with normal stitching. Maximum calculates stitch length so that the longest matches the setting in the Fill Stitch tab. This setting generally produces smoother curves than Nominal, but the stitch count is higher. Tip Use Maximum when the curve is tight with respect to the stitch length.
To adjust Florentine Effect settings

1 Right-click the Florentine Effect icon. The Effects > Curve Fill tab opens.
Select Florentine Effect
2 3
Select the Florentine Effect checkbox. Select the required stitch length calculation option:
! Nominal: the average length of the fill stitches matches the Stitch
Length setting.
! Maximum: the longest stitch matches the Stitch Length setting.

nominal
maximum
Click OK.
V9
475
Creating curved fills with Liquid Effect

Liquid Effect is similar to Florentine Effect except that you enter twin curves for stitches to follow in Complex Fill objects. This means that stitches at the top of a shape can follow a different curve to those at the bottom. The change between the two curves is distributed evenly to produce smooth stitching.
Creating new objects with Liquid Effect

Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to create an embroidery object. Use Liquid Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to create curved stitch effects with two curves. Unlike Florentine Effect, Liquid Effect curve lines are digitized outside the object, rather than over it. If any part of a curve line crosses the object boundary, an error message appears.
Note To apply Liquid Effect, you need to select it before digitizing. You cannot apply it to existing objects.
To create new objects with Liquid Effect

1 2 Click the Complex Fill icon and select Tatami stitch. Click the Liquid Effect icon. You are prompted to enter the first point of boundary 1 of the object.
V9
Chapter 21
476
Digitize the boundaries, entry and exit points and stitch angle of the Complex Fill object following the prompts. Note You are not prompted to digitize the stitch angle.
Digitize the first curve line around the outside of the object. You must enter at least three reference points.
curve line 1
Press Enter. You are prompted to enter the second curve. Notice that the pointer has elastic lines attached to it. These lines join each side of the curve line shape.
Digitize the second curve line in the same direction of the first, marking at least three reference points. Note The two curves must not overlap or intersect the object outline.
Press Enter.
curve line 2
curve line 1
V9
477
Tip To modify the curves, select the object and then the Reshape Object icon. Click-and-drag the curves into the required shapes, and press Enter.
Adjusting Liquid Effect settings

Right-click Liquid Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings. As with Florentine Effect fill, you can specify how ES Designer calculates the stitch length by choosing between Nominal and Maximum. Tip Use Maximum when the curve is tight with respect to the stitch length.
To adjust Liquid Effect settings

1 Right-click the Liquid Effect icon. The Effects > Curve Fill tab opens.
Select Liquid Effect
2 3
Select the Liquid Effect checkbox. Select the required stitch length calculation option:
! Nominal: the average length of the fill stitches matches the Stitch
Length setting.
V9
Chapter 21
478
! Maximum: the longest stitch matches the Stitch Length setting.
Nominal
Maximum
Click OK.
V9
479
Chapter 22
Motif Runs and Fills
Motifs are pre-defined design elements, such as hearts, leaves or border patterns. They generally consist of one or more simple objects, and are stored in a special motif set.
With Motif Run and Motif Fill you can use simple motifs such as hearts, leaves or border patterns to create ornamental runs and textured fills. Create your own motifs or use the ones provided with the software. Motifs can be scaled, rotated and mirrored in the same way as other objects. Using 3D Warp with motif fills, you can also create interesting three dimensional effects. This section describes how to insert motifs into your design, and how to rotate, mirror and scale them. It explains how to manage motifs, including how to create your own motifs and motif sets. It also describes how to create both motif runs and motif fills, as well as how to apply 3D effects to motif fills.
Selecting and inserting motifs

Click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to use the current motif. Right-click Motif Fill to select a different motif or adjust settings for new or selected objects.
V9
480
Add motifs to your design by selecting them from the Select Motifs dialog.
Note If a motif is comprised of two or more objects, these will be automatically grouped when inserted.
To select and insert motifs

1 Select Special > Motif > Select. The Select Motif dialog opens.
Select viewing mode
Select motif set
selected motif Make selection current
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Select a motif set from the Symbol Set dropdown list. Select a viewing mode. You can list motifs by picture, name, or both. Select a motif. The name of the selected motif appears in the Selection field. Click Make Current. The dialog closes and the motif appears attached to the mouse pointer. Move the pointer to the position you want to add the motif, and click to mark the anchor point. Move the pointer until the motif is in the position you need, then click again for a guide point. Press Enter.
V9
481
Stitches generate.
Insert anchor point
Insert guide point
press Enter
Repeat the step to insert the motif again. You can rotate, scale and mirror motifs as you insert them. See Rotating, mirroring and scaling motifs for details.
10 Press Esc to finish. Tip To reuse the same motif, select Special > Motif > Use. Note Each motif is treated as a single object. To edit only a section of a motif, ungroup the motif.
Rotating, mirroring and scaling motifs

You can rotate, scale, or mirror motifs as you add them to your design using the keyboard and mouse.
Tip If you find it easier to insert a motif at its original size and orientation, you can scale, rotate and mirror it later just like any other object.
To rotate, mirror and scale motifs

1 Select a motif to insert. See Selecting and inserting motifs for details.
V9
Chapter 22
482
Move the pointer to the position you want to add the motif, and click to mark the anchor point.
Click to mark anchor point
The motif attaches to the mouse pointer. As you move the pointer, the motif rotates around the anchor point you marked. 3 Rotate, scale, or mirror the motif with the mouse.
! To rotate the motif, move the pointer until the rotation angle is
correct, then click again.
Click to mark guide point motif rotated
! To mirror the motif, right-click.
Press Shift and drag motif to new size and rotation
Right-click to mark guide point and mirror motif
Motif rotated, scaled and mirrored
! To scale the motif, press Shift. Move the pointer until the motif
outline shows the required size, then click again.
Hold down Shift to resize the motif Motif rotated and scaled
Hold down Ctrl to constrain rotation angles
Tip When mirroring and scaling, make sure the motif is at the required rotation angle, before clicking or right-clicking. 4 Press Esc to finish.
V9
483
Tip You can create motifs from patterns made in the cross stitch program and use them to create a cross stitch sampler. See the Cross Stitch User Manual Supplement for details.
motifs created in cross stitch program
Managing motifs
ES Designer provides various ways to manage your motifs including making motif sets, saving motifs, copying motifs between motif sets, and deleting motifs.
Creating motif sets

Use Motif > Make (Special menu) to create your own motif set. The Make Motif function lets you create your own motif sets to organize and classify your motifs.
To create motif sets

1 Select the object/s you want to save as a motif.
Select Special > Motif > Make.
V9
Chapter 22
484
The Make Motif dialog opens.
Click New to create new motif set
Click New. The New Motif Set dialog opens.
Enter name for motif set
Enter a name for the new motif set and click OK. The Motif Set is ready for use. Note Motif sets are stored in the C:\ESWin\Userletw folder. You can delete or rename these motif sets as required.
Saving motifs
Use Motif > Make (Special menu) to save motifs. The Make Motif function lets you save your own motifs for future use. Motifs may be saved to different files, or Motif Sets.
To save motifs
1 Select the object/s you want to save as a motif.
Select Special > Motif > Make.
V9
485
The Make Motif dialog opens.
Select a motif set Enter a motif name Select to remove unwanted machine functions
3 4 5 6 7
Select a Motif Set from the dropdown list. See also Creating motif sets. Enter a name in the Motif Name field. If you want to automatically remove machine functions from the motif, select the Remove Functions checkbox. Click OK. You are prompted to digitize reference points. Click to mark two reference points on the motif. Reference points set the standard orientation of the motif. This determines the way the motif is oriented when directly inserted, or along a digitized line with Motif Run, or stitch line with Motif Fill. Reference points also set the spacing between each repetition of the motif in Motif Run and Motif Fill.
2 right reference point
left reference point
1 rotation direction
1 left reference point
2 right reference point
A confirmation message appears. 8 Click OK. The motif is ready to use.
Copying motifs between sets

Use Motif > Select (Special menu) to copy motifs between sets.
V9
Chapter 22
486
As your collection of motifs grows, you sometimes need to classify them in different ways. The Select Motif function lets you copy and paste motifs between motif sets.
To copy motifs between sets

1 Select Special > Motif > Select. The Select Motif dialog opens.
viewing options
Select source motif set
Select motifs to copy
Click Copy
2 3 4 5
Select the source motif set from the Symbol Set dropdown list. Select a motif or motifs you want to copy. Click Copy. Select the target motif set from the Symbol Set dropdown list.
Select target motif set
Click Paste
V9
487
6 7
Click Paste. The copied motifs are pasted into the target motif set. Click Cancel to close the dialog.
Deleting motifs
Use Motif > Select (Special menu) to delete motifs from a set. Delete any motifs you no longer want from a motif set.
To delete motifs
1 2 3 4 Select Special > Motif > Select. The Select Motif dialog opens. Select the motif to delete. Click Delete. A confirmation message appears. Click Yes.
Creating motif runs

Motif Run is an input method that creates motif repeats along a digitized line. You can create decorative outlines using any motif from the selection list. You can modify the rotation angle, orientation and scale, and vary the space between motifs.
Using Motif Run

Use Motif Run (Input toolbar) to create a string of motifs along a digitized line.
V9
Chapter 22
488
Use the Motif Run input method to create a string of motifs along a digitized line. You can select motifs in the Object Properties dialog before or after digitizing. You can also adjust scale and spacing settings.
To use Motif Run

1 2 Click the Motif Run icon. Digitize the line along which you want the motif to appear by entering reference points.
! Click to add a corner point ! Right-click to add a curve point.
When you have finished digitizing the line, press Enter. An outline of the selected motif attaches to your cursor.
! To use the original size and orientation of the motif press Enter. ! To scale the motif, move the pointer until the motif is the required
size, click, then press Enter.
! To mirror the motif, right-click then press Enter.
motif mirrored
Tip You can combine scaling and mirroring.
Selecting and changing motifs for Motif Run

Right-click Motif Run (Input toolbar) to select motifs to use with Motif Run.
V9
489
Select the motif to use in the Motif Run before or after digitizing. Select a motif before digitizing as described in Selecting and inserting motifs. If you use Motif Run without selecting a motif, a default will be used. To change a motif after digitizing, use the Object Properties dialog as described in To change motifs for Motif Run.
motif selected after digitizing
motif selected before digitizing
Note For a complete catalogue of samples, see Motif Samples.
To change motifs for Motif Run

1 2 Select a Motif Run object. Right-click the Motif Run icon. The Object Properties > Outline Stitch tab opens.
Click to select motif
3 4 5
Click Select. The Select Motif dialog opens. Select a motif from the list. See Selecting and inserting motifs for details. Click Make Current.
Scaling motifs in Motif Run objects

Right-click Motif Run (Input toolbar) to scale motifs in Motif Run. You can set the exact size of motifs in a Motif Run by entering the dimensions in the Object Properties dialog.
V9
Chapter 22
490
Note You can enter motif dimensions before or after digitizing the object.
To scale motifs in Motif Run objects

Enter horizontal and vertical dimensions
In the Size X and Size Y fields, enter horizontal and vertical dimensions for the motifs.
Size X and Size Y values
Size X and Size Y adjusted
Click OK. Tip You can also scale motifs as you digitize Motif Run objects. See Using Motif Run for details.
Adjusting Motif Run spacing

Right-click Motif Run (Input toolbar) to adjust Motif Run spacing. You can change the distance between each motif in a Motif Run. The initial spacing setting for motifs in a Motif Run is the distance between the reference points that were marked when the motif was created. See Saving motifs for details.
original spacing
spacing increased
spacing decreased
V9
491
Note You can adjust spacing settings before or after digitizing the object.
To adjust Motif Run spacing

Enter distance between motif repetitions
In the Spacing field, enter the distance between each repetition of the motif.
spacing
initial spacing
If they do not fit the baseline exactly, ES Designer adjusts the spacing to make them fit:
! If the space remaining at the end of the baseline is less than half a
motif, the extra space is spread evenly between the motifs.
! If the space is larger than half a motif, ES Designer inserts an extra

motif, and slightly overlaps the motifs to distribute them evenly along the baseline. Tip You can reshape the baseline to achieve the exact spacing you require. See Reshaping Motif Run objects for details.
Keeping or omitting motifs

Right-click Motif Run (Input toolbar) to select whether to keep or omit first and last motifs.
V9
Chapter 22
492
If you are digitizing adjoining lines with Motif Run, you can omit the last motif of the current object or the first motif of the next object to avoid an overlap where the lines join.
first and last motifs kept
first motif kept, last motif omitted
Note You can adjust these settings either before or after digitizing the object.
To keep or omit motifs

Choose whether to keep or omit first and last motifs
3 4
Choose whether to keep or omit first and last motifs. Click OK.
Reshaping Motif Run objects

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected Motif Run objects. Reshape Motif Run objects in the same way as you reshape lettering objects. See also Special Lettering Features.
To reshape Motif Run objects

1 Select the Motif Run object to reshape, then click the Reshape icon. Control points appear around the motifs.
V9
493
Reshape the object as required. You can change the width and height of the motifs, the space between motifs, or the shape of the digitized line.
object control points adjusted
motif control points adjusted: motifs rotated
Press Enter to finish.
Creating motif fills

Use Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to fill Complex Fill objects with repeated motifs. Motif Fill is a decorative fill stitch with which you can fill Complex Fill objects. This feature repeats motifs in parallel rows to fill the shape. You can select different motifs for forward and backward rows. You can design the motif layout on-screen, or by adjusting settings in the Object Properties dialog.
Using Motif Fill

Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to create an object to apply Motif Fill to. Click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Motif Fill to a selected object using the current settings. Use Motif Fill with Complex Fill objects to create decorative fill stitching using the current Motif Fill settings. You can select a motif, or change the layout
V9
Chapter 22
494
and settings either before or after you digitize. See Laying out motif fills on-screen and Adjusting Motif Fill spacing and offset settings for details.
To use Motif Fill

1 2 Click the Complex Fill icon. Digitize the Complex Fill object as you would normally. See Digitizing complex shapes for details. Note The stitch angle has no effect on motif layout. 3 4 5 Select the Complex Fill object. Click the Motif Fill icon. Press Enter. The digitized object is filled with the current Motif Fill.
Selecting motifs to use in Motif Fills

t
Click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to select the current motif. Select the Motif Fill object, and click Properties to change the properties of Motif Fill objects. Select the motifs to use in a Motif Fill from the Object Properties dialog. You can select different motifs for the forward and backward rows, or the same motif for each.
Note For a complete catalogue of samples, see Motif Samples.
V9
495
To select motifs to use in Motif Fills

1 Right-click the Motif Fill icon. The Object Properties > Fill Stitch tab opens.
Select motif for forward rows
Select motif for backward rows
In the Motif 1 panel, select the motif to use in the forward row fill. To do this:
! click Select to open the Select Motif dialog. ! select the motif to use in the forward rows of the fill, then click Make
Current. 3 In the Motif 2 panel, select the motif to use in the backward row fill, using the same method. If you select the same motif for forward and backward rows, they will point in the same direction.
forward and backward same motif selected
backward motif resized
Note You can scale Motif 1 and Motif 2 motifs independently. See Scaling motifs to an exact size for details. 4 Click OK.
V9
Chapter 22
496
Adjusting Motif Fill spacing and offset settings

Right-click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust the exact row, column and spacing settings. You can adjust the exact row, column and spacing settings for Motif Fills. The default settings define a simple grid where the spacing equals the motif dimensions. The row offset is set to 0.00 mm so columns and rows are perpendicular.
Note Spacing is measured from the start of each motif. So to define new spacing settings, add a distance between motifs to the original spacing. Reducing the original setting causes motifs to overlap.
To adjust spacing and offset settings

1 Right-click the Motif Fill object. The Object Properties > Fill Stitch tab opens.
Enter column spacing Enter row spacing and offset Scale and clip motifs to fit shape
2 3
Enter column spacing in the Columns > Spacing field. Enter row spacing in the Rows > Spacing field.
V9
497
Enter row offset in the Rows > Offset field.
offset changed
row spacing reduced
Select the Scale motifs to fit grid checkbox to scale motifs to exactly fit the grid squares.
Scale motifs to fit grid ON
Scale motifs to fit grid OFF
6
.
Select the Clip motifs to fit shape checkbox to clip motifs that do not fit the shape.
Clip motifs to fit shape ON
Clip motifs to fit shape OFF
Note If more than half a motif is outside the boundary, it will be omitted. 7 Click OK.
Scaling motifs to an exact size

Right-click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to scale motifs to an exact size.
V9
Chapter 22
498
You can set the exact size of motifs in a fill. You can also scale Motif 1 and Motif 2 motifs independently to create special effects.
original values
values adjusted
values adjusted
To scale motifs to an exact size

1 Right-click Motif Fill object. The Object Properties > Fill Stitch tab opens.
Enter motif width and height of forward rows
Enter motif width and height of backward rows
In the Motif 1 panel, enter the dimensions of motifs in the forward rows.
! Size X: Enter motif width. ! Size Y: Enter motif height.
In the Motif 2 panel, enter the dimensions of motifs in the backward rows.
Click OK.
V9
499
Rotating Motif Fills by an exact amount

t
Right-click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to rotate motifs by an exact amount. The rotation angle defines the orientation of the entire motif fill pattern. It overrides the stitch angle you set when digitizing the shape with Complex Fill.
To rotate Motif Fills by an exact amount

Enter rotation angle
2 3
In the Rotation Angle field, enter the rotation angle of the fill. Click OK.
Laying out motif fills on-screen

Right-click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to access layout options. You lay out Motif Fills on-screen in a similar way to Program Splits by using guide motifs to scale, space, transform and offset the entire motif fill. There are three blue guide motifs. Other sample motifs appear in yellow. Each guide motif lets you change different elements of the layout. When you
V9
Chapter 22
500
change a guide motif, all motifs in the fill change accordingly. See also Laying out motif fills on-screen.
Use top guide motif to change row spacing, row offset, and to scale motifs Use middle guide motif to move, rotate, skew, and scale motifs Use side guide motif to change column spacing, and to scale motifs
Tip Generally you define the layout of the fill before digitizing the object. If it is important to align the motifs with the object boundary, digitize the object using the current settings, and change the layout afterwards.
To lay out Motif Fills on-screen

Select Layout
Click Layout. Sample and guide motifs appear in the design window. When you change a guide motif, all motifs in the fill change accordingly. Tip Zoom in to select the correct guide motif.
Adjust the guide motifs to achieve the effect you require.
! Move motifs by selecting the middle guide motif and dragging it to

a new position.
V9
501
! Scale motifs by selecting a guide motif and resizing it using the

selection handles.
Scale horizontally
Scale vertically
! Rotate motifs by clicking the middle guide twice to display the

rotation handles. Click a corner handle and drag to rotate.
! Skew motifs by clicking the middle guide twice, then dragging the
skew handles.
rotate anchor skew
! Change column spacing by selecting the side guide and dragging

it left or right.
Change column spacing
V9
Chapter 22
502
! Change row spacing by selecting the top guide and dragging it up

or down.
! Change row offset by selecting the top guide and dragging it left
or right. Changing the offset distorts the rows.
Change row spacing
Change offset
Press Enter to finish. The size and layout settings you select become the current Motif Fill settings. Tip To revert to the original factory settings, run the Revert utility. See Reverting to factory settings for details. Alternatively, enter the values manually in the Object Properties > Fill Stitch > Motif Fill tab and click Save. See Motif Samples for details.
Creating 3D effects with motif fills

3D Warp is used with Motif Fill to create three dimensional effects. You can make shapes appear concave or convex using Globe In or Globe Out. You can also create distance effects using Perspective. You can apply 3D Warp as you digitize, or apply it to existing Complex Fill objects.
Without 3D Warp
Globe In
Globe Out
Perspective
V9
503
Tip Small stitches may be generated along the edge of objects using 3D Warp. You can remove these automatically. See Removing small stitches automatically for details.
Applying 3D Warp with Globe In/Globe Out

Click 3D Warp (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply 3D effects to selected motif fills. Right-click to change 3D effects. Using Globe In with 3D Warp gives a concave effect by increasing the motif size and spacing around a center point. Globe Out gives a convex effect by decreasing motif size and spacing.
You can apply Globe In and Globe Out to an entire object, or to a specified part of the fill. You can modify the effect by adjusting the guide frame.
To apply 3D Warp with Globe In/Globe Out

1 Select the Motif Fill object. Note To apply 3D Warp to newly created objects, make sure you have no objects selected. 2 Right-click the 3D Warp icon. The Effects > Others tab opens.
Select 3D Warp Select Globe In or Globe Out
3 4
Select the 3D Warp checkbox, and select Globe In or Globe Out from the list. Click OK.
V9
Chapter 22
504
The Globe In or Out effect is applied to the selected object.
OR
Complex FIll object with Motif Fill
Globe In applied
Globe Out applied
To make further adjustments, select the object and click the Reshape icon. A guide frame appears around the object. Adjust the control points to modify the effect as required. Press Enter.
6 7
Globe Out selected
3D Warp control points reshaped
Globe Out adjusted
Tip You can generate layers of colored motifs by duplicating an object and selecting a different color. For example, after filling a shape with circles, you can create a second layer, offset it, and apply a different color. You can then apply effects such as Globe Out to the whole motif fill.
V9
505
Applying 3D Warp with Perspective

Click 3D Warp (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply 3D effects to selected motif fills. Right-click to change 3D effects. Use Perspective with 3D Warp to create a perspective effect by exaggerating relative sizes.
Note You need to adjust the guide frame for Perspective 3D Warp to specify the direction in which to make motifs larger and smaller.
To apply 3D Warp with Perspective

1 Select the Motif Fill object. Note To apply 3D Warp to newly created objects, make sure you have no objects selected. 2 Right-click the 3D Warp icon. The Effects > Others tab opens.
Select 3D Warp Select Perspective
3 4 5
Select the 3D Warp checkbox, and select Perspective from the list. Click OK. Click the Reshape icon.
V9
Chapter 22
506
A guide frame appears around the object.

Select object and click Reshape
Adjust the frame to move the guidelines closer together or further apart. Warning The guide frame must not cross the outer boundary of the shape, and cannot be inside the shape.
Press Enter. The perspective effect is applied.
Adjust frame and Press Enter
V9
507
PART VI
EMBROIDERY LETTERING
Create top-quality lettering quickly and simply. ES Designer provides a large range of scaleable closest-join alphabet styles and multi-color and fancy stitching alphabets to choose from.
Creating embroidery lettering

This section describes how to add and edit lettering, change formatting settings, and adjust lettering size and spacing. See Creating Embroidery Lettering for details.
Adjusting lettering layout

This section describes how to adjust lettering objects as well as individual letters. It also describes how to apply and adjust lettering baselines. See Adjusting Lettering Layout for details.
Adjusting lettering stitch settings

This section describes changing lettering stitch types in lettering objects, and adjusting lettering stitch angles. It also explains how to adjust the lettering stitching sequence as well as lettering join method. See Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings for details.
Special lettering features

This section shows you how to add special characters and symbols. It describes how to create special effects with envelopes. It also covers adding
V9
508
borders to lettering, as well as setting up team lettering designs. See Special Lettering Features for details.
Custom alphabets
This section describes how to create new alphabets from TrueType fonts. It also describes how to create and modify your own custom alphabets and letters. Alphabet merging is also explained. See Custom Alphabets for details.
V9
509
Chapter 23
Creating Embroidery Lettering
Add lettering directly to designs using current settings or with the dialog box. Apply formatting just like a word processor, including italics, bolding, and right/left justification. Adjust formatting directly on-screen or with the dialog. Or use the fast-access Lettering Box to quickly change values for the whole text or for individual letters. With object-based operation, you can type and manipulate your text directly on-screen, changing the size or spacings to fit.
This section describes how to add and edit lettering, change formatting settings, and adjust lettering size and spacing.
V9
510
Adding lettering to embroidery designs

You can add lettering to a design by typing it directly in the design window, or entering it in the Object Properties - Lettering dialog.
Creating lettering on-screen

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to add lettering directly on-screen. If it is not essential to fit letters precisely to a certain area, you can type them directly on-screen as with a word processor. Current lettering settings are used. You can change these before or after you digitize. You can also modify lettering objects directly on-screen to achieve various artistic effects.
To create lettering on-screen

1 2 3 4 Click the Lettering icon. Select a color from the color palette. Click where you want to start typing. Type the letters you want to embroider. Tip To start a new line, press Shift + Enter. 5 6 Press Enter to complete. Select Stitch > Generate Stitches or press G.
Note Appearance and layout depend on current settings in the Object Properties - Lettering dialog. You can change them at any time. See Adjusting Lettering Layout for details.
V9
511
Creating lettering with the Lettering dialog

Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to enter text in the dialog and adjust settings for embroidery lettering. Using the Object Properties - Lettering dialog, you can specify letter formatting before adding it to the design. This is the more traditional method and is useful with more complex designs.
To create lettering with the Lettering dialog

1 Right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens.
Enter text
Select options Select baseline Select text justification
Enter the text you want to embroider in the text entry panel. To start a new line of lettering, press Enter. Tip You can insert a color change between two letters by keying a caret (^) symbol. Subsequent letters default to the next color in the palette.
3 4 5
Select alphabet, formatting and baseline settings for the lettering. See Selecting alphabets and Formatting lettering for details. Click OK. Click where you want to place the lettering, or mark reference points for the baseline you selected. See Applying lettering baselines for details.
V9
Chapter 23
512
6 7
Press Enter. Select Stitch > Generate Stitches or press G.
Note Letters are filled with stitches according to current settings in the Fill Stitch and Connectors tabs of the Object Properties - Lettering dialog. You can change these at any time. See Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings for details.
Selecting alphabets
Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to select an alphabet for new or selected lettering objects. ES Designer provides an alphabet range suitable for many applications. Select from the supplied alphabets, create your own, or convert TrueType fonts. See also Custom Alphabets.
To select an alphabet
Select alphabet Select Preview in Dropdown List
V9
513
2 3
Click the Preview in Dropdown List checkbox to view preview of alphabets. Select an alphabet from the Alphabet list.
A sample character of the chosen alphabet appears in the preview window. For samples of the complete selection of standard alphabets, see Standard Alphabets.
alphabet Block2 preview
alphabet Carla preview
alphabet Hobo preview
Tip Consider letter size before you change alphabets. Some alphabets look best in a smaller size. Others can be stitched at a larger size. See also Adjusting letter height and width. 4 Click OK. The lettering alphabet is set. Tip The same options are available in the floating Lettering Toolbox. See Editing with the lettering toolbox for details.
V9
Chapter 23
514
Editing lettering objects

When you have created a lettering object, you can select it and make changes to it directly on-screen, via the toolbox or toolbar, or via the Object Properties - Lettering dialog.
Editing lettering text on-screen

Click Lettering (Input toolbar) to edit lettering on-screen. With ES Designer you have the option of editing lettering directly on-screen.
To edit lettering text on-screen

1 Click the Lettering icon then click inside the lettering object. An I-beam appears where you clicked.
I-beam
Edit the text as required. Tip Press Shift + Enter to start a new line.
Press Enter to complete.
Editing with the lettering toolbox

Use Lettering Box (Standard toolbar) to open the lettering toolbox. Access commonly used lettering commands and features with the Lettering Toolbox.
V9
515
To edit with the lettering toolbox

1 Click the Lettering Box icon. The Lettering Box opens.
alphabet join stitch method letter height letter width italic angle baseline justification baseline position
Select a lettering object and change its settings as required. You can control alphabet, baseline, italic angle, width, height and join method. See Formatting lettering for details.
To close the toolbox, click X in the top right corner.
Editing lettering with the Lettering dialog

When you have created a lettering object, you can select it and make changes to it via the Lettering tab of the Object Properties - Lettering dialog.
To edit lettering with the Lettering dialog

1 Use one of the following techniques to select lettering objects:
! Select a single lettering object: Click the lettering object with the
left mouse button. The object changes color and eight sizing handles appear around it.
! Select a group of lettering objects: Select a lettering object then,

holding down the Ctrl key, click other objects as required.
! Select lettering objects with a bounding box: Click-and-drag a

bounding box around the lettering object/s and release the mouse. 2 Double-click the selected lettering object/s.
V9
Chapter 23
516
The Lettering tab of the Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens.

Edit text
Adjust settings
Save to template
3 4 5 6
Edit the text in the text entry panel as required. Make any other adjustments you require. See Formatting lettering for details. If you want to save settings to the template, click Save. Click OK. Note Letters are filled with stitches according to current settings in the Fill Stitch and Connectors tabs of the Object Properties - Lettering dialog. You can change these at any time. See Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings for details.
Formatting lettering
You can control the appearance of lettering by changing formatting settings in the Object Properties - Lettering dialog. Change current formatting settings before or after adding lettering in the same way as other objects.
V9
517
Making italic lettering

You can slant letters to the left or right for an italic effect. Enter the degree of slant in the Angle field of the Lettering tab. The default angle is 0.
To make italic lettering

1 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens.
Select italic angle
Enter an angle in the Italic field. The largest angle that the lettering can lean at is 45. (0 is equivalent to no italics.)
italic angle 45
italic angle 0
italic angle -45
Click OK. Tip The same options are available in the floating Lettering Toolbox. See Editing with the lettering toolbox for details.
Making bold lettering

You can create the effect of bold lettering either by increasing the pull compensation settings for selected lettering objects, or adjusting the column width setting. The difference is that the column width setting adjusts the entire column, including underlay, while pull compensation adjusts only cover stitching. See also Compensating for fabric stretch.
V9
Chapter 23
518
To make bold lettering

1 2 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens. Select the Fill Stitch tab.
Click Effects
Click Effects and select the Others tab. The Effects dialog opens.
Increase pull compensation or column width
Select Column Width or Pull Compensation as required. See Compensating for fabric stretch and Adjusting column width for details.
Increase the values in the respective fields.
normal
pull comp: 0.3 mm
column width: 140%
Click OK.
Setting letter justification

Justification is the way that lettering aligns itself on a baseline. You can justify lettering left or right, center it, or fully justify it. Full justification spreads the letters out to fill the length of the baseline.
To set letter justification

V9
519
Select a justification setting Left, Right, Centered, or Justified.
left
right
centered
fully justified
Scaling lettering
When you first create lettering, it may be too big or too small. Size can be adjusted in three ways:
! by scaling on-screen with the Select Object or Reshape Object tools ! by adjusting width and height settings in the Lettering tab ! by adjusting width and height settings in the General tab.
Scaling lettering with Select Object

Use Select Object (Pointer toolbar) to scale lettering objects on-screen. You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and proportionally with the Select Object tool. See also Transforming lettering with Select Object.
V9
Chapter 23
520
To scale lettering with Select Object

1 Click the Select Object icon and select the lettering object.
Resize Vertically Resize Proportionally Resize Horizontally
Click-and-drag one of the square control points to resize the object horizontally, vertically or proportionally.
Drag
A shadow outline shows the new size of the lettering object as you drag. 3 Release the mouse to complete.
Scaling lettering with Reshape Object

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to scale lettering objects on-screen. You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and proportionally with the Reshape Object tool. See also Rotating lettering with Reshape Object.
To scale lettering with Reshape Object

1 Select the lettering object.
V9
521
Click the Reshape Object icon.

Resize Vertically Resize Proportionally Resize Horizontally
Click-and-drag one of the dark triangular control points to resize the object horizontally, vertically or proportionally.
Drag
A bounding box shows the new size of the lettering object as you drag. 4 Release the mouse to complete.
Adjusting letter height and width

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust letter height and width. You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and proportionally via the Lettering tab of the Object Properties - Lettering dialog.
Tip Change the appearance of an alphabet by changing the letter width in proportion to the height. The original width value is 100%.
To adjust letter height and width

1 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s.
V9
Chapter 23
522
The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens.
Select width percentage
Select letter height in mm
In the Height field enter the height of your lettering object in millimeters. Note Letter height can be between 1 mm and 200 mm. For recommended sizes, see Standard Alphabets.
Enter the width of your lettering object in the Width field as a percentage of the height.
! For wide letters, increase the percentage e.g. 140%. ! For narrow letters, decrease the percentage e.g. 70%.
width 100%
width 70%
width 140%
Adjusting lettering dimensions

You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and proportionally via the General tab of the Object Properties - Lettering dialog.
Tip Change the appearance of an alphabet by changing the letter width in proportion to the height. The original width value is 100%.
V9
523
To adjust lettering dimensions

Adjust width and height settings
Adjust the width and height settings either as absolute values (mm) or as a percentage of the current settings.
original
width and height 125%
Click OK.
Adjusting letter spacing

Letter, word and line spacings can be determined before or after creating lettering objects and placing them in your design. You can edit spacing directly on-screen or via the dialog. Letter spacing is calculated automatically according to justification Left, Right, Centered, or Full Justified. See also Setting letter justification.
Note When the justification setting is Full, letters are evenly distributed along the baseline. To change the spacing for fully justified lettering, simply change the length of the baseline.
V9
Chapter 23
524
Adjusting overall letter spacing on-screen

Click Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to change letter spacing. The spacing between letters is calculated automatically as a percentage of the letter height. In most cases the default spacing is adequate. Sometimes, however, you may want to change the overall letter spacing.
To adjust overall letter spacing on-screen

1 2 Select the lettering object. Click the Reshape Object icon.
Drag letter spacing control point
Drag the letter spacing control point left or right to adjust the spacing of all letters along the baseline.
Release the mouse button to complete and press Esc.
Adjusting individual letter spacing on-screen

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to change individual letter spacing. The spacing between letters is calculated automatically as a percentage of letter height. In most cases the default spacing is adequate. Sometimes, however, the spacing between certain letters may appear too large or too small, depending on the shape of neighboring letters. To compensate for this visual effect, you can move one or several selected letters closer or further
V9
525
apart along the baseline to improve spacing. See also Repositioning letters on-screen.
To adjust individual letter spacing on-screen

1 2 3 Select the lettering object. Click the Reshape Object icon. Click the diamond control point in the middle of the letter.
Hold down Ctrl and click diamond control points
Tip To select multiple letters, hold down Ctrl as you select. 4 Drag the letter/s along the baseline to adjust the spacing.
Adjusting line spacing on-screen

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to change line spacing. Change the space between lines in a multiple-line lettering object using the Reshape tool.
To adjust line spacing on-screen

1 Select the lettering object.
V9
Chapter 23
526
2 3
Click the Reshape Object icon. Drag the line spacing control point up or down to change line spacing.
Drag line spacing control point
Adjusting letter, word and line spacings

You can adjust letter, word and line spacings in lettering objects at any stage via the dialog.
To adjust letter, word and line spacings

1 2 Double-click a selected lettering object or right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens. Select the Lettering tab and click Layout. The Layout dialog opens.
Enter values as absolutes (mm) or percentages
Enter Spacing values as absolute values (mm) or percentages of the height.
V9
527
! Letter Spacing: the space between all letters.
! Word Spacing: the space between words.
! Line Spacing: the space between lines.
Note Whether you enter a percentage or absolute value, the other updates automatically. 4 Click OK. Tip If you want to remove spacing between words, set Word Spacing to 0%.
V9
Chapter 23
528
Chapter 24
Adjusting Lettering Layout
ES Designer gives you both interactive and precise numeric control over many settings affecting lettering objects. Adjust both individual letters and lettering objects as a whole. Apply horizontal, vertical, and curved baselines. Modify baseline type, length, radius and angle, as well as position. You can even define the rotation angle of letters relative to the baseline or the design itself.
This section describes how to adjust lettering objects as well as individual letters. It also describes how to apply and adjust lettering baselines.
Transforming lettering objects

Apart from scaling, you can use the Select Object and Reshape Object tools to skew and rotate lettering objects. See also Scaling lettering.
V9
529
Transforming lettering with Select Object

Use Select Object (Pointer toolbar) to transform lettering objects on-screen. You can transform lettering objects by manipulating control points on-screen with the Select Object tool. See also Scaling lettering with Select Object.
To transform lettering with Select Object

1 Click the Select Object icon and select the lettering object. The resizing control points appear. See Scaling lettering with Select Object for details. 2 Click the lettering object again. Another set of control points appears. These let you rotate and skew the lettering object.
Skew handle Rotation point Rotation handle
Click-and-drag one of the diamond-shaped control points to skew the lettering object horizontally.
Drag
A shadow outline shows the skewed lettering object as you drag. 4 Click-and-drag one of the hollow square control points to rotate the lettering object.
Rotation point
Drag
A shadow outline shows the rotated lettering object as you drag.
V9
Chapter 24
530
Tip Click-and-drag the rotation point itself to a new position before rotating. 5 Release the mouse to complete.
Rotating lettering with Reshape Object

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to rotate lettering objects on-screen. You can rotate lettering objects by manipulating control points on-screen with the Reshape Object tool. See also Scaling lettering with Select Object.
To rotate lettering with Reshape Object

1 2 Select the lettering object. Click the Reshape Object icon. Control points appear around the lettering object.
Rotate object
Click-and-drag one of the solid square control points on the baseline to rotate the lettering object.
Drag
V9
531
A baseline shows the rotated position of the lettering object as you drag.
Release the mouse to complete.
Adjusting individual letters

As well as scaling and rotating lettering objects, the Reshape Object tool is used to manipulate individual letters. You can reposition letters in relation to each other, scale, rotate and skew them, as well as reshape them. You can also recolor letters individually.
Repositioning letters on-screen

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reposition individual letters on-screen. You can reposition individual letters in a lettering object using the Reshape Object tool.
To reposition letters on-screen

V9
Chapter 24
532
Click the diamond control point in the middle of the letter.
Click diamond control point
Tip To select multiple letters, hold down Ctrl as you select. 4 Click-and-drag the letter to the new position:
! To move the letter horizontally, drag it along the baseline.
! To move the letter vertically, hold down Shift as you drag.
! To move the letter freely, hold down Ctrl as you drag.
Release the mouse button to complete.
Transforming letters on screen

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to transform individual letters on-screen. You can transform individual letters by manipulating control points on-screen with the Reshape Object tool.
V9
533
To transform letters on screen

Select diamond control point
Click the diamond control point in the middle of the letter.

Change letter height Scale letter proportionately
Skew letter
Change letter width
Rotate letter
Click-and-drag the special control points to transform individual letters.
Press Esc or click outside the object to finish.
Reshaping letters on-screen

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to transform individual letters on-screen. Create special lettering effects by reshaping letter outlines with the Reshape Object tool.
V9
Chapter 24
534
To reshape letters on-screen

1 2 3 Select the lettering object. Click the Reshape Object icon. Control points appear around the lettering object. Click the diamond control point in the middle of the letter, then click the letter outline.
Click diamond control point, then click outline
Additional control points appear around the outline. 4 Reshape the letter by dragging the control points. See Reshaping objects using control points for details.
Press Esc or click outside the object to finish.
Recoloring letters on-screen

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to edit lettering on-screen. ES Designer lets you change the color of individual letters within a lettering object.
V9
535
Tip You can also insert a color change between two letters by keying a caret (^) symbol. Subsequent letters default to the next color in the palette. See Creating lettering with the Lettering dialog for details.
To recolor letters on-screen

1 2 Click the Lettering icon then click within the lettering object. Select a letter (or letters) by highlighting it.
I-beam
highlighted letter
3 4
Click a color on the color palette. Press Enter.
Applying lettering baselines

Baselines determine the shape of lettering objects in a design. You can place lettering on a straight horizontal or vertical line, curve lettering around a circle or arc, or digitize your own baseline. Different reference points are needed depending on the baseline you use. You can digitize baselines on-screen or, if you are working from an enlargement drawing, on a digitizing tablet.
Baselines use default settings to determine their size, spacing and angles. ES Designer gives you both interactive and precise numerical control over many baseline settings. Techniques are available to modify baseline type, length, radius and angle, as well as baseline position. You can numerically
V9
Chapter 24
536
define the rotation angle of letters relative to the baseline or the design itself.
Selecting baselines
Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to select baselines and adjust baseline settings. You can select different baselines through both the Object Properties Lettering and Layout dialogs. You can also adjust baseline settings. You can apply baselines to new or selected objects. Tip Create identical baselines by duplicating or copying them in your design.
To select a baseline
1 2 Double-click a selected lettering object or right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens. Select a baseline from the list.
Select a baseline
The baseline you choose depends on the effect you want to achieve. You need to digitize different reference points depending on the type of baseline you select. Options include:
! Horizontal (Free Line and Fixed Line). See Applying horizontal

baselines for details.
! Vertical (Free Line Vertical and Fixed Line Vertical). See Applying
vertical baselines for details.
! Arc (Arc CW and Arc CCW). See Applying arc baselines for details. ! Circle (Circle CW and Circle CCW). See Applying circular baselines
for details.
! Custom (Any Shape). See Applying custom baselines for details.
V9
537
Tip The same options are available in the floating Lettering Toolbox. See Editing with the lettering toolbox for details. 3 4 Adjust baseline settings in the Layout dialog. See Adjusting baselines for details. Click OK.
Applying horizontal baselines

Free Line and Fixed Line baselines are straight, horizontal baselines. Free Line does not have a fixed or pre-determined length; the baseline extends as long as you keep adding letters. Fixed Line has a fixed length which you can digitize or specify numerically. If the text extends beyond the baseline, letter spacing is reduced and letters may overlap. The letter width, however, does not change.
Free Line baseline
Fixed Line baseline
To apply horizontal baselines
! For variable-length horizontal lines, select Free Line from the Object
Properties - Lettering dialog and simply click on-screen to mark the start point of the baseline.
Free Line click on-screen to mark start point Fixed Line click on-screen to mark start and end points
! For fixed-length horizontal lines, select Fixed Line from the Object
Properties - Lettering dialog and click to mark the start and end points of the baseline.
V9
Chapter 24
538
Note You can define any angle. Depending on the order in which you mark the reference points, the text will be placed left to right, or right to left.
Applying vertical baselines

Vertical baselines are effective for embroidering on sleeves, as a decorative effect, and for Asian text. There are two types Free Line Vertical and Fixed Line Vertical. Free Line Vertical baselines do not have a fixed length, and extend to fit the letters you enter. Fixed Line Vertical baselines are a fixed length. Letter spacing may be compressed to make the letters fit. Line spacing is calculated horizontally while letter spacing is calculated vertically. Letters, by default, are centered along vertical lines. New lines are placed by default from right to left to suit Asian languages. Tip For Western languages, vertical lettering is best suited to uppercase because descenders in lowercase letters are not accommodated in the letter spacing.
To apply a vertical baseline
! For variable-length vertical lines, enter your text in the Object

Properties - Lettering dialog and select Free Line Vertical. Click the screen to establish the mid-point of the baseline.
Free Line Vertical click the screen to mark mid-point
Fixed Line Vertical click the screen to mark start and end points
V9
539
! For fixed-length vertical lines, enter you text and select Fixed Line
Vertical from the Object Properties - Lettering dialog. Click the screen to establish the baseline start and end points. Note You can define any angle. Depending on the order in which you mark the reference points, the text will be placed left to right, or right to left.
Applying arc baselines

Use Arc Clockwise (Arc CW) and Arc Counter-Clockwise (Arc CCW) baselines to place lettering objects in a curved arc. You can place the lettering clockwise (CW) or counter-clockwise (CCW) along the arc. By default, letters are positioned above the Arc CW and below the Arc CCW baseline. They are also centered by default.
Arc Clockwise (CW)
Arc Counter-Clockwise (CCW)
To apply arc baselines

1 2 3 In the Object Properties Lettering dialog, select Arc CW or Arc CCW as a baseline and click OK. Mark the start point of the arc on-screen. Mark the end point of the arc. Tip Hold down the Ctrl key to constrain the line to 15 increments. 4 Move the pointer up or down to increase the radius of the arc.
V9
Chapter 24
540
Mark a third point above the first two points for Arc CW, and below them for Arc CCW baseline.
3
arc clockwise arc counter-clockwise
Press Enter to complete and press G to generate stitches. Depending on the order in which you mark the reference points, the text will be placed left to right, or right to left.
Applying circular baselines

Use Circle Clockwise (Circle CW) or Circle Counter-Clockwise (Circle CCW) baseline to place letters around a full circle.
Circle Clockwise (CCW)
Circle Counter Clockwise (CW)
For a circle you need to mark two reference points, while for an oval you need to mark three. The position of the second reference point determines the justification point of the text. The text is centered around this point.
To apply circular baselines

1 2 In the Object Properties Lettering dialog, select Circle CW or Circle CCW as a baseline and click OK. Mark the center of the circle.
V9
541
Mark a point on the circumference to define the radius and the justification point.
2 1 1 2 justification angle 90
justification angle 0
Note Depending on the justification setting you select, the left, center or right side of the lettering object lines up with the radius reference point. See Setting letter justification for details. 4 Press Enter for a perfect circle, or click again to form an ellipse. As soon as the last point is marked, the letters of your text are positioned around the circle.
Applying custom baselines

Use Any Shape baselines to shape lettering around elements in your design. Digitize Any Shape baselines by marking reference points to form the required line. The number of reference points and length of baseline are practically unlimited.
Tip If the baseline has tight curves, or sharp corners, the letters may overlap. For best results, only mark curve points, and digitize lines which have shallow, gentle curves.
To apply custom baselines

1 2 In the Object Properties Lettering dialog, select Any Shape as a baseline and click OK. Mark the baseline reference points.
! Mark curve points with the right mouse button.
V9
Chapter 24
542
! Mark corner points with the left mouse button.

3 1 2 4
Press Enter to complete and press G to generate stitches.
Using predefined baselines

Use Predefined baselines to quickly create three rows of lettering, or two rows surrounding a design object. This technique is typically used for creating logos.
To use a predefined baseline

1 With no objects selected, right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens.
Enter two or three lines of text
Select options Select Predefined baseline
V9
543
Enter two or three lines of text in the text entry panel. To start a new line of lettering, press Enter. Tip If you want to insert a logo or design between the top and bottom lines, leave the middle line of text blank.
3 4 5 6
Select the alphabet and other settings you require. See Selecting alphabets and Formatting lettering for details. Select Predefined from the Baseline list. Click OK. Click where you want to place the lettering and drag the cursor downward. Tip Use the Ctrl key to constrain the curve.
7 8 9
Click to enter a point on the circumference of the circle. Mark another point if you want to create an oval, or press Enter for a circular baseline. Select Stitch > Generate Stitches or press G. The lines of text are generated and dispersed around the baseline you have defined. Each line of text becomes a separate lettering object.
Adjusting baselines
Baselines can be modified after placement either directly on-screen or via the Object Properties - Lettering dialog. With the exception of Free Line, baselines allow you to set the final length of the finished lettering. Once you
V9
Chapter 24
544
have placed a baseline, ES Designer attempts to fit all the letters without altering the baseline length. Tip As a baseline is filled with letters, letter spacing decreases. Eventually, letters may overlap. If so, you can adjust the baseline length to accommodate them, or change the lettering width in the Object Properties - Lettering dialog or Lettering Box.
Reshaping baselines on-screen

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape lettering baselines. Baselines can be adjusted on-screen after they have been placed in your design with the Reshape Object tool. Depending on the baseline type you are working with, you can adjust baseline angles, lengths, and lettering width. You can change curve radii and justification points. You can completely reshape Any Shape baselines by moving, changing, adding or deleting control points along the baseline.
To reshape a baseline on-screen

1 2 Select the lettering object. Click the Reshape Object icon.
V9
545
Different control points display for different types of baseline.
baseline control points
Tip The large diamond and cross represent stitching start and end points. You may need to move them to access baseline control points. They will reposition themselves in the new entry and exit points based on the changes you make to the baseline. 3 To change the angle of a straight baseline, click-and-drag one of the large solid squares.
Drag up or down to change baseline angle
To lengthen or shorten a fixed-length baseline, click-and-drag the open triangle control point. The letter spacing adjusts to fit the new length.
Drag triangle to change spacing evenly along baseline
To reshape lettering with a curved baseline, drag the control point in the center of the circle to increase the radius.
Drag up or down to change radius of curve
V9
Chapter 24
546
On a circular baseline, there are actually two control points at the bottom of the circle, one on top of the other. Drag them apart to create an arc baseline.
Drag left or right to change circle baseline to arc
To change letter spacing around a curved baseline, click-and-drag the control point on the circumference of the circle.
Drag triangle to change spacing evenly along baseline
Tip The exact letter positions depend on the justification left, center, right or justified. If the baseline becomes too short, letter spacing is reduced, and letters may overlap.
! To resize from a fixed radius point, click the control point in the
center and drag until the baseline is the right size.
Move up or down to change radius
Drag along circumference to change baseline length
Move up or down to change radius
V9
547
! To adjust Any Shape baselines, add, delete, change or move

reference points like any embroidery object. See Reshaping objects using control points for details.
! To reshape Any Shape baselines, click the point on the baseline

where you want it to bend (change direction). Left-click to bend the line at an angle; right-click to bend the line into a curve.
Click baseline where you want it to bend
Drag any control point up or down
! To re-position, drag any one of the baseline control points up or

down.
Drag to change curvature
! To delete, select a control point and press Delete. ! To change straight to curve, or curve to straight, select the control
point and press Spacebar. 8 Press Enter to complete.
Adjusting straight baseline settings

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust baseline settings. A Free Line baseline does not have a fixed or pre-determined length; the baseline extends as long as you keep adding letters. You can adjust baseline angle numerically. A Fixed Line baseline has a fixed length which you can digitize or specify numerically. Various options are available to handle text
V9
Chapter 24
548
that extends beyond the baseline. See also Applying horizontal baselines and Applying vertical baselines.
To adjust straight baseline settings

1 2 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens. Click Layout to open the Layout dialog.
Adjust length and angle values
Select auto frame style
Select a horizontal or vertical baseline, free or fixed, from the list. Free Line baselines allow you to adjust the Line Angle value. Fixed Line baselines also give you control over line length as well as options for handling text which does not fit the baseline. This is particularly useful for multiple team names. See Team lettering for details.
For fixed line baselines, select an auto frame style:
V9
549
! Spacing: Letter size and width stays the same and letters are
spaced evenly along the baseline. Letters may overlap if the name is too wide.
! Width: The width of each letter is reduced and the original spacing
kept.
! Size (Keep Proportions): Letter width and height is reduced

proportionally but the original spacing remains.
! Spacing and Width: Letter width and spacing is reduced.
! Spacing and Size (Keep Proportions): Letter width, height and

spacing is reduced proportionally.
Adjust the Length and Line Angle values as required.
! Length: Enter the default length of fixed line baselines. ! Line Angle: Enter the exact angle of the baseline to the horizontal
axis.
Select a baseline position.

baseline below baseline centered baseline above
When creating lettering for a badge, for example:
V9
Chapter 24
550
! For lettering above the badge, select a baseline below. ! For lettering below the badge, select a baseline above. ! For horizontal lettering through the middle of the badge, select a
centered baseline. 7 8 9 Specify the letter, word and line spacing as required. See Adjusting letter, word and line spacings for details. Select the letter orientation. See Changing lettering orientation for details. Click OK to return to Object Properties Lettering and click OK again.
Adjusting curved baseline settings

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust baseline settings. You can adjust circle and arc baselines to use your own radius, angle and justification settings. See also Applying arc baselines and Applying circular baselines.
To adjust curved baseline settings

V9
551
Click Layout to open the Layout dialog.
Adjust Tilt, Radius X, Radius Y, Justification and Arc Angle values
Select a circle or arc baseline type from the list. The Tilt, Radius X, Radius Y, Justification Angle and Arc Angle fields are activated.
Adjust these values as required:
! Tilt: Enter the absolute angle of the baseline to the horizontal axis.
tilt angle 0
tilt angle 45
! Radius X: Enter the default radius of the baseline arc (X-axis). ! Radius Y: Enter the default radius of the baseline arc (Y-axis).
radius X: 50 radius Y: 50
radius X: 80 radius Y: 40
V9
Chapter 24
552
! Justification Angle: Enter the angle of the text reference point,

relative to the horizontal axis. For example, for Center justification, enter the point you want to center the lettering over.
justification angle 0 justification angle 45
! Arc Angle: Enter the default arc. This constrains baseline so the text
falls within an arc of the specified number of degrees.
arc angle 250
arc angle 100
Select a baseline position.

baseline below baseline centered baseline above
When digitizing lettering for a badge, for example:
! For lettering above the badge, select a clockwise circle or arc with
baseline below.
! For lettering below the badge, select a counterclockwise circle or arc

with baseline above.
! For horizontal lettering through the middle of the badge, select a

fixed line with baseline centered. 6 7 8 Specify the letter, word and line spacing as required. See Adjusting letter spacing for details. Select the letter orientation. See Changing lettering orientation for details. Click OK to return to Object Properties Lettering and click OK again.
V9
553
Changing lettering orientation

You can define the rotation angle of letters relative to the baseline or the design itself. The latter lets you keep letters vertical regardless of baseline angle in order to achieve a staircase effect.
Baseline angle: 0 Orientation: 90 to design
Baseline angle: 0 Orientation: 90 to baseline
To change lettering orientation

1 2 3 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens. Click Layout to open the Layout dialog. Select an Orientation setting.
Select orientation relative to baseline or design
Set orientation angle
! Baseline: orients letters relative to the lettering baseline. ! Design: orients letters relative to the horizontal.
4 Enter an orientation angle.
Baseline angle: 0 Orientation: 10 to baseline
Baseline angle: 0 Orientation: 60 to design
Click OK to return to Object Properties Lettering and click OK again.
V9
Chapter 24
554
Chapter 25
Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings
When it comes to stitching, you can fine-tune the density, add pull compensation and underlay, or change to center-out stitching. Like all embroidery objects, each lettering object has its own stitch properties. Adjust settings at any stage. ES Designer also gives you precise control over the stitch angles of individual letters. You can also specify the join method and stitching sequence you prefer.
This section describes changing lettering stitch types in lettering objects, and adjusting lettering stitch angles. It also explains how to adjust the lettering stitching sequence as well as lettering join method. Note For information about adjusting travel run length in lettering objects, see Adjusting travel run stitch length. For information about adjusting lettering connector values, see Using automatic connectors.
Applying different stitch types to lettering objects

By default, lettering objects are filled with Satin stitch. You can also apply other basic fill stitch types, such as Tatami or Zigzag, as with other embroidery objects. See Selecting stitch types for details.
V9
555
Note Lettering values are stored in the <PRESET_LETTERING> style in the Normal template. Changing these does not affect the values of other objects. Do not delete or rename this style. See Working with styles for details.
Adjusting Satin stitch settings for lettering objects

Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Satin values for lettering objects. By default, lettering objects are filled with Satin stitch. Where a letter is narrow, stitches are tight, thus requiring fewer stitches to cover the fabric. Where a column is very narrow, stitches need to be less dense because too many needle penetrations can damage the fabric. See also Creating fills with Satin stitch.
To adjust Satin stitch settings for lettering objects

1 2 3 Right-click the Satin icon or double-click a selected lettering object. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens. Select the Fill Stitch tab. Select Satin stitch from the Stitch Type list.
Select Satin Adjust stitch spacing
Select the type of stitch spacing you want for your lettering.
V9
Chapter 25
556
! For Fixed Spacing, clear the Auto Spacing checkbox and select a
value (in millimeters) in the Stitch Spacing field. To increase the density for more open stitching, select a smaller value. See Adjusting Satin stitch spacing for details.
! For Auto Spacing, select the Auto Spacing checkbox and specify the
amount of adjustment to make to the spacings as a % value. See Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch for details.
Auto Spacing ON
Auto Spacing OFF
If you want to use Auto Split, select the checkbox and specify the Auto Split Length and Auto Split Minimum Stitch values. Note The Auto Split and Auto Jump features help you to control long Satin stitches. See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split and Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump for details.
Click OK.
Adjusting Tatami stitch settings for lettering objects

Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami values for lettering objects. You can fill lettering shapes with Tatami stitching. It is suitable for filling large, irregular lettering shapes. See also Creating fills with Tatami stitch.
To adjust Tatami stitch settings for lettering objects

1 2 Right-click the Tatami icon or double-click a selected lettering object. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens. Select the Fill Stitch tab.
V9
557
Select Tatami stitch from the Stitch Type list.
Select Tatami Adjust stitch spacing Adjust stitch length Set offset fractions Set Partition Lines Select a backstitch type Enter a random factor
4 5 6 7
Adjust stitch spacing to increase or decrease density. See Adjusting Tatami stitch spacing for details. Adjust stitch length to increase or decrease needle penetrations. See Adjusting Tatami stitch length for details. Choose a backstitch type Standard, Borderline, or Diagonal. See Selecting a Tatami backstitch for details. Select the Offset Fraction option to specify how each row is offset in order to create special embroidery effects. See Setting Tatami offset fractions for details. Select the Partition Lines option as an alternative method for offsetting needle penetrations in Tatami fills. See Applying Tatami partition lines for details. Specify a random factor to eliminate the split line patterns formed by regular needle penetrations. See Applying random factors for details.
10 Click OK.
Adjusting Zigzag stitch settings for lettering objects

Right-click Zigzag (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Zigzag values for lettering objects. Zigzag stitch is similar to Satin in that the needle penetrates each side of the column. But while Satin gives a straight line followed by a diagonal, Zigzag produces two diagonal lines, thereby producing a more open stitch.
V9
Chapter 25
558
It is generally used for decorative effect or where fewer stitches are required. The density is determined by the stitch spacing setting. See also Creating outlines with Zigzag stitch.
To adjust Zigzag stitch settings for lettering objects

1 2 3 Right-click the Zigzag icon or double-click a selected lettering object. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens. Select the Fill Stitch tab. Select Zigzag stitch from the Stitch Type list.
Select Zigzag Adjust stitch spacing
Enter a spacing value in the Stitch Spacing field.
stitch spacing: 1.0mm
stitch spacing: 1.5mm
Click OK.
Adjusting lettering stitch angles

The Stitch Angle and Reshape Object tools let you adjust lettering stitch angles as well as delete individual stitch angles in lettering objects.
Adjusting stitch angles of individual letters

Use Stitch Angles (Pointer toolbar) to set different stitch angles for selected letters.
V9
559
Set different stitch angles within letters with the Stitch Angle tool. Each segment of the letter can have a different stitch angle.
To adjust stitch angles of individual letters

1 2 3 Select a lettering object. Click the Stitch Angles icon. You are prompted to enter angle point 1. Digitize stitch angles so that they intersect two sides of the object.
Digitize stitch angles
Note Make sure that the stitch angles do not intersect each other. 4 Press Enter. Stitches are regenerated with the new angles.
Deleting lettering stitch angles

Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to delete individual stitch angles in lettering objects. Delete individual stitch angles in lettering objects with the Reshape Object tool.
To delete lettering stitch angles

1 2 3 Select a lettering object. Click the Reshape Object icon. Click the diamond shape control point in the middle of the letter to select it, then click anywhere on the outline.
V9
Chapter 25
560
Select and delete control points as required.
Note Lettering outlines are preserved after any angle deletion.
Adjusting stitching sequence and join method

You can specify the sequence in which letters are stitched to minimize registration problems such as on caps or difficult fabrics. While the Closest Join method is recommended in most cases to minimize trims, you may sometimes want to use the As Digitized setting with alphabets which include multiple colors, multiple stitch types, or special effects.
Adjusting letter sequencing

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust the lettering stitching sequence. You can specify the sequence in which letters are stitched to minimize registration problems such as on caps or difficult fabrics. For example, the Center Out option is especially useful when stitching on caps. There are also options for multiple lines of lettering which are useful for machines without trimmers.
To adjust letter sequencing

1 2 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens. Click Sequence.
V9
561
The Sequence dialog opens.
Adjust single line stitching sequence
Adjust multiple line stitching sequence
Select a stitching sequence. Options include:
! In Line: Select whether you want the lettering to be stitched

left-to-right or right-to-left in each line.
stitched right-to-left
stitched left-to-right
! Center Out: Select this checkbox if you want the lettering stitched
from the center out. You can specify that one side of the center is stitched followed by the other, or that each letter is stitched alternatively on either side of the center.
right side stitched first
left side stitched first
V9
Chapter 25
562
! Line by Line: Choose whether you want multiple lines of lettering

to stitch top-to-bottom or bottom-to-top. You can also specify that the first line should be stitched left-to-right, and the second right-to-left.
stitched top-to-bottom
stitched bottom-to-top
Note You can combine both In Line and Line by Line sequencing options. 4 5 Click OK to return to the Lettering tab. Click OK to close. Tip Travel through your design to check the stitching sequence. See Traveling by stitches for details.
Changing lettering join method

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to change the lettering join stitch method. The lettering stitch method is preset to give the best results for each alphabet. In most cases, Closest Join is recommended in order to minimize trims. See Standard Alphabets for details. The As Digitized setting is used with alphabets which include multiple colors or special effects. Such alphabets may include machine functions, as for two-color alphabets, or run stitches as part of the cover stitching. Lettering objects normally consist of one stitch type only. However, the As Digitized join method together with Original Stitch Values setting can be used with special fonts which combine several stitch types e.g. Satin with Run, or Tatami, or Motifs.
To adjust lettering join method

1 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s.
V9
563
The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens. 2 Click Sequence. The Sequence dialog opens.
Select join method Select Original Stitch Values
Select a join method from the list:
! Bottom Join: Letters are joined along the baseline. Use it if you for
stitching on towelling as the joins are hidden in the pile.
! Closest Join: Letters are joined at the closest point. Use it to

minimize trims.
! As Digitized: Letters are stitched out the same way they were
originally digitized. Use it with alphabets combining different fill stitch types or special effects.
Bottom Join
Closest Join
As Digitized
Select the Original Stitch Values checkbox as required. This setting is only available if the As Digitized join type is selected. Select it when using special fonts which combine several stitch types. If not selected, these letters will be stitched with a single stitch type.
Closest Join selected
As Digitized but Original Stitch Values not selected
As Digitized and Original Stitch Values selected
Tip For the recommended stitch and join methods, see Standard Alphabets. 5 6 Click OK to return to the Lettering tab. Click OK to close.
V9
Chapter 25
564
V9
565
Chapter 26
Special Lettering Features
Add special characters and symbols to your lettering. Create interesting distortions using lettering envelopes. Add attractive borders such as rectangles, ovals, and shields. Use the Team Names feature to create designs with multiple names. For example, use the same logo with different names for sports teams or corporate uniforms without having to create multiple copies of the same design. This section shows you how to add special characters and symbols. It describes how to create special effects with envelopes. It also covers adding borders to lettering, as well as setting up team lettering designs.
Adding special characters and symbols

In ES Designer, you can add special characters and symbols directly through the Select Symbols dialog or by means of the Windows Character Map.
Selecting symbols
Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to add special characters and symbols. Right-click to select lettering options. You can quickly add special characters and symbols to your lettering designs.
V9
566
Tip If you know the keyboard shortcut for a symbol, add it to your lettering by entering the combination on-screen or in the Lettering tab.
To select symbols
Click Insert Symbol
Click Insert Symbol. The Symbol Selection dialog opens.

Show characters Show pictures Show pictures and characters
Select alphabet or symbol set
Select symbols
3 4 5
Select an alphabet or symbol set from the Symbol Set list. Select the symbols you want to use. Click OK. The selected symbols are displayed in the text entry panel of the Lettering tab.
Click OK in the Object Properties - Lettering dialog.
V9
567
You are returned to the design window. Continue creating the lettering object in the normal way.
Using the Character Map

Use the Windows Character Map to provide quick access to common symbols and letters. The Character Map is usually installed as part of the Windows setup. See your Windows documentation for more details.
To use the Character Map

1 Open the Windows Character Map. By default, you will find it under Start > Programs > Accessories > Character Map.
2 3 4
Double-click a character, or select it and press Select. The character appears in the Characters to copy box. Click Copy to copy the character to the clipboard. Paste it into the text entry panel of the Lettering tab. To do this, press Ctrl + V. Tip You can also paste characters and symbols into an external graphics program to use as the basis for creating your own custom characters. See Digitizing custom characters for details.
V9
Chapter 26
568
Creating special effects with envelopes

Apply Envelope effects to lettering objects to make them bulge or arch, stretch or compress.
Bridge
Pennant
Perspective
Diamond
Distorting lettering objects

Use Envelope (Edit menu) to create special effects with envelopes. Four types of Envelope effect are available Bridge, Pennant, Perspective and Diamond. Tip Envelopes are typically applied to lettering objects, but they can also be applied to other types of embroidery object.
To distort lettering objects

1 Select the lettering object you want to distort. Tip To apply an envelope to several objects, group them first, then apply the envelope. See Grouping and ungrouping objects for details. 2 3 Select Edit > Envelope. Select an envelope type from among the following alternatives:
Bridge
Pennant
Perspective
Diamond
Different handles display around the object outline depending on the envelope type.
Bridge reshape handles
V9
569
Drag one or more handles up or down to distort the object.

Drag
! To move two handles in opposite directions, hold the Shift key down
while dragging a handle.
Shift + drag
! To move the handles in the same direction, hold down the Ctrl key
while dragging a handle.
Ctrl + drag
Press Enter to complete.
Editing lettering in envelopes

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to edit letters in envelopes on-screen. You can edit lettering in envelopes on-screen in the same way as normal lettering. When you click inside the lettering, a duplicate displays below the envelope.
To edit lettering in envelopes

1 Click the Lettering icon then click inside the lettering object. Duplicate letters appear below the selected shape in their original form. The cursor changes to an I-beam and appears after the last letter.
V9
Chapter 26
570
Edit the text as required.
Add letters at I-beam cursor
Press Enter to complete. The lettering in the envelope is updated.
Removing envelopes
Use Envelope > Delete (Edit menu) return an object to its original shape by removing the envelope. Return an object to its original shape by removing the envelope.
To remove envelopes
! Select the lettering object. ! Select Edit > Envelope > Delete.
The envelope is removed and the letters return to their original shape.
envelope removed
V9
571
Adding borders to lettering

You can create borders such as rectangles, ovals, and shields for lettering objects using the Crests symbol set. When you add a border, you may resize and center it to fit around the lettering objects.
To add borders to lettering

1 2 Right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens. Click Insert Symbol. The Symbol Selection dialog opens.
Select border
Click to use selected border
3 4
Select Crests from the Symbol Set. Select a border.
V9
Chapter 26
572
Tip When you click a symbol, a letter appears in the Selection field. This letter indicates the key combination required to type that border directly on-screen. For example, b means press the b key while B means press Shift + B. 5 Click Make Current. The selected border is displayed in the text entry panel of the Lettering tab. 6 Click OK and continue creating the lettering object in the normal way. Adjust the border, resize or center around the lettering object as required. See Team lettering for details.
Team lettering
The Team Names feature lets you create designs with multiple names. For example, you can use the same logo with different names for sports teams or corporate uniforms without having to create multiple copies of the same design. When you use Team Names, you create a variable lettering object, and associate names with it. Names are stored in lists that can be accessed from any design. You can add to these lists, or remove names at any time.
Depending on how you want to stitch out, you can choose to save and stitch the names and designs separately, or together.
Creating name groups

Use Team Names (Generate toolbar) to create name groups. Create a new name group to associate a list of names with Team Names objects. Once you create a group, the names in it are available to all designs.
V9
573
Note Team Names groups are stored in the Namedrop.emn file in your installations ...\res folder. If the file becomes corrupted, copy ESWin\bin\namedrop.emn to ESWin\res\namedrop.emn. This will restore Team Names groups to the default settings.
To create a name group

1 Click the Team Names icon. The Team Names dialog opens.
Add new group
Click Add in the Group panel. The Group Name dialog opens.
Enter group name
Enter a name for the group and click OK. The new group name appears in the Group list. The Group Members panel remains empty until you add names to it.
new group
Add members to the group as required:
! See Adding individual members to name groups for details. ! See Adding multiple members to name groups for details.
5 Click OK.
Adding individual members to name groups

Use Team Names (Generate toolbar) to add individual members to a group.
V9
Chapter 26
574
You can add members to a group one-by-one or as a entire group. See also Adding multiple members to name groups.
To add individual members to a name group

Select group
Add new member
2 3
Select a group from the Group list, or create a new one. See Creating name groups for details. Click Add in the Group Members panel. The Group Member Add dialog opens.
Add first name Add second name Add third name
4 5 6
Enter the first name of the member in the Name 1 field. Optionally, enter second and third names as required. Click OK.
V9
575
The name is added to the Group Members list.
name added
Adding multiple members to name groups

Use Team Names (Generate toolbar) to add multiple members to a group. You can add members to a group one-by-one or as a entire group. See also Adding individual members to name groups.
To add multiple members to a name group

Select group
Select Quick Names
2 3
Select a group from the Group list, or create a new one. See Creating name groups for details. Click Quick Names.
V9
Chapter 26
576
The Quick Names dialog opens.
Enter names
Enter the names in the format Name 1, Name 2, Name 3. You can type the names, or paste them in from a text file. Each name must be separated by a comma. Each complete name must be on a new line.
Click OK. The new names are added to the Group Members list.
names added
Add/edit/delete names
Tip Edit the list by using Add, Delete and Edit.
Creating team name designs

Use Team Names (Generate toolbar) to associate multiple names with a design. To associate multiple names with a design, you create a variable Team Names object. Names are stored together in groups. You can select names from an existing group or create a new one.
V9
577
To create a team name design

1 Open the design you want to use.
Click the Team Names icon. The Team Names dialog opens.
Select group
Add all or selected names
Select a group from the Group list. The names display in the Group Members list. See also Creating name groups and Adding multiple members to name groups.
Select names to associate with the design from the Group Members list.
! To select multiple names, hold down Ctrl as you select. ! To select a range of names, hold down Shift as you select.
5 Click Add to add them to the Team Members list. Alternatively, to associate all names in the group, click Add All.
V9
Chapter 26
578
Selected names are copied to the Team Members list. The Naming Order defaults to Name 1, Name 2, Name 3. Tip When you click Add, names are appended to the Team Members list. Clicking Add repeatedly means that a fresh copy of the selected name or names is appended each time. 6 In the Team Members list, edit members as required.
! To sort team member names alphabetically, select a column by

clicking the button at the top of the column. To select multiple columns, hold down Ctrl as you select.
! To change the stitching order, select a name and click Up or Down. ! To remove a name from the list, select it, and click Remove. To clear
all names from the Members Selected list, click Remove All. 7 Set Naming Order options as required e.g.
! To stitch only first and third names, select Name 1 and Name 3 in
columns one and two.
! To stitch names in reverse order, select Name 3, Name 2, and

Name 1 in columns one, two and three.
Set naming order options Sort names alphabetically
Remove all or selected names Adjust lettering format
To adjust lettering format settings, click Show Properties.
V9
579
The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens. The text entry panel is grayed out, indicating that you are entering lettering by a different method to normal.
text entry panel grayed out
Tip You have the opportunity to change lettering settings after the names are stitched, but it is quicker to set them at this stage. If the design already contains Team Member objects, Show Properties is disabled. 9 Adjust lettering settings as required. See Creating lettering with the Lettering dialog for details. 10 Click OK. Depending on your baseline selection, you may be prompted to enter reference points. See Applying lettering baselines for details. ES Designer generates stitches for all names in the Team Members list. The associated Team List dialog opens automatically, the first Team Member name in the list is selected and is visible in the design window.
Select names to view on-screen
11 Select names one-by-one from the Team List to view them together with the design.
V9
Chapter 26
580
Viewing and editing individual team names

Use Team List (Standard toolbar) to view and edit individual team names. You can preview individual team names in the design window as they will be stitched out with the design. Set individual properties for each name.
To view and edit team names

1 2 Open the Team Names design you want to use. See also Creating team name designs. Click the Team List icon. The Team List dialog opens. By default all member names are selected.
Click to select column
Select name to view on-screen
Click to sort selected names alphabetically
View properties of selected names
Tip By default a space is inserted between Name 1 and Name 2. To remove this space, set the Word Spacing value in the Layout dialog to 0%. See Adjusting letter spacing for details. 3 View team names in any of the following ways:
! Select a team member name. The selected name displays on-screen

with the current lettering properties.
! Use the arrows keys to scroll up and down the list to view each name
in turn.
! To sort team member names alphabetically, click the tab at the top
of a column to select the column, then click the Sort button.
V9
581
To view and/or edit a selected team members object properties, click Show Properties. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens.
Edit text for individual names
Adjust settings for individual names
Adjust lettering settings as required, then click OK. See Creating lettering with the Lettering dialog for details. 5 Edit a selected name on-screen as you would any other lettering object. Team Names lets you do this without having to save the name as separate design. Most important is the ability to manually adjust lettering kerning. See Adjusting Lettering Layout for details. 6 Adjust the lettering baseline as you would any other lettering object. Most important is the ability to select an Auto Frame style for fixed line baselines. See Adjusting baselines for details. 7 8 To copy the object properties of one selected team member to all team members, click Apply to All. To add members to the list, click Add. The Team Names dialog opens. You can add further names to the list from the current Team Names group or any other group. See Creating team name designs for details. 9 To delete members from the list, click Delete.
V9
Chapter 26
582
10 Click X in the top corner of the dialog to close.
All Team Member names visible and selected
Note When the Team List dialog is closed, all Team Member names become visible and selected in the design window.
Editing team names by column

Use Team List (Standard toolbar) to view and edit individual team names. You can easily set properties, such as size or color for an entire column of names. For example, make the given name a different color, format or size.
To edit team names by column

1 2 Open the Team Names design you want to use. See also Creating team name designs. Click the Team List icon.
V9
583
The Team List dialog opens. By default all member names are selected.
Click to select column
Click to sort selected names alphabetically
3 4
Click the tab at the top of a column to select a column. Click the Lettering Box icon. The Lettering Box dialog opens.
Change lettering settings
5 6
Change lettering settings as required. Press Enter.
Creating individual designs with team names

Use Team List (Standard toolbar) to view and edit individual team names.
V9
Chapter 26
584
You can create individual designs from each name in a Team Names design. The name will still be included in the original.
To create individual designs with team names

1 2 Open the Team Names design you want to use. See also Creating team name designs. Click the Team List icon. The Team List dialog opens. By default all member names are selected.
Select names to use
Click to create individual designs
Select names you want to use.
! To select multiple names, hold down Ctrl as you select. ! To select a range of names, hold down Shift as you select. ! To select all names in the list, click Select All.
4 To create individual embroidery designs for each selected team member, click Create Design(s). A new design is created for each selected name. The name is now a normal lettering object. 5 6 Click the Save icon to open the Save As dialog. Enter a new name for the design and click Save.
V9
585
Outputting team name designs

When you output a Team Names design, you need to define how it is to be generated as a stitch file. You can generate files that include:
! both the design and the names ! design in one file and names in another, or ! design and names in individual files.
You set these options whenever you save the file in stitch format or output it to machine.
To output team name designs

1 2 3 Create a Team Names design. Select File > Save As and select a stitch format from the Save As Type list. Click Options. The Save Options > Team Names dialog opens. Note Options is also available when you output designs. See also Stitching designs with Stitch Manager.
Select a Save option:
! Design and Team Names with stops: creates a single stitch file
including one copy of the design and all names. Stops are inserted after the design, and between the names i.e. Design Stop TeamMember1 Stop TeamMember2 Stop, etc.
V9
Chapter 26
586
! Repeated Design and Team Names with stops: creates a single

stitch file with multiple copies of the design, and all names. Stops are inserted after each static design/name combination e.g. Design + TeamMember1 Stop Design + TeamMember2 Stop.
! Create multiple output files: creates separate files for each name,
each of which includes a copy of the static part of the design. When stitching to ES Machine Manager, each file is queued separately.
! Design part only: creates a file containing only the static part of the
design.
! Team Names only with stops: creates a single file containing only
the names, separated by stops. This means that after each machine stop, you can change frames. If you have selected Team Names only with stops, you have a further two options:
! Select Follow Auto Start/End Menu to set the start/end point for
each name. As with any design, the needle should return to a known position before a frame change. This ensures that the next name is stitched in the correct position. See Setting automatic start and end points for details.
! Select Based on justification to set the start/end point for each

name according to its lettering justification, as follows: Justification Align Left Center Align Right Justify 5 6 Auto Start / End Point Bottom Left Bottom Middle Bottom Right Bottom Left
Click OK to return to the Save As dialog. Click Save.
V9
587
Chapter 27
Custom Alphabets
Turn any TrueType font installed on your system into an embroidery alphabet. You can even create your own custom alphabets. Alternatively, modify an existing alphabet for special applications. Merge letters from two or more alphabets with the stand-alone alphabet merging utility.
This section describes how to create new alphabets from TrueType fonts. It also describes how to create and modify your own custom alphabets and letters. Alphabet merging is also explained.
Converting TrueType fonts to embroidery fonts

The Convert TrueType Font feature lets you convert any TrueType font installed on your system to an embroidery alphabet. You can do this on the fly or convert entire fonts for later use. This is an important feature for Asian alphabets which may contain several thousands of characters.
The process is fully automatic. Lettering shapes are cut into Input A or Input B embroidery objects. Overlaps and stroke order are detected and
V9
588
stitch angles defined. The result is similar to manually digitized alphabets although the quality may not be quite as high. The quality greatly depends on the original shapes, narrower serif type alphabets producing better results than blocked alphabets.
Converting individual TrueType letters

Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to add TrueType lettering directly on-screen. Right-click to set the formatting values for new or selected lettering objects. You can convert individual TrueType letters on the fly and add them directly to a design through the Lettering tab of the Object Properties - Lettering dialog.
To convert individual TrueType letters

Enter letters
Select a TT font
Select Values
2 3
Select a TrueType font from the Alphabet list. Enter the text you want to embroider in the text entry panel. Alternatively, type it directly on-screen after adjusting the conversion settings. Note The more letters you enter, the more time needed to convert them.
Click Conversion Values.
V9
589
The Conversion Values dialog opens.
Select lettering style Select Turning Strokes for variable stitch angle
Select Complex Fill for fixed stitch angle
Tip Click Suggest Values if you are not sure which options to select. Values are automatically set according to the selected alphabet. 5 6 Select the lettering style you want to create from the Styles list Regular, Bold, Bold Italic or Italic. If you want the stitching to follow the contours of the letters, select Turning Strokes. Otherwise select Complex Fill. The Turning Strokes option has preset values adjusted for the particular alphabet style. The Complex Fill option lets you adjust the stitch angle.
Turning Strokes
Complex Fill stitch angle 0
Complex Fill stitch angle 30
Select the Match Ends checkbox to keep stitch angles parallel to the end of the stroke.
V9
Chapter 27
Custom Alphabets
590
Note This option will override any corner detection and corner fraction where parallel stitching applies.
Match Ends OFF
Match Ends ON stitches parallel to baseline
Tip Stitch angles in strokes should normally be perpendicular to the stroke, but the exceptions are letters like K, X, Y with short slanted strokes. In these cases it is better to keep the stitch angle parallel to the end of the stroke. 8 Select the Break Angle checkbox to apply a cap to sharp angles. This effect is similar to Smart Corners if the stroke bends sharply, like the letter A, it will be split or capped.
Break Angle OFF no split
Break Angle 87
Select the Create Overlaps checkbox to prevent gaps forming between segments. You can fine-tune the overlaps by setting values in the T junctions and O junctions fields.
Create Overlaps OFF
Create Overlaps ON
V9
591
10 Select the Separate Serifs checkbox if you are converting a serif font.
Separate Serifs OFF
Separate Serifs ON
Tip As the serifs are made into separate strokes, this option is better used with larger lettering where serifs are greater than 0.8 mm in breadth. 11 Fine-tune processing of corners with these settings:
! Corner Detection Angle specifies the angle which will identify a

corner in the letter. This is more important for getting well-defined small letters. Note, however, that ES Designer automatically inserts stitch angles where needed in order to obtain smooth turning stitches. These generally occur at locations where the shape changes significantly in direction or width.
! Corner Fraction specifies fractional spacing at corners. It is used to

create smooth transitions of stitch angle at corners, shape ends, or where a shape changes in width or curvature significantly.
Corner Detection Angle 150 Corner Fraction 0.6 mm
Corner Detection Angle 30 Corner Fraction 1.0 mm
12 Click OK to return to the Object Properties - Lettering dialog. 13 Click OK to close. 14 Click the entry point.
! If you have already entered text in the Lettering dialog, lettering

outlines are created directly.
! If not, type the letters on-screen and press Enter to create the
lettering outlines. 15 Select Stitch > Generate Stitches or press G.
V9
Chapter 27
Custom Alphabets
592
Converting complete TrueType alphabets

Use Convert TrueType Font (Special menu) to convert a TrueType font into an embroidery alphabet. The Convert TrueType Font feature lets you convert any suitable TrueType font installed on your system into an embroidery alphabet. Converted letters can be filled with parallel or turning stitches.
Arial with Regular font style
Arial with Bold font style
Arial with Italic font style
Note The conversion usually only takes a few minutes, although Asian fonts may take longer.
To convert complete TrueType alphabets

1 Select Special > Alphabet > Convert TrueType Font. The Convert TrueType Font dialog opens.
Select font Select font style
Set values
Enter font name
Choose standard or extended character set
V9
593
Select the font to be converted and font style.
Arial Regular
Arial Bold
Arial Italic
Click Conversion Values. The Conversion Values dialog opens. See Converting individual TrueType letters for details. Tip Click Suggest Values if you are not sure which options to select. Values are automatically set according to the selected alphabet.
4 5
Enter a Font Name if you want to override the default. Choose whether to convert standard or extended character sets. The standard character set contains alphanumeric characters only. It excludes punctuation marks and other special characters.
Click OK. When the font has been converted, the Convert TrueType Font dialog confirms.
7 8
Click OK. To check that the alphabet has been created, right-click the Lettering icon to open the Lettering dialog. The newly converted TrueType font will be selected by default. You can now use it in the same way as other embroidery alphabets.
Converting between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes

Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to convert between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes.
V9
Chapter 27
Custom Alphabets
594
When you convert TrueType fonts to embroidery lettering, the letters can be filled with parallel or turning stitches. You can convert between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes at any stage.
To convert between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes

1 2 Digitize a lettering object using Convert TrueType Font. See To convert individual TrueType letters for details. Select a lettering object.
Complex Fill with stitch angle of 0
Right-click the Lettering icon. The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens.
TrueType font appears in Alphabet list
Select Conversion Values
Click Conversion Values. The Conversion Values dialog opens.

Choose between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes conversion method
V9
595
Specify whether the letters will be converted as Turning Strokes or Complex Fill.
! If Turning Strokes is selected, select the required options. ! If Complex Fill is selected, enter the stitch angle.
See To convert individual TrueType letters for details. 6 7 Click OK to return to the Object Properties - Lettering dialog. Click OK to close. The lettering object fill method will change as required.
letters converted to Turning Strokes
Creating custom alphabets

You digitize letters for a custom alphabet just like other embroidery objects. Custom letters can be made up of multiple objects, and may be letters, numbers, symbols or pictures. You can use artwork from sources such as calligraphy books to create alphabet characters. Note You can also create new alphabets by converting TrueType fonts. See also Converting TrueType fonts to embroidery fonts.
Choosing artwork to create custom alphabets

You can use artwork to create alphabet characters in the same way you do other objects. Before digitizing, however, establish whether the letter shapes are suitable for embroidery, and determine reference height and baseline for the alphabet. Warning Because of copyright laws, you cannot simply select letters from an existing embroidery alphabet and save them directly to another alphabet.
V9
Chapter 27
Custom Alphabets
596
Letter shapes
For best results, letter columns should be of similar width, without tight curves or sharp corners, or very fine, very wide, or curved serifs.
differences in column width too great
serifs too long and fine
corners too sharp
Reference height and baseline

Reference height is the maximum height of capital letters. Although there may be subtle differences between upper and lower case letters, it is a useful guide for digitizing. See also Saving custom alphabets. Tip Place letters along a standard baseline to help digitize at a standard height. Draw in the baseline if you are digitizing from artwork, or use a grid line as your guide. Descenders in letters such as y or g generally fall below the baseline.
letter height baseline
Tip Use E or H as reference letters to determine the height and baseline for the alphabet. These letters work well because they sit on the baseline and do not extend above the standard cap-height.
V9
597
Letter spacing and width

Letter width varies with the letter shape and spacing. When you digitize letters, you enter two reference points to mark the width, and a third to mark the height.
letter width
letter width
spacing increased
Default spacing affects kerning or spacing across all letters. Additional width can be added as spacing around individual letters. Tip For italic styles, you may need some overlap between letter extents.
Digitizing custom characters

You can digitize letters from backdrop images, convert drawing objects, or digitize freehand using any of the input method tools. You can also copy characters and symbols from the Windows Character Map into an external graphics program. Here you can modify them as you like, save them to a graphics file, and use it as a design backdrop. See also Using the Character Map. Letter stitching sequence is based on the alphabet join type you select when saving it. If you save using the Closest Join or Bottom Join methods, ES Designer applies automatic branching to the letters. In this case, you dont need to worry about the direction individual letter strokes will stitch in. When branching is applied, ES Designer determines where each stroke starts and ends, adding travel runs as necessary. However, it is good discipline to digitize the strokes in the direction they are most likely to be stitched in. It is also important to specify the stroke order as this is maintained when sequencing is calculated. See also Saving custom alphabets. If you want to specify the stitching sequence and connectors yourself, digitize the letter in sequence and manually digitize the connecting stitching. You then need to select As Digitized as the alphabet join method. See also Changing lettering join method.
V9
Chapter 27
Custom Alphabets
598
To digitize custom characters

1 Select an input method. If you are digitizing the sequence and connectors manually, use any input method. If you want the letter to be automatically resequenced with Closest Join or Bottom Join, use Input A, Input B, Input C and Complex Fill objects. 2 Select the stitch type. Tip Most letters use Satin or Tatami. 3 Digitize each section of the letter.
! Where one stroke butts up against the side or end of another, create
an underlap to bind the two strokes together. Underlaps should be about a third of the stroke width or less, but may be half for thin strokes.
underlaps
! Try to avoid having more than two strokes on top of each other as
this causes thread buildup and can lead to thread breaks. Sometimes modifying the shape can improve it.
! Sometimes it is helpful to angle the ends of underlaps so that a few

stitches are caught by the overlapping stroke. This prevents a gap appearing if the stitches of the top stroke pull back.
overlap / underlap
V9
599
! Where a stroke crosses another stroke, such as in the letter t, one

stroke is commonly broken into two parts. For thin objects, you may digitize the above stroke in one piece, crossing over or under the other.
Adjust outlines using the Reshape Object tool if necessary. When the letter is the correct shape, save it as a custom character. See also Saving custom characters.
Saving custom characters

Use Alphabet > Make Letter (Special menu) to create a new character. When you create a new character, you need to select an alphabet for it, give it a name, specify its height, and indicate whether to preserve any machine functions. You also need to indicate its spacing settings by digitizing reference points on-screen. Warning Do not use the tilde (~) symbol when naming letters. This is a special character for entering letters with multiple-character names. See Selecting custom alphabets for details.
To save custom characters

1 Digitize the objects that make up the new letter, and select them. See Digitizing custom characters for details.
Select whole character
Select Special > Alphabet > Make Letter.
V9
Chapter 27
Custom Alphabets
600
The Make Letter dialog opens.
Select alphabet Enter character name Enter reference height Select to set height on-screen Deselect to include functions
3 4
Select an alphabet from the Alphabet Name list. See also Saving custom alphabets. Enter a name for the character or symbol in the Letter field. For example, if you digitized the letter H, enter H in the Letter field. Tip You can create names of multiple characters to identify symbols or accented letters, for example Star for a star symbol, or e-acute for . See also Selecting custom alphabets.
In the Reference Height field, enter a character height. The letter is recorded at this height regardless of its original size. You can also set height on-screen by selecting the Digitize Reference Height checkbox. When you return to the design window, you are prompted to digitize the height. If you select Digitize Reference Height, the value in the Reference Height field is ignored. Tip Letters are generally 20 to 40 mm in height. See also Standard Alphabets.
Deselect Remove Functions only if you want to preserve any machine functions deliberately inserted into the letter. The letter may, for example, include deliberate color changes or other machine functions. Deselect Remove Functions for alphabets that use As Digitized as the join type. See also Changing lettering join method.
7 8
Click OK. Follow any instructions in the Prompt Line. Mark two reference points to set letter spacing. Standard spacing means that the distance between reference points is the character width. You can increase this as required.
If you selected Digitize Reference Height in the Make Letter dialog, you are prompted to digitize a third reference point to mark letter height.
V9
601
10 Click OK. A message confirms that the character has been created.
Saving custom alphabets

Use custom alphabets to store any letters you create. To make a new alphabet, you name it and set the default spacing and join type for adjacent letters. You also specify the file type.
To save custom alphabets

1 Digitize the objects that make up the new letter, and select them. See Digitizing custom characters for details.
Select whole character
Select Special > Alphabet > Make Letter. The Make Letter dialog opens.
Click to create new alphabet
Click New. The New Alphabet dialog opens.
Enter alphabet name Enter default spacing Select join method
4 5
Enter a name for the alphabet in the Alphabet Name field. Enter the default spacing in the Default Letter Spacing field.
V9
Chapter 27
Custom Alphabets
602
Tip Use 8-10% for standard alphabets such as block and serif styles and 0% for script-style alphabets. 6 Select a default method of joining adjacent letters from the Default Join Type list.
! As Digitized: preserves the original stitching sequence of each

letter as it was digitized, as well as any stitch types and machine functions used in its creation.
! Closest Join: resequences entry and exit points in adjacent letters

to join them at the closest point.
! Bottom Join: resequences entry and exit points in adjacent letters

to create a connector along the lettering baseline. See also Changing lettering join method. 7 8 9 Click OK. Enter additional values for the selected letter in the Make Letter dialog. See Saving custom characters for details. Click OK.
Selecting custom alphabets

Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to select a custom alphabet. To use a custom alphabet, select it like any other alphabet. If a letter has a multi-character name, you can only access it from the Lettering dialog using the special Tilde (~) symbol.
To select custom alphabets

1 Right-click the Lettering icon.
V9
603
The Object Properties - Lettering dialog opens.

Select custom alphabet
2 3
Select a custom alphabet from the Alphabet list. Enter the names of the letters you want to use in the text box.
! If the name was a single letter for example A type that letter. ! If the name was more than one letter for example Star type a
tilde (~), type the letter name, then type two tildes. For example ~Star~~. Tip You can combine characters that use single or multiple letters in their name, for example ~Star~~ABC~Star~~. 4 5 6 Set the formatting values as you would for other lettering objects. See Formatting lettering for details. Click OK. Add the lettering to your design. See Adding lettering to embroidery designs for details.
Modifying custom alphabets

You can modify custom alphabets by changing names, default letter spacings and join types. If an alphabet is no longer required you can delete it. You can also rename, delete or reshape letters within custom alphabets.
Modifying alphabets
Use Alphabet > Modify Alphabet (Special menu) to modify custom alphabets. Modify custom alphabets by changing names, default letter spacings and join types. If an alphabet is no longer required, delete it.
To modify alphabets
1 Select Special > Alphabet > Modify Alphabet.
V9
Chapter 27
Custom Alphabets
604
The Modify Alphabet dialog opens.
Select alphabet
Click to rename alphabet
Select an alphabet from the Alphabet > Name list.
! To rename the alphabet, click Rename. Enter a new name in the

Rename Alphabet dialog and click OK.
Enter new name
! To delete an alphabet, click Delete. A message prompts you for

confirmation.
! To change default letter spacing, enter a new value in the Default

Letter Spacing field. See also Adjusting letter, word and line spacings.
! To change the default join type, select a new one from the Default
Join Type list. See also Adjusting stitching sequence and join method. 3 Click OK.
Renaming and deleting custom letters

Use Modify Alphabet (Special menu) to rename, delete or reshape letters within custom alphabets. Rename, delete or reshape letters within custom alphabets.
To rename or delete custom letters

1 Select Special > Alphabet > Modify Alphabet.
V9
605
The Modify Alphabet dialog opens.
Select alphabet
Select letter
2 3
Select an alphabet from the Alphabet > Name list. Select a letter from the Letter > Name list.
! To delete a letter, click Delete. A message prompts you for

confirmation.
! To rename a letter, click Rename. Enter a new name in the Rename

Letter dialog and click OK.
Enter new name
Tip You can use names with more than one character. 4 Click OK.
Reshaping custom letters

Use Ungroup (Standard toolbar) to ungroup a letter into its component objects. Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape custom letters. Use Alphabet > Make Letter (Special menu) to create a new letter.
V9
Chapter 27
Custom Alphabets
606
To change the shape of letters in custom alphabets, ungroup them and change their outlines and stitch angles using the Reshape Object tool.
Warning When you ungroup, the letter is converted back to objects, and letter details such as alphabet and baseline are lost. When you have finished reshaping, you have to enter these details again.
To reshape custom letters

1 2 Select a letter. Select Arrange > Ungroup. The letter is ungrouped into its component objects.
ungrouped into component objects
Click the Reshape Object icon and reshape the objects as required.
Reshape objects
4 5
When you have finished reshaping, select the objects. Select Special > Alphabet > Make Letter.
V9
607
The Make Letter dialog opens.

Select alphabet Select letter name
6 7
Select the alphabet to which the letter belongs from the Alphabet Name list. Select the letter name from the Name list. Note To save the letter under a different name, enter a new name.
8 9
Click OK. Confirm you want to replace the old character with the new.
Merging alphabets
You can merge letters from two or more alphabets with the stand-alone alphabet merging utility. Files to be merged must be placed in the ES Designer userletw folder of your installation.
To merge alphabets
1 2 Select Start > Programs > MS-DOS Prompt. When the DOS prompt appears, change to the bin directory of your ES Designer installation. This is usually C:/ESWin/bin. 3 Choose whether to automatically overwrite or receive prompt.
! To automatically overwrite the letters in the first file with letters of

the same name from the other file(s), type: alphcat.exe file1.ESA file2.ESA file3.ESA.
! To receive a prompt message before a letter is overwritten, type:

alphcat.exe file1.ESA file2.ESA file3.ESA /Y. Press Y or N to confirm whether to overwrite. 4 Click Yes to merge.
V9
Chapter 27
Custom Alphabets
608
PART VII
DESIGN PROCESSING & ENCODING

Design processing and encoding involve all the less glamorous, back-end operations of embroidery design and manufacture. This is where you actually output your designs to machine, disk, printer, cutter, and so on. For this, you will need an understanding of embroidery file types as well as different machine formats. Depending on your setup, you will also need an understanding of traditional storage media including embroidery disks and paper tapes.
Processing design files

This section describes how to select conversion options for opening and saving different stitch and outline design formats. It also provides details about the processing of Melco CND outline files, including color merging, as well as reassigning colors to both stitch and Melco CND files. See Processing Design Files for details.
Changing machine formats

This section describes how to select a machine format for a design, output it using other formats, and customize machine formats to meet your machines specific requirements. See Changing Machine Formats for details.
V9
609
Outputting designs
This section describes how to create production worksheets. It explains how to send designs as email attachments, as well as how to output designs as drawings and images. Cutting appliqu shapes is also covered, as well as stitching designs with Stitch Manager. See Outputting Designs for details.
Embroidery disks and paper tapes

This section describes how to read from and write embroidery design files to embroidery disk and paper tape. See Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes for details.
V9
610
Chapter 28
Processing Design Files
By default ES Designer saves to its native file format, EMB. This format contains all information necessary both for stitching a design and for later modification. When opening designs created or saved in other formats, ES Designer converts the design internally to EMB format. You can then modify it using the full range of ES Designer features. Depending on the file type, you may need to provide additional information to assist ES Designer in the conversion process. This section describes how to select conversion options for opening and saving different stitch and outline design formats. It also provides details about the processing of Melco CND outline files, including color merging, as well as reassigning colors to both stitch and Melco CND files.
Embroidery design formats

Embroidery designs are saved in one of two formats outline format or stitch format. Note For details of specific formats supported by ES Designer, see Supported embroidery file formats. See also Comparison of outline and stitch format information.
Outline files
Outline or condensed files are high-level formats which contain object outlines, object properties and stitch data. When you open an outline file in
V9
611
ES Designer, corresponding stitch types, input methods and effects are applied.
Complex Fill object
Outline files can be scaled, transformed and reshaped without affecting stitch density or quality. After modification, you can choose to save your design to EMB format, or to a different format altogether. Note Some outline files, such as Wilcom INP, Gunold PCH, contain incomplete information. Old format ESD designs are somewhere between an outline and a stitch file. They contain stitch data, information about selected stitch types, densities, and machine functions. They do not, however, contain information about shapes and lines. ESD files require object/outline recognition if you want to perform object editing in ES Designer. See Opening stitch files in ES Designer for details.
Stitch files
Different embroidery machines understand different languages. Each has its own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can stitch a design, it must be in a format which can be interpreted by the machine. Stitch or expanded designs are low-level formats for direct use by embroidery machines. They contain only stitch coordinates and machine functions. They are generally created on the fly when sending designs to machine. They can also be output to embroidery disk or paper tape. See also Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes. When they are read into ES Designer, stitch files do not contain object information such as outlines or stitch types, but present the design as a collection of stitch blocks called Manual objects. Manual objects are created wherever machine functions e.g. color changes or trims are detected
V9
Chapter 28
612
in the design. They have only General and Connector properties. Manual objects, in turn, consist of individual stitches, called Manual stitches.
Manual object
Stitch designs are generally not suited to modification because stitches are not regenerated. However, ES Designer patented Stitch Processor technology can interpret object outlines, stitch types and spacing from stitch data with some success. In this way, you can re-constitute old tape format files and other stitch file format designs for modification in ES Designer. These recognized designs can be scaled with stitches recalculated for the new outlines. Processing is effective for most stitch designs but cannot produce the same level of quality as original outlines and may not handle some fancy stitches. By default, stitch files are converted to outlines and objects upon opening but you can also choose to open them without recognition. Designs opened in this way can be output for stitching in another format. Or you can edit stitches and add new elements. For such purposes, you do not need to retrieve information about how the design was created. You can scale stitch format designs which have been opened without object/outline recognition. However, because the stitch count does not change, the density increases or decreases with the design size. Thus you
V9
613
should not scale stitch designs by more than 5% or some areas may be too thickly or too thinly covered.
original stitch design scaled stitch design opened without object/outline recognition
Alternatively, you can process the whole or selected parts of a design after editing. You can even split larger Manual objects into smaller objects, and process them individually. Note With or without object/outline recognition, stitch files can be saved in EMB format once they are opened in ES Designer.
File sources
While embroidery files are broadly classified as outline (condensed) or stitch (expanded), ES Designer internally tags files as belonging to one of four types Native Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or Imported Stitches. File source Native Design Imported Outlines Description Designs created in ES Designer (or equivalent). Designs read from non-EMB outline CND or PCH where stitches have been generated in ES Designer (or equivalent) from original outlines and stitching data. Designs read from stitch files where stitches have been regenerated by processing.
Processed Stitches
V9
Chapter 28
614
File source Imported Stitches
Description Designs read from stitch files, where outlines may or may not have been recognized, but stitches have not been regenerated through stitch processing. Note, however, that if you change a stitch design e.g. add a lettering object the status changes to Processed Stitches even though the imported stitches may not have been regenerated.
For information about the source of a design file, refer to the Design Properties dialog. See Viewing design information in ES Designer for details.
Opening stitch files in ES Designer

If you want to scale a design, edit an outline or change a stitch type, then the design or selected elements must be converted into objects using Stitch Processor. By default, stitch files are converted to outlines and objects upon opening. If you do not want to scale the design by more than 5%, or only want to make minor stitch edits, or output in another format, you can choose to open the stitch file without object/outline recognition. The design is then presented as a collection of Manual objects. If you only want to convert selected parts of a design, you can open the file without object/outline recognition and process only the required stitch blocks. Tip To ensure object outlines, stitch types, stitch density and colors are correct, it is always a good idea to check and edit designs after conversion. To improve the quality of a stitch file, it is often better to edit stitches before conversion.
Object/outline recognition
When you convert a stitch file to outline format, ES Designer reads stitch data stitch-by-stitch according to the needle penetration points. It recognizes stitch types, spacing and length values, stitch effects, and can determine object outlines. All filled areas in a design become Input A or Run objects with fill or outline stitch properties as well as general and connector properties. Stitch types are assigned as Satin, Tatami, or Program Split depending on the pattern of
V9
615
needle penetrations. With Tatami, ES Designer recognizes stitch spacing and length, and applies a random factor. If a design is converted from ESD format, Zigzag and Triple Run objects are also recognized. If an object is not recognized, it becomes (or remains) a Manual object with general and connector properties only. As such, it will not scale well. Recognized object outlines and stitch values are stored as object properties in ES Designer. This means you can scale and transform recognized designs in the usual way. You can also change the stitch density of the whole or selected parts of a design, and/or of certain stitch types. Tip ES Designer Stitch Processor is intended primarily to enable the re-use of stitch format designs, but it also provides a convenient method for changing the object properties of EMB designs. You can change stitch density as a percentage without having to select objects individually. See Adjusting stitch density for details.
Recognition limitations
ES Designer cannot recognize the backstitch type for Tatami fills. Before scaling a design, select the correct backstitch in the Object Properties dialog. If a stitch type is not recognized accurately, the values in the Object Properties dialog will not match the stitches. The stitches will remain the same as in the original design, until you make changes and regenerate them. If you change the design, stitches will be regenerated according to the object properties. Tip Designs converted from tape format files and expanded designs which have non-standard stitch types may require editing in ES Designer to ensure that the object outlines, stitch types, stitch density and colors are correct.
Opening stitch files with object/outline recognition

When you open stitch files with object/outline recognition, you can set decoding options to determine how to convert the design. Options vary with the type of stitch file you select. Note Decoding options should reflect how the design was originally digitized, not how you want it now. Experiment with the settings to get the best results.
V9
Chapter 28
616
To open stitch files with object/outline recognition

1 Open the file from your hard disk, or read it from tape or embroidery disk. The Open dialog opens.
Select format
2 3
Select a stitch format from the Files of Type list and select the file to open. Click Options. The Decoding Options dialog opens.
Select Objects/Outlines
Select the Objects/Outlines checkbox. Note Depending on the file type selected, different options are available.
V9
617
5 6
Select a different machine format from the Machine Type list as required. Enter the number of jumps to recognize as trims. When ES Designer encounters this number of consecutive jumps, it will convert them to a trim function. Warning If this value is different from the original design, trim functions will be not be inserted correctly.
Use the Stop Code as panel to select the output type for stop codes as required.
! Color Change: Stop codes are interpreted as Next Color

commands. The next color is selected from the default color palette.
! Stops: Stop codes are interpreted as Explicit Stops. The machine

stops stitching.
! Custom: Lets you map thread colors to every stop code in the file.
This means you can color code stitch file designs which do not contain needle addressing information, before opening the file. See Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files for details. 8 Check the status of your embroidery machine as required, then select the correct setting Speed1 or Speed2 from the list (if available). On some Barudan machines there is a speed switch. Depending on its position, fast is assigned as either Speed1 or Speed2. For example, if you select Speed1, each fast speed function will be translated into a Speed1 command. 9 Click Advanced to set advanced recognition options. See Adjusting advanced recognition settings for details. 10 Click OK. 11 Click Open.
V9
Chapter 28
618
The selected design is processed and converted to Input A or Run objects with fill or outline stitch properties as well as general and connector properties. If an object is not recognized, it becomes a Manual object with general and connector properties only.
Manual object Input A object
Note Stitch Processor adds the missing information to the file, but does not change the stitches. See also Adjusting stitch density.
Opening stitch files without object/outline recognition

By opening a stitch file without object/outline recognition, you can output the design without change, edit individual stitches, and perform minor scaling and transforming actions without losing the original stitch information. Alternatively, you can process the whole or selected parts of a design after editing. See also Recognizing object/outlines after editing.
To open stitch files without object/outline recognition

1 Open the file from your hard disk, or read it from tape or embroidery disk. The Open dialog opens. 2 3 Select a stitch format from the Files of Type list and select the file to open. Click Options.
V9
619
The Decoding Options dialog opens.
Deselect Objects/Outlines
4 5
Deselect the Objects/Outlines checkbox. Set other decoding options as required. Depending on the file type selected, different options are available. See Opening stitch files with object/outline recognition for details.
6 7
Click OK. Click Open. The design opens as a collection of Manual objects with only general and connector properties.
Manual object
Tip At this point, you can edit the stitches so that the Stitch Processor can recognize the stitch types and object outlines more accurately:
! Eliminate Stitch Shortening and Jagged Edge effects for smooth,

accurate outlines.
V9
Chapter 28
620
! Remove small stitches from the design. ! The exit point of a column may be on the same side as the entry
point. You may need to add an extra stitch at the end so that the Stitch Processor can recognize the outline accurately. See Editing Stitches and Machine Functions for details.
Recognizing object/outlines after editing

Use Process (Generate toolbar) to adjust stitch density of the whole or selected parts of a design. You can process a stitch file, or selected parts of it, to recognize objects and outlines, or adjust its size and stitch density. Processing a stitch file is similar to converting it to an outline file when opening except that you can process only selected objects or stitches. You can also split larger Manual objects into smaller objects, and process them individually. See also Splitting objects and Converting selected stitches to objects. Tip You can also use the Process feature to change stitch count and density for the whole design, or for objects of a particular stitch type only. See Adjusting stitch density for details.
To recognize object/outlines after editing

1 2 3 Open a stitch file without object/outline recognition. See Opening stitch files without object/outline recognition for details. Edit parts of the design as required. See Editing Stitches and Machine Functions for details. Select the part of the design you want to process.
V9
621
You can select the whole design or individual Manual objects.
Manual object
Click the Process icon. The Process dialog opens.
Enter target stitch count Adjust advanced recognition settings
Adjust stitch densities
5 6
In the Stitch Values panel, enter the number of Target Stitches as either a percentage or absolute value (in millimeters). Adjust the density for each stitch type as required. You can change the density for selected objects and/or for specific stitch types only. See also Adjusting stitch density of certain stitch types. Note If a design contains objects created with other stitch types, the target stitch count will not be achieved as these objects will not change.
7 8
Click Recognition to set advanced recognition options as required. See Adjusting advanced recognition settings for details. Click OK.
V9
Chapter 28
622
The selected objects are processed and converted to Input A or Run objects with fill or outline stitch properties as well as general and connector properties. If an object is not recognized, it remains a Manual object with general and connector properties only. In this case, the target stitch count may not be reached.
manual object converted to Input A and Run objects, or left as Manual
Note Stitch Processor adds the missing information to the file, but does not change the stitches. See also Adjusting stitch density.
Adjusting advanced recognition settings

You can fine-tune how ES Designer converts stitch files using the advanced recognition settings. By default, ES Designer converts stitches as Tatami, Satin, or Run stitches according to the settings in the Recognition Advanced Options dialog. You can change these values, or choose not to convert a certain stitch type at all. Generally, the default settings provide the best results for the most frequently used fill styles Tatami and Satin their properties stitch length and spacing and edge effects, such as stitch shortening. Default settings, however, cannot always guarantee the best results as the variety of embroidery designs is virtually unlimited.
original design opened without stitch recognition opened with stitch recognition pattern splits recognized as Tatami
V9
623
Tip When using the advanced object/outline recognition options, select only those options you want to be recognized. This will minimize the time taken to process the design and ensure stitches are preserved.
To adjust advanced recognition settings

1 2 Access the Decoding Options dialog. See Opening stitch files with object/outline recognition for details. Click Advanced. The Recognition - Advanced Options dialog opens.
Select to recognize Tatami stitches Select to recognize random needle penetrations Select to recognize Satin stitches
Select to recognize Jagged Edges Select to recognize Splits
Select to recognize Run stitches
Set Space and Stitch Length Rounding
Select Segments Resolution and Merging Factors
In the Tatami panel, set conversion options for Tatami.
! In the Stitch Spacing fields, enter the range of acceptable stitch

spacing for Tatami fills. If the row spacing falls out side this range it will not be converted to Tatami.
! To allow random needle penetrations, select the Random Factor

checkbox. Deselect the Recognize Splits checkbox to detect Random Factor more accurately.
V9
Chapter 28
624
! If you do not want to convert any fills to Tatami, deselect the

Recognize Tatami checkbox.
Tatami Spacing range 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm, Random Factor not selected Tatami Spacing range 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm, Random Factor selected
In the Satin panel, set conversion options for Satin.
! In the Stitch Spacing fields, enter the spacing range to recognize. ! If you do not want to recognize Satin in the design, deselect the
Recognize Satin checkbox. Segments will be identified as Manual.
Satin Spacing range 0.5 mm to 5.0 mm
Satin Spacing range 0.1 mm to 2.0 mm
In the Run panel, set conversion options for Run.
! In Max Stitch Length field, enter the maximum stitch length to

recognize.
! In the Length Variation field, enter the percentage the stitch length
can vary in Run objects.
! If you do not want to recognize Run in the design, deselect the

Recognize Run checkbox. Segments will be identified as Manual.
Run Max Stitch length 4 mm. Length Variation 10%
Run Max Stitch length 4 mm. Length Variation 90%
In the Parameter Consistency panel, set options for Complex Fill segment recognition.
V9
625
! Spacing Rounding: has the same snap effect as Stitch Length

Rounding and is applied to Tatami and Satin fill styles.
! Stitch Length Rounding: sets the variation for Tatami stitch

lengths. For example, if the Tatami minimum stitch length is 4 mm, and the Stitch Length Rounding is 0.4 mm, stitches from 3.80 to 4.20 mm are snapped to 4.0 mm, and recognized as Tatami.
Tatami Spacing range: 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm, Spacing Rounding: 0.01 mm, Stitch Length Rounding: 0.2 mm Tatami Spacing range: 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm, Spacing Rounding: 0.05 mm, Stitch Length Rounding:0.5 mm
In the Effects panel, indicate whether to recognize the Jagged Edge effect. You can specify a minimum value in millimeters; anything greater than this will be recognized as Jagged Edge. Deselect this option to guarantee that outlines are not corrupted by the set Jagged Edge effect in the regenerated design.
Jagged NOT selected, border object recognized as Manual
Jagged selected, border object recognized as jagged edge
In the Splits panel, select Recognize Splits to recognize splits in the design.
V9
Chapter 28
626
! Recognize Splits: If not selected, any splits in the design will be

interpreted as Tatami. If selected, the following options become available.
Program Split object recognized
Program Split objects partially recognized
! Program Splits as User Defined Splits: this provides greater

reliability in preserving split patterns in complex designs. User-defined splits, however, have limited scalability.
! Recognize Auto Splits: select to recognize Satin stitches with Auto

Split applied. Otherwise, patterns created with Auto Split will be recognized as Tatami.
! Recognition Level: increase percentage value to restrict

recognition of Program Splits. Decrease value to increase recognition. A low percentage number will detect more areas as Satin with User Defined Split than Tatami. Note Split patterns can be complex, so the recognition process can take up to five times longer with this option. Do not use it unless the design contains Program Splits, User Defined Splits with Tatami or Satin, or Auto Splits.
User Defined Split
Auto Split
In the Segments Resolution/Merging Factors panel, enter values to fine-tune the recognition of segments and objects.
V9
627
! Spacing: this value expresses the ratio between stitch spacings in

adjacent stitch blocks e.g. adjacent spacings of 0.6 mm and 1.0 mm gives a ratio of 1.67. A value of 2.0 in the Spacing field means that these stitch blocks will be recognized as one segment or object. A value of 1.5 means that they will not. The default value is 3.0. Normal Satin and Tatami stitching ranges in spacing from 0.3 to 0.6 mm, so most continuous sections of stitching of the same type will not be split. To preserve spacing variations for color-blended designs and more artistic designs, you may need to reduce the spacing factor. In old manually punched designs which include stitching with irregular spacing, segment breaks can be reduced by increasing the factor.
! Height: this value expresses the ratio between heights of stitch

blocks. It is important in recognizing Complex Fill shapes, particularly with holes. Tip Generally, the lower these values, the larger the number of segments/objects likely to be identified. Normally you want to obtain design information with a minimum number of identified segments/objects. In practice there is always a compromise between design recognition quality and the minimum number of correctly identified segments/objects.
Spacing: 0.5 mm, Height: 2 mm Spacing: 3 mm, Height: 4 mm recognized objects in different color
10 Click OK. Tip To revert to the original conversion settings, click Reset.
Processing Melco CND outline files

Melco Condensed (CND) is the native file format of Melco embroidery digitizing software. CND files store only digitized outlines and stitch values. When you open CND designs in ES Designer, these outlines are scaled and stitches recalculated to preserve density.
V9
Chapter 28
628
ES Designer recognizes all Melco machine functions and stitch types, including Partition Lines and Complex Fill, and automatically converts them to EMB format. However, CND files do not contain specialty features such as Pull Compensation or Auto Spacing, nor do they include actual stitches, thread colors, or design icons. There are several versions of CND, all of which can be read by ES Designer. While these designs scale accurately, the number and placement of stitches may differ somewhat from the original design. You may notice some difference (5%) in the stitch counts between original and converted files. This is because of differences in the software methods used to calculate stitches. ES Designer cannot interpret certain specialty features of CND design objects because there is no direct equivalent. However, stock designs do not normally use these features and will generally convert without problem. Tip Before CND designs are stitched out, an EXP format file is created. The EXP stores the actual stitches and can be stitched directly. This file too can be opened in ES Designer. See Opening stitch files in ES Designer for details.
Opening Melco CND outline files

When you open Melco CND files, the Melco stitch types used in the design are converted to ES Designer stitch types Satin, Run, Tatami, etc. You can change conversion settings to adjust the spacing, stitch length, effects and defaults applied to ES Designer stitch types. You can also set scaling values to open the design at a different size to the original. Note For details of how each CND stitch type is converted, see Conversion of Melco CND format to Wilcom EMB.
To open a Melco CND outline file

1 Open the file from your hard disk, or read it from tape or embroidery disk.
V9
629
The Open dialog opens.
Select CND format
2 3
Select Melco (CND) from the Files of Type list and select the file to open. Click Options. The Condensed File Input Values dialog opens.
In the Scale Factor panel, enter the scale at which you want to open the design.
V9
Chapter 28
630
New dimensions are expressed as a ratio of the original design size. For example, to scale to 120% of the original, enter a scale factor of 1.2 in each field.
Scale Factor X: 1.00 Y: 1.00
Scale Factor X: 0.50 Y: 1.00
In the Adjust panel, enter the spacing values to apply to the design as a percentage of the original values. You can adjust Satin spacing, Run stitch length as well as Tatami spacing and length.
In the Auto Color Merge panel, choose whether you want to read thread color information from CND files. This ensures that stitches are displayed in the correct colors when converted to EMB. See Color merging Melco CND files and Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files for details.
In the Effects panel, select the effects you want to apply to the design. For information about these effects, see the relevant sections of the manual:
! Auto Spacing: see Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch. ! Short Stitches: see Reducing stitch bunching with stitch
shortening.
! Fractional Spacing: see Reducing stitch bunching with fractional

spacing. 8 In the Default Values panel, adjust the default values for Satin Spacing, Stitch Length and Maximum Stitch Length as required. If the CND design was created with values different to the factory settings, you can override them in these fields.
! To save new settings as defaults, click Save. ! To revert to the Melco factory settings, click Reset.
V9
631
Click OK. The selected design opens in the Design window. You can scale the design directly on screen, or via the Object Properties dialog. You can also rotate, mirror and skew the design. See Modifying Designs for details.
10 Click Open.
Saving designs in Melco CND format

You can save files to Melco CND format from ES Designer. Designs originally created in ES Designer generally give the best results. Other file types may not have all the data necessary for successful conversion. If you intend to save a file in CND format, you should only use input methods, stitch types and effects that are compatible with Melco EDS-III software. Some stitch quality features, stitch types, and decorative fills and effects do not convert well to CND format. ES Designer has two save as CND output options Superstar Compatible and Output Tatami as Complex Fill. Superstar-compatible machines do not have trimmers. The Output Tatami as Complex Fill option is for controlling Turning Tatami fills.
Trim functions
If you want to stitch a design to a machine without trimmers, then set machine values to not output Trim codes. Then digitize the design for manual trimming. Early versions of CND do not support Melco Trim codes. In this case, set the machine format values to output Trims as Jumps. See also Modifying standard machine formats and Adding connectors manually.
Turning Tatami fills

When you save to CND format, you need to specify how to convert turning Tatami stitches. Objects with curving Tatami stitches e.g. Input A objects are not supported by early versions of CND format. For Superstar-compatible machines, turning Tatami stitches are simply converted to Walk stitches, the EDS equivalent of Manual. For earlier machines, Turning Tatami fills need to be converted to normal Tatami i.e. with a single stitch angle then to Normal Fill, the EDS equivalent of normal Tatami.
To save designs in Melco CND format

1 Select File > Save As. The Save As dialog opens.
V9
Chapter 28
632
2 3 4
Select Melco (CND) from the Files of Type list. In the File name field, enter a name for the design. Click Options. The Save Options dialog opens.
Select the required option for converting Turning Tatami fills.
! Superstar Compatible: converts Turning Tatami to Walk (EDS

equivalent of Manual). Complex Fill Tatami is output as Normal Fill (EDS equivalent of Tatami).
! Output Tatami as Complex Fill: converts Turning Tatami fills to

normal Tatami i.e. with a single stitch angle then to EDS Normal Fill. Note These functions are also available when you send a CND design for stitching. 6 7 Click OK. Click Save.
Color merging Melco CND files

The Auto Color Merge feature reads thread color information for CND files from an associated TXT file so that stitches are displayed in the correct colors when they are converted to EMB. Tip Your EMB and other design files can be converted to and from other file formats using ES Design Explorer. Use it to batch process multiple CND designs using Auto Color Merge. See Converting design files in folders for details.
Setting up the color merge TXT file

Auto Color Merge reads and interprets a TXT file that contains color names from a thread chart. You can create this text file manually with a text editor such as MS Notepad. The text file must have the same file name as the CND
V9
633
file e.g. Fish.TXT and Fish.CND. Both files must also reside in the same folder. For the Auto Color Merge function to work correctly, information in the text file must be entered in a certain format.
Example text file: Fish

A typical text file might look like this:
Fish Uses curve effects File: Fish 55.9mmW X 74.5mmH ST: 6,780 Colors: 8 1. Tropical Sunset 2. Saffron 3. Pale powder Blue 4. Tropical Sunset 5. Pale powder Blue Curve effect 6. Tropical White 7. Tropical Sunset 8. Pale powder Blue
Text file structure

All text files contain some or all of the following elements. Text file element Design name Mandatory Description This is the name of the design as it appears in File > Information > Design Properties > Subject. Lines inserted here appear under File > Information > Design Properties > Comments.
!
Example Fish
Comments
Uses curve effects
File name Design size
This is the file name of the CND design file. The file extension should not be included. Enter the expected design size for the design. The actual design size is derived from the software. Enter the expected stitch count for the design. The actual stitch count is derived from the software.
File: Fish 55.9mmW X 74.5mmH ST: 6,780
Stitch count
Number of colors
States the total number of colors in the design.
Colors: 8
V9
Chapter 28
634
Text file element Thread name 1
Mandatory
Description Enter the first thread name. The name of the thread is searched against the Thread Chart. The thread name is shown in the File > Design Properties > Stop Sequence tab. Enter the second thread name. Enter the third thread name. Enter the fourth thread name. Add any extra threads to this list. Place comments below the relevant thread number.
Example 1. Tropical Sunset
Thread name 2 Thread name 3 Thread name 4 Thread name 5 Thread comments Thread name 6 Thread name 7 Thread name 8
! ! ! !
2. Saffron 3. Pale Powder Blue 4. Tropical Sunset 5. Pale Powder Blue Curve effect 6. Tropical White 7. Tropical Sunset 8. Pale Powder Blue
! ! !
Reading Melco CND files with Auto Color Merge

When opening a CND file which has a TXT file associated with it, you must specify the thread chart used when the design was originally created in EDS (or other design software). The thread colors nominated in the text file will correspond to the selected thread chart. Alternatively, you can assign colors manually to every Color Stop code in the file. See also Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files.
To read Melco CND files with Auto Color Merge

1 2 3 Select File > Open. The Open dialog opens. Select a CND design. Click Options.
V9
635
The Condensed File Input Values dialog opens.
Select thread chart Assign colors manually
Select a color merge option from the Auto Color Merge panel.
! If you want to read thread color information for the selected CND file
from an associated TXT file, select From File and follow the steps below.
! If you want to assign colors manually to every Color Stop code in the
file, select Custom and click Define Stop Sequence. See Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files for details. 5 If you are using Auto Color Merge from an associated text file, select a thread chart from the dropdown list. Note The thread colors nominated in the text file will correspond to the selected thread chart. If the color name does not correspond, it will default to black. 6 Click OK.
no chart selected default colors assigned
one color not correctly matched defaults to black
original colors correctly assigned from text file
The design opens, the stitches appear in the correct thread colors, and the color palette displays the selected thread chart.
V9
Chapter 28
636
Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files

When you open a stitch file or CND file, a design without color code assignment automatically uses the default color palette. You can, however, map thread colors to every Color Stop code in the file. This means you can color code stitch file designs which do not contain needle addressing information before opening the file.
without color code assignment with color code assignment
Note In order to assign colors correctly, you need to consult a production worksheet for the necessary color sequence information.
To reassign colors to a stitch or Melco CND file

1 Check the production worksheet for the stitch file.
number of Stop changes in design (e.g.4) number of color changes in design (e.g. 4)
thread chart for selected file
Select File > Open. The Open dialog opens.
V9
637
3 4
Select a stitch file or CND design. Click Options. The Decoding Options dialog opens.
Select Custom
Select Define Stop Sequence
Select Custom and click Define Stop Sequence. The Define Stop Sequence dialog opens. Initially the Building Stop Sequence grid is empty.
Select thread chart Select color
Select a thread chart and first color.
Click Assign Color
Click Assign Color. The color and the description are entered at the current Stop in the Building Stop Sequence grid. Note The selection moves to the next color in the thread chart. Two consecutive same colors are not allowed and Assign Color is disabled.
Click Assign Stop to enter an explicit Stop code.
V9
Chapter 28
638
Stop is entered in the Description field.
Click Assign Stop
Note A Stop Sequence Warning message displays if a redundant color function is assigned. Press Delete to delete a selected entry in the stop sequence. Click Reset to delete all the entries. 9 Use the Extra Stop codes as panel to select the output type for extra stop codes.
! Color Changes: Extra Stop codes are interpreted as Next Color

commands. The next color is selected from the default color palette.
! Stops: Extra Stop codes are interpreted as Explicit Stops. The

machine stops stitching.
! Repeat Sequence: If you select fewer colors than the design

requires, the selected colors are repeated. For example, if your design requires four colors and youve only selected two in the Building Stop Sequence list, colors 3 & 4 will be the same as original colors 1 & 2.
Select how extra stops are to be interpreted
10 Repeat the operation as many times as indicated in the production worksheet. 11 Click OK. The design will have the desired colors and the correct number of Color Changes. Note You can convert color changes to an explicit Stop Code. You can also remove Color Stops by assigning the same color number to consecutive color blocks.
V9
639
Chapter 29
Changing Machine Formats
Different embroidery machines speak different languages. They have their own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can stitch a design, it must be in a format which can be understood by the embroidery machine. When you select a machine format, ES Designer translates the digitized design into machine functions that can be understood by that machine. If required, you can customize machine formats to meet specific machine requirements.
This section describes how to select a machine format for a design, output it using other formats, and customize machine formats to meet your machines specific requirements.
V9
640
Selecting machine formats

Use Select Machine Format (Machine menu) to change the machine format. When you create a design, you need to select an embroidery machine format for it. You can change the machine format for a design at any time. Note You do not need to change the designs native machine format in order to output to a different machine type. See Outputting to different machine formats for details.
To select machine formats

1 Select Machine > Select Machine Format. The Select Machine Format dialog opens.
Select a machine format
2 3 4
From the Available Machine Formats list, select the required machine format. To check the settings for the selected format, click Values. See also Adjusting standard machine format settings. Click OK. Note If a selected machine format does not support a particular function in the design either automatically or manually inserted it is simply ignored.
V9
641
Outputting to different machine formats

Once a design is complete, you can stitch it out to any supported embroidery machine without changing the original design format. If a selected machine format does not support a particular function in the design either automatically or manually inserted it is simply ignored. Note To change the original format, see Selecting machine formats.
To output to different machine formats
! Select File > Stitch to Stitch Manager, then select a different format
from the Output as Machine Format list.
! Select File > Embroidery Disk > Save As, then select a different
machine format from the dropdown list.
! Select File > Paper Tape > Punch, then select a different machine
format from the dropdown list.
Select machine format
Creating custom machine formats

ES Designer provides standard formats for most machines. However, if your machine is different, you may need to customize the machine format settings. For example, if you have different models of the same type of embroidery machine, different functions may require different values. There are two ways to customize machine formats:
! Create a new format, based on the original, and make it available to all
designs. See Creating custom machine formats for details.
! Modify the format for a specific design, creating a custom format to use
only with that design. See Customizing machine formats for specific designs for details. Note If necessary, you can update the standard machine format itself. However, you should only do this if the original values are no longer used. See Modifying standard machine formats for details.
V9
Chapter 29
642
Creating custom machine formats

You can create a new machine format based on a standard machine format, and make it available to all designs.
To create custom machine formats

1 From the Select Machine Format dialog, select a machine format on which to base the new format. See Selecting machine formats for details. Click Create. The Machine Format Values > Standard tab opens.
Enter format name Adjust settings
In the Format Name field, enter a name for the new format. The name of the format you based it on and a number appear as the default e.g. Melco - 1.
4 5 6 7 8
In the Comment field, enter any information that will help you identify the machine format e.g. No Trim. Adjust the machine format settings as required. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details. Click the Advanced tab and adjust the settings as required. See Adjusting advanced machine format settings for details. Click Save. The new format appears in the Available Machine Formats list. Click OK.
Customizing machine formats for specific designs

Use Select Machine Format (Machine menu) to customize machine formats for specific designs.
V9
643
You can create a custom machine format for use with the current design. Use this feature if you need to modify machine format values for a design without changing the original format. The custom format appears in the selection list. Note The custom format is based on the selected machine format for the design. If you want to base it on a different machine format, select it from the Select Machine Format dialog. See Selecting machine formats for details.
To customize machine formats for specific designs

1 Select Machine > Machine Format Values. The Machine Format Values > Standard tab opens.
Adjust settings
2 3
Adjust the machine format settings as required. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details. Click the Advanced tab and adjust the settings as required. See Adjusting advanced machine format settings for details. Note You cannot change the Name or Comment fields. The custom machine format is automatically named using the original machine format and design name e.g. Melco - Design1.
Click OK. A new machine format is created for the design. It appears in the Select Machine Format dialog and is saved with the design.
Modifying standard machine formats

If the standard machine values are incorrect for your particular machine, you can change them.
V9
Chapter 29
644
Note You should only modify the standard formats if you no longer require the original values. Otherwise see Creating custom machine formats.
To modify standard machine formats

1 From the Select Machine Format dialog, select a machine format to modify. See Selecting machine formats for details.
Select a format Click Values
2 3 4 5 6
Click Values. The Machine Format Values > Standard tab opens. Adjust the machine format settings as required. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details. Click the Advanced tab and adjust the settings as required. See Adjusting advanced machine format settings for details. Click Save. Click OK.
Checking control commands

If you change the machine format of a design that contains manual machine functions, you may need to check whether the functions are compatible with the new format. Generally, functions that cannot be performed by the new machine type are simply ignored. If an ignored function was inserted on an empty stitch or empty jump, the stitch or jump is automatically removed. Sometimes, however, functions may not be correctly translated. For example, trim commands may be misinterpreted, as some machines use trim codes, and others a sequence of jumps.
V9
645
Note If a function is not available in the new machine format, the word Ignored appears in brackets after the function name.
To check control commands
! Travel to the position of the machine function. See Traveling by machine

function for details.
! Alternatively, use the Stitch List to identify and select a given machine
function. See Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List for details. The machine function name appears in the Prompt line. Extra information may appear in brackets after the function name e.g. needle number.
Removing custom machine formats

You can remove custom machine formats from your system when they are no longer required.
To remove custom machine formats

1 Access the Select Machine Format dialog and select a machine format to remove. See Selecting machine formats for details. Note You cannot remove machine formats that come with the software. You can only remove a custom format which you created. 2 3 Click Remove. A confirmation box appears. Click Yes to confirm the deletion, then click OK.
Adjusting standard machine format settings

Different machines require different settings. When you select a machine format, you only modify values relevant to that machine. Typical modifiable values are stitch and jump length, trim functions and color change functions.
V9
Chapter 29
646
Note Not all values described here are available for all machine formats. Use these instructions to enter values that apply to your selected format. See your embroidery machine manual for more information about machine formats.
Setting stitch and jump length values

With some machines you can set the maximum frame movement, minimum stitch length to recognize, or automatic jump length.
To set machine stitch and jump values

1 Access the Machine Format Values dialog.
! See Creating custom machine formats for details. ! See Modifying standard machine formats for details.
Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear.
Enter maximum stitch length Enter minimum stitch length Enter maximum jump length
In the Standard tab, enter the Maximum Stitch value. The value you enter depends on the tape code used by your machine:
! Binary coding system: 12.7 mm (e.g. Barudan machines) ! Ternary coding system: 12.1 mm (e.g. Tajima machines)
3 In the Minimum Stitch field, enter the smallest stitch to allow when outputting to the selected machine format. This sets the default Small Stitches value. See Removing small stitches automatically for details. Tip Generally the minimum stitch length is increased for dense materials and thick threads to prevent thread breakage. 4 In the Maximum Jump field, enter the maximum length of jumps. This sets the default Auto Jump value. See Adjusting Auto Jump settings for details. Tip Shorter jump values generally improve stitch quality and reduce wear on the machine but may increase stitch-out time.
V9
647
5 6
Click Save. Click OK.
Setting trim functions

With some machine formats you can specify how to format and interpret trim commands. Some machines understand specific trim codes. Other machines interpret multiple jumps as a trim command. Machines without an automatic trimmer may not know how to interpret trim commands, and may even shift the design when a trim code is encountered. For these machines you need to deselect the Output Trims checkbox so that trim functions are ignored when the design is stitched.
To set trim functions

Select to output trim functions
In the Standard tab, select the Output Trims checkbox to include trim functions when outputting to the selected machine format. Note If you deselect the Output Trims checkbox, the trim functions are not removed from the design but simply ignored for the selected machine format.
Specify the trim function format to use:
! Jumps: for machines that interpret multiple jumps as trims. You

also need to enter the required number of jumps.
! Code: for machines that use specific trim codes.

4 5 Click Save. Click OK.
V9
Chapter 29
648
Setting color change functions

Machines interpret the Color Change function differently either as a Needle Number or Stop command.
Needle number commands

Needle Number commands tell the machine to move to the next needle whenever a Color Change function is encountered. Each color in the design corresponds to a needle number in the order listed in the Colors list. See Changing thread colors for details. Note The machine must have the correct thread colors loaded for each needle to stitch out correctly. For needle addressing machines, you need to specify how many needles are on the machine. This tells the machine how often it needs to stop for the operator to change threads. For example, for a design with 25 colors to be stitched out on a machine with five needles, it must stop after every five color changes in order for the operator to change threads. Needle Number commands are sometimes combined with Jump commands to indicate color changes.
Stop commands
Stop commands allow the operator to manually change threads whenever a Color Change function is encountered. They are generally used with machines that only have one needle or do not support needle addressing. Stop commands are sometimes combined with Jump commands to indicate color changes.
To set color change functions

V9
649
Convert color change functions to needle number commands
Return needle to start of design
In the Standard tab, select the method to use to interpret color change functions.
! Needle No: converts color change functions to needle number

commands.
! Stops: converts Color Change functions to Stop commands. ! Stops and Jumps: converts Color Change functions to Stop and
Jump commands.
! Needle Numbers and Jumps: converts Color Change functions to

Needle Number and Jump commands. 3 4 For needle-addressing machines, enter the number of needles on the machine in the Number of Needles field. Select the Use Group Addressing checkbox as required. Some machines can group two heads together so you can stitch a design using needles from both heads. For example, if a machine has two heads and nine needles per head, the machine moves the hoop from the first head under the second head, which allows you to stitch 18 colors without a manual change. Note If this is the case, enter the combined number of needles on the machine in the Number of Needles field. 5 Select the First CC required checkbox as required. Some machines require a First CC code to initialize the machine and bring the head back to the first color change needle position. 6 Select the Return to Start checkbox as required. This returns the needle to the start of the design, preparing the machine for the next run of the same design. 7 8 Click Save. Click OK.
V9
Chapter 29
650
Setting borer functions

Some embroidery machines are equipped with a borer. The borer often replaces one of the needles. You need to specify the needle position of the borer and its offset value. Borers are often knife attachments where the cutting position is offset 12 mm from the main needle. Before the machine starts, the frame moves so that the borer is in the correct position. This extra frame movement compensates for the borer offset. Some machines automatically adjust for this offset when a Borer In function is encountered. These machines should have an offset value of 0. Similarly, if you are using a boring needle (instead of a knife), you do not need an offset value. See your embroidery machines manual for details.
To set borer functions

Enter borer offset Enter needle number of borer
In the Standard tab, enter the required borer offset in the Offset field.
! If your machine automatically inserts an offset when a Borer In

function is encountered, enter an offset of 0 mm.
! If your machine requires an offset value, enter an offset of 12.0 mm.

3 4 5 In the Needle Number field, enter the needle number to which the borer is attached. Click Save. Click OK.
Setting end-of-design functions

Some machines require an explicit End of Design function code in order to recognize when the end of the design has been reached. Some machines do not understand the End of Design function code, requiring a Stop code instead. For example, Tajima machines recognize the explicit End of Design
V9
651
function code while Happy machines require a simple Stop. See also Setting the Start of Design / End of Design sequence.
To set end-of-design functions

Select relevant code
In the Standard tab, select the appropriate option in the End of Design panel for your machine:
! End of Design: some machines require an explicit End of Design

function code e.g. some Tajima machines.
! Stop: some machines require a Stop code instead e.g. Happy

machines. 3 4 Click Save. Click OK.
Adjusting advanced machine format settings

The Advanced tab lets you set additional machine format options. Again, the available settings depend on the selected machine format. You can set the color change sequence, insert special codes for the start or end of a design, and enter speed settings. There are also miscellaneous settings, including whether to change the fabric tension during boring, and whether to rewind tape when stitching is complete. Warning Only change Advanced values if you are familiar with the codes used by your embroidery machine.
V9
Chapter 29
652
Setting the color change sequence

Some machines cannot interpret Color Change commands unless they form part of a color change sequence made up of empty stitches and empty jumps before and after each Color Change command. Check the requirements of your machine to determine whether you need to enter color change sequence values. In the Advanced tab, the Color Change Sequence panel reads from top to bottom, in the order the codes appear in the sequence. The first two fields show the number of Empty Stitches and Empty Jumps to insert before the Color Change command. The other fields show the Empty Jumps and Empty Stitches to insert after the command.
Color Change Sequence in Stitch List corresponds to sequence defined in Machine Format Values Advanced tab
To set the color change sequence

Enter number of Empty Stitches and Jumps to insert before Color Change Enter number of Empty Jumps and Stitches to insert after Color Change
V9
653
Click the Advanced tab and enter the Color Change sequence.
! In the first 0:0 field, enter the number of empty stitches to insert
before the Color Change.
! In the first 0:0 Jump field, enter the number of empty jumps to
insert before the Color Change.
! In the second 0:0 Jump field, enter the number of empty jumps to
insert after the Color Change.
! In the second 0:0 field, enter the number of empty stitches to insert
after the Color Change. 3 4 Click Save. Click OK.
Setting the Start of Design / End of Design sequence

In addition to any End of Design function, some machines require extra more empty stitches and empty jumps in order to stitch the start and end of a design. Other machines require a Stop function. Depending on the machine type, you may also require commands to initialize the machine or trigger the frame-out command after stitching. Note Remember that these fields show the number of extra codes you want to insert in addition to the default settings.
To set the Start of Design/End of Design sequence

Enter number of Empty Jumps and Stitches to insert at end of design Enter number of Empty Stitches and Jumps to insert at start of design
Click the Advanced tab and enter the Start of Design sequence.
V9
Chapter 29
654
! In the 0:0 Jump field, enter the number of empty jumps to insert
at the start of the design.
! In the 0:0 field, enter the number of empty stitches to insert at the
start of the design. 3 In the End of Design panel, enter the end of design sequence.
! In the second 0:0 Jump field, enter the number of empty jumps to
insert at the end of the design.
! In the 0:0 field, enter the number of empty stitches to insert at the
end of the design. 4 Select the Set Needle Number checkbox as required. This option initializes the machine and brings the head back to the first color change needle position.
Initialize machine and bring head back to first needle position
Select the Frame Out checkbox as required. This option triggers the frame to exit after stitching the design.
Trigger frame to exit after stitch out
6 7
Click Save. Click OK.
Setting speed options

Some machines can stitch at different speeds. Depending on your machine, you may then be able to select different speeds to use when you start stitching or for when the borer is engaged. You need to first assign the speeds as Speed 1 and Speed 2 in the Machine Format Values dialog.
To set speed options

V9
655
Select speed options
2 3
Click the Advanced tab. Select the Boring Auto Speed Changes checkbox as required. This option slows the machine automatically whenever the borer is engaged.
4 5 6 7
From the Start list, select the preferred starting speed Fast or Slow. From the Fast list, select the faster setting on your machine Speed 1 or Speed 2. Check your machine manual for details. Click Save. Click OK.
Setting miscellaneous advanced options

Depending on the selected machine format, you may also be able to select whether to reduce the tension on the fabric while boring, and indicate whether to rewind the tape when stitching is complete.
To set miscellaneous advanced options

Set miscellaneous options
2 3 4
Click the Advanced tab. Select the Tension Control for Boring checkbox as required. This option reduces the fabric tension when the borer is engaged. Select the Stop before rewind at end checkbox as required.
V9
Chapter 29
656
This option stops the machine at the end of the design and rewinds the tape. 5 6 7 Select the Rewind with Jump at end checkbox as required. This option inserts a jump at the end of the design and rewinds the tape. Click Save. Click OK.
V9
657
Chapter 30
Outputting Designs
You can output embroidery designs in a variety of ways saving to embroidery disk, punching to paper tape, sending appliqu shapes to a cutter, or sending directly to machine for stitching.
Note Wilcom ES provides alternative means for sending designs directly to embroidery machine for stitching. Depending on your software options, you can send the design to a machine using either Stitch Manager or ES Machine Manager. Stitch Manager is described in this section. ES Machine Manager is described in a separate ES Machine Manager Supplement. From the same design file, you can also output a production worksheet for the embroidery machine operator. Designers frequently want to distribute their designs so that they can be seen in real colors, in TrueView or otherwise. In ES Designer you can save both design images and production worksheets to disk or email them direct. This section describes how to create production worksheets. It explains how to send designs as email attachments, as well as how to output designs as
V9
658
drawings and images. Cutting appliqu shapes is also covered, as well as stitching designs with Stitch Manager. Note For details of reading from and writing to embroidery disk and paper tape, see Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes.
Creating production worksheets

The production worksheet is the link between the designer and the embroidery machine operator. It contains a design preview as well as essential production information, including the design size, the color sequence and any special instructions. You can customize production worksheets before printing. You can also print multiple colorways, icons of color blocks, and backgrounds. Note If certain thread colors are not available on your printer, they may be mapped to a different color, including white. If a color is mapped to white, it will be invisible on the worksheet. Print the design in TrueView color, or black and white, or turn off color mapping. See your printer manual for more information.
Printing or plotting production worksheets

Use Print (Standard toolbar) to print a production worksheet for the current design using the current settings. Create a hard copy of the production worksheet using a printer or plotter. Set worksheet and printer options before you print, or use the current options. Tip Preview the production worksheet before you print to check whether it is correct. See Previewing production worksheets for details.
To print or plot a production worksheet

1 2 Select File > Print. The Print dialog opens. Select the printer or plotter you want to use, and enter the number of copies of the worksheet you require.
V9
659
Note To customize the worksheet, click Options, and change the settings as required. See Setting production worksheet print options for details. 3 If you are using a plotter, click Properties, and set the pen colors to correspond with the thread colors in the design. Refer to your plotters manual for information on setting up pen colors. 4 Click OK.
Setting production worksheet print options

Set production worksheet options to show the information you want in the format you require. You can specify the data to print, graphics to include, zoom factor, and general options such as company name. You can use a color printer or a plotter to produce production worksheets. If you are using a color printer, you can print in TrueView.
To set worksheet print options

1 Access the Print dialog. Either:
! Select File > Print. ! Select File > Print Preview.

2 Click Options. The Print Options dialog opens.
Select worksheet or appliqu Set zoom factor for design preview
Select information type to include
Select graphical features to include
Select other general options
V9
Chapter 30
Outputting Designs
660
3 4
Select the option to print a production worksheet or appliqu patterns. In the Information to Print panel, select the information type to include.
! Full information: shows details specified in the Customize

Worksheet dialog. See Customizing production worksheet information for details.
! Short information: shows summary information about the design.

This and the previous option include information provided in the Summary tab of the Design Properties dialog. See Viewing design information in ES Designer for details.
! Stop sequence: lists all stops in the design together with the stitch
number at which they occur, color number, and thread color name and brand. See also Printing multiple colorways.
! None: shows the design preview only. ! Current Colorway: prints the design in the current colorway only. ! Selected Colorways: prints multiple colorways. See Printing
multiple colorways for details. 5 In the Zoom panel, set the zoom factor for the design preview. This controls the size of the preview on the worksheet.
! 1.0: shows the design at its actual size. ! Show All: scales the design to fill the available space on the
worksheet.
! Custom: lets you set a specific zoom factor.

6 In the Graphics panel, select the graphical features to include. If you select TrueView, the Draft Quality checkbox becomes available. Select this checkbox for quicker printing at lower resolution. Tip Click Standard to reset the printing options to the original values. 7 Click Display Repeats to set display options for Schiffli repeats. This is only available with the Schiffli Option. See the Schiffli Option Supplement for details. 8 In the General panel, select the other options you require.
! Print in English: deselecting this checkbox prints worksheets in the

same language as the Windows operating system. This feature is useful when printing to plotters where the device driver does not support the character set you require.
! Extents Box Around Design: places an outline around the design. ! Company Name: prints a specified company name on the
worksheet. Select a company name from the list, or enter a new one.
V9
661
! Color Film: prints color blocks in the design as they appear in the
Color List. Consecutive objects of the same color form a single color block. See also Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List.
Click OK.
Customizing production worksheet information

You can fine-tune production worksheet information when Full Information is the selected text option.
To customize production worksheet information


2 3 4 Click Options. The Print Options dialog opens. In the Text to Print panel, select the Full Information checkbox. Click Customize.
V9
Chapter 30
Outputting Designs
662
The Customize Worksheet dialog opens.
In the Blocks to Print panel, select the design statistics to include on the worksheet.
! Left/Right/Up/Down: the margins between the edges of the design

and the edges of the design area.
! End X/Y: the coordinates of the last stitch. ! Max/Min Stitch: the maximum and minimum stitch lengths in the
design.
! Thread Chart Type: the thread chart name used in the design. ! Thread Usage: thread usage statistics by color. ! Total Bobbin: total bobbin thread length.
6 In the Columns in Stop Sequence panel, select the statistics for each color block.
! ! ! !
Stitch Count: number of stitches per color. Needle Number: the needle number stitching each color block. Brand: name of the color (may vary from name of thread chart). Element Name: user-defined name to identify each color block. See Assigning element names for details. colorways summary table/s. See also Printing multiple colorways.
! Show Colors in Summary: includes actual color samples in the

7 8 By default, text prints on the right of the page. Select the Use Left Side checkbox to print on the left side. Click OK.
Printing multiple colorways

Use Print (File menu) to print your design in multiple colorways. You can print your design in the current or multiple colorways. See also Using multiple colorways.
V9
663
To print multiple colorways


Select Current Colorway or Selected Colorways
Select Selected Colorways to print multiple colorways. Tip Select Current Colorway to print the design in the current colorway only.
Click Colorways. The Colorway Options dialog opens.
Select one or more colorways from the list
Select Selected Colorways and then select one or more colorways from the list.
! To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you select. ! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select.
Alternatively, select All Colorways to print out all the colorways in the design. Each colorway is printed on a separate sheet.
V9
Chapter 30
Outputting Designs
664
6 7
Click OK to return to the Print Options dialog. In the Graphics panel, select Background if you want to include the background color or fabric with the colorway.
Select Background to include on worksheet
Tip Select Crop to Design to crop the space around the design. 8 Click OK.
A colorway summary sheet is also printed. To print colors in the colorway summary table/s, make sure the Show Colors in Summary is selected in the Customize Worksheet dialog. See Customizing production worksheet information for details.
Printing color film

The Color Film option lets you print color blocks in the design as they appear in the Color-Object List. Consecutive objects of the same color form a single color block. See also Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List.
To print color film

! Select File > Print.
V9
665
! Select File > Print Preview.

Select Color Film
3 4 5
Select the Color Film checkbox. Click OK to return to the Print Options dialog. Click OK. A separate color film prints for selected colorways. See also Printing multiple colorways.
Printing appliqu patterns

Print a copy of appliqu patterns to use in cutting out fabric pieces. Each appliqu pattern piece is numbered according to the stitching sequence.
V9
Chapter 30
Outputting Designs
666
One copy of the placement outlines is printed to show how their positions relate to each other. This copy is printed to fit one page. A second copy of the placement outlines is printed at 100% scaling, with each outline separated for use in cutting the fabric. Note Automatically create all the stitching you need for appliqu using the Auto Appliqu input method. See Digitizing for appliqu for details.
To print an appliqu pattern

1 2 Select File > Print Preview. Click Options icon. Print Options dialog opens.
Select Appliqu Patterns
Select the Appliqu Patterns option.
V9
667
Each appliqu pattern piece is numbered according to the stitching sequence.
Click Print.
Sending designs as email attachments

Use Send (File menu) to send your design as an email attachment. You can attach designs to emails from the design window or the Open dialog.
To send designs as email attachments

1 Do one of the following:
! With the design open in the design window, select File > Send, or
V9
Chapter 30
Outputting Designs
668
! Click the Open icon to display the Open dialog. Select the file to
send, then right-click it. The popup menu appears. Select Send To > Mail Recipient.
The email application for your system is launched, and a new email is created with the design file attached. 2 Enter mailing details, and send as normal.
Outputting designs as drawings and images

Once a design is digitized in ES Designer, you can output object outlines as a vector file. This can then be downloaded to a laser cutter through a program such as CorelDRAW. This can serve various purposes such as appliqu cutting, multimedia, screen printing, and so on. Designers frequently want to distribute their designs for viewing in real colors, in TrueView or otherwise, with or without fabric backgrounds. This might be for stock design sales purposes, for approval of digitized designs, or for presentation on the web or in catalogs. ES Designer lets you save both design images and production worksheets to disk or email them direct.
Saving designs as vector drawings

You can copy embroidery outlines directly to the Windows clipboard. Using the Microsoft Clipboard Viewer, you can then save them to CLP format. This file can then be opened in a program such as CorelDRAW. Note You may need to install Microsoft Clipboard Viewer from your Windows operating system installation CD.
V9
669
To save designs as vector drawings

1 Select the object/s whose outlines you want to copy.
2 3 4
Press Ctrl + C to copy them to the clipboard. Open Microsoft Clipboard Viewer. The copied outlines will appear in the Clipboard Viewer window. Save the outlines to CLP file format.
This file can now be opened in a program such as CorelDRAW.
Capturing designs as bitmap images

Use Capture Design Bitmap (File menu) to save a design as a bitmap image. You can save design images to disk or email them direct. This might be for stock design sales purposes, for approval of digitized designs, or for presentation on the web or in catalogs. The image can be captured as a bitmap with or without background color or fabric. It can be captured in
V9
Chapter 30
Outputting Designs
670
TrueView or otherwise, and can include connectors, outlines and any other display options provided in ES Designer.
To capture a design as a bitmap image

1 2 Open the embroidery design. Select File > Capture Design Bitmap. The Capture Design Bitmap dialog opens.
Select image selection option Select to include background color or fabric
Select Output option Select Output format
Select a Selection option:
! Whole Design (1:1): captures the screen image in a ratio of 1:1. ! Current Design Window: captures the screen image at the
currently selected zoom factor.
! Custom: lets you specify a capture area. After clicking OK, you are
prompted to enter a rectangle origin and rectangle corner to define it. 4 Select an Output option:
! Save to Disk: lets you save the screen capture to hard disk. After
clicking OK, the Save Capture Screen dialog opens, allowing you to select a location, name and format for the design image.
! Send via Email: lets you send the screen capture as email. After
clicking OK, a new email message opens with the image attached.
V9
671
! Both Save and Send: lets you both save to hard disk and send as
an email attachment.
image captured as Whole Design (1:1)
5 6 7
Select an output format for the screen image from the dropdown list BMP, JPG, etc. Select Include Background/Fabric to include the background color or fabric with the screen capture. Click OK.
Cutting appliqu shapes

Use Cut Appliqu (File menu) to send appliqu shapes from a design file to a laser cutter. Use the Cut Appliqu feature to send appliqu shapes from a design file to a laser cutter. ES Designer extracts drawing outlines from the design and sends them to the cutter. Only closed outlines are extracted. You can also send drawing objects directly to the cutter using this feature. Tip ES Designer also lets you output object outlines as a vector file. This can then be downloaded to a laser cutter through a program such as CorelDRAW. See To save designs as vector drawings for details. Note Before you send appliqu shapes to a cutter, make sure it is set up on your system with the correct Windows (printer) driver. Some cutters e.g. Ioline use a standard driver for HP-7475 plotters. Once the driver is installed in Windows, there is no need for a separate hardware setup in ES Designer.
V9
Chapter 30
Outputting Designs
672
To output appliqu shapes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Create your appliqu object and duplicate it. See Creating appliqu objects for details. Select the duplicated object and click the Complex Fill icon. Enter stitch angles or press Enter to accept the default. This will create a Complex Fill object. Select and ungroup the Complex Fill object. This will convert the embroidery object into a drawing object. Repeat these steps for all applique objects in the design. Select all the drawing objects and cut them to the clipboard. Start a new design and paste them into it. Tip If you need more than one copy of the appliqu shape, create multiple copies of the shape, and arrange them so you get the most efficient use from the appliqu fabric. 8 9 Select File > Cut Appliqu. The Print dialog opens. From the Name list, select the appliqu cutter. 10 Click OK.
appliqu object
converted to Complex Fill object
converted to drawing object
Tip If you intend to reuse the design, save the appliqu shapes file under a similar name.
Stitching designs with Stitch Manager

Use Stitch to Machine (Standard toolbar) to send a design to a machine for stitching.
V9
673
You can send designs directly to connected embroidery machines for stitching with Stitch Manager. When you send several designs in a row, they are automatically queued and stitched out one at a time. Note You can also use ES Machine Manager to send designs to machine from within ES Designer, ES Design Explorer or Design Workflow. ES Machine Manager lets you view and manage job queues. See the ES Machine Manager Supplement for details.
To stitch designs with Stitch Manager

1 2 Open the design. Click the Stitch to Stitch Manager icon. The Stitch to Stitch Manager dialog opens.
Select embroidery machine
Select machine format
From the Machine Identification list, select an embroidery machine. Click Setup to modify the machines settings as required. See Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager for details.
From the Output as Machine format list, select the correct machine format. Click Values to modify the machine format settings as required. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details. Note This field is automatically updated if the target machine format is different to the current format. Select the Prompt Changing Machine Format checkbox if you want to be prompted when the Output as Machine Format field updates.
5 6
If the design includes a Team Names object, click Options and specify stitching details. See Outputting team name designs for details. Click OK. The Initialize Machine dialog opens. If you selected Team Names values, you are required to confirm them.
V9
Chapter 30
Outputting Designs
674
Click OK. The Stitch Manager dialog opens listing the files to be stitched out.
Tip To delete a design from the queue, select it and click Cancel.
V9
675
Chapter 31
Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes
Embroidery disks are specially formatted floppy disks used to transfer designs from computer to embroidery machine. You can format embroidery disks and save designs to them from within ES Designer. The format you use will depend on the selected embroidery machine. You can also open designs from embroidery disk directly into ES Designer.
Paper tape is the traditional medium for storing designs in stitch data format. You can read paper tape designs of various formats into ES Designer. Once a design is read, you can output it without change, modify it and output it in its original format, or save it as an EMB file. You can also punch designs to paper tape from ES Designer. This section describes how to read from and write embroidery design files to embroidery disk and paper tape.
V9
676
Storing designs on embroidery disk

Embroidery disks are specially formatted floppy disks used to store designs. They are primarily used to transfer designs from computer to embroidery machine. Designs are generally stored in stitch data format, although Melco CND, for example, is a condensed file format. You can open designs from embroidery disks of various formats directly into ES Designer. Once it is read, you can output it without change, modify it and output it in its original format, or save it as an EMB file. You can optionally convert it into objects. After conversion, the design can be scaled and changed. See Opening stitch files in ES Designer for details. Tip You can save to embroidery disk in any machine format without changing the format of the original design.
Embroidery floppy disks

Most embroidery machines are equipped with the same floppy disk drives as those used in PCs. So that you can transfer your designs, make sure your PC floppy disk drive can read, write and format floppy disks that your embroidery machine uses. For example, if your machine requires a Double Density (DD) disk, you must use this format even if your computer has a High Density (HD) floppy disk drive.
Floppy disk types

Different floppy disks store different amounts of data: Capacity 360 Kb 720 Kb 1.44 Mb 2.88 Mb Density Single-Sided Single-Density Double-Sided Double-Density Double-Sided High-Density also called Double-Sided High-Density Code SS/SD DS/DD DS/HD DS/HD
Disk drives and floppy disks

Different floppy disk drives read and write floppy disks of different capacity: Computer Disk Drive Single Density 360 Kb
!
720 Kb
1.44 Mb
2.88 Mb
V9
677
Computer Disk Drive Double Density High Density (1.44) High Density (2.88)
360 Kb
720 Kb
! ! !
1.44 Mb
2.88 Mb
! ! !
Can only be formatted with correct controller installed. Currently most computer models have one 3.5" floppy disk drive. The capacity of a floppy disk drive depends on its controller. Most computers have a High Density 1.44 Mb drive which can read both Double Density 720 Kb and High Density 1.44 Mb floppy disks. Most embroidery machines use Double Density or High Density disks so there is usually no problem transferring designs. See also Supported embroidery disk formats.
Controller cards for Melco embroidery disks

Old floppy disk drives were designed to format, read and write 3.5" Double Sided Single Density (DS/SD) disks which could store 360 Kb of information. This is the format that Melco uses. Only a few floppy disk controllers support single density floppy disks. If you want to format and use Melco 3.5" disks, you need to disable the onboard floppy disk controller through the PC BIOS and install a floppy disk controller card which supports IMB 3740 single density format (FM). The following floppy disk controller cards have been tested and proved suitable for Melco embroidery disks. Floppy Disk Controller Western Digital WD37C65 NEC Electronics Inc. PD765A/7265 Intel 8272A POWER I/O 5000AT/5100AT (with SMC type chip numbered FDC37C664QF) Capacity single/double density single/double density single/double density high density 2.88 Mb (requires DOS 6.0 or later)
Currently there are no floppy disk controller cards available for laptop computers which are suitable for formatting, reading and writing Melco embroidery disks. If you want to stitch designs on Melco Star or Superstar machines but your disk drive cannot produce a Melco format disk, you can connect from ES
V9
Chapter 31
678
Designer using a Wilcom DCi unit to send designs directly to machine (Windows 9x only).
Testing embroidery disks

Some newer PC hardware and operating systems do not support some of the older embroidery disk formats. Check that your PC can read, write and format embroidery machine formats using Wilcoms Test Disk utility. If the utility returns errors associated with any embroidery formats, your PC will not support the reading, writing or formatting of these disks. See also Supported embroidery disk formats. Newer PCs cannot usually handle Melco format. To enable formatting in Melco, a multiple input/output card capable of formatting single density disks is needed. See Controller cards for Melco embroidery disks for details. Note Wilcom Test Disk does not currently work under Win2000, NT or XP.
To test embroidery disks

1 On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button and select Programs > Wilcom ES > Test Disk. The Test Disk window opens.
Select Test Disk > All.
V9
679
The Disk Format Test Selection dialog opens.
Select disk drive to test
Select embroidery formats to check
3 4 5
In the Floppy Disk Drive panel, select a disk drive from the list. In the Disk Format Type panel, select the embroidery formats to check. Insert a DS/DD disk in the floppy drive. Warning Dont use a floppy disk containing data that you want to keep as the Test Disk utility erases all data contained on it.
Click OK. When testing finishes, the Test Results dialog will display. Your PC will not support the reading, writing or formatting of specified diskettes. Tip The MelCheck feature in the Test Disk menu is identical to the Melco feature in the Disk Format Test Selection dialog.
Reading designs from embroidery disk

Use Embroidery Disk > Open (File menu) to open a design from an embroidery disk. You can open designs of other formats from specially formatted embroidery disks. See also Supported embroidery disk formats.
To read designs from embroidery disk

1 2 Insert the embroidery disk in your computers floppy disk drive. Select File > Embroidery Disk > Open.
V9
Chapter 31
680
The Open Embroidery Disk dialog opens.
Select drive Select format
3 4
From the Look In list, select the floppy disk drive. Select the disk format. Either:
! Select the format from the Diskette Format list. ! Select the Auto Detect checkbox and let ES Designer automatically
determine the format. This generally takes longer. 5 Click OK. The Open From Embroidery Disk dialog opens.
Select design type
From the Designs of Type list, select a design type. Any designs saved on disk are listed in the panel. If no designs are listed, make sure that the correct drive and disk format are selected. Note If the Options button is available, you can set recognition options for the design. See Processing Melco CND outline files, Opening stitch files with object/outline recognition and Opening stitch files without object/outline recognition for details.
Click Open.
V9
681
Note If you have problems with embroidery disks, see Testing embroidery disks for details.
Formatting embroidery disks

Use Embroidery Disk > Format (File menu) to format an embroidery disk. Embroidery disks must be formatted to suit the embroidery machine you intend to use or the machine will not be able to read the design. Most computers have a High Density 1.44 Mb drive which can read both Double Density 720 Kb and High Density 1.44 Mb floppy disks. Most embroidery machines use Double Density or High Density disks so there is usually no problem with transferring designs. See your embroidery machines manual for details of the appropriate disk type. Warning Use the disk type required by the embroidery machine, not the computer. For example, if a machine requires DD disks, you must use DD disks even though your computer may have an HD drive. If your machine can only read single density disks you may need to install a special floppy disk controller card in your computer. See also Supported embroidery disk formats.
To format embroidery disks

1 Insert a 3.5" floppy disk of the correct density in your computers floppy disk drive. Note Use the disk type required by the embroidery machine, not the computer. For example, if a machine requires DD disks, you must use DD disks even though your computer may have an HD drive. If your machine can only read single density disks you may need to install a special floppy disk controller card in your computer. See Embroidery floppy disks for details. 2 Select File > Embroidery Disk > Format. The Format Embroidery Disk dialog opens.
Select floppy disk drive Select disk format
V9
Chapter 31
682
3 4 5 6
From the Drive list, select the floppy disk drive. From the Diskette Format list, select the required disk format. Click OK. A confirmation message appears. Click OK to confirm. The Format dialog opens.
Select disk format Select format option
Enter disk label
7 8
From the Capacity list, select the disk storage capacity. In the Format Type panel, select the format option you require.
! Full: formats a blank disk or changes the disk format. ! Quick: erases all data from the disk but does not reformat it. ! Copy System Files only: copies system files without formatting the
disk. 9 In the Other Options panel, select the options you require.
! To label the disk, deselect the No Label checkbox and enter the label
name.
! Select the Display Summary when Finished to view a summary

dialog after formatting.
! Select the Copy system files checkbox to copy system files to the
disk. This makes the disk bootable in DOS. See your Windows manual for details. 10 Click Start. A progress bar appears. You are prompted when formatting is complete. 11 Click OK to format another disk or Cancel to finish. Note If you have trouble with formatting a Melco embroidery disk, check if your floppy disk drive can read and write single density floppy disks. See Testing embroidery disks for details.
V9
683
Saving designs to embroidery disk

Use Embroidery Disk > Save As (File menu) to save a design to stitch out on a specific machine. Save designs to embroidery disk to stitch out on a specific machine. When you save to a new format, the design is converted to encode the machine functions and commands supported by the particular machine. Note Embroidery disks must be correctly formatted before you save designs to them. See Formatting embroidery disks for details.
To save designs to embroidery disk

1 2 Insert the embroidery disk in your computers floppy disk drive. Select File > Embroidery Disk > Save As. The Save to Embroidery Disk dialog opens.
Select drive Select format
3 4
From the Look In list, select the floppy disk drive. Select the disk format. Either:
! Select the format from the Diskette Format list. ! Select the Auto Detect checkbox and let ES Designer automatically
determine the format. Any designs already saved on disk are listed in the panel. Note If the disk is not formatted, or its format is not correct, click Format. See Formatting embroidery disks for details.
V9
Chapter 31
684
In the Filename field, enter a name for the design.
Enter file number if required
If the Number field is enabled, enter the file number. Not all machine formats require this information. This option is greyed out if the file naming mechanism is not supported by the particular embroidery disk type. Tajima uses a free-form file name, so both a numbering system and a text file name system are supported, as seen in the dialog.
Select a design format from the Machine Format list. Some machines can read different formats. For example, some Tajima machines can read Barudan as well as Tajima. Tip To view or modify machine format settings, click Values. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details.
From the Design Type list, select the file type to save to embroidery disk. Only one file type is generally available. If available, select the Save Icon checkbox to include a thumbnail image of the design with the design file. This icon appears in the machine control panel during stitch-out.
10 Click Save. Warning Wait until the light on the floppy disk drive stops flashing before removing the disk.
Storing designs on paper tape

Paper tape is the traditional medium for storing designs in stitch data format. Now largely replaced by floppy disk, they are still used by older machines. More specifically, stitch data paper tapes are eight-channel paper tapes which, in effect, are hard copies of 8 bit binary data. Paper tapes are normally punched by the designer and read into the embroidery machine at a later time.
V9
685
You can read paper tape designs of various formats into ES Designer. Once a design is read, you can output it without change, modify it and output it in its original format, or save it as an EMB file. You can optionally convert the design into objects. After conversion, the design can be scaled and changed. See Opening stitch files in ES Designer for details. You can also punch designs to paper tape from ES Designer. You can select the output format type and include labels with the design. You can also choose to rewind the tape after punching, or punch in the reverse stitching sequence.
Reading designs from paper tape

Use Paper Tape > Read (File menu) to read a paper tape design. You can read paper tape designs of various formats into ES Designer. Once a design is read, you can save it as an EMB file. See also Supported paper tape formats. Tip Create backups of your paper tape designs by reading them into ES Designer, then saving them to hard disk or embroidery disk in the same machine format. This does not change the design in any way.
To read designs from paper tape

1 Make sure the tape reader is connected and configured correctly and that a tape is loaded. Warning Do not read the optional label which is at the beginning of the tape as it is not part of the stitch data. 2 Select File > Paper Tape > Read. The Choose Read Tape Type dialog opens.
Select tape format
Select a tape format from the list. Note Make sure you select the correct format as it cannot be detected automatically by ES Designer.
V9
Chapter 31
686
Click OK.
Punching designs to paper tape

Use Paper Tape > Punch (File menu) to read a paper tape design. You can punch designs to paper tape from ES Designer. You can select the output format type and include labels with the design. You can also choose to rewind the tape after punching, or punch in the reverse stitching sequence.
To punch designs to paper tape

1 2 Make sure the tape reader is connected and configured correctly and that a tape is loaded. Select File > Paper Tape > Punch. The Choose Write Tape Type dialog opens.
Select tape format
Select a tape format from the list. Note Make sure you choose the correct format as it cannot be detected automatically by ES Designer.
Click OK.
V9
687
The Tape Manager dialog opens.
Select tape punch Select to label tape Select to automatically rewind tape before stitching Select to punch in reverse direction
5 6
Deselect the Confirm Setup checkbox if you dont want to confirm the setup of the tape punch before punching. From the Punch Name list, select the required tape punch. Note The list contains a number of default entries. If the reader you want is not available, you can add a new one. See Setting up paper tape readers for details.
7 8
Click Setup to modify the serial port settings. See Serial port settings for details. To label the tape, select the With Label checkbox and enter the label name. The machine format and date are also included. Select the AutoRewind at Start checkbox to automatically rewind the tape before stitching. Note If the machine format does not support this option, the checkbox is disabled.
10 Select the Reverse Direction checkbox to punch in the reverse direction to the current stitching sequence. This lets you punch directly from tapes that were stored on take-up rolls without rewinding.
V9
Chapter 31
688
11 Click Punch. If the Confirm Setup checkbox is selected, the Punch to Tape dialog opens displaying technical details of the punch connection. Click OK to continue.
V9
689
V9
Chapter 31
690
PART VIII
DESIGN MANAGEMENT
ES Design Explorer provides an efficient way for viewing and managing embroidery designs. With this design management tool, you can browse design files stored on your computer hard disk, CD-ROM, or floppy disk. It recognizes all design file formats used by ES Designer.
ES Design Explorer basics

This section describes how to use ES Design Explorer to access and view designs in folders. It also covers cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting designs in folders. See ES Design Explorer Basics for details.
ES Design Explorer advanced functions

This section describes the more advanced workings of ES Design Explorer from sorting files to stitching, punching, and converting designs. It also describes how to print and publish catalogs of designs, as well as how to archive dormant or unused designs. See ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions for details. Note ES Design Explorer helps you manage designs in folders. It is not a multi-user database for company-wide design management. Wilcom Design Workflow is a central design storage and management application. Any design format that can be read by ES Designer can be stored in Design Workflow. Design Workflow uses Microsoft SQL technology and is a true
V9
691
multi-user tool, allowing far greater control of designs throughout your company. For this type of requirement, refer to the Design Workflow User Manual.
V9
692
Chapter 32
ES Design Explorer Basics
ES Design Explorer provides an efficient way for viewing and managing embroidery designs. With this design management tool, you can browse design files stored on your computer hard disk, CD-ROM, or floppy disk, as well as cut, copy, paste and delete them. It recognizes all design file formats used by ES Designer. See also Supported File and Disk Types. Note ES Design Explorer helps you manage designs in folders. It is not a multi-user database for company-wide design management. For this type of requirement, refer to the Design Workflow User Manual. This section describes how to use ES Design Explorer to access and view designs in folders. It also covers cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting designs in folders.
Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs

ES Design Explorer does not require a separate installation. It works as an integral part of Wilcom ES and is easy to set up and get started. ES Design Explorer displays thumbnails and limited design information whenever a design folder is accessed. You can filter the contents of the display window to show only certain file types. You can also rename folders, add sub-folders and delete folders without leaving ES Design Explorer.
Opening ES Design Explorer

Double-click the desktop icon to open ES Design Explorer. ES Designer will open by default. Navigating to design folders with ES Design Explorer is very similar to browsing with Windows Explorer. Your access to design folders on your network is only limited by network access rights determined by your System Administrator. ES Design Explorer lets you view any supported design file type residing in design folders. See also Supported File and Disk Types.
V9
693
Note If you start ES Design Explorer from the desktop or from the Windows Start button, ES Designer will also open. If your computer is slow or you have many applications running, ES Design Explorer may not open.
To open ES Design Explorer

1 Double-click the ES Design Explorer icon on the Windows desktop. ES Design Explorer and ES Designer open in separate windows. ES Design Explorer defaults to the Design folder, showing all of your EMB designs as thumbnails. Tip If ES Designer is hiding ES Design Explorer from view, switch between them using the Windows Alt + Tab function.
thumbnails plus details thumbnails details menu bar toolbar files dropdown
folder listing design thumbnails split bar designs contained in selected folder
status bar
Note The thumbnail image generation process can be very slow on older machines or if there are a lot of designs in the selected folder. Holding down the Alt key will abort the redraw. The thumbnail will be drawn using a default yellow exclamation mark. This does not mean that the design is missing. See also Locating missing files. 2 3 Drag the split bar between the folders and thumbnails to the left or to the right to resize the window sections. To find a design which is not in the current folder e.g. C:\Designs use the folder listing to locate the required folder.
V9
Chapter 32
694
Tip If not all drives or folders are displayed, click the + to the left of My Computer to show all local and network drives available to your PC. 4 Click a folder in the folder listing to display its contents in the display window. You can list the folder contents in different ways. See Viewing design properties for details. Tip Close ES Design Explorer in View by Details mode so that it opens more quickly next time.
Displaying design thumbnails and summary information

Click Thumbnails to display designs as thumbnails only. Click Thumbnails and Summary to display designs as thumbnails with stitching details. Click Details to view information about a selected design. The designs in ES Design Explorer can be listed as thumbnails only (the default), thumbnails and summary information, or design information only. Tip Designs can also be displayed full screen using ES Designer. See Opening designs in ES Designer for details.
To display design thumbnails and summary information

1 2 Open ES Design Explorer and select a folder. See Viewing design properties for details. Use the viewing options to view the designs in the database in the display format you require:
V9
695
! To display the designs as thumbnails only, click the Thumbnails icon

on the toolbar. Or, select View > Thumbnails.
thumbnail view
! To display the designs as thumbnails with stitching details, click the

Thumbnails and Summary icon on the toolbar. Or, select View > Thumbnails and Summary.
thumbnail and summary view
! To display the designs in a detailed list, click the Details icon on the
toolbar. Or, select View > Details. By default, designs are listed showing design name, file size, file type, version, etc. See also Customizing design lists.
Note The number of selected designs is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the ES Design Explorer window.
V9
Chapter 32
696
Viewing designs in the whole window

Click Folders to hide the folder listing. It is often more convenient to view designs in folders and databases in the whole window. When doing so, you can always browse for designs using the Look In list or Browse Location option.
To view designs in the whole window

1 Click the Folders icon. Designs are now viewable across the window.
Click to run in full-screen mode
To view designs in another folder or database, select from the Look in dropdown list.
V9
697
Tip Alternatively, select View > Browse Location to open the Browse For Folder dialog.
Viewing zipped designs in folders

ES Design Explorer lets you archive and view design files in folders which have been archived by means of the popular WinZip utility. This is a software program which bundles files into a single compressed file with the extension *.ZIP. This can be useful for sending or receiving multiple files via email. See also Archiving design files.
To view zipped designs in folders

1 Open ES Design Explorer and browse to the folder containing the zipped design files.
! If the folder contains individually zipped designs, these will appear

directly in the display window. The file name will appear in italics.
V9
Chapter 32
698
! If the folder contains zipped files containing multiple designs, these

will appear in the folder listing.
Zipped design file appears in folder listing
zipped design name appears in italics
Select the zipped file to view its contents.
Select zipped design file
Contents of zipped file appears in display window
V9
699
Locating missing files

If users incorrectly move files, the normal design thumbnail is usually replaced by a missing design thumbnail when ES Design Explorer is next opened. Each color indicates the likely cause: Icon Description This means that ES Design Explorer cannot find the design file. Replace missing files from backup or another source. If this is not possible, delete the record or refresh the directory. See also Refreshing the display.
This means that ES Design Explorer has found an up-to-date thumbnail but doesnt recognize the format. Use Validate and Refresh to update the display. ES Design Explorer will try to make a replacement next time the folder is opened or refreshed. See also Refreshing the display. ES Design Explorer recognizes a pre-determined set of file types as per the file type dropdown list. If it sees a design that has the required file suffix EMB, BMP, etc but it is unable to read the file, it will display the green question mark. Locate the file and delete it.
Adjusting view settings

ES Design Explorer allows you to customize window settings. It lets you customize the toolbar layout. You can switch between locales English, French, German, etc at any time. Occasionally you may need to refresh the display. You can also change the way selected designs are highlighted, whether thumbnail files are created, and so on. Design Workflow even lets you customize design lists to display only the fields you require in any order you prefer.
Changing locale
During installation of the ES Design Explorer software, optional languages (locales) can be selected for dialogs and messages e.g. English, French, German, etc. You can switch between these locales at any time after installation.
V9
Chapter 32
700
Warning If the default locale is not the same as the language of the Operating System, then this option will not work properly. See also locale in Windows Help for information about changing Windows to suit different locales.
To change locale
1 2 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. Select View > Change Locale to open the locale required. The Choose Locale dialog opens.
Note Only those locales selected when ES Design Explorer was installed will be listed. 3 Select the locale required, and click OK to make the change. Tip See also locale in Windows Help for information about changing keyboards, fonts and so on to suit different locales.
Refreshing the display

Occasionally, your screen will not show changes you have made until you refresh the display. Changes to folders may not display either until you refresh the folder listing. If graphics and thumbnails still do not appear correctly, or if you have updated your Wilcom ES software, you may need to validate and refresh.
To refresh the display
! To refresh the display window, select View > Refresh, or press F5. ! To refresh folders in the folder listing, select View > Refresh Tree
Node. Alternatively, select the node you want to refresh, right-click and select Refresh from the popup menu.
! To validate and refresh a folder, select View > Validate and Refresh.
V9
701
Tip Occasionally, ES Design Explorer displays red, blue or green question marks and a short description instead of a graphic thumbnail. See Locating missing files for details.
Modifying user preferences

Select User Preferences (View menu) to set design view user preferences. You can change several default settings in ES Design Explorer:
! the way selected designs are highlighted ! what happens when you double-click designs.
To modify user preferences
1 2 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. Select View > User Preferences. The User Preferences dialog opens.
Set user preferences
Select Highlight in Full to fully highlight each thumbnail as it is selected. If you only require selected thumbnail borders to be highlighted, clear Highlight in Full. Tip The color and intensity of highlights can be changed in the Windows Control Panel to suit each user. See Windows Help for details about Display Settings.
Select either:
! Double Click Opens Designs if you want the normal Windows

action when you double-click a design name or thumbnail, or
! Double Click Shows Properties if you want to open the Properties

dialog for designs that you double-click. 5 Click OK to save the settings.
V9
Chapter 32
702
Tip If you need more space in the display window for viewing thumbnails, click the Hide/Show folder listing button.
Customizing design lists

Design Workflow lets you customize design lists to display only the fields you require in any order you prefer.
To customize design lists

1 To display designs in a detailed list, click the List icon on the toolbar. Or, select View > Design List. By default, designs are listed showing design name, date first designed, when last changed, when first recorded, etc.
Select Customize Column
Right-click the column header and select the Customize Column from the popup menu. Alternatively, select View > Customize Columns > Design List.
V9
703
The Columns dialog opens.
Select / deselect fields to include in listing
Click to reorder selected fields Click to hide selected fields
3 4
Exclude a field from the listing by deselcting the associated checkbox. Alternatively, highlight the field and select Hide. Adjust the order of selected fields with the Move Up and Move Down buttons. Alternatively, select the column header in list view and drag & drop to a new location.
Drag & drop header to new location
Browsing designs in folders

Information about designs in folders can be viewed in the Properties dialog. Designs can then be browsed using navigation buttons and slide show buttons on this dialog.
V9
Chapter 32
704
Tip You can also filter the contents of any design folder to show only certain types of file e.g. EMB only. See Sorting files in folders for details.
Viewing design properties

Click Design Properties to view information about selected designs. Information about designs in folders can be viewed in the Properties dialog. The data is extracted directly from design files created in ES Designer. You cannot add, delete and edit these fields. Tip Designs in folders can be browsed using navigation buttons and slide show buttons on the Properties dialog. See Sorting files in folders for details.
To view design properties

1 2 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Viewing design properties for details. Double-click a design or click the Design Properties icon. The Properties dialog opens showing all stitch information derived from the design file together with user-defined information.
V9
705
Stitch information from the design file appears grayed out and cannot be edited. The Design, Description, and Selected fields are ranged across the top of the dialog. Use the Selected field at the top of the dialog to select or deselect designs in the main window as you move between designs. See Sorting files in folders for details. Tip If not all text is visible in a field, select the field and use the Arrow, Home and End keys to scroll. Alternatively, resize the dialog. 3 Click OK to close.
Browsing through designs in folders

Navigation buttons on the Properties dialog allow you to move forwards, backwards, as well as to the start and end of all designs in the selected folder. Similarly, you can move forward and back through selected designs. As you browse, the Properties dialog displays a thumbnail together with relevant design information. Tip When you find the design you want, right-click the name or thumbnail and select File > Open with ES Designer to open it in ES Designer. Or choose File > Open to open bitmaps images in a third-party graphics program.
To browse through designs in a folder

1 2 3 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. Select or sort the designs as required. See also Sorting files in folders. Open the Properties dialog. See Viewing design properties for details.
navigation buttons
V9
Chapter 32
706
Browse through the entire folder or a selection of designs as required.

folder navigation selection navigation
start
end
start
end
! If you want to browse the entire folder, use the red navigation
buttons. These allow you to move to the first design, last design, previous design and next design in the folder.
! Use the Selected field to select or deselect designs as you browse. ! If you want to browse through selected designs, use the blue
navigation buttons. These too allow you to move to the first design, last design, previous design and next design in the folder. 5 Click OK.
Browsing designs using slide show buttons

All designs in folder can be displayed as a slide show. The slide show is run from the Properties dialog which displays each designs thumbnail together with relevant information. You can control the speed and direction of the slide show.
To browse designs using slide show buttons

1 2 3 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. Select or sort the designs as required. See also Sorting files in folders. Open the Properties dialog. See Viewing design properties for details.
slide show buttons
stop backwards
fast/slow forwards
Click the Forwards or Backwards button to start the slide show. The slide show automatically scrolls through every design in the folder, looping back to the beginning when it reaches the end.
V9
707
5 6
Click + or - to increase or decrease the speed. Click the Stop button to stop.
Accessing designs in folders

ES Design Explorer lets you select designs residing in folders. Once selected, you can manipulate them in a variety of ways e.g. cutting, copying, pasting, editing the record, and converting designs to other formats. You can also open designs in ES Designer directly from ES Design Explorer for viewing or editing. Tip With the file selected, right-click to open a popup menu which includes the commands Open, Print, Convert, Punch to Tape, Stitch to Machine, and Delete.
Selecting designs in folders

Designs must be selected before an action can be performed e.g. view, open or copy a design. A group of designs, a range, or all the designs in a database can be selected. A group is made up of any selected designs. A range is a series of consecutive designs.
To select designs in a folder

1 2 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Viewing design properties for details. Display designs as thumbnails or as a details list. See Displaying design thumbnails and summary information for details. Tip The thumbnail image generation process can be very slow on older machines or if there are a lot of designs in the database. Holding down the Alt key will abort the redraw. The thumbnail will be drawn using a default yellow exclamation mark. 3 4 Sort designs by required category e.g. sort by customer to list each customers designs consecutively. See Sorting files in folders for details. Select a design or designs.
! To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you select. ! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select. ! To select all designs in the current folder, select Edit > Select All.
V9
Chapter 32
708
To deselect all selected designs, select Edit > Deselect All, or click any unselected design. Tip To deselect a single design amongst a group of selected designs, click it again while holding down the Ctrl key.
Opening designs in ES Designer

Click Open Design to open a selected design or designs in ES Designer. Any designs selected in the ES Design Explorer display window can be opened in ES Designer for viewing or editing.
To open designs in ES Designer

1 2 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Viewing design properties for details. Select a design or designs. Tip If you want to open several designs at once, select the details list view. See Displaying design thumbnails and summary information for details. 3 4 Click the Open icon. All selected files are opened. Alternatively, if displaying designs as thumbnails, double-click a single design thumbnail. Make sure Double Click Opens Designs is selected in the User Preferences dialog. See Modifying user preferences for details. The selected design or designs are displayed in the ES Designer window ready for editing. Tip To switch between ES Designer and ES Design Explorer:
V9
709
! Hold down the Alt key, then tap the Tab key until the ES Designer
icon is highlighted. Release the Alt key.
! Alternatively, click the ES Designer icon on the Windows taskbar. Creating new designs with custom templates
You can open a new design template in ES Designer from within ES Design Explorer.
To create new designs with a custom template

1 Select File > New. ES Designer opens and the New dialog appears.
Note If there is no template other than default, the New dialog may not appear. 2 3 Select a template from the list. Click OK.
Reconnecting ES Design Explorer to ES Designer

Occasionally ES Design Explorer may encounter a problem preventing it from connecting with ES Designer. Follow the instructions below (in the same order as they are listed) to find the solution.
To reconnect ES Design Explorer with ES Designer
! Check that your dongle security device is connected. ! Open ES Design Explorer and check that it runs correctly on its own
close ES Design Explorer, then open ES Designer by clicking its icon on the Windows Desktop.
V9
Chapter 32
710
! If none of the above correct the problem, re-install ES Designer. ! Check that the version of ES Designer you are running is the same as
that registered in ES Design Explorers Shortcut Properties:
! Right-click the ES Design Explorer icon on your Windows Desktop,

then select Properties.
shortcut
! Click the Shortcut tab, and read the last text in the Target field
e.g. ...version=9.0A This version should be identical to the version of ES Designer you are running. If it is not, change it to the correct version and click OK.
! Finally, for very advanced computer users only, run Windows

regedit.exe and delete the sub-tree under: \Software\Wilcom\Wilcom ES\9.0\DesignLib\...
! Install ES Designer again.
V9
711
Chapter 33
ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions
Designs in ES Design Explorer folders can be sorted in various ways. This is useful when you want to select designs for stitching out, printing, archiving, and so on. Once a design is selected in an ES Design Explorer folder, you can send it direct to an embroidery machine or punching machine. You can also batch-convert your EMB and other design files to and from other file formats directly from ES Design Explorer. Create design catalogs containing thumbnail images and/or summary information. These can be sent to a printer, published on your website or intranet, and exported in formats suitable for spreadsheet and database programs, and for integration with third-party e-commerce solutions. Archive design files in folders with the built-in WinZip utility. This can be useful for sending or receiving multiple files via email. You can even view design files within zipped archives. This section describes the more advanced workings of ES Design Explorer from sorting files to stitching, punching, and converting designs. It also describes how to print and publish catalogs of designs, as well as how to archive dormant or unused designs.
Sorting files in folders

The simplest way to sort files in ES Design Explorer folders is by file type e.g. EMB files only. Designs can be further sorted in the following ways:
! As simple sorts using View > Sort by (Name, Type, Size, or Date).
The designs are arranged according to the sort selection. The designs can be sorted whether they are displayed as thumbnails or as a details list.
! As simple sorts using details list headings: by File Name, Size, File
Type, Version, Date, Stitches, or Description. Designs are arranged according to the heading selected, and repeating the sort reverses the order. Designs must be displayed as a details list.
V9
712
! As a complex sort in up to two levels in ascending or descending order:

by Colors, Date Designed, Design Name, File Type, Height, Stitches, Version, Width or None. Designs can be displayed as thumbnails, thumbnails with stitching details, or details lists.
Limiting file types displayed

With ES Design Explorer you can filter the contents of any design folder to show only certain types of file e.g. only EMB files.
To limit file types displayed

1 2 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details. Click the Files dropdown on the toolbar.
Select:
! All Files to show every file type in the folder. ! Artwork Files to display only BMP and PNG files. ! Any other option to display only files of that type e.g. templates. Running simple sorts using the View menu
You can sort your thumbnails or details lists by any of four types.
To run a simple sort using the View menu

1 2 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. List the designs as either thumbnails or as a details list. See Displaying design thumbnails and summary information for details.
V9
713
Select View > Sort by Name, Sort by Type, Sort by Size, or Sort by Date. The designs will be sorted according to the option selected.
Running simple sorts using the details list

You can sort details lists by clicking the column headings.
To run a simple sort using the details list

1 2 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. List the designs as a details list. See Displaying design thumbnails and summary information for details.
Click column heading to sort
3 4
Click the heading at a column to be sorted e.g. Name. The designs will be sorted in the order of the selection. Click the heading again to reverse the order.
Running complex sorts

Use Sort to run a complex sort using the Sort dialog. You can sort designs by various criteria such as Colors, Design Date, Design Name, File Type, etc. ES Design Explorer lets you sort them by up to two levels, in ascending or descending order.
To run a complex sort

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details.
V9
Chapter 33
714
2 3
List the designs as a details list. See Displaying design thumbnails and summary information for details. Select View > Sort. The Sort dialog opens.
Select Level 1 criterion
Select Level 2 criterion
Select the first sort criterion:
! Select the main category you want from the Sort By list e.g.
Date.
! Select Ascending to sort letters from A to Z and numbers from

lowest to highest, or Descending to sort in the reverse order. 5 Select the second level sort criterion:
! Select a different category from the And Then By dropdown e.g.

Stitches.
! Select Ascending or Descending.

6 Click OK. In the above example, the details list will display all designs by date, together with number of stitches used.
Emailing designs direct

Use Email Design to email design information direct. ES Design Explorer lets you email design information direct. This includes all files associated with the design record, including design files, TrueView, thumbnail, artwork and stitchout images as well as stitch files.
V9
715
To email designs direct

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details.
Email selected designs
Select one or more design records and either:
! Click the Email icon on toolbar, or ! Right-click the design record and select Email Design from the
popup menu. The Email Design Options dialog opens.
Select files to include
Select the files you want to include in the email. Note If all options are grayed out, your administrator must configure the email settings for your user account. See Assigning passwords and email privileges in the User Manual.
V9
Chapter 33
716
Click OK. The selected files are attached to an email and the subject line populated with the names of the selected designs.
Stitching and punching designs direct

Once a design is selected in a folder, you can:
! send it direct to any embroidery machine connected to the ES Designer

system.
! send it direct to any punching machine and punch the tape.

Tip When a file is selected, right-click to open a popup menu which includes the commands Open, Print, Convert, Punch to Tape, Stitch to Machine, and Delete.
Stitching designs direct

Use Stitch Selected Designs to stitch a design directly to machine. Select one or more designs in a folder using ES Design Explorer. You can then stitch to any embroidery machine connected to your ES Designer system.
To stitch a design direct

1 2 3 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. Select and sort the design(s) to be stitched using Sort or Search. See Sorting files in folders and Selecting designs in folders for details. Click the Stitch Selected Designs icon. The Stitch Options dialog opens.
Select machine type and format
Select a machine type and format from the dropdown lists. To define or modify the machines settings. See Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager for details.
V9
717
Click OK and wait. The ES Machine Manager window opens. See the ES Machine Manager Supplement for details.
Punching designs direct

Use Punch Selected Designs to punch a design directly to a punching machine. Select one or more designs in a folder using ES Design Explorer. You can then punch to any paper tape punching machine connected to your ES Designer system.
To punch a design direct

1 2 3 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. Select and sort the design(s) to be punched using Sort or Search. See Sorting files in folders and Selecting designs in folders for details. Click the Punch Selected Designs icon. The Punch Options dialog opens.
Select machine type
Select a machine type from the dropdown list and click OK. The Tape Manager dialog opens. See Punching designs to paper tape for details.
Select tape punch Select to label tape Select to automatically rewind tape before stitching Select to punch in reverse direction
V9
Chapter 33
718
Printing and publishing designs

Catalogs of designs in a folder contain thumbnails and/or summary information. These can be sent to a printer, published on your website or intranet, and exported in formats suitable for spreadsheet and database programs, and for integration with third-party e-commerce solutions. Tip Before printing, publishing or exporting, sort the designs into useful groups. For example, sort by Type or search by Customer. See Sorting files in folders for details.
Printing production worksheets

Use Print to print production worksheets for selected design(s). You can print production worksheets for selected groups of designs in folders, and include thumbnails of each design in the worksheet. Note Unlike Print Designs, this option can provide all of the design and sewing information available, but it uses far more paper to do so. See also Printing design catalogs.
To print a production worksheet

1 2 3 4 5 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. Select and sort the designs to be printed using Sort. See Sorting files in folders for details. Click the Print icon. The Print dialog opens. Select the printer you want to use, and enter the number of copies of the worksheet you require. To customize the worksheet, click Options.
V9
719
The Print Options dialog opens.
Set production worksheet options to show the information you want in the format you require. See Setting production worksheet print options for details. Click OK when finished, then ensure that your printer settings are correct in the Windows Print Setup dialog. Note The dialog and the settings available will vary from printer to printer. See your printer manual for details.
Click OK.
Printing design catalogs

Printed catalogs of your designs are a handy sales and marketing tool. They contain thumbnails of the designs plus limited text details. You can prepare catalogs of all your designs, and others to suit specific markets, types of design, and individual customers.
To print a design catalog

1 2 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. Select and sort the designs to be printed in the catalog using Sort. See Sorting files in folders for details.
V9
Chapter 33
720
Select File > Print Designs. The Print Designs Options dialog opens.
4 5 6
Change the Scale (%) amount if you want your thumbnails bigger or smaller. Select Summary if you want design details to be printed. Click Preview as required.
7 8
Click Printer to select a printer, paper size and other options in the Windows Print dialog for the printer attached to your PC. Click OK to print the catalog. Tip If the catalog requires more than one page, you can select which page to print in the Windows Print dialog.
Publishing design catalogs for browser viewing

You can convert your designs to the HTML and PNG formats suitable for viewing by any browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer. This allows you to publish designs throughout the company via an intranet, or throughout the world via the internet. You can also attach catalogs to emails and send them as design samples.
To publish a design catalog for browser viewing

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder.
V9
721
See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. 2 3 Select and sort the designs to be published in the catalog using Sort. See Sorting files in folders for details. Select File > Publish Designs. The Publish Options dialog opens.
4 5 6 7
Change the Scale (%) amount if you want your thumbnails bigger or smaller. Select the number of rows and number of columns for the final output, which will appear as a table. De-select Detailed if you dont want design details to appear. Enter a filename and location in the Catalog Name field e.g. C:\Designs\Catalogs\Crests.htm or accept the default settings. Tip Make a separate folder for each catalog the catalog conversion will generate a PNG file for a thumbnail of each design, another PNG file for a TrueView of each design, and an HTML file for each page.
Click OK to start converting the designs.
V9
Chapter 33
722
Your browser e.g. Windows Internet Explorer will open automatically at the first page of designs when the conversion is finished.
If your browser does not open automatically:
! Open your browser e.g. Windows Internet Explorer via the

Windows Start button.
! Click the Address field, browse to the selected folder, and

double-click the first HTM file containing thumbnails e.g. Crests1.htm. There will be at least two HTM files with similar names e.g. Crests.htm, Crests1.htm, etc. The filename without a number is the index to all of the HTM files. Your browser will display one or more design thumbnails in the window. 9 Examine the contents of the page. Click Next Page to view the next screen of thumbnails. Tip Double-click a thumbnail to view its TrueView image in real size. 10 Repeat the procedure to adjust thumbnail size and table layout as required.
V9
723
Exporting design catalogs

Design details can be converted to the Tab and CSV (Comma Separated Value files) formats suitable for use by most spreadsheets. See your spreadsheet program for details.
To export a design catalog

1 2 3 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. Select and sort the designs to be published in the catalog using Sort. See Sorting files in folders for details. Select File > Export Designs. The Export to File Options dialog opens.
Click either Tabs or Commas, depending on your spreadsheet programs recommended format. The Save As dialog opens.
5 6
Select a folder and filename to store the CSV or TXT file. Click Save. The designs will be generated and saved in the selected format.
V9
Chapter 33
724
Converting design files in folders

Use Convert to convert from one design file type to another. You can convert your EMB and other design files to and from other file formats directly from ES Design Explorer. Tip You can use this capability in conjunction with the Auto Color Merge feature. The Auto Color Merge feature reads thread color information for CND files from an associated TXT file so that stitches are displayed in the correct colors when they are converted to EMB. See Color merging Melco CND files for details.
To convert design files in folders

1 2 3 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. Select the file(s) to be converted. See Selecting designs in folders for details. Click the Convert icon. The Convert Options dialog opens.
Enter location for converted designs
Select file types to convert to
Select the file types you want to convert to.
V9
725
Browse to the folder where you want to store the converted designs, using the ... button and the Browse for Folder dialog.
Click OK to start the conversion. The converted designs will be stored in the nominated folder. Note Embroidery disks must be formatted to suit the embroidery machine you intend to use or the machine will not be able to read the design. Select File > Format Embroidery Disk to format a disk to required format. See Formatting embroidery disks for details.
Archiving design files

ES Design Explorer lets you archive and view design files in folders which have been archived by means of the popular WinZip utility. This is a software program which bundles files into a single compressed file with the extension *.ZIP. This can be useful for sending or receiving multiple files via email.
Saving design files to a single compressed file

Use WinZip to archive selected designs to a single compressed file. ES Design Explorer provides a shortcut to the WinZip utility via the toolbar.
To save design files to a single compressed file

1 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details.
V9
Chapter 33
726
2 3
Select a folder and select the design or designs you want to archive. Click the WinZip icon or right-click and select Create Zip Archive from the popup menu.
! If you have selected one design file, the system will create a ZIP file
taking the designs name as its own.
! If you have selected more than one design file, the Create Zip
Archive dialog opens.
Choose whether to archive the selected files individually or as a single file.
! If you click Individuals, the system will create a ZIP file for every
design, taking the designs name as its own.
! If click One, the Save As dialog opens.

Choose a location
Enter a file name
Enter a file name for your zipped file and click Save. The selected designs are copied to the zip file. You can view them in the specified folder. See Viewing zipped designs in folders for details.
V9
727
Extracting design files from a zipped archive

ES Design Explorer allows you to extract design files from a zipped archive directly to a database. This is useful, for example, if you are receiving zipped designs via email.
To extract design files from a zipped archive

1 2 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details. Select the folder which contains the design or designs you want to extract.
Zipped design file appears in directory tree
zipped design name appears in italics
3 4
Select the individual design to extract in the display window or the zipped file in the directory tree. Within the zipped file, select the design(s) you want.
! To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select. ! To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you select.
5 Select File > Extract.
V9
Chapter 33
728
The Save As dialog opens prompting you to specify the location of the extracted file.
Choose a location
Choose a location and click Save. The designs are extracted to the selected location. If you have saved them to a location referenced by ES Design Explorer, you can now view them. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details.
Organizing designs in folders

You can rename, duplicate and edit database information without opening designs. You can also rename folders, add sub-folders and delete folders without leaving ES Design Explorer.
Renaming, adding and deleting folders

You can rename folders, add sub-folders and delete folders without leaving ES Design Explorer.
To rename, add or delete folders

1 2 3 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details. Browse to the folders you want to rename, delete or add sub-folders to. See Browsing designs in folders for details. Add, rename, or delete folders as required:
V9
729
! To add a sub-folder to another, select the folder and right-click.

Select Add Sub-directory and type in the name when the new sub-folder appears.
! To rename a folder, select it and right-click. Select Rename from the

popup menu, and type in the new name.
! To delete a folder, select it and right-click. Select Delete from the

popup menu. You will be prompted to confirm the deletion.
Copying and pasting designs

Once a selected design is copied, it can then be pasted to another location using Paste. A copied design can be pasted any number of times.
To copy and paste a design

1 2 3 4 5 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details. Select any number of designs. See Selecting designs in folders for details. Select Edit > Copy. Change to another folder using the directory if required. A design can be pasted to the same folder as the original design. Select Edit > Paste. If the selected design e.g. Bear.EMB is pasted into the current folder, and the current folder contains the original design, or a file of the same name, the new design is automatically named Copy of Bear.EMB. You can then change the name of the new file by right-clicking its name, selecting Rename and typing the new name. Press Enter to complete the name change. Note If you rename the file, ensure that the three letter extension e.g. EMB is not altered.
Cutting and pasting designs

When a selected design is cut, the design is removed from the current folder. The design can then be pasted at another location using the Paste command.
V9
Chapter 33
730
To cut and paste designs

1 2 3 4 5 6 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details. Select any number of designs. See Selecting designs in folders for details. Select Edit > Cut. A confirmation dialog opens. Click Yes to cut the design. Browse to the folder where you want to paste the file or files. Select Edit > Paste to paste the selected design into the new folder. If a design of the same name already exists, each pasted copy is renamed.
Renaming designs in folders

Duplicate designs, designs with misleading names, and designs with misspelled names can be quickly renamed without opening them.
To rename a design in a database or folder

1 2 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details. Ensure that the design you select is not currently open in ES Designer.
V9
731
Right-click and select Rename from the popup menu.
Rename selected design
The Rename Design dialog opens.
Bear
Enter new name
4 5
Enter the new name. Click OK. The original design name is overwritten.
Deleting designs
Delete designs to remove them permanently from your PC.
To delete designs from ES Design Explorer

1 2 3 4 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs for details. Select any number of designs. See Selecting designs in folders for details. Select Edit > Delete. A confirmation dialog opens. Click Yes to delete the design.
V9
Chapter 33
732
Warning The file is removed permanently from the folder.
V9
733
PART IX
HARDWARE & SOFTWARE SETUP

Setting up hardware
This section describes how to set up digitizing tablets, embroidery machines, paper tape readers and punches, and scanners. It also describes how to calibrate the monitor. See Setting up Hardware for details.
Using digitizing tablets

This section describes how to register both the menu chart and enlargement drawing on the digitizing tablet so that ES Designer can interpret the commands you select as well as the outlines you digitize. It also explains how to change the drawing scale, shift an enlargement drawing, and how to select preset spacing values using the menu chart. See Using Digitizing Tablets for details.
Changing system settings

This section describes how to change TrueView display, grid spacing and positioning, and design window scrolling options. It also describes how to save designs automatically as you work. There is also information about how to adjust the pointer position display, paste position options, and other general options. See Changing System Settings for details.
V9
734
Chapter 34
Setting up Hardware
You will need to connect peripheral devices for use with ES Designer. These may include digitizing tablets, plotters, printers, paper tape readers and punches, appliqu cutters, scanners and embroidery machines. Different devices are set up in different ways some in Windows, via the Control Panel, others within ES Designer itself. This section describes how to set up digitizing tablets, embroidery machines, paper tape readers and punches, and scanners. It also describes how to calibrate the monitor. Note For instructions on connecting devices to your computer and setting up in Windows, see the documentation for the device as well as your Microsoft Windows documentation.
Peripheral device connection settings

Peripheral devices can be connected to your computer via serial ports, parallel ports, a specialized network card or an ethernet network. Note Local area networks (LANs) commonly use ethernet networks for machine connection.
Serial port settings

Use Hardware Setup (Special menu) to enter serial port settings. PC serial COM ports are male connectors, and can be either 9-pin or 25-pin. They are named COM1, COM2, COM3, etc. When you set up a digitizer or machine that is connected via a serial port, you need to enter the serial port settings in ES Designer as part of the setup procedure. See Setting up digitizing tablets or Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager.
V9
735
The number of available ports limits the number of devices you can connect. If additional ports are required, you can add them. Multi-port serial cards can also be used. See a PC technician about your requirements. The following table provides standard settings for various devices. They are a guide only. Settings for the same device may vary according to manufacturer. Check the documentation supplied with the device before setting up. Device Digitizer * Plotter Tape Punch Tape Reader Embroidery Machine Port COM1 COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2 Baud 9600 9600 4800 4800 9600 Hand shaking None XOn/XOff XOn/XOff XOn/XOff Hardware Data bits 8 8 8 8 8 Stop bits 1 1 1 1 1 Parity None None None None None
* The digitizer applies only to 21D, 45, 65
Note You must be able to identify the ports on your computer. If in doubt, consult a PC technician.
To enter serial port settings

1 Select Special > Hardware Setup. The Hardware Setup dialog opens.
Select device
Click Values
Select a device from the Type list and click Values.
V9
Chapter 34
Setting up Hardware
736
The <Device> Setup dialog opens.
Select serial port
Click Setup
3 4
Select a serial port from the Port list. Click Setup. The Serial Port Setup dialog opens.
Enter port settings for embroidery machine or selected device
Enter the Baud rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits and Parity and Handshaking settings for the device. Note The port settings must match those of the embroidery machine or selected device. The type of handshaking must match the type of cable you are using. Check the communications setup section of the documentation that came with the device.
Click OK.
Parallel port settings

Parallel ports are used to connect some embroidery machines. They are named LPT1, LPT2, etc. When you set up the machine, select the parallel port and the required protocol, and complete the machine setup procedure. See Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager for details.
Network settings
If an embroidery machine connection uses a Melco StarLAN network with a Melco StarLAN card, enter the network settings. You do this as part of the procedure for setting up or modifying machines in ES Designer. See Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager for details.
V9
737
See the document Connecting Melco Embroidery Machines to Wilcom ES Designer Embroidery software for more information. This document is available on the Wilcom website (http://www.wilcom.com.au).
Ethernet settings
Use Stitch to Stitch Manager (File menu) to enter ethernet connection settings. Enter the following information when setting up embroidery machines that are connected using an ethernet network. See also Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager.
To enter ethernet connection settings

1 Select File > Stitch to Stitch Manager. The Stitch to Stitch Manager dialog opens.
Select a machine
Click Setup
Select a machine from the Machine Identification list and click Setup.
Select Ethernet
Select embroidery machine
Click Find
Select Ethernet from the Port list. An additional field, Peripheral Name, and two checkboxes appear in the Connected To panel.
From the Peripheral Name list, select the embroidery machine you are setting up.
V9
Chapter 34
Setting up Hardware
738
If the machine you require is not in the list, click Find. The system searches for all machines connected on the ethernet and adds them to the list. 5 6 Select Auto Delete to automatically delete files from machine memory after stitching is complete. Select Auto Queue to automatically queue the design as the next one to stitch. Deselect it to send the design to the end of the existing queue. 7 Complete the machine setup as normal. See Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager for details.
Setting up digitizing tablets

Digitizing tablets generally connect to COM1 but can connect to any available serial COM port. They must be set up in ES Designer to specify the format and the preferred pointer display mode. ES Designer can only support one tablet at a time. You can select from standard digitizer formats or, if the format you need is not available, define a new one. See Defining and modifying digitizing tablet formats for details.
Digitizing tablet limitations

ES Designer V6.0 and V6.1 cannot use the Windows-compatible drivers of some tablets e.g. GTCO and Calcomp tablets. Earlier versions of WinTab do not free the COM port, even when it is not in use. This means ES Designer is unable to communicate with the digitizing tablet. Check with the tablet manufacturer to obtain a version of tablet software which will free the port when not in use. Alternatively, the software may disable or uninstall WinTab, or use another COM port when working with ES Designer.
Setting up digitizing tablets

Use Hardware Setup (Special menu) to setup digitizing tablets. You can set up your digitizing tablet in ES Designer to define the required format and pointer display mode. The pointer display mode can be set to Point or Stream. If you change this setting on the digitizing tablet itself, you must also change it in ES Designer.
V9
739
Point mode
In Point mode, the pointer on the screen does not move when you move the digitizer puck on the tablet. The pointer position on the design area of the design window is only updated when you click a button on the digitizer puck.
Stream mode
In Stream mode, the pointer position is continually updated. When you move the digitizer puck on the tablet, the pointer moves on the screen. Note If you use Stream mode, you need to set the digitizer to transmit at 20 data packets per second or less. The baud rate for the digitizing tablet and serial port must both be set to 9600 baud. See Serial port settings for details. To avoid loss of data at high speed, it is important to set up the digitizer correctly. If it can only transmit at greater than 20 data packets per second, reduce the baud rate of the digitizer from 9600 baud to 2400 baud.
To set up digitizing tablets

1 2 Connect the digitizing tablet and puck using the accompanying instructions, and run ES Designer. Select Special > Hardware Setup. The Hardware Setup dialog opens.
Select Digitizer
Click Values
From the Type list, select Digitizer. To change the settings of an existing tablet, select it, then click Values.
V9
Chapter 34
Setting up Hardware
740
The Digitizer Setup dialog opens.
Enter a name
Select digitizer format
Select Point or Stream input mode Select COM port Enter serial port settings
4 5 6
In the Name field, enter a name for the digitizing tablet. In the Comment field, enter a comment as required. From the List of Formats list, select the required digitizer format. Alternatively, select Auto Detect to automatically match the format to the connected digitizer. Note Not all digitizers can be automatically detected by ES Designer. For these tablets, you can define a new format or modify existing format settings. See Defining and modifying digitizing tablet formats for details.
From the Input Mode list, select Point or Stream. Note This setting must be the same as the one you specified on the digitizing tablet.
8 9
From the Port list, select the COM port to which the digitizer is connected. Click Setup to enter the serial port settings. These settings must be the same as those set on the digitizing tablet, or ES Designer will not be able to communicate with it. See Serial port settings for details. Note If you selected Stream mode, set the Baud value to 9600.
10 Click OK to close the Digitizer Setup dialog. 11 Click Close.
V9
741
Defining and modifying digitizing tablet formats

If the digitizing tablet format you require is not set up in ES Designer, you can create a new format, or modify an existing format to match the output of your tablet. Before you start, review the documentation provided with the digitizing tablet, and select a supported format. Use the specified settings to create the new format in ES Designer. Note This functionality is provided for advanced users with knowledge of the data protocols supported by their digitizing tablet. Only use it if your digitizing tablet does not work with any existing formats.
To define or modify digitizing tablet formats

1 Access the Digitizer Setup dialog. See Setting up digitizing tablets for details.
Modify an existing format Create a new format
Select digitizer format
In the Format panel:
! To modify an existing format, select the format and click Modify. ! To define a new format, click New.
V9
Chapter 34
Setting up Hardware
742
The Digitizer User-Defined Format Setup dialog opens.
Enter a format name Enter format string for tablet Enter digitizing scale
3 4
In the Format Name field, enter a name for the new or modified format. In the Format String field, enter the format string your digitizing tablet outputs. Obtain this information from the digitizing tablet documentation. In the Scale field, enter the scale at which you are digitizing. For example, a scale of 3.0 means your on-screen design will be one third of the size you digitized.
Click OK. Note To set up the digitizing tablet with the new or modified format, complete the standard setup procedure. See To set up digitizing tablets for details.
Setting up embroidery machines

Before you can send designs for stitching, you must configure the machine in ES Designer. You can add machines, change settings for machines already set up, or delete machines that are no longer required. ES Designer provides alternative means for sending designs directly to embroidery machine for stitching. Depending on your software options, you can stitch to machine using either Stitch Manager or ES Machine Manager. For details about Stitch Manager, see Stitching designs with Stitch Manager. ES Machine Manager is described in a separate ES Machine Manager Supplement.
V9
743
Note Your machine must be set up through Stitch Manager if you are sending to Stitch Manager, or ES Machine Manager if sending to ES Machine Manager.
Setting up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager

Use Hardware Setup (Special menu) to setup embroidery machines for Stitch Manager. To set up a machine you need to define a name, the port it is attached to, and the protocol it uses. You can select whether to download directly to the selected machine or to receive a confirmation message each time. For every machine, you need to select the machine formats it supports. You can select from among standard formats, or create new formats if necessary. See Changing Machine Formats for details. Tip Machines that support serial feedback need to be set up in ES Machine Manager. See the ES Machine Manager Supplement for details.
To set up embroidery machines for Stitch Manager

1 Connect the embroidery machine using the accompanying instructions, and run ES Designer. The identical port settings must now also be entered in ES Designer Hardware Setup. 2 Select Special > Hardware Setup. The Hardware Setup dialog opens.
Select Direct Machine Connection
Click New to add a machine Click Values to change existing machine settings
From the Type list, select Direct Machine Connection.
! To change the settings of an existing machine, select it, then click

Values.
V9
Chapter 34
Setting up Hardware
744
! To add a new machine, click New. If no machines are set up, you are
automatically prompted to add a new one. The Embroidery Machine Connection dialog opens.
Enter machine name
Select COM port and connection protocol
Enter serial port settings
4 5 6
In the Name field, enter a name for the machine. In the Comment field, enter a comment if desired. From the Port list, select the COM port to which the machine is connected. See also Ethernet settings. Tip See Connecting Melco Embroidery Machines to Wilcom ES Designer Embroidery software for more information. This document is available on the Wilcom website http://www.wilcom.com.au.
From the Protocol list, select the protocol for the connection between the computer and embroidery machine. The connection type on the computer will be either standard serial, parallel, serial to parallel converted (DCi serial), or an interface card such as Melco Starlan or Ethernet card. See the documentation supplied with the embroidery machine to determine the appropriate connection.
Click Setup to enter the serial port settings. These settings must be the same as those set on the embroidery machine, or ES Designer will not be able to communicate with it. See Serial port settings for details.
In the Connected To panel, select Auto Download to directly download designs to the assigned machine. Deselect it to confirm before sending.
10 In the Machine Type panel, select the compatible machine formats.
V9
745
To do this, select compatible machine types in the Available list, and click > to move them to the For this machine list.
Select a machine type
machine types supported by your machine
Click > arrow to place in For this machine list
Note Machine format values can be added or changed if required. See Changing Machine Formats for details. 11 Click OK to return to the Hardware Setup dialog. 12 Click Close.
Deleting embroidery machines from Stitch Manager

Use Hardware Setup (Special menu) to delete embroidery machines from Stitch Manager. Delete embroidery machines from your system setup if they are no longer required.
To delete embroidery machines from Stitch Manager

Select Direct Machine Connection Select machine to delete Click Delete to remove the machine
2 3 4
From the Type list, select Direct Machine Connection. Select a machine and click Delete. Click OK.
V9
Chapter 34
Setting up Hardware
746
Tip To delete from Stitch Manager, click the Delete machine unit icon.
Setting up paper tape readers and punches

Use Paper Tape Read (File menu) to setup paper tape readers and punches. Set up paper tape readers and punches from within ES Designer. The values you enter here are the default values when reading and punching tapes. Paper tape formats supported in ES Designer include Tajima, Barudan, Zangs, ZSK and Pfaff.
Setting up paper tape readers

To set up a paper tape reader, you need to connect it, select a machine format and enter the serial port settings for it.
To set up paper tape readers

1 2 Connect the tape reader using the accompanying instructions, and run ES Designer. Select File > Paper Tape > Read. The Choose Read Tape Type dialog opens.
Select required machine format for reading designs
3 4
From the Choose input machine list, select the required machine format. Click OK.
V9
747
The Tape Manager dialog opens.
Select to confirm tape reader setup before reading Select required reader
5 6 7
Select the Confirm Setup checkbox if you want to confirm the setup of the tape reader before reading. In the Reader Setup panel, select the required reader from the Reader Name list. Click Setup to enter the serial port settings. These settings must be the same as those set on the tape reader, or ES Designer will not be able to communicate with it. See Serial port settings for details.
Click Exit.
Setting up paper tape punches

Use Paper Tape Punch (File menu) to setup paper tape punches. Set up paper tape punches in ES Designer to select the machine format, and specify options such as labels, rewinding and punching in the reverse sequence.
To set up paper tape punches

1 2 Connect the tape punch using the accompanying instructions, and run ES Designer. Select File > Paper Tape > Punch.
V9
Chapter 34
Setting up Hardware
748
The Choose Write Tape Type dialog opens.
Select required machine format for punching designs
3 4
From the Choose output machine list, select the required machine format. Click OK. The Tape Manager dialog opens.
Select to confirm punch setup before punching
Select required tape punch Select to include a label with the design
5 6 7
Select the Confirm Setup checkbox if you want to confirm the setup of the tape punch before punching. From the Punch Name list, select the required tape punch. Click Setup to enter the serial port settings. These settings must be the same as those set on the tape punch, or ES Designer will not be able to communicate with it. See Serial port settings for details.
Select the With Label checkbox to include a label with the design. Type the label text in the field. The machine format and date are also included. Select the AutoRewind at Start checkbox, if supported by the machine format, to automatically rewind the tape before stitching.
V9
749
10 Click the Reverse Direction checkbox to punch in the reverse direction to the current stitching sequence. This lets you punch directly from tapes that were stored on take-up rolls without rewinding. 11 Click Exit.
Setting up scanners
Use Scanner Setup (File menu) to setup scanners. ES Designer supports TWAIN-compatible scanners.
To set up scanners
1 2 3 4 Connect the scanner using the accompanying instructions. Set it up in Windows using the accompanying instructions and/or the Microsoft Windows documentation. Start ES Designer. Select File > Scanner Setup. The Select Source dialog opens displaying a list of scanner drivers loaded on your computer.
Select a scanning driver
Select the scanning driver to use, then click Select. Note If you have trouble with scanning after re-starting ES Designer, there may be a conflict with previously installed scanner drivers. Re-install ES Designer and test the scanner. If the selected scanner driver does not work in ES Designer, select another scanner driver from the list. There are usually two installed for each scanner.
V9
Chapter 34
Setting up Hardware
750
Calibrating the monitor

Use Hardware Setup (Special menu) to calibrate the monitor. You need to calibrate your monitor so that designs at 1:1 scale appear at real size. Do this when you first install ES Designer or whenever you change your monitor.
To calibrate the monitor

Select Display Monitor
Click Values
2 3
From the Type list, select Display Monitor. Click Values. The Screen Calibration dialog opens.
Measure height
Measure width
4 5 6 7
Measure the height and width of the dialog box. Enter the measurement in the Width and Height fields. Click OK to return to the Hardware Setup dialog. Click Close.
V9
751
Chapter 35
Using Digitizing Tablets
You can use a digitizing tablet and puck with ES Designer as an alternative to digitizing directly on-screen. To use a tablet, you place an enlargement drawing on the active area, and use the puck to mark reference points. You can also select commands with the puck and menu chart provided with the software. This section describes how to register both the menu chart and enlargement drawing on the digitizing tablet so that ES Designer can interpret the commands you select as well as the outlines you digitize. It also explains how to change the drawing scale, shift an enlargement drawing, and how to select preset spacing values using the menu chart. Note Before you start, you need to set up your digitizing tablet. See Setting up digitizing tablets for details.
Registering the menu chart

Use Tablet (Special menu) to register the menu chart. The menu chart provided with the software lets you select commands directly on the digitizing tablet. Before you can use it, you need to register it. A copy of the menu chart is provided in this manual together with a key to the menu chart icons. See Quick Reference Guide for details. Tip If you prefer to use a bigger or smaller menu chart, scale it e.g. on a photocopier and register the scaled version.
To register the menu chart

1 Select Special > Tablet.
V9
752
The Tablet Setup dialog opens.
Select Register Menu
2 3 4 5
In the Menu Chart panel, select the Register Menu checkbox. Deselect all other checkboxes and click OK. Place the menu chart on the digitizing tablet, leaving room for the enlargement drawing. Click the three menu chart reference points with Button 1 of the digitizing puck.
Menu Chart Ref Point 1 Menu Chart Ref Point 2 Menu Chart Ref Point 3
Menu Chart
Digitizing Puck Button 1
V9
753
Note Unless you move the menu chart, you do not need to register it again.
Preparing an enlargement drawing

When you digitize with a tablet, you use an enlargement drawing to trace the shapes and outlines of the design in the same way you use backdrops on-screen. Before you start, you need to prepare the enlargement drawing.
To prepare an enlargement drawing

1 Convert the artwork to a technical drawing. Generally the drawing will be three times larger than the final embroidery. Tip If the drawing is in hard copy, scale it using a transparency projector or photocopier. If you used a graphics application to create the artwork, scale it before you print it out. 2 Modify the drawing to make it suitable for embroidery:
! Define shapes that can be easily filled with stitches. ! Overlap and distort shapes to compensate for push-pull. ! Draw digitizing guidelines e.g. stitch angle lines.
3 Draw origin and rotation reference points. These points set the position and orientation of the enlargement drawing on the digitizing tablet. Tip If the drawing is bigger than the digitizing tablet, enter additional points to help you shift the drawing as you digitize. See also Shifting an enlargement drawing.
V9
Chapter 35
754
Write the name and scale of the enlargement drawing for future reference.
rotation reference point
name
flower
scale
3:1
origin
Registering an enlargement drawing

Use Tablet (Special menu) to register an enlargement drawing. When you place an enlargement drawing on the digitizing tablet, you need to register it so ES Designer can interpret the design. To register an enlargement drawing, enter the scale, and digitize the origin and rotation points on the tablet. The origin and rotation points should be marked on the enlargement drawing. If they are not, you need to draw them in. Note The menu chart and enlargement drawing should not overlap. If they do, you may need to shift the design as you digitize, or move and re-register the menu chart. See Shifting an enlargement drawing and Registering the menu chart.
To register an enlargement drawing

1 Select Special > Tablet.
V9
755
The Tablet Setup dialog opens.
Enter drawing scale
Select Register Drawing
Deselect Register Chart Select Save as defaults
In the Drawing Scale panel, enter the scale of the enlargement drawing. Tip To calculate the scale, divide the height of the enlargement drawing by the required height of the final embroidery. Enlargement drawings are generally prepared at a scale of 3.00.
3 4 5
Select the Register Drawing checkbox. Deselect the Register Menu checkbox. Select the Save as defaults checkbox. This saves the registration information for this drawing so you do not have to re-register each time you resume digitizing.
6 7 8
Click OK. Place the enlargement drawing on the digitizing tablet. Click the origin and rotation points of the drawing with Button 1 of the digitizing puck.
V9
Chapter 35
756
This completes the registration.

rotation reference point
flower 3:1
origin
Changing the drawing scale

Use Tablet (Special menu) to change the drawing scale. You can change drawing scale during digitizing. When you change the scale, ES Designer automatically resizes the object outlines and regenerates the stitches.
To change the drawing scale

1 Select Special > Tablet. The Tablet Setup dialog opens.
Enter new drawing scale Select Select
In the Drawing Scale panel, enter the new drawing scale. Tip To calculate the scale, divide the height the enlargement drawing by the required height of the final embroidery. Enlargement drawings are generally prepared at a scale of 3.00.
3 4 5
Select the Resize Design to Match Drawing checkbox. In the Drawing Position panel, select the Register Drawing checkbox. Click OK.
V9
757
Digitize the origin and the rotation reference points to re-register at the new size. The design is resized to the new scale.
Shifting an enlargement drawing

Use Tablet (Special menu) to shift an enlargement drawing. If the drawing is bigger than the digitizing tablet, you can move it across the tablet and continue digitizing. To move a drawing you need to draw, and digitize, two additional reference points. These points must be over the active part of the digitizing tablet, both before and after the move. Note If the enlargement drawing overlaps the menu chart when you shift it, move the chart and register it again. See also Registering the menu chart.
To shift an enlargement drawing

1 Draw additional reference points on the enlargement drawing. Position the points so that they will be on the active part of the digitizing tablet both before and after the move. Tip If you are shifting the drawing up or down, draw the additional reference points horizontally. If you are shifting the drawing left or right, draw the reference points vertically. 2 Select Special > Tablet. The Tablet Setup dialog opens.
Deselect Select
Deselect
3 4
In the Drawing Position panel, select the Shift Drawing checkbox. Deselect the Register Drawing and Register Menu checkboxes, and click OK.
V9
Chapter 35
758
Click the additional reference points with Button 1 on the digitizing puck.
Move the drawing so that the part you want to digitize next is over the active area of the digitizing tablet, and click the additional reference points again.
The drawing is re-registered in the new position.
Using a digitizing puck

With a digitizing tablet, you generally use a puck instead of a mouse to mark reference points and select commands from the menu chart.
V9
759
To use a digitizing puck

Position the cross-hairs of the puck over a point on the enlargement drawing or menu square, then press one of the four buttons. Function Digitize corner point Digitize curve point Terminate with last stitch Button 1 2 3 Mouse or keybd equivalent [ ] M Description Digitize corner reference point when digitizing outlines. Digitize curve reference point when digitizing outlines. Terminate input omitting last stitch i.e. the fill is terminated on the opposite side as the last input point. Toggle between selected fill stitch type and input method, and the Run input tool. Terminate input including last stitch i.e. the fill is terminated on the same side as the last input point. Toggle between selected fill stitch type and input method, and the Manual input tool.
Terminate without last stitch
Selecting preset spacing values

Use the menu chart to select preset spacing values for Satin and Zigzag stitch types as well as preset stitch lengths for Run and Triple Run objects.
To select preset spacing values

1 Select the stitch type you want to use. Note For Satin stitch, turn off Auto Spacing. 2 Move the puck over the Spacing 1/2/3/4 menu chart icon and click the button that corresponds to the preset value you require.
V9
Chapter 35
760
Each button on the puck accesses the next preset style with different spacing values. For example, if the stitch type is Satin, clicking Button 1 accesses <PRESET_SATIN_1>. Button 2 accesses <PRESET_SATIN_2>, and so on. Tip The spacing value displays in the Status Line next to the stitch type.
V9
761
Chapter 36
Changing System Settings
ES Designer lets you adjust various system settings controlling the appearance of designs on screen, display of design information, the behavior of the design window, and other settings. This section describes how to change TrueView display, grid spacing and positioning, and design window scrolling options. It also describes how to save designs automatically as you work. There is also information about how to adjust the pointer position display, paste position options, and other general options. Note With the implementation of multiple colorways, the concept of the background changed. Background colors and fabrics are now considered design properties rather than system settings. In addition, display colors for borer, unsewn, selected, object outline and grid are also part of the colorway definition. See Using multiple colorways for details.
Setting design element view options

You can set options to show or hide design elements such as needle points, connector and function markers in your design. For example, view needle points to select stitches for editing, functions to check color changes or stops, and connectors to help position stitch entry and exit points. Note You can display or hide design guides in any combination. No design guides display while in TrueView.
To set design element view options

1 Select Special > Options. The Options dialog opens.
V9
762
Select the View Design tab.
Select design elements to display
Select the options to display.
! TrueView: shows what the embroidery will look like. See also
Viewing designs in TrueView.
! Stitches: all stitches in the design are visible. ! Outlines: all outlines in the design are visible.
See also Viewing stitches and outlines.
! Needle Points: all needle points in the design are visible. ! Connectors: all connectors in the design are visible. ! Function Symbols: all function symbols in the design are visible.
See also Viewing needle points, connectors and functions.
Setting TrueView options

Right-click to set TrueView (General toolbar) options. Change TrueView settings for different effects. You can:
! change the thickness of the pictured thread ! change the direction of the light source ! set the maximum number of colors to use.
To set TrueView options
1 Right-click the TrueView icon.
V9
763
The Options dialog opens.

Select TrueView Click TrueView Options
Select the TrueView checkbox and click TrueView Options. The TrueView Options dialog opens.
Select thread thickness Select light source Select maximum number of colors
Select a thread thickness from the Thread Thickness list. If you display a design at a zoom factor larger than actual size, select thick thread for good coverage. This only affects the TrueView display, not the actual thread values. To change thread thickness settings, see Adding your own colors to thread charts.
Select the lighting direction from the Light Source list.
TrueView thick thread, light above
TrueView thin thread, corner light
5 6
Enter the maximum number of colors to display in TrueView from the Max Number of Colors list. Click OK.
V9
Chapter 36
764
Setting grid options

You can change the grid spacing, select a reference point and turn Snap to Grid on or off in the Options dialog.
Setting grid reference point and spacing

Right-click Show Grid (Standard toolbar) to set grid reference point and spacing. Align the grid to a reference point in the design for example, when you want a grid line to intersect the center of the design, or to sit under a particular object. See also Changing display colors.
To set grid reference point and spacing

1 2 Right-click the Grid icon. The Options dialog opens. Select the Show Grid checkbox to display the grid.
Select to display grid Select to align grid to a point Enter horizontal and vertical spacing
Select the Set Reference Point checkbox to align a significant point of the design with a grid line or grid point. For example, you can set the grid reference point to the design center. This is easier and faster than moving the whole design.
Enter Grid Spacing values for horizontal and vertical grid lines. Tip To use these settings as defaults for the current template, click Save.
Click OK. If you selected Set Reference Point, mark the reference point on your design. The grid aligns so that horizontal and vertical grid lines intersect at this point.
V9
765
Setting Snap to Grid

Right-click Show Grid (Standard toolbar) to set the Snap to Grid option. Use Snap to Grid to align objects in your design to the nearest grid lines. You can align objects to the horizontal (X) or vertical (Y) axis, or both. New reference points will snap to the nearest grid line as you digitize. Existing objects will snap to grid when you select and move them.
To set Snap to Grid

1 2 Right-click the Grid icon. The Options dialog opens. Select the Snap to Grid checkbox.
Select snap to grid
Select an axis setting from the Method list.
! Horizontal: snaps objects to the nearest horizontal grid line. ! Vertical: snaps objects to the nearest vertical grid line. ! Both: snaps objects to the nearest horizontal and vertical grid line
intersection. Tip To use these settings as defaults for the current template, click Save. 4 Click OK. Tip To temporarily disable Snap to Grid as you digitize, hold down Alt.
Setting Auto Scroll options

Select Options (Special menu) to set Auto Scroll options. Use Auto Scroll to scroll the design automatically while you are digitizing. This can be more convenient than using panning or the scroll bars.
V9
Chapter 36
766
To set Auto Scroll options

1 2 Select Special > Options. The Options dialog opens. Select the Auto Scroll tab.
Select Auto Scroll
Adjust auto-scroll speed and pointer position
3 4 5 6
Select the Auto Scroll checkbox to apply Auto Scroll. Select the Move Pointer After Scroll checkbox to move the position of the pointer after each scroll. Adjust the Autoscroll Response field as required. Enter smaller values to increase scrolling speed. Select the pointer position after scrolling from the Move Input Point To list.
! Center: center of the window. Use this setting for large movements. ! Midway: halfway between the original pointer position and the
center of the window. Use this setting for smaller movements for example, when zooming into a small area of the design.
! Corner: the edge of the screen. Use this setting for slow scrolling.
7 Click OK. The effect of this setting will only become apparent when you start to digitize. The design window will automatically scroll to follow the current cursor position. Tip Hold down the Shift key to temporarily deactivate Auto Scroll.
Setting automatic save and backup options

Select Options (Special menu) to set automatic save and backup options.
V9
767
Save your work automatically at regular intervals using Auto Save to protect you from losing work in the event of hardware or software failure. You can also create backup files for emergency use. Tip Backup files should be kept in a separate location to the original files, preferably off-site.
To set automatic save and backup options

1 2 Select Special > Options. The Options dialog opens. Select the General tab.
Select to auto-save designs Select to auto-backup designs
3 4 5
Select the Auto Save Design Every checkbox. Enter the auto-save frequency in the Minutes field. To create a backup every time you save a design, select the Always Create Backup Copy checkbox. The design will be saved in the BACKUP folder of your Wilcom ES installation. It will have the same name as the original file with the extension BAK. Warning Backup files remain in the BACKUP folder until you delete them. To prevent the folder from using too much hard disk space, delete unwanted files regularly.
Click OK.
Setting the pointer position display

When you move the mouse or digitizer puck, the pointer position is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. You can optionally display the pointer position relative to the last digitized point or stitch point, or as an absolute value from the first needle point of the design.
V9
Chapter 36
768
Interpreting pointer position values

The X and Y values show the horizontal and vertical distance of the pointer from the relative or absolute point. The L value is the length of the line connecting the pointer with the previous point, while A is the angle of that line, relative to the horizontal.
length = 37.2 mm
2 Y = 18.6 mm
length = 37.2 mm
1 Y = -18.6 mm
X = 32.2 mm X: horizontal Y: vertical
X = -32.2 mm L: length A: angle
Status Bar
A negative X value indicates that the second point was placed to the left of the first point, while a negative Y value displays when the second point is below the first. Negative angles indicate angles of more than 180 for example, an angle of -60 is equal to 300.
90 2 135 180 1 A = 30 -135 -90 45 0 -45
Tip You can measure on-screen distances using the values in the Status Bar. See Measuring distances on-screen for details.
Setting pointer position display options

Select Options (Special menu) to set pointer position display options. You can optionally display the pointer position relative to the last digitized point or stitch point, or as an absolute value from the first needle point of the design.
V9
769
To set pointer position display options

Select relative or absolute pointer position
Select a Relative or Absolute setting for the pointer.
! Relative: shows pointer position relative to the last digitized point

or stitch point. Useful while digitizing or editing stitches.
! Absolute: shows pointer position as an absolute value from the first

needle point of the design. Useful for checking that the design fits a given area. 4 Click OK. Tip You can change the appearance of the pointer, so it displays as a cross-hair. See Setting other options for details.
Setting paste position options

Select Options (Special menu) to set paste position options. You can control where an object is positioned when pasted into a design. The default is to paste objects at the position set by the coordinates in the Object Properties dialog. If you are pasting within the same design, this is the same position from which the object was copied or cut. Other paste position options are available. Note Paste options control the physical position of the object in the design, not its position in the stitching sequence.
To set paste position options

1 Select Special > Options. The Options dialog opens.
V9
Chapter 36
770
Select the General tab.
Select paste position setting
Select a Paste position setting:
! Object Property Position: Objects are pasted according to the

coordinates in the Object Properties dialog.
! Shift Pasted Objects: Objects are pasted slightly offset from their
original position.
! Center at Current Stitch: Objects are centered at the current

needle position marker.
! Start at Current Stitch: Objects are positioned after the current

needle position marker.
pasted object offset from original
Click OK.
Setting other options

Select Options (Special menu) to set stitch count display, small stitch filter, cursor type and integrity of the design. Use the Options > General tab to:
! ! ! !
Set stitch counts to display as cumulative totals Turn the small stitch filter on and off Change cursor type Check design integrity.
V9
771
! Display design source when opening designs that may not scale well. ! Display measure tooltip when using the Measure command.
To set general options
Select other general options
Select one or more of these options.
! Cumulative Stitch Count: displays stitch count as a cumulative

total in the Stop Sequence tab of the Information dialog. See also Viewing design information in ES Designer.
! Run Small Stitch Filter on Output: automatically removes small

stitches when the file is output to disk or machine. See also Removing small stitches automatically.
! Cross Hair Cursor: changes the default cursor pointer to

cross-hairs for more precise positioning. It is best used together with the grid.
! Always Check Design Integrity: checks design integrity when

opening a design and during digitizing.
! Show Design Source: issues a warning dialog when opening

designs that may not scale well i.e. where the design is a converted stitch or non-EMB outline format.
! Show Measure Tooltip: shows length and angle in a tooltip when

measuring distances on screen. See Measuring distances on-screen for details. Tip Use the tooltip with the crosshair cursor on for a more accurate measurement. 4 Click OK.
V9
Chapter 36
772
PART X
APPENDICES & INDEX
V9
773
Appendix A
Product Differentiation Table
V9
774
Product Differentiation Table

Capabilities Basics Dockable toolbars Context-sensitive popup menus Multiple undos Open designs (EMB) Create new designs (normal, custom templates) Generate stitches Display grid Display measurements Select machine format Save designs Design Viewing Zoom in / out Show whole design Pan across design Show design in Overview window Restore previous view / redraw designs Show design outlines and stitches Show design in TrueView Show design needle points, connectors and functions View selected parts of a design Show objects by color Travel through design by stitches, color, function Show stitch sequence (Slow Redraw) ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! DW 21L 21E 21D 45 65 Reference Basic Procedures Showing or hiding toolbars Using popup menus Undoing and redoing commands Opening designs Creating new designs Generating stitches Displaying the grid Measuring distances on-screen Selecting machine formats Saving designs Viewing Designs Zooming in and out Viewing the whole design Panning across designs Viewing designs in the overview window Restoring the previous view and redrawing designs Viewing stitches and outlines Viewing designs in TrueView Viewing needle points, connectors and functions Viewing selected parts of a design Viewing design objects by color Viewing the stitching sequence Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly
V9 Wilcom ES Online Manual 775
! !
! ! "! ! !
! Included as standard # Cost option " New/improved feature/option L For lettering only LG For lettering and grouped objects only
V9 Product Differentiation Table 776
Capabilities Show multiple colorways Show design information in Windows Explorer Show design properties Estimate total thread usage Preview production worksheet Object Selection Select all objects in a design Select individual objects Select objects while traveling Select groups of objects Select objects by color Select objects by stitch type Select objects with Color-Object List Input Methods Digitize individual stitches (Manual) Digitize individual stitches (Triple Manual) Digitize lines (Run and/or Triple Run) Digitize lines (Backstitch) Digitize lines (Stemstitch) Digitize columns and borders (Input C) Digitize columns of varying width (Input A) Digitize shapes with turning stitches (Input B) Digitize complex shapes with fixed angle (Complex Fill without holes) Digitize complex shapes with turning angles (Fusion Fill) Digitize objects with holes (Complex Fill with holes)
DW ! !
21L ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
21E ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
21D ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
45 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
65 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Reference Viewing colorways Viewing design information in Windows Explorer Viewing design information in ES Designer Estimating total thread usage Previewing production worksheets Selecting Design Objects Selecting all objects in a design Selecting objects with Select Object Selecting objects on the fly Selecting objects with Polygon Select/Line Select Selecting objects by color Selecting objects by stitch type Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List Input Methods Digitizing individual stitches Digitizing individual stitches Digitizing lines Digitizing lines Digitizing lines Digitizing columns of fixed width Digitizing columns of varying width Digitizing asymmetrical columns of turning stitches Creating complex shapes with fixed stitch angles
! !
! !
! ! ! "! "! # ! ! !
! ! ! "! "! ! ! ! ! "#
! ! ! "! "! ! ! ! !
"! Creating complex shapes with turning stitches ! Adding boundaries
Capabilities Outline and Fill Stitch Types Single stitch (Run) Triple stitch (Triple Run) Satin stitch Satin Auto Spacing Triple Satin Tatami stitch Tatami backstitch Zigzag stitch E stitch Colorways and Thread Charts Change thread colors Multiple colorways Search for thread types Match threads from different charts Match image colors to threads Change background Change display colors Create thread charts Connect Embroidery Objects Apply automatic connectors Add tie-offs and trims manually Add empty stitches and empty jumps manually Add jumps with penetrations off manually Adjust travel run stitch length Stitch Quality Apply automatic underlay Apply pull compensation
DW
21L
21E !
21D ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
45 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! !
65 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Reference Fill Stitches Digitizing lines (Input Methods) Digitizing lines (Input Methods) Creating fills with Satin stitch Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch Adjusting the Satin stitch count Creating fills with Tatami stitch Selecting a Tatami backstitch Creating outlines with Zigzag stitch Creating outlines with E Stitch Colorways and Thread Charts Changing thread colors Using multiple colorways Searching for thread types Matching threads from different charts Matching image colors to threads Changing background colors and fabrics Changing display colors Creating your own thread charts Connecting Embroidery Objects Using automatic connectors Adding connectors manually Adding empty stitches and empty jumps Adding jumps with penetrations off Adjusting travel run stitch length Improving Stitch Quality
L L L L L L
! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! L L ! L
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
L L
"! Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays ! Compensating for fabric stretch
Capabilities Adjust column width Reverse stitch direction Reduce stitch bunching (stitch shortening) Reduce stitch bunching (fractional spacing) Adjust stitch density Remove small stitches automatically Control corner stitching (Smart Corners) Split long stitches (Auto Split) Preserve long stitches (Auto Jump) Set automatic start and end points Support for Vector Drawings Draw straight lines Draw open shapes Draw polygons Draw rectangles and squares Draw circles and ellipses Import vector drawings export vector drawings Insert / paste vector drawings Smooth vector drawing curves Color drawing objects View/hide vector drawings Combine drawing curves into complex shapes (Shaping tools) Support for Bitmap Images Scan bitmap images (using Win95 Twain) Crop images Edit image using a graphics package Insert/paste bitmap images Save bitmap images as separate files
DW
21L L L L LG ! L L "!
21E ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "!
21D ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! # # # # # "! ! ! ! !
45 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! # # # # # ! ! ! ! ! ! #
65 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Reference Adjusting column width Reversing stitch direction Reducing stitch bunching with stitch shortening Reducing stitch bunching with fractional spacing Adjusting stitch density Removing small stitches automatically Controlling corner stitching Splitting long stitches with Auto Split Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump Setting automatic start and end points Digitizing with Vector Drawings Drawing straight lines Drawing open shapes Drawing polygons Drawing rectangles and squares Drawing circles and ellipses Importing and exporting vector drawings Importing and exporting vector drawings Importing and exporting vector drawings Smoothing vector drawing curves Coloring drawing objects Viewing and hiding vector drawings Shaping drawing and embroidery objects Digitizing with Bitmap Images
LG
"!
! !
! !
! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! !
Scanning artwork into ES Designer Cropping images for digitizing Editing images in third-party applications Inserting and saving bitmap images Saving bitmap images as separate files
Capabilities Smooth bitmap images Show / hide backdrops (bitmaps / vectors) Dim bitmap images Image Processing Reduce colors Sharpen outlines Automatic Digitizing Convert artwork to vector drawing (Auto Trace) Convert artwork to embroidery objects (Point & Stitch) Match palette colors to an image (Match to Palette) Automatic digitizing (Smart Design) Create embroidery from photos (Photo Flash) Combine and Resequence Objects Cut, copy, paste, delete and duplicate objects / designs Split objects Resequence selected objects Resequence objects by color Resequence objects with the Color-Object List Resequence objects by number Automatic object sequencing (Branching) Arrange and Transform Objects Position objects Group / ungroup objects Lock / unlock objects Align and distribute objects
DW
21L ! !
21E ! !
21D ! ! ! ! ! # # # ! "!
45 ! ! ! ! ! # # # ! "!
65 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Reference Smoothing bitmap images Viewing and hiding bitmap images Dimming backdrops Processing Images for Automatic Digitizing Preparing non-outlined images Preparing outlined images Automatic Digitizing Converting bitmaps to outlines with Auto Trace Digitizing shapes automatically with Point & Stitch Matching palette colors to an image
"!
"!
! Automatic digitizing with Smart Design "! Creating embroidery designs from photographs Combining and Resequencing Objects
LG
! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Combining objects and designs Splitting objects Resequencing selected objects Resequencing objects by color Resequencing colors and objects with the Color-Object List Resequencing objects by number Automatic branching Arranging and Transforming Objects Positioning, aligning and distributing objects Grouping and ungrouping objects Locking and unlocking objects Aligning objects and Distributing objects
LG
LG LG LG
LG
! ! ! !
! ! ! !
Capabilities Scale objects Make objects same size Rotate objects Skew objects Mirror objects Mirror-merge objects Create wreath objects Convert, Reshape and Adjust Objects Convert between vector drawings and embroidery objects Convert between Run and Triple or Input C objects Convert Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill Convert Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu Reshape objects using control points Reshape circle, star and ring objects Adjust stitch angles of Complex Fill objects Add stitch angles to Input A, Input B and Complex Fill objects Change entry / exit points Keep / omit last stitch Stitches and Machine Functions Select and deselect stitches Insert, move or delete individual stitches Convert selected stitches to objects Insert/edit/clear machine functions Edit stitches and functions with Stitch List Filter stitches by function/stitch length Object Properties, Styles and Templates Set current object properties
DW LG LG LG LG
21L LG LG LG LG LG
21E ! ! ! ! !
21D ! ! ! ! !
45 ! ! ! ! ! "# "# # ! "! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
65 ! ! ! ! ! "! "! !
Reference Scaling objects Making objects the same size Rotating objects Skewing objects Duplicating and mirroring objects Mirroring designs with Mirror-Merge Creating wreaths with Mirror-Merge Converting, Reshaping and Editing Objects
# ! ! "! # ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
L !
! ! !
Converting vector drawings to embroidery objects ! Converting between Run, Triple Run, Motif Run and Input C objects "! Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill ! Converting Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu ! Reshaping objects using control points ! Reshaping circle, star and ring objects ! Adjusting stitch angles ! Adjusting stitch angles ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Changing entry and exit points Keeping or omitting the last stitch Editing Stitches and Machine Functions Selecting and deselecting stitches Editing stitches Converting selected stitches to objects Editing machine functions Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List Object Properties, Styles and Templates Modifying current property settings
! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
Capabilities Apply current properties to objects Change properties of selected objects Make object properties current Change default properties Define styles Assign favorite styles Merge styles Create design templates Save current properties to a template Revert to NORMAL template Specialized Techniques Duplicate objects (Backtrack/Repeat) Create circles, stars and rings Create smooth joins Create offset outlines (Offset Object) Create filled holes in Complex Fill objects Remove overlapping objects Create appliqu designs Create partial appliqu shapes Create sequined designs Create boring holes Textured Fills Create Tatami offset and partition line effects Create Program Split and Combination Split effects (Satin-in-Tatami, etc) Create Flexi Split effects Create user-defined split effects Create alternate split lines Artistic Stitch Effects Create Jagged Edges
DW
21L LG L
21E ! ! !
21D ! ! !
45 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! # ! ! ! "# ! "! ! ! ! ! !
65 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! ! "! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Reference Applying current settings to existing objects Changing properties of existing objects Making selected object properties current Changing default property settings Defining new styles Assigning favorite styles Merging styles Creating design templates Saving current properties to a template Reverting to the NORMAL template Specialized Digitizing Techniques Reinforcing outlines Digitizing circles, stars and rings Creating smooth joins Creating outlines with offset objects Filling holes in objects Removing underlying stitching Digitizing for appliqu Creating partial cover appliqu objects Digitizing with sequins Digitizing boring holes Textured Fills Creating textures with Tatami offsets Creating textures with Program Split Creating textures with Flexi Split Adding details with User Defined Split Splitting alternate lines Artistic Stitch Effects Creating jagged edges
! L !
! ! !
! ! !
# !
# "# ! ! L ! ! !
"!
Capabilities Create open stitching with Trapunto Create Accordion Spacing Create Color Blending Contour Stitch and Spiral Stitch Create curved fills with Florentine Effect Create curved fills with Liquid Effect Motif Runs and Fills Insert motifs Rotate, mirror and scale motifs Create motif sets Create motifs Create motif runs Create motif fills Create 3D effects with motif fills Embroidery Lettering Add lettering to designs Edit lettering text Lettering toolbox Format lettering Scale lettering Adjust letter spacing Skew and rotate lettering objects Reposition, transform, reshape, recolor individual letters Create baselines (horizontal, vertical, arc, circle, custom) Adjust and reshape baselines Apply different stitch types to lettering objects Adjust lettering stitch angles Adjust lettering stitching sequence
DW
21L
21E
21D
45 ! # "# ! ! !
65 ! ! "! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Reference Creating open stitching with Trapunto Creating accordion spacing effects Creating color blending effects Creating contoured stitch effects Creating curved fills with Florentine Effect Creating curved fills with Liquid Effect Motif Runs and Fills Selecting and inserting motifs Rotating, mirroring and scaling motifs Creating motif sets Saving motifs Creating motif runs Creating motif fills Creating 3D effects with motif fills Embroidery Lettering Adding lettering to embroidery designs Editing lettering objects Editing with the lettering toolbox Formatting lettering Scaling lettering Adjusting letter spacing Transforming lettering objects Adjusting individual letters Applying lettering baselines
# # # # # #
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! !
"! Adjusting baselines ! Applying different stitch types to lettering objects ! ! Adjusting lettering stitch angles Adjusting letter sequencing
Capabilities Change lettering join method Add special characters and symbols Distorted lettering with envelopes Create borders around lettering Add multiple names to designs (Team Names) View and edit individual team names Create individual designs with team names Custom Alphabets Convert TrueType font to embroidery alphabet Convert TrueType letters to Complex Fill/Turning Stroke letters Create custom alphabets Reshape custom letters Merge alphabets Design Formats Convert stitch files to EMB format Open/save designs in Melco CND format Color merge Melco CND files Reassign colors to stitch/CND files Read/Save Happy TAP format Machine Formats Output to different machine formats Create custom machine formats Modify standard machine formats Adjust standard machine format settings (stitch/jump length, trim, color change, boring)
DW
21L ! ! ! ! ! "! ! # #
21E ! ! ! ! ! "! ! # #
21D ! ! ! ! ! "! ! # # # # ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! ! !
45 ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! ! # # ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! ! !
65 ! ! ! ! !
Reference Changing lettering join method Adding special characters and symbols Creating special effects with envelopes Adding borders to lettering Team lettering
"! Viewing and editing individual team names ! Creating individual designs with team names Custom Alphabets ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! ! ! Converting TrueType fonts to embroidery fonts Converting between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes Creating custom alphabets Reshaping custom letters Merging alphabets Processing Design Files Opening stitch files in ES Designer Processing Melco CND outline files Color merging Melco CND files Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files Supported embroidery file formats Changing Machine Formats Outputting to different machine formats Creating custom machine formats Modifying standard machine formats Adjusting standard machine format settings
! ! ! ! "! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! "! ! ! ! !
Capabilities Adjust advanced machine format settings (color change sequence, start/end design, speed) Design Output Print / plot production worksheets Customize production worksheet information Print backgrounds on production worksheets Print multiple colorways Print color blocks Send designs as email attachments Export designs as vector drawings Save designs as bitmap images Cut appliqu shapes Stitch designs to machine with Stitch Manager Stitch designs to machine with ES Machine Manager (1-4 machines only) Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes Read designs from embroidery disk Format embroidery disks Save designs to embroidery disk Read designs from paper tape Punch designs to paper tape Design Management (ES Design Explorer) View design thumbnails and summary information View zipped designs in folders Change locales Modify user preferences Customize design lists View design properties
DW !
21L !
21E !
21D !
45 !
65 !
Reference Adjusting advanced machine format settings
Outputting Designs ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Printing or plotting production worksheets Customizing production worksheet information Customizing production worksheet information Printing multiple colorways Printing color film Sending designs as email attachments Saving designs as vector drawings Capturing designs as bitmap images Cutting appliqu shapes Stitching designs with Stitch Manager ES Machine Manager Supplement Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Reading designs from embroidery disk Formatting embroidery disks Saving designs to embroidery disk Reading designs from paper tape Punching designs to paper tape Design Management Displaying design thumbnails and summary information Viewing zipped designs in folders Changing locale Modifying user preferences Customizing design lists Viewing design properties
Capabilities Browse designs in folders Browse with slide show Open designs in ES Designer Create new designs with custom templates Run simple and complex sorts Limit file types displayed Email designs direct Stitch and punch designs direct Print production worksheets Print design catalogs Publish design catalogs for browser viewing Export design catalogs Convert design files in folders Archive design files Rename, add and delete folders Copy and paste designs Rename designs in folders Delete designs Peripheral Device Support Serial / parallel ports support Network support Ethernet support Digitizer tablet support Embroidery machine support Paper tape reader and punch support Scanner support Calibrate monitor Digitizing Tablets Register menu chart Register enlargement drawing
DW ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
21L ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
21E ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
21D ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
45 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
65 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Reference Browsing through designs in folders Browsing designs using slide show buttons Opening designs in ES Designer Creating new designs with custom templates Sorting files in folders Limiting file types displayed Emailing designs direct Stitching and punching designs direct Printing production worksheets Printing design catalogs Publishing design catalogs for browser viewing Exporting design catalogs Converting design files in folders Archiving design files Renaming, adding and deleting folders Copying and pasting designs Renaming designs in folders Deleting designs Setting up Hardware Peripheral device connection settings Peripheral device connection settings Peripheral device connection settings Setting up digitizing tablets Setting up embroidery machines Setting up paper tape readers and punches Setting up scanners Calibrating the monitor Using Digitizing Tablets Registering the menu chart Preparing an enlargement drawing
Capabilities Change drawing scales System Settings Set grid options Set Auto Scroll options Set automatic save and backup options Set cursor options (cross hair on/off) Set paste options Set general options
DW
21L
21E
21D !
45 ! ! ! ! ! ! !
65 ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Reference Changing the drawing scale Adjusting System Settings Setting grid options Setting Auto Scroll options Setting automatic save and backup options Setting the pointer position display Setting paste position options Setting other options
! ! ! !
! ! ! ! LG !
! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
Appendix B
Quick Reference Guide
V9
787
Introduction
All commands in ES Designer can be accessed via the various menus, both dropdown and popup, toolbar icons, menu chart (for use with digitizing tablets), as well as access and shortcut keys. Many commands can be accessed by more than one method. The Command Reference lets you see at a glance which method best suits you. It will also help DG/ML and Punchant Designer users who have converted to ES Designer to identify where equivalent commands are located. Note While the Graphical User Interface (GUI) elements in ES Designer are organized somewhat differently to DG/ML and Punchant, they provide exactly the same functionality, and more.
ES Designer main window

This image shows the main Graphical User Interface (GUI) elements for ES Designer.
Title and Menu bars Standard toolbar Stitch Types toolbar Show Vertical toolbar Pointer toolbar Input Method toolbar Travel toolbar Drawing toolbar Design window
Color palette Colorways list Status bar Prompt line Stitch count or active stitch XY co-ordinates, length, angle Stitch type, values Current color Zoom factor
V9
Introduction
788
Equivalent Feature Names

This table lists equivalent feature names for the three products, Wilcom ES, DG/ML, and Punchant. For more information about these features, refer to the Command Reference Table below. Wilcom ES 3D Warp Branching Coil Convert True Type Font Cut Appliqu Filled Holes Flexi Split Florentine Effect Island Coil Liquid Effect Offset Object Paste Drawing Perpendicular Fill Photo Flash Point & Stitch Slow Redraw Smart Design Team Names DG/ML 3D Effect Smart Connect Swirl Smart Font Cut Appliqu Fill Holes Elastic Split Curve Line Fill Island Swirl Two Curve Fill Parallel Offset Paste Special Lattice Image Shot Point & Stitch Slow Redraw Smart Design Name Merge Punchant 3D Effect Branching Swirl Quick Font Print Drawing Objects Auto Fill Holes Stream Split Wave Effect Contour Swirl Double Wave Effect Parallel Offset Paste Special Lattice Picture Stitch Auto Convert Redraw Controller Quick Stitch Name Drop
V9
789
Command Reference Table

This table lists all the commands available in ES Designer and details of how to access them. Note that, in the case of popup menus, the table shows the context in which a given menu displays; this may include the design window, stitch list, etc. For details of toolbar names, check also the ES Designer main window. The listing is grouped according to the chapters of the User Manual. For further information about each command, refer to the relevant chapter. For details about the Chenille and Schiffli commands, refer to the relevant User Manual Supplements. For details of how to use the tablet icons, refer to the Menu Chart appendix in the User Manual. Dropdown Menu Help Pointer File Insert File Stitch Help View File Help Help File Help Edit Help Standard C+Y Standard A+F+O or C+O Standard Generate A+4 g 1 m C+N E A+F+C Popup Menu
Command Basics About ES Cancel Close Cross Stitch Exit Generate Stitches Help Topics Measure New Online Manual Online Manual Update Open Quick Reference Guide Redo Release Notes
Toolbar
Tablet Shortcut
] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to toggle these functions.
Popup menus: DW = Design Window SL = Stitch List COL = Color-Object List
V9
790
Command Request Form Save Save as Security Show Drawing Toolbar Show Grid Show Input Toolbar Show Pointer Toolbar Show Travel Toolbar Toolbars Undo Wilcom Web page Viewing Designs Center Current Stitch Design Properties Overview Window Pan Previous View Redraw Show All > Design Show All > Selected Objects Show Connectors Show Functions Show Needle Points
Dropdown Menu Help File File Special
Popup Menu
Toolbar
Tablet Shortcut
Standard
A+f+S or C+S A+f+A or C+S
Show Vertical ] View Standard Show Vertical Show Vertical Show Vertical View Edit Help Standard C+Z V+G
View File View View View View View View DW DW Standard SL Standard Standard Standard Standard
6 or C
V+v 7 or P 5 or V 4 or R 2 or 0 (zero) V+0 V+C V+F . (period)
V9
791
Command Show Outlines Show Selected Object Only Show Stitches Show Whole Design TrueView View By Color Zoom 1:1 Zoom Box Zoom Box in Overview Window Zoom Factor Zoom In 2X Zoom Out 2X ]
Dropdown Menu
Popup Menu
Toolbar Standard
Tablet Shortcut L V+S
Standard
S E+V+S
Standard View View View DW
1 8 or B V+B
View View View
3 or F 9 or z 0 or V+z
Checking Designs and Selecting Objects Add Next Object to Selection Add Previous Object to Selection Deselect All Color-Object List Polygon Select Polygon Select / Line Select Select All Select at Current Needle Position Select By > Color Select By > Stitch Type Select Multiple Objects
C+Ta C+V+ Ta Edit View DW or COL Standard Pointer = Edit DW Pointer C+A V+O Edit Edit C+[ E/X V+l C+l
V9
792
Command Select Next Object Select Object Below Select Previous Object Select Range of Objects Select Object Tool Selects On / Off Slow Redraw Start / End Design Travel 1 Stitch Travel 10 Stitches Travel 100 Stitches Travel 1000 Stitches Travel by Color Travel by Function Travel by Object Travel by Segment Manual Digitizing Change between Fill Stitch and Manual Change between Fill Stitch and Run Embroidery Object > Input A Embroidery Object > Input B Embroidery Object > Input C =
Dropdown Menu
Popup Menu
Toolbar
Tablet Shortcut T 2+[ V+T V+[
DW = Edit View
Pointer Standard
O Q V+R
Travel Travel Travel Travel Travel Travel Travel Travel Travel
h/e l/r t/b -/+
z/x
V+T / C+T C+l / r
R s Insert Insert ] Insert Input Method Input Method Input Method Input Method
Embroidery Object > Fusion Fill ] Insert

V9
793
Command Embroidery Object > Complex Fill Embroidery Object > Manual Embroidery Object > Run Embroidery Object > Triple Manual
Dropdown Menu ] Insert Insert ] Insert Insert
Popup Menu
Toolbar Input Method Input Method Input Method Input Method Input Method Input Method Input Method
Tablet Shortcut
V+N
Embroidery Object > Triple Run ] Insert Embroidery Object > Back Stitch ] Insert Embroidery Object > Stem Stitch Finish Digitizing a Complex/Fusion Fill Boundary Finish Digitizing an Object Keep Last Stitch Fill Stitches Stitch Effects Stitch Type > E Stitch Stitch Type > Satin Stitch Type > Tatami Stitch Type > Zigzag ] Insert
R R
Stitch ] Stitch ] Stitch ] Stitch ] Stitch Stitch Type Stitch Type Stitch Type Stitch Type V+I V+M
Object Properties, Styles and Templates Apply Current Properties Apply Style Define Style Make Properties Current Object Properties Use Style Favorite 1 Colorways and Thread Charts Colorways ] Edit Colorways ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to toggle these functions.
Stitch Stitch Stitch
DW
Styles Styles
DW Stitch ] DW or COL DW
Styles Generate Styles
V9
794
Command Match Drawing Color Next Color / Select Color Set Color Connecting Embroidery Objects Empty Stitch / Empty Jump Penetrations Tie-off Trim Trapunto Digitizing with Backdrops Insert Drawing File Paste Drawing > As Bitmap Paste Drawing > As Vector Save Bitmap As Scan Show Drawing Smooth Drawing Curves ] = =
Dropdown Menu
Popup Menu DW
Toolbar
Tablet Shortcut
Pointer Machine
Pointer Machine Generate Pointer Pointer Stitch Type

v
Image Edit Edit File File Standard Image D
Processing Images for Automatic Digitizing Crop Image Crop Image with Polygon Edit Image Using > Corel PHOTO-PAINT Edit Image Using > Paint Edit Image Using > Paint Shop Pro Reduce Colors Image Image Image Image Image Image DW Drawing
V9
795
Command Sharpen Edges Drawing / Vectors Insert Drawing Object > Ellipse Insert Drawing Object > Line Insert Drawing Object > Polygon Insert Drawing Object > Polyline Insert Drawing Object > Rectangle Make Complex Shape Shaping > Weld Shaping > Intersect Shaping > Exclude Shaping > Front-Back Shaping > Back-Front Shaping > Flatten Shaping > Divide Shaping > Combine Automatic Digitizing Auto Trace Convert > Complex Fill Convert > Input C Convert > Auto Applique Convert > Run Convert > Triple Run
Dropdown Menu Image
Popup Menu DW
Toolbar Drawing
Tablet Shortcut
Image Image Image Image Image Image Arrange Arrange Arrange Arrange Arrange Arrange Arrange Arrange
Drawing Drawing Drawing Drawing Drawing V+H Shaping Shaping Shaping Shaping Shaping Shaping Shaping Shaping
Drawing DW DW DW DW DW
C+m U
V9
796
Command Convert > Motif Run Convert > Drawing Point & Stitch (Toolbar) Match to Palette Outline Run Pickout Run Tatami Fill Tatami Fill without Holes Turning Satin Photo Flash Smart Design
Dropdown Menu
Popup Menu DW DW
Toolbar
Tablet Shortcut
View Point & Stitch Point & Stitch Point & Stitch Point & Stitch Point & Stitch Point & Stitch Insert Insert Drawing
C+I
Combining and Resequencing Objects Branching Copy Cut Delete Duplicate Paste Resequence > By Selects Resequence > By Color Resequence By Number Split Object Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit COL COL DW DW DW DW Standard Standard Standard Standard I UC+C UC+X X C+d C+v
Arranging and Transforming Objects Align Bottom Arrange
V9
797
Command Align Center Align Horizontal Center Align Left Align Right Align Top Align Vertical Center Group Hide Hide Others Unhide All Lock Unlock All Make Same Size > Both Make Same Size > Height Make Same Size > Width Mirror In X Mirror In Y Array Reflect Wreath Kaleidoscope Show (Objects) Space Evenly > Across Space Evenly > Down
Dropdown Menu Arrange Arrange Arrange Arrange Arrange Arrange Arrange
Popup Menu
Toolbar
Tablet Shortcut
COL COL COL COL
Standard
C+g
Arrange
COL COL
Arrange Arrange Arrange DW DW Mirror-Merge Mirror-Merge Mirror-Merge Mirror-Merge COL Arrange Arrange
V9
798
Command Transform Transform Special Ungroup Unlock Reshaping and Editing Objects Change Reshape Control Point Type Keep Last Stitch / Omit Last = Stitch Maintain proportions while resizing Move Object horizontal or vertical Nudge selected object Reshape Object Stitch Angles
Dropdown Menu Edit Edit Arrange Arrange
Popup Menu
Toolbar
Tablet Shortcut
COL COL
Standard
C+U V+K [+s
Pointer V+; C+; [+r Pointer Special Pointer H C+H
Editing Stitches and Machine Functions Black text Clear Function Edit Function Insert Function Move Stitch MultiColored text Select / Deselect Stitches Show All (Stitches) Show Stitches (dialog) Stitch Edit Stitch List View Stitch List Stitch List Pointer Standard E V+J Machine Machine Machine Stitch List Stitch List Stitch List Stitch List Stitch List Stitch List T
V9
799
Command Stop Improving Stitch Quality Auto Jump Auto Spacing Auto Split Auto Start and End Auto Underlay Fractional Spacing Pull Compensation Reverse Curve Shortening Small Stitches Smart Corners ] ] ] ] ] ]
Dropdown Menu Machine
Popup Menu
Toolbar
Tablet Shortcut
Stitch Types These options can only be accessed via the Object Properties > Fill Stitch tab. Stitch Stitch Types Stitch Types Stitch Types Image Stitch Types Stitch Stitch Types U
Specialized Digitizing Techniques Backtrack / Repeat Borers in Embroidery Object > Auto Applique Partial Applique Embroidery Object > Circle Embroidery Object > Ring Embroidery Object > Star Filled Holes Offset Object Remove Overlaps = Machine ] Insert ] Stitch Insert Insert Insert Insert Insert Arrange Input Method Input Method Input Method Pointer Generate Input Method
V9
800
Command Sequin Mode Artistic Stitch Effects Accordion Spacing Color Blending Jagged Edge Make Line(s) for > Florentine Effect ] ]
Dropdown Menu Machine
Popup Menu
Toolbar Generate
Tablet Shortcut
Stitch Types Generate Stitch Types Stitch Types Stitch Types Stitch Types Stitch Types Stitch Type
] S ] Special
Make Line(s) for > Liquid Effect ] Special Stitch Type > Contour Flexi Split ] Stitch ]
Make Line(s) for > User Defined ] Special Split Make Program Split Stitch Type > Program Split Motif Runs and Fills 3D Warp ] Special ] Stitch
Stitch Types
Stitch Types Input Method
Embroidery Object > Motif Run ] Insert Motif > Make Motif > Select Motif > Use Stitch Type > Motif Fill Lettering Essentials Embroidery Object > Lettering Lettering Box Special Lettering Features Envelope > Bridge Edit ] Insert View Special Special Special ] Stitch
Stitch Types
Input Method Standard
V9
801
Command Envelope > Delete Envelope > Diamond Envelope > Pennant Envelope > Perspective Team Names Team List Custom Alphabets Alphabet > Convert True Type Font Alphabet > Make Letter Alphabet > Modify Alphabet Processing Design Files Process Recognize Object Outlines Changing Machine Formats Insert Fast Insert Slow Machine Format Values Select Machine Format Outputting Designs Capture Design Bitmap Cut Appliqu Export As... Print Print Preview Record in Database
Dropdown Menu Edit Edit Edit Edit Insert View
Popup Menu
Toolbar
Tablet Shortcut
Generate Standard
Special Special Special
Edit Edit
Generate
Machine Machine
File File File File File File Standard Standard A+f+p or C+p
V9
802
Command Send Stitch to Machine Manager Stitch to Stitch Manager
Dropdown Menu File File File
Popup Menu
Toolbar
Tablet Shortcut
Standard
Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes Embroidery Disk > Format Embroidery Disk > Open Embroidery Disk > Save As Embroidery File > DOS Disk Embroidery File > Embroidery Disk Paper Tape > Punch Paper Tape > Read Setting up Hardware Hardware Setup Scanner Setup Using Digitizing Tablets Backspace Enter Information Insert Auto Frame Menu Chart No Preset Spacing Shift Drawing Shift Menu Space ] Right-click toolbar icon to access associated settings. = Use left/right buttons with toolbar icon to toggle these functions.
File File File Insert Insert File File
Special File
Help
V9
803
Command Tab Tablet (Setup) Yes Changing System Settings Design Options Options Paste > Center at Current Stitch Paste > Object Property Position Paste > Shift Pasted Objects Paste > Start at Current Stitch Turn off automatic scroll Chenille Option Chain Chenille Manual Supplement Compound Chenille Moss Needle Height Stitch Type > Coil Stitch Type > Island Coil ]
Dropdown Menu
Popup Menu
Toolbar
Tablet Shortcut
Special
V+D R
View Special DW DW DW DW V (hold down) Chenille Option Help Chenille Option Chenille Option Chenille Option Chenille Option Chenille Option Chenille Option Chenille Option
] Stitch ] Stitch
Stitch Type > Perpendicular Fill ] Stitch Stitch Type > Straight View by Machine Function > Chain / Moss Schiffli Option Design Repeat ] Stitch View
Special
V+W
V9
804
Command Insert Blatt Function Insert Stepp Function Show Repeats (Schiffli)
Dropdown Menu
Popup Menu
Toolbar
Tablet Shortcut [ ]
Standard
V9
805
ES Designer Keyboard Shortcuts

General functions
To .. start new design open design save design print design show/hide Point & Stitch toolbar show/hide grid show Overview window show Color-Object List show Stitch List open Lettering dialog open digitizing tablet setup measure distance on-screen undo command redo command cancel command open online help exit application Press C C C C C V V V V A V M C C E 1 A +N +O +S +P +I +G +V +L +J +D +Z +Y
Digitizing functions (cont)

To .. make Complex Shape drawing object check design integrity Press V+H !
Schiffli functions
To .. insert Stepp/Blatt function insert Fadenleiter Plus/Minus insert Boring Tension Start/End insert RPM Plus/Minus change Schiffli borer depth show Schiffli repeats Press ][ <> /\ :" ; W
Selecting objects
To .. Press C+A E or X o V+O * * * * * * * C+[ V+ [ T V+T 2 +[ C+T C+V+ T C+L Q * C+ G *C+ U K V+K select all objects deselect all objects activate Select Object tool select object at current needle position select multiple objects select range of objects select next object select previous object select object beneath add next object to selection add previous object to selection activate Polygon Select tool toggle Selects On/Off group selected objects ungroup selected objects lock selected object unlock selected object * Click Select Object tool first.
+4
Digitizing functions
To .. finish digitizing object (keep last stitch) finish digitizing object (omit last stitch) finish digitizing Complex Fill boundary delete last input point generate stitches apply Satin stitch apply Tatami stitch apply Run stitch switch between fill and Run stitch switch between fill and Manual stitch switch between Continuous and Normal Input A toggle Auto Underlay on/off activate Auto Trace activate Branching Press R s R B G V+I V+M V+N s R V+A u C+M I
V9
ES Designer Keyboard Shortcuts
806
Viewing designs
To .. toggle TrueView on/off show/hide stitches show/hide outlines show/hide needle points show/hide connectors show/hide function symbols show whole design * fit design to window fit selected objects to window show selected objects only * show/hide image zoom in 2X zoom out 2X zoom to 1:1 scale (100%) specify zoom factor zoom box zoom box in Overview window activate panning deactivate Auto Scroll center current stitch in design window return to previous view redraw screen activate Slow Redraw * * Turn TrueView off Press or T S L . V+C V+F E, V + s 0 (zero) 2 V + 0 (zero) V+s D Z 9 V+Z 0 1 F 3 B 8 V+B P 7 V (hold down) C 6 V r V+R 5 4
Traveling through designs

To travel .. 10 stitches forward 10 stitches backward 1 stitch forward 1 stitch backward while selecting/deselecting stitches ^ ^ ^ ^ * Press b t r l T or + 2 8 6 4
* Stitch Edit tool selected ^ No objects selected + Num Lock off
Cutting & pasting objects

To .. cut object copy object paste object duplicate object delete selected objects or last object Press C+ C+ C+ C+ D or X V+D C C+Z V V+Z D
Modifying objects & stitches

To .. move selected object horizontally * or vertically nudge selected object maintain proportions while resizing + activate Reshape tool change reshape control point type ^ activate Stitch Angles tool activate Stitch Edit tool Press or click C+: tb lr V+: H [+M C+H E
Traveling through designs

To travel .. to start of design to end of design to next color to previous color to next segment to previous segment to next object to previous object 100 stitches forward 100 stitches backward Press h e d u * C+r *C+l C+T V+T + or + 7 1 3 9 C+ 6 C+ 4
* Drag object + Drag handle ^ Select control point
* Stitch Edit tool selected ^ No objects selected + Num Lock off
V9
807
Appendix C
Menu Chart
V9
808
WILCOM ES V9
1
i
1 ? +
3D
STOP
1000 100 10 1
1 4 3 2
7 4 1 0
8 5 2
9 6 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
not in all models; no en todos los modelos; nao em todos os modelos; non in tutti i modelli; pas dans tous les modles; nicht verfgbar fr alle Modelle P/N W2959 Rev 1 Jan 04 Copyright 1990-2004 Wilcom International Pty. Ltd.
810
V9
Menu Chart Key

Pressing a different button on your digitizing puck can affect a command on your Menu Chart in different ways:
! Generally, a command will simply be executed e.g. Save file, Undo

command, Generate stitches, etc.
! Some commands toggle a function on or off e.g. Auto Jump On/Off,

TrueView On/Off, etc. The same or different puck buttons may toggle the command.
! Other commands affect sequence e.g. Travel to Start/End of Design,

Travel to Next/Previous Function. Different buttons generally control direction i.e. forward / backward.
! Some commands let you select options or adjust values which affect the
command e.g. Program Split display options, Fractional Spacing values. The key at the bottom of the table explains the action that a particular button press performs in combination with a given command icon. Icon Command Save 1 ! 2 3 4 Icon Command Information 1 ! 2 3 4
Undo
Redo
Select All
Deselect All
Auto Start / End
Remove Small Stitches
Exit
Show All
Previous View
Pan
toggle on/off ! activate % deactivate & change values ' view options ( backward ) forward
V9
811
Icon
Command Center Current Stitch
1 !
Icon
Command Redraw Screen
1 !
Zoom Box
Zoom 1:1
Zoom Factor
Zoom In 2X
Zoom Out 2X
TrueView
'
Show Stitches Show Needle Points Show Function Symbols
'
Show Outline
'
'
Show Connectors
'
'
Show Grid
&
Show Repeat Show 1. Chain/Moss 2. Stepp/Blatt 3. Needle In/Out Tatami
&
Show Drawing
&
Satin
&
&
&
&
Zigzag
&
&
E-Stitch
&
&
Program Split
&
&
Motif Fill
&
&
V9
Menu Chart Key
812
Icon
Command Contour
1 !
2 &
4 &
Icon
Command Flexi Split
1 !
2 &
4 %
Florentine Effect
&
Liquid Effect
&
Auto Jump
&
Stitch Shortening Fractional Spacing
&
Pull Compensation Automatic Underlay
&
&
&
Jagged Edge 1/4. User Defined Split 2/3. Split Alternate
&
Trapunto
&
Accordion Spacing
&
3D
3D Warp
&
Coil
&
&
Straight
&
&
Perpendicular Fill Compound Chenille
&
&
Island Coil
&
&
&
Needle Height
Chain
Moss
Select Object
Polygon Select
V9
813
Icon
Command Reshape Object 1. Keep Last Stitch 2/4. Omit Last Stitch Trim
Icon
Command Stitch Edit
Tie Off
1. Empty Stitch 2/4. Empty Jump
Add Stitch Angles
1. Backtrack 2/4. Repeat
Next Color
&
&
Input A
Input B
Complex Fill
&
&
Fusion Fill
&
&
Auto Appliqu
A
& & & &
Lettering
&
&
Input C
Run
&
&
Triple Run
Motif Run
&
&
Back Stitch
&
&
Stem Stitch
&
&
V9
Menu Chart Key
814
Icon
Command Travel to Start / End Travel by Segment Travel by Function
Icon
Command
Travel by Object
Travel by Color
1000 10
Travel by 1000 Stitches Travel by 10 Stitches
100 1
Travel by 100 Stitches Travel by 1 Stitch
Circle
Ring
Star
Manual
Triple Manual
Make Motif
Select Motif
Use Motif
Smart Corners
&
4 3
Preset Spacing 1/2/3/4
Auto Spacing
&
Auto Split
&
Cut
Copy
V9
815
Icon
Command Paste Options 1/2/3/4 1. Penetrations on 4. Penetrations off 1. Insert Fast 2/4. Add Fast 1. Insert Stepp 2/4. Add Stepp 1. Insert Auto Frame 2/4. Add Auto Frame
Icon
Command
Move
1. Borers in 4. Borers out 1. Insert Slow 2/4. Add Slow 1. Insert Blatt 2/4. Add Blatt
&
Drop Sequin
STOP
1. Insert Stop 2/4. Add Stop
1. Insert Function 2/4. Clear Function Shift Menu
Shift Drawing
Tab
Delete
Backspace
Cancel
No
Yes
Spacebar
Enter
V9
Menu Chart Key
816
Paste Options: 1. Paste - Object Property Position, 2. Paste - Shift Pasted Objects, 3. Paste - Center at Current Stitch, 4. Paste - Start at Current Stitch. Add / Insert functions: See Machine function types for details.
V9
817
Appendix D
Supported File and Disk Types
This section provides details of the file and disk types supported by Wilcom ES. Details are also provided about the conversion of Melco CND, Wilcom INP, and Gunold PCH design formats to EMB. The section also provides details of supported paper tape formats, as well as vector and bitmap (raster) formats. Note There are many additional Schiffli file formats to suit specific Schiffli machines. Wilcom ES supports the most important of these. See the ES Schiffli User Manual Supplement for details.
Supported embroidery file formats

There are two types of embroidery file formats:
! Outline files: Outline or condensed files usually contain digitized

shapes and lines, selected stitch types and stitch values and effects.
! Stitch files: Stitch files contain only stitches and machine functions and
are suited to specific embroidery machines. See Processing Design Files for details.
Supported outline file formats

Wilcom ES supports the following outline file (condensed) formats: Extension CND EMB ESD INP PCH Format Melco Condensed Design File (up to V8.0) Wilcom DOS format Wilcom Condensed Gunold APS Read
! ! ! ! !
Write
! !
V9
818
Supported stitch file formats

Wilcom ES supports the following stitch file (expanded) formats: Extension 10O BRO CSD DSB DST DSZ EMX EXP KSM MON PMU PUM STC STX TAP T01
Format Toyota Bits & Volts POEM/Singer/Huskygram Barudan Tajima ZSK Wilcom Cross Stitch Melco Pfaff Happy Proel Proel DOS Gunold Datastitch Happy Tajima Barudan Zangs ZSK Pfaff Barudan Compucon
Read
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Write
!
! ! ! !
! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
T03 T04 T05
T09
U?? XXX
includes needle addressing data Wilcom equivalent of DSB format Wilcom equivalent of KSM format Wilcom equivalent of DST format Wilcom equivalent of DSZ format Can only be written by ES Cross Stitch application
V9
819
Extension Zxx
Format ZSK
Read
!
Write
!
includes needle addressing data Wilcom equivalent of DSB format Wilcom equivalent of KSM format Wilcom equivalent of DST format Wilcom equivalent of DSZ format Can only be written by ES Cross Stitch application
Comparison of outline and stitch format information

The following table lists the type of information that is included in outline (condensed) and stitch (expanded) files. Wilcom ES uses the embroidery file format EMB which combines the advantages of outline files and stitch files. Included in file Object functions Object properties Object outlines Machine functions Stitch data Stitch types Stitch coordinates Thread colors Icon picture Comments Stitch blocks (saved as Manual objects) Pull compensation settings Auto spacing settings Can be transformed/scaled without affecting stitch density Stitch files No No No Yes No No Yes No No No Yes No No No 5% max Outline files Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No Yes, but with limitations EMB files Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
e.g. Tajima DST, Melco EXP, Barudan e.g. Melco CND
V9
Appendix D
820
Included in file Can be transformed/scaled without affecting stitch quality Opens in ES Designer
Stitch files No 5% max Manual objects can be converted to outline file
Outline files Yes, but with limitations Yes
EMB files Yes Yes
e.g. Tajima DST, Melco EXP, Barudan e.g. Melco CND
Melco CND format

Melco Condensed (CND) is the native file format of the Melco embroidery digitizing software. CND files store only digitized outlines and stitch values. See also Processing Melco CND outline files.
Conversion of Melco CND format to Wilcom EMB

When you open CND designs in ES Designer, outlines are scaled and stitches recalculated to preserve density. ES Designer recognizes all Melco machine functions and stitch types, including Partition Lines and Complex Fill, and automatically converts them to EMB format. This table details how Melco features are converted. Melco CND Stitch Types Column Stitches Simple Fill Input A, Satin stitch Complex Fill, Tatami The stitch angle is determined by the longest stitchline. EMB Notes
V9
821
Melco CND Complex Fill
EMB Complex Fill
Notes Melco EDS Complex Fill are recognized and converted to Wilcom ES Complex Fill.
Column Fill Walk Bean Stitch Singleline Column Input, Centerline Singleline Column Input, Left Line / Right Line Partition Lines Underlays Complex Underlay Edge Walk Center Walk Narrow Column Machine functions Needle Up Reset Stitch Manual Lock Stitch Automatic Lock Stitch
Input A, Tatami fill Run Triple Run Input C Input C Side 1 / Side 2 Tatami partition lines
Tatami underlay in Complex Fill object Edge Run Center Run Zigzag Column Stitches only.
Jump, Begin Jump End Jump Added in Tie Off. Tie In, Tie Off If Automatic Lock Stitch is set for every Color Change, and at the start and end of the design, tie off and tie in stitches are inserted in the EMB design.
Chain Moss Needle Height Slow
Chain Moss Needle Height Slow
V9
Appendix D
822
Melco CND Fast Borer In/Out Sequin On/Off
EMB Fast Borer In/Out Sequin On/Off
Notes
Conversion of Wilcom EMB format to Melco CND

You can save files to Melco CND format from ES Designer. Designs originally created in ES Designer generally give the best results. Other file types may not have all the data necessary for successful conversion. This table details how Wilcom ES stitch types and effects are converted to CND format. Tip When you convert to CND, many Wilcom ES effects will be lost. If it is important to preserve the effects, save in Melco EXP stitch format instead. Alternatively, turn off all effects before saving to CND format. See also Best Wilcom ES input methods for Melco CND output. EMB Stitch types Manual Run Triple Run Triple Run (run count > 3) Satin stitch Tatami - standard Tatami - with random factor applied Tatami - with sharply turning stitches Walk Walk Bean Stitch Bean Stitch Column Fill Fill Stitch Walk Walk or Complex Fill Changes to Walk if Superstar compatible, otherwise Complex Fill with a fixed angle. Use Complex Fill to make sure that the stitch lines are parallel. Only if the design is an original Wilcom EMB design. Reverts to Triple Run (run count = 3). Melco CND Notes
V9
823
EMB Tatami - with slightly turning stitches
Melco CND Fill Stitch, several sections
Notes The shape is divided into several sections, filled with parallel Fill Stitch. There may be small gaps between these sections. Density is not preserved when the design is scaled.
Zigzag E Stitch (Inputs A, B & C) E Stitch (Complex Fill) Stitch settings Run length Tatami length and spacing Underlays Center Run Edge Run Zigzag Double Zigzag Zigzag (for objects with Satin cover only) Effects Accordion Spacing Motif Fill Contour Stitch Flexi Split Auto Split Jagged Edge Trapunto style
Walk Column Stitches Walk
Set length Fill or Complex Fill settings
CND Walk stitch length is the same as EMB Run stitch length. The length and density of Fill Stitches will be the same as EMB Tatami length and spacing.
Walk
Uses CND Auto Underlay.
Narrow Column
Not preserved Not preserved Not preserved Not preserved Not preserved Not preserved Not preserved
The effect is lost. The effect is lost. The effect is lost. The effect is lost. The effect is lost. The effect is lost. The effect is lost.
V9
Appendix D
824
EMB Program Split User Defined Split Photo Flash Quality features Pull Compensation Fractional Spacing
Melco CND Not preserved Not preserved Walk
Notes The effect is lost. The effect is lost. Density is not preserved when the design is scaled.
Not preserved Not preserved
The original shape is preserved. The effect is lost. In ES Designer, turn on Fractional Spacing and set it to 0.5 mm. Although there is no direct equivalent in CND, effectively it uses a fixed fractional spacing with a value equal to 0.5. Outlines are more accurately recognized if Stitch Shortening is turned off. Auto Spacing is converted to fixed spacing, based on the average space value. It is best to turn off Auto Spacing when digitizing a design for CND. Avoid digitizing pointed ends.
Stitch Shortening
Not preserved
Auto Spacing
Not preserved
Smart Corners Machine functions Color Change / Stop functions Empty Jump Needle Up Tie In (Lettering) Tie Off End Jump Begin Jump
Not preserved
Color Change / Stop Walk Needle Up Needle Up Walk Walk Reset Stitch Needle Up
Functions inserted on stitches inside objects are not converted. Two MK1 points are repeated at the current position.
V9
825
EMB Needle Height Moss Chain Trim
Melco CND Needle Height Moss Chain Trim
Notes
The ability to output without Trim function does not apply to this version.
Best Wilcom ES input methods for Melco CND output

This table details which input methods give the best results when digitizing a design for Melco EDS-III CND output. Input method Input A, B, C Complex Fill Compatibility OK OK Notes Use with Satin only. Only use with Tatami fill. Do not digitize pointed ends as they will be squared off during conversion. Cut off pointed ends with a straight line, parallel to the stitch angle, to avoid conversion problems. Fusion Fill objects are separated into a single object per segment. Conversions may produce undesired results.
Fusion Fill
Not recommended OK Not recommended Not recommended OK Do not use
Circle Ring Star End - Keep Last Stitch End - Omit Last Stitch
The exit point will be on the wrong side of the shape. The stitches are output as Walk. The exit point should always be on the opposite side to the entry point. Start digitizing the next shape on the opposite side instead.
V9
Appendix D
826
Wilcom INP format

Wilcom INP is the native file format of Wilcom Computer Embroidery Design software. Wilcom INP designs can be directly converted to EMB files although ES Designer interprets some of the stitch types differently.
Conversion of Wilcom INP format to Wilcom EMB

This table details how Wilcom INP features are converted to EMB format. Wilcom INP Auto Spacing Backtrack/Repeat section/marked Backup Lock Borderline Tatami Borer In/Out CED Block lettering CED Block, Jump out Circle ES Cross Stitch Delete Stitch Family of Curves Split EMB Auto Spacing Separate objects are added. Satin tie off Borderline Tatami Borer In/Out Block2 alphabet Block2 alphabet Circle Paths imported as Run objects only. Manual only, ignored for other stitch types. Satin, single curve as split line. Change the stitch type to Motif Run to generate cross stitch. Can be edited. Noticeably different from Satin. You can copy imported curve to get multiple curves. Alternating number is ignored. Can be edited. Complex Fill will have matching Tatami. Normal objects. Font can be changed after conversion. Manual edits and trimming. Notes Values are different. Can be changed before stitching. Functions are supported correctly.
Geflecht Matching Tatami Motifs Needle In/Out
Standard Tatami Non-matching Tatami Patches End/Begin Jump
V9
827
Wilcom INP Other Multihead Machine Functions Program Stitch Ring Scattered Tatami Schiffli Functions Slow/Fast Split Alternate Split Stitch Tajima style Lock Tourenblat Trim/Tie In/Tie Off Turn fill (spacing measured along shape boundary) Underlays slant Underlays, 3 or 4 layers
EMB Stop (with info label) Manual stitch Ring Tatami with random factor applied Stepp/Blatt only, others are ignored Slow/Fast Tatami Standard Tatami Tajima tie off E Stitch Connector properties Wilcom ES turn fill (generally fewer stitches) Zigzag underlay Two underlays only
Notes For example, Insert Appliqu is converted to Stop.
Will look slightly different.
Looks different but can be edited. OK most of the time. Looks different, so that it is easy to locate and edit.
Will look different but can be re-digitized in smaller sections. Can be added manually. Can be edited.
Gunold PCH format

PCH Punch and Stitch is the native file format of the Gunold Embroidery Design software. Gunold PCH designs can be directly converted to EMB files although ES Designer interprets some of the stitch types differently.
V9
Appendix D
828
Conversion of Gunold PCH format to Wilcom EMB

This table details how Gunold PCH features are converted to EMB format. Gunold PCH Outline types Parallel Serial Block Outline Run Incline Manual Stitch types Satin Ceding Random Ceding Step Piping OBI Zigzag Cross Photo Satin underlays none Single Edge Zigzag Cross Edge Zigzag none Center Run Edge Run Zigzag Zigzag Edge Run + Zigzag Satin Tatami Tatami with random factor applied Tatami Contour Tatami Zigzag not supported not supported Input A Input C Complex Fill Run Run Manual EMB
V9
829
Gunold PCH Edge Cross Netting Double Zigzag Triple Zigzag Step / block fill levels Complex Fill Form Fill Vector Fill Block Fill Miscellaneous Branches Random - side 1 / side 2 Pitch Length Stitch angle U turn Compensation Corner mode Short / Long Square backstitch Satin Step Styles Patterns
EMB Edge Run + Zigzag Double Zigzag Double Zigzag Double Zigzag
Holes in Complex Fill User Defined Split in Complex Fill User Defined Split in Complex Fill Program Split in Complex Fill
Grouped object (uses lettering sequence algorithm) Jagged Edge effect Stitch Spacing Stitch length Complex Fill stitch angle Backtrack Pull Compensation Smart Corners Stitch Shortening Straight stitch Trapunto Motifs none
V9
Appendix D
830
Supported embroidery disk formats

You can write a design to a disk which is formatted for a specific embroidery machine. The disk can then be read through the machiness Floppy Disk Reader. The following disk formats are supported: Format Barudan 2HD Barudan FDR Barudan FMC Barudan S-FMC DOS Happy Melco Tajima Toyota ZSK Density DS/HD DS/DD DS/HD DS/HD DS/HD DS/HD DS/SD DS/HD DS/HD DS/DD Read
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Write
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Note To format Melco disks, newer PCs require a disk controller card that supports IMB 3740 Single Density Format (FM). Use the TestDisk utility to check your PCs capability. See Testing embroidery disks for details.
Supported paper tape formats

Wilcom ES supports the following paper tape formats: Format Tajima Barudan Zangs ZSK Read
! ! ! !
Write
! ! ! !
V9
831
Format Pfaff
Read
!
Write
!
Supported drawing and image formats

Artwork can be imported into ES Designer in both vector and bitmap (raster) formats. See Digitizing with Bitmap Images for details.
Supported vector drawing formats

Wilcom ES supports the following vector drawing formats: Extension DXF EMF EPS PS WMF Format AutoCAD Enhanced Metafile Encapsulated Postscript Postscript Windows Metafile Read
! ! ! ! ! ! !
Write
Supported bitmap image formats

Wilcom ES supports the following bitmap image formats: Extension BMP JPG PNG PCX Format Windows Bitmap JPEG File Interchange Portable Network Graphics PC Paintbrush Read
! ! ! ! !
Write
! !
V9
Appendix D
832
Appendix E
Stitch Types, Input Methods and Effects
This table describes the relationship between stitch types, input methods, and effects supported by Wilcom ES. Note that, in some cases, stitch type and input method are one and the same e.g. Run stitch. Multihead Effects Auto Jump Shortening Pull Compensation Fractional Spacing Auto Underlay Smart Corners Jagged Edge Trapunto User Defined Split Accordion Spacing 3D Warp Flexi-Split Florentine Effect Liquid Effect Chenille Effects Coil Straight Stitch Perpendicular Fill Island Coil Compound Chenille
Input Method
Satin Input A Input B Input C Complex Fill Fusion Fill Auto Appliqu Circle Ring Tatami Input A Input B
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
V9
833
Multihead Effects Auto Jump Shortening Pull Compensation Fractional Spacing Auto Underlay Smart Corners Jagged Edge Trapunto User Defined Split Accordion Spacing 3D Warp Flexi-Split Florentine Effect Liquid Effect
Chenille Effects Coil Straight Stitch Perpendicular Fill Island Coil Compound Chenille
Input Method
Input C Complex Fill Fusion Fill Circle Ring Zigzag Input A Input B Input C Complex Fill Auto Appliqu Circle Star Ring E Stitch Input A Input B Input C Complex Fill Auto Appliqu Circle
! ! ! ! !
! !
! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! !
! !
! ! ! !
! ! ! !
! !
! !
! !
! !
! !
! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! !
! ! ! !
! ! !
! ! ! !
! ! !
! ! ! !
! ! ! !
! ! ! !
! ! ! !
! ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! ! !
! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
! !
! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! ! !
! ! ! !
! ! ! !
! ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! !
V9
Appendix E
834
Multihead Effects Auto Jump Shortening Pull Compensation Fractional Spacing Auto Underlay Smart Corners Jagged Edge Trapunto User Defined Split Accordion Spacing 3D Warp Flexi-Split Florentine Effect Liquid Effect
Chenille Effects Coil Straight Stitch Perpendicular Fill Island Coil Compound Chenille
Input Method
Ring Program Split Input A Input B Input C Complex Fill Fusion Fill Circle Ring Motif Fill Complex Fill Contour Input A Input B Input C Circle Ring Run Run Triple Run Triple Run
! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! !
! ! ! !
! ! !
! ! ! !
! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! !
! !
! !
! !
! !
! !
! ! ! ! !
! ! !
! ! ! !
! ! ! ! !
V9
835
Chenille Effects
Compound Chenille Island Coil Perpendicular Fill Straight Stitch Coil Liquid Effect Florentine Effect Flexi-Split 3D Warp Accordion Spacing User Defined Split Trapunto Jagged Edge Smart Corners
Multihead Effects
Auto Underlay Fractional Spacing Pull Compensation Shortening Auto Jump Input Method
!
Motif Run
Motif Run
V9
Appendix E
836
Appendix F
Standard Alphabets
The table below includes all alphabets that are standard with your Wilcom ES software. The recommended stitch method for each alphabet is indicated. This setting defines how letters in a sequence are to be joined i.e. Closest Join (CJ), Bottom Join (BJ), As Digitized (AD). Some As Digitized alphabets also need to be applied with with Original Values e.g. all appliqu alphabets, where values are important, and others like Kidnap, where open stitching is used. See Changing lettering join method for details. For best results when stitching, do not exceed the recommended maximum or minimum sizes. Note, however, that recommended maximum and minimum heights refer to UPPER CASE letters. Most embroidery fonts are digitized from an original TrueType Font (TTF), some of which have lower-case letters e.g. a and c which are about 70% the height of a capital letter. As a result, these letters may be too small to embroider neatly. You may need to increase the size of the lower-case characters to suit the embroidery.
TrueType Font Embroidery Letters

Small, narrow letters may not require automatic underlay depending on size and fabric. If applied, the underlay may show outside the stitched columns. See also Applying automatic underlays. You can create special characters in each alphabet by holding down the Alt key on your keyboard and typing 0 (zero), its code, using the numbers on the keypad. For example, to type with the code 234, type Alt + 0234. The accented letter will appear when you release the Alt key. See also Using the Character Map.
V9
837
Note Not all characters are available in all alphabets. See the Embroidery Alphabets samples booklet for details. Recommended Sizes Min in. 2 Color Plain Script mm in. Max mm Stitch Method
Alphabet
Sample
0.5
13
2.0
50
AD
Agatha
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Algerian
0.3
1.2
30
CJ
Anaconda
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Angle Block
0.4
10
4.0
100
CJ
Architect
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Arial Rounded
0.3
1.8
45
CJ
V9
Appendix F
Standard Alphabets
838
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes Min in. mm in. Max mm
Stitch Method
Arnold
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Art Block
0.4
10
3.0
75
CJ
Avant Garde
0.2
2.4
60
CJ
Bauhaus
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Blacklight
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Block1
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Block2
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
V9
839
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
Block Caps
0.2
2.0
50
CJ
Bodoni
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Book Script
1.0
25
2.2
55
CJ
Border Block 2
0.5
13
1.6
40
AD
Borders
CJ
Carla
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Castle
0.25
2.0
50
CJ
V9
Appendix F
Standard Alphabets
840
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
Casual Serif
0.5
13
2.2
55
CJ
Cayman
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Centurion
0.5
13
2.4
60
CJ
Chancery
0.3
2.4
60
CJ
Cheltenham Tall
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Cheshire
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
City Script
0.3
2.4
60
CJ
V9
841
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
City Medium
0.25
3.0
75
CJ
Civic
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
College
0.25
1.4
35
CJ
College Appliqu
1.0
25
3.2
80
AD
Columbo
0.3
1.2
30
CJ
Copperplate
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
Crests Crests Applique
0.70
18
6.0
150
CJ
1.20
30
6.0
150
AD
V9
Appendix F
Standard Alphabets
842
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
Croissant
0.25
2.0
50
CJ
Dauphin
0.3
2.4
60
CJ
Dextor Normal
0.4
2.0
50
CJ
Easy Applique
1.2
30
4.0
100
CJ
Easy Script
0.3
2.4
60
CJ
Enchantment
0.4
10
1.6
40
CJ
Energy
0.3
2.4
60
CJ
V9
843
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes Min in. mm 13 in. 3.0 Max mm 75
Stitch Method
Enviro
0.5
CJ
Fancy Monogram
1.0
25
5.0
125
CJ
Flares
0.3
1.6
40
CJ
Flair Script
0.75
10
3.2
80
CJ
Flash
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Folio Condensed
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Formal Script
0.3
1.4
35
CJ
Futura
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
V9
Appendix F
Standard Alphabets
844
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
Futura Border 2 Color
0.65
AD
Futura Outline
0.6
16
2.0
50
CJ
Gaelic
0.44
11
2.0
50
CJ
Garamond
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Glory Appliqu
1.2
30
4.0
100
AD
Goudy Sans
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
Greek
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Greek Script
0.48
12
4.0
100
CJ
V9
845
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
Greek Spionic
0.4
CJ
Handel Gothic
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Hana
0.5
13
2.0
50
CJ
Handel Gothic
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Handy Script
0.5
13
3.0
75
CJ
Handicraft
0.3
2.5
65
CJ
Hebrew Chaya
0.3
1.6
40
CJ
Helvetica
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
V9
Appendix F
Standard Alphabets
846
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
Helvetica Small
0.2
CJ
Hobo
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
Impress
0.3
1.6
40
CJ
Informal
0.25
1.2
30
CJ
Italian Script
0.4
10
4.0
100
CJ
Kabel
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Karin Script
CJ
Kids
0.5
12
1.2
30
CJ
V9
847
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
Kindergarten Block
0.4
10
3.6
90
CJ
Krone
0.3
1.6
40
CJ
Lariat
0.48
12
1.2
30
CJ
Legal Block
0.24
2.0
50
CJ
Lydian
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Mandarin
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Matisse
0.4
10
1.6
40
CJ
Memo Script
0.24
1.0
25
CJ
V9
Appendix F
Standard Alphabets
848
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
Matrix
0.4
CJ
Micro Block
0.2
0.3
CJ
Microgramma
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Microscan
0.3
1.6
40
CJ
Minature Block
0.2
0.25
CJ
Narrow Block
0.6
15
4.0
100
CJ
News Outline
1.2
30
3.0
75
CJ
Octagon Monogram
0.7
18
6.0
150
CJ
V9
849
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
Old English
0.4
CJ
Olivia
0.3
1.6
40
CJ
Outline Block
0.75
18
4.0
100
CJ
Pixie
0.5
13
1.2
30
CJ
Point Monogram
0.7
18
6.0
150
CJ
Round Block
0.8
20
1.4
35
CJ
Royale
0.5
13
2.4
60
CJ
Schoolbook
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
V9
Appendix F
Standard Alphabets
850
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
Script1
0.5
CJ
Script2
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Script3
0.5
12
4.0
100
CJ
Seagull
0.3
1.8
45
CJ
Seal Monogram
0.7
18
6.0
150
CJ
Serif1
0.25
1.2
30
CJ
Serif2
0.3
1.2
30
CJ
Serif3
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
V9
851
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
Slim Block
0.8
20
8.0
200
CJ
Small Block1
0.2
0.25
CJ
Small Block2
0.2
0.25
CJ
Souvenir
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
Speedy
0.3
1.2
30
CJ
Super Block
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Swiss
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Swiss Run Hollow
0.6
15
4.0
100
AD
V9
Appendix F
Standard Alphabets
852
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
Swiss Run Satin
1.0
25
3.0
75
AD
Tahoma
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
Text Block
0.3
1.8
45
CJ
Times Roman
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
Times Small
0.2
0.25
CJ
Typewriter
0.5
13
2.0
50
CJ
Upright Script
0.5
13
2.0
50
CJ
Urbane
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
V9
853
Alphabet
Sample
Stitch Method
Utility Block
0.3
4.0
100
CJ
Verdana
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Victorian
0.3
1.0
25
CJ
Viking
0.35
2.0
50
CJ
Wesern Serif
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Westminster
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
V9
Appendix F
Standard Alphabets
854
Appendix G
Motif Samples
Motifs available in Wilcom ES can be one of two types single or two-part. Single motifs can be used on their own in a Motif Run or Motif Fill. Two-part motifs consist of two separate motifs combined to form a single pattern for Motif Fills. This section contains samples of the motifs available in Wilcom ES. Use these tables to see what a particular motif looks like. The table also includes recommended size and layout specifications. If they have changed for any reason, revert to the settings using the values in these tables. See Creating motif runs and Creating motif fills for details.
Single motifs
The following table shows single motifs available in Wilcom ES together with their size values. It also shows the spacing values for Motif Runs, and column, row and offset recommended values for Motif Fills. Size in mm Motif Name Arrow01 Motif X 3.9 Y 3.1 Motif Run Spacing 3.9 Motif Fill Column 3.9 Row 3.1 Offset 0.0
Arrow02
4.4
3.3
4.4
4.4
3.3
0.0
Arrow03
4.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
3.0
0.0
Arrow04
4.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
3.0
0.0
V9
855
Size in mm Motif Name Arrow05 Motif X 4.0 Y 2.5
Motif Run Spacing 4.0
Motif Fill Column 4.0 Row 3.5 Offset 0.0
Arrow06
10.1
10.0
10.6
10.1
10.0
0.0
Arrow07
5.0
4.0
5.2
5.0
4.0
0.0
Arrow08
5.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
4.0
0.0
Blocks01
3.0
5.0
2.0
2.0
5.0
1.0
Blocks02
3.2
5.0
2.3
2.3
6.0
0.0
Blocsk03
2.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
0.0
Blocks04
2.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
0.0
Blocks05
4.0
5.5
3.0
3.0
6.0
0.0
Blocks06
2.6
2.4
2.4
2.4
1.8
1.2
Blocks07
6.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
4.0
0.0
V9
Appendix G
Motif Samples
856
Size in mm Motif Name Blocks08 Motif X 6.0 Y 4.0
Blocks09
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Blocks10
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Blocks11
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Blocks12
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Blocks13
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
Blocks14
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Blocks15
3.8
5.0
3.8
3.8
5.0
0.0
Blocks16
3.0
4.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
0.0
Blocks17
10.1
10.0
10.2
10.1
10.0
0.0
V9
857
Blocks19 Blocks20
12.0 3.0
3.0 6.0
12.1 3.0
12.0 3.0
3.0 6.0
0.0 0.0
Blocks21
8.9
3.6
9.0
8.9
3.6
0.0
Blocks22
6.0
5.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
0.0
Blocks23
4.0
6.5
4.0
4.0
6.5
0.0
Blocks24
6.0
6.0
6.1
6.0
6.0
0.0
Blocks25
6.8
8.9
6.8
6.8
8.9
0.0
Blocks26
7.5
8.5
7.5
7.5
8.5
0.0
Blocks27
4.0
8.0
4.0
4.0
8.0
0.0
Blocks28
6.0
8.0
6.0
6.0
8.0
0.0
V9
Appendix G
Motif Samples
858
Blocks30
8.0
10.0
8.0
8.0
10.0
0.0
Blocks31
9.0
8.0
9.0
9.0
8.0
0.0
Blocks32
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Bow01 Bow02
10.0 8.0
3.1 4.0
10.0 8.0
10.0 8.0
3.1 4.0
0.0 0.0
Circle01
4.2
4.0
5.0
5.0
4.0
2.5
Circle02
9.6
13.1
9.1
9.6
13.1
0.0
Circle03
10.7
9.1
10.7
10.7
9.1
0.0
Cloud01
7.2
6.1
7.2
7.2
6.1
0.0
Cloud02
8.3
5.7
8.2
8.3
5.7
0.0
V9
859
Size in mm Motif Name Motif X Cross01 4.0 Y 4.0
Cross02
5.7
5.7
5.8
5.7
5.7
0.0
Cross03
4.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
0.0
Cross04
8.0
8.0
8.0
10.0
8.0.0
5.0
Cross05
6.0
8.0
6.0
6.0
8.0
0.0
Cross06
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Cross07
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Cross08
8.0
8.0
8.1
8.0
8.0
0.0
Cross09
6.0
6.0
6.1
6.0
6.0
0.0
Cross10
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
0.0
V9
Appendix G
Motif Samples
860
Size in mm Motif Name Motif X Cross11 8.0 Y 8.0
Cross12
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Cross13
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Cross14
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Cross15
8.0
7.0
8.0
8.0
7.0
0.0
Curve01 Curve02 Curve03
8.0 15.0 7.5
4.0 6.9 5.0
8.0 15.0 3.9
8.0 15.0 3.9
5.0 6.8 5.0
4.0 0.0 0.0
Curve04
7.5
3.8
7.5
7.5
4.1
2.5
Curve05
14.0
10.0
14.7
14.0
10.0
0.0
Curve06
19.1
20.5
19.4
19.1
20.5
0.0
V9
861
Size in mm Motif Name Curve07 Motif X 10.0 Y 5.0
Motif Run Spacing 10mm
Curve08
9.1
5.1
9.1
9.1
5.1
0.0
Curve09
3.4
6.6
2.9
3.4
6.6
0.0
Curve10
10.3
10.0
10.2
10.3
10.0
0.0
Curve11
10.0
5.6
9.9
10.0
5.6
0.0
Curve12
5.3
4.0
5.3
5.3
4.0
0.0
Curve13 Curve14
8.2 9.0
5.9 7.0
7.8 9.0
8.2 9.0
5.9 7.0
0.0 0.0
Curve15
10.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
9.0
0.0
Curve16
8.0
28.0
8.0
8.0
28.0
0.0
V9
Appendix G
Motif Samples
862
Size in mm Motif Name Curve17 Motif X 8.0 Y 6.0
Curve18
9.0
10.0
9.0
9.0
10.0
0.0
Curve19
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Heart01
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Kite01
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite02
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite03
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite04
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite05
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite06
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
V9
863
Size in mm Motif Name Kite07 Motif X 4.0 Y 4.0
Kite08
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite09
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite10
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
2.0
Kite11
8.0
10.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
4.0
Kite12
10.0
10.0
10.1
10.0
10.0
0.0
Kite13
4.7
5.0
4.8
4.7
5.0
0.0
Kite14
9.0
10.0
9.0
9.0
10.0
0.0
Kite15
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Kite16
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
0.0
V9
Appendix G
Motif Samples
864
Size in mm Motif Name Leaf01 Motif X 8.6 Y 6.8
Leaf02
8.7
7.2
6.2
6.2
7.3
0.0
Leaf03
6.5
3.0
6.6
6.5
3.0
0.0
Lines01
3.8
5.6
2.8
2.8
6.5
0.0
Lines02
2.2
3.6
1.3
1.2
3.6
0.0
Lines03 Lines04
6.8 6.0
2.0 5.0
6.8 6.0
6.8 6.0
2.0 5.0
3.4 0.0
Lines05
19.9
20.3
20.0
19.9
20.3
0.0
Lines06
20.3
20.5
21.0
20.3
20.5
0.0
Lines07
5.0
4.0
5.1
5.0
4.0
0.0
Lines08
10.0
8.0
9.9
10.0
8.0
0.0
Lines09
6.0
1.4
6.0
6.0
1.4
0.0
V9
865
Size in mm Motif Name Lines10 Motif X 8.6 Y 7.7
Lines11
10.0
12.0
10.0
10.0
12.0
0.0
Lines12
9.0
10.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Lines13
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
Lines14
10.0
12.5
10.0
12.5
12.5
0.0
Lines15
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
Lines16
4.0
10.0
4.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Music01
6.1
9.8
3.9
6.1
9.8
0.0
Scroll01
6.0
4.8
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Scroll02
6.5
5.6
6.5
6.5
4.3
2.8
V9
Appendix G
Motif Samples
866
Size in mm Motif Name Scroll03 Motif X 10.0 Y 5.0
Scroll04
10.0
5.0
10.0
10.0
6.3
0.0
Scroll05
9.5
9.0
9.5
9.5
9.0
0.0
Scroll06
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes01
9.5
9.0
9.5
9.5
9.0
0.0
Shapes02
10.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes03
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Shapes04
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes05
10.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes06
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
V9
867
Size in mm Motif Name Shapes07 Motif X 8.5 Y 8.0
Shapes08
9.0
8.5
9.0
9.0
8.5
0.0
Shapes09
7.0
8.0
7.0
7.0
8.0
0.0
Shapes10
7.0
9.0
7.0
7.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes11
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Shapes12
10.0
8.5
10.0
10.0
8.5
0.0
Shapes13
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes14
9.0
10.0
9.0
9.0
10.0
0.0
Shapes15
7.5
9.0
7.5
7.5
9.0
0.0
V9
Appendix G
Motif Samples
868
Shapes17
10.4
9.5
10.4
10.4
9.5
0.0
Shapes18
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Shapes19
10.0
12.0
10.0
10.0
12.0
0.0
Shapes20
9.0
9.5
9.0
9.0
9.5
0.0
Shapes21
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Shapes22
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes23
9.5
9.0
9.5
9.5
9.0
0.0
Shapes24
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
V9
869
Shapes26
8.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes27
9.0
8.0
9.0
9.0
8.0
0.0
Shapes28
10.0
12.0
10.0
10.0
12.0
0.0
Shapes29
8.5
9.0
8.5
8.5
9.0
0.0
Shapes30
10.0
12.0
10.0
10.0
12.0
0.0
Shapes31
12.0
10.0
12.0
12.0
10.0
0.0
Shapes32
8.5
9.0
8.5
8.5
9.0
0.0
Shapes33
8.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
V9
Appendix G
Motif Samples
870
Shapes35
4.0
7.5
4.0
4.0
7.5
0.0
Shapes36
8.0
8.5
8.0
8.0
8.5
0.0
Shapes37
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes38
7.0
4.0
7.0
7.0
4.0
0.0
Shapes39
8.0
9.5
8.0
8.0
9.5
0.0
Shapes40
9.0
8.0
9.0
9.0
8.0
0.0
Shapes41
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
0.0
Shapes42
7.5
7.0
7.5
7.5
7.0
0.0
V9
871
Shapes44
9.0
10.0
9.0
9.0
10.0
0.0
Square01
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Square02
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Square03
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Square04
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Square05
4.0
4.1
4.0
4.0
4.1
0.0
Square06
4.0
4.0
8.0
8.0
4.0
4.0
Star01
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Star02
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
V9
Appendix G
Motif Samples
872
Size in mm Motif Name Star03 Motif X 6.0 Y 4.0
Star04
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Star05
6mm
8.0
6.0
6.0
8.0
3.0
Star06
6.0
8.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Star07
5.0
4.4
5.3
5.0
4.4
0.0
Star08
10.0
10.0
10.1
10.0
10.0
0.0
Star09
20.1
20.6
20.6
20.1
20.6
0.0
Star10
8.7
10.0
8.7
8.7
10.0
0.0
Star11
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Star12
8.0
7.8
8.0
8.0
7.8
0.0
V9
873
Star14
9.6
9.0
9.6
9.6
9.0
0.0
Star15
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Star16
10.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
9.0
0.0
Star17
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
Star18
10.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
9.0
0.0
Star19
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Star20
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
Star21
9.5
9.0
9.5
9.5
9.0
0.0
Star22
8.0
9.5
8.0
8.0
9.5
0.0
V9
Appendix G
Motif Samples
874
Star24
9.0
10.0
9.0
9.0
10.0
0.0
Wave01
10.0
7.0
8.0
8.7
7.0
0.0
Wave02
15.0
10.0
15.8
15.0
10.0
0.0
Wave03
10.9
7.8
10.9
10.9
7.8
0.0
Wave04
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Xmas01
7.3
8.8
7.4
7.3
8.8
0.0
ZigZag01
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
ZigZag02
8.0
4.0
8.0
8.0
5.0
0.0
ZigZag03
4.6
4.6
4.6
5.0
0.0
ZigZag04
7.0
4.0
7.0
7.6
3.0
0.0
V9
875
Size in mm Motif Name ZigZag05 Motif X 4.0 Y 4.0
ZigZag06
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.0
4.1
0.0
ZigZag07
10.0
10.0
10.2
10.0
10.0
0.0
ZigZag08
10.0
10.0
10.7
10.0
10.0
0.0
ZigZag09
12.0
12.0
12.3
12.0
12.0
0.0
ZigZag10
9.9
10.0
10.3
9.9
10.0
0.0
ZigZag11
18.5
19.1
19.2
18.5
19.1
0.0
ZigZag12
20.2
20.1
20.4
20.2
20.1
0.0
ZigZag13
19.5
8.1
19.8
19.5
8.1
0.0
ZigZag14
18.0
9.1
18.4
18.0
9.1
0.0
V9
Appendix G
Motif Samples
876
ZigZag17
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
ZigZag18
14.0
7.0
14.0
14.0
7.0
0.0
ZigZag19
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
ZigZag20
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
ZigZag21
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
ZigZag22
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
ZigZag23
9.0
10.0
9.0
9.0
10.0
0.0
ZigZag24
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
ZigZag25
10.0
7.5
10.0
10.0
7.5
0.0
V9
877
ZigZag27
12.0
8.0
12.0
12.0
8.0
0.0
ZigZag28
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
ZigZag29
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
0.0
Two-part motifs
The following table lists the two-part motifs that are available in Wilcom ES, and the resulting pattern. It also shows the size, column, row and offset values for Motif Fills.
.
Size in mm Motif A Duet01a Motif B Duet01b Fill Pattern X a=7.0 b=7.0 Y a=5.0 b=3.0 Col 7.0
Motif Fill Row 3.5 Offset 0.0
Duet02a
Duet02b
a=12.0 b=12.0
a=6.0 b=9.0
12.0
6.0
0.0
V9
Appendix G
Motif Samples
878
Duet04a
Duet04b
a=9.0 b=9.0
a=8.0 b=3.0
9.0
4.5
0.0
Duet05a
Duet05b
a=6.4 b=6.4
a=4.8 b=3.2
6.4
3.2
0.0
Duet06a
Duet06b
a=4.4 b=4.4
a=2.2 b=2.4
4.4
1.9
1.1
Duet07a
Duet07b
a=4.8 b=4.8
a=4.4 b=4.2
4.8
2.2
1.3
Duet08a
Duet08b
a=11.6 b=11.6
a=4.4 b=4.4
11.2
2.9
0.0
V9
879
Duet10a
Duet10b
a=8.0 b=8.0
a=4.0 b=4.0
8.0
4.0
0.0
Duet11a
Duet11b
a=5.2 b=12.0
a=3.8 b=9.0
5.2
3.8
0.0
Duet12a
Duet12b
a=15.0 b=13.5
a=8.4 b=7.8
13.5
3.9
0.0
V9
Appendix G
Motif Samples
880
Appendix H
Program Split Samples
This section contains samples of the program split patterns available in Wilcom ES. Use the table to see what a particular program split looks like. The table also includes the recommended size, column, row and offset settings. If they have changed for any reason, revert to the settings using the values in this table. See Adjusting Program Split stitch settings for details. Pattern Name Arrowhd Size in mm Pattern X 6.0 Y 6.0 Spacing 4.5 Offset 0.0 Spacing 6.0 Offset 0.0 Column Row
Balloon
6.4
9.2
7.9
1.2
8.3
3.4
Bars
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
8.0
0.0
Basket
9.0
7.5
9.0
0.0
4.5
4.5
Basket2
9.0
9.0
6.0
0.0
6.0
0.0
Bird
6.0
4.9
6.0
0.0
4.9
0.0
Blocks1
12.0
12.0
12.0
0.0
8.0
8.0
Blocks2
12.0
12.0
8.0
0.0
8.0
8.0
V9
881
Pattern Name Bow
Size in mm Pattern X 9.4 Y 8.5
Column Spacing 17.9 Offset 5.8
Row Spacing 6.5 Offset 7.4
Breaker
10.0
6.0
10.0
0.0
6.0
0.0
Brick
6.0
3.0
6.0
0.0
3.0
3.0
Brick2
6.0
6.0
4.0
0.0
4.0
4.0
Certificate
10.3
10.7
10.0
0.0
10.2
1.1
Chain
10.0
6.0
6.7
0.0
7.0
3.3
Chevron
6.0
3.0
6.0
0.0
6.0
3.0
Chevron2
2.5
6.0
2.5
0.0
6.0
0.0
Chevron3
7.0
3.0
7.0
0.0
3.0
0.0
Circle
6.0
6.0
8.0
0.0
6.0
4.0
Crosstile
7.0
7.0
5.5
-5.5
5.5
5.5
Cube
6.0
6.0
6.0
1.5
6.0
1.4
Curvelg
7.1
7.5
7.1
0.0
7.5
0.0
Diadem
10.0
6.7
10.0
0.0
6.7
5.0
V9
Appendix H
882
Pattern Name Diamnd2
Diamond
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
6.0
0.0
Driver
8.0
4.0
8.0
0.0
4.0
1.5
Ellipse
4.0
6.0
4.6
0.0
5.0
2.3
Feather
7.9
8.2
8.6
0.4
7.2
0.6
Flame
6.0
3.7
6.0
0.0
3.6
3.0
Flower
10.7
9.3
19.5
-1.0
5.9
-9.6
Greekey
6.0
4.0
6.0
0.0
6.0
2.0
Heart
6.0
6.5
6.0
0.0
6.4
3.0
Herringbone
8.0
4.0
8.0
0.0
4.0
0.0
Hexagon
6.0
7.0
6.0
0.0
5.2
3.0
Hexagon2
7.0
6.0
7.0
0.0
6.0
0.0
Jem
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
9.5
5.0
Keyhole
4.0
2.7
5.3
0.0
2.7
2.7
V9
883
Pattern Name Leaf
Lollipop
7.3
10.2
9.0
-0.2
6.4
4.2
Man
8.8
11.0
17.7
0.5
5.4
-8.9
Melody
10.0
6.0
10.0
0.0
5.0
5.0
Metal
5.0
9.4
5.0
0.0
8.5
2.5
Passage
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
10.0
0.0
Piccolo
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
8.0
0.0
Roma
10.0
5.5
10.0
0.0
6.0
5.0
Rope
7.5
5.0
3.8
0.0
5.5
1.9
Scale
6.4
3.5
6.4
0.0
3.5
3.2
Scale2
3.5
6.4
3.5
3.2
6.4
0.0
Seville
6.7
5.6
6.7
0.0
4.5
4.5
Star5
6.0
5.7
6.0
0.0
5.7
3.0
V9
Appendix H
884
Pattern Name Steps
Column Spacing 6.0 Offset -6.0
Sun
7.6
8.3
7.6
0.0
8.3
0.0
Suncros
10.0
10.0
4.0
-6.0
4.0
6.0
Suncross2
11.0
11.0
6.8
-1.3
6.8
1.3
Swing
6.0
8.2
4.5
0.0
8.2
0.0
Tick
6.8
7.9
6.8
0.1
6.0
6.0
Tile1
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
8.0
0.0
Tile2
12.0
12.0
12.0
0.0
12.0
0.0
Tile3
10.1
10.0
10.0
0.0
10.0
0.0
Tile4
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
6.0
0.0
Triangl
6.0
5.2
6.0
0.0
5.2
3.0
Triangle3
7.5
6.5
7.5
0.0
6.5
0.0
Vine
8.5
2.8
8.5
0.0
3.5
2.0
V9
885
Pattern Name Wave
Wave2
9.9
3.2
9.9
2.9
3.2
0.0
Wave3
10.0
4.5
10.0
0.0
4.5
0.0
Whirl
7.5
7.5
7.5
0.0
7.5
0.0
Wild
8.5
8.0
8.5
0.0
7.5
4.5
xmasivy
9.8
10.0
9.8
0.0
10.0
0.0
Xmastre
16.0
16.0
13.3
8.0
16.0
0.0
Ziggy
5.0
8.0
4.0
0.0
8.0
0.0
V9
Appendix H
886
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
This section provides advice for solving problems in ES Designer. If you encounter a problem, refer in the first instance to the following references:
! Wilcom ES User Manual select Help > Online Manual (or printed
version)
! ! ! !
Wilcom ES Online Help select Help > Help Topics Windows Online Help select Start > Help Windows manual Documentation supplied with your hardware, if the problem is hardware-related.
For information about other Wilcom products, check the relevant Supplement or Online Help. For the most up-to-date support information about ES Designer and other Wilcom products, visit the Wilcom Support Center at www.wilcom.com.au/support. You will need to register in order obtain access. Note Before seeking help, check that your PC meets the system requirements. See Checking system requirements for details.
Checking system requirements

You need to ensure that the following pre-requisite system requirements are met in order to run the Wilcom ES V9 program suite.
Supported operating systems ! ES Designer, ES Design Explorer and ES Machine Manager will operate
under Windows 98SE or higher.
! ES Designer and ES Design Explorer require IE 6.0 or higher IE 6.0 is

included with the Wilcom ES installation and is also available from the Microsoft website.
V9
887
PC specifications
Check that your PC meets the system requirements. Check CPU/RAM as well as hard disk space. The table below provides minimum and recommended system requirements. Hardware Item CPU Operating System Internet Connection Browser Memory Hard Disk Size Free Hard Disk space Graphics Card Monitor Scanner Printer and/or Plotter Serial Ports IE 6.0 128 Mb (more if running multiple applications) 8 Gb 1 Gb after installation (non double-spaced) Support for High Color (16-bit) and high resolution at least 1024 x 768. 15" at 1024 x 768 resolution Windows compatible Windows compatible Minimum Requirements Pentium III (500 MHz) or higher Windows 98SE Recommended Pentium IV or higher Windows 2000 / XP For access to Wilcom website for regular product information and updates IE 6.x 256 Mb (for running multiple applications) 20 Gb or more, especially for database users More than 1.5 Gb after installation if running multiple applications Support for High Color (16-bit) and high resolution at least 1024 x 768. 17" at 1024 x 768 or larger Windows 2000/XP compatible Windows 2000/XP compatible Standard COM port if connecting to an embroidery machine via direct serial connection or Wilcom DCi. Note: To connect multiple machines, consult your local Wilcom Support. Dedicated parallel port if using parallel port dongle. Dedicated USB port if using USB dongle. Pointing device e.g. mouse, trackpad, trackball. CD-ROM drive for software installation Dedicated parallel port if using parallel port dongle. Dedicated USB port if using USB dongle. Pointing device e.g. mouse, trackpad, trackball. Backup device e.g. CD burner, tape backup, removable hard drive.
Parallel Ports USB Port Mouse CD-ROMs and other drives
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
888
Hardware Item Sound cards
Minimum Requirements Required for PET and other multimedia training products.
Recommended Required for PET and other multimedia training products.
Note Wilcom ES V9.0 occupies approximately 155 Mb of hard disk space, depending on the options installed.
Check CPU/RAM specifications

Check your CPU and RAM specifications, and the version of Windows you are running to ensure they meet Wilcom ES requirements.
To check CPU/RAM specifications

1 On the Windows desktop, right-click the My Computer icon and select Properties. The System Properties > General tab opens. 2 Check the Windows version, the CPU and the amount of RAM.
Check your hard disk space

Check that your hard disk has enough space to run ES Designer effectively.
To check your hard disk space

1 2 Double-click the My Computer icon on your Windows Desktop. The My Computer window opens. Right-click the hard-disk drive icon (usually C:) and select Properties. The Properties > General tab opens. This tab shows the hard-disk capacity as well as any free space. This must be greater than 100 MB or 10% of your total hard drive space, whichever is the greater amount.
Security device messages

This section describes the messages related to the Wilcom security device. Most security device messages are caused by incorrect connection, access codes, interference or conflict with other hardware devices.
V9
889
To prevent security device errors, enter all access codes as soon as you receive them. If you skip any access codes, features may become unavailable, or ES Designer may stop working altogether. See Entering security codes for details. Tip If you need to provide security device information to Wilcom Support or your reseller, send a screengrab of the Security Device dialog. This saves you transcribing the information and ensures that accurate details are sent. See Identifying your security device for details.
Invalid Access Code

Message Cause Invalid Access Code The access codes you are trying to enter are incorrect for your security device. You are missing a set of codes. Check the Identity Code provided against the Identity Code in the Security Device dialog of ES Designer. If they dont match, note the security device Serial Number and current Identity Code and contact your distributor. See Identifying your security device for details.
Suggestion
Security Device Not Found (-3) - Parallel port dongle

Message Cause Suggestion Security Device Not Found (-3) The software is unable to detect the parallel port dongle or there is a conflict with another device. Devices attached to the same parallel port will often cause conflicts. The most reliable method of resolving these is to install another port. The dongle can then be attached to any working parallel port i.e. LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, etc. See also Resolving parallel port dongle conflicts. Change the BIOS parallel port setting to 'Standard Bi-Directional Mode', 'Normal' or 'SPP'. If you are unfamiliar with making changes in the PC BIOS, consult your PC's documentation; or get a PC Technician to change it for you. If you have a Toshiba laptop you can use Control Panel > HW Setup > Parallel and Printer.
Security Device Not Found (-3) - USB port dongle

Message Security Device Not Found (-3)
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
890
Cause Suggestion
The software is unable to detect the dongle. The LED on the dongle may not light up. Try attaching the dongle to a different USB port. If the LED doesn't come on, go to Control Panel > System > Hardware > Device Manager. Click 'Universal Serial Bus Controllers' and look for 'Aladdin USB Key' OR 'Unknown USB Device'. Right-click the device, select 'Uninstall' and uninstall the device. Go to Control Panel and double-click 'Add New Hardware'. If Windows does not detect the dongle, or the dongle LED doesn't come on, the dongle is faulty and needs replacement. Contact your reseller for a replacement security device.
Security Device Not Found (-100)

Message Cause Suggestion Security Device Not Found (-100), or HASP Device Driver not installed (-100) The dongle driver is not installed, or an incorrect driver is installed. Install the dongle driver. See Installing or reinstalling the dongle driver for details. Visit www.wilcom.com.au/support, and download the latest dongle drivers.
HASP Device Driver Not Installed (-12)

Message Cause Suggestion HASP device driver not installed -12 Faulty USB Dongle security device. Please contact your reseller for a replacement Dongle.
Error Code (-31) and HASP key is not HASP 4 (-3)

Message Cause Suggestion Security: Error Code (-31) followed by Security: HASP key is not HASP 4 (-3). The software cannot communicate with the dongle. Restart Windows. Install the latest Dongle driver from the Wilcom Support Center at www.wilcom.com.au/support. If the problem continues, contact your Reseller.
V9
891
Invalid Product when starting ES Designer

Message Cause Suggestion Invalid Product displays when starting ES Designer. The dongle is faulty or incorrect access codes have been entered. Note your security device numbers Serial Number and Identity Code and contact your distributor or reseller. See Identifying your security device for details. If codes have been entered incorrectly, new codes can normally be provided to re-enable your dongle. If the dongle is faulty, you will need a replacement.
Invalid Product when printing

Message Cause Suggestion Invalid Product displays when printing. Parallel Port Dongle is attached to the same parallel port as the printer. Devices attached to the same parallel port will often cause conflicts. The most reliable method of resolving these is to install another port. The dongle can then be attached to any working parallel port i.e. LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, etc. See also Resolving parallel port dongle conflicts. Change the BIOS parallel port setting to 'Standard Bi-Directional Mode', 'Normal' or 'SPP'. If you are unfamiliar with making changes in the PC BIOS, consult your PC's documentation; or get a PC Technician to change it for you. If you have a Toshiba laptop you can use Control Panel > HW Setup > Parallel and Printer.
Timeout warning
Message Cause Suggestion Your Security Device will time out in xx days. New access codes are required or sent codes have not been entered. If you have not received new access codes within 5 days of receiving your first message, note your security device numbers Serial Number and Identity Code and contact your distributor or reseller. See Identifying your security device for details.
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
892
Unable to Run Software

Message Cause Unable to Run Software displays on some WinXP PCs with parallel port dongles. ES Designer runs normally most of the time, but intermittently (once per week to many times per day) receives the error. The Wilcom Security dialog box appears, but with incorrect security device details. You can save designs in ES Designer, but most of the buttons are greyed-out. ES Designer needs to be restarted in order to get around the problem. Contact your reseller for a possible replacement dongle.
Suggestion
Missing Files
Message Cause Suggestion Some files may be missing. Corrupted hard disk, virus attack or security violation. Re-install the software. If the problem persists, further diagnose the problem. For example, run a virus checking program and scan the disk to check that the hard disk is not corrupted.
Unrecoverable errors
The system may generate unrecoverable errors when opening designs or ES Designer itself.
Unrecoverable error when opening design

Problem Cause Solution When opening a design, the message unrecoverable error, shutting down displays. The design is corrupt. Not really any solution.
Unrecoverable error when starting ES Designer

Problem Cause When starting ES Designer the message unrecoverable error, shutting down displays. A design in the recover folder is corrupt.
V9
893
Solution
Delete any files in the C:\ESWin\Recover folder using the Purge Recovery utility. Alternatively, delete them manually using Windows Explorer. See Deleting files with Purge Recovery for details.
ES Design Explorer problems

The following section relates to any ES Design Explorer connection problems you may experience.
Timeout warning when starting ES Design Explorer

Message Cause The connection to ES Designer has timed out. ES Design Explorer requires ES Designer to be running in order to verify security. If ES Design Explorer is started without ES Designer already running and ES Designer takes longer to load than ES Design Explorer expects, the error message will appear. This can happen on a slow PC, or a PC that is low on resources. Start ES Designer before starting ES Design Explorer.
Suggestion
Unknown Format in ES Design Explorer (1)

Message Cause Unknown Format (in place of design thumbnails) A Microsoft Windows component, msxml3.msi':, which ES Design Explorer requires to display thumbnails, is missing. Note: 'msxml3.msi' is required by both ES Design Explorer and Design Workflow. If you have Win98, you need to install IE 6.x in order to install 'msxml3.msi'. Download the current version from the Microsoft Internet Explorer website. If you have Win98 Second Edition, Win2000 or WinXP, you can install msxml3.msi' on its own. Download msxml3.msi': from the Wilcom Support Center website at www.wilcom.com.au/support. After downloading double-click it and follow the on-screen instructions. In ES Design Explorer, select the 'Unknown Format' thumbnails and select View >Validate & Refresh to regenerate the thumbnails.
Suggestion
Unknown Format in ES Design Explorer (2)

Message Unknown Format (in place of design thumbnails)
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
894
Cause Suggestion
Your ES Design Explorer program shortcut has the wrong ES Designer version specified in the Target Path field of the shortcut. Change the statement to match the version you are running with ES Design Explorer e.g. C:\eswin\Design Explorer\WilcomDesignExplorer.exe might become: C:\eswin\Design Explorer\WilcomDesignExplorer.exe version=9.0 Select the 'Unknown Format' thumbnails and select View >Validate & Refresh to regenerate the thumbnails.
Thumbnails slow to generate in ES Design Explorer

Problem Cause Thumbnails are slow to generate in ES Design Explorer. The first time ES Design Explorer accesses a folder containing design files, it has to generate each design's thumbnail image. If the folder contains many files, it can take time to generate the thumbnails. Note: Thumbnails only have to be generated once, after which accessing folders is significantly faster.
Suggestion
Design files not showing up in ES Design Explorer

Problem Cause Suggestion Design files not showing up in ES Design Explorer. You have chosen to display only non-embroidery files. Check which file types you have chosen to display in ES Design Explorer. Select 'All Files' to display all available files or select only the embroidery file types you use.
Device connection problems

The following section relates to any embroidery machine and digitizing tablet connection problems you may experience in ES Designer.
Problem connecting to Melco embroidery machine

Problem Cause Problem connecting to Melco embroidery machine from ES Designer Various
V9
895
Suggestion
View the document Melco Connect Support Notes.pdf either at C:\ESWin\Support Notes\Melco Connect Support Notes.pdf or at the Wilcom Support site at www.wilcom.com.au/support in the Wilcom Library section.
Machine/digitizer connection suddenly stops working

Problem The machine connection suddenly stops working. Nothing has changed on the PC or the embroidery machine, and no machine connection settings have changed in ES Designer. The physical connection from the PC to the embroidery machine has been broken, or there is a conflict with another device. Check that the cable connections are all sound. Check that the cable has not been damaged. For digitizing tablets, run the connection test. See Testing digitizing tablet connections for details. If you have recently installed new hardware e.g. a soundcard disable or remove the device. If that resolves the problem, consult a PC technician to determine how to assign Windows resources so that they dont conflict with the machine connection setup.
Cause Suggestion
Machine/digitizer connection stops working after reinstallation of ES Designer

Problem Cause Machine and/or digitizer connection has stopped working. ES Designer recently reinstalled. Reinstallation of ES Designer over an existing installation using the 'Quick Install' method will overwrite existing machine and digitizer connection settings with the default settings. To ensure settings from the existing installation are merged into the new installation, select the 'Custom Install' option. You will be prompted to merge existing settings into the new installation. Tip: Always keep a note of any custom settings machine or digitizer connection, user-defined split settings, etc for use in case of emergency. For instance, your hard drive may crash and you may need to install ES Designer on a different PC.
Suggestion
Missing connection settings

Problem You dont have a record of the connection settings required to set up your embroidery machine or digitizing tablet.
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
896
Suggestion
See Setting up Hardware for details of how to set up the device. Visit the Wilcom Support Centre www.wilcom.com.au/support. This lists connection information for most popular devices. If not already a member of the WSC, you will need to register as a licensed user of Wilcom software.
Digitizing tablet is not listed

Problem Cause The digitizing tablet is not listed in the list of formats in ES Designer, and 'Auto Detect' is not detecting the tablet. If your connection settings are correct, you may need to set up a custom 'format string'. This is a string of letters or characters which tells the software how to interpret the format of the data coming from the digitizing tablet. Use the DigiTest utility to determine the digitizing tablets format string. See Testing digitizing tablet connections for details. Enter the string in the The Digitizer User-Defined Format Setup dialog. See Defining and modifying digitizing tablet formats for details.
Suggestion
Windows-compatible digitizing tablet not recognized

Problem Cause Suggestion A Windows-compatible digitizing tablet is installed but ES Designer doesn't recognize it. ES Designer is not capable of utilizing Windows drivers for digitizing tablets. You need to set up the tablet in ES Designer. See Setting up digitizing tablets for details. Note: Some Windows-compatible tablets install software that runs in the background, constantly checking the serial ports for the presence of the tablet. Sometimes this software takes control of the port, making it unavailable to any other applications such as ES Designer that need to use it. If you have a Windows-compatible tablet, check the software (usually running in the Windows taskbar) for 'auto detect' settings. You may need to disable auto detect when using the tablet within ES Designer. Note: Some tablet software does not have a disable option and must be uninstalled to free up the serial port.
General problems
The following section relates to general problems you may experience in ES Designer.
V9
897
Units of measurement in ES Designer

Problem Units of measurement in ES Designer are not what you want e.g. measurements are in inches instead of millimeters, or vice versa. The units of measurement are set in Windows Regional options. Change the units of measurement in Windows. Select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Regional Options. In the Number tab change the measurement system from Inches to Metric, or vice versa as required.
Cause Suggestion
Formatting embroidery disks in ES Designer

Problem After formatting a 720kb DSDD DOS disk in ES Designer using the full format option, any attempt to write a file or design to the disk causes a Windows 9x blue screen error message to appear. This problem affects disks formatted under Windows 98, Windows 98SE, and Windows ME. In the case of Windows ME, all files on the floppy disk are corrupted. The problem does not exist on Windows NT or Windows 2000 platforms. Any of the embroidery disks which use DOS media will have this problem, including Tajima, Toyota, S32 (S-FMC), and Happy. The problem does not occur with non-DOS media such as FMC or FDR. When the Windows Format dialog indicates that formatting is complete, you are prompted to click Close. Before doing so, remove the disk from the drive, re-insert it immediately, then click Close. Use the quick format format option. Notes: Melco format is not supported by ES Designer under WinXP, 2000 or NT. A floppy disk controller that can handle Single Density Format is required for Melco format. For more information visit www.wilcom.com.au/support or contact your PC technician.
Cause
Suggestion
Unable to read, write or format Melco format embroidery disks

Problem ES Designer cannot read, write or format Melco format embroidery disks.
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
898
Cause
The disk format required for the Melco Star, Starlet and Superstar Series of embroidery machines is Single Sided / Single Density (SS/SD) format which is supported by very few new floppy disk controllers. If you require this format for your own embroidery machines or to supply this format to your customers, the floppy disk controllers inside your PC must support SS/SD. To help you determine whether your PC supports the SS/SD format, run the TestDisk utility. See Testing embroidery disks for details. Note: TestDisk does not work under WinXP, 2000 or NT. Install a floppy disk controller which supports IBM 3740 Single Density Format (FM).
Suggestion
Inconsistent output results

Problem Cause There are problems when reading and punching paper tapes, or sending designs to embroidery machines for stitching. These are caused by serial communications problems. Inconsistent reading and writing may be caused by wrong port settings in the operating system or by incorrect settings In ES in the connection setup for the device. Change the port settings in ES Designer and/or the device. See Setting up paper tape readers and punches for details.
Suggestion
Stitches not displaying

Problem No stitches are displayed in a design even though there is a stitch count in the status bar. Only the shape outlines are shown for the whole design, or for some objects. The View option Show Stitches is turned off, or stitches were not generated for the design or for some objects during digitizing, or the stitches were removed subsequently from selected objects. Select the Show Stitches tool. See Setting TrueView options for details. If some objects still dont have stitches, select them and re-generate the stitches using the keyboard shortcut G.
Cause
Suggestion
TrueView always turned on or off

Problem Cause TrueView is always turned on or off. The TrueView display setting is saved when closing ES Designer in the mode you are currently using.
V9
899
Suggestion
Open any design and click the TrueView button on or off as required and exit (File > Exit) with the design still open. When you restart ES Designer, all designs will open in the mode you selected when you closed ES Designer.
Missing toolbars
Problem Cause Suggestion Some toolbars are missing. The toolbars have been closed or set not to display. Select View > Toolbars and select the toolbar you want to display. For the Point and Stitch toolbar, select View > Point and Stitch.
Missing toolbar buttons

Problem Cause Suggestion Buttons are missing from toolbars. The screen resolution is set too low. Change the screen resolution to 1024x768 or higher.
Control points missing

Problem Cause Suggestion The control points on selected objects are missing. This problem is related to the display adapter. Check the display adapter manufacturer's website or a software driver download site for the latest display adapter driver for your display adapter. If there is a more recent driver available, download and install it. These are normally free. For a listing of popular display adapter websites, see Locate the latest display adapters.
Unwanted trims
Problem Cause Suggestion Unwanted trims sometimes appear in embroidery objects. You may be using the 'Connectors Outside Object' and 'Connectors Inside Object' settings incorrectly. Check the connector settings. See Using automatic connectors for details.
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
900
Design integrity errors

Problem Cause Some designs generate Design Integrity errors. In most cases the problem is caused by a resequencing error in the design, caused when stitches become 'unsequenced' from their objects. This normally happens only when grouped objects are resequenced. Avoid resequencing grouped objects. Leave the Design Integrity checker on when digitizing designs. Whenever you receive a Design Integrity error message, click Undo and work around the problem. Even if a design does generate errors, ES Designer will continue to work normally in most cases.
Suggestion
Exception access violation when starting ES Designer

Problem Cause Suggestion An Exception Access Violation error message appears when starting ES Designer. A corrupt design file i the Recover folder or a corrupt c:\eswin\res\defaults.dfl file. Delete any files in the c:\eswin\recover folder. If ES Designer still will not start, use Windows Explorer to copy the default c:\eswin\bin\defaults.dfl file to the c:\eswin\res folder, overriding the corrupt defaults.dfl file.
Other exception access violations

Problem An Exception Access Violation error message appears when zooming, using lettering, printing or scanning, saving designs, or viewing the Color-Object List. This problem generally relates to the display adapter driver and/or the display adapter itself. Try each of the listed solutions in sequence. See Resolving Exception Access Violation errors for details.
Cause Suggestion
Beeping sound when digitizing

Problem Cause ES Designer generates a beeping sound when digitizing. This is normal behavior and is a feature of ES Designer.
V9
901
Suggestion
To disable, overwrite the c:\eswin\res\button1.wav and c:\eswin\res\button2.wav files with blank wav files. Use the Windows Sound Recorder utility as follows: Select Start > Programs > Accessories > \....\Sound Recorder. Click File > New. Click File > Save As. Browse to the c:\eswin\res folder and save the file as button1.wav. Repeat the process for button2.wav. Note: Just deleting or renaming the c:\eswin\res\button*.wav files will not stop the beeps.
Problem recovering design files from backup folder

Problem Cause You cant see the backup design e.g. DesignName.BAK in the backup folder. If you have the ES Designer 'Auto Save' option enabled, backups of EMB design files will be saved to the c:\eswin\backup folder. This is a basic way of backing up your files. Start Windows Explorer and browse to the c:\eswin\backup folder. Select the file and select File > Rename. Change the file extension to EMB e.g. DesignName.EMB. Move the EMB file to your c:\design folder. You can now open the file normally in ES Designer. Note: If you cannot see the file extension BAK, you need to change your view settings in Windows Explorer. Refer to Windows Help for more details.
Suggestion
Embroidery lettering problems

The following section relates to embroidery lettering problems you may experience in ES Designer.
Problem embroidery letters

Problem Cause Suggestion Some embroidery letters display or stitch badly. You may be using the particular alphabet incorrectly. Ensure you are using the alphabet within Wilcom's recommend sizes and sequence settings as specified in Standard Alphabets.
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
902
Incorrect number of lettering connectors

Problem Cause Suggestion There are too many/too few connectors in my lettering. The connector settings and/or stitch method are incorrectly set. Check you are using 'Connectors Inside Object' for the Connector properties within your lettering object. Also check you are using the recommended stitch method for your lettering. See Adjusting stitching sequence and join method for details.
Installed optional alphabets not available I

Problem Cause Some installed optional alphabets dont show in the alphabet dropdown list. This occurs when there is more than one copy of the alphabet in one of the subfolders of the Wilcom ES installation folder c:\eswin. For example, there is a copy of the alphabet S324.esa in both the c:\eswin\wletter and c:\eswin\userletw folders. Search the hard drive for multiple copies of the alphabet file in question. Search the C: drive for *.ESA files. If there is more than one copy of any file, delete the extra copy from the hard drive. Ensure the remaining copy of the file is in the c:\eswin\wletter folder. Restart ES Designer.
Suggestion
Installed optional alphabets not available II

Problem An optional alphabet which is present in c:\eswin\wletter or c:\eswin\monogram folder does not appear in alphabet dropdown list. You are using an incorrect security device for the installed alphabets. If you have changed security device (without a brain transplant) since you received your optional alphabets e.g. gone from a Trysoft or Blue dongle to a Yellow or Black dongle they will need to be re-created for your new security device. Contact your reseller to order a replacement alphabet disk. Note: Dongles which have had a brain transplant will not cause this problem.
Cause Suggestion
V9
903
Problem selecting alphabet installation folder

Problem Cause Suggestion The alphabet installation program does not allow you to select a folder other than c:\eswin. The alphabet installation program is not capable of installing alphabets into any folder other than c:\eswin. Install the alphabets to the default folder, then copy the ESA files to their respective \monogram or \wletter folders within the correct installation folder e.g. c:\eswin\monogram and c:\eswin\wletter. Move m*.esa files to the c:\eswin\monogram folder. Move s*.esa files to the c:\eswin\wletter folder.
Installing or reinstalling the dongle driver

If your dongle driver was not installed correctly or you have an updated version of the driver, you will need to reinstall it.
Installing the dongle driver

Use the following procedure to install or reinstall your dongle driver. Adding extra switches to the command line may help. See also Additional switches. Note To install the dongle driver under WinXP, 2000 or NT, you need to be logged into Windows with Administrator privileges. If not, you will receive an error message User has no access to the registry.
To install the dongle driver

1 2 Close all Wilcom applications. From the Windows taskbar, select Start > Run. The Run dialog opens.
In the Open field, enter
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
904
! For a parallel port dongle driver

c:\eswin\bin\hinstall.exe -i -kp -portmode=auto
! For a USB port dongle driver

c:\eswin\bin\hinstall.exe -i -kp If you installed ES Designer to a different folder than c:\eswin, modify the command line accordingly. Note A space before each - is required or the installation will not succeed. 4 Click OK. If the installation is successful, the message The operation was completed successfully or HASP driver successfully installed appears. 5 6 Restart your PC, if prompted. Start ES Designer.
Additional switches
Sometimes, when installing or reinstalling the dongle driver, adding an extra switch to the command line can help resolve particular problems.
NEC & IBM brand computers

If you have an NEC or IBM brand computer, use: IBM: c:\eswin\bin\hinstall -i -kp -computertype=IBM -portmode=auto NEC: c:\eswin\bin\hinstall -i -kp -computertype=NEC -portmode=auto
Port-delay switch
Some PCs have a slow parallel port which can prevent ES Designer receiving the correct responses from the dongle. Sometimes adding an extra -portdelay=3000 switch to the command line can help: c:\eswin\bin\hinstall.exe -i -kp -portmode=auto -portdelay=3000 If the dongle still doesnt work, or the system continues to crash or freeze, increase the port-delay value until it reaches 4294967295.
Contention switch
The -contention=yes switch enables better port sharing between printers and dongles on the same parallel port. For example: c:\eswin\bin\hinstall -i -kp -portmode=auto -contention=yes
V9
905
If using both port-delay and contention switches, enter the following command line: c:\eswin\bin\hinstall -i -kp -portmode=auto -contention=yes -portdelay=3000 Note You must specify all switches you want to use each time you run hinstall; previous settings will be removed if you run hinstall again without the required switch.
Resolving parallel port dongle conflicts

Devices attached to the same parallel port will often cause conflicts. The most reliable method for resolving conflicts between the parallel port dongle and other devices, is to install another parallel port. The parallel port dongle can be then attached to any working parallel port i.e. LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, etc. If you want to try resolving the problem without installing another parallel port, try the following methods in order.
Change parallel port mode in the BIOS

Change the parallel port mode in the BIOS to SPP, Normal, or a setting that includes SPP, e.g. ECP+SPP, EPP+SPP.
To change parallel port mode in the BIOS

1 Go into the BIOS as the PC is first being booted up. Usually this is done by pressing the Del key and on some PCs may be F10. Note If a message telling you which key to press does not appear when the PC boots up, consult your PC documentation. 2 3 4 In the BIOS setup menu, go to Integrated Peripherals or similar and look for Parallel Port Mode. Select this setting and change it to Normal, SPP, SPP+EPP or SPP+ECP. Exit the BIOS, answering Yes to Do you want to save settings? The PC will then reboot with the new BIOS settings. Note If you change a setting by mistake, simply exit the BIOS setup and select no to the prompt do you want to save changes?.
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
906
Check the printer driver

If changing parallel port modes in the BIOS fails to work, check that the printer is using the latest driver.
To check the printer driver

1 2 3 Log on to the manufacturers website. Download the latest printer driver and note the installation instructions on the website. If that doesnt work, try using the relevant printer driver supplied with Windows. The Windows drivers are sometimes less intensive than the manufacturer-supplied drivers and may not conflict with the dongle. Note If none of the above work, you will need to install another port. The dongle can be connected to any parallel port LPT1, LPT2, etc.
Reverting to factory settings

If you have made changes to the default settings or they have become corrupted, use the Revert utility to revert to factory settings. Warning Reverting to the original settings removes any changes you have made to styles, templates and hardware settings. Note down any settings you want to preserve e.g. machine connection settings before running the utility.
To revert to factory settings

1 2 Close ES Designer. On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button and select Programs > Wilcom ES > Revert.
V9
907
The Revert to Factory Settings dialog opens.
Select items to be restored
3 4
Select the items you want restored to factory defaults. Click OK. The selected items are restored to factory settings. Note There is no confirmation message.
Deleting files with Purge Recovery

Delete corrupt files from the C:\ESWin\Recover and C:\ESWin\Backup folders using the Purge Recovery utility.
To use Purge Recovery

1 2 Close ES Designer. On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button and select Programs > Wilcom ES > Purge Recovery. The Purge Recovery and Backup Directories dialog opens.
Tip To delete backup files as well, select Delete Backup files. 3 Click OK. If some files cannot be deleted, a message will display. Using Windows Explorer, delete any remaining files from the C:\ESWin\Recover and C:\ESWin\Backup folders.
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
908
Tip If the errors persist, try reverting to factory settings. See Reverting to factory settings for details.
Testing digitizing tablet connections

If you experience difficulties with your digitizing tablet, first check that it is correctly connected, and that the hardware settings are correctly configured in ES Designer. See Serial port settings for details. If you are still experiencing problems, you can confirm that the tablet is communicating correctly with the PC using the DigiTest utility. Note This utility will not recognize mulitport serial cards, e.g. COM1 or COM2. Always connect your digitizing tablet to a standard PC COM port for testing purposes. Once you have confirmed that communications are correct, replace the connection to your multiport serial card and configure the port settings as described.
To test digitizing tablet connections

1 2 3 4 On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, and select Run. The Run dialog opens. In the Open field, enter C:\ESWin\bin\digitest.exe where C is the drive where Wilcom ES was installed. Click OK. The DigiData - DigiTest window opens. Select Digitizer > Setup.
V9
909
The Digitizer Setup dialog opens.
Select digitizing tablet Select Point or Stream Show tablet data as recognized by software Enter connection settings
5 6 7
From the Digitizer Format field, select a digitizing tablet to check. If it is not in the list, select Auto Detect. From the Input Mode list, select Point or Stream. This setting must match the one on the digitizing tablet. Select Interpret Digitizer Data to display digitizing tablet data as recognized by ES Designer. During the test, this shows which puck button is pressed and the X, Y coordinates at the point clicked.
8 9
Enter required information in the Connected To panel fields. See Peripheral device connection settings for details. Click OK.
10 Click the Start/Stop Digitizer icon. 11 Place the digitizing tablet puck on the tablet and press each of the buttons on the puck.
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
910
Data appears on screen representing the X, Y coordinates and corresponding button number. If the test is not successful, or you get unformatted garbage data, click the Start/Stop Digitizer icon to stop the digitizing tablet.
12 Check the settings.
! If the data is not mostly numeric, the port is in a corrupt state. Close
all applications, shutdown your PC and repeat the test.
! If the data appears to be correct, switch to ES Designer and

configure the port with the settings you used successfully in DigiTest. See Setting up digitizing tablets for details.
Resolving Exception Access Violation errors

The error message Exception Access Violation can appear when zooming, using lettering, printing or scanning, saving designs, or viewing the Color-Object List. This problem generally relates to the display adapter driver and/or the display adapter itself. Try each of the following solutions in sequence.
Check the display adapter

Use the System utility in the Control Panel to check your display adapter and drivers. Use the following procedure to determine which display adapter make and model you have, and what drivers are installed for the display adapter.
To check the display adapter

1 From the Windows taskbar, select Start > Settings > Control Panel.
V9
911
2 3
Double-click the System icon. Select the Device Manager option.
! Windows 95/98: Select the Device Manager tab. ! Windows 2000/NT/XP: Select the Hardware tab and click Device
Manager. 4 Click to open the Display Adapters node.
Note display adapter
5 6 7 8 9
Note down the display adapter listed. Right-click the adapter and select Properties. Select the Driver tab and note the date of the driver. Click Driver Details. Note down Provider and File Version details.
Note provider and file version
10 Cancel out of the dialogs and close the Control Panel window. 11 Check the display adapter manufacturers website for a more recent version of the driver. See Locate the latest display adapters for details.
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
912
Locate the latest display adapters

Some common problems are related to your PCs display adapter. These occur more frequently with the newer and 3D display adapters. Check the display adapter manufacturers website or a software driver download site for the latest display adapter driver. If there is a more recent driver available, download and install it. These are normally free from the provider. Some popular display adapter websites are:
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
www.ati.com www.nvidia.com www.matrox.com www.diamondmm.com www.download.com www.intel.com www.helpdrivers.com www.matrox.com www.neomagic.com www.oaktech.com www.s3graphics.com www.sis.com www.tridentmicro.com www.tucows.com www.windrivers.com
If your video card is integrated to your system board, please check the system board manufacturers website.
Reduce graphics acceleration

If you already have the latest driver installed, or if installing a newer driver does not solve the problem, you can reduce the Windows graphics acceleration.
To reduce graphics acceleration

1 Access the Hardware Acceleration option in your system settings.
! Win 95/98: Select the System icon in the Windows Control Panel,
select the Performance tab and click Graphics.
V9
913
! Win 2000/XP: Right-click the Desktop and select Properties. Select

the Settings tab and click Advanced. Select the Troubleshooting tab.
Reduce hardware acceleration
2 3 4
Reduce the hardware acceleration a notch. Click OK. You will be prompted to restart your computer. When Windows has restarted, see how the software runs. If it has not improved, try dropping the acceleration another notch. Usually you should not need to reduce the acceleration by more than two notches to correct the problem. However, in extreme cases, you may need to reduce it to None.
Install a different model display adapter

In a very few cases updating the display adapter driver and/or reducing graphics acceleration will not solve the problem. The only solution is to install a different brand/model of display adapter. Wilcom can advise on the type of display adapter to use. If you have another computer with a different display adapter, we recommended swapping the two. Often a problem display adapter will work fine in another computer.
V9
Appendix I
Troubleshooting
914
Glossary
10O: Stitch file format native to Toyota

machines.
occupies a significant amount of the design, thereby lowering stitch count.
3D Warp: 3D Warp is used with Motif Fill to create three dimensional effects. You can make shapes appear concave or convex using Globe In or Globe Out. You can also create distance effects using Perspective. Accordion Spacing: Accordion Spacing
varies the stitch spacing between dense and open fill, producing shading and color effects which are difficult to do manually.
Artwork: Bitmap image or vector drawing

used as a backdrop for digitizing. See also Bitmap image and Vector drawing.
Auto Appliqu: Auto Appliqu is an embroidery object associated with an appliqu which provides automatic stitching to place it, tack it down, and cover its edges. Auto Center: Auto Center automatically
centers the start and end points of a design.
Active window: The active window is one to

which the next command or action will apply. If a window is active, its title bar changes color to differentiate it visually from other open windows.
Alphabet: A set of characters of the same

design or style including letters, numbers and typographical symbols.
Auto Jump: Auto Jump preserves long stitches in an object by splitting them into a series of jumps. This prevents the machine from inserting unwanted needle penetrations when the maximum frame movement is exceeded. Auto Scroll: The Auto Scroll feature automatically scrolls the screen while you are digitizing.
Anchor point: A fixed point used when
rotating, scaling, skewing or mirroring a design. Auto Spacing: Auto Spacing only affects Satin stitch. It adjusts stitch spacing according Anti-aliasing: A software technique similar to column width. to dithering which is used to soften hard outlines where color blocks intersect. It produces Auto Split: Auto Split only affects Satin smoother outlines by blurring the pixels where stitch. When applied, it breaks any long Satin colors join. stitches into shorter ones. It also distributes needle penetrations in a random pattern so that they do not form a line in the middle of the Appliqu: Appliqu is a decoration or shape. Used primarily to prevent long stitches in trimming cut from one piece of fabric and wide columns, it can also be used as an stitched to another to add dimension and alternative to Tatami fill. Auto Split looks more texture. Designs with appliqu can be more Satin-like and works well with turning stitches, economical than embroidery alone, if appliqu creating soft lines and a little more depth.
V9
915
Auto Start and End: Before stitching, some embroidery machines require you to position the starting needle exactly above the first needle penetration point. Use Auto Start and End to connect the first and last stitches in the design. This makes it easy to position the needle before stitching, and reduces the chance of the needle hitting the side of the frame. Automatic stitch shortening: Reduces stitch bunching at sharp corners. See also Stitch shortening. Auto Trace: Auto Trace is used to convert bitmap images to vector drawings. Backdrop: A backdrop is an electronic
drawing which you can use to digitize designs on-screen. Two types can be used vector or bitmap. You can insert them from various file sources, or you can copy and paste them via the Windows clipboard.
Backtrack: Use Backtrack and Repeat to reinforce outlines while specifying the direction of the stitching. Backtrack stitches in reverse direction to the original. It is typically used to make run stitch outlines thicker without creating unwanted connecting stitches. Repeat duplicates the original stitch direction and is typically used with closed shapes. Backup: The copying of files onto floppy disk
or other media so that the data is secure. Usually two copies are made and kept separately.
Baseline: The baseline is the digitized line on

which the letters of an alphabet sit. Only descenders extend below it. Baselines determine the shape of lettering objects in a design. You can place lettering on a straight horizontal or vertical line, curve lettering around a circle or arc, or digitize your own baseline. Different reference points are needed depending on the baseline you use.
Background: ES Designer lets you change

the background color of the design window to match the color of your fabric. Or you can select a background fabric for more realistic previews and presentations. The background is saved with the colorway.
Bitmap image: A bitmap is an electronic image made up of dots or pixels, in contrast to vector outlines. Typically created in paint programs, bitmaps have file extensions such as BMP, JPG, GIF, TIF and PCX. See also Pixels. BMP: Windows bitmap image format. Borderline backstitch: The rows are
approximately parallel. With lower density fills, borderline backstitch creates a smooth, well-defined edge. Borderline backstitch is also called Trapunto style. See also Backstitch.
Backing: The backing is the woven or

non-woven material used beneath an item or fabric being embroidered to provide support and stability. It can be hooped with the item or placed between the machine throat plate and hooped garment. It is available in various weights and types such as cutaway, tearaway and soluble.
Backstitch: Backstitch is an input method

which can be used for delicate outlines. This stitch follows intricate curves well. It is also is the term used for every second row of stitches in a Tatami fill. See also Standard backstitch, Borderline backstitch, and Diagonal backstitch.
Borer depth: You can choose the numbering system for specifying the Borer depth: Plauen where one is the base and seven (7) the normal middle position and Saurer where the base is zero and the normal middle position is six (6). Bounding box: The dotted rectangle that appears when you select a range of items.
V9
Glossary
916
Branching: The Branching feature lets you

digitize like objects e.g. the fingers of a hand without having to think about the most efficient stitching sequence and joins.
effects by blending colored layers. Two colors are merged smoothly from one to another using a mixture of dense and open fill.
BRO: Bits & Volts file format. Cap Corner: A type of Smart Corner. Cap corners are used for very sharp corners as they produce fewer stitches. CED: A data condensed file format. Center at Current Stitch: The object will
be placed with its center at the needle position marker.
Color depth: Color depth, also called pixel

depth, refers to the amount of color information available to each pixel in an image. An image with a color depth of 1-bit can display only two colors. As the color depth increases, more colors are available 16 Colors (4 bit), 256 Colors (8 bit), High Color (16 bit), True Color (24 bit).
Color palette: The color palette contains a

selection of thread colors tailored for each design. This color scheme, or colorway, represents the actual thread colors in which a design will be stitched.
Center Run underlay: Center Run

underlay places a row of stitches along the center of a column. It is used to stabilize narrow columns (e.g. 2-3 mm wide).
Colorways: The Colorways feature is used to

preview a design in different colors on different fabrics by selecting from among pre-defined color schemes for that design.
Checkbox: A small square box that appears in a dialog box and that can be selected or cleared. When selected, a tick or a cross appears. A checkbox represents an option that you can set. Click: Press and release the left mouse
button.
COM1/COM2: Standard serial ports used as

a connection point for peripherals. Other ports may be present if the appropriate internal cards have been installed.
Combination Split: Use of different

combinations of Satin and Tatami stitches in Program Split to create various effects with the same pattern. There are three Combination Split options Satin in Satin, Satin in Tatami and Tatami in Tatami.
Click-and-drag: Click to select, hold down the left mouse button, move the cursor and release. Clipboard: A temporary storage area in PC
memory for what was last cut or copied. Images on the clipboard can be pasted into designs any number of times.
Command: An instruction issued to the

software in order to carry out an action. It may be as simple as paste an object or as complex as regenerate stitches. It is usually activated via a menu item, toolbar icon, or command button in a dialog.
CND: Melco Condensed (CND) is the native file format of the Melco embroidery digitizing software. CND files store only digitized outlines and stitch values. Color blending: TColor Blending creates
interesting perspective, shading and color
Command button: A button in a dialog which executes or cancels the selected action. Two common command buttons are Cancel and OK.
V9
917
Complex Fill: Complex Fill is an input method, used to digitize large and complex shapes. Objects so created are known as Complex Fill objects. Condensed file: See Outline file. Confirmation message: A message
displayed by the software asking you if you are sure you want to proceed. For example, when you want to delete a design.
change the width of the cover stitch, and offset it to the inside or outside of the digitized outline.
Crest: An embroidered motif like an emblem, an insignia or a Coat of Arms. Cross Stitch: Stitches that cross at the
center to form an X.
CSD: POEM/Singer/Huskygram file format Current property settings: Current property settings override the template defaults. Unless you deliberately change them, these take the default values. You generally change them to save time when digitizing. For example, you may preset Tatami stitch spacing to use a specific density for all new Tatami objects you create. See also Object properties. Custom alphabets: Custom alphabets are made up of letters, numbers or symbols you digitize. Custom designs: Designs created by digitizing artwork or manipulating existing patterns. Cut: An editing function. To remove a selection from a design. The cut selection is stored in memory (on the clipboard) and can be pasted into the same or different design. DAT: Hiraoka, Laesser data file type. Default property settings: Default or
starting property settings are the ones stored with the design template. These are automatically applied to any newly created objects in the design. See also Object properties.
Connector stitches: Connector stitches

link objects in a design. They can be run stitches or jumps. You can use automatic settings to generate connectors, trims and tie-offs, or add them manually.
Contour stitch: Contour is a curved fill

stitch type stitches follow the contours of a shape, creating a curved, light and shade effect. It only works on columnar shapes. There are two types Standard and Spiral both of which can be applied to Input A, Input B, Input C or Ring objects. Standard Contour can also be applied to Circle objects.
Control points: Control points are used to modify object shapes, stitch angles and entry and exit points. You can change the shape of an object by moving, adding or deleting control points on the outline. For most objects, you can also change control points from corner points to curves. Copy: To place a copy of a selection onto the clipboard. See also Duplicate. Copyright: A right granted by the
government or by international agreement giving the owner the exclusive privilege to publish and sell artistic work during the life of the creator plus 50 years.
Default values: Default values are

pre-defined settings which determine object properties such as stitch spacing, as well as certain system settings. These are stored in the design template. They remain current unless
Cover stitch: The cover stitch is the Satin

border around an appliqu shape. You can
V9
Glossary
918
you override them with new settings. See also Current property settings and Default property settings.
Destination folder: The folder (directory)

where you intend to copy or move one or more files.
Density: See Stitch density or Thread

density.
Detail: An outline, a border, a pickout run, or

a small area of the design you want to be stitched out last when using Smart Design.
Design card: Disk containing computerized

embroidery designs read by the embroidery machines computer.
Diagonal backstitch: The backward rows

are diagonal, directly connecting the forward rows. Diagonal backstitch is suitable for turning shapes, and gives good results with Jagged Edge. See also Backstitch.
Design file: See File. Design object: See Objects. Design properties: Designs themselves
have properties, some of which can be modified, others not. The most important design property is its source Native Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or Imported Stitches. Other properties include the software version number, stitch count, and so on. Colorways too are properties of the whole design.
Dialog: An on-screen box that either requests

or provides information. Many dialogs present options to choose among before a command is carried out. Some dialogs present warnings or explain why a command cannot be completed.
Digitize: Also known as punching, it is the

current term for programming a design. Artwork is converted into a series of embroidery objects to be read and manipulated by a specialist CAD/CAM application. Before outputting to embroidery machine, it is converted into stitch data.
Design segment: See Segments. Design sequence: See Stitching sequence. Design source: While embroidery files are
broadly classified as outline (condensed) or stitch (expanded), ES Designer internally tags files as belonging to one of four types Native Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or Imported Stitches.
Digitizer: Usually refers to the person punching or digitizing the design. Digitizer can also refer to the digitizing tablet used by the digitizer. See also Digitizing tablet. Digitizing puck: With a digitizing tablet, you generally use a puck instead of a mouse to mark reference points and select commands from the menu chart. Digitizing tablet: Digitizing tablets are sometimes used as an alternative to digitizing directly on-screen. To use a tablet, you place an enlargement drawing on the active area, and use a puck to mark reference points. Digitizing tool: Digitizing tools, sometimes referred to as input methods, are similar to drawing tools except that the end result is an
Design template: See Template. Design window: The design window is

where designs are displayed for viewing and modification.
Desktop: MS Windows terminology for the screen background on which program icons are displayed.
V9
919
embroidery object rather than a drawing object. Different digitizing tools are suited to creating different shapes or design elements.
Drag: Hold down the (left) mouse button and move the mouse. Typically used for moving something on-screen. Drawing object: Drawing objects are
derived from vector drawings and can be created in ES Designer or imported. In ES Designer they can be converted to and from embroidery objects. You can set general properties such as size and position, and arrange and transform them in the same way as other objects. See also Vector drawing.
Disk: Unit inserted into computer containing

punched embroidery design (stitch file) e.g. HD/DD 3.5" floppy disk.
Disk drive: Computers usually have three types of disk drive: a hard disk (or fixed disk) which usually supports the mass storage of information and applications, a floppy disk drive, and a CD drive. Display: A screen used to display the output
of a computer. Also known as the monitor.
Drawing package: Software application

that creates or allows you to edit vector drawings made up of separate individual drawing objects. Vector drawings can be scaled with no loss of sharpness. Examples of vector editing programs are Adobe Illustrator, MacroMedia Freehand and Corel Draw. See also Graphics application.
Dithering: Dithering is a software technique

which combines existing colors in a checkerboard arrangement of pixels. It is typically used to simulate colors that are missing from an image palette. A type of optical illusion created by placing two pixels of different color next to each other. The human eye automatically combines the two colors into a third color.
DSB: Barudan file format. Basically the same

as the T03 tape file but wit a header in front so that it can be written to floppy disk i.e. it is the floppy disk version of the T03 file.
Dongle: A security hardware device required

to run protected software. Some are attached to a parallel port, others to a USB port.
DST: Stitch file format native to Tajima

machines.
Dots Per Inch (DPI): A measurement of

screen or printer resolution; the number of dots in a line one inch long.
DSZ: ZSK stitch or expanded file format. Duplicate: When an object is duplicated, it is
not copied to the clipboard. This leaves the clipboard free for you to cut or copy other objects.
Double Split Alternate: A variant of Tatami split. See User Defined Split. Double-click: Click the left mouse button
twice without moving the mouse. Double-clicking carries out actions such as opening a program from an icon.
DXF: AutoCAD vector drawing format. E Stitch: E Stitch is widely used for tacking
appliqus as a column around the border. The stitches form a comb pattern.
Download: The process of transferring a copy of a file from a remote computer or the internet to a computer or other device such as an embroidery machine.
Edge Run underlay: Edge Run underlay places stitches around the edge of an object. Use Edge Run together with the Zigzag or Tatami underlays when digitizing large shapes.
V9
Glossary
920
Editing: Software capability that allows you

to manipulate elements of a design, combine designs and lettering, designs, move points and stitches.
Empty jump: You create empty jumps (0,0)

manually in ES Designer by digitizing with Penetrations Out. This prevents the needle from penetrating the fabric, forcing the machine to move across the design in a series of jumps. Also, use empty stitches or empty jumps when required by the selected machine format. See also Empty stitch.
Element: An element, in software terms, is a

color block consisting of sequential, same-color objects. You can assign names to elements which then appear on the production worksheet. The operator generally uses these to make sure colors are correct during production. See also Production worksheet.
EMB: EMB is the outline file format native to ES Designer. EMB designs contain a complete set of design information in a single all-in-one file object outlines and properties, actual stitches and machine functions, thread colors, a picture icon and comments. Even the original design bitmap image can be included in EMB format. Only native EMB files provide 100% perfect scaling and transformation. Emblem: Embroidered design with a finished
edge, applied to a garment after stitching, commonly an insignia of identification. Also known as a crest or patch.
Empty stitch: Empty stitch is a tight (zero length) lockstitch, used together with, or as an alternative to, tie-in and tie-off stitches. Use empty stitches instead of tie-ins or tie-offs for objects filled with light density stitching where standard tie-ins and tie-offs may be visible. Also, use empty stitches or empty jumps when required by the selected machine format. See also Empty jump. EMX: Wilcom Cross Stitch file format. End X/Y:
The coordinates of the last stitch.
Enlargement drawing: The technical

drawing, usually six times larger than the original design, indicating the stitches to be digitized. When you digitize with a tablet, you use an enlargement drawing to trace the shapes and outlines of the design in the same way you use backdrops on-screen. Before you start, you need to prepare the enlargement drawing. See also Digitizing tablet.
Embroidery: Decorative stitching on fabric. Embroidery disk: Embroidery disks are specially formatted floppy disks used to transfer designs from computer to embroidery machine. You can format embroidery disks and save designs to them from within ES Designer. The format you use will depend on the selected embroidery machine. You can also open designs from embroidery disk directly into ES Designer. Embroidery object: See Object. Embroidery thread: See Thread. EMF: Enhanced Metafile vector drawing
format.
Entry point: The entry point is the point

where the thread enters the embroidery object. This should coincide with the exit point of the preceeding object.
Envelope: Apply Envelope special effects to

lettering objects to make them bulge or arch, stretch or compress. Envelopes are typically applied to lettering objects, but they can also be applied to other types of embroidery object.
EPS: Encapsulated Postscript vector drawing

format.
V9
921
ESD: Native DOS format of Wilcom DOS ES contains stitch data, like stitch types and densities, which permits better processing. ESD in later versions contains lettering objects with outlines. Exit point: The exit point is the point where
thread leaves the embroidery object. This should coincide with the entry point of the next object.
Fill stitch: Series of running stitches commonly used to cover large areas. Different fill patterns can be created by altering the angle, length and repeat sequence of the stitches. Filled Holes: This feature creates filled
objects from the outlines of selected Complex Fill objects.
Finishing : Processes done after the

embroidery is completed, including trimming loose threads, removing excess facing or backing, and pressing or steaming to remove puckers and hoop marks.
EXP: Stitch or expanded file format native to

Melco machines.
Expanded file format: See Stitch file. Expanded tape: An expanded tape which
has every stitch of the design punched.
Extension: See File extension. Fabric stretch: Embroidery stitches pull the
fabric inwards where the needle penetrates. This can cause the fabric to pucker, and gaps to appear in the embroidery. Use automatic pull compensation to counter this effect by overstitching outlines of filled shapes.
Fixed Line baseline: A Fixed Line baseline has a fixed length which you can digitize or specify numerically. If the text is longer, the letter spacing is decreased and the letters may overlap. The letter width is not changed. With Fixed Line, you need to mark two points to define the base. See also Baseline. Flexi Split: Flexi Split is a decorative effect where one or more lines of a Program Split pattern are used in the object fill. The pattern follows the stitch angle and may be scaled to fit the width of the object. There are four different Flexi Split effects. You can use an existing pattern for Flexi Split or create your own. Florentine Effect: With Florentine Effect you can curve Complex Fill along a digitized line to create flowing stitch effects. The stitches follow the digitized line but maintain uniform density and needle penetration patterns. FMC: An embroidery disk format native to Barudan machines. Folder: A collection of files and sub-folders that are stored together on a disk. Part of structure for organizing files on a disk. Font: A set of characters, including letters,
numbers and other typographic symbols, of the
Facing: See Topping. FDR: An embroidery disk format native to

Barudan machines.
File: A named collection of specifically related information stored on a disk. Designs that have been saved are stored as files. File extension: The dot and three letters at
the end of a filename such as .BMP. The extension identifies the file as a certain type, readable by certain applications.
Filename: The name of a file, including the extension, e.g. Cat.BMP.
V9
Glossary
922
same design and style. Also called Alphabet, even if it includes non-letter characters.
Grayscale: A grayscale picture is made up of

254 different shades of gray, plus solid black and solid white for a total of 256 different tones. Black and white photographs are grayscale.
Fractional spacing: Fractional spacing is

used to place stitches more evenly in curved shapes, producing better quality embroidery with fewer stitches. Fractional spacing is particularly useful for columns of Satin stitches with sharp turns.
Grid: Grid lines provide visual cues to help you accurately place a design. When you start the software for the first time, the grid lines appear by default. Guide run: The guide run is a layer of run stitches around the outline of an appliqu object. It is the first appliqu layer stitched and is used to position the appliqu fabric on the background material. See also Appliqu. Handle: See Selection Handle. Hard disk: A device for mass information storage. Usually the disk is fixed inside the system unit, and a second hard disk can be added. When you store information on the hard disk it will remain there until you delete it. As it has a finite capacity, file management is required. Hardware: Computer componentry,
including monitor, keyboard, digitizing tablet, etc.
Frame: Holding device to secure fabric under

an embroidery head for stitching. May employ a number of means to maintain stability during the embroidery process, including clamps, vacuum devices, magnets, or springs. See also Hoop.
Frame-out position: When you stitch out

appliqu objects, you can set a frame-out position. This shifts the hoop out from under the needle, making it easier to place and trim the appliqu shapes. The frame out settings determine the distance and direction of the hoop movement.
Free Line baseline: Free Line is the only

type of baseline which does not have a fixed or pre-determined length. When you choose Free Line, the baseline will extend as long as you keep adding letters. You only need to mark its start point. See also Baseline.
Hoop: Wood, plastic or steel device used to

tightly grip the fabric and stabilizer between an inner and outer ring. Attaches to machines frame. Designed to hold fabric taut against the machine bed for embroidery.
Function: See Machine Function. Fusion Fill: Fusion Fill is an input method
used to digitize complex shapes with turning stitches. Many shapes can be digitized with this tool. Create objects using left and right clicks to mark reference points to form the boundary outlines. By digitizing boundaries within shapes, you can create filled objects with holes.
I-beam: One shape taken by the PC pointer, it indicates that text can be input at the point selected. The shape is like the capital letter I. Icons: Miniature pictures used in the screen
display instead of, or as well as, text. The file list can be displayed as icons with the filenames underneath; the toolboxes which appear in the left of the screen are composed of icons.
Graphics application: Software

application that creates or allows you to edit bitmap images and/or vector drawings. See also Paint package and Drawing package.
V9
923
Image editing program: See Graphics

application.
JPG: JPEG file interchange bitmap image format. Jumps: A frame movement without a needle penetration, commonly used to get from one point in a design to another. Jumps slow down the embroidery machine. Furthermore, very long stitches do not cover the fabric properly. See also Auto Jump. Jump function: Jump(M) functions cause
frame movements without needle penetrations and are used to move smoothly from one part of a design to another. See also Jumps.
Imported outlines: Designs read from

non-EMB outline CND or PCH where stitches have been generated in ES Designer (or equivalent) from original outlines and stitching data.
Imported stitches: Designs read from

stitch or expanded files, with or without outline recognition, but stitches have not been regenerated through stitch processing. Note that if you change a stitch design e.g. add a lettering object the status changes to Processed Stitches even though the imported stitches may not have been regenerated.
Lockstitch machines: Both Schiffli and

Multihead machines are lockstitch machines, forming stitches in the same way as a home sewing machine. Lockstitch operations involve two threads top and bottom. The top thread is driven by a needle, the bottom by a shuttle. The bottom thread locks the top thread in place, hence the name lockstitch. See also Multihead lockstitch machine.
INP: Wilcom condensed file format. Input A: Input A is an input method used to digitize columns of varying width and stitch angle. Digitized pairs of reference points define the outline, while lines connecting the pairs define the stitch angles. Input B: Input B is an input method used to
digitize shapes where one side is different to the other, especially where one side requires more reference points than the other. Stitches turn evenly throughout the entire shape. You can use any fill stitch type except Motif Fill.
Machine format: Different embroidery machines understand different languages. They have their own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can stitch a design, it must be in a format which can be understood by the target machine. Machine function: Machine functions are
commands for a specific embroidery machine. These include color changes, thread trims, jumps, machine stops, needles in/out, and boring begin/end commands.
Input C: Input C is an input method used to

digitize columns of fixed width. It is typically used for digitizing borders and outlines of larger shapes. You can digitize columns to create thick lines or borders. Input C is typically used with Satin stitch.
Machine setup: Before you can send

designs for stitching, you must configure the machine in ES Designer. You can add machines, change settings for machines already set up, or delete machines that are no longer required.
Input method: See Digitizing tool. Jagged Edge: Technique for creating rough edges, to create shading effects, or to imitate fur or other fluffy textures in your design.
Manual objects: When you open a stitch format file without outline recognition, it becomes a single manual object. This object
V9
Glossary
924
consists of a series of individual needle penetration points and has only general and connector properties. When you transform (scale, rotate, mirror) a manual object, the original stitch density does not change.
Mitre Corner: A type of Smart Corner. Mitre

Corners create a sharp line at the intersection of the two columns. They are designed primarily for corners between 75 and 90. See also Smart Corners.
Max/Min stitch: The minimum and maximum stitch lengths allowable in the design determine the outside limits as measured between needle penetration points. They are governed by the minimum and maximum frame movements that the machine can make. Memory: The place in the computers system
unit that stores information while you are working with it. If you exit without saving information in memory, it will be lost.
Modem: Unit to telegraphically send

computer information from one computer to another.
Monitor: The screen on which punching or

stitching progress can be followed, stitch by stitch.
Monogram: Embroidered design composed of one or more letters, usually the initials of a name. Motif: Pre-defined design elements, such as hearts, leaves or border patterns, that can be quickly inserted into a design. Motifs generally consist of one or more simple objects, and are stored in a special motif set. Motif Fill: Motif Fill is a decorative fill stitch with which you can fill Complex Fill objects. You can also create special or three dimensional effects. Motif Run: Motifs which are linked together
along a digitized line. You can create decorative outlines using any motif from the list.
Menu bar: The menu bar contains dropdown menus of commands. Some of the same commands are available on the toolbar. Menu chart: The menu chart provided with
the software lets you select commands directly from the digitizing tablet using the puck. You need to register it before use.
Minimum stitch length: See Max/Min

stitch.
Mirror-merge: Mirror-Merge Array can

create multiple copies of designs, such as badges, spaced in rows and columns for faster stitchouts. Mirror-Merge Reflect can duplicate and mirror designs simultaneously. You can use it to quickly create borders or merge duplicates into a symmetrical object such as a heart. Mirror-Merge Wreath can duplicate objects around a center point. The Kaleidoscope tool works like Wreath but mirrors objects as well.
Mouse: A device, equipped with control

buttons and designed to roll about on the table next to the keyboard. As the mouse moves, its circuits relay signals that move a pointer on the screen.
Multihead lockstitch machine:

Multihead lockstitch machines have a horizontal frame. The needles are vertical, and are grouped in heads. They are mainly used for stitching individual items e.g. badges, garments, which are stretched in separate hoops attached to the frame under each head. A multihead machine can have up to 24 heads,
Mirror: Duplication of an object in the Y

and/or X axis. The location and orientation of the mirrored stitches are determined by location and angle of the axis of reflection relative to the position of the original stitches.
V9
925
and each head can have up to 20 or more needles. Thread change and trims can be done automatically. See also Lockstitch machine.
NORMAL template: Default template. See

also Template.
Nap: A fuzzy or downy surface of fabric

covering either one side or both, produced by brushing loosely twisted yarns.
Object: In embroidery design terms, an

object is an individual element of a design. An object has many properties, such as its size, color, sequence in the design, stitch type and values, including the rules for stitching. See also Vector drawing, Drawing object.
Native file format: A design saved in the

original format of the application you are working with is said to be the native file format. It can also refer to the stitch file format required by a specific embroidery machine. When saved to another format, it is known as a non-native format.
Object outline: See Outline file. Object properties: All objects in ES

Designer contain defining settings or values. The values stored with an object become its properties. All objects have certain properties in common such as size and position. There are other, more specific properties of objects which depend on the object type.
Needle In/needle Out function: The Needle In and Needle Out functions instruct the machine whether or not to use needle penetrations. You can enter these functions automatically using the Penetrations tool. Needle points: You can view needle points
in a design to check density or, for instance, to select stitches for editing.
Object recognition: See Outline

recognition.
Offset Object: This feature creates new

outlines from the outlines of selected objects.
Nesting: Nesting lets you create or insert an object at an exact point of the stitching sequence. You can nest an object in the middle of another objects stitching sequence to prevent long connectors being generated. Network: Links computer, digitizer and embroidery machine together, usually via a modem or network card. Noise filtering: Noise filtering means
restoring the solid color blocks of original artwork in scanned images. This is achieved by merging different shades into one solid color. Noise filtering is important for automatic digitizing because it makes it easier for the software to identify solid color blocks which become embroidery objects in the resulting design. It also cleans up blurred or mottled areas of color.
Option: Options provide software with extra

functionality that can be purchased by registered owners of the product.
Outline file: Outline or condensed files are high-level formats which contain object outlines, object properties and stitch data. When you open an outline file in ES Designer, corresponding stitch types, input methods and effects are applied. Outline files can be scaled, transformed and reshaped without affecting stitch density or quality. Outline recognition: When you convert a
stitch file to outline format, ES Designer reads the data stitch-by-stitch according to the needle penetration points. The software then recognizes stitch types, spacing and length values, stitch effects, and can determine object outlines.
V9
Glossary
926
Overall embroidery: Overall embroidery is

embroidery which covers the entire fabric. This includes lacework where the backing fabric is actually removed after manufacture. Overall embroidery is typical of Schiffli manufacture, less common with Multihead.
Partition Lines: Partition Lines is a method

for offsetting needle penetrations in Tatami fills, used, like Tatami Offset Fractions, to create needle penetration patterns or textures in stitched embroidery.
Overview window: Use the Overview

window to view a thumbnail of the design. The window is updated whenever you make a change, and can be used to zoom in or pan across the design window.
Paper tape: The traditional recording media

used in the embroidery industry is the paper tape. The tape coding process produces the final design in stitch format (a stitch-by-stitch interpretation of the design) exactly as the embroidery machine will read it.
Paint package: Software application that creates or allows you to edit image files. You can create lines and filled areas as well as edit the image pixel-by-pixel using paintbrushes, erasers and spraypaint tools. Examples of image editing programs are Adobe Photoshop, Jasc PaintShop Pro and Corel Photo-Paint. See also Graphics application. Pan: Use Pan to view parts of a design which are not currently visible in the design window. Paper tape: Paper tape is the traditional
medium for storing designs in stitch data format. Now largely replaced by floppy disk, they are still used by older machines. More specifically, stitch data paper tapes are eight-channel paper tapes which, in effect, are hard copies of 8 bit binary code.
Paste: To insert an object, which has previously been placed on the clipboard by cutting or copying selected objects, into a design. You can paste from the clipboard as many times as you like. Pattern: The design, card, punching, tape, disc, or enlargement. PCH: Gunold Outline Design or condensed file format. PCX: PC Paintbrush bitmap image format. PDF: Portable Document Format. Used to view the Online Manual in Acrobat Reader. Peripheral: Any device connected to a computer which is to some degree controlled by the computer, e.g. an embroidery machine or printer. Photo Flash: Technique for creating
embroidery designs directly from photographs and other grayscale bitmap images. Photo Flash designs consist of rows of Satin or Contour (made up of runs) stitches of varying spacing values. The effect resembles the output of a line printer.
Parallel port: A connection on a computer, usually LPT1, where you plug in the cable for a parallel printer and/or a dongle. Parallel ports are used to connect some embroidery machines. They are named LPT1, LPT2, etc. When you set up a parallel machine connection, select the parallel port and the required protocol, and complete the machine setup procedure. Partial appliqu: Technique to create appliqu objects with partial cover stitching to create an overlapping effect without doubling-up borders.
Pixels: Pixels are the dots of light that make up the picture on a computer screen. The more pixels there are in a given area that is, the
V9
927
smaller and closer together they are the higher the resolution.
PMU: PMU is a Proel stitch or expanded file

format.
Processed stitches: Designs read from stitch or expanded files where stitches have been regenerated by processing. Production worksheet: The production worksheet is the link between the designer and the embroidery machine operator. It contains a design preview as well as essential production information, including the design size, the color sequence and any special instructions. Program: A computer program or application is generally used for a particular kind of work, such as word processing or database management. Program Split: Program Split is a decorative
fill stitch in which the needle penetrations form a tiled pattern. You can select different patterns to use. You can apply Program Split to Input A, Input B, Input C, Complex Fill and Circle/Ring objects.
PNG: Portable Network Graphics vector drawing format. Point & Stitch: The Point & Stitch tools
provide everything necessary to digitize shapes in bitmap images and vector drawings automatically without using manual input methods. Create an embroidery design quickly and easily by automatically digitizing blocks of color in a picture, or converting vector outlines to embroidery objects. See also Smart Design.
Pointer: A part of the screen display, the

pointer can take various shapes. It is moved by moving the mouse and can be used to point to anything on the screen to make selections and indicate points for input.
Port: A connection on a computer where you

plug in the cable that carries data to another device. Ports which are used to attach peripherals have names like COM1 or LPT1 so that you can specify where the peripherals are attached.
Properties: See Object properties. Protocol: The communications protocol depends on the connection type between the computer and the embroidery machine. This will be one of: standard serial, parallel, serial to parallel converted (DCi), or interface card. PS: Postscript vector drawing format. Puck: See Digitizing puck. Pull compensation: Embroidery stitches
pull the fabric inwards where the needle penetrates. This can cause the fabric to pucker, and gaps to appear in the embroidery. Automatic pull compensation counters this effect by overstitching outlines of filled shapes on the sides where the needle penetrates. This means the design can be optimized for different fabrics.
Position: The Position indicator shows position of the design (X, Y) in the design window. Process: The Process feature lets you adjust
the density of one or more stitch types across the whole or selected parts of a design. Change stitch density in order to stitch on a different fabric or with a different thread. Alternatively, you may want to make production cheaper by reducing the overall stitch count. Processing a stitch file is similar to converting it to an outline file when opening except that you can process only selected objects or stitches.
Punching: Also known as digitizing,

punching refers to the conversion of artwork
V9
Glossary
928
into a series of commands to be read by an embroidery machines computer or controller. The term refers to an earlier method of machine embroidery whereby designs are punched to paper tape.
design colors to an exact number of thread colors.
Reference point: A point that can be

aligned with the grid. For example, you can set the grid reference point to the design center. This is easier and faster than moving the whole design.
Push-Pull: When any stitch is sewn into fabric, the tension in the thread between needle penetrations can build up and result in a push-pull effect. This can cause distortions in your sewn designs, poor stitch registration and even the bunching of the fabric. The degree of distortion can be affected by the following factors: stitch density, fabric type, underlay, backing type, thread type and garment orientation. See also Pull compensation. RAM: Random Access Memory, computer chip maintaining memory. Random factor: You can eliminate unwanted patterns and distribute stitches evenly within a shape using a random factor. Apply random factors to Tatami Partition lines or Program Splits. You can use this effect to imitate different textures such as fur, grass, leaves, etc. Raster image: See Bitmap image. Read: To open a design which has been
written on a design card or to an embroidery machine.
Refresh: See Redraw. Registration: Correct registration is achieved when all stitches and design elements line up correctly. Relative Pointer Setting: This setting shows the pointer position as an absolute value from the first needle point of the design. Useful for checking that the design fits a given area. Relative: The distance the pointer is from a
previously marked point, or from the previous stitch point.
Repeat: See Backtrack. Resequence: You can change the position of

a selected object by cutting it, then pasting it somewhere else in the stitching sequence, or by using the Resequence command. You can also resequence objects by color or using the Color-Object List.
Recognition: See Outline recognition. Redraw: The screen display is refreshed. This
is useful when parts of the display have become obscured in the course of editing. See also Slow Redraw.
Resizing:
See Scaling.
Resolution: Resolution determines the

number of dots per inch (dpi) used to create an image. The higher the value, the clearer the image, but the more storage space required. A resolution of 75 dpi generally produces good results.
Reduce Colors: The Reduce Colors feature automatically reduces color blocks in bitmap images to a single color, removing anti-aliasing and noise. You can let the software reduce the color count automatically or specify a precise number. The latter is useful if you want to match
RGB: RGB stands for red, green, and blue. It is the system used by computer monitors to create color.
V9
929
Right-click: To press and release the right

mouse button.
Rotation handles: When you select an object, selection handles display at its extremities. If you click the object again, rotation and skew handles appear around the object. Rotation handles appear at the corners of the object and an anchor point displays at the objects center. Skew handles are diamond-shaped and appear at the center-top and bottom of the object. See also Selection handles. Run stitch: Run stitch (also called Walk
stitch) places a single row of stitches along a digitized line. The needle penetrations are placed in consecutive order. Run is generally used for stitching outlines and connector stitches. Run stitch length can be set to automatically vary in order to follow tight curves.
of dots per inch (dpi) used to create a drawing. The higher the value, the clearer the image but larger the file. For digitizing purposes, use a maximum resolution of 300 dpi (dots per inch). A resolution of 72 dpi (screen resolution) will usually be sufficient. Generally speaking, the smaller the source image and/or more detail it contains, the higher the resolution needs to be.
Screen calibration: You need to calibrate

your monitor so that designs at 1:1 scale appear at real size. Do this when you first install ES Designer, whenever you change your monitor, or adjust your monitors horizontal or vertical controls.
Screen resolution: See Pixels. Security code: Options in ES Designer are

controlled by a security device installed on the computer. Security access codes entered into the software are sent to this security device. Each security device has a unique serial number and identity code.
Satin stitch: Satin stitch is well-suited to

stitching narrow columns where the length of each stitch forms the width of the column. Because there are generally no needle penetrations breaking up the fill, Satin stitch creates a glossy effect. As the stitches are almost parallel, Satin provides good coverage.
Security Device: See Dongle. Selection handles: Selection handles are the eight small squares that appear symmetrically at the corners and edges of a selected object. Use them to position and resize objects. See also Rotation handles. Sequence: See Stitching Sequence. Sequin mode: Sequin mode enables quick digitizing of Drop Sequin functions. Serial port: A connection point on a
computer where you plug a serial communications device such as a modem. PC serial COM ports are male connectors, and can be either 9-pin or 25-pin. They are named COM1, COM2, COM3, etc. The number of available ports limits the number of devices you can connect. If additional ports are required,
Scaling: Scaling is the ability to enlarge or reduce a design. In stitch or expanded format, most scaling is limited to 5% because the stitch count remains constant despite final design size. In outline or condensed formats scale changes may be more dramatic because stitch count and density are recalculated. See also EMB. Scanner: A device that converts physical
images into digital form so that they can be stored and manipulated by computer.
Scanning resolution: Most scanners require you to enter scanning resolution information. Resolution determines the number
V9
Glossary
930
you can add them. Multi-port serial cards can also be used.
Software: Programs, such as MS Windows

and Wilcom ES, which run your computer.
Sharpen Edges: Use the Sharpen Edges tool to prepare outlined images for automatic digitizing. Sharpen Edges automatically sharpens outlines and reduces noise. Areas enclosed by a black outline are reduced to a single color. Outline sharpening makes it easier for the software to recognize distinct areas in the artwork. These areas then become the embroidery objects of the finished design. Use it particularly if the outlines are blurry, fuzzy or indistinct. Shortcut key: A key stroke or a series of keystrokes you can use to perform a task instead of using the mouse. For example, Ctrl+C actions the Copy command. Sizing handles: See Selection handles. Skew handles: See Rotation handles. Slow Redraw: Use to redraw your design
slowly. Slow Redraw lets you view the stitching and color sequence of a design in slow motion.
Specialty threads: Threads designed for

effects such as shine, glitter, iridescence or thickness. The threads often are made from synthetic materials including rayon, mercerized cotton, metallics and textured nylon.
Spiral Contour: Spiral Contour creates a

single, continuous line of stitching that spirals around to fill the shape. Typically, it is used for rings and borders, but it is also suitable for other closed shapes. See also Contour stitch.
Split object: You can split embroidery objects that were created with the Input A, Input B, and Input C tools, if Satin or Tatami, or Program Split is the selected stitch type. SPM: Stitches per minute; system for measuring the running speed of an embroidery machine. SR/SD: Melco Star format. Star and Superstar are types of Melco machine (quite old now). Standard backstitch: The rows are
approximately parallel, with every backstitch row slightly shorter than the forward row. Because the rows are different lengths, there are fewer small stitches at the edge of the shape, reducing possible damage to the fabric. Standard backstitch is suitable for high density fills. See also Backstitch.
Small stitches: Use the Small Stitch Filter to remove unwanted small stitches from a design automatically. Smart Corners: Sharp points in a shape
may cause a bunching of stitches and needle penetrations which can create a hard spot in the embroidery and may damage the fabric or needle. Smart Corners helps you control sharp corners in Input A and Input C objects. See also Mitre Corner and Cap Corner.
Standard Contour: Standard Contour

creates rows of stitches across the shape, perpendicular to the digitized stitch angle. The number of stitch lines is constant, so the stitching is denser where the shape is narrower, and more open where the shape is wider. See also Contour stitch.
Smart Design: Digitize complete bitmap

images automatically with Smart Design. Smart Design automatically converts bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery with little or no intervention. See also Point & Stitch.
Status bar: Provides information about the

whole design: number of stitches, position of
V9
931
the design (X, Y), number of colors (C), number of stops (S), etc.
STC: Gunold stitch or expanded file format. Stemstitch: Stemstitch is an input method which gives a thicker outline than backstitch and can be used to mimic hand-sewn embroidery. It is used for stems and vines with other decorative stitches, or as an outline for Satin or Motif fills. Stitch: A stitch is one needle penetration; also used to refer to the thread laid down from one needle penetration to the next. Stitch angle: The stitch angle is the angle
the overall stitching follows within a shape. The shape may have a fixed stitch angle e.g. 45 to the horizontal or multiple stitch angles.
Stitch length: Stitch length is the distance between two needle penetration points. For maximum stitch length, the length is measured according to the X and Y co-ordinates, whichever is greater. Run stitch length can be set to automatically vary in order to follow tight curves. See also Max/Min stitch. Stitch List: The Stitch List displays stitch number, stitch coordinates, stitch length, stitch function, stitch color. When you select a stitch in the list, it is simultaneously selected in your design. Stitch processing: The calculation of stitch information by means of specialized software, allowing scaling of expanded format designs with density compensation. Stitch Processor: A patented software
feature developed by Wilcom International P/L. Stitch Processor is a function of the software which interprets raw stitch data and converts it into objects that the software can recognize.
Stitch shortening: When a shape takes a sharp turn, the spacing of stitches on the inside of the shape decreases rapidly. This results in stitches in the whole design. See also Design bunching on the inside and gaps on the outside properties. of the shape; the longer the stitch, the worse Stitch density: The number of stitches per the problem. Automatic Stitch Shortening given area (or stitch lines per distance in a fill). solves this problem by eliminating thread bunching. The embroidery has smooth, even, Stitch editing: Digitizing feature that allows stitch spacing throughout. It also reduces thread breakages during production. one or more stitches in a pattern to be deleted or altered. Stitch spacing: Stitch Spacing is the spacing between two consecutive needle Stitch file: Stitch or expanded designs are penetrations on the same side of a column. The low-level formats for direct use by embroidery smaller the value, the greater the stitch density. machines. They contain only stitch coordinates For more open stitching, use larger values. and machine functions. Stitch designs are generally not suited to scaling because stitches Stitching direction: Stitching direction can are not regenerated during rescaling. See also affect embroidery quality because of the Outline file. Stitch count: This is the total number of
Stitch bunching: Standard stitch spacing is calculated at the outside edge of a shape. With sharp curves, spacing which provides adequate coverage on the outside edge may cause bunching along the inside edge. This may cause thread breakage when stitching out.
Stitch pull: See Push-Pull.
V9
Glossary
932
Push-Pull effect. Only closed embroidery objects such as Input C can be reversed.
Tape: See Paper tape. Tatami: Tatami stitch consists of rows of run
stitches and is suitable for filling large, irregular shapes. Stitches are laid in rows going back and forth across the shape. These can be parallel or slightly turning.
Stitching sequence: The embroidery

objects in a design form a stitching sequence. Initially, objects are stitched in the order in which they were created. You can change the position of a selected object by cutting it, then pasting it somewhere else in the sequence, or by using the Resequence command. You can also resequence objects by color or with the Color-Object List.
Stock designs: These are standard designs produced by an embroidery company for sale to the public. Stock designs are not assigned to any particular customer. Stop function: If you want the embroidery
machine to stop for any special reason while stitching a design, you need to insert a Stop function in the stitching sequence. To indicate a stop in your design, you must insert a Stop function manually.
Tatami offset fractions: With Tatami fills you can specify how each row is offset in order to create patterns formed by needle penetrations. You do this by adjusting either offset fractions or partition lines. By adjusting offset fractions, you can create textured fills where the stitch penetrations are more clearly visible. Tatami partition lines: With Tatami fills
you can specify how each row is offset in order to create patterns formed by needle penetrations. Partition lines, with up to eight offsets, can create more patterns.
Stop code: Stop codes are interpreted as explicit stops. The machine stops stitching. STX: Datastitch stitch or expanded file format. Style: A style is a group of property settings
stored under a unique name. You can save any combination of settings to a style. This makes it easy to apply these settings to selected embroidery and lettering objects. When you apply a style to an object, the style settings replace its current properties. Any properties not specified in the style, retain their current settings.
Tatami underlay: Tatami underlay is used to stabilize large, filled shapes. It resembles an extremely open Tatami fill stitch, where rows of stitches are placed across the object to create the underlay. Team Names: The Team Names feature lets
you create designs with multiple names. For example, you can use the same logo with different names for sports teams or corporate uniforms without having to create multiple copies of the same design.
Template: Templates are special files used to store styles and default property settings. Use templates when digitizing frequently-used design types to save time re-adjusting the current property settings. Tension: Tautness of thread when forming
stitches. Top thread tension, as well as bobbin thread tension, need to be correctly set. Proper thread tension is achieved when about one third
Tablet: See Digitizing tablet. Tacking : Tacking is used to fix appliqu

shapes to a background fabric before cover stitching is applied.
V9
933
of the thread showing on the underside of the fabric on a column stitch is bobbin thread.
Thread: Fine cord or natural or synthetic material made from two or more filaments twisted together and used for stitching. Machine embroidery threads come in rayon (high sheen), cotton (duller finish), polyester (strong and colorfast), metallics (synthetic core wrapped with metal foil or thin slivers of metal foil) and acrylic (sheen similar to rayon). Thread chart: Thread charts are lists of pre-defined thread colors. They may be based on commercially available thread charts, or charts you define yourself. You can copy colors between different thread charts to create your own charts from existing colors. Thread code: Code is the identification
number of a thread color in a brand.
Title bar: The horizontal bar located at the top of a window and containing the title of the window. On many windows, the title bar also contains the Control menu box and Maximize and Minimize buttons. Toolbar: Toolbars provide quick and easy access to ES Designer commands. Click a toolbar button to activate a command or, where applicable, right-click to view and adjust its settings. Topping: Material hooped or placed on top of fabrics that have definable nap or surface texture, such as corduroy and terry cloth, prior to embroidery. The topping compacts the wale or nap and holds the stitches above it. Includes a variety of substances, such as plastic wrap, water-soluble plastic foil and open-weave fabric that has been chemically treated to disintegrate with the application of heat. Also known as facing. Trapunto: Trapunto is a general term for
very open fill stitching, often used as a background or for filling large shapes. In ES Designer, Trapunto effect forces travel runs to the edges of objects so they do not show through open or loose stitching.
Thread density: Different thread density

systems are used by different thread manufacturers. Density A is normal embroidery thread (density 120/2, or 40). Density B is thicker, Density C is finer, and Density D is very fine.
Thread thickness: See Thread density. Thread type: Embroidery thread varies in
thickness. Types are A, B, C and D. Stitch density should be set according to the thread type. See also Thread thickness.
Travel run: Travel runs are typically used to

connect segments of filled objects. They are usually covered by fill stitches when an object is stitched out. You can change the stitch length of travel runs to ensure they do not protrude from the cover stitching. You may also adjust the travel run length to reduce the stitch count.
Tie In: Tie-in stitches are inserted at the start of objects to prevent stitches from unraveling. They are inserted inside the shape on the second stitch. You generally use them when the previous connector is trimmed. Tie Off: Tie-offs are generally placed before
trims to prevent stitches from unraveling. You can adjust connector settings to automatically add tie-offs under certain conditions, or add them manually.
Traveling: You can check a designs stitching

sequence by traveling through it by stitches, segments, functions or objects.
Trim code: Trim codes are machine functions that instruct machines with trimmers to cut connecting threads before moving to the next object. You can insert trims automatically by
V9
Glossary
934
setting connector values or by inserting them manually.
Trimming: The action of cutting loose

thread, removing backing, etc, from the final embroidered product.
Triple Run stitch: Triple Run repeats each

Run stitch three (or more) times for a thick line. Typically used to add borders and pickout runs to designs.
fabrics. The stitching action that will attach the backing to the fabric being embroidered. It also supports the top embroidery for a more lofty, dimensional look. Underlay stitches are made up of a series of single run stitches, usually with a very short stitch length, and are placed automatically, or can be digitized manually, beneath the cover stitching of your embroidery design.
Triple Satin: Triple Satin is often used for

folk designs to mimic handmade embroidery that uses thicker thread. If you require thicker stitches, set the Satin stitch to repeat itself multiple times.
User Defined Split: User Defined Split lets you add detail to filled objects by digitizing lines of needle penetrations called split lines. Split lines are stored as object properties. They are preserved when stitches are regenerated even if you apply a different stitch type. Values: Values are the actual settings (letters
and numbers) that you enter into dialog boxes. See also Object Properties.
TrueType font: TrueType is a digital font

technology designed by Apple Computer, now used by both Apple and Microsoft in their operating systems. Fonts in your Windows Fonts folder are usually TrueType fonts.
TrueView: TrueView provides you with a

preview of how your embroidery will look when stitched out. It gives the screen image a three dimensional look.
Variable stitch length: The software can automatically calculate the best length for each stitch with the Variable Run Length option. A chord gap value controls how closely the stitches follow the digitized lines. Vector drawing: Unlike raster images, vector drawings contain vector data. This is a collection of geometric shapes and lines that combine to make an image. Rather than pixels, such data is recorded as a set of mathematical formulas. Vector drawings are scalable without distortion, and are small files. Vector drawings have the advantage over bitmap images that they can be converted directly into embroidery objects. See also Bitmap image. Weight: When referring to T-shirts, the three
standard weight divisions are mid-weight/value, heavyweight/premium, and super heavyweight.
Twain: An industry standard which allows

devices (such as scanners) to communicate directly with design and layout programs. Both device and program must be TWAIN-compliant. This lets you use any TWAIN-compliant scanner with your software.
U?? Stitch file format native to Barudan machines. Underlay margin: The distance between an
object outline and the edge of the underlay. Increase this margin to prevent underlay stitches from extending outside the cover stitches.
WMF: Windows Metafile vector drawing

format.
Underlay stitching: Stitches laid down

before other design elements to help stabilize
X And Y coordinates: The X and Y values

are the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) distances
V9
935
on a graph or computer screen. Use X values to measure width, and Y values to measure height.
XXX: Compucon stitch or expanded file format in the professional market. Zigzag stitch: Zigzag stitch is similar to Satin but is generally used where fewer stitches are required. The needle penetrates each side of the column, laying the thread across in an open zigzag pattern. The density is determined by the stitch spacing setting. The settings for Zigzag fill stitches are stored separately from Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay settings. Zigzag underlay: Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay stitching is used to support wide columns. ZSK: ZSK1 format is for older ZSK machines, generally those older than 1991. ZSK2 is for newer ZSK machines, those characterized by a single top thread trimmer. The trim is the most significant differentiating factor between the two types.
V9
Glossary
936
Index
Numerics
3D Warp tool 504, 506
A
access codes entering 42 entering manually 43 importing 45 accessing designs, databases and folders 708 Accordion Spacing Accordion Spacing tool 459 applying 460 overview 459 selecting types 460 setting values 460 spacing values 460 Add Thread dialog 155 Add To Favorites dialog 391 adding Empty Stitch/Empty Jump 171 folders 729 tie-offs 170 trims 171 adding stitch angles Complex/Fusion Fill 354 adjusting Satin stitch spacing 122 adjusting stitch angles 351 Align command 313 aligning objects 313 alphabets 563 converting TrueType 593 converting TrueType fonts 588 converting TrueType to embroidery fonts 588 creating new 602 digitizing from artwork 596 merging files 608 modifying 604 modifying custom letter 606 preparing drawings 598 See also lettering anchor point, definition 915 anchor points, rotation 323 angles
rotating by exact angle 324 rounding sharp corners, Input C 203 setting for partition lines 430 skewing by exact angle 328 Tatami underlay stitch angle 180 See also stitch angle anti-aliasing 243 Any Shape baselines, reshaping 545 any shape, drawing lines 215 appliqu adding appliqu 22 cover stitch values 419 guide run values 415 offsetting cover stitches 419 outputting shapes 672 partial cover 420 smart corners 413 tacking values 417 using Input C Offset 103 See also Auto Appliqu Apply Current Properties tool 386 Apply Style tool 388 archived design files, handling 726 Arrange menu Align 313 Lock 316 Remove Overlaps 410 Remove Overlay Stitching 410 Space Evenly 314 Unlock 316 arranging objects grouping 315 locking 315 Array tool 330 artwork anti-aliased images 243 bitmap images 241 converting bitmaps to vectors 221273 converting to vector drawings 272 dithered images 242 enlargement drawings 754 preparing for automatic digitizing 257
preparing for scanning 243 scanned images 242 scanning 243 vector drawings 214 Auto Appliqu 22, 413 Auto Appliqu tool 338344, 413 converting to Complex Fill 344 cover stitch values 419 guide run values 415 tacking values 417 Auto Center 210 Auto Jump applying 207 Auto Jump tool 206 connectors 207 overview 206 setting values 208 Auto Scroll 766 Auto Spacing dialog 126 setting values 124 spacing offset 126 stitch length 126 stitch spacing 126 Auto Split 204 Auto Start and End dialog 210 Auto Trace tool 272 Auto Underlay applying 175 Auto Underlay tab 175 Auto Underlay tool 175, 309 Center Run 176 Double Zigzag 178 Edge Run 176 selecting a type 175 setting margins 181 Tatami 179 Zigzag and Double Zigzag 178 automatic backup 767 borders 572 branching 304 color matching 146 connectors, See connectors digitizing 271 jumps, See Auto Jump pull compensation 185 save 767 spacing, See Auto Spacing
V9
937
split, See Auto Split trims 168 underlay 174 borders, See also lettering automatic digitizing Auto Trace 271 cleaning up images 258 color reduction 258 converting grayscale images 287 cropping images 247 image preparation tools 261 noise filtering 261 outline sharpening 260 Photo Flash 271 Point & Stitch 271 preparing images 257 Smart Design 271 automatic stitching 279 adjusting shape tracing options 284 adjusting values 286 creating embroidery designs 280 object sequencing 286 Automatic Stitching Values dialog 284
B
backdrops 10 digitizing with backdrops 240 dimming 255 displaying 254 inserting bitmap images 251 inserting vector drawings 219 locking and unlocking 316 pasting bitmap images 252 pasting vector drawings 222 saving as separate files 253 scanning 246 smoothing bitmap images 253 smoothing vector drawings 223 using bitmap images 251 Back-Front tool 236 backgrounds changing colors and fabrics 149 definition 915, 920 printing on production worksheets 663 scanning 246 Backstitch adjusting settings 96 backstitch Borderline 131, 132 Diagonal 131, 132 selecting for Contour fill 467 selecting for Tatami 131
Standard 131, 132 types 131 Backtrack/Repeat tool 400 backtracking objects 400 backup definition 916 baselines any shape 542 arc 540 changing 537 circular 541 custom 542 horizontal 538 moving letters along 525 reshaping 545 vertical 539 baselines, definition 916 baud rate, setting 739 BIOS, change parallel port mode 906 bitmap images anti-aliasing 243 automatic digitizing 241 converting to vectors 273 dimming 255 displaying 254 dithered 242 inserting 251 outputting designs as 670 pasting 252 saving separately 253 scanned 242 scanning 246 smoothing 253 supported file types 251 using as backdrops 251 Borderline backstitch 131, 132 borders creating for existing objects 407 digitizing with Input C 100 offset objects 407 offsetting Input C stitches 103 setting width 104 boring Borers tool 423 changing borer display color 151 digitizing boring holes 423 oval holes 424 round holes 424 boundaries Complex Fill 114 digitizing for appliqu 413 digitizing for rings 405 digitizing with Complex Fill 109 bounding outline, selecting objects 74 branching 304 applying 305
applying two-layer outline stitching 310 Branching tool 304 using auto underlay 309 using Color-Object List 307 brands, thread 156 Browse for Folder dialog 697, 725 browsing designs, slide show 707 for designs 697 bunching reducing with fractional spacing 192 reducing with stitch shortening 188 buttons Email Design 715
C
cap corners 200 Capture Design Bitmap command 670 dialog 671 catalogs exporting in CSV format 724 exporting in Tab delimited format 724 printing 720 publishing 721 Center Out, letter sequencing 561 Center Run underlay 176 centering object, with cross-hair cursor 313 changing locale (language) 700 Character Map dialog 568 charts, See thread charts checking sequence 57 Choose Locale dialog 701 Choose Read Tape Type dialog 686, 747 Choose Write Tape Type dialog 642, 687, 748 chord gap 94 circle objects changing entry point 355 moving 349 reshaping 349 Circle/Star tool 402 circles Circle/Star tool 403 digitizing 402 drawing 218 in circles (Ring) 404 in ovals (Ring) 404 clearing, machine functions 374 clipping motifs to fit shapes 497
V9
Index
938
closed shapes, drawing 216 CND CND files, color merging 633 compatible input methods 826 conversion options 629 conversion tables 821 saving to 823 codes entering security codes 42 thread 156 color change functions 649 Color Blending adjusting settings 464 applying 462 color blocks, printing 665 Color dialog 151, 156 color film, printing 665 color matching 146 automatic 146 Color Merge utility 633 color palette, selecting thread colors 138 color reduction automatic digitizing 258 images 283, 284 Color-Object List dialog 81, 302, 317 displaying hidden objects 81 grouping/locking objects 317 printing color film 665 resequencing objects 302304 resequencing objects by number 304 selecting objects 80 tool 80, 302307, 317 colors adding to thread charts 155 changing background 149 changing borer display 151 changing for an object 137 changing grid display 151 changing object outlines 151 changing stitch display 151 Color palette 136 copying across thread charts 154 creating thread charts 152 deleting thread charts 160 display colors 151 matching images to threads 148 merging Melco CND files 633 modifying colorways 141 modifying thread charts 157 modifying thread values 157 removing from thread charts 158 resequencing by 301 selecting for an object 136
selecting objects by color 79 selecting the current color 137 setting for consecutive objects 138 thread colors 136 traveling by 61 Colorway Options dialog 664 colorways 139 Add Colors to Palette 280 basing on existing 142 changing backgrounds 149 changing display colors 151 changing display settings 149 Colorways tool 64 Colorways toolbar 64 creating 142 default settings 141 deleting 145 different stitch densities 140 Match Colors to Palette 280 modifying 141 multiple 139 printing 663 renaming 143 selecting 140 viewing 64 column spacing, Program Split 436 column width adjusting 186 Pull Compensation tool 186 columns digitizing with Input A 106 digitizing with Input C 100 offsetting Input C 103 setting width 104 columns, sorting 703 combination splits Satin in Satin 435 Satin in Tatami 436 selecting 435 Tatami in Tatami 436 types 435 Combine tool 233 combining designs 297 objects (branching) 293 objects (nesting) 296 objects and designs 293 styles 392 Comma Separated Value files, See CSV files commands popup menus 33 registering the menu chart 752 undo/redo 34 using 31 using toolbars 33 compensating for stretch, See pull
compensation Complex Fill 110 adding boundaries 114 adding stitch angles 354 changing stitch angle on-screen 351 Complex Fill tool 109 converting to Auto Appliqu 344 creating borders 407 digitizing objects 110, 112 digitizing the stitch angle 110 , 112 entry and exit points 110, 112 filling holes 409 Motif Fill 494 offset objects 407 open stitching 457 overlapping rows 117 removing boundaries 114 stitch angle 115 Trapunto 457 Complex Fill tool 87, 109, 342, 471 476, 494 complex shape drawing objects 227 Condensed File Input Values dialog 629635 condensed files 628 See also outline files conflicts, parallel ports 906 connection settings ethernet 738 Melco StarLAN 737 network 737 parallel ports 737 peripheral devices 735 serial ports 735 connectors add Empty Stitch/Empty Jump 171 adding tie-offs and trims 169 Auto Jump 207 automatic 163 digitizing with Needles Out 172 displaying 53 hiding 53 inside objects 164 jumps 161 jumps (automatic) 163 minimizing with nesting 296 Runs 162 runs (automatic) 164 setting automatic tie-in values 166 setting automatic tie-off values 167 setting automatic trim values 168 show/hide 762
V9
939
tie-ins 162 tie-offs 162 travel runs 173 trims 162 types 161 consecutive objects selecting 74 setting colors 138 Continuous Input 405 Contour applying 466 contour stitch in rings 404 Contour stitch overview 465 Contour tool 465 offset fraction 468 selecting a backstitch 467 selecting a type 467 setting stitch values 468 Spiral 466 Standard 465 control commands, checking 645 control points 88 changing 345 reshape objects 345 conversion tables digitizing for CND format 826 opening CND files 821 opening Gunold PCH files 829 saving to CND format 823 supported stitch file formats 818 Conversion Values dialog 589595 Convert Auto Appliqu 338 Complex Fill 338 Drawing 340 Input C 338 Motif Run 339 Run 338 Triple Run 338 Convert Options dialog 725 Convert tool 725 Convert True Type Font command 593 Convert TrueType Font dialog 593 converting between objects 337 bitmaps to vectors 273 designs 712 drawing objects to embroidery 338 embroidery > drawing 340 file types 725 photos to designs 287 See also conversion tables See also converting file formats converting file formats CND conversion options 629
CND conversion tables 821 PCH conversion table 829 converting outline designs EMB conversion limitations 632 EMB to CND 632 converting stitch designs recognize Jumps as Trim 618 recognize Objects/Outlines 616 coordinates length 38 setting for objects 313 Copy From dialog 154 copy, definition 918 copying and pasting designs 730 colors across thread charts 154 Copy tool 294 designs 730 duplicating objects 295 motifs 486 object properties 384 objects 294 corner fraction value 105 corner points 88 corners appliqu 413 cap 200 corner fractions, Input C 105 mitre 200 rounding, Input C 203 smart corners 200 corrupt files, deleting 908 cover stitches offsetting 419 setting values 419 CPU/RAM specifications 889 Create a Zip Archive dialog 726 create lettering letter height 597 letter shapes 597 letter width 598 creating baselines any shape 542 arc 540 circular 541 horizontal 538 vertical 539 Crop Image command 247 Crop Image with Polygon command 247 cross stitch, adding 22 cross-hair cursor 313 CSV files Comma Separated Value files 724 exporting catalogs as 724 current color, changing 137 current needle position marker 58
current object properties applying 386 changing 385 make current 384 curve points 88 curved fills adjusting settings 475478 applying to existing objects 472 applying to multiple objects 473 Contour 465 creating 470 creating fills with two curves 476 creating new objects 471476 custom alphabets saving 602 selecting 603 custom letters deleting 605 renaming 605 reshaping 606 saving 600 custom templates, selecting 36, 710 Customize Worksheet dialog 662 cut and paste Cut tool 299 objects 294 resequencing 299 Cut Appliqu command 672 cut, definition 918 cutting designs 731 threads 171
D
Decoding Options dialog 617619, 637 defaults default values (definition) 918 design view 702 Define Stop Sequence dialog 637 Define Style command 389392 Delete command 296 deleting colors from thread charts 158 designs 732 folders 729 motifs 488 objects 296 styles 394 templates 399 thread charts 160 density, applying fractional spacing 193 deselecting
V9
Index
940
objects 72, 73 stitches 363 Design Explorer opening 693 Design Explorer icon 693, 697 design formats Gunold PCH 612 old format ESD 612 Wilcom INP 612 design lists, customizing 703 design management 29 Design Properties dialog Colorways 141153 Information 66 Stop Sequence 69 Summary 66 Design Properties tool 705 design templates, See templates designs accessing 708 archiving 726 Auto Start and End 210 browsing 697 browsing with slide show buttons 707 checking 66 combining 297 converting 712 converting formats 611 converting formats (tables) 818 converting to other file types 725 creating new 36 emailing 715 managing 693 opening 35, 708, 709 opening multiple 35 opening stitch designs 616 organizing 729 outputting 658, 712 planning a design 10 redrawing slowly 62 renaming 731 resequencing 299 saving 40 selecting 708 sorting 712 sorting using Navigation buttons and Slide Show buttons 712 starting 36 stitching and punching 717 viewing 712 viewing in databases 712 viewing records 705 desktop, definition 919 details lists, sorting 714 device connections, troubleshooting 895 device drivers
checking printers 907 installing/reinstalling dongle drivers 904 Device Manager dialog 911 devices, security messages 889 Diagonal backstitch 131, 132 dialogs Add Thread 155 Add To Favorites 391 Auto Spacing 126 Auto Start and End 210 Automatic Stitching Values 284 Browse for Folder 697, 725 Capture Design Bitmap 671 Character Map 568 Choose Locale 701 Choose Read Tape Type 686, 747 Choose Write Tape Type 642, 687, 748 Color 151, 156 Color-Object List 81, 302, 317 Colorway Options 664 Condensed File Input Values 629635 Conversion Values 589595 Convert Options 725 Convert TrueType Font 593 Copy From 154 Create a Zip Archive 726 Customize Worksheet 662 Decoding Options 617619, 637 Define Stop Sequence 637 Design Properties > Colorways 141153 Design Properties > Information 66 Design Properties > Stop Sequence 69 Design Properties > Summary 66 Device Manager 911 Digi Test 909 Digitizer Setup 736742, 909 Digitizer User-Defined Format Setup 742 Disk Format Test Selection 679 Display 149, 151 DXF File Options 220 Edit Function 373, 376 Edit Thread 157 Effects 519 Effects > Accordion 461 Effects > Accordion Spacing 464 Effects > Auto Jump 208 Effects > Auto Underlay 176183, 309 Effects > Color Blending 463 Effects > Curve Fill 472478 Effects > Flexi Split 447449
Effects > Jagged Edge 455, 456 Effects > Others 186187, 193, 453, 504506 Effects > Shortening 189, 190 Effects > Smart Corners 201 Embroidery Machine Connection 738744 Export As 222 Format 682 Format Embroidery Disk 682 Functions 377 Group Members Add 575 Group Name 574 Hardware Setup 736751 Holes 409 Insert Function 370 Layout 527, 549554 Length Calculation 68 Lettering Box 516 Machine Format Values 647656 Machine Format Values > Standard 643644 Make Letter 600602, 607 Make Motif 484485 Make Program Split 445 Match Drawing Color 148 Merge With Style 392 Modify Alphabet 604605 Modify Thread Chart 153154, 157160 Move Stitch 375 New 37, 710 New Alphabet 602 New Colorway 142 New Motif Set 484 New Object Style 390 New Thread Chart 153 Object Properties 385387 Object Properties Lettering 512519, 522, 537, 567, 581589 , 595603 Object Properties - Lettering > Fill Stitch 519, 556559 Object Properties > Auto Appliqu 415420 Object Properties > Complex Fill 116, 117, 119 Object Properties > Connectors 163169 Object Properties > Drawing Object 225 Object Properties > Embroidery 173 Object Properties > Fill Stitch 123134, 205, 428442, 445, 458, 468 , 496504 Object Properties > Fusion Fill 116, 117 Object Properties > General 313, 320329 Object Properties > Image 254
V9
941
Object Properties > Input C 103105, 204 Object Properties > Outline Stitch 9496, 97, 99, 490493 Object Properties > Photo Flash 288 Object Property - Lettering > Others 524 Offset Object 407 Open 35, 220, 251, 617, 629, 668 Open Embroidery Disk 680 Open From Embroidery Disk 680 Options 55 Options > Auto Scroll 767 Options > General 405, 768772 Options > Grid 765766 Options > View Design 762, 763 Options > View Drawing 225, 230, 256 Organize Favorites 391 Organize Styles 390395 Print Designs Options 720 Print Options 660665, 719 Process 195197, 621 Properties 705, 706 Properties (Windows Explorer) 65 Publish Options 721 Punch Options 718 Purge Recover and Backup Directories 908 Quick Names 576 Recognition - Advanced Options 624 Reduce Colors 264 Rename Alphabet 604 Rename Colorway 144 Rename Letter 605 Rename Object Style 394 Rename Thread Chart 159 Resequence By Number 304 Revert to Factory Settings 399, 907 Save As 41, 144, 396, 670, 724, 726 Save Options 586, 632 Save to Embroidery Disk 684 Screen Calibration 751 Security Device 42, 43, 45 Select By Color 56, 79 Select By Stitch Type 80 Select Machine Format 40, 641, 645 Select Motif 481488 Select Source 750 Sequence 561563 Sequence By Color 301 Serial Port Setup 736
Set Color 138 Set Security Device Options 43 Sharpen Edges 267 Show Stitches 378 Slow Redraw 63 Small Stitches 199 Smart Design 280286 Smooth Drawing Curves 224 Sort 714 Stitch List 360, 377 Stitch Manager 674 Stitch Options 717 Stitch to Stitch Manager 674, 738 Symbol Selection 567, 572 Tablet Setup 752 757, 758 Tape Manager 687, 718, 747748 Team Members 578, 581, 583, 585 Team Names 574578 Test Disk 679 Tie In Values 166 Tie Off Values 167 Toolbars 32 Transform 321330 TrueView Options 763 Use Object Style 389 User Preferences 702 Windows Properties 710 Zoom Factor 48 Digi Test dialog 909 Digitizer Setup dialog 736742, 909 digitizer tablets 12 baud rate 739 changing drawing scale 757 defining and modifying formats 742 overview 752 Point mode 740 puck actions 759 registering enlargement drawings 754 registering the menu chart 752 setting up 739 shifting the drawing 758 Stream mode 740 user-defined formats 742 using 759 using preset spacing 760 Digitizer User-Defined Format Setup dialog 742 digitizers, See digitizer tablets digitizing appliqu 413 boring holes 423 circles and ovals 402 columns and borders 100
columns with Input A 106 columns with Input C 100 individual stitches 89 input methods 86 lines with Run/Triple Run 90 Motif Run 488 new motifs 484 ring boundaries 405 rings 404 shapes with Auto Trace 272 shapes with Complex Fill 109 shapes with Input B 107 split lines 450 turning stitches 471476 using a digitizer tablet 759 with backdrops 240 with manual input methods 240 with Needles Out 172 with Photo Flash 240 with Point & Stitch 240 with Smart Design 240 with User Defined Split 450 digitizing artwork Outline Run 278 Pickout Run 277 Tatami Fill 275 Tatami Fill without Holes 276 Turning Satin 274 digitizing tablets, testing connections 909 dimming backdrops 255 Disk Format Test Selection dialog 679 display changing display colors 151 changing display settings 149 definition 920 grid 38 setting display options 54 display adapters checking 911 locating drivers 913 Display dialog 149151 distances, measuring on-screen 38 dithering 242 Divide tool 238 dongle drivers additional switches 905 installing/reinstalling 904 dongles, entering security codes 42 DOS disks, opening designs 680 Double Zigzag, setting values 178 drawing objects apply input method 338 apply stitch type 338 circles 218
V9
Index
942
closed shapes 216 coloring 224 coloring fills 224 coloring outlines 224 converting bitmaps to vectors 273 converting to embroidery 338 creating 214 creating complex shapes 227, 231 ellipses 218 open shapes 215 ovals 218 polygons 216 rectangles 217 squares 217 straight lines 215 using 214 drawing scale, changing 757 Drawing toolbar Auto Trace 272 Ellipse 218 Line 215 Polygon 216 Polyline 215 Rectangle 217 Reduce Colors 264 Sharpen Edges 267 Smart Design 280 drawings creating enlargement drawing 754 creating in ES Designer 214 enlargement drawings 754 inserting vector drawings 219 pasting vector drawings 222 smoothing vectors 223 See also backdrops duplicating Duplicate command 295 objects 295 DXF File Options dialog 220
E
E Stitch appliqu 417 E Stitch tool 87, 91, 121, 134 Edge Run setting values 177 underlay 176 edges, applying Jagged Edge 455 Edit Function dialog 373 Edit Image Using command 249 Edit menu Delete 296 Duplicate 295 Envelope 569
Envelope > Delete 571 Make Same Size 322 Paste Drawing > As Vector 222 Paste Drawing As Bitmap 252 Resequence > By Color 301 Resequence > By Selects 301 Split Object 298 Transform 321, 326 Transform Special 325 Edit Thread dialog 157 editing lettering on-screen 515 with Lettering dialog 516 with toolbox 515 editing objects 337 reshaping 345 editing stitches 365 deleting stitches 366 inserting stitches 364 moving stitches 365 removing small stitches 199 using Stitch List 378 editing, machine functions 367 EDS-III conversion table 821 digitizing for 826 saving to CND format 823 effects Accordion Spacing 459 Auto Jump 206 Auto Underlay 174 Color Blending 462 fractional spacing 192 Jagged Edge 455 pull compensation 184 smart corners 200 stitch shortening 188 Trapunto 457 Effects dialog 519 Accordion 461 Accordion Spacing 464 Auto Jump 208 Auto Underlay 176183, 309 Color Blending 463 Curve Fill 472478 Flexi Split 447449 Jagged Edge 455, 456 Others 186193, 453, 504506 Shortening 189, 190 Smart Corners 201 Ellipse tool 218 ellipses digitizing 402 drawing 218 email attachments 668 Email Design tool 715 email designs 715 embroidery disks
Embroidery Disk Format command 682 Embroidery Disk Open command 680 Embroidery Disk Save As command 684 formats 682 formatting 682 opening designs 680 saving designs 677 testing 679 Embroidery Machine Connection dialog 738744 embroidery machines automatic download 744 connections 743 feedback 744 setting up 743 See also machine formats embroidery objects creating complex shapes 231 Empty Stitch/Empty Jump tool 171 EMT files 396 End of Design functions 651 enlargement drawings changing scale 757 creating 754 preparing 754 registering 755 shifting 758 entry and exit points, changing 355 envelopes Delete command 571 distorting lettering objects 569 Envelope command 569 types 569 ES Design Explorer problems troubleshooting 894 ES Designer, starting 30 ethernet connection settings 738 Exception Access Violation, resolving errors 911 Exclude tool 236 Export As dialog 222 exporting catalogs as CSV files 724 catalogs as Tab delimited files 724 exporting vectors 221
F
fabric stretch, See pull compensation fabrics
V9
943
changing background 149 pull compensation guidelines 185 facing, definition 934 fancy fill stitches Motif Fill 494 Program Split 432 favorites, assigning favorite styles 391 File menu Capture Design Bitmap 670 Cut Appliqu 672 Design Properties 66, 68 Embroidery Disk > Format 682 Embroidery Disk > Open 680 Embroidery Disk > Save As 684 New 36 Paper Tape > Punch 687, 748 Paper Tape > Read 686, 747 Save Bitmap As 253 Scan 246 Scanner Setup 750 Send 668 Stitch to Stitch Manager 738 file tree, refresh 701 file types EMT 396 stitch files 818 filename, definition 922 files, combining designs 297 fill stitches changing between fill and outline 338 switching between fill and outline 89 types 120, 121 filling holes, Complex Fill 409 fills adjust curved fill settings 478 adjusting curved fill settings 475 adjusting textured fill settings 449 applying curved fills 472, 473 creating curved fills 470471 creating fills with two curves 476 selecting textured patterns 448 filtering stitches by function 377 by stitch length 378 finding threads 146 Flatten tool 238 Flexi Split tool 448449 Florentine Effect adjusting settings 475 Florentine Effect tool ??475 folder, definition 922
folders adding 729 deleting 729 masking file types 713 organizing designs 729 refreshing/validating 701 renaming 729 searching 712 viewing zipped designs 698 fonts definition 923 see also alphabets and lettering Format dialog 682 Format Embroidery Disk dialog 682 formats, digitizer tablet formats 742 formatting, embroidery disks 682 fractional spacing applying 193 offset fraction 193 overview 192 Fractional Spacing tool 193 frame movement, Auto Jump 206 French dots, digitizing 403 Front-Back tool 236 functions displaying 53 End of Design 651 hiding 53 show/hide 762 Stop 651 traveling by 61 Functions dialog 377 Fusion Fill adding stitch angles 354 nominal stitch angle 115 overlapping rows 117 Fusion Fill tool 109, 112, 342
Penetrations 172, 421 Penetrations with Borers on 423 Process 195, 621 Properties 163, 173, 224, 385, 387 Sequin Mode 422 Team Names 573, 574, 576, 577 generating stitches 37 graphics acceleration, reducing 913 graphics packages, linking 249 grayscale images, converting to designs 287 grid changing display color 151 display 38 setting options 765 snap to 766 Group Members Add dialog 575 Group Name dialog 574 group name, creating 573 Group tool 315 grouping objects 315 with the Color-Object List 317 guide patterns Motif Fill 500 Program Split 441 guide runs offsetting 415 setting values 415 Gunold, opening PCH files 829
H
handles, See selection handles hard disk space, checking 889 hard disk, definition 923 hardware peripheral device settings 735 setting up digitizer tablets 739 setting up display monitor 751 setting up embroidery machines 743 setting up paper tape punches 748 setting up paper tape readers 747 setting up scanner 750 hardware acceleration, reducing 913 Hardware Setup command 735 dialog 736751 height, make objects same size 322 help viewing the online manual 6
G
gaps, offsetting filled holes 409 General tab dimensions 320 mirroring objects 328 positioning using coordinates 313 rotating objects 324 skewing objects 328 General toolbar TrueView 763 Generate Stitches tool 37 Generate toolbar Borers 423 Generate Stitches 37
V9
Index
944
See also troubleshooting help, accessing 5 hidden objects display in Color-Object List 81 hiding backdrops 254 bitmap images 254 outlines 52 stitches 52 vector drawings 230 holes creating in Complex Fill 114 digitizing boring holes 423 digitizing rings 404 digitizing with Complex Fill 109 filling holes 409 Holes dialog 409 hoops, frame out (Auto Appliqu) 416
I
icons, definition 923 icons, menu chart 811 identity code 42 image colors, matching threads 148 Image menu Crop Image 247 Crop Image with Polygon 247 Edit Image Using 249 Insert Drawing File 219221, 251 Reverse Curve 187 image preparation 257 cropping 247 non-outlined images 264 outlined images 267 using tools 262 image sharpening, scanning 246 images bitmaps 251 cleaning up 258 color reduction 258 cropping 247 dimming bitmaps 255 displaying bitmaps 254 editing 249 inserting bitmaps 251 noise filtering 261 non-outlined 264 outline sharpening 260 outlined vs non-outlined 258 outputting designs as 669 pasting bitmap images 252 preparation tools 261 saving bitmaps separately 253
scanning bitmaps 246 smoothing bitmaps 253 Input A adding stitch angles 352 creating borders 407 digitizing columns 106 Input A tool 87, 106 offset objects 407 tool 423 with Continuous Input 405 Input B adding stitch angles 352 creating borders 407 digitizing columns 107 Input B tool 87, 107 offset objects 407 Input C column width 104 corner fractions 105 creating offset objects 407 digitizing columns and borders 101 Fusion Fill tool 87 Input C tab 103 Input C tool 87, 100, 203, 341 input side 103 offsetting stitches 103 reversing stitch direction 187 round sharp corners 203 input methods 86 applying to drawing objects 338 Circle/Star 403 Complex Fill 109 Input A 106 Input B 107 Input C 100 Motif Run 488 Ring 404 Run and Triple Run 90 input methods, selecting 87 Input toolbar Auto Appliqu 344 Circle/Star 402, 403 Complex Fill 87, 109110, 342, 471476, 494 Fusion Fill 87, 109112, 342 Input A 87, 106, 423 Input B 87, 107 Input C 87, 100, 203, 341 Lettering 511, 537, 566570, 589, 594, 603 Manual 87, 89, 423 Manual with Sequins On 422, 423 Motif Run 341 Ring 404 Run 87, 91, 341, 423 Triple Manual 87, 89 Triple Run 87, 91, 341
Inputs A and B, converting to Complex Fill 338??, 342344 Insert Drawing File command 219, 251 Insert Function dialog 370 Insert menu Filled Holes 409 Offset Object 407 Photo Flash 287 inserting bitmap images 251 one design into another 297 one object inside another 296 stitches 364 vector drawings 219 Intersect tool 236
J
Jagged Edge applying 455 Jagged Edge tab 456 Jagged Edge tool 455 setting values 456 joining columns with underlay 182, 183 objects, See connectors joins, creating smooth joins 405 jumps adding 172 adding Empty Jumps Empty Stitches 171 Auto Jump 206 automatic connectors 163 digitizing with Needles Out 172 overview 161 using 369
K
kaleidoscope using with wreath 334 Kaleidoscope tool 334 keep/omit last stitch Input A 106 Input B 108 Keep Last Stitch tool 356 keep/omit motif (Motif Run) 492
L
last stitch, keep or omit 106, 108 layers removing extra stitching
V9
945
layers 410 layout Motif Fills 500 Program Split patterns 441 Layout dialog 527, 549554 length automatic split 204 calculation methods 208 Contour stitch 468 Edge Run and Center Run stitches 177 nominal 475, 478 preserving long stitches 206 Program Split stitch length 437 Run and Triple Run 94 Tatami 130 Tatami stitches (underlay) 180 travel runs 173 variable (Run and Triple Run) 95 Zigzag and Double Zigzag stitches 178 Length Calculation dialog 68 letter spacing, changing 527 lettering 2-color alphabets 563 adding to designs 24 adjusting individual letters 532 adjusting Satin stitch settings 556 adjusting stitch angles 559 adjusting Tatami stitch settings 557 adjusting Zigzag stitch settings 558 applying lettering art 569 Arc angle 551 As Digitized join method 564 automatic borders 572 Bottom Join method 564 changing line spacing 526 Closest Join method 564 color changes between letters 512 coloring 535 coloring on-screen 535 converting TrueType letters 589 creating embroidery fonts from TrueType 588 deleting stitch angles 560 edit envelopes 570 entering on-screen 511 entering via dialog 512 generating stitches 37 I-beam 535 join methods 563 keeping original stitch values 563 letter justification 519 letter spacing 527 line spacing 527
making bold 518 making italic 518 moving letters along baseline 525 names, See names removing envelopes 571 reshaping baseline 545 reshaping curved baselines 545 reshaping on-screen 534 rotating with Reshape tool 531 scaling with Select Object tool 530 selecting symbols 566 special characters and symbols 566 stitching sequence 561 Tilt angle 551 transforming with Reshape Object tool 533 transforming with Select Object tool 530 troubleshooting 902 word spacing 527 See also alphabets See also baselines lettering art, applying 569 Lettering Box 515, 516 Lettering tool 511, 537, 566570, 594603 Line Select tool 78 line spacing, changing 527 Line tool 215 lines digitizing with Run and Triple Run 90 drawing 215 split lines 450 Liquid Effect tool 476, 478 list box, definition 928 locale, changing languages 700 locate missing files 700 Lock command 316 locking objects 315 locking objects, with the Color-Object List 317 lockstitches, See Empty Stitch
M
machine connections, testing tablets 909 Machine Format Values dialog 647656 Standard 643644 machine formats advanced values 652 changing 642
checking 645 color change sequence 653 creating custom 643 creating custom format 643 customizing for specific designs 643 modifying values 645651 removing 646 selecting 40, 641 start of design/end of design 654 machine functions borers in/out 367 boring 369 checking control commands 645 clearing 374 color change 367, 368 displaying 53 editing 374 hiding 53 inserting manually 370 Jumps 369 jumps 367 sequins 370 sequins on/off 367 show/hide 762 speed 655 Stops 368 stops 367 thread trim 368 trims 367 types 368 using 370 Machine menu Select Machine Format 40, 641 Set Color 138 machines, See embroidery machines Make Letter command 600, 606 dialog 600602, 607 Make Motif 484 copying motifs between sets 486 dialog 484485 make objects same size 322 Make Program Split dialog 445 Make Properties Current tool 384 Make Same Size command 322 managing designs 693 manual digitizing for sequins 421 manual objects splitting 298 Manual tool 87, 89, 423 Manual tool with Sequins On 422 Manual, right-clicking 90 margins Jagged Edge 456 setting for underlays 181
V9
Index
946
masking files in folders 713 Match Drawing Color dialog 148 Match to Palette tool 273 maximum stitch length 475478 Measure command 38 measuring calculating stitch length 208 distances on-screen 38 status line 38 Melco CND conversion tables 821 CND files, color merging 633 digitizing for CND (tables) 826 StarLAN network settings 737 memory definition 925 menu chart icons 811 registering 752 Merge With Style dialog 392 merging styles 392 minimum stitch, Tatami 130 mirroring with kaleidoscope 334 mirroring motifs 482 mirroring objects around a specified axis 329 around X or Y axis 328 creating wreaths 334 using Object Properties dialog 328 Mirror-Merge toolbar Array 330 Kaleidoscope 334 Reflect 332 Wreath 334 missing files, locating 700 mitre corners 200 Modify Alphabet command 604 dialog 604605 Modify Thread Chart dialog 153154, 157160 modifying designs moving objects 312 with the Color-Object List 80 modifying objects aligning 313 changing entry point in Circle 355 changing entry point in Star 355 changing entry point of Circle 355 changing radius of Circle 349 changing size of Ring 350 grouping 315 locking 315 mirroring 328
moving Ring object boundary 350 resequencing objects by number 304 resequencing with Color-Object List 304 reshaping Circle objects 349 reshaping circles 349 reshaping circles to ovals 349 reshaping Ring objects 350 reshaping Star objects 349 rotating 323 scaling 318 skewing spacing evenly 314 using envelopes 569 viewing by color 56 modifying, designs 19 monitor, setting up 751 Motif Fill applying 494 filling shapes with 494 layout motifs 500 modifying layouts on-screen 500 Motif Fill tool 480, 494 motif size 498 motifs 1 & 2 499 offsets 497 rotating 500 selecting motifs 495 spacing 497 values 497 Motif Run creating offset objects 407 keep/omit motifs 492 Motif Run tool 341, 488 overview 488 reshaping 493 scaling 490 selecting motifs 489 spacing 491 tool 488 using 488 values 491 motif sets copy motifs between sets 486 Make command 484, 485 making 484 Select command 486, 488 motifs adjusting spacing on-screen 502 clipping to fit shape 497 creating new 484 deleting 488 inserting 480 laying out on-screen (Motif Fill) 500 mirroring 482 modifying 482
Motif Fill 494 offsetting patterns on-screen 503 overview 480 reference points 485 remove functions 485 rotating 482 rotating patterns on-screen 502 saving 485 scaling 482 scaling (Motif Fill) 498 scaling (Motif Run) 490 scaling patterns on-screen 502 select 490 selecting 480 selecting (Motif Fills) 495 selecting (Motif Run) 489 single 855 skewing patterns on-screen 502 spacing (Motif Run) 491 two-part 878 See also Motif Fill See also Motif Run mouse definition 925 Move Stitch dialog 375 moving circles 349 moving objects nudging 313 positioning with X:Y coordinates 313 with click-and-drag 313 moving stitches 365 multiple colorways, See colorways multiple stitch angles Input A 352 Input B 352
N
name groups adding individual members 574 adding multiple members 576 creating 573 names adding to design 578 creating groups of 573 editing 581 outputting designs 586 viewing 581 needle penetrations applying partition lines 429 decorative (Program Split) 432 digitizing split lines 450 digitizing with Needles Out 173 offsetting (Tatami) 427 random factor 431 random factor, Program
V9
947
Split 440 needle points 51 displaying 53 hiding 53 offsetting for Contour 468 show/hide 762 needle position marker 58, 300 nesting objects 296 network settings 737 ethernet 738 New Alphabet dialog 602 New Colorway dialog 142 new designs creating 36 New command 36 New tool 36 starting 10 new designs, creating 710 New dialog 37, 710 New Motif Set dialog 484 New Object Style dialog 390 New Thread Chart dialog 153 noise filtering, automatic digitizing 261 nominal stitch length 475478 non-outlined images 264 NORMAL template overview 395 reverting 398 using 36 nudging objects into position 313
O
object outlines changing display color 151 object properties apply current properties 386 changing defaults 387 changing for an object 384 changing stitch type 121 connectors 161 current 382, 383 default 383 defaults 382 existing 383 make current 384 overview 120 presetting 385 saving current 385 saving new defaults 387 saving to a template 398 styles 388 templates 395 Object Properties - Lettering dialog 512522, 537, 567,
581583, 589 603 Fill Stitch 519, 556559 Others 524 Object Properties dialog 385387 Auto Appliqu 415420 Complex Fill 119 Complex Fill/Fusion Fill 116, 117 Connectors 163169 Drawing Object 225 Embroidery 173 Fill Stitch 123134, 205, 428445, 458, 468, 496504 General 313, 320329 Image 254 Input C 103, 104 , 105, 204 Outline Stitch 9496, 97, 99, 490493 Photo Flash 288 object sequencing, automatic stitching 286 objects appliqu 413 applying underlay 175 backtracking 400 changing colors 137 changing the object properties 384 circles 401 connecting 161 converting 337 converting drawing objects 338 copying and pasting 294 creating duplicates 400 deleting 296 deselecting 72, 73 drawing 214 duplicating 295 editing 337 French dots 401 mirroring 328 moving 312 nesting 296 ovals 401 positioning 312 repeating 400 resequencing 299 reshaping 337 rings 401404 rotating 323 selecting 72 selecting colors 136 shaping 231 skewing 327 splitting 298 traveling by 60 See also modifying objects Offset Object command 407 dialog 407
offsetting appliqu cover stitches 419 appliqu guide runs 415 appliqu tacking 417 Auto Spacing (Satin) 126 Contour needle points 468 creating offset objects 407 filled holes (Complex Fill) 409 fractional spacing 193 Motif Fill patterns 497 objects 407 offset fractions (Tatami) 427 offsets setting for Input C objects 103 patterns on-screen 503 Program Split columns and rows 438 Program Split patterns on-screen 444 Program Split stitches 438 random factor (Tatami) 431 using partition lines 429 omit/keep last stitch Input A 106 Input B 108 omit/keep motifs (Motif Run) 492 online help 5 online manual 5 Open Design tool 709 Open dialog 35, 220, 251, 617, 629 , 668 Open Embroidery Disk dialog 680 Open From Embroidery Disk dialog 680 open shapes, drawing 215 open stitching, See color blending open stitching, See Trapunto open stitching, Trapunto 457 Open tool 35 opening Design Explorer 693 designs 708 opening designs 709 converting stitch designs 616 from DOS disk 680 from paper tape 686 Open tool 35 other formats 680 preview window 35 opening files object/outline recognition 615 recognition limitations 616 scaling 615 operating systems, supported 887 Options Auto Scroll dialog 767 command 766 View Drawing 256
V9
Index
948
Options dialog 55 Auto Scroll 767 General 405, 768772 Grid 765 766 View Design 762, 763 View Drawing 225, 230 Organize Favorites dialog 391 Organize Styles dialog 390395 organizing designs 729 outline files 611, 628 Outline Run digitizing artwork 278 Outline Run tool 278 outline sharpening automatic digitizing 260 outline stitches, Motif Run 488 outlined images, sharpening 267 outlines 51 changing between fill and outline 338 changing display color 151 creating borders for existing objects 407 displaying 52 reference points 88 selecting objects with 74 stitch types 121 switching between fill and outline 89 outputting designs 712 as bitmap images 670 as images 669 as vector drawings 669 punching paper tape 687 to different formats 642 ovals boring oval holes 424 digitizing 402 drawing objects 218 in circles (Ring) 404 in ovals (Ring) 404 reshaping circles to ovals 349 overlap stitching removing 410 overlap taper angle 117 overlapping cap corners 201 color blending 462 Complex Fill and Fusion Fill segments 117 mitre corners 201 overstitching, pull compensation 184 Overview Window tool 50
P
palette Add Colors to Palette 280 Match Colors to Palette 280 See also color palette palette colors, match to drawing 273 panning designs 49 paper tape opening designs 686 Punch command 687, 748 punching 687 Read command 686, 747 setting up punches 748 setting up readers 747 storing designs 685 parallel ports change mode in the BIOS 906 connection settings 737 resolving conflicts 906 partial cover appliqu 420 partition lines 429 angle 430 sequence 429 Paste Drawing As Bitmap command 252 Paste Drawing As Vector command 222 paste options Center at Current Stitch 770 Object Property Position 770 Start at Current Stitch 770 pasting bitmap images 252 designs 730 motifs 486 objects 294 Paste tool 294, 299 vector drawings 222 patterns creating patterns 444 editing 445 laying out on-screen (Motif Fill) 500 laying out on-screen (Program Split) 441 Program Split 432 scaling (Program Split) 434 scaling for Motif Fill 498 selecting (Program Split) 433 selecting for Motif Fills 495 See also motifs Penetrations tool 172 Penetrations tool with Sequin Mode 421 peripheral devices connection settings 735 setting up 735
See also hardware perspective effects, Accordion Spacing 460 perspective effects, Color Blending 462 Photo Flash command 287 photos, converting to embroidery 287 Pickout Run digitizing artwork 277 tool 277 pictures, See backdrops pixels, definition 927 planning design shapes 11 stitching sequence 11 Point & Stitch toolbar Match to Palette 273 Outline Run 278 Pickout Run 277 Tatami Fill 275 Tatami Fill without Holes 276 Turning Satin 274 Point mode, digitizer tablets 740 pointer position display 769 Pointer toolbar Backtrack/Repeat 400 Empty Stitch/Empty Jump 171 Keep Last Stitch 356 Line Select 78 Polygon Select/Line Select 78 Reshape Object 223, 345, 351, 352, 355, 472 , 473, 493, 533, 606 Select Object 74 Stitch Angles 354, 559 Stitch Edit 359, 362 Tie Off 170 Trim 171 pointers, definition 928 Polygon Select/Line Select tool 78 Polygon tool 216 Polyline tool 215 popup menu Convert Auto Appliqu 338 Convert Complex Fill 338 Convert Drawing 340 Convert Input C 338 Convert Motif Run 339 Convert Run 338 Convert Triple Run 338 using 33 ports parallel 737 serial 735 ports, definition 928 position coordinates 38 preparing, enlargement
V9
949
drawings 754 preserving long stitches 206 preset spacing values 760 preset styles, NORMAL template 395 previous view, restoring 51 Print Designs Options dialog 720 Print Options dialog 660665, 719 Print tool 659, 719 printer drivers, checking 907 printing backgrounds 663 catalogs 720 multiple colorways 663 production worksheets 719 Process dialog 195197, 621 tool 195, 197, 621 Product Differentiation Table 774 production information 70 production worksheets customizing 662 print options 660 printing 659 printing backgrounds 663 Text to Print 662 viewing 70 production worksheets, printing 719 Program Split adjusting spacing on-screen 443 applying 433 applying random factors 440 combination splits 435 creating patterns 444 editing patterns 445 filling shapes with 433 layout patterns 441 modifying layouts on-screen 441 offsetting 438 offsetting patterns on-screen 444 pattern size 434 Program Split tool 432 random factor 440 rotating patterns on-screen 443 scaling patterns on-screen 443 selecting patterns 433 skewing patterns on-screen 443 stitch values 437 program, definition 928 properties Properties tool 163, 173, 224, 385, 387 See also object properties Properties dialog 706 ES Explorer 705
Windows Explorer 65 properties, viewing 705 Publish Options dialog 721 publishing catalogs 721 puck, digitizer 759 pull compensation applying 185 overstitching amount 186 overview 184 Pull Compensation tool 185 recommended values 185 reversing stitch direction 187 Punch Options dialog 718 Punch tool 718 punching designs 717 from ES Explorer 718 paper tape 687 See also paper tape punches Purge Recover and Backup Directories dialog 908 push-pull effect, compensating for 117
Q
Quick Names dialog 576 Quick Reference Guide 787 , 808
R
random factor 431 Program Split 440 readers, See paper tape readers reassigning colors, to stitch files 637 Recognition - Advanced Options dialog 624 recoloring objects 137 records, viewing 705 Rectangle tool 217 rectangles, drawing 217 Redo tool 34 redoing commands 34 redraw, definition 929 redrawing designs 51 slowly 62 Reduce Colors dialog 264 tool 264 reference lines mirroring objects 329 rotating by specified angle 326 rotating relative to 325
reference points 88 motifs 485 origin 754, 755 rotating using 325 rotating using (exact angle) 326 rotation point 754755 scaling objects with 321 See also control points Reflect tool 332 refreshing display/folders/tree node 701 registering enlargement drawings 755 the menu chart 752 Remove Overlaps command 410 Remove Overlay Stitching command 410 Rename Alphabet dialog 604 Colorway dialog 144 Letter dialog 605 Object Style dialog 394 Thread Chart dialog 159 renaming designs 731 folders 729 styles 394 thread charts 159 repeating motifs (Motif Run) 488 objects 400 Resequence By Color command 301 By Number dialog 304 By Selects command 301 resequencing by color 301 by selection 301 objects 299 objects by Color-Object List 304 objects by number 304 objects, branching 293 using cut and paste 299 using the Color-Object List 302 Reshape Object tool 223, 345 473, 493, 533, 606 reshaping objects 337, 345 circles 349 lettering 545 Motif Run 493 Ring 350 Star 349 Reverse Curve 187 Reverse Curve command 187 reverse stitch direction 187 reverse stitching Backtrack and Repeat 400 Revert to Factory Settings
V9
Index
950
dialog 399, 907 revert, to NORMAL template 398 Ring objects changing entry point 355 changing size 350 digitizing 404 moving boundary 350 reshaping objects 350 Ring tool 404 Ring tool 404 rotating motifs 482 motifs in Motif Fills 500 objects 323 patterns on-screen 502 Program Split patterns on-screen 443 See also rotating objects rotating objects by an exact amount 324 by click-and-drag 323 from the Object Properties dialog 324 on-screen 323 using a reference line 325 using a reference line and angle 326 roughness, Jagged Edge values 456 rounding corners, Input C 203 row spacing, Program Split 436 Run Backtrack and Repeat 400 chord gap 94 creating offset objects 407 setting stitch length 94 stitch length 94 tool 87, 91, 341, 423 underlays 176 values 93 variable stitch length 95 Run and Center Run values 177 runs appliqu guide runs 415 automatic connectors 164 overview 162 setting Center Run and Edge Run values 177 travel runs 173
S
same size, objects 322 sample motifs, Motif Fill 500 sample patterns, Program Split 441 Satin
appliqu cover stitch 419 applying Auto Split 204 automatic spacing 124 digitizing with Input C 100 overview 121 Satin tool 121, 204 setting stitch count 127 spacing 123 splitting long stitches 204 Triple Satin 127 Satin tool 121, 556 Save As dialog 41, 144, 396, 670, 724, 726 Save Bitmap As command 253 Save Options dialog 586, 632 Save to Embroidery Disk dialog 684 Save tool 40 saving bitmap images as separate files 253 designs 40 designs to embroidery disk 677685 object properties to a template 398 Save tool 40 scaling enlargement drawing scale 757 motifs 482 motifs (Motif Fill) 498 motifs (Motif Run) 490 objects 318 Program Split patterns 434 Program Split patterns on-screen 443, 502 scaling objects by click-and-drag 319 make same size 322 on-screen 319 to an exact size 320 using Object Properties 320 using reference points 321 Scanner Setup command 750 scanning 243246 artwork 243, 246 bitmap images 246 color mode 244 preparing artwork 243 resolution 243 Scan command 246 setting up scanners 750 sharpening 246 tips 245 Screen Calibration dialog 751 searching for threads 146 security codes, entering 42
device messages 889 entering access codes 43 Security command 42 security device identifying 42 serial number 42 Security Device dialog 42, 43, 45 segments Complex Fill objects 110, 112 traveling by 59 segments, adjusting overlap 117 Select By Color dialog 56, 79 By Stitch Type dialog 80 Machine Format command 40, 641 Machine Format dialog 40, 641, 645 Motif dialog 481488 Object tool 74 Source dialog 750 selecting alphabets 513 Tatami backstitch 131 selecting designs 708 selecting objects bounding outline 74 by color 79 by stitch type 80 cancelling a selection 73 current object 76 grouping 315 resequencing by selection 301 Select Object tool 73 selecting a range 75 selecting all 72 selecting consecutive objects 74 selecting first and last 77 selecting multiple objects 74 selecting the next or previous object 77 using Line Select 78 using point and click 74 using Selects On 75 using SHIFT to select a range 74 while traveling 76 with Polygon Select 78 with the Color-Object List 80 selecting stitches 359 by needle point 359 cancelling a selection 363 selecting a range 362 several stitches 359 single stitch 359 using outline 360 using Selects On 362 while traveling through a design 362 with a bounding box 360
V9
951
with the Stitch List 360 selection handles rotating 323 scaling 313 selection tools Polygon Select/Line Select 77 Select Object/Select Current 74 Selects On 75, 362 Selects On tool 75, 362 Selects On, selecting a range of stitches 362 Send command 668 sequence checking 57 partition lines (Tatami) 429 resequencing 299 traveling 57 Sequence By Color dialog 301 Sequence dialog 561563 sequencing objects, automatic stitching 286 Sequin Mode tool 422 sequins, digitizing 421 serial devices, recommended settings 735 serial number identifying 42 security device 42 Serial Port Setup dialog 736 serial ports, connection settings 735 Set Color command 138 dialog 138 Set Security Device Options dialog 43 setting Always Check Design Integrity 771 Cross Hair Cursor 771 Cumulative Stitch Count 771 design view defaults 702 other options 771 pointer position display 768 Run Small Stitch Filter on Output 771 Show Design Source 771 user preferences 702 setting options pointer position display 769 settings adjusting view 700 settings, changing display 149 shading effects, Accordion Spacing 460 shading effects, Color Blending 462 Shaping toolbar
Back-Front 236 Combine 233 Divide 238 Exclude 236 Flatten 238 Front-Back 236 Intersect 236 Weld 233 Sharpen Edges tool 267 Sharpen Edges dialog 267 sharpening outlines 267 Shortcut to Windows Properties dialog 710 Shortening tool 189 shortening, See stitch shortening show designs 49 needle penetration points 51 outlines 51 Show Connectors 762 Show Drawing tool 254 Show Functions 762 Show Needle Points 762 stitches 51 Show Drawing tool 230231, 254255 Show Drawing Toolbar tool 32 Show Grid tool 38, 765 Show Input Toolbar tool 32 Show Needle Points tool 53 Show Outlines tool 52 Show Pointer Toolbar tool 32 Show Stitches dialog 378 Show Stitches tool 52 Show Travel Toolbar tool 32 Show True Colors command 224 Show Vertical toolbar Show Input toolbar 32 Show Pointer toolbar 32 Show Travel toolbar 32 Show Whole Design tool 49 skewing objects by click-and-drag 327 by exact angle 328 patterns on-screen 502 Program Split patterns on-screen 443 using Object Properties dialog 328 with rotation handles 327 slide show browsing designs 707 running 706 thumbnails and properties 706 viewing designs 706 Slow Redraw command 62
dialog 63 Small Stitches dialog 199 small stitches, removing 199 smart corners appliqu 413 applying 200 cap 200 mitre 200 round corners, Input C 203 setting values 201 Smart Corners tool 200 Smart Design dialog 280286 tool 280 Smooth Drawing Curves dialog 224 smooth joins, creating 405 snap to grid 766 software, definition 931 Sort dialog 714 tool 714 sorting design lists 703 designs 712 using details lists 714 using Sort 714 using View menu 713 Space Evenly command 314 spacing Accordion Spacing 459 fractional spacing 192 objects evenly 314 offset, Auto Spacing 126 open spacing (color blending) 462 open spacing (Trapunto) 457 preset 760 Program Split stitches 437 Tatami underlay 180 using Auto Spacing 124 Zigzag and Double Zigzag stitches 178 Special menu Alphabet > Make Letter 600606 Alphabet > Modify Alphabet 604 Convert TrueType Font 593 Hardware Setup 735 Motif > Make 484485 Motif > Select 486488 Options 224, 766 Options command 54 Security 42 Tablet 752, 755 Spiral Contour 466 in circles 402 Split Object command 298 splitting
V9
Index
952
combination splits 435 lines 450 objects 298 Split Object command 298 using Auto Split 204 using split lines 450 squares, drawing 217 stabilizing, with auto underlay 174 Standard backstitch 131, 132 Standard Contour 465 Standard toolbar Branching 304 Color-Object List 80, 302307 , 317 Copy 294 Cut 299 Group 315 Lettering Box 515 New 36 Open 35 Overview Window 50 Paste 294, 299 Print 659 Print Preview 70 Redo 34 Save 40 Selects On 75, 362 Show Connectors 53 Show Drawing 230231, 254255 Show Functions 53 Show Grid 38, 765 Show Needle Points 53 Show Outlines 52 Show Stitches 52 Show Whole Design 49 Stitch List 360, 374 Stitch to Machine 673 Team List 581, 583 , 584 TrueView 53 Undo 34 Ungroup 315, 606 Star objects changing entry point 355 digitizing 403 reshaping 349 StarLAN network settings 737 Start/End Design tool 60 starting, new designs 36 Stemstitch adjusting settings 98 stitch count (definition) 932 definition 932 stitch angles adding to Complex/Fusion Fill 354 adding to Input A 352 adding to Input B 352
Complex Fill/Fusion Fill 115 defining for Complex Fill 110, 112 lettering, adjusting 559 lettering, deleting 560 Stitch Angles tool 354355, 559 turning stitches, Input A 106 stitch density adjusting 195 adjusting for certain stitch types 197 with colorways 140 stitch designs conversion options 616 opening 616 processing into objects 616 stitch recognition 616 stitch direction, reversing 187 Stitch Edit tool 359, 362 stitch files overview 612 reassigning colors 637 supported formats 818 Stitch List dialog 360, 377 editing stitch coordinates 375 , 376 filtering by function 377 Stitch List tool 360, 374 using 378 Stitch Manager deleting embroidery machines 746 dialog 674 setting up embroidery machines 743 using 673 Stitch menu Define Style 389, 392 Stitch Options dialog 717 stitch recognition 616 advanced options 623 Stitch Selected Designs tool 717 stitch shortening applying 189 customizing 189 overview 188 setting values 189 Stitch to Machine tool 673 Stitch to Stitch Manager command 738 dialog 674, 738 stitch types Backstitch 96 changing 121 Contour 465 fill 121 Motif Fill 494 Motif Run 488
overview 120 Program Split 432 Satin 121 selecting 121 Stemstitch 98 Triple Satin 127 Stitch Types toolbar 3D Warp 504, 506 Accordion Spacing 459 Auto Jump 207 Auto Underlay 175, 309 Contour 465 E Stitch 87, 91, 121, 134 Flexi Split 447449 Florentine Effect ??475 Fractional Spacing 193 Liquid Effect 476, 478 Motif Fill 480, 494 Program Split 432 Pull Compensation 185, 186 Satin 121, 204, 556 Shortening 189 Smart Corners 200 Tatami 121, 128, 131, 426, 431, 557 Trapunto 457 User Defined Split 450 Zigzag 121, 133, 558 stitch usage, estimating total 68 stitch values Auto Spacing (Satin) 124 backstitch 131 cover appliqu 419 guide runs (appliqu) 415 length (Tatami) 130 setting Tatami offsets 426 setting Tatami values 128 stitch type 121 tacking (appliqu) 417 stitches 51 adjusting density 197 appliqu cover stitches 419 appliqu tacking 417 calculating stitch length 208 changing display color 151 Contour stitch values 468 deselecting 363 digitizing Run stitches 90 displaying 52 Edge Run and Center Run length 177 editing 365 generating 37 keep/omit last stitch 106108 Manual 89 multiple stitch counts (Triple Run) 96 preserving with Auto Jump 206 selecting 359
V9
953
selecting a stitch type 121 shortening 188 stitch types 121 Tatami underlay 180 travel runs 173 traveling by 58 Triple Manual 89 Zigzag and Double Zigzag length 178 See also editing stitches See also selecting stitches stitching removing layers 410 stitching designs selecting machine and options 717 using Stitch Manager 673 See also Stitch Manager stitching sequence 57 See also sequence storing designs embroidery disks 677 paper tape 685 Stream mode, digitizer tablets 740 strengthening auto underlays 174 styles applying 388 applying favorites 388 assigning favorites 391 creating new style 389 deleting 394 make object properties current 384 merging 392 modifying 393 overview 388 renaming 394 See also templates toolbar 388 Styles toolbar Apply Current Properties 386 Apply Style 388 favorite styles 388 Make Properties Current 384 switching, between fill and outline 89 Symbol Selection dialog 567, 572 system preferences automatic backup 767 automatic save 767 enabling 43 setting 762 viewing options 763 system requirements 887 system security, See security
T
Tab delimited files, exporting catalogs 724 Tablet command 752, 755 Tablet Setup dialog 752757, 758 tablets, See digitizing tablets tacking offsetting 417 setting values 417 Tape Manager dialog 687, 718, 747748 tape, See paper tape taper angle, overlapping segments 117 Tatami backstitch 131 Borderline backstitch 132 Diagonal backstitch 132 offset fractions 427 offsets 426 partition lines 429 random factor 431 setting underlay stitch angles 180 setting underlay values 180 Standard backstitch 132 stitch length 130 Tatami tool 121 values 128 Tatami Fill tool 275 Tatami Fill without Holes tool 276 Tatami tool 121, 128, 131, 426, 431, 557 Team List 581, 583, 584 Team Members dialog 578, 581, 583, 585 Team Names 573, 574, 576, 577 dialog 574578 See also names team names creating 577 creating separate designs 584 editing 581 outputting designs 586 viewing 581 templates creating 396 deleting 399 modifying 397 NORMAL 395 overview 395 reverting to original 398 saving object properties 398 using 397 using custom templates 36 using the NORMAL template 36 See also styles
templates, using custom templates 710 Test Disk dialog 679 textured fills adjusting settings 449 creating 447 selecting patterns and options 448 third-party applications 249 thread charts adding colors 155 copying colors 154 creating 152 deleting 160 modifying 157 modifying thread values 157 removing thread colors 158 renaming 159 thread colors 136 adding to thread charts 155 copying across thread charts 154 creating thread charts 152 matching 146 matching to image 148 mixing your own 156 modifying thread values 157 removing from thread charts 158 See also colors threads brands 156 code 156 color matching 146 density 156 finding 146 searching for 146 thickness 126 type 156 types 126 Tie In Values dialog 166 Tie Off tool 170 Tie Off Values dialog 167 tie-ins overview 162 setting automatic tie-ins values 166 tie-offs adding 169 methods 167 overview 162 setting automatic tie-off values 167 setting automatic trim values 168 Tie Off tool 170 title bar, definition 934 toolbars selecting commands 33
V9
Index
954
showing 32 Styles toolbar 388 Toolbars dialog 32 total stitch count, estimating 68 Transform dialog 321330 transforming letters, on-screen 533 transforming objects mirroring (reference line) 329 rotating (reference line and angle) 326 rotating (reference line) 325 scaling (reference points) 321 Transform command 321, 326 Transform Special command 325 Trapunto applying (Complex Fill) 458 overview 457 Trapunto tool 457 Travel by Color tool 61 by Function tool 61 by Object tool 60 travel runs 173 Travel toolbar Start/End Design 60 Travel 1 Stitch 58 Travel 10 Stitches 58 Travel 1000 Stitches 58 Travel by Color 61 Travel by Function 61 Travel by Object 60 Travel by Segment 59 traveling by 1 stitch 58 by 10 stitches 58 by 100 stitches 58 by 1000 stitches 58 by color 61 by function 61 by segment 59 by stitches 58 overview 57 selecting objects while traveling 76 selecting stitches 362 traveling tools Start/End Design 60 Travel by Color 61 Travel by Function 61 Travel by Object 60 travel by stitches tools 58 tree node, refresh 701 Trim tool 171 trims adding 169 overview 162 trim functions 648
Trim tool 171 Triple Manual tool 8791 Triple Run creating offset objects 407 repeating stitches 96 Triple Run tool 87, 341 variable stitch length 95 Triple Satin 127 troubleshooting 887 beeping sound 901 deleting files with purge recovery 908 design integrity 901 device connections 895 digitizer connections 909 embroidery disks 898 embroidery lettering 902 error code (-31) 891 ES Design Explorer problems 894 exception access violations 901 formatting Melco disks 898 general problems 897 HASP device driver not installed (-12) 891 HASP key is not HASP 4 (-3) 891 invalid access code 890 invalid product 892 Invalid product (when printing) 892 Missing files 893 missing toolbars 900 output 899 recovering backups 902 reverting to factory settings 907 security device messages 889 security device not found (-100) 891 security device not found (-3) 890 stitch display 899 testing embroidery disks 679 Timeout warning 892 Timeout warning when starting ES Design Explorer 894 TrueView 899 Unable to run software 893 units of measurement 898 Unrecoverable error when opening design 893 Unrecoverable error when opening ES Designer 893 unrecoverable errors 893 unwanted trims 900 TrueType fonts 588 conversion stitch methods 594 converting complete alphabets 593 converting to embroidery
fonts 588 TrueView Options dialog 763 TrueView 51 selecting options 763 thread thickness 763 TrueView tool 763 viewing in 53 Turning Satin digitizing artwork 274 Turning Satin tool 274 turning stitches applying fractional spacing 193 applying stitch shortening 189 Contour 465 corner fractions 105 digitizing with Input A 106 digitizing with Input B 107 Input C 105 turning-off automatic tie-ins 166 automatic tie-offs 167 automatic trims 168 fractional spacing 193 pull compensation 185 TWAIN 750 two-color alphabets 563
U
underlays Center Run 176 choosing suitable underlays 176 Edge Run 176 setting Auto Underlay margins 181 See also Auto Underlay Undo tool 34 undoing commands 34 Ungroup tool 315, 606 ungrouping objects 315 Unlock command 316 unlocking objects 316 unrecoverable errors, troubleshooting 893 Use Object Style dialog 389 User Defined Split applying 451 digitizing objects with 450 tool 450 User Preferences command 702 dialog 702 setting 702
V9
955
V
validating folders 701 values Auto Jump 208 automatic connectors 163 pull compensation 185 Run and Triple Run 93 selecting stitch types 121 Tatami underlay 180 travel runs 173 See also object properties variable stitch length (Run and Triple Run) 95 vector drawings automatic digitizing 214 convert to embroidery 338 converting artwork 272 digitizing 338 displaying 230 importing and exporting 219 inserting 219 outputting designs as 669 pasting 222 reshaping 223 smoothing 223 View Design tab setting display options 54 View menu Measure 38 Pan command 49 Previous View command 51 Redraw command 51 Slow Redraw 62 User Preferences 702 View By Color command 56 Zoom 1-1 48 Zoom Box 48 Zoom Factor 48 Zoom In 2X 48 Zoom Out 2X 48 view settings, adjusting 700 viewing backdrops 254 colorways 64 design properties 705 designs 48 information online 5 objects by color 56 options, See user preferences slide show 707 viewing design options connectors 762 functions 762 needle points 762 viewing designs connectors 53 display options 51 displaying hidden objects 81
functions 53 needle points 53 outlines and stitches 52 panning 49 redrawing 51 redrawing slowly 62 restoring previous view 51 setting display options 54 setting options 763 show all 49 TrueView 53 TrueView options 763 zooming 48
Zoom In 2X command 48 Zoom Out 2X command 48 Zoom Factor dialog 48
W
Weld tool 233 width, make objects same 322 WinZip tool 726 word spacing, changing 527 worksheets, See production worksheets Wreath tool 334 wreaths kaleidoscope effect 334 objects as wreaths 334
X
X and Y coordinates, setting 313 X co-ordinates definition 935 see width
Y
Y co-ordinates definition 935 see height
Z
Zigzag underlay, setting 178 using with boring holes 423 Zigzag tool 121, 133, 558 zipped designs extracting 728 viewing in folders 698 Zoom Zoom 1-1 command 48 Zoom Box command 48 Zoom Factor command 48
V9
Index
956

Man Enu

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Man Enu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wilcom ES

Wilcom ES Online Manual

new USB Port Dongle

new Parallel Port Dongle

Wilcom ES product models

ES45 Creative Digitizing

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Digitizer Menu Chart

! ES Designer ! ES Design Explorer.

Using online help

To use online help

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Viewing the online manual

To view the online manual

! Select Help > Online Manual.

Linking to the Wilcom website

To link to the Wilcom website

! Select Help > Wilcom Web Page.

Conventions used in the manual

For a complete list of keyboard shortcuts, see Quick Reference Guide.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Selecting design objects

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Introduction to Embroidery Digitizing

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Design shapes and stitching sequence

design looks good shapes, colors, balance

details are clearly defined

shapes are filled with correct fill and outline stitches

stitches are angled to match shapes

lettering is clear and easy to read

The stitched-out design should also have the following characteristics:

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Introduction to Embroidery Digitizing

Selecting design objects

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Fill and outline stitches

Run for lines Tatami for large shapes

Satin for narrow shapes

Introduction to Embroidery Digitizing

Colorways and thread charts

Connecting embroidery objects

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Improving stitch quality

with Auto Split

with Auto Jump

Digitizing with artwork

Introduction to Embroidery Digitizing

Digitizing with vector drawings

vector drawing converted to embroidery design

Digitizing with bitmap images

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Preparing images for automatic digitizing

areas recolored and outlines improved ready for automatic digitizing

! The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize

Introduction to Embroidery Digitizing

! The Smart Design feature automatic digitizing is intended for people

! Photo Flash lets you create embroidery designs directly from

digitized with Photo Flash

Combining and resequencing objects

Wilcom ES Online Manual